Sharp MX-2615N-3115N SM

TopPage
SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMX3115/S1E
DIGITAL FULL COLOR

MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
MODEL MX-2615N/3115N
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
[6] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[7] TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[9] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
[11] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
[12] SERVICE WEB PAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
[13] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
[14] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
[15] TOOL LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
This document has been published to be used

SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING [8] FIRMWARE UPDATE

1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 1. Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 2. Update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
3. Note for installing site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i [9] MAINTENANCE
4. Note for handling PWB and electronic parts . . . . . . . . . .ii 1. Works necessary when executing
5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii the maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the transfer unit, 2. Display of maintenance execution timing. . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
the developing unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii 3. Maintenance list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
7. Screw tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE 1. Disassembly of Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
1. System diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 2. Disassembly and assembly of each unit . . . . . . . . . 10-22
2. Option list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
[11] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING
[2] SPECIFICATIONS 1. HDD/SD card memory map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
A. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2. Necessary steps when replacing the PWB,
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS HDD and the SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
1. Supply system table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 3. HDD/SD card SIM format operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 [12] SERVICE WEB PAGE
3. Definition of developer/drum life end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
4. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 2. Details and operation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
5. Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 [13] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 1. Operation panel section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
1. External view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 2. Scanner section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
2. Internal structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 3. Manual paper feed section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
3. I/F connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 4. Tray paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
4. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 5. Paper registration section
(Paper transport section) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
5. Sensors and detectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
6. Paper exit section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
6. Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
7. ADU section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
7. Clutches and solenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
8. LSU section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
8. Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
9. Process section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
9. Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
10. Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-48
10. Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
11. RSPF section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-51
11. Fans and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
12. Fan and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-57
12. Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
13. Operations and specifications of counters . . . . . . . . 13-58
13. PWB/Memory device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
14. Fuses and Thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 [14] ELECTRICAL SECTION
15. Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 2. Power line diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9
1. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 3. Actual wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
2. Details of adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 4. Signal list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-24
[15] TOOL LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
[6] SIMULATION
1. General and purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
2. Starting the simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
3. List of simulation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
4. Details of simulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
[7] TROUBLESHOOTING
1. Error code and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
2. JAM and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
3. Image send communication report code . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
4. Dial tone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Symbols in this manual
The lists of symbols used in this manual are shown below.
The meaning of each symbol described in the table must be understood for proper servicing.
1. Symbols used for notes and Symbol Meaning

OK/GOOD Indicates a correct
cautions procedure or result in an
adjustment, etc.
Symbol Meaning
NO GOOD Indicates a wrong
CAUTION Indicates a general
procedure or result in an
caution item.
adjustment, etc.
NOTE Indicates a note.

HIGH TEMP Be careful of a high
temperature in the IMPORTANT Indicates an important
fusing section. item.
REFER Indicates a reference

page, etc.
HIGH VOLTAGE Be careful of an electric
shock where a high NEW Indicates a new
voltage is applied such technology, a new
as the high voltage method, or a new item.
PWB, the main charger, EXAMPLE Indicates a description
and the process section. using an example.
DANGER Indicates danger.
2. Symbols used in the work

contents
HANDLE WITH Indicates a part which
CARE requires special care for
Symbol Meaning (Work content)
handling such as the
Adhesion Indicates that a seal, etc.
HDD, and the LSU.
is attached.
INHIBIT Indicates inhibit.
Adjustment Indicates an adjustment.
NO Be careful to keep away

ELECTROSTATIC from static electricity.
CHARGE (PWB's and electric Measure a Indicates that a
parts) dimension or a dimension or a length is
NO DUST, Be careful not to touch size. measured.
FINGER PRINT, directly, such as the
Apply grease Indicates that grease is
DIRT, SCRATCH optical section, the
to be applied.
photoconductor, and the
DV roller.
Also be careful not to Apply conductive Indicates conductive
scratch. grease grease is applied
NO SCRATCH
Cleaning Indicates clean with a

(Dry) dry cloth.
NO LIGHT Be careful not to expose
to light, such as the
Cleaning Indicates clean with a
photoconductor, and the
(Wet) cloth dampened with
test chart.
water.
NO SOLVENT Be careful not to use a
solvent in cleaning, etc. Cleaning Indicates clean with
(Alcohol) alcohol.
NO DISASSEMLE Do not disassemble.

Not serviceable. Cleaning Indicates cleaning is
Example CCD unit. (Blower) done with a blower/
brush.
Symbol Meaning (Work content) Symbol Meaning (Work content)
Cleaning Indicates that cleaning is Engage the pawl.
(Vacuum) performed with a
vacuum cleaner.
Cleaning Indicates that cleaning is Screw lock Indicates that a screw is

(Brush) performed with a brush. secured with adhesive.
Oil Indicates that oil is Unlock

applied to lubricate.
Apply powder. Indicates that setting Turn OFF the

power is applied to the power.
photoconductor drum,
the transfer belt, etc.
Replace Indicates that a part is Disconnect the
replaced. power plug.
Check Indicates that a check

(replacement,
adjustment, cleaning) is
3. Symbols used for kinds of parts
performed.
Symbol Meaning (Kinds of parts)
Cut Indicates that cutting is
performed. Maintenance Indicates a part which is
part replaced in a maintenance
procedure.
Loosen Indicates that a screw is
loosened. Consumable Indicates a consumable
part part such as a
photoconductor,
Connect Indicates that a developer, a transfer belt,
connector is connected. etc.
Waste part Indicates a waste part
which is consumed but
Disconnect Indicates that a
excluded from the above
connector is
consumable parts. (A
disconnected.
roller, a seal, etc.)
Remove a Indicates that a harness Unit part Indicates a part which is
harness. is unsecured. designated as a unit.
Included part Indicates a part which is
included in the package
Attach a harness. Indicates that a harness
is secured.
Remove a clamp. 4. Symbols used for additional

descriptions
Attach a clamp. Symbol Meaning
View from the Indicates from which
top angle the drawing is
View from the viewed.
Release a hook. Indicates that a hook is
released. bottom
View from the
front
Fix a hook. Indicates that a hook is
fixed. View from the
back
Disengage the
pawl.
MX-3115N
NOTE FOR SERVICING •6HUYLFH0DQXDO

Do not damage, break, or stress the power cord.
Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not stress, forc-
ibly bend, or pull the power cord.
1. Precautions for servicing
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
• When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, the • Keep the power cable away from a heat source.
network cable, and the telephone line from the machine, except Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
when performing the communication test, etc.
It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
• Do not place liquids or foreign metallic objects inside the
• There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use
machine.
extreme care when servicing.
It may cause a burn.
• Do not touch the power cord, insert the phone jack, operate the
• There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may
machine, or perform service on the machine with wet or oily
cause an electric shock. Be careful when servicing. hands.
• Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective It may cause an electric shock.
material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path.
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams.
3. Note for installing site
• When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to
squeeze you hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other Do not install the machine at the following sites.
driving sections. • Place of high temperature, high humidity, low temperature,
• Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled. low humidity, place under an extreme change in temperature
and humidity.
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch inside
the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or an injury. Paper may get damp and form condensation inside the machine,
causing paper jam or copy dirt.
• When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink exces-
sively. Do not get them in the eyes. For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
If toner, developer, or ink enters your eyes, wash it away with described later.
water immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary.
• The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to dam-
age fingers when servicing.
• Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise, toner
may ignite and burn you.
• When replacing a lithium battery on a PWB, only use the speci-
fied replacement battery.
If a battery of different specification is used, it may cause a
• Place of extreme vibrations
machine malfunction or breakdown.
It may cause a breakdown.
• When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to it,
be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may otherwise cause a machine breakdown or malfunction.
CAUTION
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING
(200V series only)
2. Warning for servicing

• Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that • Poorly ventilated place
meets the specified voltage and current requirements. An electrostatic type copier will produce ozone.
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so as
shock. not to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of such a
It may cause a fire or an electric shock. machine may produce an ozone smell. Install the machine in a
• If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormal well ventilated place.
smell, interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.
• Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage
occurs without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may result.
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening,
grounding must be made.
• When connecting the grounding wire, never connect it to the fol-
lowing points.
x Gas tube
x Lightning conductor
x A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
grounding object by the authorities.
x Grounding wire for telephone line
It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.
MX-3115N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

• Place of direct sunlight. 4. Note for handling PWB and electronic
Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may parts
undergo qualitative change.
When handling the PWB and the electronic parts, be sure to
It may cause a breakdown or output quality problems.
observe the following precautions in order to prevent against dam-
age by static electricity.
• When in transit or storing, put the parts in an anti-static bag or an
anti-static case and do not touch them with bare hands.
• Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

The organic photo-conductor (OPC) drum used in the machine
may undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as
ammonium.
Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier and blue
print machine may result in poor quality output.
• When and after removing the parts from an anti-static bag (case),
use an earth band as shown below:
• Put an earth band to your arm, and connect it to the machine.
• Place of much dust

When dust or contaminants enters the machine, it may cause a
breakdown or poor quality output.
• Place near a wall

The machine will require ventilation.
If ventilation is not proper, poor output or machine failure may
result.
11-13/16"
• When repairing or replacing an electronic part, perform the
(30cm) procedure on an anti-static mat.
11-13/16" 17-23/32"
(30cm) (45cm)
• Unstable or irregular surface

If the machine is dropped or tips over, it may cause injury or
machine malfunction.
Use an optional desk or an exclusive-use desk.
When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and lock
the casters.
MX-3115N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU Screw kinds and tightening torques
Normal screws, set screws (including step screws)
When repairing or replacing, be sure to observe the following
items.
Tightening Tightening Tightening
• When repairing or replacing the LSU, be sure to disconnect the Screw Material to be
torque torque torque
diameter fixed
power plug from the power outlet. (Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
• When repairing or replacing the LSU, follow the procedures M2.6 Steel plate 0.8 - 1.0 8 - 10 0.6 - 0.7
described in this Service Manual. M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
• When checking the operations after repairing the LSU, keep all M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
the parts including the cover installed and perform the operation Tapping screws (for iron)
check.
• Do not modify the LSU. Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
• When visually checking the inside of the machine for the opera- torque torque torque
diameter fixed
(Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
tion check, be careful not to allow laser beams to enter the eyes.
M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
If the above precaution is neglected or the LSU is modified, ones (Plate thickness
safety may be at risk. 0.8mm or above)
M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the (Plate thickness
0.8mm or above)
transfer unit, the developing unit M3 Steel plate 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
When handling the OPC drum unit, the transfer unit, and the devel- (Plate thickness
oping unit, strictly observe the following items. less than 0.8mm)
M4 Steel plate 1.2 - 1.4 12 - 14 0.9 - 1.0
If these items are neglected, a trouble may be generated in the (Plate thickness
copy and print image quality. less than 0.8mm)
Drum unit
Tapping screw (for plastic)
• Avoid working at a place with strong lights.
• Do not expose the OPC drum to lights including interior lights for Tightening Tightening Tightening
a long time. Screw Material to be
torque torque torque
diameter fixed
• When the OPC drum is removed from the machine, cover it with (Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
light blocking material. (When using paper, use about 10 sheets M3 Plastic resin 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
of paper to cover it.) M4 Plastic resin 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
• Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign
material on the OPC drum surface.
Transfer unit
• Be careful not to leave fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign
material on the transfer roller, primary transfer belt, and the sec-
ondary transfer belt.
Developing unit
• Be careful not to leave fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign
material on the developing unit.
7. Screw tightening torque

The screws used in this machine are largely classified into three
types.
These types are classified according to the shape of the screw
grooves and use positions.
The table below shows the types of the screws and the tightening
torques depending on the use position.
When tightening the screws for repair or maintenance, refer to the Name in the manual Model name
table. 26cpm machine MX-2615N
31cpm machine MX-3115N
However, for the other conditions of tightening screws than speci-
fied on this table, or under special circumstances, the details are
described on the separate page. Refer to the descriptions on such
an exception.
Especially for the screw fixing positions where there is an electrode

or a current flows, use enough care to tighten securely to avoid
loosening.
MX-3115N NOTE FOR SERVICING - iii

MX-3115N
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE 6HUYLFH0DQXDO
1. System diagram
0;1
0;1
',*,7$/)8//&2/25
08/7,)81&7,21$/6<67(0
0;751
(;,775$<81,7
0;)1 0;31$%&'
),1,6+(5 381&+02'8/( 0;/7
/21*3$3(5)((',1*75$<
0;'( 0;'( 0;'(

67$1'[6+((7 67$1'[6+((7 67$1'[6+((7
3$3(5'5$:(5 3$3(5'5$:(5 3$3(5'5$:(5
0;3. 0;38; 0;3) 0;); $568 0;):;

36(;3$16,21.,7 ;36(;3$16,21.,7 %$5&2'()217.,7 )$&6,0,/((;3$16,21 67$0381,7 ,17(51(7)$;
.,7 (;3$16,21.,7
0;)58 0;86; 0;86; 0;86 0;86 0;86$

'$7$6(&85,7<.,7 6+$53'(6./,&(16( 6+$53'(6./,&(16( 6+$53'(6./,&(16( 6+$53'(6./,&(16( 6+$53'(6./,&(16(
.,7 .,7 .,7 .,7 .,7
0;$0; 0;$0; 0;$0; 0;81$ 0;81$ 0;81$

$33/,&$7,21 $33/,&$7,21 (;7(51$/$&&2817 6KDUS26$1HWZRUN6FDQQHU 6KDUS26$1HWZRUN6FDQQHU 6KDUS26$1HWZRUN6FDQQHU
,17(*5$7,2102'8/( &20081,&$7,2102'8/( 02'8/( 7RRO/LFHQVH.LW 7RRO/LFHQVH.LW 7RRO/LFHQVH.LW
0;81$ 0;81+$ 0;.%1 0;(% $569

6KDUS26$1HWZRUN6FDQQHU 6KDUS26$1HWZRUN6FDQQHU .(<%2$5' 86%:,5(/(66/$1 67$03&$575,'*(
7RRO/LFHQVH.LW 7RRO/LFHQVH.LW $'$37(5
MX-3115N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1

2. Option list
Model name Name MX-2615N MX-3115N Remarks
Document feed system ----- REVERSING SINGLE PASS FEEDER STD STD
Paper feed system MX-DE12 STAND/1x500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER OPT OPT
MX-DE13 STAND/2x500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER OPT OPT
MX-DE14 STAND/3x500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER OPT OPT
MX-LT10 LONG PAPER FEEDING TRAY OPT OPT
Paper exit system MX-TR13 N EXIT TRAY UNIT OPT OPT
MX-FN17 FINISHER OPT OPT
MX-PN11A PUNCH MODULE OPT OPT
MX-PN11B OPT OPT
MX-PN11C OPT OPT
MX-PN11D OPT OPT
Printer expansion ------ PRINTER EXPANSION KIT STD STD
MX-PK11 PS3 EXPANSION KIT OPT OPT
MX-PUX1 XPS EXPANSION KIT OPT OPT
MX-PF10 BARCODE FONT KIT OPT OPT
Image send expansion MX-FX11 FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT OPT OPT *1
AR-SU1 STAMP UNIT OPT OPT
MX-FWX1 INTERNET FAX EXPANSION KIT OPT OPT
Authentication/Security MX-FR40U DATA SECURITY KIT OPT OPT
Application/Solution MX-USX1 SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT
MX-USX5 Sharpdesk 5 license kit OPT OPT
MX-US10 SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT
MX-US50 SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT
MX-USA0 SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE KIT OPT OPT
MX-AMX1 APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE OPT OPT
MX-AMX2 APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MODULE OPT OPT
MX-AMX3 EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE OPT OPT
MX-UN01A Sharp OSA Network Scanner Tool OPT OPT
1 License Kit
5 License Kit
10 License Kit
50 License Kit
MX-UN1HA Sharp OSA Network Scanner Tool OPT OPT
100 License Kit
Other MX-EB13 USB Wireless LAN Adapter OPT OPT *1
MX-KB14 N KEYBOARD OPT OPT
STD: Standard equipment

OPT: Installable option
*1: No support for some destinations.
MX-3115N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 2

MX-3115N
Manual paper feed
[2] SPECIFICATIONS 6HUYLFH0DQXDO
26cpm 31cpm
machine machine
A. Basic specifications Paper size
Mono- Mono-
Color Color
(1) Engine Specification chrome chrome
A3, 11" x 17", 8K 14 14 15 14
Photo-conductor OPC (Diameter: Black: I30mm Color (Y/M/C): B4, 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13", 16 16 17 16
kind I30mm x3 lines) 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 13.5"
Copying method Electronic photo (Laser) A4, 8.5" x 11", 16K 26 23 26 23
Developing system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush development B5 26 26 26 26
Charging system Charged saw-tooth method A4R, 16KR, 8.5" x 11"R 19 19 20 19
Transfer system Intermediate/secondary transfer belt B5R, 7.25" x 10.5"R 19 19 20 20
Separation system Natural separation method A5R, 5.5" x 8.5"R 19 19 20 20
* Sub separation claw is equipped. A3W, 12" x 18" *2 13 13 14 13
Cleaning system Counter blade OHP (A4, 8.5" x 11") 12 11 12 11
Fusing system Belt method OHP (A4R, 8.5" x 11"R) 9 9 9 9
Waste toner No toner recycling system / Waste toner bottle Extra 13 13 14 13
disposal system Envelope (Monarch, Com-10, DL, 8 7 8 7
Toner supply during N/A C5, Chokei-3, Chokei-4,
operation Youkei-2,Youkei-4,
Outer Color Pastel white, natural wave design Kakugata-2,Kakugata-3)
Heavy paper (A3, 11 x 17, 8K) 7 6 7 6
(2) Engine speed (ppm) Heavy paper 7 6 7 6
Tray 1 - 4 (B4, 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13",
8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 13.5")
26cpm 31cpm Heavy paper (A4, 8.5" x 11", 16K, 12 11 12 11
machine machine B5)
Paper size
Mono- Mono- Heavy paper 9 9 9 9
Color Color
chrome chrome (A4R, 16KR, 8.5" x 11"R, B5R,
A3, 11" x 17", 8K 14 14 15 15 7.25" x 10.5"R)
B4, 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13", 16 16 17 17 Heavy paper (A5R, 5.5" x 8.5"R) 12 11 12 11
8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 13.5" Heavy paper (A3W, 12” x 18”) 7 6 7 6
A4, B5, 8.5" x 11", 16K 26 26 31 31 Heavy paper (Extra) 7 6 7 6
A4R, 16KR, 8.5" x 11"R, B5R, 19 19 20 20 Heavy paper (Post Card HIGH) *1 12 12 12 12
7.25" x10.5"R
Heavy paper (Post Card LOW) *1 7 7 7 7
A5R, 5.5" x 8.5"R 19 19 20 20
Extra 13 13 14 14 *1: Switched by the service simulation setting. Postcard is set Low
Heavy paper (A3, 11" x 17", 8K) 7 7 7 7 before shipment.
Heavy paper 7 7 7 7
(B4, 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13", (3) Printable area
8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 13.5")
Heavy paper (A4, B5, 8.5" x 11", 12 12 12 12 A3 Wide *1 297 x 420mm 12" x 18" *1 279 x 432mm
16K) A3 293 x 413mm 11" x 17" 275 x 425mm
Heavy paper 9 9 9 9 B4 253 x 357mm 8.5" x 14" 212 x 349mm
(A4R, B5R, 8.5" x 11"R, A4 206 x 290mm 8.5" x 13.5" 212 x 336mm
7.25" x 10.5"R, 16KR) B5 178 x 250mm 8.5" x 13.4" 212 x 333mm
Heavy paper (A5R, 5.5" x 8.5"R) 12 12 12 12 A5 144 x 203mm 8.5" x 13" 212 x 323mm
Heavy paper (Extra) 7 7 7 7 Postcard 96 x 141mm Executive 180 x 260mm
8K 266 x 383mm 8.5" x 11" 212 x 272mm
16K 191 x 263mm 5.5" x 8.5" 136 x 209mm
Custom Min: 96mm x 141mm Max: 297mm x 432mm
*1: The printable area for A3W/12" x 18" must be as large as the
A3/11" x 17" page full bleed (299 x 450mm).
Void area Lead edge: 4mm or less

Image loss Rear edge: 2 mm or more, and 5 mm or less
Total of the lead edge and the rear edge: 8mm or less
FR total: 4mmr2mm or less
MX-3115N SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 1
(4) Engine resolution Scanner Single: 50-sheet/min. Single: 50-sheet/min.
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit) (200 x 200dpi, 8bit)
Resolution*1 Copy Writing Double: 20-page/min. Double: 20-page/min. (200
600 x 600dpi (200 x 200dpi, 1bit) x 200dpi, 8bit)
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi Original setup Upward standard (1 to N feeding standard)
Print Writing direction
600 x 600dpi Original standard Center standard (Rear one-side standard for
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi position random feeding)
Gradation *2 Copy Writing Original transport Sheet-through method
(256 levels) 600 x 600dpi x 4bit method
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi Original size Standard size
Print Writing Inch-1: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
PCL: 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
600 x 600dpi x 1bit Inch-2: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
600 x 600dpi x 4bit 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi Inch-3: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11",
PS: 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
600 x 600dpi x 1bit AB-1: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
600 x 600dpi x 4bit A4R, B5, B5R, A5
9,600 (equivalent) x 600dpi AB-2: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5
*1: Resolustion: 600dpi (default) AB-3: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
*2: The Dither and Error Diffusion methods using 8 bit input will be A4R, A5, 8K, 16K, 16KR
performed. AB-4: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
A4R, B5, B5R, A5
(5) Scanner section AB-5: 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 11", A3, B4, A4,
a. Resolution/Gradation A4R, B5, B5R, A5
Long 1000 mm (Monochrome binary only)
Scanning Monochrome Color paper Internet Fax 600 x 600 dpi: Max. 800 mm.
Resolution (dpi) Platen 600 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi When scan 400 dpi or more, long paper
600 x 400dpi is not available.
600 x 300dpi (default) Mix paper feed Enabled
RSPF 600 x 600dpi 600 x 600dpi (Same series,
600 x 400dpi (default) same width paper)
Exposure lamp White LED Random feeding Enabled
(feeding of different Only the following combinations of 2 size types are
Reading gradation 10bit
types / different allowed:
Output gradation BW: 1bit
widths) A3 and B4; B4 and A4R; A4 and B5; B5 and A5;
Grayscale: 8bit
and 11-inch and 8.5-inch. AMS available. 2-sided
Full Color: each color RGB 8bit
scanning is disabled during random feeding.
b. Document table Original copy Single:
weight Thin paper: 9 - 13 lb bond (35 - 49 g/m2)
Type Document table fixed system (Flat bed) Plain paper: 13 - 32 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
* Thin paper mode (39 pages/minute (A4, 8.5" x
Scanning area 297 x 432mm
11", 600 x 400dpi) / 26 pages/minute (A4, 8.5" x
Original standard Left rear reference
11", 600 x 600dpi) is set up for the thin paper.
position
Duplex: 13 - 28 lb bond (50 - 105 g/m2)
Detection Yes
Max. loading Max. 100 sheets (21lbs Bond, 80g/m2), or Max.
Detection size Automatic detection (One type of detection unit to capacity of height: 1/2 inch, 13mm or less
be switched for software destination) documents
Dehumidifying Supplied as a service parts Un-acceptable OHP, second original paper, tracing paper, carbon
heater (Scanner originals for paper, thermal paper, paper with wrinkles, folds, or
section) feeding. breakage, pasted paper, cutout document,
document printed with ink ribbon, documents with
(6) Document feeder perforation other than 2- or 3-holes (Perforated
document by punch unit is allowed.)
Type RSPF (Reversing single pass feeder)
Detection Yes
Scan speed Monochrome Color (A4/8.5" x 11")
Paper detection Auto detection
(A4/8.5" x 11")
size
Copy Single: Single:
Paper feeding Right hand feeding
50-sheet/min. 36-sheet/min.
direction
(600 x 400dpi, 4bit) (600 x 600dpi, 4bit)
Finish stamp Option
36-sheet/min. Double:
(600 x 600dpi, 4bit) 17-page/min.
Double: (600 x 600dpi, 4bit)
20-page/min.
(600 x 400dpi, 4bit)
17-page/min.
(600 x 600dpi, 4bit)
FAX Single: 50-sheet/min. NA
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Double: 20-page/min.
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Internet FAX Single: 50-sheet/min. NA
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
Double: 20-page/min.
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
(7) Paper feed section b. Extra paper capacity
a. Basic specifications Paper type Paper feed tray Manual feed tray
Postcard NA 20 sheets
Type Standard 1-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper feed
Envelope NA 20 sheets
tray
OHP NA 20 sheets
Full option 4-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper feed
tray Heavy paper 200 sheets 40 sheets
Dehumidifying Service parts (Supported by kit) Tab paper NA 20 sheets
heater Glossy paper NA 1 sheet
Others NA 1 sheet
Tray Tray 1 Manual paper feed tray

Paper capacity 500 sheets 100 sheets
Plain paper
(80g/m2)
Paper size Refer to the separate table of feedable paper type.
Paper size No (Guide adjustment Yes
detection and size input)
Paper type settings Yes
Changing of paper Switched by users
size
Universal handle Yes -
(With the handle lock
mechanism)
Default Paper Size A4 (8.5" x 11") -
Setting
Paper remaining Paper empty and 3 Only detection of paper
quantity detection steps (100%, 67%, 33%, empty
and paper empty)
Paper size display Yes -
window
c. Size of paper which can be fed
Main Manual
Optional Drawer
unit tray paper
Paper feed section
feed
Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4
tray
Paper 12" x 18" (A3W) - - - - Yes
size 11" x 17" Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 14" (216 x 356) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 13.5" (216 x 343) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 13.4" (216 x 340) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 13" (216 x 330) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 11" Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 11"R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
7.25" x 10.5"R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
5.5" x 8.5"R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A4R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
B5R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
A5R Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
8K Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
16K Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
16KR Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
JPC *1 - - - - Yes
Envelope - - - - Yes
Custom Yes Yes - - Yes
Long paper - - - - Yes
Width: 125-297mm
Length: 433-1200mm
Main Manual
Optional Drawer
unit tray paper
Paper feed section
feed
Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4
tray
Paper Thin paper 13-16lb bond (55-59g/m2) No No No No Yes
type Plain paper 16-28lb bond (60-105g/m2) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Recycled paper Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Color paper Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Letter head Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pre printed Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pre Punched Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 28lb bond - 110lb index (106-209g/m2) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
110lb index-140lb index (210-256g/m2) - - - - Yes
Envelope 75-90g/m2 - - - - Yes
OHP Transparency - - - - Yes
Label - - - - Yes
Tab paper - - - - Yes
Grossy paper - - - - Yes
User settings 1 - 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
(8) Paper exit section

a. Exit Capacity
Exit location Center Right side (option)

Exit Capacity 400 sheets (A4/8.5" x 11": 80g/m3) 100 sheets (A4/8.5" x 11": 80g/m3)
b. Size of paper which can be discharged
Main unit center tray Right exit

Paper exit section Duplex
Exit tray Off set tray
Paper 12" x 18" (A3W) - Yes - Yes
size 11" x 17" Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 14" (216 x 356) Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 13.5" (216 x 343) Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 13.4" (216 x 340) Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 13" (216 x 330) Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 11" Yes Yes Yes Yes
8.5" x 11"R Yes Yes Yes Yes
7.25" x 10.5"R - Yes Yes Yes
5.5" x 8.5"R Yes Yes Yes Yes
A3 Yes Yes Yes Yes
B4 Yes Yes Yes Yes
A4 Yes Yes Yes Yes
A4R Yes Yes Yes Yes
B5 Yes Yes Yes Yes
B5R Yes Yes Yes Yes
A5R Yes Yes Yes Yes
8K Yes Yes Yes Yes
16K Yes Yes Yes Yes
16KR Yes Yes Yes Yes
JPC - Yes Yes Yes
Envelope - Yes - -
Long paper - Yes - -
Width: 125-297mm
Length: 433-1200mm
Paper Thin paper 13-16lb bond (55-59g/m2) - Yes Yes Yes
type Plain paper 16-28lb bond (60-105g/m2) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Recycled paper Yes Yes Yes Yes
Color paper Yes Yes Yes Yes
Letter head Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pre printed Yes Yes Yes Yes
Pre Punched Yes Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 28lb bond - 110lb index (106-209g/m2) Yes Yes Yes Yes
110lb index - 140lb index (210-256g/m2) - Yes Yes Yes
Envelope 75-90g/m2 - Yes - -
OHP Transparency - Yes - Yes
Label - Yes - Yes
Tab paper - Yes - -
Grossy paper - Yes Yes -
User settings 1 - 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes
(9) Operation panel (12) Warm-up time
Size 7 inch Main power SW
Type Dot matrix LCD, touch panel Warm-up time*1 18sec. or less
Display dot number 800 x 480 dots (WVGA) Pre heat Yes
LCD back-light LED lamp back-light system Jam recovery time*2 37sec. or less
(10) Controller board *1: Result may change depending on conditions.

*2: Conditions: Leave the machine for 60 sec. after door open,
CPU ARM11: 600MHz
ARM9: 400MHz/during 1W energy save mode: 75MHz standard condition, Polygon stops.
PCL accelerator QorIQ P1013 800MHz
Interface
B. Copy functions
Ethernet 1port
Interface 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T (1) First copy time
Support TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, EtherTalk
Protocol 26cpm machine 31cpm machine
USB 2.0 (high 2port Engine Mono- Mono-
Color Color
speed) (host) (Simultaneous use of the front/rear ports is enable.) chrome chrome
USB 2.0 (high 1port Platen 5.9 sec. 8.1 sec. 5.8 sec. 7.9 sec.
speed) (device) RSPF 9.1 sec. 11.6 sec. 9.1 sec. 11.6 sec.
USB-HUB (host) Internal: 4port
• For Front USB Port (2) Job Speed
• For Rear USB Port
• For IC Card Reader 26cpm machine 31cpm machine
• For Key Board Engine Mono- Mono-
Color Color
Serial I/F 1port chrome chrome
Memory See the section "Memory/Hard disk". 26cpm 26cpm 31cpm 31cpm
S to S
Memory slot Main unit: On Board (100%) (100%) (100%) (100%)
PCL : 1 slot (1 slot: empty)
(11) Memory/Hard disk
SD For Image process For Printing *1

HDD*2
card On Board On Board SLOT
320GB
4GB 2GB (STD) 1GB (STD) 2GB (OPT)*3
(STD)
*1: Memory capacity for printer controller

*2: HDD capacity depends on procurement and sourcing status.
*3: You need to add the memory when connecting the XPS Expan-
sion KIt. (Local purchase)
Memory area Boot/Program area

(SD card) FAX data storage area
1GB
C. Printer function
(1) Printer driver supported OS
Sharp Advanced
OS Custom PCL6 Custom PS PPD PC-FAX
Printing Language
Windows XP CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
XP (x 64) CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows Server 2003 CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2003 (x 64) CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Vista CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Vista (x 64) CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2008 CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Server 2008 (x 64) CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 7 CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Windows 7 (x 64) CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM CD-ROM
Mac X 10.4.11 No No CD-ROM No No
X 10.5-10.5.8 No No CD-ROM No Web
(2) PDL emulation/Font
PDL (Command) Installed font Option font

PCL6 compatibility STD European outline font = 80 styles Barcode font = 28 styles
Line printer font (BMP) = 1 style
Postscript3 compatibility OPT - European outline font = 136 styles
D. FAX function (6) Dial
(1) Transmission method Manual dialing To be entered by 10-key, # key, * key
Re-dialing The previous 8 items (max.) can be saved, and
Transmission time Less than 3 sec (Super G3) one of them can be selected.
Less than 7 sec (G3 ECM) One-touch call is available.
Compression/ MH, MR, MMR, JBIG One-touch dialing 1000 items including the group dialing items
expansion system (Fixed to ECM for MMR or JBIG.)
Group dialing 1000 items including the one-touch dialing
Modem speed 33.6kbps o 2.4kbps automatic fallback items
Resolution 8 x 3.85 line/mm, 8 x 7.7 line/mm, Program dialing Max. 48 items
8.15.4 line/mm, 16 x 15.4 line/mm (Standard
Chain dialing Max. 64 digits including one-touch dialing,
memory is used for transmit/receive.)
10-key dialing, and pause.
Intercommunication G3/Super G3: Standard (V.34, V.17, V.33, V.29,
Dial search Alphabet order search, User index groups
V.27ter)
Quick search Yes
Communication line General telephone line (PSTN), ISDN (When TA
LDAP search Yes
is installed.) Private Branch Exchange (PBX)
Sub address Yes
ECM Yes
Password Yes
(2) Number of Support Line Memory box registration Yes
Standard 1 line * LDAP: Lightweight Directory Access protocol

Expansion Not provided (7) Memory for Transmit/Receive
(3) Transmission Mode FAX transmission data HDD
FAX reception data SD card
RSPF/OC Yes (Switching during the reading is not feasible)
transmission switching (8) Function
(4) Image Quality/Image Process Transmit Calling function Yes
function Requires the frequency
Half tone reproduction Equivalent to 256 levels (Valid only when setting for each destination.
monochrome document is scanned.)
PBX function Germany, France only
Exposure adjustment Auto / Manual (5 steps)
Memory transmit Yes (Definable destinations :
FAX quality selection Standard (8 x 3.85 lines/mm (203.2 x 97.8dpi)) 94 destinations)
Fine (8 x 7.7 lines/mm (203.2 x 195.6dpi))
On-hook Yes
Super Fine (8 x 15.4 lines/mm (203.2 x 391dpi))
Quick online transmit Yes
Ultra Fine (16 x 15.4 lines/mm (406.4 x 391dpi))
Half-tone (Combination with normal character is Direct transmit Yes
invalid.) Manual transmit Yes
Auto re-call mode Yes
(5) Record Size Time indication function Yes
Sequential broadcasting Yes
Max. record width 293mm function
Record size (AB series) F code interface Yes
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R broadcasting indication Only one interface station
(Inch series) function can be specified.
11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, F code interface Yes
8.5 x 5.5R broadcasting function
F code confidential send Yes
* If the document length exceeds A3 size, it is divided and printed.
function
* For printing the list, A5R and 8.5 x 5.5R cannot be used. Polling Yes
Even with another company
machine
Sequential polling function Yes
Even with another company
machine
F-code polling Yes
Bulletin board Yes
F code bulletin board Yes
function
Auto reduction transmit Yes
A3 o B4, A3 o A4, B4 o A4
Rotation transmit Yes
Counterclockwise rotation of
90 degrees
Duplex transmit Yes
Document transmit from OC Yes
function
Transmit Long length original transmit Only when RSPF is used. Special FAST Yes
function Transmission is enable up to function Facsimile Automated Service
1000mm. Technology
Mixed documents function Only when RSPF is used. Time adjust function Yes
Zoom transmit Yes Summer time ON/OFF
2 in 1 transmit Yes PC-FAX Yes
Card shot transmit Only when transmitting from Color mode No
OC Sender registration function Yes
Thin paper scan function Available except for duplex Number of registration: 1 for
scan standard sender name and
Edge erase transmit function Yes address. And 18 sender
Only for the fixed sizes names can be registered.
Job build Yes Default destination setting No
Page division transmit Yes Unauthorized scan Yes
Cover No prevention function
Index No Filing-each-page function No
Transmit message adding No Re-operation function Yes
function User account function Yes
Receive Auto receive Yes Max. 200 items additionally
function to the default
Manual receive Yes
Counter function Yes
DRD call function Distinctive Ring Detection
North America: Standard,
Pattern 1 – 5
Australia/New Zealand/Hong E. Image send function
Kong: ON/OFF (TEL/FAX)
Memory receive Yes (1) Mode
Transfer function Yes
Number of registration: 1 Mode Scanner Internet Fax/Direct SMTP
item suport mode E-mail/FTP server/SMB
Specified receive function Yes (Number of registration) Desktop/USB Memory
Rejection numbers: Max.50
items
(2) System environment
Receive data print condition Yes
Copier memory (Local memory) Printer memory (System Memory)
function
1GB (Standard) 512MB (Standard)
Receive Receive data staple setting/ Yes
function Copy number setting
(3) Support System
Rotation receive Yes
Output by clockwise rotation
of 90 degrees Mode Scanner Internet Fax/Direct
Divided receive Yes SMTP
Divided print is not made in Compression server SMTP/SMTP-SSL POP3 server
duplex mode. protocol FTP(TCP/IP)/FTPS SMTP server
Duplex receive Yes SMB*1 ESMTP server
F-code confidential receive Yes HTTP/HTTPS
Special Print hold Yes
*1 Network environment for SMB
function Document Admin Yes
Inbound Routing Yes (4) Supported image
Sender registration function Yes
Sender print function Yes
Mode Scanner Internet Fax/Direct
On-hook dialing function Yes SMTP
Retransmit function Yes Format / method Mono 2gradation : Monochrome :
Pause function Yes TIFF/PDF/Encrypted TIFF-FX (TIFF-F/
Pause time is 1 – 15 sec. PDF/XPS TIFF-S)
Sound volume setting Yes Color/Grayscale : Color/Grayscale :
function Color TIFF/JPEG/PDF N/A
Tone pulse select function Tone, Pulse, Auto Encrypted PDF/XPS
(North America/Taiwan) Compression method Mono 2gradation : Monochrome :
* For the other destinations, Non-compression G3 MH / G4 MMR
set with the soft switch. G3 MH / G4 MMR Color/Grayscale :
External phone connection Yes Color/Grayscale : N/A
Memory remaining capacity Yes JPEG (high/middle/
check function Only the integral part is low)
displayed.
Back up Yes (5) Specification of Addresses
Registered data read/write Yes
function Mode Scanner Internet Fax/Direct
Report/List Yes SMTP
Destination check function Yes Max. number of Total 1000 keys
Broadcasting destination Yes registrations FTP/Desktop/SMB address shall be the same as
display function those for other modes. Maximum 1000 addresses
Transmit job change function Yes shall be able tobe registered
Save-energy function Yes Number of addresses Max. 500 addresses
can be registered in
Line monitor display function Yes
one Group key
Mode Scanner Internet Fax/Direct Moving time to pre- 1 minutes (default)
SMTP heat mode
Number of addresses 5000 addresses (included in the 1000 keys) Recovery time from 10 sec.
can be registered by pre-heat mode
inputting directly in Moving time to sleep 1 minutes (default)
Group keys mode * Printer mode: 10sec.(default)
Registration using the YES YES Recovery time from 18 sec.
LDAP search results sleep mode
Import/export of the YES YES
address book *1: Power switch ON, dehumidity heater OFF
Disable registering YES YES
destination from
operation panel G. Dimensions and Weight
Disable registering YES YES
destination on Web Outer dimension (Included W608 x D642 x H834mm
page operation panel)
Disable regisstration Yes Yes Footprint W608 x D642mm (excluded bypass tray)
using network W876 x D642mm (included bypass tray)
scanner tool Dimension occupied by the W928 x D642mm
Disable [RESEND] on Yes Yes machine (When the bypass
Image send mode tray is extended)
Disable selection from Yes Yes Weight 76.2kg (200V)
address book Main Unit (including 75.6kg (100V)
photoreceptor / not including
Disable direct entry Yes Yes
consumables)
(6) Function
H. Ambient conditions
Function Scanner Internet Fax/Direct
(Humidity)
SMTP
Job Build YES YES 85%
Slow scan mode YES YES
60%
Mixed size original YES YES
Original count YES YES AREA 1
Edge erase Yes (Edge/Side) Yes (Edge/Side)
Dual page scan YES YES
Card shot Yes (Ration: 63-400%) Yes (Ration: 63-400%)
20%
Time specified send Yes Yes AREA 2
Blank page skip Yes N/A 5%
Filling Yes Yes
Quick file Yes Yes 5 °C
Multi shot N/A Yes 10 °C 30 °C 35 °C (Temperature)
Preview Yes Yes
F. Power consumption
The full configuration can be operated with the rated power source.
Maximum rated power 100 V 200 V

Consumption*1 1.44 kW 1.84 kW
Energy consumption Not applicable
rate
Network/Fax waiting 1W –
power consumption Condition:
• No USB port
• The network
protocol is TCP/IP
only.
• The Ethernet
connection partner
supports 10M/
100MBASE or 10M/
100M/1000MBASE
and auto
negotiation setting.
* Exclude the case of
use Fax and
Network at once)
* Norht America
Default : Wake up
mode
MX-3115N
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS 6HUYLFH0DQXDO
1. Supply system table

(1) North America
Quantity in
Item Content Life Model name Remarks
collective package
Toner cartridge Toner cartridge (Black toner) x1 24K MX-36NT-BA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area
(Black) coverage 5%
(Reference: 20K for A4/Letter
6%)
Toner cartridge Toner cartridge (Cyan toner) x1 15K MX-36NT-CA 10 * Life: A4/Letter size at area
(Cyan) coverage 5%
Toner cartridge Toner cartridge (Magenta toner) x1 15K MX-36NT-MA 10
(Magenta)
Toner cartridge Toner cartridge (Yellow toner) x1 15K MX-36NT-YA 10
(Yellow)
Developer (Black) Developer (Black developer) x1 840K MX-36NV-BA 10 Developer
rotaion Standard Printable number
Developer Developer x1 840K MX-36NV-SA 10 BK:26cpm120K / 31cpm 135K
(Cyan/Magenta/ (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow: 3 colors/set) rotaion CMY:26/31cpm 120K
Yellow: 3 colors/set) (Developer (each colors)) Maximum Printable number
BK:26cpm 140K / 31cpm 155K
CMY:26/31cpm 140K
Drum OPC drum x1 840K MX-36NR-SA 10 Drum unit

rotaion Standard Printable number
Drum unit OPC drum unit (Process unit + OPC drum) x1 840K MX-36NU-SA 10 BK:26cpm120K / 31cpm 135K
Color identification seal (B/C/M/Y) x 1 each x1 rotaion CL:26/31cpm 120K
Charger cleaner x1 Maximum Printable number
BK:26cpm 140K / 31cpm 155K
CL:26/31cpm 140K
2. Maintenance parts list

(1) North America
Quantity in
Model
Item Content Life collective Remarks
name
package
Fusing belt kit MX-361FB Fusing belt x1 200K 10
Fuser belt guide collar x2
Pressure roller kit MX-230LH Fusing roller x1 200K 10
Pressure roller x1
Web cleaning kit MX-360WB Web roller x1 200K 10
Web guide shaft x2
Web pressure roller x1
Web pressure roller bearing x2
Primary transfer belt kit MX-230B1 Primary transfer belt AR x1 200K 10
Primary transfer blade kit MX-230TL Primary transfer blade AR x1 200K 10
PTC kit MX-230CU PTC unit x1 200K 10
Secondary transfer belt kit MX-230B2 Secondary transfer belt D3 x1 300K 10
Filter kit MX-361FL Ozone filter x1 300K 10
Toner collection container MX-230HB Toner collection container (with LSU cleaner x 2) x1 50K 10 5% coverage for each
color; 25% color ratio
Main charger kit MX-230MK Main charger unit x1 Drum 10
Cleaning gum AS AR x1 840K
Cleaning blade AR x1 Rotation
Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge x3 5000 times 20 For MX-FN17
x3
Finish stamp cartridge AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge x2 — 20
Primary transfer belt unit MX-230U1 Primary transfer belt unit (For servicing rotation) x1 — 1
Secondary transfer belt unit MX-230U2 Secondary transfer belt unit (For servicing rotation) x1 — 1
Fusing unit MX-361FU1 Fusing unit (For servicing rotation: Heater lamp 120V) x1 — 1
When shipping, the parts are packed in the unit of 10 sets. In the market, however, they are treated in the unit of 1 set.
Model name: Composed of the parts of 1 set
MX-3115N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 1

3. Definition of developer/drum life end * Standard printable quantity means the printing quantity under the
specified developer/drum count by using the specified test data
When the developer/drum counter reaches the maximum printable with the color ratio of 30% under the following intermitment sheet.
count.
When the developer/drum rpm reaches the specified count. 26cpm : 3 sheets
When either of the above reach the specified count, it is judged as 31cpm : 4 sheets
life end.
Developer/drum Developer/drum
counter rotation
In an actual case, the ratio of monochrome output and color output
may differ greatly. Standard print- Maximum print- Monoc Color
able quantity able quantity hrome
When data of mixed documents (monochrome and color) are out-
Monoc Color Monoc Color 840K 840K
put, monochrome document data may be output in the color mode Rotation Rotation
hrome hrome
in order to prevent against fall in the job efficiency. (ACS auto color
26cpm 120K 120K 140K 140K
selection).
31cpm 135K 120K 155K 140K
In addition, when correction or warm-up operation is performed as
well as output operation, the developer and the drum rotates.
Therefore, the developer/drum consuming level cannot be deter-
mined only by the copy/print quantity. When, therefore, the rpm 4. Production number identification
reaches the specified amount, it is judged as life end.
To check the developer/drum life, use SIM22-13.
A. OPC drum
However, when the copy/print quantity is large and the developer/

drum counter reaches the maximum printable quantity even if the
rpm does not reach the specified amount, it is judged as life end.
The table which shows the relation between the stanrdard printable
quantity and the maximun printable quantity in the specified rpm
amount is as follows.

The lot number is comprised of 10 digits. Each digit indicates the

content as follows.
The number is printed on the flange on the front side.
1: Number
For this model, this digit is 2.
2: Alphabet
Indicates the model conformity code.
3: Number
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
4: Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the production month.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
5/6: Number
Indicates the day of the production date.
7: Number
Indicates the day of the month of packing.
8/9: Number
Indicates the day of the packing date.
10: Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.

B. Developer 5. Environmental conditions
BK Humidity (RH)
85%
C. M .Y 60%
20%
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10°C 30°C 35°C

Temperature
The lot number is 8 digits in length. Each digit indicates the content
as follows.
Standard environmental Temperature 20 – 25 °C
The number is printed on the right under side of the back surface of conditions Humidity 65 r 5 %RH
the developer bag. Usage environmental Temperature 10 – 35 °C
conditions Humidity 20 – 85 %RH
1: Alphabet
Indicates the production factory. Storage period Toner/Developer: 24 months from the
manufactured month (Production lot) under
2: Number
unsealed state
Indicates the production year.
Drum: 36 months from the manufactured month
3/4: Number
under unsealed state
Indicates the production month.
5/6: Number
Indicates the production day.
7: Hyphen
8: Number
Indicates the production lot.
C. Toner cartridge
The label indicating the management number is attached to the
side of the toner cartridge.
: Unit code/Model name

: Color code (Black: BK /Cyan: CY /Magenta: MA /Yellow: YE)
: Destination
: Skating
: Production place
: Production date (YYYYMMDD)
: Serial number
: Version number

MX-3115N
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE

6HUYLFH0DQXDO
1. External view

No. Name Function/Operation

1 Automatic document feeder This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals.
Both sides of 2-sided originals can be automatically scanned.
2 Front cover Open this cover to switch the main power switch to "On" or "Off" or to replace a toner cartridge.
3 Output tray (center tray) Output is delivered to this tray.
4 Operation panel This is used to select functions and enter the number of copies.
5 Exit tray unit (right exit tray)*1 When installed, output can be delivered to this tray.
6 Finisher*1 This can be used to staple output. A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output.
7 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
8 Keyboard*1 Use this as a substitute for the soft keyboard displayed on the touch panel.
When not being used, it can be stored under the operation panel.
9 Tray 1 This holds paper.
10 Tray 2 (when a paper drawer is installed)*1 This holds paper.
*1: Peripheral device.
MX-3115N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 – 1

A. Automatic document feeder and document glass


1 Paper feed roller This roller rotates to automatically feed the original.
2 Document feeding area cover Open this cover to remove an original misfeed or clean the paper feed roller.
3 Original guides These help ensure that the original is scanned correctly.
Adjust the guides to the width of the original.
4 Document feeder tray Place originals in this tray. 1-sided originals must be placed face up.
5 Original exit tray Originals are delivered to this tray after scanning.
6 Scanning area Originals placed in the document feeder tray are scanned here.
7 Original size detector This detects the size of an original placed on the document glass.
8 Document glass Use this to scan a book or other thick original that cannot be fed through the automatic document feeder.

2. Internal structure

No. Name Function/Operation Note

1 Toner cartridges These contain toner for printing.
When the toner runs out in a cartridge, the cartridge of the color that ran
out must be replaced.
2 Fusing unit Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto the paper.
The fusing unit is hot. Take care not

to burn yourself when removing a
paper misfeed.
3 Transfer belt During full color printing, the toner images of each of the four colors on Do not touch or damage the transfer
each of the photoconductive drums are combined together on the belt. This may cause a defective
transfer belt. image.
During black and white printing, only the black toner image is transferred
onto the transfer belt.
4 Right side cover Open this cover to remove a misfeed.
5 Paper reversing section cover This is used when 2-sided printing is performed. Open this cover to
remove a paper misfeed.
6 Bypass tray Use this tray to feed paper manually.
When loading a large sheet of paper, be sure to pull out the bypass tray
extension.
7 Main power switch This is used to power on the machine.
When using the fax or Internet fax functions, keep this switch in the "on"
position.
8 Waste toner box This collects excess toner that remains after printing.
9 Waste toner box release lever Move this lever when you need to release the waste toner box lock to
replace the waste toner box or clean the laser unit.
10 Handle Pull this out and grasp it when moving the machine.
11 Right cover of paper drawer Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 2, tray 3 or tray 4.
(when a paper drawer is installed)
12 Paper tray right side cover Open this to remove a paper misfeed in tray 1.
13 Right side cover release lever To remove a paper misfeed, pull and hold this lever up to
open the right side cover.

3. I/F connectors

7HEN THE FAX EXPANSION KIT IS INSTALLED


1 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the machine.
2 USB connector (B type) Supports USB 2.0 (Hi-Speed).
A computer can be connected to this connector to use the machine as a printer.
For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
3 LAN connector Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network.
For the LAN cable, use a shielded type cable.
4 Service-only connector
This connector is for use only by service technicians.

Connecting a cable to this connector may cause the machine to malfunction.
Important note for service technicians:
The cable connected to the service connector must be less than 3 m (118") in length.
5 Power plug
6 Extension phone socket When the fax function of the machine is used, an extension phone can be connected to this socket.
7 Telephone line socket When the fax function of the machine is used, the telephone line is connected to this socket.

4. Operation panel

02).4
2%!$9
$!4!
)-!'% 3%.$
,).%
$!4!
,/'/54


1 Touch panel Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display.
Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of operations.
When a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected item is highlighted. This provides confirmation as you
perform an operation.
2 PRINT mode indicators • READY indicator
Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.
• DATA indicator
This blinks while print data is being received and lights steadily while printing is taking place.
3 Numeric keys (10-key) These are used to enter the number of copies, fax numbers, and other numerical values.
These keys are also used to enter numeric value settings (except for the system settings).
4 [CLEAR] key ( ) Press this key to return the number of copies to "0".
5 IMAGE SEND mode indicators • LINE indicator
This lights up during transmission or reception of a fax or Internet fax. This also lights during transmission of an
image in scan mode.
• DATA indicator
This blinks when a received fax or Internet fax cannot be printed because of a problem such as out of paper.
This lights up when there is a transmission job that has not been sent.
6 Stylus pen This can be used to touch a key displayed on the touch panel.
7 [COLOR START] key Press this key to copy or scan an original in color. This key cannot be used for fax or Internet fax.
8 [BLACK & WHITE START] key Press this key to copy or scan an original in black and white. This key is also used to send a fax in fax mode.
9 Main power indicator This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position.
10 [POWER] key ( ) Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
11 [LOGOUT] key ( ) Press this key to log out after you have logged in and used the machine.
When using the fax function, this key can also be pressed to send tone signals on a pulse dial line.
12 [#/P] key ( ) When using the copy function, press this key to use a job program. When using the fax function, this key can be
used when dialling.
13 [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) Press this key to return to the initial operation state.
Use this key when you wish to cancel all settings that have been selected and start operation from the initial state.
14 [STOP] key ( ) Press this key to stop a copy job or scanning of an original.
15 [POWER SAVE] key ( ) / indicator Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off mode to save energy.
The [POWER SAVE] key ( ) blinks when the machine is in auto power shut-off mode.

5. Sensors and detectors
3#/6
300$ 30%$ 30,3
300$ 30,3
3073
3/#$
300$ 300$
/#37
-(03
4&$
4&$
0/$
0/$
(0/3 3(0/3 !00$

0/$ 0240$
(,0#$
4(?53?).
$37?!$5
7%"%.$
2%'3?&)-'$3 4(?5-?).
2%'3?2 4(?,-?).
45$?#, 45$?+
$(0$?#, $(0$?+
!00$
45$
00$ -0,$
4#3?9 4#3?- 4#3?# 4#3?+
-073
4(?,35
-0%$
(5$?-4(?-
"$ 00$ 4.&$
#,5$ #0&$
#0%$
#33 $37?#
#30$
Signal name Name Type Function/Operation Note

1TUD_CL Transfer mode detector (CL) Transmission type Detects separation of the transfer belt and the transfer
mode.
(Detection is made by combination of 1TUD_CL/1TUD_K
signals.)
1TUD_K Transfer mode detector (BK) Transmission type Detects separation of the transfer belt and the transfer
mode.
(Detection is made by combination of 1TUD_CL/1TUD_K
signals.)
2TUD Secondary transfer position Transmission type Detects the position (separation) of the secondary transfer
detector unit.
APPD1 ADU paper transport detector 1 Transmission type Detects paper entry and paper pass in the ADU.
APPD2 ADU paper transport detector 2 Transmission type Detects paper pass in the ADU transport roller 8.
BD Laser beam detector Pin diode Detects laser beams (monitor.)
CLUD1 Paper feed tray upper limit Transmission type Detects the upper limit of the paper lift up.
sensor (Paper feed tray 1) (Paper feed tray 1)
CPED1 Paper empty sensor Transmission type Detects paper empty. (Paper feed tray 1)
(Paper feed tray 1)
CPFD1 Paper transport detector Transmission type Detects paper pass in the paper transport section of the
(Paper feed tray 1) paper feed tray 1.
CSPD1 Paper remaining quantity sensor Transmission type Detects the paper remaining quantity. (Paper feed tray 1)
(Paper feed tray 1)

Signal name Name Type Function/Operation Note
CSS11 Paper feed tray size detector Tact switch Detects the paper size.
(Paper feed tray 1) Detects closing of the paper feed tray. (Paper feed tray 1)
DHPD_CL OPC drum rotation sensor (CL) Transmission type Detects rotation and the phase of the OPC drum (CL).
DHPD_K OPC drum rotation sensor (BK) Transmission type Detects rotation and the phase of the OPC drum (BK).
DSW_ADU ADU paper guide open/close Transmission type Detects open/close of the ADU paper guide.
detector
DSW_C1 Transport cover open/close Transmission type Detects open/close of the transport section cover. (Paper
detector (Paper feed tray 1) feed tray 1)
HLPCD Fusing pressure detector Transmission type Detects the fusing pressure state.
HPOS (SHPOS) Shifter home positions sensor Transmission type Detects the shifter home position.
HUD_M/TH_M Temperature/humidity sensor Thermistor Detects the temperature and the humidity. (For the Analog detection
process control)
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Transmission type Detects the scanner home position.
MPED Paper empty sensor Transmission type Detects presence of paper. (Manual paper feed tray)
(Manual paper feed tray)
MPLD Paper length detector Transmission type Detects the paper length. (Manual paper feed tray)
MPWS Paper width detector Volume-type resistor Detects the paper width. (Manual paper feed tray)
OCSW Paper size detection trigger Transmission type Detects generation of the paper size detection trigger
sensor signal.
POD1 Paper exit detector 1 Transmission type Detects paper transport from the fusing section.
POD2 Paper exit detector 2 Transmission type Detects paper transport to the face-down paper exit tray.
POD3 Paper exit detector 3 Transmission type Detects paper transport to the right paper exit tray.
PPD1 Paper transport detector 1 Transmission type Detects paper pass in front of the transport roller 5.
PPD2 Paper transport detector 2 Reflection type Detects paper pass in the transport roller 5 in front of the
registration roller.
PRTPD Paper exit tray paper detector Transmission type Detects paper empty in the paper exit tray (Right paper
(Right paper exit tray) exit tray).
REGS_F/IMGDS Registration sensor F Reflection type Detects color shift. (F side) / Detects the toner patch
(Image density sensor) density.
REGS_R Registration sensor R Reflection type Detects the toner patch density.
(Image density sensor)
SCOV RSPF cover open/close detector Micro switch Detects open/close of the RSPF cover.
SOCD RSPF open/close sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the RSPF unit.
SPED Document sensor Transmission type Detects document empty in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPLS1 Paper size detector 1 Transmission type Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPLS2 Paper size detector 2 Transmission type Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPPD1 Document transport sensor 1 Transmission type Detects paper feed and the document size in random
paper feed.
SPPD2 Document transport sensor 2 Transmission type Detects paper pass.
SPPD3 Document transport sensor 3 Transmission type Detects paper pass.
SPPD4 Document transport sensor 4 Transmission type Detects paper exit and switchback.
SPWS Document size detector Volume-type resistor Detects the document width.
TCS_C Toner sensor (C) Magnetic sensor Detects toner supply from the toner cartridge. Analog detection
Detects the toner density (C).
TCS_K Toner sensor (K) Magnetic sensor Detects toner supply from the toner cartridge. Analog detection
Detects the toner density (K).
TCS_M Toner sensor (M) Magnetic sensor Detects toner supply from the toner cartridge. Analog detection
Detects the toner density (M).
TCS_Y Toner sensor (Y) Magnetic sensor Detects toner supply from the toner cartridge. Analog detection
Detects the toner density (Y).
TFD2 Paper exit tray full detector Transmission type Detects paper full in the center paper exit tray.
(Center paper exit tray)
TFD3 Paper exit tray full detector Transmission type Detects paper full in the right paper exit tray.
(Right paper exit tray)
TH_LM_IN Fusing temperature sensor Thermistor Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller (B). Analog detection
TH_UM_IN Fusing temperature sensor Non-contact thermistor Detects the surface temperature at the center of the Analog detection
(Main) fusing belt (roller).
TH_US_IN Fusing temperature sensor (Sub) Thermistor Detects the suffered temperature at the edge section of Analog detection
the fusing belt (roller).
TH1_LSU LSU temperature sensor Thermistor Detects the temperature in the LSU. (For correction of the Analog detection
LSU distortion)
TNFD Waste toner full detector Mechanical switch Detects full of waste toner.
WEBEND Web end detector Transmission type Detects web end of the fusing unit.

6. Switches
07237
$(37
-37 $37?&
$37?2
Signal name Name Type Function/Operation

DHSW Dehumidifier heater switch Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF the power line of the dehumidifier heater.
DSW_F Front door open/close switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the front door. Detects ON/OFF of the power line of the fusing unit,
the motors, and the LSU laser.
DSW_R Right transport unit (right door) Micro switch Detects open/close of the right paper transport section (right door). Detects ON/OFF of the
open/close switch power line of the fusing unit, the motors, and the LSU laser.
MSW Main power switch Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF the main power.
PWRSW Operation panel power switch Push switch Turns ON/OFF the power on the secondary side.

7. Clutches and solenoids
34-03 322#
3023
452#?
7%"3 452#?
452#
-0&3
0&#?(0&#
#05#
#0&#

1TURC_1 Primary transfer separation clutch 1 Magnetic clutch Controls separation of the primary transfer unit.
1TURC_2 Primary transfer separation clutch 2 Magnetic clutch Controls separation of the primary transfer unit.
2TURC Secondary transfer separation clutch Magnetic clutch Controls separation of the secondary transfer unit.
CPFC1 Tray vertical transport clutch 1 Magnetic clutch Controls the transport roller of the paper feed tray 1 section.
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) Magnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the paper feed tray 1 section.
(Paper feed tray 1)
MPFS Paper feed solenoid (Manual paper feed) Magnetic solenoid Controls the paper feed roller. (Manual paper feed)
PFC_HPFC Transport roller clutch Magnetic clutch Controls the transport roller 4.
SPRS Paper exit roller pressure control solenoid Magnetic solenoid Controls ON/OFF of the transport power of the paper exit roller. (Releases the
(RSPF) paper exit roller pressure when reversing paper.)
SRRC Registration roller clutch (RSPF) Magnetic clutch Controls the registration roller. (Controls the timing of document transport.)
STMPS Stamp solenoid Magnetic solenoid Drives the finish stamp.
WEBS Web drive solenoid Magnetic solenoid Drives the web.

8. Motors
30&-
30- 305-
02-
/3- 4.-?9
-)- 4.-?-
4.-?#
4.-?+
0/- 0'-
$6-?#,
!$5-
&5- $6-?+
22-
0&-
#0&-
#,5-

ADUM ADU motor Stepping motor Drives the ADU and the transport roller in the right paper exit section.
CLUM1 Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 1) DC brush motor Lifts the lift plate of the paper feed tray. (Paper feed tray 1)
CPFM Paper feed motor DC brushless motor Drives the paper feed section.
DVM_CL Developing motor (CL) DC brushless motor Drives the developing/OPC drum section (CL).
DVM_K Developing motor (K) DC brushless motor Drives the developing/black OPC drum (BK)/transfer section.
FUM Fusing motor DC brushless motor Drives the fusing section.
MIM Scan motor Stepping motor Drives the scanner unit. (scan, return operations)
OSM* Offset motor Stepping motor Offsets (shifts) paper.
PFM Transport motor Stepping motor Drives the transport rollers 5 and 9.
PGM Polygon motor DC brushless motor Scans laser beams.
POM Paper exit motor Stepping motor Drives the roller in the paper exit section.
PRM Fusing pressure control motor Stepping motor Controls ON/OFF of the fusing roller pressure.
RRM Registration motor Stepping motor Drives the registration roller.
(Controls the timing of the transfer image for the paper.)
SPFM RSPF transport motor Stepping motor Transports a document.
SPM/SPUM RSPF paper feed motor Stepping motor Feeds a document.
TNM_C Toner motor (C) Stepping motor Supplies toner from the toner cartridge (C) to the developing unit.
TNM_K Toner motor (K) Stepping motor Supplies toner from the toner cartridge (K) to the developing unit.
TNM_M Toner motor (M) Stepping motor Supplies toner from the toner cartridge (M) to the developing unit.
TNM_Y Toner motor (Y) Stepping motor Supplies toner from the toner cartridge (Y) to the developing unit.

9. Rollers
39 40 38 37 36 34 35 33 42 41 44 43
26
25
47
48
28
27
19
20
18
17
30
31
32
29
15
16
22
21
13
14
23
24
9
10
46
45
11
12
8
7
6
1
2
3 5 4

1 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to
paper.
2 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed desk tray to the transport roller 4.
3 Paper pickup roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
4 Separation roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent double-feeding.
5 Paper feed roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
paper.
7 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed tray 1 to the transport roller 3.
8 Transport roller 3 Transports paper from the transport roller 2 to the transport roller 4.
9 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
10 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent double-feeding.
paper.

12 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport rollers 1 and 3 to the transport roller 5.
paper.
14 Transport roller 5 (Drive) Transports paper to the registration roller. Paper is buckled between the registration roller and this roller to
correct the paper skew and the relation between images and paper.
15 Registration roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. / Controls the transport timing of paper and adjusts relative relations
between the image and paper.
16 Registration roller (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the registration roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to
paper.
17 Transport roller 6 (Drive) Transports paper transported from the fusing section to the paper exit section and the switchback section.
paper.
paper.
20 Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transports paper transported from the switchback section to the transport roller 8.
paper.
22 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transports paper transported from the transport roller 7 to the transport roller 9.
paper.
25 Paper exit roller 1 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the paper exit roller to
paper.
26 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper to the left paper exit section.
paper.
28 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Discharges paper to the right paper exit tray.
29 Fusing roller (F1) Heats the fusing belt.
30 Fusing roller (F2) The cushion layer of the roller forms a wide nip between the fusing belt and fusing roller (B).
31 Fusing roller (B) Heats the back surface of paper to fuse toner on the paper.
32 Fusing web roller Cleans the fusing roller (B) and the fusing belt.
33 Document pickup roller (RSPF) Feeds a document to the paper feed roller.
34 Paper feed roller (RSPF) Feeds a document to the transport section. Makes a buckle on paper between the registration roller and this
roller to correct the start position of document skew and document image scan.
35 Separation roller (RSPF) Separates a document to prevent double-feeding.
36 Transport auxiliary roller (RSPF) Reduces friction between a document and the paper guide to transport the document smoothly to the
37 Registration roller (Drive) (RSPF) Transports a document to the transport roller 2. / Controls the transport timing of the document and adjusts
the document scanning timing.
38 Registration roller (Idle) RSPF) Apply a pressure to a document and the registration roller to provide the transport power of the transport
roller to the document.
39 Transport roller 2 (Idle) (RSPF) Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller
to the document.
40 Transport roller 2 (Drive) (RSPF) Transports a document transported from the registration roller to the document scanning section.
41 Transport roller 3 (Idle) (RSPF) Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller
to the document.
42 Transport roller 3 (Drive) (RSPF) Transports a document transported from the document scanning section to the paper exit roller.
43 Paper exit roller (Idle) (RSPF) Apply a pressure to a document and the paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the paper exit roller
to the document.
44 Paper exit roller (Drive) (RSPF) Discharges a document. Switchbacks the document and transports it to the registration roller when scanning
the back surface.
45 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports paper from manual paper feed section to the transport roller 9.
paper.
47 Paper exit roller 3 (Drive) Transports paper to paper exit roller 2 or transport roller 7.
paper.

10. Lamps
#,?/.
##&4
$,?9
$,?-
$,?#
$,?"+
(,?5-53
(,?,-

CCFT LCD backlight LED LCD backlight
CL_ON Scanner lamp LED Radiates light onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image.
DL_BK Discharge lamp (K) LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum (K).
DL_C Discharge lamp (C) LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum (C).
DL_M Discharge lamp (M) LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum (M).
DL_Y Discharge lamp (Y) LED Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum (Y).
HL_LM Heater lamp (HL_LM) Halogen lamp Heats the fusing roller (B).
HL_UM/US Heater lamp (HL_UM/US) Halogen lamp Heats the fusing roller (F1) and the fusing belt. (23cpm/26cpm/31cpm(G) machine)/
Heats the fusing roller (F). Heats the paper surface to fuse toner on the paper. (20cpm
machine)

11. Fans and filter
0/&-
03&-
0/&-

02/&-
&5&-
02/&-
Signal name Name Function/Operation

FUFM Fusing cooling fan Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
POFM Paper exit cooling fan Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
POFM2 Paper exit cooling fan Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.
PROFM Process fan motor 1 Discharges air and cools the process section.
PROFM2 Process fan motor 2 Discharges air and cools the process section.
PSFM Power cooling fan motor Cools the power unit.
LSUFM LSU cooling fan Cools the LSU.

1 Toner filter Prevents toner splash.
2 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.

12. Heater
$(3

DHS Scanner dehumidifying heater Dehumidifies the scanner section to prevent it from dew condensation.
DHT1 Paper dehumidifying heater (Paper feed tray 1) Dehumidifies the paper feed tray section to prevent paper from absorbing humidity which
causes degraded image quality and paper jams.

13. PWB/Memory device


1 MFP control PWB Controls image data (compression, decompression, and filing), and controls the whole machine.
Converts print data (PCL/PS) into image data.
2 PCU PWB Controls the engine section.
3 SCU PWB Controls the scanner and the operation section.
4 Scanner lamp drive PWB Drives the scanner lamp
5 CCD PWB Scans document images and performs A/D conversion of the scanning signal.
6 USB I/F PWB USB I/F
7 KEY PWB Outputs the key operation signal.
8 LVDS PWB Converts the display data signal to the LCD display signal. Controls the touch panel.
9 LD PWB Drives the laser diode and controls the power.
10 LSU mother PWB Controls the LSU. Generates the video data. Interfaces the MFP PWB, the scanner control PWB, the
operation PWB, the PCU PWB, and the FAX unit.
11 Driver PWB Drives the motor.
12 HL control PWB Drives the heater lamp.
13 DC POWER PWB Generates the DC voltage.
14 High voltage PWB (MC/DV PWB) Generates the main charger voltage and the DV bias voltage.
15 High voltage PWB (TC PWB) Generates the transfer voltage.
16 AC POWER PWB Controls the power of the heater lamp drive circuit..
17 Document size detection PWB (Light emitting) Drives the LED for the document size detection.
18 Document size detection PWB (Light receiving) Outputs the document size detection signal.
19 RSPF driver PWB Drives the motor, the solenoid, and the clutch in the RSPF section.
20 Right door PWB Interfaces the right door unit signal.
21 SD card memory Stores the MFP PWB program data, the FAX image data, and the font data.
22 DIMM memory Memory for the printer
23 Printer Flash memory Stores the printer program data.
24 DSK Flash memory Stores the DSK program data.
25 HDD Stores the MFP PWB program data, the filing data, the e-manual data, the watermark data, the log data,
and the authentication data. Also used as a work memory.

14. Fuses and Thermostats
&
&
&
&
&
& &
& &
& &
43?53
43?5-
43 ,-
Signal name Name 100v series 200v series Section

F1 Fuse 20A 250V T10AH 250V AC Power PWB
F2 Fuse - T10AH 250V AC Power PWB
F001 Fuse T12AH 250V T6.3AH 250V DC Power PWB
F003 Fuse T3.15AH 250V T3.15AH 250V DC Power PWB
F101 Fuse F10AH 250V (F101) F5AH 250V (F101) DC Power PWB
F401 Fuse F3.15AH 250V (F401) F2AH 250V (F401) DC Power PWB
F201 Fuse 6.3A 6.3A DC Power PWB

TS LM Thermostat LM Mechanical thermostat Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_LM) circuit when the fusing section is overheated.
TS UM Thermostat UM Mechanical thermostat Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_UM) circuit when the fusing section is overheated.
(Center section)
TS US Thermostat US Mechanical thermostat Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_US) circuit when the fusing section is overheated.
(Edge section)

15. Lock

1 Scanner lock Fixes the scanner during transit.
2 Paper feed tray lift plate lock Fixes the paper feed tray lift plate during transit.

MX-3115N
[5] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 6HUYLFH0DQXDO

1. Adjustment item list
Job No. Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 1 Adjust the developing unit 1A Adjust the developing doctor gap
1B Adjust the developing roller main pole position
1C Toner density control reference value setting 25-2
ADJ 2 Adjusting high voltage values 2A Adjust the main charger grid voltage 8-2
2B Adjust the developing bias voltage 8-1
2C Transfer current and voltage adjustment 8-6
ADJ 3 Image density sensor adjustment 3A Image density sensor adjustment 44-2
ADJ 4 Image lead edge position, image 4A Print image main scanning direction automatic magnification ratio adjustment (Print engine) 50-28
loss, void area, image off-center, 4B Print image off-center automatic adjustment (Print engine) (Each paper feed tray) 50-28
image magnification ratio 4C Copy mode image lead edge position, image loss, void area, image off-center, sub 50-28
adjustment scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner)
(Automatic adjustment) (Document table mode)
4D Copy mode image lead edge position, image loss, void area, image off-center, sub 50-28
scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner) (RSPF mode)
ADJ 5 Print engine image distortion 5A Print engine image distortion adjustment (Manual adjustment) / OPC drum phase 50-22
adjustment / OPC drum phase adjustment (Automatic adjustment) / Color registration adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
adjustment / Color registration 5B Print engine image skew (LSU skew) adjustment (Manual adjustment) 50-20 (64-1)
adjustment (Print engine section) (No need to adjust normally)
5C Color registration offset adjustment (No need to adjust normally) 50-20
ADJ 6 Scan image distortion 6A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment
adjustment 6B Scan image (sub scanning direction) distortion adjustment
(Document table mode) 6C Scan image (main scanning direction) distortion adjustment
ADJ 7 Scanner image skew adjustment (RSPF mode) 64-2
ADJ 8 Scan image focus adjustment 48-1
ADJ 9 Print lead edge image position adjustment (Printer mode) 50-5
ADJ 10/ Color balance and density Note before execution of the image quality adjustment
SET1 adjustment Copy image quality check
Printer image quality check
10A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration) 63-3 (63-5)
SET Color balance adjustment 1A Copy color balance adjustment target setup 63-7/8/11
1 target setup 1B Printer color balance adjustment target setup 67-26/27/28
10B Copy/Printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment) 46-74
(Basic adjustment)
10C Copy image quality adjustment 10C Copy color balance and density adjustment 46-24
(Basic adjustment) (1) (Automatic adjustment)
10C Copy color balance and density adjustment 46-21
(2) (Manual adjustment)
10D Copy / Image send / FAX 10D Color copy density adjustment (for each color 46-1
image quality adjustment (1) copy mode) (separately for the low-density area
(Individual adjustment) and the high-density area)
(No need to adjust normally)
10D Monochrome copy density adjustment (for each 46-2
(2) monochrome copy mode) (separately for the low-
density area and the high-density area)
10D Color copy color balance, gamma adjustment 46-10
(3) (for each color copy mode)
10D Monochrome copy density, gamma adjustment 46-16
(4) (for each monochrome copy mode)
10D Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode 46-19
(5) document density scanning operation (exposure
operation) conditions setting
(Normally no need to set)
10D Document low density image density reproduction 46-32
(6) adjustment in the automatic monochrome (Copy/
Scan/FAX) mode (No need to adjust normally)
(Background density adjustment in the scanning
section)
10D Copy/Scan low density image density adjustment 46-63
(7) (for each mode) (No need to adjust normally)
10D Color copy, text, line image reproduction 46-27
(8) adjustment (edge gamma, density adjustment)
(Text, Map mode) (No need to adjust normally)
10D Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color 46-37
(9) document reproduction adjustment
10D Color copy mode dark area gradation (black 46-38
(10) component quantity) adjustment
MX-3115N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 5 – 1

Job No. Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 10/ Color balance and density 10E Printer image quality 10E Printer color balance adjustment 67-24
SET1 adjustment adjustment (Basic adjustment) (1) (Automatic adjustment)
10E Printer color balance adjustment 67-25
(2) (Manual adjustment)
10F Printer image quality 10F Printer density adjustment (Low density section 67-36
adjustment (1) density adjustment) (No need to adjust normally)
(Individual adjustment) 10F Printer high density image density reproduction 67-34
(2) setting (Supporting the high density section tone
gap) (No need to adjust normally)
10F Printer gamma adjustment for each dither 67-54
(3) (Automatic adjustment) (No need to adjust
normally) (Except for GDI printers)
10F Automatic color balance adjustment by the user 26-53
(4) (Printer color balance automatic adjustment
ENABLE setting and adjustment)
(Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
ADJ 11 Paper size sensor adjustment 11A Manual paper feed tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment 40-2
11B RSPF paper feed tray document size (width) sensor adjustment 53-6
ADJ 12 Document size detection 12A Document size sensor detection point adjustment 41-1
adjustment 12B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size sensor 41-2
ADJ 13 Touch panel coordinate setting 65-1
ADJ 14 Fusing paper guide position adjustment
ADJ 15 Print image position, image 15A Print image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Print engine) 50-10
magnification ratio, void area, (Manual adjustment)
off-center adjustment (Print 15B Print image print area adjustment (Print engine) (Manual adjustment) 50-10/50/1
engine) (Manual adjustment) 15C Print image off-center adjustment (Print engine) (Manual adjustment) 50-10
ADJ 16 Scan image magnification ratio 16A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 48-1
adjustment (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode)
16B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 48-1/48-5
(Document table mode)
16C Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 48-1
(RSPF mode)
16D Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment) 48-1
(RSPF mode)
ADJ 17 Scan image off-center 17A Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode) 50-12
adjustment (Manual adjustment) 17B Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode) 50-12/50-6
ADJ 18 Copy image position, image loss 18A Copy image position, image loss, void area adjustment (Manual adjustment) 50-1
adjustment (Manual adjustment) (Document table mode)
18B Image scanning position adjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode) 53-8
18C Copy image position, image loss, void area adjustment (Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode) 50-6
ADJ 19 Finisher and punch unit adjustments (alignment, punch hole position, staple position) 3-10
2. Details of adjustment
ADJ 1 Adjust the developing unit

1-A Adjust the developing doctor gap
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* The developing unit has been disassembled.
* When the print image density is low.
* When there is a blur on the print image.
2) Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw.
* When there is unevenness in the print image density.
* The toner is excessively dispersed.
Be careful not to attach a fingerprint, oil, grease, or a foreign mate-

rial on the DV roller during the procedure. Also be careful not to
scratch the DV roller surface.
If a fingerprint, oil, grease, or a foreign material is erroneously
attached to the DV roller during the procedure, remove all devel-
oper from the developing unit and clean the roller with alcohol. 3) Insert a thickness gauge of 0.65mm in between 40mm - 70mm
from the edge of the developing doctor.
Do not exert force when holding the DV Unit.

1) Remove the developing unit from the main unit, and remove Note for use of a thickness gauge
the developing doctor cover. ? Do not insert the gauge diagonally.
? The gauge must pass freely.

x The advisable point of measurement is the MIN point of the 3) Hold the thread and bring the needle near the developing
DV roller oscillation. roller. (Do not use a paper clip because too heavy. It will not
provide a correct position.)
70mm
4) Mark the developing roller surface on the extension line of the
40mm needle with the needle at 2 - 3mm from the developing roller
70mm edge. (Never touch the needle tip to the developing roller.)
40mm
Marking must be made at the edge section (non-image area)

of the DV roller.
MM
4) Push the developing doctor in the arrow direction, and tighten
the fixing screw of the developing doctor. (Perform the similar
procedure for the front frame and the rear frame.)
5) Measure the distance between the marking position and the

5) Check that the doctor gaps at two positions in 40mm - 70mm
DV doctor edge A position, and confirm that the distance is
from the both sides of the developing doctor are in the range of
0.65 r 0.05mm. 20.0 r 0.5mm.
If the distance is not within the above range, adjust the DV
70mm roller main pole position in the following procedures.
40mm
70mm 20.0 0.5mm
40mm
1-B Adjust the developing roller main pole

position 6) Remove the developing unit rear cover, loosen the fixing screw
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: of the DV roller main pole adjustment plate, and move the
* The developing unit has been disassembled. adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust.
* When the print image density is low.
* When there is a blur on the print image.
* When there is unevenness in the print image density.
* The toner is excessively dispersed.
Be careful not to leave a fingerprint, oil, grease, or a foreign mate-

rial on the DV roller during the procedure. Also be careful not to
scratch the DV roller surface.
If a fingerprint, oil, grease, or a foreign material is erroneously
attached to the DV roller during the procedure, remove all devel-
oper from the developing unit and clean the roller with alcohol. Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the DV roller main pole position
comes to the specified range.
7) After completion of the adjustment of the DV roller main pole
position, fix the DV roller main pole adjustment plate with the
Do not exert force when holding the DV Unit.
fixing screw.
1) Remove the developing doctor cover, and place the develop-
ing unit on a flat surface.
2) Attach a piece of string to a sewing needle or pin.

2) Close the front cabinet.
1-C Toner density control reference value
3) Select a developing unit to be adjusted.
setting
4) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted. The DV
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: roller rotates, and the toner density sensor detects toner den-
* When developer is replaced. sity, and the output value is displayed.
The above operation is executed for 1.5 minutes, and the aver-
age value of the toner density sensor detection level is set
Be sure to execute this adjustment only when developer is (saved) as the reference toner density control value.
replaced. Never execute it in the other cases. When the reference toner density control adjustment operation
is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to normal from highlight.
This makes known about whether the adjustment operation is
Perform the toner density reference control level adjustment with completed or not.
the toner cartridges removed. The above operation is executed each of the lower speed
If adjustment is performed with toner cartridges installed, the EE- mode and the middle speed mode, and the reference toner
EL trouble code or an over-toned condition may occur. density control value is set for each of them.
1) With the front cabinet open, enter SIM25-2.

If the operation is interrupted within 1.5 minutes, the adjust-

ment result is not reflected.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during the operation, the
$7'(9($'-B/B. $7'(9(92B0B.
$7'(9($'-B/B& $7'(9(92B0B&
operation is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal
$7'(9($'-B/B0 $7'(9(92B0B0 display.
$7'(9($'-B/B< $7'(9(92B0B<
$7'(9($'-B0B. If [EE-EU], [EE-EL], or [EE-EC] is displayed, setting of the ref-

$7'(9($'-B0B&
erence toner density control value is not completed normally.
$7'(9($'-B0B0
$7'(9($'-B0B< Troubleshoot the cause, remove the cause, and perform set-
$7'(9(92B/B.
$7'(9(92B/B&
ting again.
$7'(9(92B/B0
$7'(9(92B/B<
Error
. & 0 < (;(&87( Error name Detail of error
display
K EE-EL EL abnormality Sensor output level less than 1.0V, or control
voltage over 8.0V.
M
EE-EU EU abnormality Sensor output level over 2.3V, or control
EXECUTE voltage less than 2.0V.
EE-EC EC abnormality Sensor output level: other than 1.65 r 0.13V

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
&/26(
5) Cancel SIM 25-2.
$7'(9($'-B/B. $7'(9(92B0B.
$7'(9($'-B/B& $7'(9(92B0B&
6) Confirm that "Install the toner cartridge" is displayed, and
$7'(9($'-B/B0 $7'(9(92B0B0 install the toner cartridge by the following procedures.
$7'(9($'-B/B< $7'(9(92B0B<
$7'(9($'-B0B. 7) Shake the toner cartridge horizontally several times.

$7'(9($'-B0B&
$7'(9($'-B0B0
$7'(9($'-B0B<
$7'(9(92B/B.
$7'(9(92B/B&
$7'(9(92B/B0
$7'(9(92B/B<
. & 0 < (;(&87(
Abnormal end Adjustment completed

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
$7'(9($'-B/B. $7'(9(92B0B.
$7'(9($'-B/B&
$7'(9($'-B/B0
$7'(9(92B0B&
$7'(9(92B0B0
8) Open the front cabinet, and insert each toner cartridge.
$7'(9($'-B/B< $7'(9(92B0B<
$7'(9($'-B0B.
$7'(9($'-B0B&
$7'(9($'-B0B0
$7'(9($'-B0B<
$7'(9(92B/B.
$7'(9(92B/B&
$7'(9(92B/B0
$7'(9(92B/B<
. & 0 < (;(&87(

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
7&'B.(((/
7&'B&
7&'B0(((/
7&'B<
7&9B.(((/
7&9B&(((/
7&9B0(((/
7&9B<(((/
Be sure to install the color cartridges to their proper positions.

. & 0 < (;(&87( Avoid installation to a different color position.

Do not forcibly insert the toner cartridge.
Push it in until the cartridge is securely locked in place.
Developing units removed, be sure to remove the toner car-

tridges as well to prevent toner clogging.
Color toner cartridge positions
BK
C
M
Y
9) Close the front cabinet.

10) Confirm that "Toner replenishment in progress" is displayed,
and wait until the display disappears. (It takes 30 sec - 6 min.)
This procedure is for checking the toner supply operation from

the toner cartridge to the DV unit. The operation time differs
depending on the toner quantity in the toner cartridge, uneven
distribution of toner, and the internal state of the toner car-
tridge.
Do not perform operations which interrupt the above operation,

such as opening the front cover, entering the SIM mode, and
turning OFF/ON the power. If this precaution is ignored, Trou-
ble codes F2-40 - 43 or F2-64 - 67 or a over-toned condition
may occur.
When replacing developer, always replace all the three colors of

Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan.
If only one color is replaced, color balance may be adversely
affected. Black developer can be replaced individually.
When developer is replaced, be sure to perform the color balance

adjustment.
When not replacing the developer, do not execute SIM25-2.

ADJ 2 Adjusting high voltage values ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67

&/26(
0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B.
2-A Adjust the main charger grid voltage $˖ %˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B&
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B0

'˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B<
* When the MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced.

* U2 trouble has occurred.
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
1) Enter the SIM 8-2 mode.
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B.
$˖ %˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B&
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B0

'˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B<
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
2) Select an output mode and an item to be adjusted.
Adjustment Actual
Item/Display (Mode) Content
range voltage
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED GB_K Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) K 150 - 850 –620Vr5V
B MIDDLE SPEED GB_C Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) C 150 - 850 –620Vr5V
C MIDDLE SPEED GB_M Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) M 150 - 850 –620Vr5V
D MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) Y 150 - 850 –620Vr5V
LOW A LOW SPEED GB_K Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) K 150 - 850 –610Vr5V
B LOW SPEED GB_C Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) C 150 - 850 –590Vr5V
C LOW SPEED GB_M Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) M 150 - 850 –590Vr5V
D LOW SPEED GB_Y Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) Y 150 - 850 –590Vr5V
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) in the middle Note that the adjustment value may differ depending on the MC/DV
speed mode, and press [OK] key. high voltage power PWB.
Enter the adjustment value of each mode which is specified Since the adjustment value label is attached on the MC/DV high
on the label attached on the MC/DV high voltage power PWB. voltage PWB, the PWB must be removed in order to check the
adjustment value.
GBK:XXX GBC:XXX GBM:XXX GBY:XXX This is a troublesome procedure. Therefore, it is advisable to put
down the adjustment value in advance.
The default values specified for each model must be changed
as follows.
26cpm/31cpm machine: +5 When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed
mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are auto-
matically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a cer-
tain relationship.
Since the high voltage output cannot be checked with a digital multi
meter in this model, a judgment of the output must be made by
checking the print image quality.
2-B Adjust the developing bias voltage

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the
procedure 3) is outputted for 30sec and the set value is saved. This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped. * When the MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced.

* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. Enter the adjustment value of each mode which is specified on
1) Enter the SIM 8-1 mode. the label attached on the MC/DV high voltage power PWB.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'96(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ'9%B.
$˖ %˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ'9%B&
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ'9%B0

'˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ'9%B<
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the
procedure 3) is outputted for 30sec and the set value is saved.
EXECUTE When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped.
10-key
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec. Note that the adjustment value may differ depending on the MC/DV
high voltage power PWB.

Since the adjustment value label is attached on the MC/DV high
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'96(77,1*$1'287387
voltage PWB, the PWB must be removed in order to check the
$˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ'9%B. adjustment value.
$˖ %˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ'9%B&
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ'9%B0

This is a troublesome procedure. Therefore, it is advisable to put
'˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ'9%B< down the adjustment value in advance.
When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed

mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are auto-
matically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a cer-
tain relationship.
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
Since the high voltage output cannot be checked with a digital multi
2) Select an output mode and an item to be adjusted. meter in this model, a judgment of the output must be made by
checking the print image quality.
Adjustment Actual
range voltage
MIDDLE A MIDDLE Developing K 0 - 600 –450V
SPEED bias voltage r5V
DVB_K (Middle
speed mode)
B MIDDLE Developing C 0 - 600 –450V
DVB_C (Middle
speed mode)
C MIDDLE Developing M 0 - 600 –450V
DVB_M (Middle
speed mode)
D MIDDLE Developing Y 0 - 600 –450V
DVB_Y (Middle
speed mode)
LOW A LOW Developing K 0 - 600 –450V
DVB_K (Low speed
mode)
B LOW Developing C 0 - 600 –430V
DVB_C (Low speed
mode)
C LOW Developing M 0 - 600 –430V
DVB_M (Low speed
mode)
D LOW Developing Y 0 - 600 –430V
DVB_Y (Low speed
mode)
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value) in the middle

speed mode, and press [OK] key.

2-C Transfer current and voltage adjustment

This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7+96(77,1*$1'287387
* When the TC high voltage PWB is replaced. $˖

$˖
%˖
˖7&/2:63(('&/.
˖7&0,''/(63(('&/.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7&/2:63(('&/&

* U2 trouble has occurred. '˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/&
(˖ ˖7&/2:63(('&/0
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. )˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/0
*˖ ˖7&/2:63(('&/<
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. +˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/<

,˖ ˖7&/2:63(('%:.
1) Enter the SIM 8-6 mode. -˖
.˖
˖7&0,''/(63(('%:.
˖7&3/$,1&/63;
/˖ ˖7&3/$,1&/'3;
(;(&87( 2.
10-key
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7+96(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖7&/2:63(('&/.
$˖ %˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7&/2:63(('&/&
'˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/&
(˖ ˖7&/2:63(('&/0
)˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/0
*˖ ˖7&/2:63(('&/<
+˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/<
,˖ ˖7&/2:63(('%:.
-˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('%:.
.˖ ˖7&3/$,1&/63;
/˖ ˖7&3/$,1&/'3;
(;(&87( 2.
2) Select an item to be adjusted.
Actual
Setting Default
Item/Display Content output
range value
value
A TC1 LOW SPEED CL K Primary transfer Color K Low speed 51 - 255 80 6PA
B TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K bias adjustment Middle speed 51 - 255 109 10PA
C TC1 LOW SPEED CL C value C Low speed 51 - 255 80 6PA
D TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C Middle speed 51 - 255 109 10PA
E TC1 LOW SPEED CL M M Low speed 51 - 255 80 6PA
F TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Middle speed 51 - 255 109 10PA
M
G TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y Y Low speed 51 - 255 80 6PA
H TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y Middle speed 51 - 255 109 10PA
I TC1 LOW SPEED BW K Black/White K Low speed 51 - 255 80 6PA
J TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW Middle speed 51 - 255 109 10PA
K
K TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary transfer Color Standard Front surface 51 - 255 103 –40PA
L TC2 PLAIN CL DPX bias adjustment paper Back surface 51 - 255 90 –30PA
M TC2 PLAIN BW SPX value Black/White Front surface 51 - 255 103 –40PA
N TC2 PLAIN BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 90 –30PA
O TC2 HEAVY1 CL SPX Color Heavy Front surface 51 - 255 83 –25PA
P TC2 HEAVY1 CL DPX paper 1 Back surface 51 - 255 76 –20PA
Q TC2 HEAVY1 BW SPX Black/White Front surface 51 - 255 69 –15PA
R TC2 HEAVY1 BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 69 –15PA
S TC2 HEAVY2 CL Color Heavy paper 2 51 - 255 83 –25PA
T TC2 HEAVY2 BW Black/White 51 - 255 69 –15PA
U TC2 OHP CL Color OHP 51 - 255 69 –15PA
V TC2 OHP BW Black/White 51 - 255 69 –15PA
W TC2 ENVELOPE CL Color Envelope 51 - 255 69 –15PA
X TC2 ENVELOPE BW Black/White 51 - 255 69 –15PA
Y TC2 THIN CL Color Thin paper 51 - 255 103 –40PA
Z TC2 THIN BW Black/White 51 - 255 103 –40PA
AA TC2 GLOSSY CL Color Gloss paper 51 - 255 83 –25PA
AB TC2 GLOSSY BW Black/White 51 - 255 69 –15PA
AC TC2 CLEANING Secondary transfer Cleaning process (negative pole) 51 - 255 59 –8PA
AD TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD cleaning bias Low speed print mode 0 - 255 26 0V
AE TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD adjustment value Middle speed print mode 0 - 255 26 0V
AF TC2 CLEAN CLEANING Cleaning bias (positive pole) 0 - 255 102 500V
AG PTC LOW SPEED CL PTC current Color Low speed 51 - 255 73 –200PA
AH PTC MIDDLE SPEED CL adjustment value Middle speed 51 - 255 73 –200PA
AI PTC LOW SPEED BW Black/White Low speed 51 - 255 73 –200PA
AJ PTC MIDDLE SPEED BW Middle speed 51 - 255 73 –200PA
AK CASE VOLT LOW CL PTC voltage Color Low speed 0 - 255 0 0V
AL CASE VOLT MID CL adjustment value Middle speed 0 - 255 0 0V
AM CASE VOLT LOW BW Black/White Low speed 0 - 255 0 0V
AN CASE VOLT MID BW Middle speed 0 - 255 0 0V
3) Enter the adjustment value (specified value), and press [OK] key.

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the procedure 3) is outputted for 30sec and the set value is saved.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed again, the output is stopped.
By setting the default value (specified value), the specified output is provided.
Mode Error display Error content

ADJ 3 Image density sensor Adjustment REG_SEN_ Registration REG_F LED ADJ error
value for F_ADJ_ERR sensor F (The target value is not
adjustment image adjustment obtained after retried
Before executing this adjustment, check to confirm the following registration abnormality three times.)
items. operation REG_SEN_ Registration REG_R LED ADJ error
mode R_ADJ_ERR sensor R (The target value is not
* Check to confirm that the color image density sensor (image reg-
adjustment obtained after retried
istration sensor F) and the black image density sensor (image abnormality three times.)
registration sensor R) are clean. REG_BELT_ F side transfer REG_F GRND error (The
* Check to confirm that the image density sensor calibration plate F_READ_ belt surface surface detection level is
is clean. ERR reading maximum or the minimum
abnormality value difference is
* Check to confirm that the transfer belt is clean and free from
outside a reference
scratches.
range.)
REG_BELT_ R side transfer REG_R GRND error (The
3-A Image density sensor adjustment R_READ_ belt surface surface detection level is
The transfer belt surface are used to make the sensitivity adjust- ERR reading maximum or the minimum
abnormality value difference is
ment of the color image density sensor (image registration sensor
outside a reference
F) and the black image density sensor (image registration sensor
range.)
R).
This adjustment executes automatically at the outset of registration When an error occurs, check the following sections for any abnor-
adjustment operation and process control operation as well as mality.
SIM44-2. • Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F)
Normally, therefore, it is not required to perform this adjustment. It • Black image density sensor (image registration sensor R)
is performed only when the sensor is replaced or when the adjust- • PCU PWB
ment result is checked.
• Transfer belt (dirt, scratch)
1) Enter SIM44-2 mode.
• Transfer belt cleaner

If any abnormality is found, repair and adjust again.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( If an error occurs, the adjustment result is not revised.
352&21*$,1$'-8670(17
3&6B&//('$'- 5(*B)*51'
3&6B./('$'- 5(*B5*51'
3&6B&/'$5.
3&6B.'$5.
5(*B)%(/70$;
5(*B)%(/70,1 ADJ 4 Image lead edge position,
3&6B.*51'
3&6B.%(/70$;
5(*B)%(/7',)
5(*B5%(/70$;
image loss, void area, image
3&6B.%(/70,1
3&6B.%(/7',)
5(*B5%(/70,1
5(*B5%(/7',)
off-center, image magnification
5(*B)/('$'-
5(*B5/('$'-
5(*B)3$7&+ .
5(*B)3$7&+ &
ratio adjustment
5(*B)'$5. 5(*B)3$7&+ 0 (Automatic adjustment)
5(*B5'$5. 5(*B)3$7&+ <
(;(&87( The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with
SIM50-28.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. * ADJ 15
The sensitivity adjustments of the color image density sensor Print image position, image magnification ratio, void area, off-
(image registration sensor F) and the black image density sen- center adjustment (Print engine) (Manual adjustment)
sor (image registration sensor R) are automatically performed. * ADJ 16
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Manual adjustment)
displayed and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
* ADJ 17
If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is dis-
Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment)
played.
* ADJ 18
Mode Error display Error content Copy image position, image loss adjustment
Adjustment BK_SEN_ Black image PCS_K LED ADJ error (Manual adjustment)
value for ADJ_ERR density sensor (The target value is not
(Menu in SIM50-28 mode)
process adjustment obtained after retried
control abnormality three times.)
Display/Item Content
operation CL_SEN_ Color image PCS_CL LED ADJ error
OC ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
mode ADJ_ERR density sensor (The target value is not
magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode)
adjustment obtained after retried
BK-MAG ADJ Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
abnormality three times.)
adjustment
BELT_READ Transfer belt PCS_K GRND error (The
SPF ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
_ERR surface surface detection level is
magnification ratio adjustment (RSPF mode)
reading maximum or the minimum
abnormality value difference is SETUP/ Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each paper
outside a reference PRINT ADJ feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
range.) RESULT Adjustment result display
DATA Display of data used when an adjustment is executed

4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
4-A Print image main scanning direction
The adjustment pattern is printed out.
automatic magnification ratio adjustment
5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
(Print engine)
1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.

Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document guide.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( In this case, put 5 sheets of white paper on the printed adjust-
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&ǂ$'- %.0$*ǂ$'-
ment pattern.
63)ǂ$'- 6(78335,17ǂ$'-
5(68/7 '$7$

2) Select [BK-MAG ADJ] with the key.

3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key.
(Any paper size will do.)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
0)7 &6 &6

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
12:(;(&87,1*
(;(&87(
(;(&87(
The following item is automatically adjustment.

* Print image main scanning direction image magnification
ratio.
7) Press [OK] key.
The adjustment result becomes valid.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
%.0$*
5(35,17 5(6&$1 5(75< '$7$ 2.

6) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
4-B Print image off-center automatic
adjustment (Print engine)
(Each paper feed tray) Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document guide.
1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode. In this case, put 5 sheets of white paper on the printed adjust-
ment pattern.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&ǂ$'- %.0$*ǂ$'-
63)ǂ$'- 6(78335,17ǂ$'-
5(68/7 '$7$

2) Select [SETUP/PRINT ADJ] with the key.

3) Select [ALL] with the key.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
/($' 2))6(7
$// The following item is automatically adjustment.
* Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* Print image off-center adjustment
8) Press [OK] key.
The adjustment result becomes valid.
Perform procedures 4) to 7) for each paper feed tray.

4-C Copy mode image lead edge position,
image loss, void area, image off-center, sub
scanning direction image magnification
ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner)
By pressing [LEAD] or [OFFSET] key, the following items can
be executed individually.
* [LEAD]: Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* [OFFSET]: Print image off-center adjustment

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
When [ALL] is selected, both of the above two items are 7(67
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
&/26(
executed simultaneously. 2&ǂ$'- %.0$*ǂ$'-

63)ǂ$'- 6(78335,17ǂ$'-
4) Select a paper feed tray to be adjusted. 5(68/7 '$7$

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
0)7 &6 &6 $'8
&6 &6 /&&

2) Select [OC ADJ] with the key.
(;(&87(

The adjustment pattern is printed out.

3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key. 7) Press [OK] key.
(Any paper size will do.) The adjustment result becomes valid.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
0)7 &6 &6 6,08/$7,21&203/(7(
3/($6(386+&$.(<
(;(&87(
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 4-D Copy mode image lead edge position,
The adjustment pattern is printed out. image loss, void area, image off-center, sub
5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. scanning direction image magnification
ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner)
(RSPF mode)
Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document guide.
In this case, put 5 sheets of white paper on the printed adjust-
ment pattern.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&ǂ$'- %.0$*ǂ$'-
63)ǂ$'- 6(78335,17ǂ$'-
5(68/7 '$7$

2) Press the [SPF ADJ] key.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
6,'( 6,'(
$//

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
3/($6(:$,7
12:(;(&87,1*

3) Proceed to one of the three screens for selecting the cassette

used to print RSPF adjustment patterns by selecting the corre-
sponding button:
5(35,17 (;(&87( SIDE1: RSPF adjustment for the front side
SIDE2: RSPF adjustment for the back side
The following item is automatically adjustment.
ALL: RSPF adjustment for both the front and back sides
* Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image
off-center, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio 4) Select one of the cassettes that can be used to print RSPF
automatic adjustment adjustment patterns. (Multiple selection is not allowed.)
5) Press the [EXECUTE] key, and the machine starts self-print of
RSPF adjustment patterns.
* The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is
self-printing RSPF adjustment patterns.
When self-print finishes, the next screen appears where you
can start RSPF adjustments.

6) RSPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the RSPF. After the machine has finished calculating the adjustment
(Set so that the pattern surface faces up.) amount for the back side, the next screen appears where
you can view the results of the adjustments.
<Adjustment Item List>
• RSPF original leading edge adjustment (back side)
• RSPF original off-center adjustment (back side)
• RSPF original sub-scan magnification adjustment
(back side)
10) The adjustment result screen appears.
This screen shows the current values along with the previous
values in parentheses.
* By pressing the [REPRINT] key, you can return to the cas-
sette selection screen and have the machine self-print
RSPF adjustment patterns (for the front and back sides)
again.
* To have the machine start re-reading the RSPF adjustment
patterns (front and back sides), press the [RESCAN] key.
* To return to the top menu without saving the adjustment val-
ues into EEPROM and RAM, press the [RETRY] key.
* By pressing the [REPRINT] key, you can return to the cas- * To display the data used for adjustment, press the [DATA]
sette selection screen and have the machine self-print key.
RSPF adjustment patterns again.
11) To save the adjustment values into EEPROM and RAM and
7) Press the [EXECUTE] key, and the machine starts reading return to the top menu, press the [OK] key.
RSPF adjustment patterns (for the front side).
* To return to the result screen, press the [BACK] key.
reading and calculating RSPF adjustment patterns (for the
front side).
ADJ 5 Print engine image distortion
The machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (for
the front side) after it has read the patterns for the front side. adjustment / OPC drum phase
After the machine has finished calculating the adjustment adjustment / Color registration
amount for the front side, the next screen appears where adjustment
you can have the machine start reading RSPF adjustment
patterns (for the back side). (Print engine section)
Adjustment Item List This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
• RSPF original leading edge adjustment (front side) * When the color shift occurs.
• RSPF original off-center adjustment (front side) * When the LSU is replaced.
• RSPF original sub-scan magnification adjustment * When the LSU is removed from the main unit.
(front side) * When the unit is installed or when the installing place is changed.
8) RSPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the RSPF. * When maintenance work is performed. (Replacement of the
(Set so that the pattern surface faces down.) OPC drum, the OPC cartridge, the transfer unit, the transfer belt,
etc.)
* When [ADJ 4A] / [ADJ 16A] Print engine image magnification
ratio adjustment (BK) (main scanning direction) is performed.
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
* When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
* When the color phase is not proper even after execution of the
color balance adjustment.
* When the OPC drum drive section is disassembled.
* When the primary transfer unit is replaced. (when it is removed
from the machine)
* When the developing unit or the OPC drum unit is removed from
the machine.
* By pressing the [REPRINT] key, you can return to the cas-

sette selection screen and have the machine self-print
RSPF adjustment patterns again.
9) Press the [EXECUTE] key, and the machine starts loading
RSPF adjustment patterns (for the back side).
reading RSPF adjustment patterns (for the back side).
The machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (for
the back side) after it has read the patterns for the back side.

5-A Print engine image distortion adjustment ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12

7(67 &/26(
(Manual adjustment) / OPC drum phase $872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
adjustment (Automatic adjustment) / 0$,1)0$,1568%6.(:3+$6(
& / 1*
Color registration adjustment 0 / 1*
< / 1*
(Automatic adjustment) $//B527$7(/ 2.
This adjustment performs the print engine image distortion adjust-

ment, the OPC drum phase adjustment, and the color registration
adjustment simultaneously.
(;(&87(
EXECUTE
Adjustment completed

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
12:(;(&87,1*
(;(&87(
Abnormal end

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
35(66>(&(;87(@7267$57
(55257211(5(037<
(;(&87(

[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the image registration auto-
matic adjustment is started. (It takes about 15 sec to complete
the adjustment.)
3) When the adjustment is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to
the normal display, and the value of the adjustment result is
displayed.
The current skew level for each color is displayed on the
SKEW display section.
Display/
Content Display Default NOTE
Item
MAIN F C Registration adjustment value main scanning 1.0 - 199.0 100
direction (Cyan laser writing position F side)
M Registration adjustment value main scanning 1.0 - 199.0 100
direction (Magenta laser writing position F side)
Y Registration adjustment value main scanning 1.0 - 199.0 100
direction (Yellow laser writing position F side)
MAIN R C Registration adjustment value main scanning 1.0 - 199.0 100
direction (Cyan laser writing position R side)
M Registration adjustment value main scanning 1.0 - 199.0 100
direction (Magenta laser writing position R side)
Y Registration adjustment value main scanning 1.0 - 199.0 100
direction (Yellow laser writing position R side)
SUB C Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction 1.0 - 199.0 100
(Cyan drum o Black drum)
M Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction 1.0 - 199.0 100
(Magenta drum o Black drum)
Y Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction 1.0 - 199.0 100
(Yellow drum o Black drum)
SKEW C Print skew amount calculation result (Cyan) -99.9 - 99.9 0 If the value is positive (+), "L" is displayed at the head of the
M Print skew amount calculation result (Magenta) -99.9 - 99.9 0 value. If negative (–), "R" is displayed.
Y Print skew amount calculation result (Yellow) -99.9 - 99.9 0 If the value is in the range of –2.1 - +2.1, "(OK)" is displayed at
the bottom of the value. In the other cases, "(NG)" is displayed.
ALL_ Print skew amount calculation result (Overall) -99.9 - 99.9 0 If the value is positive (+), "L" is displayed at the head of the
ROTAT value. If negative (–), "R" is displayed.
E If the value is in the range of –1.6 - +1.6, "(OK)" is displayed at
the bottom of the value. In the other cases, "(NG)" is displayed.
PHASE OPC drum phase adjustment value 1-8 1

4) Write down the displayed skew level.
Meaning of the skew level value and the adjustment pro-
cedure
* If "OK" is displayed for all items of SKEW ALL_ROTATE, C,
M, and Y, there is no need to perform the adjustment.
* When "R" is displayed at the head of the value, turn the LSU
skew adjustment screw clockwise.
* When "L" is displayed at the head of the value, turn the LSU
skew adjustment screw counterclockwise.
* The turning amount of the adjustment screw corresponds to
each adjustment value. "ALL_ROTATE" indicates the
number of rotations, and C, M, and Y indicate numbers of
clicks.
The display value is rounded at the decimal point.
* "ALL_ROTATES" shows the number of rotations of
adjustments for all the adjustment screws. "C, M, and Y
(SKEW)" shows the number of adjustment click steps for
each adjustment screw of C, M, and Y.
Contents in ( )
MIAN, SUB: Difference from the previous adjustment value of
image registration.
Example: When the adjustment is made by turning the LSU skew adjustment
screw of K, the states of C, M and Y (SKEW) are changed. Execute
If 105 for this time and 103 for the previous time,
SIM50-22 to check to confirm that C, M, and Y (SKEW) are OK.
it is displayed as 105.0 (+2.0).
When an abnormality occurs, "ERROR" is displayed.
SKEW, ALL_ROTATE: Judgment of the LSU skew adjustment
result. OK or NG. In this case, check each drive section and the process section.
PHASE: OPC drum phase adjustment value of the previous
time The adjustment result can be checked by the following manual
5) If the display of ALL_ROTATE is NG, turn all the LSU skew adjustment mode.
adjustment screws to adjust, and perform the procedures 2) to * ADJ 5B
4). Image skew adjustment (Manual adjustment) (SIM50-20)
Repeat the procedures 2) to 5) until the display of * ADJ 5C
ALL_ROTATE becomes OK. If the display of ALL_ROTATE is
Color registration offset adjustment (SIM50-20)
OK, go to the procedure 6).
For the adjustment, remove the front cover and the waste
toner box, and turn the skew adjustment screw.
When the color registration is greatly shifted due to replacement of
the LSU, etc, if SIM50-22 is used to perform the color registration
automatic adjustment, an error may occur.
In this case, the adjustment may be properly executed by setting
the adjustment items A - I of SIM50-20 to "100" and executing the
automatic adjustment again.
If color shift in an actual print image differs in the center, the front
side, and the rear side, the color shift offset adjustment can
improve it. (Refer to ADJ 5C.)
Normally there is a difference in color shift in several dots. Perform
the adjustment only when the adjustment is required.
5-B Print engine image skew (LSU skew)

adjustment (Manual adjustment)
If a more accurate adjustment than the automatic adjustment ADJ
5A is required, use this method of adjustment.
This adjustment is made by changing the parallelism of the LSU
unit scan laser beams for the OPC drum.
6) Repeat the procedures 2) to 4) again, and check to confirm
1) Enter the SIM 50-20 or 64-01 mode.
that C, M, and Y (SKEW) are OK.
2) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11" x 17") paper in it, and
If any of them is NG, turn the LSU skew adjustment screw of
press [EXECUTE] key.
the corresponding color to adjust.
3) The image skew (image registration) adjustment pattern is
printed.
4) Check the printed black image for any skew.
Use the four cross points printed in black to measure the
squareness.

There are following two methods of checking the black image
for any skew (right angle).
Method 1
Measure the distances between opposing corners of the rect-
angle print pattern, and compare the two distances to check
the squareness.
Method 2
Check the squareness of the vertical and horizontal sides of
the rectangle print pattern by using A3 or 11" x 17" paper
sides.
In the case of Method 2, the right angle of paper to be used

may not be exact. Be sure to check the right angle of paper to
be used in advance.
A B
Diagonal Diagonal
line C line D (Skew adjustment screw rotation direction)
About 220mm
When C is greater than D in the method 1 or there is some
skew in the direction A in the method 2, turn the screw clock-
wise.
When C is smaller than D in the method 1 or there is some
skew in the direction B in the method 2, turn the screw coun-
terclockwise.
(Reference of the rotation amount of the skew adjustment
screw)
About 300mm In case of the method 1, 0.8mm/about 1.5 rotations
In case of the method 2, 0.5mm/about 1.5 rotations
Method 1
Repeat the procedures 2) to 6).
Measure the length of the diagonal lines of the rectangle print
pattern. After completion of the black image skew adjustment, go to the
procedure 7).
Calculate the difference between the measured lengths C and
D of the diagonal lines. 6) Perform the same procedures as 1) and 2).
Check to insure that the difference between C and D is in the 7) Check the printed color image for any skew.
following range. If the difference between the shift amounts on the F and R
C - D = 0.8mm sides is within r 1 scale of the fine adjustment check scale,
there is no need to perform the adjustment.
If the difference between C and D is in the above range, there
is no need to adjust. Measure the skew amount from the print patterns on the front
and rear sides of each color.
Method 2
Fit the side of A3 or 11" x 17" paper to the long side of the rect-
angle print pattern. R side
Measure the slant (skew) of the vertical side for the horizontal
side of paper as shown in the figure.
If the above distance is 0.5mm or less, there is no need to
adjust.
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
procedure.
5) Open the front cover, remove the waste toner box, and turn the
four LSU image skew adjustment screws in the same direction
by the same amount.
For the adjustment, remove the front cover and the waste
toner box, and turn the skew adjustment screw. F side

Color image shift check C (Image shift fine adjustment
scale (Fine adjustment) reference frame)
5-C Color registration offset adjustment
B-sub (No need to adjust normally)
This adjustment is used to set the offset value for the automatic
color registration adjustment (ADJ 5A).
If there is any difference in color phase at the center and the four
corners of an actual print image, this adjustment may improve it.
Especially when there is any color shift at the center area, this
adjustment may improve it effectively.
B-main A-main
This adjustment cannot eliminate color shifts in all the areas, but
average the overall color shifts.
After the automatic adjustment, use this color registration offset
adjustment to correct color shift partially, performing the adjustment
efficiently.
A-sub Color image shift

A-main: Main scan rough adjustment pattern check section Before execution of this adjustment, check to confirm that the fol-
A-sub: Sub scan rough adjustment pattern (Rough adjustment)
lowing adjustment has been properly made.
B-main: Main scan fine adjustment scale
B-sub: Sub scan fine adjustment scale * ADJ 5A or ADJ 5B image skew adjustment (LSU unit)
C: Main scan sub scan fine adjustment pattern
[Kinds of adjustment values]
In each Y/M/C color print pattern printed separately in the F There are following two kinds of registration adjustment values.
side and in the R side, note the same print color pattern and • Base registration adjustment value: XXX(FRONT)/XXX(REAR)
check to confirm that the F side and the R side are in the same
They are manual adjustment values and automatic adjustment
condition.
values, and reflected when the automatic registration adjustment
Rough adjustment pattern check: is executed. It varies for every operation of the automatic regis-
Check the sub scan rough adjustment color image shift check tration adjustment.
section on the R side and the F side of each color, use the • Offset adjustment values: OFFSETXXF/OFFSETXXR
center position of the black scale as the reference, and check
They are the offset adjustment values added to the above base
the balance in shifts of the color image line positions in the
registration adjustment values, and are not changed unless
positive and the negative directions. The balance in the R side
SIM50-20 is executed to change.
must be the same as that in the F side.
Fine adjustment pattern check:
2) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11" x 17") paper in it.
Check the square frames on the R side and the F side of each
color. (Normally five sections of high density can be seen.) 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Check the sub scanning direction position of the center area of The color image registration check pattern is printed.
high density (one of the above five sections). These must be
on the same position on the R side and the F side.
In this case, use the sub scan direction color image shift check Rear pattern
scale (fine adjustment) as the reference.
Visually check the color density and make the darkest section
as the center, and use it as the read value of the shift amount.
Check that the difference in the center position of the dark den-
sity section is within r1 step.
Center pattern
The positional relations of the front and the rear frame of the
print color patterns of a same color are compared. There is no
need that all the colors are in the same state. Compare only
the positional relations of color patterns of a same color.
procedure. Front pattern
8) Turn the LSU skew adjustment screw of the adjustment target

color to adjust.
Reference arrow mark
(Skew adjustment screw rotation direction)
When the F side is skewed to the right side for R side: Turn the 4) Check the color image registration.
screw clockwise. There are 6 color image registration patterns in total; two on
When the F side is skewed to the left side for the R side: Turn each of the F side, the R side, and the center. Check all the
the screw counterclockwise. patterns to confirm that they are within the specified range.
(Reference of the rotation amount of the skew adjustment Also check to confirm that there is not much shift in each color
screw) image registration check pattern.
Skew of difference by one step between F and R sides (Differ-
ence by one scale of the fine adjustment check scale) / Turn
for about 2 clicks. There are two kinds of adjustment: one in the main scanning
Repeat the procedures 7) to 8) until a satisfactory result is direction and the other in the sub scanning direction. The verti-
obtained. cal direction in the above figure is that in the main scanning
direction, and the horizontal direction is that in the sub scan-
ning direction.

There are also two kinds of adjustments: the rough adjustment and 1 scale/1 (When the set value is changed by 1, shift is made by 1
the fine adjustment. Perform the rough adjustment then perform the scale.)
fine adjustment deliberately.
For the main scan direction image registration, the offset on the F If there is a considerable difference in color shift in the square and
side, the R side, and at the center is independently adjusted. at the center area, perform the adjustment.
If there is a difference in the sub scanning direction image registra- Select an adjustment item (OFF SET X F / OFF SET X R / OFF
tion between the F and R sides, perform the skew adjustment (ADJ SET X S), and change the adjustment value to adjust.
5A).
OFF SET X F: F side main scanning direction registration offset set
value (The color shift on the F side and at the center area is
X2 X1
changed.)
Color image shift check C (Image shift fine adjustment
scale (Fine adjustment) reference frame) OFF SET X D: R side main scanning direction registration offset set
B-sub value (The color shift on the R side and at the center area is
changed.)
OFF SET X S: Sub scanning direction registration offset set value
(Color is shifted to the sub scanning direction overall.)
Y2
When the adjustment value of OFF SET X F and OFF SET X R are
B-main A-main changed, the color at the center area will be affected. Consider this
when executing the adjustment.
Y1
(Adjustment conditions and method)

To adjust evenly overall, adjust so that the color shifts on the F
side, the R aide and at the center are of the same level.
To adjust with the center area most focused, adjust so that the
A-sub color shift at the center becomes smaller than that on the F side
Color image shift
A-main: Main scan rough adjustment pattern check section and the R side.
A-sub: Sub scan rough adjustment pattern (Rough adjustment)
B-main: Main scan fine adjustment scale
B-sub: Sub scan fine adjustment scale When the offset adjustment value is 0, if the color registration
C: Main scan sub scan fine adjustment pattern
adjustment (automatic adjustment) is performed, the color shift on
the F side and that on the R side are automatically adjusted to be
Check the print patterns of the rough adjustment and the fine smaller than that on the center area.
adjustment of 18 check patterns.
How to check the rough adjustment pattern and input of the Adjustment Default
Display/Item Content
adjustment value: value range value
A CYAN Image registration adjustment 1 - 199 100
Visually check the color image registration check section, use the
(FRONT) value (Main scanning
center position of the black scale as the reference, and check the
direction) (Cyan) (F side)
shift balance in the positive and negative directions at the color
B CYAN Image registration adjustment 1 - 199 100
image line position. (REAR) value (Main scanning
Use the center position of the black scale as the reference, and direction) (Cyan) (R side)
check that the color image line is symmetrical in the positive side C MAGENTA Image registration adjustment 1 - 199 100
and the negative side. (FRONT) value (Main scanning
direction) (Magenta) (F side)
If shift is in the arrow mark X1 and Y1, increase the adjustment
D MAGENTA Image registration adjustment 1 - 199 100
value. If shift is in the arrow mark X2 and Y2, decrease the adjust-
(REAR) value (Main scanning
ment value.
direction) (Magenta) (R side)
The reference arrow on the check pattern faces the positive direc- E YELLOW Image registration adjustment 1 - 199 100
tion. (FRONT) value (Main scanning
(Reference adjustment value) direction) (Yellow) (F side)
F YELLOW Image registration adjustment 1 - 199 100
1 scale/10 (When the set value is changed by 10, shift is made by 1
(REAR) value (Main scanning
scale.)
direction) (Yellow) (R side)
How to check the fine adjustment pattern and input of the G CYAN Image registration adjustment 1 - 199 100
adjustment value: (SUB) value (Sub scanning
Check to confirm that the darkest spot (one of 5 spots seen nor- direction) (Cyan)
mally) is within the center area of the image registration adjustment H MAGENTA Image registration adjustment 1 - 199 100
reference frame in the square frame. (SUB) value (Sub scanning
direction) (Magenta)
At that time, use the color image registration check scale (fine
I YELLOW Image registration adjustment 1 - 199 100
adjustment) as the reference. (SUB) value (Sub scanning
Visually check and consider the darkest section of color density as direction) (Yellow)
the center, and measure the shift from it. J OFFSET Image registration offset 1 - 199 100
Check to confirm that the center of the dark density section is within CF adjustment value (Main
scanning direction) (Cyan)
r 1 step.
(F side)
(If the fine adjustment print pattern is in the range of 0 r 1 for the K OFFSET Image registration offset 1 - 199 100
fine adjustment reference pattern scale, there is no need to adjust.) CR adjustment value (Main
If shift is in the arrow mark X1 and Y1, increase the adjustment scanning direction) (Cyan)
value. If shift is in the arrow mark X2 and Y2, decrease the adjust- (R side)
ment value. L OFFSET Image registration offset 1 - 199 100
MF adjustment value (Main
(Reference adjustment value)
scanning direction)
(Magenta) (F side)

Adjustment Default 2) Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner
Display/Item Content unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper.
value range value
M OFFSET Image registration offset 1 - 199 100 When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on
MR adjustment value (Main the front and the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is
scanning direction) proper.
(Magenta) (R side)
N OFFSET Image registration offset 1 - 199 100
YF adjustment value (Main
scanning direction) (Yellow)
(F side)
O OFFSET Image registration offset 1 - 199 100
YR adjustment value (Main
(R side)
P OFFSET Image registration offset 1 - 199 100
CS adjustment value (Sub
scanning direction) (Cyan)
Q OFFSET Image registration offset 1 - 199 100
MS adjustment value (Sub
scanning direction)
(Magenta)
R OFFSET Image registration offset 1 - 199 100
YS adjustment value (Sub
If this requirement is not met, do the following steps.
3) Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame
side of the scanner unit B.
ADJ 6 Scan image distortion
adjustment
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the copy image is distorted.
6-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism

adjustment
Before execution of this adjustment, remove the document table
glass.
1) Remove the lamp unit, and then loosen the screws which are
fixing the scanner unit A and the drive wire. Release the scan-
ner unit A from the drive wire.
4) Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers
on the front and the rear frames simultaneously.

5) Fix the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit
B. 6-B Scan image (sub scanning direction)
If a satisfactory result is not obtained from the above proce- distortion adjustment
dures, perform the following procedures. 1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
Loosen the fixing screw of the scanner unit drive pulley which (Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
is not in contact.
L
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, turn the scanner
unit drive pulley manually and adjust so that the scanner unit B
is in contact with both stoppers on the front frame and the rear
frame simultaneously. (Change the relative position of the
scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) Fix the scanner
L L
unit drive pulley fixing screw.
L = 10mm
2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-

ment table. (Shift the test chart edge 30mm from the reference
position as shown below.) With the document cover open,
make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.
30mm
6) With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the
edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame, and
fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw.
3) Check for distortion in the sub scanning direction.

If La = Lb, there is no distortion.
La Lb
If there is any distortion in the sub scanning direction, perform

the following procedures.

4) Loosen either one of the fixing screws of the scanner unit drive 4) Check the difference (distortion balance) between left-hand
pulley. (Either one on the front frame or on the rear frame will and right-hand side images distortions.
do.)
Lc Lc
Copy A Copy B
Ld Ld
There is no difference There is some difference
between the distortion on between the distortion on
the right and that on the left. the right and that on the left.
Lc Ld Lc Ld
If Lc = Ld, the distortion on the left is equal to that on the right.

(The distortions are balanced.)
If the above condition is satisfied, go to the procedure 6).
If not, perform the following procedures.
5) Change the height balance of the scanner rail on the front
frame side.
5) Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, manually turn the
scanner unit drive pulley to change the parallelism of the scan-
ner unit A and B. (Change the relative position of the scanner
unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.)
6) Tighten the scanner unit drive pulley fixing screw.
Repeat the procedures 2) - 6) until the condition of the procedure 3)
is satisfied.
6-C Scan image (main scanning direction)

distortion adjustment
1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
Remove the lower cabinet of the operation panel. Loosen the

scanner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the
right and the left heights of the scanner rail.
L L
Repeat the procedures 2) - 5) until the difference between the
image distortions (distortion balance) is deleted.
6) Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the front
frame side, change the overall height.
L = 10mm
ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Check
L that the distortion in the main scanning direction is within the
specified range.
ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the distortion in the main
scanning direction is in the specified range.
3) Check for distortion in the main scanning direction.
If the four angles of the rectangle of the copy image are right
angles, it is judged that there is no distortion. (The work is
completed.)
If there is any distortion in the main scanning direction, perform

the following procedure.

3) Open the RSPF unit, and loosen the fixing screw of the hinge.
ADJ 7 Scanner image skew
adjustment (RSPF mode)
* The RSPF section has been disassembled.
* When replacing the RSPF unit.
* The RSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1) Create an adjustment chart by printing in duplex mode the self-
print pattern (grid pattern) specified in Simulation 64-2.
SIM 64-2 set values
A = 1, B = 1, C = 254, D = 255
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks A and B to the
leading and trailing edges of the paper surface lead edge sec-
tion.
4) Slide the RSPF unit in the arrow direction to make the skew
adjustment.
5) Make a copy again and measure (a) and (b) on the copied test
A Paper pass direction chart. Repeat procedures 2) to 5) until the condition ((a) - (b) =
r 1mm or less) is satisfied.
ADJ 8 Scan image focus adjustment

* The CCD unit has been removed from the machine.
B * The CCD unit has been replaced.
* When the copy image focus is not properly adjusted.
* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scan-
2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17") ning direction is not properly adjusted.
paper in RSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for * U2 trouble has occurred.
skews (Set in the RSPF feed tray so that the mark on the 1) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
adjustment chart is at the edge).
• Check with one of the following methods.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Check Method 1 0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&&' 0$,1
$˖ %˖ ˖&&' 68%
(Front side)
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63) 0$,1
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| ± 1 mm
'˖ ˖63) 68%
(˖ ˖63)% 0$,1
)˖ ˖63)% 68%
A B
a b
2.
Check Method 2 2) Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value).
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
1.0mm. 3) Place a scale on the original table as illustrated below.
0 - 1.0mm
If the copy image is not in the above state, perform the pro-
cedure 3).

4) Make a normal copy on A4 paper.
Go to the copy mode, and make a copy.
5) Compare the copied image of the scale and the actual scale
length in terms of length.
6) Obtain the copy magnification ratio correction ratio in the main
scanning direction from the following formula.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (Original size - Copy image size) / Original size x 100%
(Example)
Compare the scale of 10mm with the scale of 10mm on the
copy image.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (100 - 99) / 100 x 100 = 1
100mm scale
(Orignal)
10 20 90 100 110
Never loosen the screws marked with X.

If any one of these screws is loosened, the position and the
1.0mm
angle of the CCD unit base may be changed to cause a prob-
lem, which cannot be adjusted in the market. In that case, the
Copy image whole scanner unit must be replaced.
(1mm (1%) 11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
10 20 90 100 110 direction) to change the installing position.
shorter than
the original) When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform the One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
following procedures.
At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
7) Remove the document table glass. scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
8) Remove the dark box cover. * Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
9) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the in procedure 9).
CCD unit base as shown below.
12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 r 1%,
repeat the procedures of 9) - 11) until the condition is satisfied.
This procedure must be executed also when the CCD unit is

replaced. By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simulation 48-1
10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws. adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification ratio is adjusted
within the specified range (100 r 1.0%) and the specified resolution
is obtained based on the optical system structure.

Setting
ADJ 9 Print lead edge image position Display/Item Content
range
Default
J DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void area 1 - 99 50

adjustment (Printer mode) adjustment correction value
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: K DENB-HV Heavy paper correction 1 - 99 50
value
* When the registration roller section is disassembled.
L MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
M PAPER MFT Tray Manual 1-5 1 2 (CS1)
* U2 trouble has occurred. selection paper feed
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. CS1 Tray 1 2
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
N DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
This adjustment is performed by the user to increase the lead edge NO selection No 1
void area to greater than the standard value (3mm) in the printer
mode. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Enter the SIM 50-5 mode. The adjustment pattern is printed.
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8( 35,17(5 in the standard adjustment value range.
$˖ ˖'(1&
$˖ %˖ ˖'(1%
Standard adjustment value: 4.0 r 1.0mm
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)52175($5
'˖ ˖'(1%0)7
(˖ ˖'(1%&6
)˖ ˖'(1%&6
*˖ ˖'(1%&6
+˖ ˖'(1%&6
,˖ ˖'(1%/&&
-˖ ˖'(1%$'8
.˖ ˖'(1%+9
/˖ ˖ 08/7,&2817
4.0 1.0mm
(;(&87( 2.
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE End of print

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8( 35,17(5
$˖ ˖'(1&
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
$˖ %˖ ˖'(1%
5) Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjust-
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)52175($5
'˖ ˖'(1%0)7
ment item DENC with the scroll key.
(˖ ˖'(1%&6
6) Change the adjustment value.
)˖ ˖'(1%&6
*˖ ˖'(1%&6 Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the
+˖ ˖'(1%&6
[EXECUTE] key.
,˖ ˖'(1%/&&
-˖ ˖'(1%$'8 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
.˖ ˖'(1%+9
printed.
/˖ ˖08/7,&2817
(;(&87( 2. When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
2) Select the set item L with the scroll key, and enter the value paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When
corresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11" x 8.5") paper the adjustment value is decreased, the distance is decreased.
in it. When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed
by about 0.1mm.
Setting Repeat the procedures 4) - 6) until the condition of 4) is satisfied.
Display/Item Content Default
range
A DEN-C Printer lead edge image 1 - 99 30
position adjustment
B DEN-B Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30 ADJ 10 Color balance/density
adjustment adjustment
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area 1 - 99 20
adjustment (1) Note before execution of the color balance/density
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge void 1 - 99 50 adjustment
area adjustment correction * Requisite conditions before execution of the color balance/den-
value sity adjustment
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction value
Before execution of the color balance/density adjustment, check
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
to insure that the adjustments which affect the color balance/den-
adjustment correction value sity have been completed properly.
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50 The importance levels of them are shown below.
adjustment correction value (Since the following items affect the color balance/density
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50 directly, they must be adjusted or set before execution of the
adjustment correction value image quality adjustments.)
I DENB-LCC LCC rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction value

1) The following adjustment items must be adjusted properly. a. Note for execution of the color balance and density check
in the color copy mode
Job
Adjustment item Simulation To check the copy color balance and density, use the gray test
No
chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and the servicing color test chart
ADJ Print engine image distortion adjustment / OPC drum 50-22/20
(UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11). Set the copy density
5 phase adjustment / Color registration adjustment
(Print engine section) level to "3" in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual), and make
a copy.
(Though the following items affect the color balance/density, At that time, all the color balance adjustments in the user
there is no need to adjust them frequently. When, however, a adjustment mode must be set to the default (center).
trouble occurs, they must be checked and adjusted.)
In addition, be sure to use the specified paper for color.
1) The following items must be adjusted properly.
b. Note for checking the monochrome copy mode density
Job To check the density, use the gray test chart (UKOG-
Adjustment item Simulation 0162FCZZ). Set the copy density level to "Manual 3" in the
No
ADJ Adjust the ADJ Adjust the developing Text/ Printed Photo mode (Manual).
1 developing unit 1A doctor gap In addition, all the color balance adjustments in the user
ADJ Adjust the developing adjustment mode must be set to the default (center).
1B roller main pole position
Check with the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ)
ADJ Toner density control 25-2
1C reference value setting In the copy density check with the gray test chart, check to insure
ADJ Adjusting high ADJ Adjust the main charger 8-2 the following conditions.
2 voltage values 2A grid voltage
ADJ Adjust the developing 8-1
2B bias voltage
For the color (gray) balance, use the servicing color test chart
ADJ Transfer current and 8-6
(UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to check.
2C voltage adjustment
ADJ Scan image focus adjustment 48-1 (Color copy)
8 Patch 1 is SHARP gray chart
slightly copied.
SHARP GRAY CHART
Note for the color balance/density check and adjustments 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
• For the color balance adjustments, be sure to use the paper

specified for color (recommended paper).
Note that, if another kind of paper is used for the color balance
adjustment, proper image qualities (color balance, density) may
Patch 2 is copied.
not be obtained.
• When setting the adjustment pattern on the document table in
(Black-and-white copy)
the automatic color balance adjustment procedures, place 5
Patch 2 is SHARP gray chart
sheets of white paper on the adjustment pattern in order to pre- slightly copied.
vent back copying and adverse effects of paper wrinkles as far SHARP GRAY CHART
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
as possible.
(2) Relationship between the servicing job contents and the

color balance/density check and adjustment
Patch 3 is copied.
Note that the jobs before and after execution of the color balance/
Patch 1 is not copied.
density check and adjustment depend on the machine status and
the servicing conditions.
Follow the flowchart of the color balance/density adjustment proce- Check with the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/
dures depending on the actual conditions. UKOG-0326FC11)
There are following four, major cases. In the copy color balance check with the servicing color test chart,
check to insure the following conditions.
1) When installing (When a printer option is installed)
2) When a periodic maintenance is performed. (Color copy)
3) When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed. Serviceman chart (Color patch section)
(When a consumable part is replaced.)
4) When an installation, a repair, or inspection is performed.
(Without replacement of a consumable part)
(3) Copy color balance and density check
The densities of patches 1 - 6 of Patch 7 is slightly

Before checking the copy color balance and density, be sure to each color are properly balanced. copied or not copied.
execute the following jobs.

* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction)
forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
* Execute the half-tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
Method 1
Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and a copy
of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-
0326FC11), and check that they are proper.

a. Color copy check items (Check to confirm the following:)
1) There are 12 void areas. 4) The color difference in gray balance between the F and the R
2) Registrations (one point for the main scanning, and one point sides is not so great.
for the sub scanning) are not shifted. 5) There are no white and black streaks.
3) The resolution of 5.0 (5 points) can be seen. 6) Color texts are clearly reproduced.
7) The background density is not so light.
Void Void
Resolution Resolution
Color difference in gray balance between the F and the R sides

No white and black streaks
Background density
Resolution Registration
Void Void
Color text reproduction capability

Resolution
Resolution
Void Void

b. Monochrome copy check items (Check to confirm the following:)
1) There are 12 void areas. 4) There are no white and black streaks.
2) The resolution of 4.0 (5 points) can be seen. 5) The background density is not so light.
3) The density difference between the F and the R sides is not so 6) The black low-density gradation is copied slightly.
great.
Void Void
Density difference between the F and the R sides.

No white and black streaks
Resolution
Void Void
Low-density gradation
Background density
Void Void

(Method 2) (Method 2)
Use SIM46-21 to print the color balance adjustment sheet, and Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance adjustment sheet and
check each process (CMY) black patch color balance and the black compare each process (CMY) black patch color balance and the
patch in order to confirm that the color balance adjustment is black patch to check the color balance.
proper or not more precisely.
PRINTER CALIBRATION
Low High
Low density High density
density density
Y Y
M M
C C
Bk
Bk
CMY
blend CMY
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q blend
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q
1) The max. density section is not blurred.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C, and BK is very slightly copied.
3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK

The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
The patch density is changed gradually. 3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY mixed The patch density is changed gradually.
color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the adjustment is
proper. If the color balance of the adjustment pattern printed in this The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
mode is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is converted into the natural to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
gray color balance by the color table in an actual copy mode. reversed.
(When the color balance target is DEF 1.) The density level of each color must be almost at the same level.
(4) Printer color balance/density check Patch B may not be copied.
Patch A must not be copied.
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY mixed
Before checking the copy color balance and the density, be sure to color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the adjustment is
execute the following procedures in advance. proper. In an actual print mode, it is converted into the natural gray
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) color balance by the color table. (When the color balance target is
forcibly. (SIM 44-6) DEF 1.)
* The half-tone image correction is forcibly executed. (SIM 44-26)
(Method 1)
10-A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration)
Execute SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern. This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When the CCD unit is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble is occurred.
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The * When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
print test pattern is printed. * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
(1) Note before adjustment
• Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens sur-
face are free from dirt and dust.
(If there is some dust and dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.)
• Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of the
SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are free from
dirt and scratches.
If they are dirty, clean them.
If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
reversed. The density level of each color must be almost at the
same level.

(2) Adjustment procedures
1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to
the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu- Since the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FC Z1)
ment table. is easily discolored by sunlight (especially ultraviolet rays) and
Set the chart so that the lighter density side of the patch is on humidity and temperature, put it in a bag (such as a dark file)
the left side. and store in a dark place of low temperature and low humidity.
SET 1 Color balance adjustment target setup

a. General
When the automatic color balance adjustment is executed, a cer-
tain color balance (gamma) is used as the target.
There are following three kinds of the target.
• Factory color balance (gamma) target
• Service color balance (gamma) target
• User color balance (gamma) target
In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set
to a desired level.
This setting is required in the following cases.
* When the color balance and density adjustments are executed
manually (SIM46-21) (SIM67-25)
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
* When the user requests for customizing the color balance.
* When the service color balance target gamma is judged as
improper.
SET 1A Copy color balance adjustment target setup
• Each color balance target for the copy color balance adjustment
Type Descriptions
A Factory color There are three kinds of the color balance target,
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the balance (gamma) and each of them is specified according to the
CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust- target machine design. Use SIM 63-11 to select one of
them as the factory target. The default setting
ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
(factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1)
method using the SIT chart.
which emphasizes color reproduction.
B Service color This target is used when the user requests to
balance (gamma) customize the color balance to user's desired
Check to insure that the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or target level. In advance, the user's unique color
UKOG-0280FCZ1) is in close contact with the document table. balance must be registered as the service color
balance target. The above registration (setting)
is made by the serviceman with SIM 46-21 to
adjust the color balance and with SIM 63-7 to
UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1. register it.
This color balance target is used when the user
2) Enter the SIM 63-3 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
executes the color balance adjustment. When,
The automatic operation is started. During the adjustment, therefore, the service color balance target is
[EXECUTE] is highlighted. After completion of the adjustment, changed, the color balance target of the user's
[EXECUTE] returns to the normal display. color balance adjustment is also changed.
When, however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color

balance is set to the factory color balance target
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( set with SIM 63-11. The default setting (factory
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17 setting) of the color balance is same as the
6(77+(&+$5721'63)$1'728&+>(;(&87(@
factory color balance target. (Emphasized on
color reproduction (DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the
color balance, be sure to use SIM 63-8 to set the
color balance to the factory color balance target.
C User color Same color balance as the service color balance
balance (gamma) (gamma) target When the service color balance
target target is changed, this color balance target is
also changed accordingly.
(;(&87(

• Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the copy
color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/46-24)
Color balance target in the copy color balance

automatic adjustment (SIM 46-24)
Factory color balance

Use SIM 63-11 to select one of the three target (DEF1) = Service color balance
target Factory setting
kinds of color balance targets.
target (DEF1) Factory color balance Service color balance Use SIM 46-21 to adjust the optional color
target (one of DEF1 - 3) target (Unique) balance, and use SIM 63-7 to register it.
target (DEF2)
target (DEF3) Factory color balance Execute SIM 63-8.
target
(one of DEF1 - 3)
= Service color balance
target (The service color balance target is the
same as the factory color balance target.)
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
Color balance target for Service color balance

the user color balance
adjustment
= target
• Factory target in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-74/46-24)

By use of SIM 63-11, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
SIM63-8
Factory color balance target (DEF2) =
Factory color balance target Service color balance target/Color balance
(DEF2) target for the user color balance adjustment
+b* Direction of Yellow SIM63-8

Factory color balance target
Factory color balance target (DEF1) = Service color balance
Hue (DEF1) target/Color balance target for the
user color balance adjustment
Direction
of Green
Item Content Default

DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance DEF1
(A) operation is slightly shifted to Magenta. When this target is selected, the
color balance is converted into natural gray color balance by the color
correction table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
Direction
of Red DEF2 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to natural gray color balance. When this target
is selected, the color balance is slightly shifted to Cyan by the color
correction table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
DEF3 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When this target is selected, the color
balance is converted into the color balance with enhanced Cyan by the
color correction table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
Direction of Blue

SIM63-8
• Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjust- (Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and the
ment ((Automatic adjustment) SIM 46-74/46-24). purpose of registration)
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is
can be adjusted with SIM 46-21 and registered with SIM 63-7. customized with SIM 46-21.
When, however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
the same balance as the factory color balance target set with required.
SIM 63-11.
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man-
• Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment ual) with SIM 46-21 according to the user's request, use SIM 63-7
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in to register the service color balance target data by using adjust-
the copy color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM ment pattern that was printed in this mode.
46-74/46-24). When, therefore, the service color balance target
is changed, this target is also changed accordingly.
In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for printing the
adjustment pattern by SIM 46-21.
By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised.

It is recommended to keep the printed adjustment pattern created A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another
with SIM 46-21. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the machine can be used.
same color balance target to another machine. Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side.
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image
Do not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it (adjustment pattern).
from discoloration and dirt. If the color balance could not be adjusted satisfactorily with
The service color balance target data is registered immediately SIM 46-21 (Color balance adjustment (Manual)), do not exe-
after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21. cute SIM 63-7 to register the service color balance target data.
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color bal- 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
ance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21, the color balance of the
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time. 6&$11(57$5*(72)&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment. 6(77+(&+$57213/$7(1$1'728&+>(;(&87(@
The accuracy of the service color balance target data can be

judges as follows.
When result of the color valance adjustment (Auto) with selecting
the service color balance target in SIM 46-74/46-24 is unsatisfac-
tory or abnormal.
In that case, the registered service target data for the color balance
adjustment (Auto) may be improper.
This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
(;(&87(
adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance
target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 63-7.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read.
The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was
6) Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image
made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
(adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again.
SIM 46-21. This procedure may have been executed erroneously

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
a. Setting procedure 7(67
6&$11(57$5*(72)&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
&/26(
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as the 12:&+$573$7&+5($',1*
service color balance target)

1) Use SIM 46-21 (Copy color balance adjustment (manual
adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image
(adjustment pattern).
In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for printing

the adjustment pattern by SIM 46-21.
(;(&87(
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color
is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an (KCMY) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.
optional color balance is requested by the user, make an Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B - Q
adjustment. (MAX). If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is
2) Enter the SIM 63-7 mode. judged as abnormal.
In case of an abnormality, repair the problem and try again.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( 7) Press [OK] key.
6&$11(57$5*(72)&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
%&'()
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjust-
*+,-. ment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service tar-
㩺㪣012
get.
(Procedures to set the service color balance target and the

color balance target for the user color balance adjustment to
the same color balance as the factory color balance target)
. & 0 < 6(783 This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance
was adjusted with SIM 46-21 to a unique color balance requested
3) Press [SETUP] key. by the user and it was registered as the service color balance tar-
4) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly get with SIM 63-7.
adjusted and printed in the copy color balance adjustment When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 63-11,
(Manual adjustment) (SIM 46-21) (ADJ 10C (2)) on the docu- be sure to execute this procedure.
ment table.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed with SIM
64-7 can be used instead. In this case, however, check that
the printed pattern is normal.
(When the color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed by
SIM 64-7, set the item B (PROC ADJ) to "0 (YES)" and press
[EXECUTE] key to print.)

1) Enter the SIM 63-8 mode. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
The service color balance target and the color balance target for
67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(76(77,1*6(59,&( the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color bal-
ance as the factory color balance target.
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
SET 1B Printer color balance adjustment target setup

• Color balance target for the printer color balance adjustment
Type Descriptions
A Factory color There are three kinds of the color balance targets, and each of them is specified according to the machine design. Use SIM 67-26 to
balance (gamma) select one of them as the factory target. The default setting (factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1) which emphasizes color
target reproduction.
B Service color This target is used when the user requests to customize the color balance to user's desired level. In advance, the user's unique color
balance (gamma) balance must be registered as the service color balance target. The above registration (setting) is made by the serviceman with SIM
target 67-25 to adjust the color balance and with SIM 67-27 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user executes the color balance adjustment. When, therefore, the service color balance
target is changed, the color balance target of the user's color balance adjustment is also changed. When, however, SIM 67-28 is
executed, the color balance is set to the factory color balance target set with SIM 67-26. The default setting (factory setting) of the color
balance is same as the factory color balance target. (Emphasized on color reproduction (DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the color balance, be sure to use SIM 67-28 to set the color balance to the factory color
balance target.
C User color balance Same color balance as the service color balance (gamma) target When the service color balance target is changed, this color balance
(gamma) target target is also changed accordingly.
• Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the
printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/76-24)
Color balance target in the printer color balance

automatic adjustment (SIM 67-24)
Use SIM 67-26 to select one of the three

target (DEF1)
= Service color balance
target
Factory setting
kinds of color balance targets.
target (DEF1) Factory color balance Service color balance Use SIM 67-25 to adjust the optional color
target (one of DEF1 - 3) target (Unique) balance, and use SIM 67-27 to register it.
target (DEF2)
Execute SIM 67-28.
target (DEF3) Factory color balance
target (one of DEF1 - 3) = Service color balance
target
(The service color balance target is
the same as the factory color balance
target.)
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
Color balance target for Service color balance

the user color balance
adjustment
= target

• Factory target in the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/67-24)
By use of SIM 67-26, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
SIM67-28
+b* Direction of Yellow SIM67-28 Factory color balance target (DEF1)

Factory color balance target = Service color balance target/Color
(DEF1) balance target for theuser color
Hue balance adjustment
Direction
of Green
Item Content Default

DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment target in the automatic color balance DEF1
ĩłĪ operation is slightly shifted to Magenta. When this target is selected, the
color balance is converted into natural gray color balance by the color
table in an actual printer mode and print is made. (Factory setting)
operation is slightly shifted to natural gray color balance. When this target
is selected, the color balance is slightly shifted to Cyan by the color table
Direction in an actual copy mode and print is made.
of Red
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When this target is selected, the color
balance is converted into the color balance with enhanced Cyan by the
color table in an actual copy mode and print is made.
Direction of Blue

(DEF3) SIM67-28 target for the user color balance adjustment
• Service color balance target in the printer color balance adjust- If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color bal-
ment (Automatic adjustment) (SIM 46-74/67-24). ance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25, the color balance of the
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
can be adjusted with SIM 67-25 and registered with SIM 67-27. balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time.
When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color balance is set Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
to the same balance as the factory color balance target set with The correctness of the service color balance target data can be
SIM 67-26. judged as follows.
• Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment When result of the color valance adjustment (Auto) with selecting
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in the service color balance target in SIM 67-24 is unsatisfactory or
the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment) abnormal.
(SIM 46-74/67-24). When, therefore, the service color balance In that case, the registered service target data for the color balance
target is changed, this target is also changed accordingly. adjustment (Auto) may be improper.
(Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and the This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
purpose of registration) adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 67-27.
customized with SIM 67-25. The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
required. SIM 67-25. This procedure may have been executed erroneously.
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man- a. Setting procedure
ual) with SIM 67-25 according to the user's request, use SIM 67-27 (Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as the
to register the service color balance target data by use of the service color balance target)
printed adjustment pattern. 1) Use SIM 67-25 (Printer color balance adjustment (manual
adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image
In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for printing the
adjustment pattern by SIM 67-25.
By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised. In this case, be sure to use A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper for printing
It is recommended to keep the printed adjustment pattern created the adjustment pattern by SIM 67-25.
with SIM 67-25. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the
same color balance target to another machine. If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data. Do is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an
not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it from optional color balance is requested by the user, make an
discoloration and dirt. adjustment.
The service color balance target data is basically registered imme-
diately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25.

2) Enter the SIM 67-27 mode. (Procedures to set the service color balance target and the
color balance target for the user color balance adjustment to

the same color balance as the factory color balance target)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/2(&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
%&'()
*+,-.
/012 This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance
was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color balance requested
by the user and it was registered as the service color balance tar-
get with SIM 67-27.
When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 67-26,
be sure to execute this procedure.
. & 0 < 6(783

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3) Press [SETUP] key. 67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/25&$/,%6(59,&(
4) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly

adjusted and printed in the printer color balance adjustment
(Manual adjustment) (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 10E (2)) on the docu-
ment table.
A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another
machine can be used.
Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
This procedure must not be executed when the copy color bal-
ance (manual) was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color
balance requested by the user and it was registered as the 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
service color balance target with SIM 67-27. 3) Press [YES] key.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. The service color balance target and the color balance target for
the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color bal-

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ance as the factory color balance target.
6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/2(&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
12:&+$573$7&+5($',1*
10-B Copy/Printer color balance and density

adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
(Basic adjustment)
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
replaced.
* When the CCD unit is replaced.
(;(&87( * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read.
6) Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image
(adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again. * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/2(&$/,%6(7836(59,&( * The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
%$6(
%&'() a. General
*+,-.
/012
SIM46-74 is used to perform the automatic copy color balance and
density adjustment (SIM46-24) and the automatic printer color bal-
ance and density adjustment (SIM67-24) continuously.
Since it is desirable to perform the copy color balance adjustment
(automatic adjustment) before the automatic printer color balance
and density adjustment, it is advisable to perform the adjustment in
this mode.
. & 0 < 5(3($7 2.
This mode is also advisable to effectively perform both of the auto-
matic copy color balance and density adjustment (SIM46-24) and
The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color (K, C,
the automatic printer color balance and density adjustment (SIM67-
M and Y) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.
24). It saves considerable time when compared with performing
Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B - Q each of the auto copy/printer color balance and the density adjust-
(MAX). If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is ment individually.
judged as abnormal.
The color balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is used to
In case of an abnormality, repair the problem and try again. adjust the copy density of each of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and
7) Press [OK] key. Black automatically.
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjust- When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
ment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service tar- of all the copy/printer modes are revised.
get.

b. Adjustment procedures
(Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman)
Copy/printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
(SIM46-74) procedure flowchart
Start
Execute ADJ10B Copy color balance and density/Printer color balance and density
adjustment (automatic density). (SIM46-74)
(Copy color balance and density adjustment (automatic adjustment))
Enter the SIM46-74 mode, and select A4 (11" x 8.5") paper. (Automatic selection)
Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the FACTORY target or the
SERVICE target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to
print the check pattern.) (*1)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4)
(Printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment))
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the FACTORY target or the
SERVICE target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to
print the check pattern.) (*1) Automatic adjustment color balance target change
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4) Change the color balance and density target.
(SIM63-11)
Press [OK] key. (The initial setting of the halftone image correction is automatically
performed.) (*2) NO
Press [EXECUTE] key. (Execute the halftone image correction.)

Though the FACTORY
color balance and density
Cancel SIM46-74. target (available in 3 kinds)
is changed, satisfactory
Check the copy color balance and density adjustment result.
are not obtained (SIM63-
11), or the SERVICE
Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a copy in the Text target is selected.
/Printed Photo mode, and check the copy color balance and density.
Use SIM46-21 to print the color balance check pattern, and check the patch color YES
balance and density in the process gray. (If the color balance is slightly shifted to
Magenta, it is properly adjusted.)
Execute ADJ10C(2) (Copy color balance and density

adjustment) (Manual adjustment). (SIM46-21/44-21)
Are the color balance and density NO
(*3)
at the specified level? *1:
When the color balance and
YES density are customized and
Execute ADJ10C(1) (Printer color balance and registered as the SERVICE
density adjustment) (Automatic adjustment). target, select the SERVICE
(SIM67-24) target.
*2:
NO Is the PCL printer If the initial setting of the
Automatic color balance target change
function provided? halftone image correction is
not properly adjusted,
Change the color balance and density target.
satisfactory color balance and
(SIM67-26)
YES density cannot be obtained. In
NO this case, check the print
engine for any problems.
Check the printer color balance and density adjustment result with the self print *3:
check pattern. If satisfactory color balance and
Though the FACTORY density are not obtained with
Use SIM67-25 to print the self print Use SIM64-5 to print the self print color balance and density ADJ10C(2) (Copy color balance
target (available in 3 kinds) and density adjustment) (Manual
check pattern, and check the printer check pattern, and check the printer
is changed, satisfactory
color balance and density. color balance and density. adjustment) (SIM46-21/44-21),
are not obtained (SIM67- check the print engine for any
26), or the SERVICE problems.
target is selected.
*4:
Are the color balance NO If there is any streak or unclear
and density at the copy on the printed check
specified level? YES pattern, check the print engine
for any problems.
YES
Execute ADJ10C(2) (Printer color
End balance and density adjustment)
(Manual adjustment). (SIM67-25)

1) Enter the SIM46-74 mode. 4) Select [FACTORY] target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
When the color balance is customized by the manual color bal-
ance adjustment (SIM 46-21) according to the user's request,
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(17 6(59,&( and the color balance is registered with SIM63-7 as the service
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
target, if the color balance is required to be adjusted, select the

3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$ $ 25; ; 6,=(3$3(5
[SERVICE] target.
)257+,6$'-8670(17

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(17 6(59,&(
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'( )$&725< 25 6(59,&( $1'3/$&(
7+(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
(;(&87(

The high density process control is performed, and the copy
color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
)$&725< 6(59,&( (;(&87(
(A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.)

The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( and prints the color balance check patch image.
(1*,1($872$'-8670(17 6(59,&(
352&21(;(&87,1* If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pat-
tern, check the print engine for any problems.
Low High
density density
(;(&87(
Y
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in M

procedure 2) on the document table.
C
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
procedure 2) on the document table. Place the color patch
Bk
image so that the fine lines are on the left side. At that time,
place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q

The printer color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed
out. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically
selected.)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(17 6(59,&(
&21),507+($'-3$7&+$1'35(66>(;(&87(@72$'-2)5(*,675$7,21(;(
$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17
(;(&87(

6) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the The printer color balance adjustment (step 1) is automatically
procedure 5) on the document table. performed and the color balance check patch image is printed
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the out.
procedure 2) on the document table. Place the color patch If there is any streak or unclear print on the printed check pat-
image so that the fine lines are on the left side. At that time, tern, check the print engine for any problems.
place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image
PRINTER CALIBRATION
PRINTER CALIBRATION

;
$M
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3

The patch density is changed gradually.
8) The initial setting menu of the halftone image correction is dis-

played. Press [OK] key.
7) Select [FACTORY] target, and press [EXECUTE] key. The initial setting of the halftone image correction is per-
When the color balance is customized with the manual color formed.
balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar-

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
get with SIM 67-27, if the color balance is adjusted to that color (1*,1($872$'-8670(17 6(59,&(
balance, select the [SERVICE] target. &21),507+($'-867('3$7&+$1'35(66>2.@725(*,67(57+,63$7&+'$7$

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(17 6(59,&(
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'( )$&725< 25 6(59,&( $1'3/$&(
7+(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
2.
9) Wait until [EXECUTE] key is displayed. When it is displayed,

press it.
)$&725< 6(59,&( (;(&87(
The halftone image correction is performed.

10) When "COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the
adjustment operation is completed. 10-C Copy quality adjustment (Basic adjustment)
Cancel SIM46-74. This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
replaced.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(17 6(59,&(
* The CCD unit has been replaced.
&203/(7(7+,6352&('85(
3/($6(48,77+,602'(
2. * When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
5(68/7 5(75<
10-C (1)
Copy color balance and density adjustment
(Automatic adjustment)
The adjustment result becomes valid only when the both a. General
adjustments in the copy mode and in the printer mode are The color balance adjustment (automatic adjustment) is used to
completed. adjust the copy density of each of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and
Black automatically.
For example, if the copy color balance adjustment (automatic
adjustment) is performed and the simulation is canceled, the When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
adjustment result is invalid. of all the copy modes are revised.
11) Check the copy color balance and density.
(Refer to the item of the copy color balance and density There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjust-
check.) ment.
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained 1) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 46-24
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in is used.)
procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM 2) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
63-11 and repeat the procedures from 1). mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.)
If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above proce- The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
dure, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ 10C reduce the number of service calls.
(2)). If the copy color balance is lost for some reason, the user can
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe- use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ machine condition is greatly changed, this function does not
10C (2)). work effectively.
12) Check the printer color balance and density. If the machine condition is dramatically changed, a fatal prob-
(Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density lem occurs, or the normal color targets cannot be obtained,
check.) service must recalibrate the machine to specification.
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in understood.
procedure 7), change the factory color balance target with SIM
67-26 and repeat the procedures from 1).
If a satisfactory result on the color balance and the density is
not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the man-
ual adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 10E (2)).
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 7) to exe-
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
10E (2)).
If the color balance or density is not in the satisfactory level even
after execution of the automatic and manual adjustments, there
may be another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause, repair or perform necessary works, and
repeat the adjustment from the beginning.

b. Adjustment procedure
Copy color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
(SIM46-24) procedure flowchart
Start
Execute ADJ10C(1) Copy color balance and density adjustment

(automatic density).
Enter the SIM46-24 mode, and select A4 (11" x 8.5") paper.

(Automatic selection)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the

FACTORY target or the SERVICE target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is
automatically performed to print the check pattern.) (*1)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4)
Press [OK] key, and the initial setting of the halftone image correction
is automatically performed. (*3) Automatic color balance target change
Cancel SIM46-24 Change the color balance and

density target. (SIM63-11)
Check the color balance and density adjustment result. NO
Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a

copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check the copy color bal- Though the
ance and density. FACTORY color
balance and density
target (available in 3 kinds)
Use SIM46-21 to print the color balance check pattern, and check the is changed, satisfactory color
patch color balance and density in the process gray. (If the color bal- balance and density are not
obtained (SIM63-11),
ance is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is properly adjusted.) or the SERVICE
target is selected.
Are the color balance and den- NO YES

sity at the satisfactory level?
Execute ADJ10C(2) (Manual copy color

YES balance and density adjustment).
(SIM46-21/44-21).(*2)
Check that the initial setting of the halftone image correction was properly
performed. (*3) *1:
When the copy color balance and density are
customized and registered as the SERVICE
Execute the initial setting of the halftone image correction. target, select the SERVICE target.
(SIM44-21) *2:
If satisfactory color balance and density are
not obtained with ADJ10C(2) (Manual copy
Execute the halftone image correction. (SIM44-26) color balance and density adjustment)
(SIM46-21/44-21), check the print engine for
Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) any problems.
to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check *3:
the color balance and density. If the initial setting of the halftone image
correction is not properly made, satisfactory
color balance and density cannot be
obtained. In this case, check the print engine
NO Are the color balance and den- for any problems.
sity at the satisfactory level? *4:
If there is any streak or unclear copy on the
printed check pattern, check the print engine
YES for any problems.
End

1) Enter the SIM 46-24 mode. The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed
to print the color balance check patch image. Wait until the
operation panel shown in procedure 5) is displayed.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'( 5(*8/$5
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17
Low High
density density
Y
M
(;(&87(
C
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is
automatically selected.) Bk
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in

Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper
on the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are
on the left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed
color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper.
5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.

According to data of this adjustment, the initial setting of the
halftone image correction is performed.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'( 5(*8/$5
&21),507+($'-867('3$7&+$1'35(66>2.@725(*,67(57+,63$7&+'$7$
2.
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the halftone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON." is dis-
4) Select [FACTORY] target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
played. This operation takes several minutes.
When the color balance is customized with the manual color
After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
balance adjustment (SIM 46-21) according to the user's
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar- MODE" is displayed.
get with SIM 63-7, if the color balance is adjusted to that color Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
balance, select the service target. MODE" is displayed.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'( 5(*8/$5
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'( 5(*8/$5
&203/(7('7+,6352&('85(
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'( )$&725< 25 6(59,&( $1'3/$&(
7+(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
3/($6(48,77+,602'(
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
)$&725< 6(59,&( (;(&87(

6) Check the color balance and density. 11) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-
(Refer to the item of the copy color balance and density 0317FC11) in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check
check.) the copy color balance/density. (Refer to the item of the copy
color balance and density check.)
7) Use SIM44-26 to execute the halftone image correction.
(Forcible execution) Though the above procedures 9) - 11) are performed, the copy
Enter the SIM44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key. color balance and density are not in the specified range, there may
be another cause.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.
repeat the adjustment from the beginning.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained from
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57 the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in proce-
dure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM 63-11 and
repeat the procedures from 1).
If a satisfactory result on the color balance and the density is not
obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the manual
adjustment (SIM 46-21) (ADJ 10C (2)).
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 7) to execute
the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not obtained,
perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ 10C(2)).
(;(&87(
If the color balance or density is not in the satisfactory level even

It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com- after execution of the automatic and manual adjustments, there
pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed. may be another cause.
(Normal end (Auto transition)) repeat the adjustment from the beginning.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21 10-C (2)
5(68/7
Copy color balance and density adjustment
&203/(7( (Manual adjustment)
a. General
The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to
adjust the copy density of CMYK. This is used at the following situ-
ation. When the result of auto adjustment described above is not
existing within the range of reference. When a fine adjustment is
required. When there is request from the user for changing (cus-
5(68/7 (;(&87(
tomizing) the color balance.
This manual adjustment is executed only for the color patch which
(Abnormal end (Auto transition)) could not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color bal-

ance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
efficiency.
(55256(1625$'-8670(17
(;(&87(
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.

8) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-
0326FC11) in the Text/Photo mode (Manual) to check the
copy color balance and density. (Refer to the item of the copy
color balance and density check.)
If the copy color balance and density are not satisfactory, per-
form the following procedures.
9) Execute the initial setting of the halftone image correction.
(SIM 44-21)
10) Execute the halftone image correction. (Forcible execution)
(SIM44-26)

Copy color balance and density adjustment (Manual adjustment) procedure
flowchart (SIM46-21)
Start
Execute ADJ10C(2) (Copy color balance and density adjustment)

(Manual adjustment). (*1)
Enter the SIM46-21 mode, and select A4 (11" x 8.5") paper.
(Automatic selection)
Press [EXECUTE] key.

(The adjustment check pattern is printed.)
Refer to the printed adjustment check pattern, and select a

target adjustment color with the color keys (C, M, Y, K).
Select a target adjustment level with the scroll key.
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.

(The adjustment check pattern is printed.)
Check the patch color balance and density in the process

gray of the color balance check pattern. (If the gray color is
slightly shifted to Magenta, the color balance is properly
adjusted.)
Are the color balance NO

and density at the sati-
sfactory level?
YES
Cancel the SIM46-21 mode.
Perform the initial setting of the halftone image correction.

(SIM44-21)
Check the copy color balance and density adjustment result with the
test chart. (*1)
Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11)
to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check
the color balance and density.
Are the color balance NO

and density at the sati-
sfactory level?
YES
Check to confirm that the initial setting of the halftone image correction is
properly set. (*2)
Perform the initial setting of the halftone image correction.

(SIM44-21)
Perform the halftone image correction. (SIM44-26)
Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11)

to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check
the color balance and density. *1:
If satisfactory color balance and density are not
obtained with the adjustment, check the print
NO Are the color balance *2:
and density at the sati- If the initial setting of the halftone image
sfactory level? correction is not properly adjusted, satisfactory
color balance and density cannot be obtained. In
YES this case, check the print engine for any problems.
Set the SERVICE target for the automatic copy color

balance adjustment. (SIM63-7)
End

1) Enter the SIM46-21 mode. Patch B may not be copied.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$// &2/25 @ request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖ color balance stated above.
%˖ ˖32,17
˷ ̚ ˹ &˖ ˖32,17 If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY
'˖ ˖32,17
mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the
(˖ ˖32,17
)˖ ˖32,17
adjustment is proper. If the color balance of the adjustment
*˖ ˖32,17 pattern printed in this mode is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is
+˖ ˖32,17 converted into the natural gray color balance by the color cor-
,˖ ˖32,17
rection table in an actual copy mode. (When the color balance
-˖ ˖32,17
.˖ ˖32,17
target is DEF 1.)
/˖ ˖32,17
4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
C 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
The adjustment value is set in the range of (1 - 999). When
10-key EXECUTE
SIM 46-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance and
EXECUTE End of print density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 500.
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To

decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$// &2/25 @
$˖ ˖32,17
fied.
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
˷ ̚ ˹ &˖ ˖32,17

'˖ ˖32,17
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
(˖ ˖32,17 and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
)˖ ˖32,17 adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
*˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
,˖ ˖32,17 way of adjustment.
-˖ ˖32,17
Referring to the black/gray patches, adjust so that each pro-
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
cess (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A - Q (MAX)
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2. approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.
6) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is 0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) and a user's document accord-
automatically selected.) ing to necessity in the normal copy mode, the text/Printed
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed. Photo mode (Manual) to check the adjustment result.
3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the color (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/density check.)
balance is satisfactory. 7) Execute SIM 44-21. (Execute the initial setting of the halftone
If not, execute the following procedures. image correction.)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
Low High
density density
;
%
(;(&87(
$M
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-
CMY pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
blend
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3

The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter

level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed.
The density level of each color must be almost at the same
level.

(Normal end (Auto transition)) (Normal end (Auto transition))

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5 +$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
5(68/7 5(68/7
&203/(7( &203/(7(
5(68/7 (;(&87( 5(68/7 (;(&87(
(Abnormal end (Auto transition)) (Abnormal end (Auto transition))

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5 +$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
5(68/7 (55256(1625$'-8670(17
(5525.&0<
(;(&87(
5(68/7 (;(&87(

9) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-
0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11) and a user's document accord-
ing to necessity in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) and
This procedure is to save the copy color balance adjustment check the adjustment result again. (Refer to the item of the
data as the reference data for the halftone correction. copy color balance/density check.)
Immediately after execution of ADJ 10C (2) (Color balance If the copy color balance and density are not adjusted to the
adjustment, Manual) with SIM 46-21, be sure to execute this specified level, there may be another cause.
procedure. Troubleshoot the cause, and repair or perform proper treat-
When ADJ 10C (1) (Color balance adjustment, Auto) is exe- ments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment
cuted with SIM 46-24, this procedure is automatically exe- from the beginning.
cuted.
8) Use SIM 44-26 to execute the halftone image correction.
(Forcible execution) If the color balance is customized, use SIM 63-7 to register the
Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key. color balance as the service target.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started. If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
required.
If the customized color balance is registered as the service tar-
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21 get, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
the next color balance adjustment.
(;(&87(
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-

pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.

10-D Copy / Image send / FAX image quality
adjustment (Individual adjustment)
a. General
This adjustment is used to execute the fine adjustment in each mode only when a satisfactory image quality is not obtained by the basic adjust-
ments ADJ 10B and ADJ 10C or there is a request from the user. Normally there is no need to execute this adjustment.
In this adjustment, the adjustment result may be applied to the image send mode and the FAX mode as well as the copy mode.
This must be well understood for execution of the adjustment.
Copy MODE IMAGE SEND(SCAN) MODE

Monochrome Monochrome
Color mode Color mode
mode mode
Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual FAX Printer
46-01 Color copy density adjustment (for each   - - - - - - - -
color copy mode) (separately for the low-
46-02 Monochrome copy density adjustment (for - -   - - - - - -
each monochrome copy mode) (separately
for the low-density area and the high-density
area) (No need to adjust normally)
46-04 Color image send mode image density - - - -   - - - -
adjustment (for each mode)
46-05 Monochrome image send mode image - - - - - -   - -
density adjustment (for each mode)
46-08 Image send mode RGB color balance - - - -   - - - -
adjustment (separately for the low-density
area and the high-density area)
46-09 RSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density          -
adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
46-10 Color copy color balance, gamma   - - - - - - - -
adjustment (for each color copy mode)
46-16 Monochrome copy density, gamma - -   - - - - - -
adjustment (for each monochrome copy
mode) (No need to adjust normally)
46-19 Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) - -  - - -  -  -
mode document density scanning operation
(exposure operation) conditions setting
(Normally no need to set)
46-21 Copy color balance and density adjustment     - - - - - -
(Manual adjustment)
46-23 Copy high density image density     - - - - - -
reproduction setting (Normally unnecessary
to the setting change)
46-24 Copy color balance and density adjustment     - - - - - -
46-25 Copy color balance adjustment (Single color -  - - - - - - - -
copy mode) (No need to adjust normally)
46-26 Single color copy mode color balance -  - - - - - - - -
default setting
46-27 Color copy, text, line image reproduction   - - - - - - - -
adjustment (edge gamma, density
adjustment) (Text, Map mode)
46-30 Copy mode sub scanning direction   - - - - - - - -
resolution setting
46-32 Document low density image density - -  - - -  -  -
reproduction adjustment in the automatic
monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode
(No need to adjust normally) (Background
density adjustment in the scanning section)
46-36 2-color (red, black) copy mode fine color -  - - - - - - - -
46-37 Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color - -   - -     (*3)(*5)
document reproduction adjustment
46-38 Color copy mode dark area gradation (black   - - - - - - - -
component quantity) adjustment
46-39 FAX send image sharpness adjustment - - - - - - - -  -
46-40 FAX send image density adjustment - - - - - - - -  -
(Collective adjustment of all the modes)

Copy MODE IMAGE SEND(SCAN) MODE
Monochrome Monochrome
Color mode Color mode
mode mode
Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual FAX Printer
(Normal text mode)
(Fine text mode)
(Super fine mode)
(Ultra fine mode)
(600dpi mode)
46-47 Copy image, image send image, FAX send          (*3)  (*3)
image (JPEG) compression ratio setting
(Normally unnecessary to the setting
change)
46-51 Gamma manual adjustment for the copy     - - - - - -
mode heavy paper and the image process
mode (dither) (No need to adjust normally)
46-52 Gamma default setting for the copy mode     - - - - -  (*4)
heavy paper and the image process mode
(dither)
46-54 Copy gamma, color balance adjustment for     - - - - -  (*4)
each dither (Automatic adjustment) (No
need to adjust normally)
46-58 Pseudo resolution UP function setting     - - - - - -
46-59 Pseudo resolution UP function adjustment     - - - - - 
46-60 Color (Copy/Scan) mode sharpness   - -  - - - - 
adjustment (No need to adjust normally) (1 copy)
46-61 Area separation recognition level   (*1)   (*1)   (*1)   (*1) - -
46-62 ACS, area separation, background image         - -
process, automatic exposure mode
operation conditions setting (Normally
unnecessary to the setting change)
46-63 Copy/Scan low density image density         - -
adjustment (for each mode)
46-65 Color correction table setting   - - - - - - - 
46-74 Printer/Copy color balance and density     - - - - - 
adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
(Basic adjustment)
*1: Text Printed Photo / Copy document, Text Printed Photo only
*2: Printer RGB save o FAX resend only
*3: Printer RGB save only
*4: Only the watermark is related.

2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
10-D (1)
Color copy density adjustment (for each Display/Item Content
Setting
Default
color copy mode) (separately for the low- range
A AUTO Auto LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
(No need to adjust normally) B TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. HIGH 1 - 99 50
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
* When there is necessity to change the copy density of the low
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
density and high density part at each copy density individually.
HIGH 1 - 99 50
* When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
copy by each the copy mode individually.
HIGH 1 - 99 50
* When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
copy mode individually. HIGH 1 - 99 50
* When there is request from the user. G MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
1) Enter the SIM 46-1 mode. HIGH 1 - 99 50
H LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50

HIGH 1 - 99 50
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( I TEXT Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
㩷(;32685($'-8670(17 &2/25 >&23<@ (COPY TO COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
$˖ ˖$872
$˖ %˖ ˖7(;7
J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7(;735,17('ǂ3+272 PHOTO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
'˖ ˖7(;73+272 (COPY TO COPY) document)
(˖ ˖35,17('ǂ3+272 K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
)˖ ˖3+272*5$3+ (COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
*˖ ˖0$3
L TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
+˖ ˖/,*+7
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
,˖ ˖7(;7 &23<ǂ72ǂ&23<
-˖ ˖7(;735,17('ǂ3+272 &23<ǂ72ǂ&23<
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
.˖ ˖35,17('ǂ3+272 &23<ǂ72ǂ&23< M TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
/˖ ˖7(;7 &2/25ǂ721(ǂ(1+$1&(0(17 PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
/2: +,*+ 2. (COLOR TONE (Color tone
㪈㪇㪄㫂㪼㫐 N TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
OK ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
P PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
(;32685($'-8670(17 &2/25 >&23<@
$˖ ˖$872 (COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
$˖ %˖ ˖7(;7 ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7(;735,17('ǂ3+272 Q MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
'˖ ˖7(;73+272 (COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
(˖ ˖35,17('ǂ3+272 ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
)˖ ˖3+272*5$3+
R SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50
*˖ ˖0$3
HIGH 1 - 99 50
+˖ ˖/,*+7
,˖ ˖7(;7 &23<ǂ72ǂ&23< S SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50

-˖ ˖7(;735,17('ǂ3+272 &23<ǂ72ǂ&23< (COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
.˖ ˖35,17('ǂ3+272 &23<ǂ72ǂ&23< T TWO COLOR Two-color LOW 1 - 99 50
/˖ ˖7(;7 &2/25ǂ721(ǂ(1+$1&(0(17
(Red/Black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
/2: +,*+ 2.
U TWO COLOR Two-color LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) (Red/Black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
(Copy document)

3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. 2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select
Setting
"LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust- Display/Item Content Default
range
ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH"
A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
mode and change the adjustment value.
HIGH 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
density is decreased. C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result. HIGH 1 - 99 50
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result. PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the nor- E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
mal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and check- HIGH 1 - 99 50
ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained. F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
10-D (2)
H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
Monochrome copy density adjustment HIGH 1 - 99 50
(for each monochrome copy mode) I TEXT Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
(separately for the low-density area and the (COPY TO COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
high-density area) J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
(No need to adjust normally) (COPY TO COPY) document)
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: (COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
L LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
* When there is necessity to change the copy density of the low
HIGH 1 - 99 50
density and high density part at each copy density individually.
* When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
copy by each the copy mode individually. When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select
* When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the "LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust-
copy mode individually. ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH"
* When there is request from the user. mode and change the adjustment value.
1) Enter the SIM 46-2 mode. When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy

density is decreased.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17 %: >&23<@
4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
$˖ ˖$872
$˖
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
%˖ ˖$872
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7(;7

mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
'˖ ˖7(;735,17('3+272 Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the nor-
(˖ ˖7(;73+272
mal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and check-
)˖ ˖35,17('3+272
*˖ ˖3+272*5$3+
ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.
+˖ ˖0$3
,˖ ˖7(;7 &23<72&23<

-˖ ˖7(;735,17('3+272 &23<72&23<
.˖ ˖35,17('3+272 &23<72&23< 10-D (3)

/˖ ˖/,*+7
Color copy color balance, gamma
/2: +,*+ 2.
adjustment (for each color copy mode)
㪈㪇㪄㫂㪼㫐 (No need to adjust normally)
This adjustment is used to execute the color balance adjustment
OK for each density level in each color copy mode.

* When there is necessity to change the color balance and gamma
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17 %: >&23<@
by each the copy mode individually.
$˖ ˖$872
$˖
* When there is request from the user.
%˖ ˖$872
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7(;7

'˖ ˖7(;735,17('3+272
(˖ ˖7(;73+272
)˖ ˖35,17('3+272
*˖ ˖3+272*5$3+
+˖ ˖0$3
,˖ ˖7(;7 &23<72&23<

-˖ ˖7(;735,17('3+272 &23<72&23<
.˖ ˖35,17('3+272 &23<72&23<
/˖ ˖/,*+7
/2: +,*+ 2.

1) Enter the SIM 46-10 mode. 2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the mode key.
3) Select a color to change the adjustment value with the color

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
key.
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17
7(;7 7(;7357ǂ3+272 35,17('ǂ3+272 3+272ˇ7(;73+272
4) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll
0$3 /,*+7 &23<ǂ25*
key.
Density level Adjustment

Item/Display Default
(Point) value range
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
(;(&87(
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
TEXT F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>7(;7@
$˖ ˖32,17 J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17

K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
'˖ ˖32,17 L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
(˖ ˖32,17
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
)˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17 N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500

+˖ ˖32,17
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
,˖ ˖32,17
-˖ ˖32,17 P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
.˖ ˖32,17
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
/˖ ˖32,17
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.

5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
C
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
10-key increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den-
OK
sity is decreased.
When the arrow key is pressed, the color densities selected
with the color keys are collectively adjusted.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>7(;7@
That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17 to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17
'˖ ˖32,17
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
(˖ ˖32,17 printed out.
)˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17 This adjustment pattern can be used to check the color bal-
+˖ ˖32,17
ance and the density for each density level (point).
,˖ ˖32,17
-˖ ˖32,17 6) Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17 Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2. mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
[SYSTEM Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the nor-
EXECUTE SETTINGS] key mal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and check-
EXECUTE ing the copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.
or end of print
10-D (4)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>7(;7@
&/26(
Monochrome copy density, gamma
$˖
$˖ ˖32,17
%˖ ˖32,17
adjustment (for each monochrome copy
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17 mode) (No need to adjust normally)
'˖ ˖32,17
(˖ ˖32,17 This adjustment is used to execute the density adjustment for each
)˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17
density level in each monochrome copy mode.
+˖ ˖32,17 This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
,˖ ˖32,17
-˖ ˖32,17 * When it is required to change the gamma in each copy mode.
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.

1) Enter the SIM 46-16 mode. 4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
Switch the adjustment simulation mode and the normal copy
mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$5/$'-8670(17>$// %: @3* Repeat switching the adjustment simulation mode and the normal
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖ copy mode and changing the adjustment value and checking the
%˖ ˖32,17
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17

copy until a satisfactory result is obtained.
'˖ ˖32,17
(˖ ˖32,17
)˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17 10-D (5)

+˖ ˖32,17
,˖ ˖32,17
Automatic monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX)
-˖ ˖32,17 mode document density scanning
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
operation (exposure operation) conditions
(;(&87( 2. setting (Normally no need to set)
Use for setting the condition of read operation (Exposure) for docu-
10-key EXECUTE ment density in monochrome auto copy mode.
EXECUTE or end of print When a copy with correct density is not obtained by type of docu-
ment, change the setting.
This setting is required in the following cases.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$5/$'-8670(17>$// %: @3* * When a proper density copy is not obtained in the monochrome
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖
automatic copy mode.
%˖ ˖32,17
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17 * When a document with images near its lead edge is copied.
'˖ ˖32,17
* When a document with colored background is copied.
(˖ ˖32,17
)˖ ˖32,17 1) Enter the SIM 46-19 mode.
*˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17

,˖ ˖32,17 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
-˖ ˖32,17
(;32685(02'(6(783 %:$(
.˖ ˖32,17 $(B02'( ˖ 02'( 02'(
/˖ ˖32,17 $(B6723B&23< ˖ 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1
(;(&87( 2. $(B6723B)$; ˖ 2)) 21
$(B6723B6&$1 ˖ 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1
$(B),/7(5 ˖ 62)7 1250$/ 6+$53
2) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll $(B:,'7+ ˖ )8// 3$57
key.
Density level Adjustment

Item/Display Default
(Point) value range
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500

D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500 2) Set REALTIME, STOP or PRE-SCAN to adjustment item AE
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500 STOP COPY. For contents of each setting item, refer to below.
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500 Change the setting value of "AE WIDTH" item to "FULL" or
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500 "PART", in some cases.
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500 Display/Item Content Set value Default
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500 AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE2 MODE1
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500 AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500 Stop (for copy) STOP/
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500 PRESCAN
N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500 AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON
ON/OFF
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500 Stop (for FAX)
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500 AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500 Stop (for scanner) STOP/
PRESCAN
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
setting NORMAL
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den- SHARP
sity is decreased. AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL FULL
PART
When the arrow key is pressed, the densities are collectively
adjusted.
That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point
to the high density point can be adjusted collectively. MODE1: High gamma (Improves the image contrast)
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is MODE2: Normal gamma
printed out.
STOP:
The density at each density level (point) can be checked by Reads the density of 3 - 7 mm area from leading edge of document,
referring to this printed adjustment pattern. However, it is more decides the output image density according to the density of that
practical to make a copy and check it. part. (The output image density is constant at whole area.)
This adjustment pattern can be used to check the color bal-
ance and the density for each density level (point).

REALTIME:
Reads the density of width of the document one by one, decides Document table/RSPF mode
the output image density according to the density of each part of
the document. (The output image density may be not constant at 3 to 7mm
whole area.)
PRESCAN:
Once the densities on the document surface are scanned, the out-
put image density is determined according to the average of the
scanned densities. (The output image density is even for all the
surface.)
AE WIDTH = FULL
AE WIDTH FULL:
Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7
mm (leading edge of document) x Document width. No relationship
to PRESCAN MODE
AE WIDTH PART:
Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode is 3 - 7
mm (leading edge of document) x 100 mm (width). No relationship
Document table mode
to PRESCAN MODE
Operation in monochrome auto copy mode:
When the density of the document of the read area is light, output 3 to 7mm
image density is increased by control. When the density of the doc-

ument of the read area is dark, output image density is decreased
by control. 100mm
AE WIDTH = PART
RSPF mode
3 to 7mm
100mm AE WIDTH = PART
Document density detection area
10-D (6)
Document low density image density
reproduction adjustment in the automatic
monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode
(No need to adjust normally) (Background
density adjustment in the scanning section)
Use for the reproducibility adjustment of document background
density in monochrome auto copy mode.
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
image of the document.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
㩷/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1* %*5(029($'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&23<˖2& $˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272
$˖ %˖ ˖&23<˖563) $˖ %˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;7
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖6&$1˖2& ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/25&23<35,17('3+272

'˖ ˖6&$1˖563) '˖ ˖&2/25&23<3+272*5$3+
(˖ ˖)$;˖2& (˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;73+272
)˖ ˖)$;˖563) )˖ ˖&2/25&23<0$3
*˖ ˖&2/25&23</,*+7
+˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272 &23<72&23<

,˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;7 &23<72&23<
-˖ ˖&2/25&23<35,17('3+272 &23<72&23<
.˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272
/˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;7
2. 2.
10-key 10-key
OK OK

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%*5(029($'-8670(17
/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1*
$˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272
$˖ ˖&23<˖2&
$˖ %˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;7
$˖ %˖ ˖&23<˖563)
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/25&23<35,17('3+272
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖6&$1˖2&
'˖ ˖&2/25&23<3+272*5$3+
'˖ ˖6&$1˖563)
(˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;73+272
(˖ ˖)$;˖2&
)˖ ˖&2/25&23<0$3
)˖ ˖)$;˖563)
*˖ ˖&2/25&23</,*+7
+˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272 &23<72&23<

,˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;7 &23<72&23<
-˖ ˖&2/25&23<35,17('3+272 &23<72&23<
.˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272
/˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;7
2.
2.
2) Select the adjustment mode with the scroll key. 2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. Set
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the value
background and the low density image is increased. When the A COLOR COPY : Text print (color copy) 1-9 3
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back- TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
ground and the low density image is decreased. B COLOR COPY : TEXT Text (color copy) 1-9 3
C COLOR COPY : Printed photo 1-9 5
Display/Item Content Set value Default PRINTED PHOTO (color copy)
A COPY : OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 D COLOR COPY : Photograph 1-9 5
B COPY : RSPF Copy mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196 PHOTOGRAPH (color copy)
C SCAN : OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 E COLOR COPY : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
D SCAN : RSPF Scanner mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196 TEXT/PHOTO (color copy)
E FAX : OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 F COLOR COPY : MAP Map (color copy) 1-9 5
F FAX : RSPF FAX mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196 G COLOR COPY : LIGHT Light document 1-9 6
(color copy)
H COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text print (color copy)
(COPY TO COPY)
10-D (7)
I COLOR COPY : TEXT Copy document, Text 1-9 5
Copy/Scan low density image density (COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
adjustment (for each mode) J COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
(No need to adjust normally) PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo
(COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
This adjustment is used to adjust the image density in the low den-
K COLOR PUSH:TEXT/ Text print 1-9 3
sity area in the copy/scanner mode. PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
This adjustment is required in the following cases. L COLOR PUSH:TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1-9 3
* When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the M COLOR PUSH: Printed photo 1-9 5
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
image of the document. N COLOR PUSH: Photograph 1-9 5
PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH)
O COLOR PUSH: Text/Photograph 1-9 3
1) Enter the SIM 46-63 mode. TEXT/PHOTO (color PUSH)
P COLOR PUSH: MAP Map (color PUSH) 1-9 5
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
background and the low density image is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back-
ground and the low density image is decreased.

10-D (8)
Color copy, text, line image reproduction
adjustment (edge gamma, density
adjustment) (Text, Map mode)
Adjustment 1
By changing Text/Printed Photo, Text/Photograph, automatic copy
mode Text, line image edge section gamma and the density, the
reproducibility of text and line profile can be varied optionally.
With this adjustment, the density and the thickness of fine text and
lines can be varied.
Check the result of this adjustment by text/printed photo copy mode
(manual).
* When the reproducibility of text and line copy image is to be
changed.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783
$˖ ˖%/$&.7(;7 6/23(
$˖ %˖ ˖%/$&.7(;7 ,17(5&(37
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/257(;7 6/23(

'˖ ˖&2/257(;7 ,17(5&(37
(˖ ˖('7(;7 6/23(

)˖ ˖('7(;7 ,17(5&(37
2.
10-key
OK

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783
$˖ ˖%/$&.7(;7 6/23(
$˖ %˖ ˖%/$&.7(;7 ,17(5&(37
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/257(;7 6/23(

'˖ ˖&2/257(;7 ,17(5&(37
(˖ ˖('7(;7 6/23(

)˖ ˖('7(;7 ,17(5&(37
2.

2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. 1) Enter the SIM 46-27 mode.

Adjust- ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
Display/Item 7(67 &/26(
Content ment Default &2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783
(Copy mode) $˖ ˖%/$&.7(;7 6/23(
range
$˖ %˖ ˖%/$&.7(;7 ,17(5&(37
A BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/257(;7 6/23(
(SLOPE) gamma skew '˖ ˖&2/257(;7 ,17(5&(37
adjustment (˖ ˖('7(;7 6/23(
B BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50 )˖ ˖('7(;7 ,17(5&(37
(INTERCEPT) density adjustment

C COLOR TEXT Color character edge 1 - 99 50
(SLOPE)*1 gamma skew
adjustment
D COLOR TEXT Color character edge 1 - 99 50
(INTERCEPT) density adjustment 2.
E ED TEXT (SLOPE) Text/Map mode 1 - 99 50

gamma adjustment 10-key
(Text/Map mode)
OK
F ED TEXT Text/Map mode 1 - 99 50
(Text/Map mode)

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. &2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783
$˖ ˖%/$&.7(;7 6/23(
When the adjustment values of item A and C are changed, the $˖ %˖ ˖%/$&.7(;7 ,17(5&(37
gamma at the line edge section is changed. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/257(;7 6/23(
When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast of '˖ ˖&2/257(;7 ,17(5&(37
(˖ ˖('7(;7 6/23(

character edge and line edge is increased. When the adjust- )˖ ˖('7(;7 ,17(5&(37
ment value is decreased, the image contrast of character and
line edge is decreased.
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B and D are
increased, the image density at the line edge section is
increased, and vice versa.
2.
4) Press [OK] key.
5) Make a copy in monochrome text/printed photo copy mode 2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
(manual), check the copy.
When checking, use a copy of the document with a thin char-
Adjust-
acter and line image. Display/Item
Content ment Default
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-27 (Copy mode)
range
mode and change the adjustment value. A BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is (SLOPE) gamma skew
obtained. adjustment
B BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50
Adjustment 2
C COLOR TEXT Color character edge 1 - 99 50
This adjustment is used to change the gamma and the density in (SLOPE)*1 gamma skew
the Text/Map copy mode. adjustment
This adjustment is required in the following cases. D COLOR TEXT Color character edge 1 - 99 50
* To change the contrast and the density of the Text/Map copy
E ED TEXT (SLOPE) Text/Map mode 1 - 99 50
mode images.
gamma adjustment
* When there is request from the user. (Text/Map mode)
F ED TEXT Text/Map mode 1 - 99 50
(Text/Map mode)
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.

When the adjustment value of the adjustment item E is
changed, the gamma (contrast) is changed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the contrast is
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item F is
increased, the image density is increased, and vice versa.
4) Press [OK] key.
5) Make a copy in the Text/Map copy mode (manual), and check
the output print.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, use SIM46-27 to change the
adjustment value.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.

2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
10-D (9)
Monochrome (Copy/Scan/FAX) mode color Display/Item
Content
Adjustment
Default
document reproduction adjustment (Copy mode) range
A R/G Gray making setting (R/G) 0 - 99 21
B B/G Gray making setting (B/G) 0 - 99 0
Use to adjust the reproducibility for the red image and the yellow
image when printing color document that included the red/yellow 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
image in monochrome copy mode. When the adjustment value of adjustment item A is increased,
This adjustment is required in the following cases. copy density of red image is decreased. When the adjustment
* When there is desire to change reproducibility of yellow/red value is decreased, copy density of red image is increased.
image in case of making a color copy of the color document in When the adjustment value of adjustment item B is increased,
monochrome copy mode. copy density of red image is increased. When the adjustment
* When there is request from the user. value is decreased, copy density of red image is decreased.
1) Enter the SIM 46-37 mode. 4) Press [OK] key.
5) Make a copy in monochrome text/printed photo copy mode

(manual), check the copy.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17 If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-37
$˖ ˖5*
$˖ %˖ ˖%*
mode and change the adjustment value.
˷̚˹
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
10-D (10)
Color copy mode dark area gradation (black
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( component quantity) adjustment
10-key
DEFAULT
Use to adjust the black ingredient amount in the color copy mode.
OK (except character and line image)
As a result of this adjustment, the gradation of the shade part

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
changes.
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
$˖ ˖5*
$˖ %˖ ˖%*
* When reproduction as solid of black image is required.
˷̚˹
* To make the black background and the dark area darker

* When change of gradation of the shade part is required.

'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%/$&.,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
EXECUTE NO
7(;7ǂ357 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
7(;7 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/

˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17('ǂ3+272 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
$˖ ˖5* ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
$˖ %˖ ˖%* 3+272 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˷̚˹
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
7(;7ǂ3+272 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
0$3 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
0$18$/ $872
(-)LUT2
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
YES

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%/$&.,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 7(;7ǂ357 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
7(67 &/26(
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17 ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
$˖ ˖5* 7(;7 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
$˖ %˖ ˖%*
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
˷̚˹
35,17('ǂ3+272 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
3+272 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
7(;7ǂ3+272 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
0$3 ˖ ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( 0$18$/ $872

2) Select the AUTO MODE or the MANUAL MODE with the mode Display/Item (Copy mode) Select button Content Default
key. AUTO AUTO0 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
3) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. (-) LUT1 judgment 0
NOMAL
Display/Item (Copy mode) Select button Content Default (+) LUT1
MANUAL TEXT PRT (-) LUT2 Text print NORMAL (+) LUT2
(-) LUT1 (Manual) AUTO1 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
NOMAL (-) LUT1 judgment 1
(+) LUT1 NOMAL
(+) LUT2 (+) LUT1
TEXT (-) LUT2 Text (Manual) NORMAL (+) LUT2
(-) LUT1 AUTO2 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
(+) LUT1 NOMAL
(+) LUT2 (+) LUT1
PRINTED (-) LUT2 Printed photo NORMAL (+) LUT2
PHOTO (-) LUT1 (Manual) AUTO3 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
(+) LUT1 NOMAL
(+) LUT2 (+) LUT1
PHOTO (-) LUT2 Photograph NORMAL (+) LUT2
(-) LUT1 (Manual) AUTO4 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
(+) LUT1 NOMAL
(+) LUT2 (+) LUT1
TEXT PHOTO (-) LUT2 Text/ NORMAL (+) LUT2
(-) LUT1 Photograph AUTO5 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
NOMAL (Manual) judgment 5
(-) LUT1
(+) LUT1 NOMAL
(+) LUT2 (+) LUT1
MAP (-) LUT2 Map (Manual) (+) LUT1 (+) LUT2
(-) LUT1 AUTO6 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
(+) LUT1 NOMAL
(+) LUT2 (+) LUT1
CP ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy NORMAL (+) LUT2
TEXT PRT (-) LUT1 document/
NOMAL Text printed 4) Press the black ingredient amount select button.
(+) LUT1 (Manual) When reproduction as solid of black image is required:
(+) LUT2 Selects + button
COPY ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy NORMAL When there is desire to darken copy of black image:
TEXT (-) LUT1 document/ Selects + button
NOMAL Text (Manual)
When a dark color image is reproduced in the black:
(+) LUT1
Selects - button
(+) LUT2
5) Make a copy in color copy mode and check the copy.
COPY ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy NORMAL
PHOTO (-) LUT1 document/ If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-38 mode
NOMAL Printed photo and change the adjustment value.
(+) LUT1 (Manual) Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
(+) LUT2
LIGHT (-) LUT2 Light (+) LUT1
ORIGINAL (-) LUT1 document
(Manual)
10-D (11)
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
Color (Copy/Scan) mode sharpness
(+) LUT2 adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
Use for sharpness adjustment of the high density image in color
copy mode.
This adjustment changes smoothness (asperity) in the image
shade part.
* When changing the sharpness of copy image in copy mode.
(obtain crispy image) (decreases moire)
* When there is desire to improving smoothness in the image
shade part (for decrease of asperity)
* To make the black background and the dark area darker.
* To reproduce the gradation change in the dark area.


ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&2/25$87202'(ǂ),/7(5ǂ$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖6&5((1),/7(5/(9(/$872
$˖ %˖ ˖$87202'(),/7(5/(9(/&(17(5
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/25&23<&0<21
'˖ ˖&2/25&23<.21
(˖ ˖6,1*/(&2/25&0<21
)˖ ˖&2/25&23<&0<21
*˖ ˖&2/25&23<.21
+˖ ˖%:&23<21
,˖ ˖&2/25386+5*%21
-˖ ˖%:386+21
2.
10-key
OK

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&2/25$87202'(ǂ),/7(5ǂ$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖6&5((1),/7(5/(9(//
$˖ %˖ ˖$87202'(),/7(5/(9(/&(17(5
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/25&23<&0<21
'˖ ˖&2/25&23<.21
(˖ ˖6,1*/(&2/25&0<21
)˖ ˖&2/25&23<&0<21
*˖ ˖&2/25&23<.21
+˖ ˖%:&23<21
,˖ ˖&2/25386+5*%21
-˖ ˖%:386+21
2.
Display/Item Content Setting range Default NOTE

A SCREEN FILTER H Sharpness (filter) adjustment of dot pattern Strong emphasis 1 3 (Auto) Apply to auto copy mode
LEVEL L image in auto copy mode Soft emphasis 2 only
AUTO Auto 3
B AUTOMODE SOFT Sharpness (filter) adjustment for the auto SOFT 1 2
FILTER LEVEL CENTER copy mode CENTER 2 (CENTER)
HIGH HIGH 3
C COLOR COPY: OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image OFF 0 1 (ON) Available for the high
CMY ON in color copy mode ON 1 density image except
D COLOR COPY:K OFF Soft filter applying setting to K image in OFF 0 1 (ON) text and line image
ON color copy mode ON 1
E SINGLE COLOD: OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image OFF 0 1 (ON) When setting ON,
CMY ON in single color copy mode ON 1 smoothness in the image
F 2 COLOR COPY: OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image OFF 0 1 (ON) shade part improves by
CMY ON in 2-color copy mode ON 1 applying soft filter.
(asperity decreases)
G 2 COLOR COPY: OFF Soft filter applying setting to K image in OFF 0 1 (ON)
K ON color copy mode ON 1
H B/W COPY OFF Soft filter applying setting in monochrome OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON copy mode ON 1
I COLOR PUSH: OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push OFF 0 1 (ON)
RGB ON scan color mode ON 1
J B/W PUSH OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push OFF 0 1(ON)
ON scan monochrome mode ON 1
3) Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter • Adjustment item C - J:

process mode). When setting ON, smoothness in the image shade part
• Adjustment item A: improves by applying soft filter. (asperity decreases)
When selecting AUTO, filter is selected according to dot pat- 4) Press [OK] key.
tern state automatically and adjusts sharpness. 5) Make a copy and check the copy image.
Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-60 mode
numeric value to decrease moire. and change the adjustment value.
• Adjustment item B: Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
Select HIGH to obtain clear images. Select SOFT to reduce
moire.

2) Select the item A, B with the scroll key.
10-D (12)
Copy high density image density Display/Item Content
Setting
Default
reproduction setting (Normally range
A CMY 0 CMY engine maximum
unnecessary to the setting change) (0:ENABLE density correction mode
If a tone gap occurs on part of high density in copy mode, or if there 1:DISABLE) Enable
0-1 0
is necessity to increase the density of the part of high density, 1 CMY engine maximum
change the setting. density correction mode
Disable
This setting is normally not required. When, however, there are
B K 0 K engine maximum density
case of following, change the setting.
(0: ENABLE correction mode Enable
* When a tone gap occurs on part of high density. 0-1 1
1: DISABLE) 1 K engine maximum density
* When there is a necessity to increase the density of the part of correction mode DIsable
high density. C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for CYAN 0 - 999 500
* When there is request from the user. TARGET maximum density correction
D MAGENTA Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
a. Adjustment procedure
MAX MAGENTA maximum density
1) Enter the SIM 46-23 mode. TARGET correction
E YELLOW Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
MAX YELLOW maximum density
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'(
TARGET correction
$˖ ˖&0<˄(1$%/(ǂ˖',6$%/(˅ F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
$˖ %˖ ˖.˄(1$%/(ǂ˖',6$%/(˅ TARGET BLACK maximum density
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&<$1ǂ0$;ǂ7$5*(7
correction
'˖ ˖0$*(17$ǂ0$;ǂ7$5*(7
(˖ ˖<(//2:ǂ0$;ǂ7$5*(7
)˖ ˖%/$&.ǂ0$;ǂ7$5*(7
* If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A and B
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
gap is better.
* In case of more increase of the density on high density part, set 1
to item A and B.
2. The tone gap may occur in high density part.
10-key
Do not change the setting values of item C, D, E and F. If these val-
OK
ues are changed, density of the high density part is changed.
If these values are changed, be sure to execute the copy color bal-
ance density adjustment. (Auto adjustment)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'(
$˖ ˖&0<˄(1$%/(ǂ˖',6$%/(˅
$˖ %˖ ˖.˄(1$%/(ǂ˖',6$%/(˅
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&<$1ǂ0$;ǂ7$5*(7

'˖ ˖0$*(17$ǂ0$;ǂ7$5*(7
(˖ ˖<(//2:ǂ0$;ǂ7$5*(7
)˖ ˖%/$&.ǂ0$;ǂ7$5*(7
2.

10-D (13) 10-D (14)
Copy color balance adjustment RSPF mode (Copy/Scan/FAX) density
(Single color copy mode) adjustment (No need to adjust normally)
(No need to adjust normally) This setting is normally not required, however, in the following
This adjustment is used to set the color balance and the density in cases, make changes to the setting:
the single color copy mode to the user's request. * When copy in RSPF mode differs from copy in document table
The adjustment is made by changing Y, M, C components of each mode.
color. * When copy density in RSPF mode is low or too high.
This adjustment is not required normally, but executed when there * When the RSPF unit is replaced.
is a request from the user. * When the RSPF unit is disassembled.
When the default adjustment value is changed, this adjustment is * The CCD unit has been replaced.
required in the following cases.
* When it is required to change the color balance in the single
color copy mode.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( (;32685($'-8670(17 63)
6,1*/(&2/2502'(&2/25%$/$1&(6(783 $˖ ˖&23<˖/2:
$˖ ˖5(' $˖ %˖ ˖6&$1˖/2:
$˖ %˖ ˖*5((1 ˷̚˹ C˖ ˖)$;˖/2:
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖%/8( D˖ ˖&23<˖+,*+
'˖ ˖&<$1 (˖ ˖6&$1˖+,*+
(˖ ˖0$*(17$ F˖ ˖)$;˖+,*+
)˖ ˖<(//2:
2.
& 0 < 2.
10-key 10-key
OK OK

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6,1*/(&2/2502'(&2/25%$/$1&(6(783 (;32685($'-8670(17 63)
$˖ ˖5(' $˖ ˖&23<˖/2:
$˖ %˖ ˖*5((1 $˖ %˖ ˖6&$1˖/2:
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖%/8( ˷̚˹ C˖ ˖)$;˖/2:
'˖ ˖&<$1 D˖ ˖&23<˖+,*+
(˖ ˖0$*(17$ (˖ ˖6&$1˖+,*+
)˖ ˖<(//2: F˖ ˖)$;˖+,*+
& 0 < 2. 2.
2) Select the color to be adjusted with the scroll key. 2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
3) Select the color (YMC) to be adjusted with the color key. When adjusting density on low density part, select "A (COPY
4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. LOW)". When adjusting density on high density part, select "D
(COPY HIGH)".
Default
Display/Item Adjustment range Setting
C M Y Item/Display Content Default
range
A RED 0 - 255 0 255 200
A COPY : LOW RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 48
B GREEN 0 - 255 255 0 255
adjustment (Low density side)
C BLUE 0 - 255 255 200 0
B SCAN : LOW RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 48
D YELLOW 0 - 255 0 0 255
E MAGENTA 0 - 255 0 255 0
C FAX : LOW PSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 48
F CYAN 0 - 255 255 0 0 adjustment (Low density side)
5) Press [OK] key. D COPY : HIGH RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 53
adjustment (High density side)
6) Make a copy in the single color copy mode and check the E SCAN : HIGH RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 53
copy. adjustment (Low density side)
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-25 mode F FAX : HIGH RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 53
and change the adjustment value. adjustment (High density side)

3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. 2) Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key.
In case of increase of image density, input large numeric When disabling, set to "0" (NO). When enabling, set to "1"
value. Or in case of diluting the image density, input small (Yes).
numeric value. 3) Press [OK] key.
4) Press [OK] key. When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto color calibration
5) Make a copy in the RSPF mode and check the copy. (automatic adjustment of copy color balance and density) is not dis-
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-9 mode played in the user program mode.
and change the adjustment value.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained. (Auto color calibration by the user (Auto color balance adjust-
ment))
10-D (15)
Automatic color balance adjustment by the This adjustment is based on the service target color balance set
user (Copy color balance automatic with SIM 63-7 and SIM 63-8. If, therefore, the above settings are
not properly performed, this adjustment cannot be made properly.
adjustment ENABLE setting and
1) Enter the system setting mode.
adjustment)
2) Enter the copy setting mode.
a. General
3) Press the auto color calibration key.
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto color cal-
ibration (auto adjustment of the copy color balance and density). 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user opera- The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
tion with SIM 26-53. 5) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in pro-
cedure 4) on the document table.
Set the patch image so that the thin line is on the left side as
This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's under- shown in the figure.
standing on the automatic adjustment of the copy color balance At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above color
and density and the user's operational ability are judged adequate patch image (adjustment pattern).
enough to execute the adjustment.
When set to enable, operation procedures must be fully explained Thin line
to the user.
b. Setting procedure

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&$/,%5$7,21
$˖ ˖&23< <(612
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment
$˖ %˖ ˖35,17(5 <(612 is executed automatically. After completion of the adjustment,
˷̚˹ the display returns to the original operation screen.
To execute the printer color balance adjustment successively,
perform the procedures same as the above.
2.
10-key
OK

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&$/,%5$7,21
$˖ ˖&23< <(612
$˖ %˖ ˖35,17(5 <(612
˷̚˹
2.

10-D (16)
A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.
Copy gamma, color balance adjustment for
The patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
each dither (Automatic adjustment)
In the monochrome mode, only the monochrome pattern is
a. General printed.
This simulation is used to improve the image quality in a certain 8) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the proce-
mode. (Refer to the list in procedure 6.) dure 7) on the document table so that the thin lines on the
b. Adjustment procedures printed patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the left side.
1) Enter the SIM46-54 mode. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch image
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (adjustment pattern).
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed.
3) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the proce-
dure 2) on the document table so that the thin lines on the
printed patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the left side.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch image

The color balance and the density are automatically adjusted,
and the machine goes to the state of procedure 6).
To complete the adjustment and enable the adjustment result,
press [OK] key.
10) Make a copy, and check the copy image quality.
(Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density
check.)
The color balance and the density are automatically adjusted.
The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor- Use SIM46-52 to reset the adjustment values to the default values.
mality.
5) Press [OK] key.
The list of the adjustment items (for each dither) is displayed.
6) Select an adjustment item (for each dither).
Select item (Mode/

Content
Image)
Heavy Paper*1 Adjustment item to improve the color balance
in the heavy paper mode
Black Edge Adjustment item (K) to improve the
reproduction of lines, text density, and
thickness
Color Edge Adjustment item (Color) to improve the
reproduction of lines, text density, and
thickness
B/W Adjustment item to improve the density and
gradation in the monochrome text mode and
the map mode.
Color Ed Adjustment item to improve the color balance
in the text mode and the map mode.
B/W 600dpi Adjustment item to improve the density and
gradation in the monochrome printed photo
mode and the photography mode.
*1: When performing adjustments in the heavy paper mode,

load paper in the manual paper feed tray.

10-E Printer image quality adjustment
(Basic adjustment)
Requisite condition before execution of the printer color bal-
ance/density adjustment
Before execution of the printer color balance/density adjustment,
the copy color balance/density adjustment must have been com-
pleted properly.

* Basically same as when the copy color balance/density adjust-
ment is required.
* After the copy color balance/density adjustment.
10-E (1)
Printer color balance adjustment
a. General
The color balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust
the print density of each color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) auto-
matically with SIM 67-24 or the user program.
When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
of all the print modes are revised.
There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjust-
ment.
1) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 67-24
is used.)
2) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.)
The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
reduce the number of service calls.
If the print color balance is lost for some reasons, the user can
use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
machine condition is greatly changed, this function does not
work effectively.
On the other hand, the auto color balance adjustment by the
serviceman functions to recover the normal color balance
though the machine condition is greatly changed. If the
machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining
the normal color balance.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
understood.

Printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment) procedure

flowchart (SIM67-24)
Start
Execute ADJ10E(1) (Printer color balance and density

adjustment) (Automatic adjustment).
Enter the SIM67-24 mode, and select A4

(11" x 8.5") paper.

(The adjustment pattern is printed.)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.

Select the FACTORY target or the SERVICE target,
and press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern
is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically
Automatic adjustment color balance target change
performed to print the check pattern.) (*1)
Change the color balance and density target.
(SIM67-26)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or
unclear copy. (*4) NO
Press [OK] key. (The initial setting of the halftone

image correction is automatically performed.) (*2) Though the FACTORY
target (available in 3 kinds) is
Cancel SIM67-24. changed, satisfactory color
balance and density are not
obtained (SIM67-26), or the
SERVICE target is
selected.
NO Is the PCL printer
function provided?
YES
YES
Execute ADJ10E(2) (Printer color balance and density
adjustment) (Manual adjustment). (SIM67-25) (*3)
Check the self print check pattern to check the printer color balance and
*1:
density adjustment.
When the color balance and density are customized and
registered as the SERVICE target, select the SERVICE
Use SIM67-25 to print the self print Use SIM64-5 to print the self print target.
check pattern, and check the check pattern, and check the *2:
printer color balance and density. printer color balance and density. If the initial setting of the halftone image correction is not
properly adjusted, satisfactory color balance and density
cannot be obtained. In this case, check the print engine for
any problems.
*3:
Are the color balance and NO If satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
density at the satisfactory with ADJ10E(2) (Printer color balance and density
level? adjustment) (Manual adjustment) (SIM67-25), check the
print engine for any problems.
*4:
YES If there is any streak or unclear copy on the printed check
pattern, check the print engine for any problems.
End

1) Enter the SIM 67-24 mode. The copy color balance adjustment is automatically executed
and prints the color balance check patch image. Wait until the

operation panel shown in the procedure 5) is displayed.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'( 5(*8/$5
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17 PRINTER CALIBRATION
(;(&87(
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is

automatically selected.)
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in
Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper
on the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are
on the left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed
color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper.
5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.
PRINTER CALIBRATION

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'( 5(*8/$5
&21),507+($'-867('3$7&+$1'35(66>2.@725(*,67(57+,63$7&+'$7$
2.
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the halftone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE" is displayed. This
operation takes several minutes.
4) Select [FACTORY] key, and press [EXECUTE] key. After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
When the color balance is customized with the manual color
balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar- MODE" is displayed.
get with SIM 67-27, if the color balance is adjusted to that color

balance, select the service target. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'( 5(*8/$5
&203/(7('7+,6352&('85(

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'( 5(*8/$5 3/($6(48,77+,602'(
3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'( )$&725< 25 6(59,&( $1'3/$&(
7(6735,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66

)$&725< 6(59,&( (;(&87(

6) Check the color balance and density. b. Adjustment procedure
Printer color balance and density adjustment (Manual adjustment) procedure
check.) flowchart (SIM67-25)
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in Start
procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM
67-26 and repeat the procedures from 1).
If a satisfactory result on the color balance and the density is Execute ADJ10E(2) (Printer color balance and density
adjustment (Manual adjustment). (*1)
not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the man-
ual adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 10E (2)). Enter the SIM67-25 mode, and select A4
(11" x 8.5") paper. (Automatic selection.)
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe-
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not Press [EXECUTE] key.
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ (The adjustment pattern is printed.)
10E (2)). Check the printed adjustment check pattern,
If the color balance or density is not in the satisfactory level even and select a target adjustment color with the
color keys (C,M,Y,K).
after execution of the automatic and manual adjustments, there
may be another cause. Select a target adjustment density level with the
scroll key.
repeat the adjustment from the beginning. Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.

(The adjustment pattern is printed.)
10-E (2)
Printer color balance adjustment Check the patch color balance and density in the
process gray of the color balance check pattern.
(Manual adjustment) (If the gray color is slightly shifted to Magenta,
a. General the color balance is properly adjusted.)
The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to

adjust the printer density of C, M, Y and K. This is used at the fol-
lowing situation. When the result of auto adjustment described Are the color balance
NO
above is not existing within the range of reference. When a fine and density at the sati-
sfactory level?
adjustment is required. When there is request from the user for
changing (customizing) the color balance.
In this manual adjustment, adjust only the color patch which could YES
not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
Cancel the SIM67-25 mode.
If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color bal-
ance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better
efficiency.
NO Is the PCL printer
function provided?
YES
Check the self print check pattern to check the printer color balance and
density adjustment.
Use SIM67-25 to print the self print Use SIM64-5 to print the self print
check pattern, and check the check pattern, and check the
printer color balance and density. printer color balance and density.
NO
Are the color balance and
density at the satisfactory
level?
YES
Set the SERVICE target for the

automatic printer color balance
adjustment. (SIM67-27)
End
*1:
If satisfactory color balance and density are not
obtained with the adjustment, check the print

1) Enter the SIM 67-25 mode. 3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the color
balance is satisfactory.
If not, execute the following procedures.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173*
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17 PRINTER CALIBRATION

'˖ ˖32,17
(˖ ˖32,17
)˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17
,˖ ˖32,17
;
-˖ ˖32,17
.˖ ˖32,17 /
/˖ ˖32,17
(;(&87( 2.
. & 0 < %
10-key $M
OK CMY
blend
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2 3

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173*
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17
'˖ ˖32,17 3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK

(˖ ˖32,17
)˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
,˖ ˖32,17 level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
-˖ ˖32,17 not be reversed.
.˖ ˖32,17
The density level of each color must be almost at the same
/˖ ˖32,17
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.

level.
Patch B may not be copied.
EXECUTE
EXECUTE When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a
request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
or end of print
color balance stated above.
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY
mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173* adjustment is proper. In an actual print mode, it is converted
$˖ ˖32,17 into the natural gray color balance by the color table. (When
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
the color balance target is DEF 1.)
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17
'˖ ˖32,17
4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
(˖ ˖32,17 select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
)˖ ˖32,17
*˖ ˖32,17
+˖ ˖32,17 The adjustment value is set in the range of (1 - 999). When
,˖ ˖32,17 SIM 67-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance and
-˖ ˖32,17 density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 500.
.˖ ˖32,17
/˖ ˖32,17
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is fied.
automatically selected.)
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed. When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
way of adjustment.
Referring to the black/gray patches, adjust so that each pro-
cess (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A - Q (MAX)
approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.

6) Check the color balance and density. 2) Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key.
(Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density In case of increase of the image density on low density part,
check.) increase the adjustment value. For diluting the image density
on low density part, decrease the adjustment value.
If the color balance is customized, use SIM 67-27 to register 10-F (2)
the color balance as the service target. Printer high density image density
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not reproduction setting (Supporting the high
required. density section tone gap)
If the customized color balance is registered as the service tar- (No need to adjust normally)
get, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in
When a tone gap is generated in the high density section in the
the next color balance adjustment.
printer mode, the setting is changed to lower the density in the high
density section.
10-F Printer image quality adjustment This setting is normally not required, however, in the following
(Individual adjustment) cases, a change of setting must be made.
a. General * When a tone gap occurs on part of high density.
This adjustment is used to execute the fine adjustment in each * To lower the density in the high density section.
mode only when a satisfactory image quality is not obtained by the
basic adjustments ADJ 10E (1) and ADJ 10E (2) or there is a
request from the user. Normally there is no need to execute this 1) Enter the SIM 67-34 mode.
adjustment.

This must be well understood for execution of the adjustment. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'()2535,17(5
$˖ ˖&0< (1$%/(',6$%/(
10-F (1) $˖ %˖ ˖. (1$%/(',6$%/(
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&<$10$;7$5*(7

Printer density adjustment '˖ ˖0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7
(Low density section density adjustment) (˖ ˖<(//2:0$;7$5*(7
)˖ ˖%/$&.0$;7$5*(7
This adjustment is used to adjust the image density in the low den-
sity area in the printer mode.
Adjust to reproduction setting of the low density image.
This adjustment is required in the following cases. 2.
* When it is required not to reproduce images in the low density

section, or to reproduce low-density images. 10-key
* When there is request from the user. OK

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'()2535,17(5
35,17(5+,*+/,*+7$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&0< (1$%/(',6$%/(
$˖ ˖$3$7&+,1387
$˖ %˖ ˖. (1$%/(',6$%/(
$˖
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&<$10$;7$5*(7
˷̚˹
'˖ ˖0$*(17$0$;7$5*(7
(˖ ˖<(//2:0$;7$5*(7
)˖ ˖%/$&.0$;7$5*(7
2.
2.
10-key 2) Select the item A, B with the scroll key.
Setting
OK Display/Item Content
range
Default
A CMY 0 CMY engine maximum 0-1 0

(0: ENABLE density correction mode

1:DISABLE) Enable
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( 1 CMY engine maximum
35,17(5+,*+/,*+7$'-8670(17
density correction mode
$˖ ˖$3$7&+,1387
$˖ Disable

˷̚˹ B K 0 K engine maximum 0-1 1
(0:ENABLE density correction mode
1: DISABLE) Enable
1 K engine maximum
density correction mode
Disable
C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET CYAN maximum density
correction
2.

Setting 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
range The color balance adjustment is automatically performed.
D MAGENTA Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor-
MAX TARGET MAGENTA maximum density
mality.
correction
E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 5) Press [OK] key.
TARGET YELLOW maximum density The list of the adjustment items (for each dither) is displayed.
correction 6) Select an adjustment item (for each dither).
F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET BLACK maximum density Select item
correction Content
(Mode/Image)
Heavy Paper Adjustment item to improve the color balance in the
* If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A and B
heavy paper mode
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone B/W Adjustment item to improve the density and gradation in
gap is better. the monochrome mode
* In case of more increase of the density on high density part, set 1 Gloss Paper Adjustment item to improve the color balance in the
to item A and B. gloss paper mode
The tone gap may occur in high density part. 1200dpi 1bit Adjustment item to improve the color balance in 1200dpi
mode
If the setting values of item C, D, E and F are changed, density of 7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
the high density part is changed. A4/11" x 8.5" or A3/11" x 17" paper is automatically selected.
When these values are changed, be sure to perform the printer The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
color balance and density adjustment. (Automatic adjustment)
8) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
procedure 7) on the document table so that the thin lines on
10-F (3) the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the
Printer gamma adjustment for each dither left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color
(Automatic adjustment) (No need to adjust patch image (adjustment pattern).
normally)
a. General
This adjustment is used to adjust the color balance and the density PRINTER CALIBRATION
in the monochrome mode, the heavy paper mode, and the gloss
paper mode.
This simulation is used to improve image quality in these modes
and images.
b. Adjustment procedures
the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the
left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color
patch image (adjustment pattern).
PRINTER CALIBRATION
The color balance adjustment is automatically performed, and
the machine goes to the state of procedure 6).
10) When [OK] key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered
and the adjustment mode is terminated. When [EXECUTE]
key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered and the
screen is shifted to the other item (Mode/Image) select menu.
To execute the adjustment of the other item (Mode/Image),
After completion of all the adjustments of the items (Mode/
Image), press [OK] key, and the adjustment results are regis-
tered.
11) Make a print, and check the print image quality.
check.)
Use SIM67-52 to reset the adjustment values to the default values.

(Auto color calibration by the user (Auto color balance adjust-
10-F (4) ment))
Automatic color balance adjustment by the
user (Printer color balance automatic
adjustment ENABLE setting and This adjustment is based on the service target color balance set
adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to the with SIM 67-27 or SIM 67-28. If, therefore, the above settings are
setting change) not properly performed, this adjustment cannot be made properly.
a. General 1) Enter the system setting mode.
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto color cal- 2) Enter the printer setting mode.
ibration (auto adjustment of the printer color balance and density). 3) Press the auto color calibration key.
This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user opera- 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
tion with SIM 26-53. The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
5) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in pro-
cedure 4) on the document table.
This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's under- Set the patch image so that the thin line is on the left side as
standing on the automatic adjustment of the copy color balance shown in the figure.
and density and the user's operational ability are judged enough to At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above color
execute the adjustment. patch image (adjustment pattern).
When set to enable, operation procedures must be fully explained
to the user.
4HIN LINE
b. Setting procedure

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&$/,%5$7,21
$˖ ˖&23< <(612
$˖ %˖ ˖35,17(5 <(612
˷̚˹
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjust-
ment is executed automatically.
To execute the copy color balance adjustment successively,
perform the procedures same as the above.
2.
ADJ 11 Paper size sensor adjustment
10-key 11-A Manual paper feed tray paper size (width)

sensor adjustment
OK This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* The manual paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
* The manual paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( * U2 trouble has occurred.
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&$/,%5$7,21
$˖ ˖&23< <(612 * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
$˖ %˖ ˖35,17(5 <(612
˷̚˹
2.
2) Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key.

When disabling, set to "0" (NO). When enabling, set to "1"
(Yes).
3) Press [OK] key.
When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto color calibration
(automatic adjustment of printer color balance and density) is not
displayed in the user program mode.

1) Enter the SIM 40-2 mode. 2) Open the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width
position.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
(;(&87(
EXECUTE

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
(;(&87,1*
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
The maximum width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized.
4) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4 size.
display.
(;(&87(
The A4 size width position detection level of the manual paper
feed guide is recognized.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( 6) Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
3 $ 326,7,21$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57 [EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
8) Open the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion.
display.
(;(&87(
The minimum width position detection level of the manual
EXECUTE paper feed guide is recognized.
If the above operation is not completed normally, "ERROR" is
Repeat the above procedure to adjust displayed.
the A4R width MIN POSITION. When the operation is completed normally, the above data are
saved to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
&203/(7(
(;(&87(

11-B RSPF paper feed tray document size (width) ADJ 12 Document size detection
sensor adjustment
adjustment
* The RSPF paper feed tray section has been disassembled. This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* The RSPF paper feed tray unit has been replaced. * When the original size sensor section has been disassembled.
* When a U2 trouble occurs. * When the original size sensor section has been replaced.
* The scanner PWB has been replaced. * When U2 trouble has occurred.
* The EEPROM on the scanner PWB has been replaced. * When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
1) Enter the SIM 53-6 mode. * When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
12-A Document size sensor detection point

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
63)75$<$'-8670(17
adjustment
75$<92/0$;75$<$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3'6(1625&+(&.
2&6: 3' 3' 3'
3' 3' 3' 3'
(;(&87(
2) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-
tion.

Loosen the original cover switch actuator adjustment screw

and slide the actuator position so that the display OCSW is
returned to the normal display when the height of the arm unit
top from the table glass is 20.2 r 0.25mm by slowly tilting the
document detection arm unit in the arrow direction and adjust.
(If the ON timing of the original cover switch is shifted, the doc-
ument detection function may malfunction.)

The maximum width detection level is recognized.
4) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
20.2 0.25mm
The A4R width detection level is recognized.
6) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the width for the A5R size.
8) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion.
The minimum width detection level is recognized.
* When each of the above operations has been completed, the
"COMPLETE" message appears; when any of the operations
has failed, the "ERROR" message appears.

12-B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size ADJ 13 Touch panel coordinate setting
sensor
* The operation panel has been replaced.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
:,7+7+(25,*,1$/&29(523(1'7851217+((;(&87( * The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
.(<:,7+7+(25,*,1$/217+(25,*,1$/7$%/(
(;(&87(
EXECUTE

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
2) Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions).
6(7$1$6,=( h &23<3$3(5217+(25,*,1$/7$%/(
$1':,7+7+(2&23(1'7851217+((;(&87(.(<
When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds
and the display is reversed. When all the four points are
pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the dis-
play returns to the simulation sub number entry screen.
In case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen
again.
Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display
(;(&87( frame and the detection position when the touch panel is
pressed.
Adjustment
Adjustment completed EXECUTE * When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such
failed
as a needle or a pin).

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(1625/(9(/,6$'-867('
ADJ 14 Fusing paper guide position
adjustment
Normally there is no need to perform this adjustment. In the follow-
ing cases, perform this adjustment.
* When a paper jam occurs in the fusing section.
* When wrinkles are made on paper in the fusing section.
* When an image deflection or an image blur is generated in the
(;(&87(
paper rear edge section.
1) Loosen the fusing paper guide fixing screws on the two posi-
tions in the front/rear frame direction.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783 2) Use the fusing paper guide position scale as the reference to
3+2726(1625(5525326,7,21
3'3'3'3'3'3'3'
shift the paper guide in the arrow direction A or B.
(;(&87(
2) Execute the sensor adjustment without document.

With the document cover open, without placing a document on
the table glass, press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press
[EXECUTE] key.
The standard fixing position is at two scales in direction B from
If the adjustment is completed normally, "DOCUMENT SIZE
the marking scale center. However, the position may be varied
PHOTO SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUESTED" is displayed.
depending on the situation.
* When a wrinkle is made on paper, change the position in the
error direction A.
* When an image deflection or unclear image is generated in
the lead edge area of paper, change the position in the
arrow direction B.

5) Check that the inside dimension of the printed halftone is 240 r
ADJ 15 Print image position, image 0.5mm.
magnification ratio, void area,
off-center adjustment (Print
engine) (Manual adjustment)
Normally if the adjustment is executed by ADJ 4 (automatic adjust-

ment), there is no need to execute this adjustment.
240 0.5mm
Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this adjust-
ment.
In other words, this manual adjustment is executed when a satis-
factory result is not obtained from the automatic adjustment (ADJ
4).
15-A Print image magnification ratio adjustment

(main scanning direction) (Print engine)
(Manual adjustment) If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: 6) Change the set value of set item A.
* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced. When the set value is changed by 1, the dimension is changed
by 0.1mm.
When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification
ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. value is decreased, the BK image magnification ratio in the
1) Enter the SIM 50-10 mode. main scanning direction is decreased.
Repeat procedures 2) - 6) until a satisfactory result is obtained.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖%.0$*
15-B Print image print area adjustment
$˖
%˖ ˖0$,10)7 (Print engine) (Manual adjustment)
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖0$,1&6 * When the LSU is replaced or removed.
)˖ ˖0$,1&6
*˖ ˖0$,1/&&
* When a paper tray is replaced.
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8 * When the paper tray section is disassembled.
,˖ ˖68%0)7
-˖ ˖68%&6 * When the manual feed tray is replaced.

.˖ ˖68%&6
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
/˖ ˖68%/&&
(;(&87( 2. * When the duplex mode paper transport section is disassembled.

* When the registration roller section is disassembled.
EXECUTE EXECUTE * U2 trouble has occurred.
End of print

7(67
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖%.0$* Before execution of this adjustment, be sure to execute the print
$˖
%˖ ˖0$,10)7 image magnification ratio adjustment (ADJ 15A) (main scanning
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
direction) (print engine) (manual adjustment).
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
)˖ ˖0$,1&6
*˖ ˖0$,1/&&
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
,˖ ˖68%0)7
-˖ ˖68%&6
.˖ ˖68%&6
/˖ ˖68%/&&
(;(&87( 2.
2) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray.

3) Select the paper feed tray set in procedure 2) with the scroll
key.
The check pattern is printed out.

1) Enter the SIM 50-10 mode. 5) Enter the SIM 50-1 mode.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖ $˖ ˖55&$
%˖ ˖0$,10)7 $˖ %˖ ˖55&%&6
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖55&%/&&
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖55&%0)7
)˖ ˖0$,1&6
)˖ ˖55&%$'8
*˖ ˖0$,1/&&
*˖ ˖/($'
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
+˖ ˖6,'(
,˖ ˖68%0)7
,˖ ˖'(1$
-˖ ˖68%&6
.˖ ˖68%&6
-˖ ˖'(1%
/˖ ˖68%/&& .˖ ˖)52175($5
(;(&87( 2. /˖ ˖2))6(7B2&
2.
EXECUTE EXECUTE 10-key

End of print OK

7(67
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
&/26(

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖ /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
%˖ ˖0$,10)7
$˖ ˖55&$
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6 $˖ %˖ ˖55&%&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖55&%/&&
)˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖55&%0)7
*˖ ˖0$,1/&&
)˖ ˖55&%$'8
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
*˖ ˖/($'
,˖ ˖68%0)7
-˖ ˖68%&6 +˖ ˖6,'(
.˖ ˖68%&6 ,˖ ˖'(1$
/˖ ˖68%/&& -˖ ˖'(1%
(;(&87( 2. .˖ ˖)52175($5
/˖ ˖2))6(7B2&
2.
2) Set A4 (11 x 8.5") paper to all the paper feed trays. Select an
adjustment item of the target paper feed tray among items B -
6) Select an adjustment item (DENA, DENB, FRONT/REAR) with
N and enter the adjustment value. Then select item "O" to
the scroll key, enter the adjustment value, and press [OK] key.
select the paper feed tray which is to be used for executing
test printing. Setting Default
Item/Display Content
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. range value
The adjustment pattern is printed. Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 - 99 40
adjustment adjustment
4) Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the items below
DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
are in the range of the standard values.
adjustment
FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
Content Standard adjustment value
REAR area adjustment
X Lead edge void area 4.0 r 1.0mm
Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
Y Rear edge void area 2.0 - 5.0mm
scanning correction value
Z1/Z2 FRONT/REAR void area 2.0 r 2.0mm direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
print area value
Z1 correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50
2.0 2.0mm value value
DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
value
DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
value
DENB-LCC LCC correction value 1 - 99 50
DENB-ADU ADU correction value 1 - 99 50
X
DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50
4.0 1.0mm Y correction value
2.0 - 5.0mm
When the adjustment value is increased, the void area is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the void
area is decreased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is
changed by 0.1mm.
Z2
The adjustment value and the actual void area are related as
2.0 2.0mm
follows:
If the above condition is not satisfied, or if it is set to a desired Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area
condition, execute the simulation 50-1.
Feed paper from all the paper feed trays to confirm.

When the amount of the rear edge void is different between
each paper feed tray, change the adjustment value of item
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(DENB-XXX) in SIM50-1 and adjust. 3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖%.0$*
The adjustment item (DENB) have a effect on the paper of all $˖
%˖ ˖0$,10)7
paper feed tray. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
That is, adjustment value of item (DENB-XXX) fine adjusts to '˖ ˖0$,1&6
(˖ ˖0$,1&6
adjustment item (DENB) for each paper tray. )˖ ˖0$,1&6
After execution of the above, perform procedures 1) - 4) to *˖ ˖0$,1/&&
+˖ ˖0$,1$'8
check that the void area is within the specified range.
,˖ ˖68%0)7
Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper, if -˖ ˖68%&6
the lead edge void area is not within the specified range, .˖ ˖68%&6
/˖ ˖68%/&&
change the adjustment value of item (RRCB-XXX) in SIM 50-1.
(;(&87( 2.
EXECUTE EXECUTE
15-C Print image off-center adjustment
(Print engine) (Manual adjustment) End of print

* When the LSU is replaced or removed. 7(67
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
* When a paper tray is replaced. $˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖
* When the paper tray section is disassembled. %˖ ˖0$,10)7
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
* When ADJ 3A Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment '˖ ˖0$,1&6
(Main scanning direction) is performed. (˖ ˖0$,1&6
)˖ ˖0$,1&6
* When the manual feed tray is replaced. *˖ ˖0$,1/&&
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled. +˖ ˖0$,1$'8

,˖ ˖68%0)7
* When the duplex mode paper transport section is disassembled. -˖ ˖68%&6
* When the registration roller section is disassembled. .˖ ˖68%&6
/˖ ˖68%/&&
* U2 trouble has occurred. (;(&87( 2.

Before execution of this adjustment, check to insure the following

item.
* The print image magnification ration adjustment (ADJ 15A) (main
scanning direction) (Print engine) (Manual adjustment) has been
properly adjusted.
1) Enter SIM 50-10 mode.

2) Select the target paper feed tray (MAIN-XX) with the scroll key.
Display/Item Content Setting range

NO Not select 1
3) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray selected in pro-
cedure 2).
The adjustment pattern is printed.
5) Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the cor-
rect position.
Measure the dimension of the void area in the front and the
rear frame direction of the adjustment pattern, and check that
all the following conditions are satisfied.
RV
2.0mm 2.0mm
FV
2.0mm 2.0mm
RV: REAR VOID AREA

FV: FRONT VOID AREA
RV + FV d 4.0mm
RV = 2.0 r 2.0mm
FV = 2.0 r 2.0mm
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
6) Change the adjustment value.
Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the
[EXECUTE] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
printed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the adjustment pat-
tern is shifted to the front frame side. When it is decreased, the
adjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame side.
When the set value is changed by 1, the shift distance is
changed by about 0.1mm.
Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the conditions of procedure 5)
are satisfied.
In case a satisfactory result cannot be obtained by repeating
the above procedures, perform the following procedure.

7) Loosen the paper feed tray off-center adjustment screws (2 This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
pcs.) at the center section of the lift plate of the paper feed * When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scan-
tray, and change the gear unit position in the front/rear frame ning direction is not properly adjusted.
direction. Repeat the adjustment procedures from 4).
* When the scanner motor is replaced.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM of the scanner control PWB is replaced.
Before this adjustment, the focus adjustment (CCD unit installing
position adjustment) must have been completed.
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below.

ment), there is no need to execute this adjustment. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this adjust- $˖ ˖&&' 0$,1
ment. $˖ %˖ ˖&&' 68%
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63) 0$,1

In other words, this manual adjustment is executed when a satis- '˖ ˖63) 68%
factory result is not obtained from the automatic adjustment (ADJ (˖ ˖63)% 0$,1
4). )˖ ˖63)% 68%
ADJ 16 Scan image magnification ratio

adjustment
2.
(Manual adjustment)
3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode, and make a copy.
ment), there is no need to execute this adjustment.
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this adjust-
range (100 r 1.0%).
ment.
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
r 1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following
4).
procedure.
5) Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
16-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
(main scanning direction) (Manual tion ratio is increased.
adjustment) (Document table mode) When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
cation ratio is changed by about 0.02%.
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio
If the default adjustment value of the scan image magnification is within the specified range (100 r 1.0%).
ration adjustment (main scanning direction) of SIM 48-1, copy
image quality may be degraded. Therefore, this adjustment must
be executed only when there is a special necessity.

16-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
Go to the copy mode, and make a copy.
(sub scanning direction) (Manual
adjustment) (Document table mode) Copy magnifi- (Original dimension - Copy dimension)
cation ratio 100%
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: Original dimension
* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image sub scan-
ning direction is not properly adjusted. (Example 1)
* When the scanner motor is replaced. Copy A
10 20 90 100 110
* U2 trouble has occurred. (Shorter than
the original)
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM of the scanner control PWB is replaced.
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below.
Scale
(Original) 10 20 90 100 110
(Example 2)
Copy B
10 20 90 100 110
(Longer than
the original)
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified

range (100 r 1.0%).
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
r 1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following
procedure.
5) Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
tion ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&&' 0$,1 cation ratio is changed by about 0.1%.
$˖ %˖ ˖&&' 68%
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63) 0$,1

'˖ ˖63) 68% Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio is
(˖ ˖63)% 0$,1 within the specified range (100 r 1.0%).
)˖ ˖63)% 68%
2.

RSPF
16-C Scan image magnification ratio adjustment Setting Default
(main scanning direction) Item Display Content
range value
(Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode) A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
* When the scan control PWB is replaced. B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
* When U2 trouble occurs.
C SPF(MAIN) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
* When the copy magnification ratio of the RSPF mode copy surface magnification ratio
image in the main scanning direction is not proper. adjustment (Main scan)
* When the RSPF is disassembled. D SPF(SUB) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio
a. Adjustment procedures
adjustment (Sub scan)
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu- E SPFB(MAIN) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
ment tray of the RSPF. surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Main scan)
The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures.
F SPFB(SUB) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and surface magnification ratio
both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge. adjustment (Sub scan)
6) Select an adjustment item of SPF (MAIN)/SPFB (MAIN) with

Paper pass direction
A4 size the scroll key.
SPF (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio

(Front surface)
SPFB (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
(Back surface)
(Both the front surface 7) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
and the back surface)
10mm 10mm When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-
tion ratio is increased. When the adjustment value is changed
2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper. by 1, the image magnification ratio is changed by 0.02%.
3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original 8) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
images. Repeat the procedures of 1) - 8) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
original 16-D Scan image magnification ratio adjustment

(sub scanning direction) (Manual
adjustment) (RSPF mode)
copy This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
10 50 100 150 200 250
* When the SCAN CONTROL PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the SCAN CONTROL PWB is replaced.
10 50 100 150 200 250
* When the copy magnification ratio of the RSPF mode copy
image in the sub scanning direction is not proper.
* When the RSPF is disassembled.
4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu-
formula:
ment tray of the RSPF.
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100
The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures.
(%)
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and
Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)
both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge.
If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range
(100 r 0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment. 10mm
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
cedures. Paper pass direction
5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode. A4 size

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&&' 0$,1
$˖ %˖ ˖&&' 68%
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63) 0$,1

'˖ ˖63) 68%
10mm
(˖ ˖63)% 0$,1
)˖ ˖63)% 68%
2.

2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper. 7) Enter an image magnification ratio adjustment value with 10-
3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original key, and press [OK] key.
images. When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-
tion ratio is increased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the image magni-
10
fication ratio is changed by 0.1%.
50
Repeat the procedures of 1) - 8) until a satisfactory result is
100
10
obtained.
150 original
50
ADJ 17 Scan image off-center

200
100
adjustment
copy
150
(Manual adjustment)
200
4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following Normally if the adjustment is executed by ADJ 4 (automatic adjust-
formula: ment), there is no need to execute this adjustment.
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100 Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this adjust-
(%) ment.
Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%) In other words, this manual adjustment is executed when a satis-
If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range
4).
(100 r 0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
17-A Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual
cedures.
adjustment) (Document table mode)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
$˖ ˖&&' 0$,1
$˖
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
%˖ ˖&&' 68%
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63) 0$,1 * When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
'˖ ˖63) 68%
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
(˖ ˖63)% 0$,1
)˖ ˖63)% 68% 1) Make a copy of the adjustment chart (made by yourself) in the
adjustment mode (document table).
2. A
Setting Default
Item Display Content
range value A=B
A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
B
B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
C SPF(MAIN) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
2) Check the copy image center position.
D SPF(SUB) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50 If A - B = r 1.0mm, the adjustment is not required.
adjustment (Sub scan)
E SPFB(MAIN) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
A'
F SPFB(SUB) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
adjustment (Sub scan) A' - B' = 1.0mm
6) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key. (100%)
SPF (SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio B'

(Front surface)
SPFB (SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
(Back surface)

procedures.

3) Enter the SIM 50-12 mode. 2) Set the adjustment chart to the RSPF.
3) Make a duplex copy in the normal magnification ratio from the
manual paper feed tray, and check the image position on the
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783 front surface and the back surface of the copy paper.
$˖ ˖2&
$˖ %˖ ˖63) 6,'(
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63) 6,'(

original copy
a
b
2.
4) Select the adjustment mode OC with the scroll key.

5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
The entered value is set. If the difference is within the range of 0 r 2.7mmm there is no
need to perform the adjustment.
When the set value is increased, the main scanning print posi-
tion is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm. If the adjustment is required, perform the following procedures.
6) Go to the copy mode, and make a copy. 4) Enter the SIM 50-12 or 50-6 mode.
Repeat the procedures of 1) - 6) until the above condition is satis- (SIM50-12)
fied.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
17-B Scan image off-center adjustment 25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783

$˖ ˖2&
(Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode) $˖ %˖ ˖63) 6,'(
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63) 6,'(

* When the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the scanner (reading) section is replaced.
* When the RSPF section is disassembled. 2.
* When the RSPF unit is replaced.

(SIM50-6)

To execute this adjustment, it is required that the ADJ 17A Scan ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
image off-center adjustment (Document table mode) must have /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8( 63)
$˖ ˖6,'(
been properly adjusted. $˖
%˖ ˖6,'(
1) Prepare the adjustment chart. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖/($'B('*( 6,'(
'˖ ˖)5217B5($5 6,'(

Draw a line at the center of the front surface and the back sur- (˖ ˖75$,/B('*( 6,'(
face of A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in parallel with the paper transport )˖ ˖/($'B('*( 6,'(
direction. *˖ ˖)5217B5($5 6,'(
+˖ ˖75$,/B('*( 6,'(
Paper transport direction ,˖ ˖2))6(7B63)
-˖ ˖2))6(7B63)
.˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B63)
Front surface Back surface
2.
SIM50-12
Setting Default
range value
A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment
B SPF(SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment
C SPF(SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50
Draw a line at the center of the center adjustment
front surface and the back surface
of paper in parallel with the paper A - C: When the adjustment value is increased, the image
transport direction. position is shifted to the rear frame side.
1step = 0.1mm

SIM50-6
Setting Default ADJ 18 Copy image position and image
range value loss adjustment
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
document scan (Manual adjustment)
position adjustment
(CCD)
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
document scan Normally if the adjustment is executed by ADJ 4 (automatic adjust-
position adjustment ment), there is no need to execute this adjustment.
(CCD) Only when the manual adjustment is required, execute this adjust-
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20 ment.
loss (SIDE1) edge image loss
amount amount setting
setting factory result is not obtained from the automatic adjustment (ADJ
D FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20
SIDE1 (SIDE1) image loss amount 4).
setting
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 40 18-A Copy image position, image loss, and void
(SIDE1) edge image loss area adjustment (Manual adjustment)
amount setting
F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 20
loss (SIDE2) edge image loss This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
amount amount setting * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
SIDE2 * When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
(SIDE2) image loss amount
setting * When the LSU is replaced or removed.
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 40 * When the registration roller section is disassembled.
(SIDE2) edge image loss
amount setting
I OFFSET_SPF1 RSPF front surface 1 - 99 50 * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
document off-center * The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
adjustment * The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
J OFFSET_SPF2 RSPF back surface 1 - 99 50
document off-center
adjustment
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document 1 - 99 50
front surface Before executing this adjustment, be sure to confirm that the ADJ
magnification ratio 4/ADJ 5 Print engine image skew, image position, image magnifi-
adjustment (Sub
cation ratio, void area adjustments has been completed normally.
scan)
L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document 1 - 99 50 1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
back surface below.
magnification ratio Place a scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning direction
adjustment (Sub and that its lead edge is in contact with the document guide
scan) plate.
* Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan Place white paper on the document table so that the scale lead
timing is delayed. edge can be seen.
* Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the
image loss is increased.
* Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
* The SPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for
countermeasures against the case when shades are
produced.
5) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key.
(SIM50-12)
SPF(SIDE1) Front surface mode
SPF(SIDE2) Back surface mode
(SIM50-6)
OFFSET SPF1 Front surface mode
OFFSET SPF2 Back surface mode
6) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
(Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)
(When the adjustment value is increased, the print image is
shifted to the rear.)
Repeat the procedures of 2) - 6) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.

2) Enter the SIM 50-1 mode. Setting Default
range value
R Sub DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
scanning value
$˖ ˖55&$ S direction DENB-LCC LCC correction 1 - 99 50
$˖ %˖ ˖55&%&6 print area value
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6
T correction DENB-ADU ADU correction 1 - 99 55
'˖ ˖55&%/&&
value value
(˖ ˖55&%0)7
)˖ ˖55&%$'8 U DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50

*˖ ˖/($' correction value
+˖ ˖6,'(
,˖ ˖'(1$ 4) Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment.
-˖ ˖'(1%
.˖ ˖)52175($5
Shift to the copy mode, and make a copy at each of 100% and
/˖ ˖2))6(7B2& 200% in the document table mode.
2. When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper, the lead edge
image from 4.0mm is not copied in either of 100% and 200%
10-key copy scale.
OK If not, change and adjust the RRCA value.
(Adjust so that the lead edge image from 4.0mm is not copied
in either of different copy magnification ratios.)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$˖ ˖55&$
obtained.
$˖ %˖ ˖55&%&6
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%&6

Scale image 4.0mm position
'˖ ˖55&%/&&
Paper lead
(˖ ˖55&%0)7 edge
)˖ ˖55&%$'8
*˖ ˖/($'
+˖ ˖6,'(
,˖ ˖'(1$
-˖ ˖'(1%
.˖ ˖)52175($5
100%
5mm
/˖ ˖2))6(7B2&
2.
3) Set RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default values. 200%

5mm 10mm
Setting Default
range value
A Lead RRCA Document lead 0 - 99 50
edge edge reference
adjust- position (OC) 5) Image loss adjustment
B ment RRCB-CS1 Regis- Standard 1 - 99 60 When the adjustment item of the image loss below is set to the
value tration Tray default value, it is adjusted to the standard state. If it is not in
C RRCB-DSK motor Desk 1 - 99 60 the below standard state, or when it is set to a desired value,
D RRCB-LCC ON LCC 1 - 99 60 change these adjustment items.
E RRCB-MFT timing Manual 1 - 99 60
adjust- paper feed Paper lead edge
ment
F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 60
G Image LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 40
loss area loss area setting Copy area
H setting SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20 Maginification ratio : 400%
value area adjustment
I Void area DENA Lead edge void 1 - 99 40
adjust- area adjustment 1 2 3 4
J ment DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30 5mm 10mm
adjustment
K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
REAR area adjustment
Void area: 4.0mm, Image loss: 4.0mm
L Off- OFFSET_ OC document off- 1 - 99 50
center OC center adjustment De- Standard
adjust- Item/ Adjustment
Content fault adjustment
ment Display range
value value
M Magnifi- SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
LEAD Image loss Lead edge 0 - 99 40 4.0
cation SPEED_OC magnification ratio
adjustment image loss r 1.0mm
ratio adjustment (CCD)
adjustment
correction
SIDE Side image 0 - 99 20 2.0
N Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50 loss r 1.0mm
scanning correction value adjustment
O direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
print area value When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is
P correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50 increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
value value image loss is decreased.
Q DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is
value
changed by 0.1mm.

18-B Image scanning position adjustment 18-C Copy image position, image loss, void area
(Manual adjustment) (RSPF mode) adjustment (Manual adjustment)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: (RSPF mode)
* When the scan control PWB is replaced. This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. * When the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. * When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the scanner (reading) section is replaced. * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When U2 trouble occurs. * When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
* When the RSPF section is disassembled. * When U2 trouble occurs.
* When the RSPF unit is replaced. * When the RSPF section is disassembled.
This simulation is to adjust the scanning position when scanning in * When the RSPF unit is replaced.
the RSPF mode.
a. Adjustment procedures
If this adjustment is made improperly, the scanner stop position is
1) Prepare the adjustment chart.
shifted from the specified position and a shade of the document
table may be reflected on the lead edge section of the scan image The adjustment chart can be made by the following proce-
in the RSPF mode. dures.
1) Make a copy in the RSPF mode, and check for any shade on Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper and draw arrow marks vertically and
the lead edge section of the copy image. horizontally on the front and the back surfaces.
At the same time, put marks of the lead edge, the trail edge,
the front end, and the rear end as well as the identification
marks of the front surface and the back surface.
Papar lead edge
R Front surface
FACE
Image area
L T
Shadow image of RSPF

Put the position
marks.
If there is any shade of the document table on the lead edge F
section of the copy image, perform the following procedures.

Draw arrows.
2) Enter the SIM 53-8 mode, and press [MANUAL] key.
R Back surface

BACK
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
63)6&$11,1*326,7,21$'-8670(17
$872 0$18$/
L T
Put the position

marks.
Draw arrows.
3) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key. 2) Enter the SIM 50-6 mode.
When the set value is increased, the distance from the home
position to the RSPF scanning position is increased. When the
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
set value is changed by 1, the scanning position is changed by /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8( 63)
0.1mm. $˖
$˖ ˖6,'(
%˖ ˖6,'(
Perform the procedures of 1) - 3) until a satisfactory result is ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖/($'B('*( 6,'(
obtained. '˖ ˖)5217B5($5 6,'(
(˖ ˖75$,/B('*( 6,'(

)˖ ˖/($'B('*( 6,'(
*˖ ˖)5217B5($5 6,'(
+˖ ˖75$,/B('*( 6,'(

After execution of this adjustment, be sure to execute ADJ 18C
,˖ ˖2))6(7B63)
Copy image position, image loss, void area adjustment (Manual -˖ ˖2))6(7B63)
adjustment) (RSPF mode). .˖ ˖6&$1B63(('B63)
2.

2) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the RSPF mode. Check to
Setting Default
Item/Display Content confirm that the lead edge image loss is within 4.0 r 1.0mm on
range value
the front surface and the back surface. The paper lead edge
must be aligned with the presumed image lead edge.
document scan
position
adjustment (CCD) Paper lead edge The paper lead edge must be aligned with
the image lead edge.
document scan
position
adjustment (CCD)
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
D setting FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20
SIDE1 (SIDE1) image loss amount
setting Copy image
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 40
amount setting
amount amount setting Image loss
G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20 4.0 1.0mm
setting If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 40 procedure.
(SIDE2) edge image loss 3) Enter the adjustment value of SIDE1/SIDE2 with 10-key, and
amount setting press [OK] key.
I OFFSET_SPF1 RSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
Adjust so that the paper lead edge is aligned with the pre-
document off-
sumed image lead edge.
center adjustment
J OFFSET_SPF2 RSPF back 1 - 99 50 SIDE1: Front surface lead edge scan position adjustment
surface document SIDE2: Back surface lead edge scan position adjustment
off-center
(When the adjustment value is increased, the print image posi-
adjustment
tion is shifted to the delaying direction for the paper.)
front surface (Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)
magnification ratio Perform the procedures of 2) - 3) until a satisfactory result is
adjustment (Sub obtained.
scan)
L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document 1 - 99 50 (Rear edge image loss adjustment)
back surface 1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the RSPF mode. Check to
magnification ratio confirm that the rear edge image loss is 2.0 - 5.0mm on the
adjustment (Sub
front surface and the back surface.
scan)
* Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan Paper rear edge
timing is delayed.
* Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the
image loss is increased.
* Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
* The RSPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for coun-
termeasures against the case when shades are produced.
(Lead edge image loss adjustment)
1) Set the lead edge image loss adjustment values (LEAD EDGE Copy image
(SIDE1/SIDE2) on the front surface and the back surface to
the following values.
(Standard set value)
TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 1):
40 Lead edge image loss set value (Front surface) Image loss 2.0 - 5.0mm
40 Lead edge image loss set value (Back surface)
procedure.
(When the set value is increased, the lead edge image loss is
increased.)
(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)

2) Enter the adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE (SIDE1/SIDE2)
with 10-key, and press [OK] key. ADJ 19 Finisher and punch unit
TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 1): adjustments (alignment, punch
Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Front surface)
hole position, staple position)
Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Back surface) This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
(When the adjustment value is increased, the rear edge image * When the finisher is disassembled.
loss is increased.) * When the finisher control PWB is replaced.
(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step) * When the punch unit is disassembled.
Perform the procedures of 1) - 2) until a satisfactory result is * When the punch control PWB is replaced.
obtained.
* When the alignment is improper.
(Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment) * When the punch hole position is shifted.
1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the RSPF mode. Check to * When the staple position is shifted.
confirm that the image losses on the front frame side and the 1) Enter the SIM 3-10 mode.
rear frame side are 2.0 r 2.0mm on the front surface and the
back surface.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Paper F Image loss ),1,6+(5$'-8670(17
side edge 2.0 2.0mm $˖ ˖)5217$'-867
$˖ %˖ ˖5($5$'-867
Copy image ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖67$3/(5($5
'˖ ˖67$3/()5217
(˖ ˖67$3/(%27+
)˖ ˖67$3/(3,7&+
*˖ ˖381&+&(17(5
+˖ ˖381&++2/(
2.
Copy image
Paper R Image loss

side edge 2.0 2.0mm

procedure.
2) Enter the adjustment value of FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1) /
FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2), and press [OK] key.
FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1):
Front/Rear image loss adjustment value (Front surface)
FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2):
Front/Rear image loss adjustment value (Back surface)
(When the adjustment value is increased, the front/rear image
loss is increased.)
(Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)
Perform the procedures of 1) - 2) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.

2) Select an adjustment target item with the scroll key.
Change
when the
Setting Default Purpose (Case where the Change when the adjustment value is
Item/Display Content adjustment
range value adjustment is required) increased or decreased
value is
changed by 1
A FRONT Alignment position 2 - 18 10 This adjustment is used to F side paper When the adjustment value is 0.3665mm
ADJUST adjustment adjust the paper alignment alignment increased, the alignment plate stop
(F side alignment width when the paper stop position position is shifted to the R side.
plate stop position) alignment is improper. (F/R When the adjustment value is
(Paper alignment Alignment is determined by direction) decreased, the alignment plate stop
adjustment) the combination of the both position is shifted to the F side.
adjustment values of FRONT
ADJUST and REAR
ADJUST.
B REAR Alignment position 2 - 18 10 When changing the R side paper When the adjustment value is 0.3665mm
ADJUST adjustment adjustment values of FRONT alignment increased, the alignment plate stop
(R side alignment ADJUST and REAR ADJUST stop position position is shifted to the F side.
plate stop position) from the default values, be (F/R When the adjustment value is
(Paper alignment sure to change them by the direction) decreased, the alignment plate stop
adjustment) same variation. position is shifted to the R side.
C STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When the staple position on Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
REAR adjustment (one the R side is shifted, perform position increased, the staple position is
position at the the adjustment. (Stapler stop shifted to the rear side.
rear) position) When the adjustment value is
(F/R decreased, the staple position is
direction) shifted to the front side.
D STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When the staple position on Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
FRONT adjustment (one the F side is shifted, perform position increased, the staple position is
position in front) the adjustment. (Stapler stop shifted to the rear side.
position) When the adjustment value is
E STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When the staple off-center is Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
BOTH adjustment (center shifted, perform the position increased, the staple position is
position of two adjustment. (Stapler stop shifted to the rear side.
positions binding) position) When the adjustment value is
F STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When it is required to change Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
PITCH adjustment (staple the staple interval, perform position increased, the staple interval is
pitch of two the adjustment. (Stapler stop increased.
(F/R decreased, the staple interval is
direction) decreased.
G PUNCH Punch center 37 - 63 50 When the punch off-center is Punch When the adjustment value is 0.1441mm
CENTER positioning sensor shifted, perform the position decreased, the punch position is
adjustment. (F/R shifted to the front side.
direction) When the adjustment value is
increased, the punch position is
shifted to the rear side.
H PUNCH Punch hole 42 - 58 50 When the punch hole position Punch When the adjustment value is 0.2584mm
HOLE adjustment (paper is shifted in the transport position increased, the punch position is
transport direction) direction, perform the (Paper shifted to the paper lead edge side.
adjustment. transport When the adjustment value is
direction) decreased, the punch position is
shifted to the paper rear edge side.

MX-3115N
[6] SIMULATION 6HUYLFH0DQXDO
1. General and purpose

The simulation mode has the following functions, to display the
machine operating status, identify the trouble position and causes
in an earlier stage, and to efficiently setup and adjust the machine
for improved serviceability.
1) Various adjustments
2) Setting of the specifications and functions
3) Canceling troubles
4) Operation check
5) Counters check, setting, clear
6) Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis), data
check, clear.
7) Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc.) data
transport.
The operating procedures and displays depend on the design of
the operation panel of the machine.
2. Starting the simulation

Entering the simulation mode
1) Machine in Copy mode: Select Program key o Asterisk (*) key
o Clear key o Asterisk (*) key o Ready for input of main
code of simulation.
2) Entering a main code with the 10-key o START key ON.
Or select a main code with the SIM key on the touch panel.
3) Entering a sub code with the 10-key o START key ON.
4) Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.
5) The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected
item. Press [START] key or [EXECUTE] key to start the simu-
lation operation.
To cancel the current simulation mode and change the main
code and the sub code, press [SYSTEM SETTING] key.
Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode

1) Press [CA] key.
MX-3115N SIMULATION 6 – 1
START (Copy mode)
Press the Program key.
Press the asterisk (*) key.
Press the clear key.
Press the Program key.
Standby for entry of Press the SYSTEM

SIM code. SETTINGS key
Enter the main code of

SIM with the 10-key.
The main code of SIM

is displayed.
NO
Press the START key.

YES Is it the same
simulation main
code?
YES
In the power OFF/ON type
Standby for entry of SIM <Exclusion type> simulation, OFF/ON
Is there a sub code ?
sub code You have to exit message is
simulation mode Press the SYSTEM displayed by the
NO before entering into SETTINGS key SYSTEM
Enter SIM sub code with
this mode for self YES
SETTINGS key.
the 10-key. printing type.
Select the mode and the Do you want
NO
Press the START key. item with the scroll key to perform another
and the item key. simulation ? The simulation mode
is canceled.
NO
If there is no item. YES Press the EXECUTE key
Operation check ?
and OK key.
NO Do you YES
Operation is made according want to end the Press the clear all key.
to the selected mode and item. simulation ?
YES Press the EXECUTE key

Operating conditions
check ? and OK key.
NO
The display is made according to
the selected some and the item.
YES Press the EXECUTE key

Data clear ?
and OK key.
NO
The selected mode and
the item are cleared.
YES Adjustments NO Operation is made according

or setting (counter data to the selected mode and the item.
change) ? (Other modes)
The display is made according

to the selected mode and the item.
Do you NO
want to change the
content ?
The changed content
YES
is stored.
Enter the new setting and Press the EXECUTE key

adjustment values. and OK key.
3. List of simulation codes
Main Sub Functions Section
1 1 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 Used to check the sensors in the scanner (reading) section and the related circuits. Scanner (reading)
5 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 1 Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder and the control circuit. RSPF
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the automatic document feeder section RSPF
and the control circuits.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the automatic document feeder and the control circuit. RSPF
3 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
3 Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
10 Used to adjust the finisher. Finisher
4 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk, and the control circuit of those. Desk
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the desk, and the control circuit of those. Desk
5 Used to check the operations of the paper feed desk paper transport clutch (DTRC). Desk
5 1 Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit. Operation panel
2 Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit. Fusing
3 Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
4 Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the control circuit. Process
6 1 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper transport system (clutches and solenoids) and the Paper transport/Paper exit section
control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control circuit. Others
3 Used to check the operations of the transport unit and the control circuit. Process (Transport)
6 Used to perform fusing pressure release and applying, and to check the operations of the control Fusing
circuits.
90 Used to reset the machine to the factory setting. (The scanner is set to the lock enable position) Scanner
7 1 Used to set the operating conditions of aging. Others
6 Used to set the operating intermittent aging cycle.
8 Used to display the warm-up time.
9 Color setting in the color copy test mode (Used to check the copy operation and the image quality for
each color).
12 The document reading number of sheets setting (for aging operation) RSPF
8 1 Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each print mode and the control Process (Developing)
circuit. * When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously.
2 Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the Process (Charging)
control circuit. * When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously.
6 Used to check and adjust the operation of the transport voltage and the control circuit. Process (Transport)
9 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper reverse section (duplex section) Duplex
and its control circuit.
3 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and its control Duplex
circuit.
10 1 Used to check the operations of the toner supply mechanism (toner motor) and the related circuit. Process (Developing)
13 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
14 - Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5 troubles.
15 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U6" trouble.
16 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble. MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB
17 - Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble.
21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle.
22 1 Used to check the print count value in each section and each operation mode.
(Used to check the maintenance timing.)
2 Used to check the total number of misfeed and troubles.
(When the number of total jam is considerably great, it is judged as necessary for repair.)
3 Used to check misfeed positions and the misfeed count of each position.
* Presumption of the faulty point by this data is possible.
4 Used to check the trouble (self diag) history.
5 Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section). Firmware
6 Used to output the setting/adjustment data (simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the firmware version,
and the counter list.
8 Used to check the number of operations (counter value) of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scan (reading)
unit.
9 Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of each paper feed section. Paper feed, ADU
10 Used to check the system configuration (option, internal hardware).
11 Used to check the use frequency (send/receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is installed) FAX
12 Used to check the RSPF misfeed positions and the number of misfeed at each position. (When the RSPF
number of misfeed is considerably great, it can be judged as necessary for repair.)
13 Used to check the operating time of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner cartridge) and the Process
fusing unit
14 Used to display the use status of the toner cartridge. Process
22 18 Used to display the user data delete history.
19 Used to check the values of the counters related to the scan - image send.
40 Used to display the error code list and the contents.
90 Used to output the various set data lists.
23 2 Used to output the trouble history list of paper jam and misfeed.
(If the number of troubles of misfeed is considerably great, the judgment is made that repair is required.)
80 Used to check the operation of paper feed and paper transport in the paper feed section and the paper Paper feed, Paper transport
transport section. Used to output the list of the operation status of the sensor and the detectors in the
paper feed section and the paper transport section.
24 1 Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter.
(After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
2 Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section.
3 Used to clear the finisher, RSPF, and the scan (reading) unit counter.
4 Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transport unit and the fusing unit.
(After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
5 Used to clear the developer counter. (After replacement of developer, clear the counter.)
6 Used to clear the copy counter.
9 Used clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter.
10 Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is installed)
15 Used to clear the counters related to the scan mode and the image send.
35 Used to clear the toner cartridge use status data.
25 1 Used to check the operations of the developing section. Process (Developing section)
2 Used to make the initial setting of toner density when replacing developer. (Automatic adjustment) Image process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
4 Used to display the operation data of the toner supply quantity. (Not used in the market.) Process
5 Used to display the toner density correction data. (Not used in the market.) Process
26 1 Used to set Yes/No of installation of the right paper exit tray. Paper exit
3 Used to set the specifications of the auditor. Auditor
(Setting must be made according to the auditor use conditions.)
5 Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/11x17 size)
6 Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.
7 Used to set the machine ID.
8 Counter mode setting (Long scale)
10 Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner.
18 Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the Japan and the UK versions.)
30 Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety standards).
(For slow start to drive the fusing heater lamp)
32 Used to set the specifications of the fusing cleaning operation. Fusing
35 Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4 trouble history when a same trouble occurred repeatedly.
There are two display modes: display as one trouble and display as several series of troubles.
38 Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the maintenance life is reached.
41 Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnification ratio automatic select function (AMS) in the center
binding mode.
49 Used to set the print speed of postcards mode.
50 Used to set functions.
51 Used to set the specifications of the serial port operation. (For PCI)
52 Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up or not.
53 User auto color calibration (color balance adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting.
65 Used to set the finisher alarm mode.
69 Used to set the operating conditions for toner near end.
73 Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide copy mode image loss (shade delete quantity) adjustment
74 Used to set the OSA trial mode.
78 Used to set the password of the remote operation panel.
79 Used to set YES/NO of the pop-up display of user data delete result.
27 1 Used to set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
2 Used to set the sender's registration number and the HOST server telephone number. (FSS function)
4 Used to set the initial call and toner order auto send. (FSS function)
5 Used to set the machine tag No. (This function allows the host computer to check the machine tag No.) Communication (RIC/MODEM)
(FSS function)
6 Used to set of the manual service call. (FSS function)
7 Used to set of the enable, alert callout. (FSS function)
9 Used to set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value and shading gain adjustment
retry number. (FSS function)
10 Used to clear the trouble prediction history information. (FSS function)
11 Used to check the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry number
history. (FSS function)
12 Used to check the high density, halftone process control and the automatic registration adjustment error
history. (FSS Function)
13 Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors. (FSS function)
14 Used to set the FSS function connection test mode.
15 Used to display the FSS connection status.
16 Used to set the FSS alert send.
17 Used to set the FSS paper order alert.
18 Used to clear the FSS paper feed retry counter.
30 1 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the paper feed section and
the control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed section and the control
circuits.
33 2 Used to delete the ID (IDM) information of Felica card.
40 2 Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment. Paper feed
7 Used to set the adjustment value of the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor. Paper feed
41 1 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
2 Used to adjust the document size sensor detection level.
3 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit.
43 1 Used to set the fusing temperature in each mode.
4 Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in each mode. (Continued from SIM 43-1.)
20 Used to set the environmental correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the fusing
temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
21 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the fusing
22 Used to set the environment correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the fusing
23 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the fusing
24 Used to set the correction of the temperature adjustment value of SIM 43-1 and 43-4.
31 Used to check the operation of the fusing web cleaning. Fusing
32 Used to set various items related to the forcible operation of web cleaning when job end. Fusing
44 1 Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section. Image process (Photoconductor/
2 Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image density sensor (registration sensor). Process
4 Used to set the conditions of the high density process control operation. Process
6 Used to execute the high density process control forcibly. Process
9 Used to display the result data of the high density process control operation. Image process (Photoconductor/
12 Used to display the operation data of the high density process control and the image density sensor Image process (Photoconductor/
(registration sensor). Developing)
14 Used to display the output level of the temperature and humidity sensor. Process (OPC drum, development)/
Fusing/LSU
15 Used to set the OPC drum idle rotation. Process
21 Used to set the halftone process control target. Process
22 Used to display the toner patch density level in the halftone process control operation. Process
24 Used to display the correction target and the correction level in the halftone process control operation. Process
25 Used to set the calculating conditions of the correction value for the halftone process control. Process
26 Used to execute the halftone process control compulsory. Process
27 Used to clear the correction data of the halftone process control. Process
28 Used to set the process control execution conditions. Process
29 Used to set the operating conditions of the process control during a job. Process
31 Used to adjust the OPC drum phase. (Manual adjustment) Process
37 Used to set the development bias correction level in the continuous printing operation.
43 Used to display the identification information of the developing unit. Developing system
62 Used to set the process control execution conditions. Process
46 1 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.
2 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.
4 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.
5 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.
8 Used to adjust the image send mode color balance RGB.
9 Used to adjust the scan image density.
10 Used to adjust the copy color balance and the gamma (for each color copy mode).
16 Used to adjust the monochrome copy density and the gamma (for each monochrome copy mode).
19 Used to set the operating conditions for the density scanning (exposure) of monochrome auto copy
mode documents.
21 Copy color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)
23 Used to set the density correction of copy high density section (High density tone gap supported).
24 Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
25 Used to adjust the copy color balance. (Single color copy mode)
26 Used to reset the single color mode color balance set value to the default.
27 Used to adjust the gamma/density of copy images, texts, and line image edges.
30 Used to adjust the resolution in the sub scanning direction in the copy mode.
32 Used to adjust the document background density reproducibility in the monochrome auto copy mode.
36 Used to adjust the colors in the 2-color copy mode.
37 Used to adjust the reproduction capability of monochrome mode color.
38 Used to adjust the black component amount in the color copy mode.
39 Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send images.
40 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Collective adjustment of all the modes)
41 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Normal)
42 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Fine)
46 43 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Super Fine)
44 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Ultra fine)
45 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (600dpi).
47 Used to set the compression rate of copy and scan images (JPEG).
51 Used to adjust the gamma for the copy mode heavy paper mode and the image process mode.
52 Used to set the gamma default for the copy mode heavy paper and the image process mode.
(After execution of either SIM46-54 or SIM46-51, the adjustment value is reset to the initial value.)
54 Used to perform the engine halftone automatic density adjustment (dither).
58 Used to set the copy mode pseudo resolution. (Smoothing process)
59 Used to perform the copy mode pseudo resolution image process adjustment.
60 Used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode.
61 Used to adjust the area separation recognition level.
62 Used to set the operating conditions of the ACS, the area separation, the background image process,
and the auto exposure mode.
63 Used to adjust the density in the copy low density section.
65 Used to set the color correction table.
74 Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)/Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
48 1 Used to adjust the scan image magnification ratio (in the main scanning direction and the sub scanning
direction).
5 Used to correction the scan image magnification ratio (in the sub scanning direction). Scanner section
6 Used to adjust the rotation speed of each motor.
49 1 Used to perform the firmware update.
3 Used to update the operation manual in the HDD.
5 Used to perform the watermark update.
50 1 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
5 Used to adjust the print lead edge image position. (PRINTER MODE)
6 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss. (RSPF mode) RSPF
10 Used to adjust the black print image magnification ratio and the off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for each paper feed section.)
12 Used to perform the scan image off-center position adjustment.
(The adjustment is made separately for each scan mode.)
20 Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction)
22 Used to adjust the image registration. (Main scan direction, sub scan direction)
(Auto adjustment)/OPC drum phase adjustment (Auto adjustment)
24 Used to display the detail data of SIM 44-2, 50-20, 21 and 22.
27 Used to perform the image loss adjustment of scanned images in the FAX or image send mode.
28 Used to automatically adjust the image loss, void area, image off-center, and image magnification ratio.
51 1 Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the secondary transport voltage.
2 Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the main unit and the RSPF resist
roller. (This adjustment is performed when there is a considerable variation in the print image position on
the paper or when paper jams frequently occur.)
53 6 Used to adjust the detection level of the RSPF document width.
7 Used to adjust the RSPF document size width sensor.
8 Used to adjust the document lead edge reference and the RSPF mode document scan position.
9 RSPF dirt detection setting
10 RSPF dirt detection execution
55 1 Used to set the specifications of the engine control operations. (SOFT SW)
2 Used to set the specifications of the scanner control operation. (SOFT SW)
3 Used to set the specifications of the controller operation. (SOFT SW)
10 Used to set the special stamp text. (Taiwan only)
56 1 Used to transport data between HDD - MFP PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the PWB.)
2 Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. SD Card, and HDD (including user authentication data and
address data) to the USB memory. (Corresponding to the device cloning and the storage backup.)
3 Used to backup the document filing data to the USB memory.
4 Used to backup the JOB log data to the USB memory.
5 Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB memory in the TEXT format.
6 Used to import the SIM23-2 data into a USB memory in the TEXT format.
7 Used to import SYSLOG data into a USB memory
60 1 Used to check the memory operations (read/write) of the MFP PWB.
61 1 Used to check the LSU polygon motor rotation and laser detection. LSU
3 Used to set the laser power
4 Used to print the print image skew adjustment pattern. (LSU unit)
62 1 Used to format the hard disk/SD Card. (HDD: Excluding the Operation manual and the watermark data)
(SD Card: User data)
2 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (partial).
3 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (all areas).
6 Used to perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk.
7 Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics error log.
8 Used to format the hard disk/SD Card. (HDD: Excluding the Operation Manual, the watermark data, and
the system area) (SD Card: User data)
10 Used to clear the job completion list data.
11 Used to delete the document filing data.
62 12 Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard disk trouble.
13 Used to format the hard disk. (Operation Manual, watermark data only)
14 Used to delete the document filing management data. HDD
63 1 Used to display the shading correction result. Scanner
2 Used to perform shading.
3 Used to perform scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma auto adjustment. Scanner
4 Used to display the SIT chart patch density.
5 Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma default setting.
6 Used to display the scan level and the density level of the copy color balance adjustment patch.
7 Used to register the service target of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
8 Used to set the default of the service target of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
11 Used to set the target color balance of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
64 1 Test print. (Self print) (Color mode)
2 Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
4 Printer test print. (Self print)
5 Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
6 Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
7 Used to print the adjustment pattern of the test print .(Self print).
(The adjustment pattern of SIM46-21 is printed.)
65 1 Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. Operation panel section
2 Used to display the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates.
5 Used to check the operation panel key input.
66 1 Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (2 - 150) on the LCD to allow changing the soft SW while FAX
checking with the LCD.
2 Used to enter a country code and set the default value for the country code. FAX
3 Used to check read/write of the EEPROM and the SDRAM on the MODEM controller and display the FAX
result.
4 Used to send the selected signals to the line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: max.) FAX
5 Used to send the selected signal to the line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
(For the kinds of send signals, refer to SIM66-04.)
6 Used to print the confidential registration check table (BOX NO., BOX name, passcode. (If there is no FAX
confidential registration, no print is made.)
7 Used to output all image data saved in the image memory. (Confidential data are also outputted.) FAX
8 Used to send the selected sound messages to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX
9 Used to send the selected sound message to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
* For details of sound messages, refer to the sound message table of SIM66-08.
10 Used to clear the FAX and image send image data. (The confidential data are also cleared.) FAX
11 Used to send the selected signal at 300bps to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX
12 Used to send the selected signal at 300bps to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
* For the kings of send signals at 300bps, refer to SIM66-11, 300bps send signal table.
13 Used to register dial numbers for SIM66-14/15/16, Dial test. (Up to 20 digits can be registered.) FAX
14 Used to execute the dial pulse (10PPS) send test and to adjust the make time. FAX
15 Used to execute the dial pulse (20PPS) send test and to adjust the make time. FAX
16 Used to execute the DTFM signal send test and to adjust the send level. FAX
17 Used to send the DTMF signal to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Max.) FAX
18 Used to send the DTMF signal to the line and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW setting) FAX
21 Used to print the selected items (system error, protocol monitor). FAX
22 Used to set the handset sound volume. (This simulation can be executed even though the handset FAX
setting is set to NO. When, however, the handset is not installed, the sound volume cannot be checked.)
(Japan model only)
24 Used to clear the FAST save data. FAX
29 Used to initialize the telephone book data (the one-touch registration table, the FTP/Desktop expansion FAX
table, the group expansion table, the program registration table, the interface memory box table, the
meta data, InboundRouting, and the DocumentAdmin table).
30 Used to display the TEL/LIU status change, The display is highlighted by status change. FAX
31 Used to set ON/OFF the port for output to TEL/LIU. FAX
32 Used to check the fixed data received from the line and to display the result. FAX
33 Used to execute detection of various signals with the line connected and to display the detection result. FAX
When a signal is detected, the display is highlighted.
34 Used to execute the send test and display the time required for sending image data in the test. Used to FAX
execute send test and display. (Unit: ms)
36 Used to check send and receive data from the MODEM controller to the MFP controller or the data line FAX
or the command line individually.
39 Used to check and change the destination setting saved in EEPROM of the FAX BOX. FAX
42 Used to rewrite the program to power control installed in the FAX BOX. FAX
43 Used to write the adjustment value into the power control installed in the FAX BOX. FAX
61 Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (151 - 250) on the LCD to allow changing the soft SW while FAX
checking with the LCD.
62 Used to import the FAX receive data into a USB memory in PDF file type. FAX
67 17 Printer reset Printer
24 Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) Printer
25 Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) Printer
67 26 Used to set the target color balance of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
27 Used to set the service target of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
28 Used to set the default of the service target of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
31 Used to clear the printer calibration value. Printer
33 Used to change the gamma of the printer screen. Printer
34 Used to set the density correction in the printer high density section. (Support for the high density Printer
section tone gap)
36 Used to adjust the density in the low density section. Printer
41 Used to set the threshold value for the printing judgement in the black color of the black and white Printer
printing or the selected color.
42 Used to change the gradation by increasing or decreasing the amount of the black color in the black and Printer
white printing or the selected color.
43 Used to adjust the color balance of the black and white printing finely. Printer
45 Used to adjust the printer image filter and trapping. Printer
52 Used to set the default of the gamma of the printer screen. Printer
54 Printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment for each dither (The adjustment is disable in a Printer
GDI printer.))
4. Details of simulation
2
1
2-1
Purpose Operation test/check
1-1
Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the auto-
matic document feeder and the control cir-
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner cuit.
(reading) unit and the control circuit.
Section RSPF
Section Scanner (reading)
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the operation mode and the speed with the touch panel
1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key. key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Scanning is once performed at the speed corresponding to the The RSPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit oper-
scan resolution (operation speed). ations at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution (oper-
ation speed).
Item/Display Operation mode Default value
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
(346.0mm/s) (346.0mm/s) [RSPF]
400DPI 400DPI
(259.5mm/s) Item/Display Operation mode Default value
600DPI 600DPI (SINGLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
(173.0mm/s) (259.5mm/s) (259.5mm/s)
1200DPI 1200DPI 400DPI 400DPI
(86.5mm/s) (259.5mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI
(173.0 mm/s)
(DOUBLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
1-2 (259.5mm/s) (259.5mm/s)
400DPI 400DPI
Purpose Operation test/check (259.5mm/s)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the sensors in the scanner 600DPI 600DPI
(reading) section and the related circuits. (173.0 mm/s)
Section Scanner (reading)

Operation/Procedure
The operating status of the sensor is displayed. 2-2
When "MHPS" is highlighted, the scanner unit is in the home posi- Purpose Operation test/check
tion.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
sors and the detectors in the automatic
document feeder section and the control
1-5 circuits.
Purpose Operation test/check Section RSPF
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner Operation/Procedure
(reading) unit and the control circuit. The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
Section Scanner (reading) played.
Operation/Procedure The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key. are highlighted.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Display Content
Scanning is repeated at the speed corresponding to the scan SPED Document sensor
resolution (operation speed). SPPD1 Document transport sensor 1
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. SPLS1 Paper size detector 1
SPLS2 Paper size detector 2
Item/Display Operation mode Default value SOCD RSPF open/close sensor
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI SPPD2 Document transport sensor 2
(346.0mm/s) (346.0mm/s) SPPD3 Document transport sensor 3
400DPI 400DPI SPPD4 Document transport sensor 4
(259.5mm/s)
SCOV RSPF cover open/close detector
600DPI 600DPI
SSET SPF installation detection
(173.0mm/s)
STMPU SPF stamp UN installation detection
1200DPI 1200DPI
SWD_LEN SPF document guide plate position (Unit: 0.1mm)
(86.5mm/s)
SWD_AD SPF document detection volume output AD value
SWD_LEN and SWD_AD are not ON/OFF display.
2-3 Display Content
FPHPS Punch unit home position sensor
Purpose Operation test/check FPLD1 Paper height detector 1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads FPLD2 Paper height detector 2
in the automatic document feeder and the FPMRS Punch motor rotation sensor
control circuit. FPMS Punch mode sensor
Section RSPF FPPD1 Paper entry detector
FPTS Punch timing sensor
Operation/Procedure
FSED Staple empty detector
1) Select a target item of the operation check with the touch panel FSHPS Staple HP sensor
key. FSLD Staple lead edge detector
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. FSSHPS Stapler shift home position sensor
The selected load performs the operation. FSSS Staple safety sensor
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. FSSW Safety switch
FSTPD Staple tray paper detector
Display Content FTPS Tray position sensor
SPUM_F RSPF paper feed motor (normal rotation)
SPUM_R RSPF paper feed motor (reverse rotation)
SPFM_F RSPF transport motor (normal rotation)
SPFM_R RSPF transport motor (reverse rotation) 3-3
SPRS Paper exit roller pressure control solenoid (RSPF) Purpose Operation test/check
SRRC Registration roller clutch (RSPF)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in
STMPS Stamp solenoid
the finisher and the control circuit.
Section Finisher
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
3 key.
3-2 The selected load performs the operation.
Purpose Operation test/check When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- Inner finisher (MX-FN17)
sors and the detectors in the finisher and
the control circuit. Display Content
FCF Cooling fan
Section Finisher FDRLM Paper exit roller lift motor
Operation/Procedure FPAM_F Paper alignment motor F
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- FPAM_R Paper alignment motor R
played. FPAS Paper alignment solenoid
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active FPDM Paper exit motor
are highlighted. FPGS Paper gate solenoid
FPLDS Paper height detector solenoid
Inner finisher (MX-FN17) FPM Punch motor
Display Content FPS Paddle solenoid
FABHS Paper alignment belt HP sensor FPSM Punch shift motor
FAPHPS_F Paper alignment plate HP sensor F FPTM Paper transport motor
FAPHPS_R Paper alignment plate HP sensor R FSM Staple motor
FDRPS Paper exit roller position sensor FSSM Stapler shift motor
FDTLLS Paper exit tray lower limit sensor FTLM Tray lift motor
FDTPD Delivery tray paper detector
FDTULS Paper exit tray upper limit sensor 3-10
FFL Fan lock signal
Purpose Adjustment
FPCHPS Punch home position sensor
FPD Punch unit detection (connector) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher.
FPDFS Punch dust sensor Section Finisher
FPES1 Punch paper edge sensor 1 Operation/Procedure
FPES2 Punch paper edge sensor 2
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
FPES5 Punch paper edge sensor 5 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
FPES6 Punch paper edge sensor 6 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Inner finisher (MX-FN17)
Change
when the
Setting Default Purpose (Case where the Change when the adjustment value is
Item/Display Content adjustment
range value adjustment is required) increased or decreased
value is
changed by 1
A FRONT Alignment position 2 - 18 10 This adjustment is used to F side paper When the adjustment value is 0.3665mm
ADJUST adjustment adjust the paper alignment alignment increased, the alignment plate stop
(F side alignment width when the paper stop position position is shifted to the R side.
plate stop position) alignment is improper. (F/R When the adjustment value is
(Paper alignment Alignment is determined by direction) decreased, the alignment plate stop
adjustment) the combination of the both position is shifted to the F side.
adjustment values of FRONT
ADJUST and REAR ADJUST.
B REAR Alignment position 2 - 18 10 When changing the R side paper When the adjustment value is 0.3665mm
ADJUST adjustment adjustment values of FRONT alignment increased, the alignment plate stop
(R side alignment ADJUST and REAR ADJUST stop position position is shifted to the F side.
plate stop position) from the default values, be (F/R When the adjustment value is
(Paper alignment sure to change them by the direction) decreased, the alignment plate stop
adjustment) same variation. position is shifted to the R side.
C STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When the staple position on Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
REAR adjustment (one the R side is shifted, perform position increased, the staple position is
position at the the adjustment. (Stapler stop shifted to the rear side.
rear) position) When the adjustment value is
D STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When the staple position on Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
FRONT adjustment (one the F side is shifted, perform position increased, the staple position is
position in front) the adjustment. (Stapler stop shifted to the rear side.
position) When the adjustment value is
E STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When the staple off-center is Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
BOTH adjustment (center shifted, perform the position increased, the staple position is
position of two adjustment. (Stapler stop shifted to the rear side.
F STAPLE Stapling position 68 - 132 100 When it is required to change Staple When the adjustment value is 0.155mm
PITCH adjustment (staple the staple interval, perform position increased, the staple interval is
pitch of two the adjustment. (Stapler stop increased.
(F/R decreased, the staple interval is
direction) decreased.
G PUNCH Punch center 37 - 63 50 When the punch off-center is Punch When the adjustment value is 0.1441mm
CENTER positioning sensor shifted, perform the position decreased, the punch position is
adjustment. (F/R shifted to the front side.
direction) When the adjustment value is
increased, the punch position is
shifted to the rear side.
H PUNCH Punch hole 42 - 58 50 When the punch hole position Punch When the adjustment value is 0.2584mm
HOLE adjustment (paper is shifted in the transport position increased, the punch position is
transport direction) direction, perform the (Paper shifted to the paper lead edge side.
adjustment. transport When the adjustment value is
direction) decreased, the punch position is
shifted to the paper rear edge side.
4-5
4
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the paper
4-2
feed desk paper transport clutch (DTRC) .
Section Desk
Operation/Procedure
sors and detectors in the desk, and the
control circuit of those. Check the ON operation
Press the button of the code name for checking the ON operation.
Section Desk
Checking is started. When the operation is normal, the button on
Operation/Procedure
the display is highlighted. When it is abnormal, the button is not
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- highlighted.
played.
Check the OFF operation
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
Press the highlighted button which is ON.
are highlighted.
When the operation is normal, the highlighted button on the display
Desk returns to the normal display. When it is abnormal, the highlighted
Display Content display is maintained.
D1MDC Desk 1 installation detection connector
D1PPD Desk 1 paper transport detector Button Content
DTRC Desk transport clutch
D1ULD Desk 1 upper limit detector
D1PED Desk 1 paper empty detector
D1PQD Desk 1 remaining paper quantity detector
D1PRED1 Desk 1 paper rear edge detector 1
D1PRED3 Desk 1 paper rear edge detector 3 5
D2MDC Desk 2 installation detection connector 5-1
D2PPD Desk 2 paper transport detector
D2ULD Desk 2 upper limit detector
D2PED Desk 2 paper empty detector Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display,
D2PQD Desk 2 remaining paper quantity detector LCD in the operation panel, and control cir-
D2PRED1 Desk 2 paper rear edge detector 1 cuit.
D2PRED2 Desk 2 paper rear edge detector 2 Section Operation panel
D2PRED3 Desk 2 paper rear edge detector 3 Operation/Procedure
The LCD is changed as shown below.
The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to MAX o
MIN o the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted.
4-3 The LCD display contrast change and the LED lighting status are
checked.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
in the desk, and the control circuit of those.
5-2
Section Desk
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater
1) Select the load item that is required to operation check with the
lamp and the control circuit.
touch panel key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Section Fusing
The selected load performs the operation. Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. 1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key.
Desk 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Display Content The selected heater lamp operates ON/OFF.
D1LM Tray 1 lift-up motor When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
D1PFC Tray 1 paper feed clutch
Heater lamp operation check method:
D2LM Tray 2 lift-up motor
Remove the front cabinet upper and the paper exit tray, and the
D2PFC Tray 2 paper feed clutch
lighting status of each heater lamp can be checked through the
DPFM Desk transport motor
clearance between the fusing pressure release drive gear and the
DPTRC Desk paper transport clutch
frame fusing section.
HL_LM Heater lamp (B) (Back surface)

HL_UM Main heater lamp (F) (Front surface)
HL_US Sub heater lamp (F) (Front surface)
5-3 Section Item/Display Content
Purpose Operation test/check Transport/ ADUC1 ADU transport clutch 1
process PFM Transport motor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner
RRM Registration motor
lamp and the control circuit.
POMF (*1) Paper exit motor (normal rotation)
Section Scanner (reading) POMR (*1) Paper exit motor (reverse rotation)
Operation/Procedure FUM Fusing motor
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel CPFM Paper feed motor
key. OSM Offset motor
CPFC1 Tray vertical transport clutch 1
CPFC2 Tray vertical transport clutch 2
The scanner lamp lights up for 10 sec. TRC_DSK Desk clutch
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. TRC_LCC (*2) LCC clutch
TRC_FIN Finisher clutch
HPFC Transport roller clutch
5-4 PFC Vertical transport clutch
RRC Registration roller clutch
Paper feed CLUM1 Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 1)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the dis- CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1)
charge lamp and the control circuit. CLUM2 Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 2)
Section Process CPUC2 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2)
Operation/Procedure CPUS1 Paper feed pickup solenoid
(Paper feed tray 1) (Not used)
1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key. MPFS Paper feed solenoid (Manual paper feed)
When [ALL] key is pressed, all the items are selected.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. *1: If "Normal rotation" and "Reverse rotation" of a same load are
The selected discharge lamp is lighted for 30 sec. displayed as different items, when the both are selected at the
same time, "Normal rotation" is performed. In addition, a
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
change in the rotating direction is accepted only when the
DL_K Discharge lamp K
operation is stopped.
DL_C Discharge lamp C *2: Displayed but not installed in some models.
DL_M Discharge lamp M
DL_Y Discharge lamp Y
6-2
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan
6 motor and its control circuit.
Section Others
6-1 Operation/Procedure
Purpose Operation test/check 1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
key.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
the paper transport system (clutches and
solenoids) and the control circuits. The selected load performs the operation.
Section Paper transport/Paper exit section When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Operation/Procedure Press [ALL] key to select all the fans collectively.
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel Load operation check method:
key. The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
sound.
The selected load performs the operation.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. Display Content
Load operation check method: PROFM2 Process fan 2
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However, POFM Paper exit cooling fan
(Drives POFM1 and POFM2 at the same time.)
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
FUFM Fusing cooling fan
sound.
PROFM1 Process fan 1
PSFM Power cooling fan
6-3
7
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the trans-
7-1
port unit and the control circuit.
Purpose Setting
Section Process (Transport)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of
Operation/Procedure
aging.
1) Select the operation mode with the mode select button.
Section Others
Mode select button Content Operation/Procedure
TC1 Primary transfer (normal rotation) 1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel key.
TC1_R Primary transfer (reverse rotation)
TC2 Secondary transfer
The machine is rebooted in the aging mode.
2) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation of the mode The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
selected in 1) is performed. after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
Mode AGING Aging operation setup

Mode
select Content NOTE INTERVAL Intermittent operation setting
display
button MISFEED DISABLE JAM detection ignoring setting
TC1 BLACK Monochrome Black mode position o Color FUSING DISABLE Fusing unit ignoring setting
mode position mode position o Black mode
WARMUP DISABLE Warming up ignoring setting
COLOR Color mode position o Drum separation
DV CHECK DISABLE Developing unit ignoring setting
position position o (Black mode
position) SHADING DISABLE Shading correction operation omitting setting
FREE Non-transport
(Repeated in this sequence.) CCD GAIN FREE CCD gain adjustment omitting setting
position
TC1_R BLACK Monochrome Black mode position o Drum
mode position separation position o Color
FREE Non-transport mode position o (Black
position mode position) (Repeated in 7-6
COLOR Color mode this sequence.) Purpose Setting
position
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating intermittent aging
TC2 PRINT Print position Print position - Transfer
cycle.
FREE Non-transport position - Non-transfer
position position (Repeated in this Section
sequence) Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the intermittent aging operation cycle (unit: sec) with 10-
key.
6-6 2) Press [OK] key.
Purpose Operation test/check The time entered in procedure 1) is set.
* The interval time that can be set is 1 to 900 (sec).
Function (Purpose) Used to perform fusing pressure release
and applying, and to check the operations The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
of the control circuits. after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
7-8
1) Press [FUSER] key to highlight it.
Purpose Operation display
2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and fusing pressure applying and fus-
ing pressure release are repeated. Function (Purpose) Used to display the warm-up time.
During this period, the status of the fusing roller pressure is dis- Section
played. Operation/Procedure
PRINT Fusing pressure Fusing pressure applying o Fusing
applying pressure release o (Fusing pressure Counting of the warm-up time is started and the time required for
FREE Fusing pressure applying) The operation is repeated. warm-up is displayed
release * Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] key is inhibited.
6-90
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to reset the machine to the factory
setting. (The scanner is set to the lock
enable position)
Section Scanner
Operation/Procedure
The scanner is shifted to the lock enable position and stopped.
7-9 Adjustment Actual
range voltage
MIDDLE A MIDDLE Developing K 0 - 600 –450V
Function (Purpose) Color setting in the color copy test mode SPEED bias voltage r5V
(Used to check the copy operation and the DVB_K (Middle
image quality for each color). speed mode)
Section B MIDDLE Developing C 0 - 600 –450V
Operation/Procedure DVB_C (Middle
1) Select the copy color with the touch panel key. speed mode)
(Two or more colors can be selected.) C MIDDLE Developing M 0 - 600 –450V
The key of the selected color is highlighted. SPEED bias voltage r5V
DVB_M (Middle
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. speed mode)
Copying is performed with the selected color. D MIDDLE Developing Y 0 - 600 –450V
When [CLOSE] key is pressed, the display goes into the copy oper- SPEED bias voltage r5V
ation menu in the simulation mode. DVB_Y (Middle
speed mode)
K Setup/cancel of black LOW A LOW Developing K 0 - 600 –450V
C Setup/cancel of cyan SPEED bias voltage r5V
DVB_K (Low speed
M Setup/cancel of magenta
mode)
Y Setup/cancel of yellow
B LOW Developing C 0 - 600 –430V
DVB_C (Low speed
mode)
7-12 C LOW Developing M 0 - 600 –430V
Purpose Operation test/check SPEED bias voltage r5V
DVB_M (Low speed
Function (Purpose) The document reading number of sheets
mode)
setting (for aging operation)
D LOW Developing Y 0 - 600 –430V
Section RSPF SPEED bias voltage r5V
Operation/Procedure DVB_Y (Low speed
mode)
1) Set document reading quantity with 10-key.
(Setting range:0 - 255)
2) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
8
8-1
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of
the developing voltage in each print mode
and the control circuit.
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the
low speed are also adjusted simulta-
neously.
Section Process (Developing)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys on the touch
panel.
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
3) Enter the setting value with 10-key. (The value specified on the
label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is
output for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
Operation/Procedure
8-2
1) Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] keys on the touch
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment panel.
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of 2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
the main charger grid voltage in each
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. (The value specified
printer mode and the control circuit.
on the label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the
low speed are also adjusted simulta- * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
neously. item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
Section Process (Charging)
The set value is saved and the voltage entered with step 3) is
output for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
Adjustment
Item/Display (Mode) Content Actual voltage
range
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED GB_K Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) K 150 - 850 –620Vr5V
B MIDDLE SPEED GB_C Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) C 150 - 850 –620Vr5V
C MIDDLE SPEED GB_M Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) M 150 - 850 –620Vr5V
D MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y Main charger grid voltage (Middle speed mode) Y 150 - 850 –620Vr5V
LOW A LOW SPEED GB_K Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) K 150 - 850 –610Vr5V
B LOW SPEED GB_C Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) C 150 - 850 –590Vr5V
C LOW SPEED GB_M Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) M 150 - 850 –590Vr5V
D LOW SPEED GB_Y Main charger grid voltage (Low speed mode) Y 150 - 850 –590Vr5V
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.

8-6
Enter the default value specified on the following list.
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
the transport voltage and the control circuit. set value is output for 30 sec.
Section Process (Transport) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
Actual
Setting Default
range value
value
A TC1 LOW SPEED CL K Primary transfer bias Color K Low speed 51 - 255 80 6PA
B TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL adjustment value Middle speed 51 - 255 109 10PA
K
C TC1 LOW SPEED CL C C Low speed 51 - 255 80 6PA
D TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Middle speed 51 - 255 109 10PA
C
E TC1 LOW SPEED CL M M Low speed 51 - 255 80 6PA
F TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Middle speed 51 - 255 109 10PA
M
G TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y Y Low speed 51 - 255 80 6PA
H TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Middle speed 51 - 255 109 10PA
Y
I TC1 LOW SPEED BW K Black/White K Low speed 51 - 255 80 6PA
J TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW Middle speed 51 - 255 109 10PA
K
K TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary transfer bias Color Standard Front surface 51 - 255 103 –40PA
L TC2 PLAIN CL DPX adjustment value paper Back surface 51 - 255 90 –30PA
M TC2 PLAIN BW SPX Black/White Front surface 51 - 255 103 –40PA
N TC2 PLAIN BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 90 –30PA
O TC2 HEAVY1 CL SPX Color Heavy Front surface 51 - 255 83 –25PA
P TC2 HEAVY1 CL DPX paper 1 Back surface 51 - 255 76 –20PA
Q TC2 HEAVY1 BW SPX Black/White Front surface 51 - 255 69 –15PA
R TC2 HEAVY1 BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 69 –15PA
S TC2 HEAVY2 CL Color Heavy paper 2 51 - 255 83 –25PA
T TC2 HEAVY2 BW Black/White 51 - 255 69 –15PA
U TC2 OHP CL Color OHP 51 - 255 69 –15PA
V TC2 OHP BW Black/White 51 - 255 69 –15PA
W TC2 ENVELOPE CL Color Envelope 51 - 255 69 –15PA
X TC2 ENVELOPE BW Black/White 51 - 255 69 –15PA
Y TC2 THIN CL Color Thin paper 51 - 255 103 –40PA
Z TC2 THIN BW Black/White 51 - 255 103 –40PA
Actual
Setting Default
range value
value
AA TC2 GLOSSY CL Secondary transfer bias Color Gloss paper 51 - 255 83 –25PA
AB TC2 GLOSSY BW adjustment value Black/White 51 - 255 69 –15PA
AC TC2 CLEANING Secondary transfer Cleaning process (negative pole) 51 - 255 59 –8PA
AD TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD cleaning bias adjustment Low speed print mode 0 - 255 26 0V
AE TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD value Middle speed print mode 0 - 255 26 0V
AF TC2 CLEAN CLEANING Cleaning bias (positive pole) 0 - 255 102 500V
AG PTC LOW SPEED CL PTC current adjustment Color Low speed 51 - 255 73 –200PA
AH PTC MIDDLE SPEED CL value Middle speed 51 - 255 73 –200PA
AI PTC LOW SPEED BW Black/White Low speed 51 - 255 73 –200PA
AJ PTC MIDDLE SPEED BW Middle speed 51 - 255 73 –200PA
AK CASE VOLT LOW CL PTC voltage adjustment Color Low speed 0 - 255 0 0V
AL CASE VOLT MID CL value Middle speed 0 - 255 0 0V
AM CASE VOLT LOW BW Black/White Low speed 0 - 255 0 0V
AN CASE VOLT MID BW Middle speed 0 - 255 0 0V
9 10
9-2 10-1
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner
sors and detectors in the paper reverse supply mechanism (toner motor) and the
section (duplex section) and its control cir- related circuit.
cuit. Section Process (Developing)
Section Duplex Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target of the operation check with the touch panel key.
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- When [ALL] key is pressed, all the items are selected.
played. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active The selected load operation is performed for 10 sec.
are highlighted.
APPD1 ADU paper transport detector 1
APPD2 ADU paper transport detector 2
DSW_ADU ADU paper guide open/close detector This simulation must be executed without installing the toner car-
tridges.
If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridges installed,
toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing unit, resulting in
9-3 overtoner.
Purpose Operation test/check If this simulation is erroneously executed with the toner cartridges
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in installed, overtoner state may be deleted by making a few black
the paper reverse section (duplex section) background copy in the single color copy mode of the target color.
and its control circuit.
TNM_K Toner motor K
Section Duplex
TNM_C Toner motor C
Operation/Procedure TNM_M Toner motor M
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel TNM_Y Toner motor Y
key.
The selected load performs the operation.
13
Display Content
ADUC1 ADU transport clutch 1 (*) 13--
ADUM ADU motor Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
*: Not used, but the button is displayed. Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value
14 B MAINTE- Mainte- 0: 200K
NANCE nance counter Default
COUNTER (Color) 1 – 300: 1K –
14-- (COLOR) 300K
Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.) 999:
Free
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5
troubles.
Section 22
Operation/Procedure
22-1
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output/
Check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the print count value in each
section and each operation mode.
16 (Used to check the maintenance timing.)
Section
16-- Operation/Procedure
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.) Change the display page with scroll key on the touch panel.
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.
Section MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB
Total TOTAL OUT Total output All prints including
Operation/Procedure output (BW) quantity of black jams
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. quantity and white
TOTAL OUT Total output All prints including
(COL) quantity of color jams
Total use TOTAL (BW) Total use quantity Effective paper
quantity of black and white (including self print,
excluding jams)
17 TOTAL (COL) Total use quantity Effective paper
of full color (including self print,
excluding jams)
17-- TOTAL Total use quantity Effective paper
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.) (2COL) of 2-color (including self print,
excluding jams)
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble. TOTAL Total use quantity Effective paper
Section (3COL) of 3-color (including self print,
excluding jams)
Operation/Procedure
TOTAL Total use quantity Effective paper
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. (SGL_COL) of single color (including self print,
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble. excluding jams)
Copy COPY (BW) Black and white Billing target
copy counter (excluding self print)
COPY (COL) Full color copy Billing target
counter (excluding self print)
21 COPY (2COL) 2-color copy Billing target
21-1 COPY Single color copy Billing target
(SGL_COL) counter (excluding self print)
Purpose Setting Print PRINT (BW) Black and white Billing target
Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle. print counter (excluding self print)
PRINT (COL) Full color print Billing target
Section
Operation/Procedure PRINT (2COL) 2-color print Billing target
* Do not change the default setting value of the maintenance counter (excluding self print)
counter on SIM21-1. The replacement timing of the fusing clean- PRINT (3COL) 3-color print Billing target
ing roller, the filter and PS paper dust removal cleaner may not counter (excluding self print)
clarify. PRINT Single color print Billing target
(SGL_COL) counter (excluding self print)
1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
Document DOC FIL (BW) Black and white Billing target
panel.
filing document filing (excluding self print)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. print counter
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) DOC FIL Color document Billing target
(COL) filing print counter (excluding self print)
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value DOC FIL 2-color document Billing target
A MAINTE- Mainte- 0: 200K (2COL) filing print counter (excluding self print)
NANCE nance counter Default DOC FIL(SGL Single color Billing target
COUNTER (Total) 1 – 300: 1K – COL) document filing (excluding self print)
(TOTAL) 300K print counter
999: Other OTHER (BW) Black and white Self print quantity
Free other counter
OTHER (COL) Color other Self print quantity
counter
S/N Serial No. (The codes for November and December are
PCI PCI OPE- PCI counter PCI accumulated "X" and "Y" respectively.)
TIME operation time (H)
ICU (MAIN) ICU (Main section)
ICU (BOOT) ICU (Boot section)
ICU (SUB) ICU (Sub section) (ARM9)
22-2 LANGUAGE Language support data version
GRAPHIC Graphic data for LCD
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check PCL (MAIN) PCL (Main section)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the total number of misfeed PCL (PROFILE) PCL (Color profile)
and troubles. (When the number of total PCU PCU
jam is considerably great, it is judged as SCU SCU
necessary for repair.) FAX1 (MAIN) FAX 1-Line (Main section)
Section DESK Desk unit
FINISHER Finisher
Operation/Procedure
NIC NIC
The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed. POWER-CON Power controller
E-MANUAL Operation manual (HDD storage)
MACHINE JAM Machine JAM counter
(except 20cpm machine)
RSPF JAM RSPF JAM counter
WATER MARK Watermark (HDD storage)
TROUBLE Trouble counter
ESCP ESCP font ROM
PDL PDL font ROM
PCI PCI
22-3
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check misfeed positions and the 22-6
misfeed count of each position. Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
* Presumption of the faulty point by this
Function (Purpose) Used to output the setting/adjustment data
data is possible.
(simulation, FAX soft switch, counter), the
Section firmware version, and the counter list.
Operation/Procedure Section
The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one Operation/Procedure
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
* When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print
the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing.
(Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.)
22-4 1) Select the print list mode with 10-key.
Print list
Function (Purpose) Used to check the trouble (self diag) his- Item/Display Print content
mode
tory. A DATA PATTERN 1 Firmware version,
Section counter data, etc.
Operation/Procedure 2 SIM50-24 data
3 Data related to the process control
The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items.
(The old ones are deleted sequentially.) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step
1).
22-5
Purpose Others 22-8
Function (Purpose) Used to check the ROM version of each Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
unit (section). Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of operations
Section Firmware (counter value) of the finisher, the RSPF,
Operation/Procedure and the scan (reading) unit.
The ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed. Section
When there is any trouble in the software, use this simulation to Operation/Procedure
check the ROM version, and upgrade the version if necessary. The counter values of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scanner
related counters are displayed.
SPF Document feed quantity

(The number of sheets of discharged documents)
SCAN Number of times of scan
STAPLER Staple counter
PUNCHER Puncher counter
STAMP Stamp counter
COVER Document cover open/close counter
HP_ON Number of scanner HP detection
OC LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the scanner lamp
(* hour * minutes)
22-9 22-11
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of use (print Function (Purpose) Used to check the use frequency (send/
quantity) of each paper feed section. receive) of FAX.
Section Paper feed, ADU (Only when FAX is installed)
Operation/Procedure Section FAX
The counter values related to paper feed are displayed. Operation/Procedure
The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter
are displayed.
TRAY1 Paper feed counter (Paper feed tray 1)
FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter (for line 1)
FAX SEND FAX send counter
FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)
SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter (for line 1)
MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
SEND TIME FAX send time
MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
ADU ADU paper transport counter (Paper reverse section)
22-10 22-12
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the system configuration Function (Purpose) Used to check the RSPF misfeed positions
(option, internal hardware). and the number of misfeed at each posi-
Section tion. (When the number of misfeed is con-
siderably great, it can be judged as
Operation/Procedure
necessary for repair.)
The system configuration is displayed.
Section RSPF
(The model names of the installed devices and options are dis-
played.) Operation/Procedure
The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one
MACHINE MX-2615N Main unit up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
MX-3115N
SPF STANDARD Reversing single pass feeder
STAMP AR-SU1 Finish stamp
DESK MX-DE12 Stand/1x500 sheet paper drawer
MX-DE13 Stand/2x500 sheet paper drawer
MX-DE14 Stand/3x500 sheet paper drawer
PUNCHER MX-PN11A Punch unit
MX-PN11B
MX-PN11C
MX-PN11D
FINISHER MX-FN17 Inner finisher
FAX1 MX-FX11 Facsimile expansion kit
PRINTER STANDARD Printer expansion kit (PCL)
PS MX-PK11 PS expansion kit
XPS MX-PUX1 XPS expansion kit
SECURITY MX-FR40U Data security kit (commercial version)
AIM MX-AMX1 Application integration module
SDRAM (SYS) *****MB SDRAM capacity
SDRAM (ICU) *****MB SDRAM capacity
HDD *****MB Hard disk capacity
SD *****MB SD Card capacity
NIC STANDARD NIC
BARCODE MX-PF10 Bar code font
INTERNET-FAX MX-FWX1 Internet Fax expansion kit
ACM(*) MX-AMX2 Application communication module
EAM(*) MX-AMX3 External account module
PCI CONNECT PCI generating unit
(*) Displayed only in the OSA models.
22-13
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operating time of the
process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner
cartridge) and the fusing unit
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The number of prints and the number of rotations in the process
section are displayed.
Number of
Number of
Item/Display Content Print counter RPM Life meter remaining
use days
days
MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total) (Counter) Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
MAINTENANCE COL Maintenance counter (Color) Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
FUSING BELT Fusing belt Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
FUSING ROLLER Fusing roller Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
PRESSURE ROLLER Fusing pressure roller Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
FUSING LOAD Fusing pressure release roller Not displayed Max. 8 Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed
SEPARATE PAWL Fusing separation pawl Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
SEPARATE PLATE Fusing separation plate Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
FUSING WEB UNIT Fusing web unit Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
FUSING WEB SEND Fusing web cleaning send counter 0 - 65535 Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed Not displayed
TC1 BELT Primary transfer belt Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
TRANSFER BLADE Transfer cleaning blade Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
PTC PTC Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
TC2 BELT Secondary transfer belt Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
PS PAPER Paper dust cleaner Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
OZONE FILTER Ozone filter Max. 8 Not displayed 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DEVE CTRG (K) DV unit (K) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DEVE CTRG (C) DV unit (C) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DEVE CTRG (M) DV unit (M) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DEVE CTRG (Y) DV unit (Y) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM CTRG (K) OPC drum unit (K) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM CTRG (C) OPC drum unit (C) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM CTRG (M) OPC drum unit (M) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM CTRG (Y) OPC drum unit (Y) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
MAIN CHARGER (K) Main charger (K) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
MAIN CHARGER (C) Main charger (C) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
MAIN CHARGER (M) Main charger (M) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
MAIN CHARGER (Y) Main charger (Y) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM BLADE (K) OPC drum cleaning blade K Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM BLADE (C) OPC drum cleaning blade C Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM BLADE (M) OPC drum cleaning blade M Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
DRUM BLADE (Y) OPC drum cleaning blade Y Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) 0 - 365
TONER CTRG (K) Toner cartridge (K) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) Not displayed
TONER CTRG (C) Toner cartridge (C) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) Not displayed
TONER CTRG (M) Toner cartridge (M) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) Not displayed
TONER CTRG (Y) Toner cartridge (Y) Max. 8 Max. 8 0 - 999 0 - 100 (%) Not displayed
22-14
Function (Purpose) Used to display the use status of the toner
cartridge.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The status of the toner cartridge is displayed.
Accumulated No. of Accumulated No. of near Accumulated No. of Remaining quantity

Display item Content installed cartridges (Unit) near end (Unit) end (Unit) (Unit: %)
INSTALL NN END END RESIDUAL
TONER (K) Toner cartridge use counter (K) 0 - 255 0 - 255 0 - 255 0-25%
TONER (C) Toner cartridge use counter (C) 25-50%
TONER (M) Toner cartridge use counter (M) 50-75%
TONER (Y) Toner cartridge use counter (Y) 75-100%
22-18
Function (Purpose) Used to display the user data delete history.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The date and time of the user data delete are displayed.
Display item
Content
Item name Date
START Year/month/day/hour/min. Delete history (Date and time
of operation start)
END Year/month/day/hour/min. Delete history (Date and time
of operation end)
22-19
Function (Purpose) Used to check the values of the counters
related to the scan - image send.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Used to display the counter value related to the network scanner
Change the display with scroll key.
Network NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity
scanner ORG_B/W counter (B/W scan job)
NET SCN Network scanner document read quantity
ORG_CL counter (Color scan job)
ORG_2CL counter (2-Color scan job)
ORG_SGL counter (Single-color scan job)
Internet INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX output
FAX OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX sending page
SEND OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive
RECEIVE
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX send
SEND
E-Mail MAIL Number of times of E-MAIL send
COUNTER
FTP FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send
Other SMB SEND Number of SMB send
USB CNT Number of times of USB storage
TRIAL Trial mode counter
MODE_B&C (B/W & COLOR scan job)
SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)
HDD_B/W
SCAN TO SCAN TO HDD record quantity
HDD_CL (COLOR)
HDD_2CL (2-COLOR)
HDD_SGL (SINGLE color)
22-40
Purpose Error contents display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the error code list and the
contents.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the main error code.
The sub error code and the contents are displayed.
22-42
Function (Purpose) Used to check the JAM/trouble data
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key.
2) Printable with [COLOR] and [MONO] keys.
Counter Content Max.

JAM CODE/ number
Display data TOTAL TOTAL Remarks
Display Content TROUBLE DATE/TIME of
COUNT(BW) COUNT(CL)
CODE histories
PAPER JAM PAPER JAM Number of Generated Generated Total output Total output The head is the latest, and the
COUNT machine JAM JAM code date/time quantity of quantity of 50 bottom is the oldest. The max.
troubles (Machine) (YY/MM/DD black and color number of histories is 50.
SPF JAM SPF JAM Number of Generated HH:MM:SS) white When 50 is exceeded, the
COUNT SPF JAM JAM code 50 oldest one is not displayed
troubles (SPF) sequentially.
TROUBLE TROUBLE Number of Generated The head is the latest, and the
COUNT troubles trouble code bottom is the oldest. The max.
number of histories is 30.
30
When 30 is exceeded, the
oldest one is not displayed
sequentially.
Display data and contents (HISTORY2)

Item Content
22-43 NO. History number
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check DATE/TIME Occurrence date
Function (Purpose) JAM data details display TH_M External air temperature sensor temperature/AD
value
Section HUD_M External air humidity sensor humidity/AD value
Operation/Procedure TH1_LSU LSU thermistor 1 temperature/AD value
1) Select the item to be checked with the touch panel key. TH2_LSU LSU thermistor 2 temperature/AD value
When [COUNTER] key is pressed, the JAM counter, the paper TH_UM Fusing upper main thermistor (differential)
temperature/AD value
feed counter, and the paper feed retry counter are displayed.
TH_UM_CS Fusing upper main thermistor (compensation)
When [HISTORY1] key is pressed, the JAM history is dis- temperature/AD value
played. TUMD Fusing upper main thermistor (detection) AD value
When [HISTORY2] key is pressed, the temperature and TH_US1 Fusing upper sub thermistor (differential)
humidity data are displayed. temperature/AD value
2) Printable with [COLOR] and [MONO] keys. TH_US1_CS Fusing upper sub thermistor (compensation)
temperature/AD value
Display data and contents (COUNTER) TU1D Fusing upper sub thermistor (detection) AD value
Item Content TH_LM1 Fusing lower main thermistor (differential)
PAPER JAM COUNT Number of machine JAM troubles temperature/AD value
PAPER FEED COUNTER Paper feed counter (Similar with TH_LM1_CS Fusing lower main thermistor (compensation)
SIM22-09 display content) temperature/AD value
PAPER FEED RETRY COUNTER Paper feed retry counter (Similar TL1D Fusing lower main thermistor (detection) AD value
with SIM27-18 display content) TH_US2 Fusing upper sub thermistor 2 temperature/AD value
TH_LM2 Fusing lower main thermistor 2 temperature/AD value
Display data and contents (HISTORY1)
Item Content Description
NO No History number
JAM CODE JAM Code Jam code main
DATE/TIME Date/Time Occurrence date
TOTAL_BW Total Count (BW) Total counter (B/W)
TOTAL_CL Total Count (CL) Total counter (color)
P_S (*1) Paper Size Paper size
P_T (*1) Paper Type Paper type
JOB (*1) Job Mode Job mode
JN Job No First after JOB start or not
OF Offset Paper exit: Offset
EP Exit Position Paper exit: Exit position
PC Punch Paper exit: Punch
SP Staple Paper exit: Staple
*1: Refer to the detail display content of HISTORY1.
Detail display content of HISTORY1 Display Content
Display Content 66 AB series SRA3
NON Inch series No paper size 67 fixed form SRA3R
WLG fixed form Double Legal 68 SRA4
WLR Double Legal-R 69 SRA4R
LD Ledger 06A 318 x 469 mm
LDR Ledger-R (Double Letter) 06B 469 x 318 mm
LG Legal 06C 234 x 318 mm
LGR Legal-R 06D 318 x 234 mm
FC Foolscap 06E 312 x 440 mm
FCR Foolscap-R 06F 440 x 312 mm
LT Letter 70 220 x 312 mm
LTR Letter-R 71 312 x 220 mm
IV Invoice (Mini) 82 Domestic DBL Postcard
IVR Invoice-R (Mini) 83 special DBL Postcard-R
84 (Envelope) Postcard
EC Executive
ECR Executive-R 85 Postcard-R
A3W A3W (12x18 in) 87 119 x 277 mm
AWR A3W (12x18 in)-R 89 120 x 235 mm
12 22x17 08B 90 x 205 mm
13 22x17R 08D 90 x 185 mm
14 22x34 08F 240 x 332 mm
15 22x34R 91 216 x 277 mm
16 34x44 93 197 x 267 mm
17 34x44R 95 190 x 240 mm
18 44x68 97 162 x 229 mm
19 44x68R 99 142 x 205 mm
01A 9x12 09B 119 x 197 mm
01B 9x12R 09D 120 x 176 mm
01C 13x19 09F 114 x 162 mm
01D 13x19R 0A1 98 x 148 mm
MLG Mexican-Legal 0A3 105 x 235 mm
MLR Mexican-Legal-R 0A5 95 x 217 mm
ALG Asian-Legal 0A7 98 x 190 mm
ALR Asian -Legal-R 0A9 92 x 165 mm
EXT Other Extra (Special) 0AA AB series E-version
A1 AB series A1 0AB AB series L-version
A1R fixed form A1R 0AC AB series panorama size
A2 A2 0AD AB series name card size
A2R A2R 0AE AB series identification photo
A3 A3 0AF AB series name card small
A3R A3R 0B0 Other A3 width
A4 A4 0B1 B4 width
A4R A4R 0B2 A4 width
A5 A5 0B3 A3 width (Long size)
A5R A5R 0B4 B4 width (Long size)
A6 A6 0B5 A4 width (Long size)
A6R A6R 0BC Custom (Large size)
B3 B3 0BD Custom (Small size)
B3R B3R 0BF Custom
B4 B4 0C2 Oversea Monarch
B4R B4R 0C3 special Monarch-R
0C4 (Envelope) DL
B5 B5
B5R B5R 0C5 DL-R
B6 B6 0C6 C4
B6R B6R 0C7 C4-R
54 A0x2 0C8 C5
55 A0x2 R 0C9 C5-R
A0 A0 0CA C6
A0R A0R 0CB C6-R
B0 B0 0CC C65
B0R B0R 0CD C65-R
B1 B1 0CE ISOB5
B1R B1R 0CF ISOB5-R
B2R B2 0D0 Size6-1/2
B2R B2R 0D1 Size6-1/2-R
K8 K8 0D2 Size9
K8R K8R 0D3 Size9-R
K16 K16 0D8 Com-10
16R K16R 0D9 Com-10-R
K32 K32 0DA Inch series E-version
32R K32R 0DB Inch series L-version
Display Content 22-90
0DC Oversea Inch series panorama size
0DD special Inch series name card large
0DE (Envelope) Inch series identification photo Function (Purpose) Used to output the various set data lists.
0DF Inch series name card small Section
0EC Other Extra (Special large size)
Operation/Procedure
0ED Extra (Special small size)
0EF Extra (Special/Not fixed)
1) Change the display with scroll key.
0F0 Long size 2) Select the print target with the keys on the touch panel.
0FF JAM (Used for canceling temporary charging in 3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self print of the list.
a coin vendor.)
All setting list (*) ALL CUSTOM SETTING LIST
Display content detail: Paper type (P_T)
Printer test page PCL SYMBOL SET LIST
Display Content PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST
UST User type PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST
LHP Letter head paper PS FONT LIST
PNP Perforated sheet PS KANJI FONT LIST (Japan)
RCL Recycled paper PS EXTENDED FONT LIST
COL Color paper NIC PAGE
PLN Standard paper Address registration INDIVIDUAL LIST
PRP Pre printed list (*) GROUP LIST
OHP OHP Transparency PROGRAM LIST (Output Disable)
HV Heavy paper MEMORY BOX LIST
LBL Label sheet ALL SENDING ADDRESS LIST
ENV Envelope Document filing list (*) DOCUMENT FILING FOLDER LIST
HG Postcard System setting list ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COPY)
TAB Tab sheet ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (PRINT)
THN Thin paper ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (IMAGE SEND)
US1 User type 1 ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (DOC FILING)
US2 User type 2 ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (SECURITY)
US3 User type 3 ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COMMON)
US4 User type 4 ALL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST
US5 User type 5 Receive rejection ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST
US6 User type 6 number table
US7 User type 7 Receive rejection/ ANTI JUNK MAIL/DOMAIN NAME LIST
HV2 Heavy paper 2 allow address
PL2 Plain paper 2 (not used) domain table
HV3 Heavy paper 3 To E-mail INBOUND ROUTING LIST
Transfer table list
HV4 Heavy paper 4
To administrator DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST
GLS Glossy paper
Transfer list
Display content detail: Job mode (JOB) Web setting list WEB SETTING LIST
Meta data set list METADATA SET LIST
Display Content
SHD Shading. * When the data list print of system setting is inhibition in DSK
PCL Process control model, this setting is invalid.
SIM Test mode (Sim)
ICP Interruption copy
CP Copy
FXS
AXS
FAX send scan
AXIS
23
FXP FAX reception print
PR Printer 23-2
FXC FAX communication report print Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
00A Zaurus print
Function (Purpose) Used to output the trouble history list of
SLF Self/Test print
paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of
00C Document counter
troubles of misfeed is considerably great,
RMT Remote maintenance
the judgment is made that repair is
00E SIM 52-01
required.)
00F Tandem (Cordless handset)
CFP Confidential print Section
NET Network scanner Operation/Procedure
PRF Proof print Press [EXECUTE] key to execute print.
The trouble history of paper jams and misfeed is printed.
23-80 24-2
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of paper feed Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the num-
and paper transport in the paper feed sec- ber of prints) of each paper feed section.
tion and the paper transport section. Used Section
to output the list of the operation status of
Operation/Procedure
the sensor and the detectors in the paper
feed section and the paper transport sec- 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
tion. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section Paper feed, Paper transport 3) Press [YES] key.
Operation/Procedure The target counter is cleared.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the timing list of paper feed and
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter
paper transport is outputted.
TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter
Used to print the operations timing list of the sensors and detectors TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter
in the paper feed and transport section. TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter
The timing list of paper feed and paper transport operations of the MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)
latest job (copy or print) on the final paper is printed. MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
Since the paper feed and paper transport routes differ depending MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
on the used paper feed tray and the print operation mode, the sen- MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
sor and the detectors and the operation timing also differ. ADU ADU paper feed counter
SECTION Operation content (Trigger name - Detection operation

or load operation name)
STANDARD Reference value (ms) 24-3
CURRENT (*1) Operation timing (ms) of the latest job on the final Purpose Data clear
paper
PREVIOUS (*1) Operation timing (ms) of the second latest job on the
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the finisher, RSPF, and the
final paper scan (reading) unit counter.
MAXIMUM (*1) Max. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs Section
MINIMUM (*1) Min. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs Operation/Procedure
*1: The value without unit on the left side of each item on the list 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
has no relation to the operation timing. It is not used in the market. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.
24 SPF RSPF document feed counter

(No. of discharged sheets)
SCAN Scan counter
24-1 STAPLER Staple counter
Purpose Data clear PUNCHER Puncher counter
STAMP Stamp counter
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the jam counter, and the trou-
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter
ble counter. (After completion of mainte-
SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter
nance, clear the counters.)
COVER Document cover open/close counter
Section HP_ON Number of scanner HP detection
Operation/Procedure OC LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the scanner lamp
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
3) Press [YES] key. 24-4
The target counter is cleared. Purpose Data clear
MACHINE Machine JAM counter Function (Purpose) Used to clear the maintenance counter, the
SPF RSPF JAM counter printer counters of the transport unit and
TROUBLE Trouble counter the fusing unit. (After completion of mainte-
nance, clear the counters.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] key.
Main MAIN Main charger (K) (Counter)
Maintenance MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter (Total) (Counter)
charger CHARGER K Main charger (K) (Number of use days)
ALL Maintenance counter (Total)
(Number of use days) Main charger (K)
(Accumulated number of rotations)
MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter (Color) (Counter)
COL MAIN Main charger (C) (Counter)
Maintenance counter (Color)
CHARGER C Main charger (C) (Number of use days)
(Number of use days)
Fusing FUSING BELT Fusing belt (Counter) Main charger (C)
Fusing belt (Number of use days)
MAIN Main charger (M) (Counter)
Fusing belt
CHARGER M Main charger (M) (Number of use days)
FUSING Fusing roller (Counter) Main charger (M)
ROLLER (Accumulated number of rotations)
Fusing roller (Number of use days)
MAIN Main charger (Y) (Counter)
Fusing roller
CHARGER Y Main charger (Y) (Number of use days)
PRESS Pressure roller (Counter) Main charger (Y)
ROLLER (Accumulated number of rotations)
Pressure roller (Number of use days)
Drum blade DRUM BLADE Drum blade K (Counter)
Pressure roller
K Drum blade K (Number of use days)
FUSING LOAD Fusing Pressure release roller Drum blade K
(Accumulated number of rotations) (Accumulated number of rotations)
Separation SEPARATE Separation pawl (Counter) DRUM BLADE Drum blade C (Counter)
PAWL C Drum blade C (Number of use days)
Separation pawl (Number of use days)
Separation pawl Drum blade C
SEPARATE Separation plate (Counter) DRUM BLADE Drum blade M (Counter)
PLATE M Drum blade M (Number of use days)
Separation plate (Number of use days)
Separation plate Drum blade M
FUSING WEB Fusing web unit print counter DRUM BLADE Drum blade Y (Counter)
Y Drum blade Y (Number of use days)
Use day of fusing web unit
Fusing web cleaning send counter Drum blade Y
Transfer TC1 BELT Primary transfer belt (Counter)
Other PS PAPER PS paper dust cleaner (Counter)
Primary transfer belt
(Number of use days) PS paper dust cleaner
Primary transfer belt
(Accumulated number of rotations) OZONE FILTER Ozone filter (Counter)
TRANS BLADE Transfer blade (Counter) Ozone filter (Number of use days)
Transfer blade (Number of use days) * The winding counter for the fusing web cleaning is cleared by
Transfer blade being synchronized with the fusing web cleaning feed counter.
TC2 BELT Secondary transfer belt (Counter)
Secondary transfer belt
(Number of use days) 24-5
Secondary transfer belt Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter. (After
PTC PTC counter (Counter)
replacement of developer, clear the
PTC counter (Number of use days)
counter.)
PTC counter
(Accumulated number of rotations) Section
Drum DRUM CTRG K Drum cartridge (K) (Counter) Operation/Procedure
Drum cartridge (K) (Number of use 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
days)
Drum cartridge (K)
(Accumulated number of rotations) 3) Press [YES] key.
DRUM CTRG C Drum cartridge (C) (Counter) The target counter is cleared.
Drum cartridge (C)
Drum cartridge (C)
(Accumulated number of rotations) When SIM25-2 is executed, this counter is also cleared automati-
DRUM CTRG M Drum cartridge (M) (Counter) cally.
Drum cartridge (M)
(Number of use days) Developer cartridge print counter (K)
Drum cartridge (M) K Accumulated number of rotations of the developer cartridge (cm) (K)
(Accumulated number of rotations) Number of day that used developer (Day) K
DRUM CTRG Y Drum cartridge (Y) (Counter) Developer cartridge print counter (C)
Drum cartridge (Y) C Accumulated number of rotations of the developer cartridge (cm) (C)
(Number of use days) Number of day that used developer (Day) C
Drum cartridge (Y) Developer cartridge print counter (M)
(Accumulated number of rotations) M Accumulated number of rotations of the developer cartridge (cm) (M)
Number of day that used developer (Day) M
Developer cartridge print counter (Y)
Y Accumulated number of rotations of the developer cartridge (cm) (Y)
Number of day that used developer (Day) Y
24-15
24-6 Purpose Data clear
Purpose Data clear Function (Purpose) Used to clear the counters related to the
scan mode and the image send.
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the copy counter.
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] key.
3) Press [YES] key.
Division Item/Display Content
COPY BW Copy counter (B/W)
Network NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read
COPY COL Copy counter (COLOR) scanner quantity counter (B/W scan job)
SINGLE COLOR Single color NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read
2COLOR 2-color quantity counter (COLOR scan job)
NET SCN ORG_2CL Network scanner document read
quantity counter (2-color scan job)
NET SCN ORG_SGL Network scanner document read
24-9 quantity counter (single color scan
Purpose Data clear job)
Internet INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX output
Function (Purpose) Used clear the printer mode print counter Fax OUTPUT
and the self print mode print counter. INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX sending
Section SEND OUTPUT page
Operation/Procedure INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive
RECEIVE
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX send
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. SEND
3) Press [YES] key. E-mail MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL send
The target counter is cleared. FTP FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send
Other SMB SEND Number of SMB send
PRINT BW Print counter (B/W) USB CNT Number of times of USB storage
PRINT COL Print counter (COLOR) TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR
PRINT (2COL) Print counter (2-colors) scan job)
PRINT (3COL) Print counter (3-colors) SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)
PRINT (SGL_COL) Print counter (Single color) SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity
OTHER BW Other counter (B/W) (COLOR)
OTHER COL Other counter (COLOR) SCAN TO HDD_2CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (2-
COLOR)
SCAN TO HDD_SGL SCAN TO HDD record quantity
(SINGLE color)
24-10
Purpose Data clear 24-35
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX counter. Purpose Data clear
(Only when FAX is installed) Function (Purpose) Used to clear the toner cartridge use status
Section data.
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key. 2) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared. The toner cartridge use status data (SIM22-14) are cleared.
FAX OUTPUT FAX Print quantity counter

FAX SEND FAX send counter
FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter
SEND TIME FAX send time
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
Display Default
25 Division Item/Display
range value
Toner density control AT DEVE ADJ_M_K 1 - 255 128
adjustment value in the AT DEVE ADJ_M_C 1 - 255 128
25-1 medium speed process AT DEVE ADJ_M_M 1 - 255 128
Purpose Operation test/check mode AT DEVE ADJ_M_Y 1 - 255 128
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the devel- Toner density sensor AT DEVE VO_L_K 1 - 255 128
oping section. control voltage level in AT DEVE VO_L_C 1 - 255 128
the low speed process AT DEVE VO_L_M 1 - 255 128
Section Process (Developing section) mode AT DEVE VO_L_Y 1 - 255 128
Operation/Procedure
Toner density sensor AT DEVE VO_M_K 1 - 255 128
1) Select the process speed with [MIDDLE], [LOW] keys. control voltage level in AT DEVE VO_M_C 1 - 255 128
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. the medium speed AT DEVE VO_M_M 1 - 255 128
process mode AT DEVE VO_M_Y 1 - 255 128
The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3
minutes and the output level of the toner density sensor is dis- Display during execution of the simulation
played.
TCS_K Toner sensor output value (K) TCS_K Toner sensor output value (K)
TCS_C Toner sensor output value (C) TCS_C Toner sensor output value (C)
TCS_M Toner sensor output value (M) TCS_M Toner sensor output value (M)
TCS_Y Toner sensor output value (Y) TCS_Y Toner sensor output value (Y)
TSG_K Toner density sensor control voltage level (K) TSG_K Toner density sensor control voltage level (K)
TSG_C Toner density sensor control voltage level (C) TSG_C Toner density sensor control voltage level (C)
TSG_M Toner density sensor control voltage level (M) TSG_M Toner density sensor control voltage level (M)
TSG_Y Toner density sensor control voltage level (Y) TSG_Y Toner density sensor control voltage level (Y)
Error content
LOW Process speed: Low speed
MIDDLE Process speed: Medium speed Display Error name Error content
EE-EL EL abnormality The sensor output level is less than 77, or
the control voltage exceeds 207.
EE-EU EU abnormality The sensor output level exceeds 177, or the
The toner cartridge must be removed before executing this simula- control voltage is less than 52.
tion. EE-EC EC abnormality The sensor output level is outside of 128±3.
If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridge installed, toner
will be forcibly supplied to the developing unit, resulting in over-
toner and a trouble.
25-4
25-2 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the
toner supply quantity. (Not used in the mar-
Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of toner ket.)
density when replacing developer. (Auto-
matic adjustment) Section Process
Operation/Procedure
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
ing/Transfer/Cleaning) The operation data of the toner supply quantity are displayed.
Operation/Procedure
Display
1) Select a color to be adjusted with the touch panel. Item/Display Content
range
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. YLD_CNT_FB Toner supply FB rate by the yield 50 - 200
count
The developing motor rotates for 1 min 30 sec, and the toner den-
DELTA_DVB Delta DVB (Process control DVB - -500 - 500
sity sensor makes sampling of the toner density. The detected level
Target DVB)
is displayed.
IDL_DVB Target DBV 100 - 600
After stopping the developing motor, the average value of the toner PROCON_DVB Process control DVB 100 - 600
density sampling results is set as the reference toner density con- DV_LIFE Developer life area 1-8
trol level. COVERAGE_ Average print rate area 1 - 10
AREA
ENV_AREA Environment area 1-8
When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the reference MULTI_TIME Toner supply drive time area 1-8
toner concentration level is not set. Also when error code of EE-EC, (Specified by the DV motor rotation
time)
EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the reference toner density level is
PRO_FB_CNT No. of remaining times of toner supply 0 - 65535
not set normally.
for the process control result
Do not execute this simulation except when new developer is sup- PRO_FB_INT Interval of toner supply for the 0 - 65535
plied. If it is executed in other cases, undertoner or overtone may process control result
occur, causing a trouble. PRO_FB_RATIO Correction rate of one-time toner -10 -10
supply for the process control result
Display Default RECV_MODE_ No. of times of recovery mode (+) 0 - 65535
Division Item/Display
range value CNT(+) (No. of times of compulsory toner
Toner density control AT DEVE ADJ_L_K 1 - 255 128 supply)
adjustment value in the AT DEVE ADJ_L_C 1 - 255 128 RECV_MODE_ No. of times of recovery mode (-) (No. 0 - 65535
low speed process mode AT DEVE ADJ_L_M 1 - 255 128 CNT(-) of times of compulsory printing of
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y 1 - 255 128 one-color background image)
Default
value
25-5 OUTSIDE NONE No external connection NONE
AUDITOR vendor is used.
P VENDOR1 Coin vendor mode
Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner density correction (Only the copy mode can
data. (Not used in the market.) be controlled.)
Section Process P VENDOR3 Vendor mode in which
signals for the intercard
Operation/Procedure connected to the PCU are
The toner density correction data are displayed. used for communication in
parallel I/F.
Item/Display Content Display P OTHER Mode for an external
range auditor connected to the
TCS OUTPUT Toner sensor output value 0 - 255 SCU.
DELTA_TSG Toner density sensor control voltage -255 - 255 VENDOR-EX Vendor I/F for EQUITRAC
level correction value (*1)
TSG_REF Toner density sensor control voltage 0 - 255 VENDOR-EX VENDOR-EX + Multi job
level reference value (MULTI) (*1) cueing Enable mode
TN_FALL_CNT_ Toner fall amount during a job (latest 0 - 255 S_VENDOR Serial vendor mode
JOB average value) DOC ADJ ON Support for the auditor in OFF
TN_FALL_ Toner fall judgment threshold value 0 - 255 document filing print
JUDGE_CNT during a job OFF No support for the auditor in
TN_FALL_MODE_ No. of times of job interruption toner 0 - 255 document filing print
CNT supply operation mode PF ADJ ON Continuous printing is OFF
TN_FALL_CNT_ Latest average value of toner fall 0 - 255 performed in the duplex
INT amount in job interruption toner print mode.
supply operation If the remaining money
TN_FALL_CNT_ Latest average value of toner fall 0 - 255 expires during continuous
NEW amount when installing a new toner printing, the sheets in the
cartridge machine are discharged
TCS_ERR_MODE No. of times of TCS abnormality 0 - 65535 without being printed on the
_CNT(+) detection mode (+) (Undertoner) back surfaces.
TCS_ERR_MODE No. of times of TCS abnormality 0 - 65535 OFF Continuous printing is not
_CNT(-) detection mode (-) (Overtoner) performed in the duplex
print mode. (The remaining
amount is checked for
printing every surface in all
the printing process.)
If the remaining money
26 expires during printing, the
sheet is discharged without
printing on the back
26-1
surface.
Purpose Setting VENDOR MODE1 Vendor mode 1 MODE
Function (Purpose) Used to set Yes/No of installation of the MODE (*2) MODE2 Vendor mode 2 3
right paper exit tray. MODE3 Vendor mode 3
COUNTUP FUSER_IN Mode in which the detection EXIT_
Section Paper exit
TIMING timing of the paper lead OUT
Operation/Procedure edge by the sensor after the
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. paper passes the fusing
section is used as the
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
money charging timing.
This setting is required to use the right paper exit tray unit. FUSER_OUT Mode in which the detection
timing of the paper rear
Item/Display Content edge by the sensor after the
A 0 YES Paper exit tray: YES paper passes the fusing
1 NO Paper exit tray: NO section is used as the
money charging timing.
EXIT_OUT Mode in which the detection
timing of the paper rear
26-3 edge by the paper exit
sensor of the right paper
Purpose Setting exit tray or of the after
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the auditor. process unit is used as the
(Setting must be made according to the money charging timing.
auditor use conditions.)
(*1) Displayed only when EQUITRAC.
Section Auditor (*2) Details of the vendor mode
Operation/Procedure
Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
Default
value
BUILT-IN P10 Built-in auditor mode P10
AUDITOR (standard mode) operation.
Details of the vendor mode
26-7
Completion Insufficient money during Completion
Purpose Setting
of the copy job of the
specified specified Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine ID.
BW/Color Color
quantity. quantity.
(no money (Money
(Money (No money
remaining) remaining) Section
remaining) remaining)
Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Condition 4 Operation/Procedure
MODE1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 2 Operation 1 1) Enter the machine ID with the 10-key.
MODE2 Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 1 Max. 30 digits of numerals and alphabetical characters can be
MODE3 Operation 1 Operation 3 Operation 2 Operation 3 inputted.
To select a desired character, press the 10-key repeatedly.
Operation 1:
Standby during setting time of auto clear. Default is 60 seconds, Refer to the following list and enter characters.
which can be changed in the system setting. Touch the "CONFIRM" section every time a character is input-
Operation 2: ted.
Auto clear is not made. To modify an inputted character, delete it with "CLEAR" key
Operation 3: and enter the correct character.
The display is shifted to the initial screen. 2) Press [SET] key to set the contents entered in procedure 1).
26-5 The machine ID can be set also by the Web Page service mode
Purpose Setting function.
Conventionally, the machine ID has been set by the Web Page
Function (Purpose) Used to set the count mode of the total
function. In this mode, this function is made available in the simula-
counter and the maintenance counter. (A3/
11x17 size) tion mode.
Section Number of times of key input

10-key
Operation/Procedure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. 1 1 - - - - - - - - -
2 A B C a b c 2 - - -
2) Enter the setting value with 10-key
3 D E F d e f 3 - - -
1 = Count up by 1, 2 = Count up by 2
4 G H I g h i 4 - - -
3) Press [OK] key. 5 J K L j k l 5 - - -
The set value in step 2) is saved. 6 M N O m n o 6 - - -
7 P Q R S p q r s 7 -
Item/Display Content Default value 8 T U V t u v 8 - - -
A TOTAL (B/W) Total counter (B/W) 1 9 W X Y Z w x y z 9 -
B TOTAL (COL) Total counter (Color) (Japan)
0 0 - - - - - - - - -
2
(Except Japan)
C MAINTE (B/W) Maintenance counter (B/W) 2
D MAINTE (COL) Maintenance counter (Color)
26-8
E DEV (B/W) Developer counter (B/W)
F DEV (COL) Developer counter (Color) Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Counter mode setting (Long scale)
Section
Purpose Setting 1) Select a setting item with the scroll key.

Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed
magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination. 1 = 1 count up, 2 = 2 count up
Section 3) Press [OK] key.
Operation/Procedure Default
Setting Default
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel. Item/Display Content
range value
value
(Taiwan)
A TOTAL(B/W) Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
The selected set content is saved. LONG Total counter (B/W)
SIZE(S)
U.S.A. United States of America
B TOTAL Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
CANADA Canada (COL) LONG Total counter (Color)
INCH Inch series, other destinations SIZE(S)
JAPAN Japan C MAINTE Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
AB_B AB series (B5 detection), other destinations (B/W) LONG Maintenance
EUROPE Europe SIZE(S) counter (B/W)
U.K. United Kingdom D MAINTE Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
AUS. Australia (COL) LONG Maintenance
AB_A AB series (A5 detection), other destinations SIZE(S) counter (Color)
CHINA China E DEV(B/W) Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2
LONG Developer counter
SIZE(S) (B/W)
Default 26-30
Setting Default
Item/Display Content value
range value Purpose Setting
(Taiwan)
F DEV(COL) Long scale (Small) 1 - 10 3 2 Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation mode corre-
LONG Developer counter sponding to the CE mark (Europe safety
SIZE(S) (color) standards). (For slow start to drive the fus-
G TOTAL(B/W) Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2
ing heater lamp)
LONG Total counter (B/W)
SIZE(L) Section
H TOTAL Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2 Operation/Procedure
(COL) LONG Total counter (Color) 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
SIZE(L)
I MAINTE Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2 0 Control allowed
(B/W) LONG Maintenance
1 Control inhibited
SIZE(L) counter (B/W)
J MAINTE Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2 2) Press [OK] key.
(COL) LONG Maintenance
The set value in step 1) is saved.
SIZE(L) counter (Color)
K DEV(B/W) Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2 * Even in Enable state, the control may not be executed due
LONG Developer counter to the power frequency, etc.
SIZE(L) (B/W)
L DEV(COL) Long scale (Large) 1 - 10 5 2 U.S.A 1 (CE not supported) EUROPE 0 (CE supported)
LONG Developer counter CANADA 1 (CE not supported) U.K. 0 (CE supported)
SIZE(L) (color) INCH 1 (CE not supported) AUS. 0 (CE supported)
JAPAN 1 (CE not supported) AB_A 0 (CE supported)
Long Scale (Small) : 631 - 1050mm
AB_B 1 (CE not supported) CHINA 0 (CE supported)
Long Scale (Large) : 1631 - 1200mm
26-10
26-32
Purpose Setting
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the network
scanner. Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the fusing
cleaning operation.
Section
Operation/Procedure Section Fusing
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [OK] key. 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The set value in step 1) is saved. Enable/Disable of the user fusing cleaning function is set.
2) Press [OK] key.
TRIAL MODE 0 Trial mode setting
(0: YES 1: NO) 1 Trial mode cancel (Default) Default
Item/Display Content Setting range
value
A CLEANIN User fusing cleaning 0 YES 0(YES)
G PRINT function is Enable.
26-18 SET User fusing cleaning 1 NO
function is Disable.
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner
save mode operation.
(For the Japan and the UK versions.) 26-35
Section Purpose Setting
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. trouble history when a same trouble
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. occurred repeatedly. There are two display
modes: display as one trouble and display
3) Press [OK] key.
as several series of troubles.
Section
Default Operation/Procedure
value 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
A COPY 0 Copy toner save mode is inhibited.
0
1 Copy toner save mode is allowed 0 Only once display.
B PRINTER 0 Printer toner save mode is inhibited. 1 Any time display.
0
1 Printer toner save mode is allowed.
2) Press [OK] key.
26-38 26-50
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the Function (Purpose) Used to set functions.
maintenance life is reached. Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. panel.
2) Press [OK] key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The set value in step 1) is saved. 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
Default Default
Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
value value
A MAINTENANCE 0 Setting of Print Continue/ 0 A BW REVERSE 0 BW reverse copy Disable Refer
LIFE OVER Stop when the maintenance 1 BW reverse copy Enable to *1
(0: CONTINUE life is over (Print Continue) B COLOR MODE 2-color/Single color copy mode Refer
1: STOP) 1 Setting of Print Continue/ Enable/Disable setting to *1/*2
Stop when the maintenance C FINISHER 0 Finisher special paper 0
life is over (Print Stop) FUNCTION The number of paper exit is Refer
B FUSER WEB END 0 Continue/Stop setting of print 1 limited. to *3
(0: CONTINUE when the fusing web is end 1 Finisher special paper
1: STOP) (Print Continue) The number of paper exit is
1 Continue/Stop setting of print not limited.
when the fusing web is end D COLOR MODE 0 All colors and monochrome Refer
(Print Stop) (PRINTER) counters are displayed. to *1
1 All are displayed except for
the 3-color print counter.
2 Monochrome and full color
26-41 print counters are displayed.
Purpose Setting E FEED TRAY 0 Paper feed tray color display 0
COLOR ON during paper feed
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnifi-
1 Paper feed tray color display
cation ratio automatic select function (AMS) OFF during paper feed
in the center binding mode. F LONG SIZE PRINT 0 Long size print enable
Section 1 Long size print disable
Operation/Procedure
(*1) Default values for each destination of item A/B/D
Destination Item A Item B Item D
0 AMS Disable USA 1 0 2
1 AMS Enable CANADA 1 0 2
2) Press [OK] key. INCH 1 0 2
JAPAN 1 7 2
AB_B 1 0 2
<Default value of each destination> EUROPE 1 0 2
UK 0 0 2
U.S.A 0 (Disable) EUROPE 1 (Enable)
AUS 1 0 2
CANADA 0 (Disable) U.K. 1 (Enable)
AB_A 1 0 2
INCH 0 (Disable) AUS. 0 (Disable)
CHINA 1 0 2
JAPAN 0 (Disable) AB_A 0 (Disable)
AB_B 0 (Disable) CHINA 0 (Disable) (*2) Item B: COLOR MODE set value (OFF: Displayed/ON: Not dis-
played)
Mode 2-Color/Single
26-49 Set value
Single 2-color Counter
Purpose Setting 0 OFF OFF OFF
1 OFF ON OFF
Function (Purpose) Used to set the print speed of postcards
2 ON OFF OFF
mode.
3 ON ON OFF
Section 4 OFF OFF ON
Operation/Procedure 5 OFF ON ON
Select the copy speed mode with the touch panel. (Default: LOW) 6 ON OFF ON
7 ON ON ON
Item/Setting value Content Default value
LOW Postcard copy speed LOW LOW
HIGH Postcard copy speed HIGH
(*3)
26-52
Target Target paper setting Purpose Setting
paper 0 1 Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-printed paper
Inner Postcard, The operation is stopped when If it is set to "1," (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up
finisher envelope 10 sheets of a same kind are the operation is
or not.
discharged continuously. When, stopped when
however, different kinds of the paper exit Section
sheets are mixed and tray is full or Operation/Procedure
discharged and 10 or less when 250
sheets of a kind are sheets
continuously discharged, the (35.5mm thick)
operation is stopped by the are discharged. 0 Count up
paper exit tray full detection. 1 No count up
Label The operation is stopped when
2) Press [OK] key.
sheet, 100 sheets of a same kind are
tab sheet, discharged continuously. When, The set value in step 1) is saved.
OHP however, different kinds of
sheets are mixed and Destination Default
discharged and 100 or less U.S.A 0 (Counted)
sheets of a kind are CANADA 0 (Counted)
continuously discharged, the INCH 0 (Counted)
operation is stopped by the JAPAN 1 (Not counted)
paper exit tray full detection.
AB_B 0 (Counted)
EUROPE 0 (Counted)
26-51 U.K. 0 (Counted)
Purpose Setting AUS. 1 (Not counted)
AB_A 0 (Counted)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the serial
CHINA 0 (Counted)
port operation. (For PCI)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. 26-53
When the PCI is installed, setting is made to 1 or 2. Purpose Setting
2) Press [OK] key. Function (Purpose) User auto color calibration (color balance
adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting.
Setting Default Section
range value
A PCI Serial port PCI mode OFF 0 0
Operation/Procedure
SETTING (oFor connecting the serial (Serial 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
port vendor) port PCI
Serial port PCI mode ON mode Setting Default
(JOB status LED: MODE1) OFF) range value
Serial port PCI mode ON A COPY Copy Allow 1 1
(JOB status LED: MODE2) (1:YES 0:NO) mode Inhibit 0
B PRINTER Printer Allow 1 1
MODE1: Red LED is light/blink/OFF, MODE2: Red LED always (1:YES 0:NO) mode Inhibit 0
OFF
2) Press [OK] key.
When "PCI SETTING" is changed from "0" to "1" or "2," if SIM26-03
"OUTSIDE AUDITOR" is set to "S_VENDOR," "OUTSIDE AUDI-
TOR" is changed to "NONE." 26-65
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the finisher alarm mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Use the touch key to set.
Set Setting Default

Item Content NOTE
value range value
LIMIT ON Number of ON or ON
COPIES sets of OFF
stapling:
Max. 50 sets
OFF Number of
sets of
stapling:
Not Limited
26-69 Setting Default
range value
Purpose Setting E TONER END Setting of the 1-3 1
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for COUNT number of copy/
toner near end. print/FAX outputs
Enable after TONER
Section NEAR END.
Operation/Procedure F TONER E-MAIL 0 Low status 0-1 1
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. ALERT send of E-mail
alert (When the
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. toner
3) Press [OK] key. preparation
The set value in step 2 is saved. message is
displayed) (in
Setting Default near near toner
Item/Display Content end)
range value
A TONER 0 The toner 0-1 List of 1 Low status
PREPARATION preparation Default send of E-mail
(0:YES 1:NO) message is values and alert (near toner
displayed. set values end)
1 The toner for each
Item E (TONER END COUNT) setting value and printable quan-
preparation destination
tity
message is not
displayed. Setting value Printable quantity at A4/5% equivalent conversion
B REMAINING 0.05 0 Toner 0-9 1 0
TONER preparation at 2 25
LEVEL remaining toner 3 50
level of 5%
0.1 1 Toner <List of Default values and set values for each destination>
preparation at
remaining toner Setting value
level of 10% Enable/
0.15 2 Toner Toner Toner Toner near Disable of
Destination
preparation at preparation preparation end print job
remaining toner message time message continuation
level of 15% at toner end
0.2 3 Toner U.S.A 0 4 (Displayed 0 2
preparation at (Displayed) when the (Displayed) (Print
remaining toner toner operation
level of 20% remaining stopped)
0.25 4 Toner quantity is
preparation at 25%.)
remaining toner CANADA 0 4 (Displayed 0
level of 25% (Displayed) when the (Displayed)
0.3 5 Toner toner
preparation at remaining
remaining toner quantity is
level of 30% 25%.)
0.35 6 Toner INCH 0 4 (Displayed 0
preparation at (Displayed) when the (Displayed)
remaining toner toner
level of 35% remaining
quantity is
0.4 7 Toner
25%.)
preparation at
remaining toner JAPAN 0 4 (Displayed 1 (Not
level of 40% (Displayed) when the Displayed)
toner
0.45 8 Toner
remaining
preparation at
quantity is
remaining toner
25%.)
level of 45%
AB_B 0 4 (Displayed 0
0.5 9 Toner
(Displayed) when the (Displayed)
preparation at
toner
remaining toner
remaining
level of 50%
quantity is
C TONER NEAR 0 The toner near 0-1
25%.)
END (0:YES 1:NO) end message is
displayed.
1 The toner near
end message is
not displayed.
D TONER END 1 Operation setup 1-3
1
2 Operation setup
2
3 Operation setup
3
Setting value When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
Enable/ (shade delete quantity) is increased.
Toner Toner Toner near Disable of
Destination Setting
preparation preparation end print job Item/Display Content Default value
message time message continuation range
at toner end A DELETING Rear frame side 0 - 50 0
EUROPE 0 4 (Displayed 0 2 SHADOW ADJ image loss quantity (Adjustment
(Displayed) when the (Displayed) (Print (M) (shade delete amount:
toner operation quantity) adjustment 0.1mm/step)
remaining stopped) B DELETING Lead edge image 0 - 50 0
quantity is SHADOW ADJ (S) loss quantity (shade (Adjustment
25%.) delete quantity) amount:
U.K. 0 4 (Displayed 0 adjustment 0.1mm/step)
toner
remaining
quantity is 26-74
25%.)
Purpose Setting
AUS. 0 4 (Displayed 0
(Displayed) when the (Displayed) Function (Purpose) Used to set the OSA trial mode.
toner Section
remaining
quantity is
Operation/Procedure
25%.) 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
AB_A 0 4 (Displayed 0 2) Press [OK] key.
toner Setting Default
remaining Item/Display Content
range value
quantity is A OSA TRIAL MODE 0 Used to set the 0-1 1
25%.) (0: YES 1: NO) OSA trial mode.
CHINA 0 4 (Displayed 0 1 1 OSA trial mode is
(Displayed) when the (Displayed) (Print canceled.
toner operation
remaining continued)
quantity is
25%.)
26-78
(Contents of set items) Purpose Setting
A: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display. Function (Purpose) Used to set the password of the remote
B: The toner remaining quantity at which the toner preparation operation panel.
message is displayed.
Section
C: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display
Operation/Procedure
when the toner near end status is reached.
1) Enter a password with 10-key. (5 - 8 digits)
D: Machine operation at toner end
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW".
E: Number of allowable copy/print/FAX when the toner near end
message is displayed. (Range: 0 - 50 sheets) In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
The number of output print allowed in item D is based on the
assumption that the sheets are of A4 size with print ratio of 5%. 2) Press [SET] key.
(The number of outputs allowed differs depending on the paper
size and the print ratio.)
26-79
Purpose Setting
When item A is set to "0" and item E is properly set, printing can be Function (Purpose) Used to set YES/NO of the pop-up display
made after toner near end. However, improper phenomena such as of user data delete result.
insufficient density, thin spots, or improper color balance may result
Section
depending on the using conditions. When item E is set to "1" print-
ing is disabled after toner near end. In this case, toner end display Operation/Procedure
is made in the toner near end status, and copy/print/FAX outputs 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
are disabled. The value for the display operation specification after comple-
tion of user data delete is set.
2) Press [OK] key.
26-73
Default
Purpose Setting Item/Display Content Setting range
value
Function (Purpose) Enlargement continuous shoot, A3 wide A DISP SET User data delete result YES 1 0 (NO)
copy mode image loss (shade delete quan- pop-up display ON
tity) adjustment User data delete result NO 0
pop-up display OFF
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys.
3) Press [OK] key.
27-2
27
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the sender's registration num-
27-1
ber and the HOST server telephone num-
Purpose Setting ber. (FSS function)
Function (Purpose) Used to set non-detection of communica- Section
tion error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
Operation/Procedure
Section 1) Select an item to be set with touch panel.
Operation/Procedure [USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO]
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [SET] key.
0 Not detection
1 Detection The set value in step 2) is saved.
2) Press [OK] key.

USER FAX_NO. Sender registration number (Max. 16 digits)
The set value in step 1) is saved. SERVA TEL_NO. Host server telephone number (Max. 16 digits)
• If the connection process is not completed
normally when registering the FSS, calling to the
HOST may be continuously made every time
when the power is turned ON (from OFF) or
rebooted.
In this case, enter "********" to inhibit calling to the
HOST.
27-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the initial call and toner order
auto send. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Remarks
range value
A FSS MODE NEB1 Set the FSS MODE Exclusive for send in NE-B mode 0-3 0 1
NEB2 Send/Receive in NE-B mode 1
NFB1 Exclusive for send in NE-F mode 2 For convenience
stores
NFB2 Send/Receive in NE-F mode 3 For convenience
stores
B RETRY_BUSY Resend number setting when busy 0 - 15 2 0: No retry
C TIMER(MINUTE)_BUSY Resend timer setting (minute) when busy 1 - 15 3
D RETRY_ERROR Resend number setting when error 0 - 15 1 0: No retry
E TIMER(MINUTE)_ERROR Resend timer setting (minute) when error 1 - 15 1
F FAX RETRY Resend number setting when FAX initial connection 0 - 15 2 Unit: Number of times
G TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 6
TIMING(K) NEAR_END timing setting (K) Near end 1
0.05 0.05 2
0.1 0.1 3
0.15 0.15 4
0.2 0.2 5
0.25 0.25 6
0.3 0.3 7
0.35 0.35 8
0.4 0.4 9
0.45 0.45 10
0.5 0.5 11
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Remarks
range value
H TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 6
TIMING(C) NEAR_END timing setting (C) Near end 1
0.05 0.05 2
0.1 0.1 3
0.15 0.15 4
0.2 0.2 5
0.25 0.25 6
0.3 0.3 7
0.35 0.35 8
0.4 0.4 9
0.45 0.45 10
0.5 0.5 11
I TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 6
TIMING(M) NEAR_END timing setting (M) Near end 1
0.05 0.05 2
0.1 0.1 3
0.15 0.15 4
0.2 0.2 5
0.25 0.25 6
0.3 0.3 7
0.35 0.35 8
0.4 0.4 9
0.45 0.45 10
0.5 0.5 11
J TONER ORDER EMPTY Toner order auto send Empty 0 - 11 0 6
TIMING(Y) NEAR_END timing setting (Y) Near end 1
0.05 0.05 2
0.1 0.1 3
0.15 0.15 4
0.2 0.2 5
0.25 0.25 6
0.3 0.3 7
0.35 0.35 8
0.4 0.4 9
0.45 0.45 10
0.5 0.5 11
K TEMP HISTORY CYCLE Frequency of acquiring the temperature and humidity history 1 - 1440 60 Unit: min.
L LOG OUTPUT CAPACITY(PCU) Log output capacity 0 - 50 30 Unit: [KB]
27-5 27-6
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine tag No. (This func- Function (Purpose) Used to set of the manual service call.
tion allows the host computer to check the (FSS function)
machine tag No.) (FSS function) Section
Section Communication (RIC/MODEM) Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
1) Enter the password (max. 8 digits) with 10-key.
0 Allow (Default)
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW”.
1 Inhibit
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit. 2) Press [OK] key.
2) Press [SET] key. The set value in step 1) is saved.
* Item C: Because of a trouble in shading operation, the number of
27-7
retry is actually not registered.
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the enable, alert callout.
(FSS function) 27-10
Section Purpose Data clear
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to clear the trouble prediction history
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. information. (FSS function)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Section
3) Press [OK] key. Operation/Procedure
The set value in step 2) is saved. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content The history information of trouble prediction is cleared.
range value
A FUNCTION FSS function enable 0 1 (NO)
(0:YES 1:NO) FSS function disable 1 Target history Serial communication retry history
B ALERT Alert call enable (*1) 0 0 (YES) High density process control error history
(0:YES 1:NO) Alert call disable 1 Halftone process control error history
C CONNECTION FAX connection enable 0 0 (FAX) Automatic registration adjustment error history
(0: FAX Not used. 1 Scanner gain adjustment retry history
1: No Use HTTP connection enable 2 Paper transport time between sensors
2: HTTP)
*1 Alert send timing

27-11
No alert cause Initial state / Trouble / Continuous JAM alert
Maintenance When the maintenance timing is reached.
Purpose Others
Service call When pressing Service call. Function (Purpose) Used to check the serial communication
Toner send request When the toner order automatic send setting is retry number and the scanner gain adjust-
reached. ment retry number history. (FSS function)
Toner collection request Revision of the toner installation date (only for Section
a new product)
Alert resend
Operation/Procedure
The serial communication retry number history and the scanner
gain adjustment retry number history are displayed.
27-9 Display Item

Occurrence date Retry Content
Purpose Setting Item name
(Display) number
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper transport time record- LSU1 Year/month/day 8 digits Serial
ing YES/NO threshold value and shading hour: min.: sec. communication
gain adjustment retry number. LSU2 Year/month/day 8 digits retry number
(FSS function) hour: min.: sec. history display
DESK1 Year/month/day 8 digits
Section
hour: min.: sec.
Operation/Procedure DESK2 Year/month/day 8 digits
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. hour: min.: sec.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. FINISHER1 Year/month/day 8 digits
hour: min.: sec.
3) Press [OK] key.
FINISHER2 Year/month/day 8 digits
The set value in step 2) is saved. hour: min.: sec.
SCAN GAIN ADJ1 Year/month/day 8 digits Scanner gain
Setting Default hour: min.: sec. adjustment retry
range value history
SCAN GAIN ADJ2 Year/month/day 8 digits
A FEED TIME1 Threshold value of paper 0 - 100 50(%) hour: min.: sec.
transport time between
sensors (Machine)
hour: min.: sec.
B FEED TIME2 Threshold value of paper 0 - 100 50(%)
transport time between
hour: min.: sec.
sensors (SPF)
SCAN GAIN ADJ5 Year/month/day 8 digits Scanner gain
C GAIN Threshold value of the 0 - 20 11
hour: min.: sec. adjustment retry
ADJUSTMENT gain adjustment retry (TIMES)
history
RETRY number
D JAM ALERT Continuous JAM alert 1 - 100 10
judgment threshold value (TIMES)
(Alert judgment threshold
value for continuous
JAM's) (Setting of the
number of JAM's
continuously made at
which it is judged as an
alert.)
* Items A, B: 0%, standard passing time between sheets of paper;

100%, time for judgment as a jam between sheets of paper.
27-12
Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the high density, halftone
process control and the automatic registra-
tion adjustment error history. (FSS Func-
tion)
Section
Operation/Procedure
The high density, halftone process control and the automatic regis-
tration adjustment error history is displayed.
HV_ERR1 High density process control error history 1

H_TONE ERR1 Halftone process control error history 1
AUTO REG ADJ1 Automatic registration adjustment error history 1
27-13
Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the history of paper transport
time between sensors. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Change the display with scroll key.
Code between Reference

Item/Display Content Occurrence date Passing time
sensors passing time
Main FEED TIME1 History of paper transport time between sensors 1 Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
unit hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME2 History of paper transport time between sensors 2 Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
hour: min.: sec.
Code between Reference
Item/Display Content Occurrence date Passing time
sensors passing time
RSPF FEED TIME1 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 1 hour: min.: sec.
FEED TIME2 (SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF Year/month/day 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)

Purpose Setting range value
A MAINTENAN Maintenance Alert send 0 0
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function connection CE ALERT alert send Enable
test mode. (0:YES 1:NO) Enable setting Alert send 1
Section Disable
Operation/Procedure B TONER Toner order Alert send 0 0
ORDER alert send Enable
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. ALERT Enable setting Alert send 1
(0:YES 1:NO) Disable
0 Disable (Default)
C TONER Toner Alert send 0 0
1 Enable CTRG ALERT cartridge Enable
(0:YES 1:NO) replacement Alert send 1
2) Press [OK] key.
alert send Disable
The set value in step 1) is saved. Enable setting
D JAM ALERT Continuous Alert send 0 0
(0:YES 1:NO) JAM alert Enable
send Enable Alert send 1
27-15
setting Disable
Purpose Operation test/check E TROUBLE Trouble alert Alert send 0 0
Function (Purpose) Used to display the FSS connection status. ALERT send Enable Enable
(0:YES 1:NO) setting Alert send 1
Section
Disable
Operation/Procedure F PAPER Paper order Alert send 0 0
The FSS operating status is displayed. ORDER alert send Enable
ALERT Enable setting Alert send 1
Default (0:YES 1:NO) Disable
Item/Display Content Setting range
value
FSS CONNECTION Used to display the 0 Not 0
FSS connection operated
status. 1 Operated
27-16
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS alert send.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The value for the FSS alert operation specification is set.
2) Press [OK] key.
27-17
30
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS paper order alert.
30-1
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set. sors and the detectors in other than the
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. paper feed section and the control circuits.
The value for the FSS paper order alert operation specification Section
is set.
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [SET] key.
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
Item/ Setting Default
played.
Content NOTE
Display range value The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
PAPER Setting of paper kind 0-2 0 0: Standard lighted.
TYPE for paper order alert paper and
SET recycled paper PPD1 Paper transport detector 1
1: Standard PPD2 Paper transport detector 2
paper only POD1 Paper exit detector 1
2: Recycled POD2 Paper exit detector 2
paper only POD3 Paper exit detector 3
A3 Paper order number 500 - 1250 Unit: No. of TFD2 Paper exit tray full detector (Face-down tray)
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box TFD3 Paper exit tray full detector (Right paper exit tray)
sheets] (A3) SHPOS Shifter home positions sensor
A4 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of DSW_R ADU open/close detector
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
DSW_C Transport cover open/close detector (Paper feed tray 1)
sheets] (A4)
DSW_F Front cover open/close detector
B4 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of
DHPD_CL OPC drum rotation sensor (CL)
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box
sheets] (B4) DHPD_K OPC drum rotation sensor (BK)
B5 Paper order number 500 - 2500 Unit: No. of TNFD Waste toner full detector
setting [Number of 5000 sheets for a box HLPCD Fusing roller pressure detector
sheets] (B5) DSW_C2 Transport cover open/close detector (Paper feed tray 2)
A3: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert PRTPD Paper exit tray paper detector (Right paper exit tray)
FIRST number setting (A3) 10000 sheets for the 1TUD_CL Transfer mode detector (CL)
(Number of used first time 1TUD_K Transfer mode detector (BK)
sheets) 2TUD Secondary transfer position detector
A4: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert WEBEND Web end detector (36cpm machine)
FIRST number setting (A4) 10000 sheets for the
(Number of used first time
sheets)
B4: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert
30-2
FIRST number setting (B4) 10000 sheets for the
(Number of used first time Purpose Operation test/check
sheets) Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
B5: Paper order alert 500 - 1000 Unit: No. of alert sors and the detectors in the paper feed
FIRST number setting (B5) 10000 sheets for the
section and the control circuits.
(Number of used first time
sheets) Section
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
played.
27-18
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
Purpose Data clear lighted.
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FSS paper feed retry
counter. CPFD1 Paper transport detector (Paper feed tray 1)
CLUD1 Paper feed tray upper limit sensor (Paper feed tray 1)
Section
CPED1 Paper empty sensor (Paper feed tray 1)
Operation/Procedure CSPD1 Paper remaining quantity sensor (Paper feed tray 1)
1) Select an item to be cleared. CSS11 Paper feed tray size detector (Paper feed tray 1)(*1)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. CSS12
3) Press [YES] key. CSS13
CSS14
CPFD2 Paper transport detector (Paper feed tray 2)
Item/Display Content CLUD2 Paper feed tray upper limit sensor (Paper feed tray 2)
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed retry counter CPED2 Paper empty sensor (Paper feed tray 2)
TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed retry counter CSPD2 Paper remaining quantity sensor (Paper feed tray 2)
TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed retry counter CSS21 Paper feed tray paper size detector (Paper feed tray 2)
TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed retry counter CSS22
MFT Manual paper feed retry counter CSS23
CSS24
CSS1 Paper feed tray 1 detector
CSS2 Paper feed tray 2 detector (*1)
CSS2SET Desk installation detection
Default
MPLD Paper length detector (Manual paper feed tray) Item/Display Content
value
MPED Paper empty sensor (Manual paper feed tray) A MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width 241
*1: Displayed, but not installed in some models. B P1 (A4) POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4) 231
C P2 (A4R) POSITION Manual feed P2 position width 140
(A4R)
D MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width 19
33
41
33-2
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the ID (IDM) information of Purpose Operation test/check
Felica card. Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
Section ment size sensor and the control circuit.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key. The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
The ID (IDM) information of Felica card is deleted. played.
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
lighted.
OCSW Document cover status Open: Normal display

40 Close: Highlighted
PD1 - 7 Document detection No document: Normal display
40-2 sensor status Document present: Highlighted
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor
adjustment. 41-2
Section Paper feed Purpose Adjustment
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document size sensor
1) Open the manual paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX). detection level.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Section
The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized. Operation/Procedure
3) Open the manual paper feed guide to P1 width (A4). 1) Open the document cover, and press [EXECUTE] key without
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. place a document on the document table.
The P1 width (A4) detection level is recognized. The sensor level without document is recognized.
5) Open the manual paper feed guide to P2 width (A4R). 2) Set A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table, and press
[EXECUTE] key.
The sensor level when detecting the document is displayed.
The P2 width (A4R) detection level is recognized.
When the above operation is normally completed, it is displayed.
7) Open the manual paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN).
The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized.
41-3
When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is
displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width ment size sensor and the control circuit.
P1(A4)POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4)
Section
P2(A4R)POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A4R)
MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width
Operation/Procedure
The detection output level (A/D value) of OCSW and the document
sensor (PD1 - PD7) is displayed in real time.
The light receiving range of PD1 - PD7 is 1 - 255. (Default: 128)
40-7
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Item/Display Content Detection level range
OCSW Original cover SW 0-1 ("1" to Close)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the PD1 Document detection 1 0 - 255
manual paper feed tray paper width sensor. PD2 Document detection 2 0 - 255
Section Paper feed PD3 Document detection 3 0 - 255
Operation/Procedure PD4 Document detection 4 0 - 255
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys. PD5 Document detection 5 0 - 255
PD6 Document detection 6 0 - 255
PD7 Document detection 7 0 - 255
3) Press [OK] key.
43
43-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature in each
mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the SW-A or the SW-B. .
3) Select an item to be set with displayed value.
Default value (SW-A) Default value (SW-B)

Setting
Item/Display Content Group Group Group Group Group Group
range
A B C A B C
A HL_UM READY Ready standby TH_UM set value 70 - 230 150 175 175 165 180 180
B HL_LM READY Ready standby TH_LM set value 30 - 200 110 110 110 120 120 120
C HL_US READY Ready standby TH_US set value 70 - 230 150 165 165 165 170 170
D HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 135 160 160 150 165 165
E HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_LM set value 30 - 200 125 140 140 140 140 140
F HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_US set value 70 - 230 135 155 155 150 160 160
G HL_UM PLAIN PAPER CL Color plain paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 145 170 170 160 175 175
H HL_LM PLAIN PAPER CL Color plain paper TH_LM set value 30 - 200 135 140 140 140 140 140
I HL_US PLAIN PAPER CL Color plain paper TH_US set value 70 - 230 145 160 160 160 165 165
J WARMUP FUMON HL_US T Fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_US set value 30 - 200 135 135 135 135 135 135
K WARMUP FUMOFF Fusing motor previous rotation complete time 0 - 255 30 30 30 30 30 30
L WARM UP END TIME Warm-up complete time 1 - 255 38 38 38 38 38 38
M HL_UM HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 170 170 170 170 170 170
N HL_LM HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_LM set value 30 - 200 140 140 140 140 140 140
O HL_US HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_US set value 70 - 230 170 170 170 170 170 170
P HL_UM OHP PAPER OHP-TH_UM set value 70 - 230 175 175 175 175 175 175
Q HL_LM OHP PAPER OHP-TH_LM set value 30 - 200 135 135 135 135 135 135
R HL_US OHP PAPER OHP-TH_US set value 70 - 230 175 175 175 175 175 175
S HL_UM ENV PAPER Envelope TH_UM set value 70 - 230 180 170 170 180 170 170
T HL_LM ENV PAPER Envelope TH_LM set value 30 - 200 145 135 135 145 135 135
U HL_US ENV PAPER Envelope TH_US set value 70 - 230 180 170 170 180 170 170
V HL_UM GLOSS PAPER Glossy paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 180 180 180 180 180 180
W HL_LM GLOSS PAPER Glossy paper TH_LM set value 30 - 200 140 140 140 140 140 140
X HL_US GLOSS PAPER Glossy paper TH_US set value 70 - 230 180 180 180 180 180 180
Y HL_UM E-STAR Preheating TH_UM set value 30 - 200 125 125 125 125 125 125
Z HL_US E-STAR Preheating TH_US set value 30 - 200 125 125 125 125 125 125
AA HL_UM PRE-JOB Preheat mode restore complete temperature 30 - 200 130 130 130 130 130 130
AB HL_LM E-STAR Preheating TH_LM set value 30 - 200 115 115 115 115 115 115
AC HL_UM HEAVY2 PAPER Heavy paper 2 TH_UM set value 70 - 230 175 175 175 175 175 175
AD HL_LM HEAVY2 PAPER Heavy paper 2 TH_LM set value 30 - 200 140 140 140 140 140 140
AE HL_US HEAVY2 PAPER Heavy paper 2 TH_SU set value 70 - 230 175 175 175 175 175 175
AF HL_UM WARMUP_120L TH_UM set value when Warm-Up at 120qC or below 70 - 230 145 170 170 160 175 175
AG HL_LM WARMUP_120L TH_LM set value when Warm-Up at 120qC or below 30 - 200 110 110 110 110 110 110
AH HL_US WARMUP_120L TH_US set value when Warm-Up at 120qC or below 70 - 230 135 150 150 150 155 155
AI LO_WARMUP_TIME AF - AH applying time 0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0
(Timer from completion of Ready)
AJ HL_UM WARMUP_120H TH_UM set value when Warm-Up at 120qC or 70 - 230 145 170 170 160 175 175
above
AK HL_LM WARMUP_120H TH_LM set value when Warm-Up at 120qC or above 30 - 200 110 110 110 110 110 110
AL HL_US WARMUP_120H TH_US set value when Warm-Up at 120qC or above 70 - 230 135 150 150 150 155 155
AM HI_WARMUP_TIME AJ - AL applying time 0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0
AN HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP FM prior rotation start TH_US when Warm-Up at 30 - 200 105 105 105 105 105 105
alpha qC or above
AO HI_WU_END_TIME Warm-Up completion time when Warm-Up at alpha 0 - 255 38 38 38 38 38 38
qC or above
AP HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP Job enable TH_UM temperature when Warm-Up at 70 - 230 145 170 170 160 175 175
alpha qC or above
AQ HI_WARMUP_BORDER Threshold value alpha to which SIM43-1-AN - AP is 1 - 119 70 70 70 70 70 70
applied
AR LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP Job enable TH_UM temperature when Warm-Up at 70 - 230 145 170 170 160 175 175
alpha qC or below
Setting
range
A B C A B C
AS JOBEND_FUMON_TIME Fusing motor after rotation time after completion of 0 - 255 5 5 5 5 5 5
a job (Excluding heavy paper, OPH, and envelopes)
AT HL_UM_JOB_SET_TMP_B Job enable temperature (B/W) when the upper roller 70 - 230 145 170 170 160 175 175
W temperature is lower than alpha qC
Code descriptions
TH_UM Fusing thermistor main (Front surface of paper) HL_UM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_LM Fusing thermistor main (Back surface of paper) HL_LM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
TH_US Fusing thermistor sub (Front surface of paper) HL_US Heater lamp sub (Heat roller for front surface of paper)
SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing
control setting.
(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed.
List of destination groups
Group Destination
Group A JAPAN – – – – –
Group B U. S. A CANADA INCH – – –
Group C EUROPE U. K AUS. AB_A AB_B CHINA
43-2
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature in each
mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.

Setting
range
A B C A B C
A HL_UM READY Ready standby TH_UM set value 70 - 230 115 130 130 140 140 145
B HL_LM READY Ready standby TH_LM set value 30 - 200 90 105 105 100 115 115
C HL_US READY Ready standby TH_US set value 70 - 230 145 150 155 155 160 165
D HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 145 145 155 155 155 165
E HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_LM set value 30 - 200 110 115 115 115 125 125
F HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW Black-White plain paper TH_US set value 70 - 230 145 150 155 150 155 160
G HL_UM PLAIN PAPER CL Color plain paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 145 150 155 160 160 165
H HL_LM PLAIN PAPER CL Color plain paper TH_LM set value 30 - 200 110 115 115 115 125 125
I HL_US PLAIN PAPER CL Color plain paper TH_US set value 70 - 230 145 150 155 155 160 165
J WARMUP FUMON HL_US T Fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_US set value 30 - 200 50 50 50 50 50 50
K WARMUP FUMOFF Fusing motor previous rotation complete time 0 - 255 20 20 20 20 20 20
L WARM UP END TIME Warm-up complete time 1 - 255 14 14 14 14 14 14
M HL_UM HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 180 180 180 180 180 180
N HL_LM HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_LM set value 30 - 200 120 120 120 120 120 120
O HL_US HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_US set value 70 - 230 150 150 150 150 150 150
P HL_UM OHP PAPER OHP-TH_UM set value 70 - 230 195 195 195 195 195 195
Q HL_LM OHP PAPER OHP-TH_LM set value 30 - 200 125 125 125 125 125 125
R HL_US OHP PAPER OHP-TH_US set value 70 - 230 175 175 175 175 175 175
S HL_UM ENV PAPER Envelope TH_UM set value 70 - 230 195 195 195 195 195 195
T HL_LM ENV PAPER Envelope TH_LM set value 30 - 200 125 125 125 125 125 125
U HL_US ENV PAPER Envelope TH_US set value 70 - 230 175 175 175 175 175 175
V HL_UM GLOSS PAPER Glossy paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 200 200 200 200 200 200
W HL_LM GLOSS PAPER Glossy paper TH_LM set value 30 - 200 120 120 120 120 120 120
X HL_US GLOSS PAPER Glossy paper TH_US set value 70 - 230 180 180 180 180 180 180
Y HL_UM E-STAR Preheating TH_UM set value 30 - 200 110 115 120 110 115 120
Z HL_US E-STAR Preheating TH_US set value 30 - 200 130 130 130 130 130 130
AA HL_UM PRE-JOB Preheat mode restore complete temperature 30 - 200 140 145 150 155 155 160
AB HL_LM E-STAR Preheating TH_LM set value 30 - 200 70 90 90 70 90 90
AC HL_UM HEAVY2 PAPER Heavy paper 2 TH_UM set value 70 - 230 190 190 190 190 190 190
AD HL_LM HEAVY2 PAPER Heavy paper 2 TH_LM set value 30 - 200 120 120 120 120 120 120
AE HL_US HEAVY2 PAPER Heavy paper 2 TH_SU set value 70 - 230 160 160 160 160 160 160
AF HL_UM WARMUP_120L TH_UM set value when Warm-Up at 120qC or below 70 - 230 155 160 165 160 165 170
AG HL_LM WARMUP_120L TH_LM set value when Warm-Up at 120qC or below 30 - 200 50 50 50 50 50 50
AH HL_US WARMUP_120L TH_US set value when Warm-Up at 120qC or below 70 - 230 135 140 150 150 145 155
AI LO_WARMUP_TIME AF - AH applying time 0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0
AJ HL_UM WARMUP_120H TH_UM set value when Warm-Up at 120qC or above 70 - 230 155 160 165 160 165 170
AK HL_LM WARMUP_120H TH_LM set value when Warm-Up at 120qC or above 30 - 200 50 50 50 50 50 50
AL HL_US WARMUP_120H TH_US set value when Warm-Up at 120qC or above 70 - 230 135 140 150 150 145 155
AM HI_WARMUP_TIME AJ - AL applying time 0 - 255 0 0 0 0 0 0
AN HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP FM prior rotation start TH_US when Warm-Up at alpha 30 - 200 50 50 50 50 50 50
qC or above
AO HI_WU_END_TIME Warm-Up completion time when Warm-Up at alpha qC 0 - 255 14 14 14 14 14 14
or above
AP HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP Job enable TH_UM temperature when Warm-Up at 70 - 230 155 160 165 160 165 170
alpha qC or above
AQ HI_WARMUP_BORDER Threshold value alpha to which SIM43-1-AN - AP is 1 - 119 70 70 70 70 70 70
applied
AR LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP Job enable TH_UM temperature when Warm-Up at 70 - 230 155 160 165 160 165 170
alpha qC or below
AS JOBEND_FUMON_TIME Fusing motor after rotation time after completion of a 0 - 255 5 5 5 5 5 5
job (Excluding heavy paper, OPH, and envelopes)
AT HL_UM_JOB_SET_TMP_ Job enable temperature (B/W) when the upper roller 70 - 230 155 160 165 160 165 170
BW temperature is lower than alpha qC
Code descriptions
control setting.
Group Destination
43-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in
each mode. (Continued from SIM 43-2.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.

Setting
range
A B C A B C
A HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Black-White plain paper duplex TH_UM set value 70 - 230 145 145 155 155 155 165
B HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Black-White plain paper duplex TH_LM set value 30 - 200 110 115 115 115 125 125
C HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Black-White plain paper duplex TH_US set value 70 - 230 145 150 155 150 155 160
D PLAIN PAPER BW DUP APP CNT Black and white plain paper duplex applying 0 - 60 0 0 0 0 0 0
number of sheets
E HL_UM PLAIN PAPER CL DUP Color plain paper duplex TH_UM set value 70 - 230 145 150 155 160 165 165
F HL_LM PLAIN PAPER CL DUP Color plain paper duplex TH_LM set value 30 - 200 110 115 115 115 125 125
G HL_US PLAIN PAPER CL DUP Color plain paper duplex TH_US set value 70 - 230 145 150 155 155 165 165
H PLAIN PAPER CL DUP APP CNT Color plain paper duplex applying number of 0 - 60 0 0 0 0 0 0
sheets
I HL_UM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Black-White heavy paper duplex TH_UM set value 70 - 230 190 190 190 190 190 190
J HL_LM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Black-White heavy paper duplex TH_LM set value 30 - 200 120 120 120 120 120 120
K HL_US HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Black-White heavy paper duplex TH_US set value 70 - 230 160 160 160 160 160 160
L HEAVY PAPER BW DUP APP Black and white heavy paper duplex applying 0 - 60 0 0 0 0 0 0
CNT number of sheets
M HL_UM HEAVY PAPER CL DUP Color heavy paper duplex TH_UM set value 70 - 230 190 190 190 190 190 190
N HL_LM HEAVY PAPER CL DUP Color heavy paper duplex TH_LM set value 30 - 200 120 120 120 120 120 120
O HL_US HEAVY PAPER CL DUP Color heavy paper duplex TH_US set value 70 - 230 160 160 160 160 160 160
P HEAVY PAPER CL DUP APP CNT Color heavy paper duplex applying number of 0 - 60 0 0 0 0 0 0
sheets
Code descriptions
control setting.
Group Destination
43-20
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environmental correction
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-2) in each paper mode.
Section
Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
Operation/Procedure
99)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49
3) Press [OK] key. Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
Item/Display Content Setting Default

range value
A HL_UM READY LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in Ready standby under LL environment 1 - 99 55
B HL_LM READY LL Correction value for TH_LM set value in Ready standby under LL environment 1 - 99 55
C HL_US READY LL Correction value for TH_US set value in Ready standby under LL environment 1 - 99 55
D HL_UM PLAIN BW LL Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
E HL_LM PLAIN BW LL Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_LM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
F HL_US PLAIN BW LL Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
G HL_UM PLAIN CL LL Correction value for Color plain paper TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
H HL_LM PLAIN CL LL Correction value for Color plain paper TH_LM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
I HL_US PLAIN CL LL Correction value for Color plain paper TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
J WARMUP FUMON HL_US T LL Correction value for fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
K WARMUP FUMOFF LL Fusing motor prior rotation completion time under LL environment 1 - 99 55
L WARMUP END TIME LL Correction value for warm-up complete time under LL environment 1 - 99 55
M HL_UM HEAVY LL Correction value for heavy paper TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
N HL_LM HEAVY LL Correction value for heavy paper TH_LM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
O HL_US HEAVY LL Correction value for heavy paper TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
P HL_UM OHP LL Correction value for OHP TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
Q HL_LM OHP LL Correction value for OHP TH_LM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
R HL_US OHP LL Correction value for OHP TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
S HL_UM ENVELOPE LL Correction value for envelope TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
T HL_LM ENVELOPE LL Correction value for envelope TH_LM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
U HL_US ENVELOPE LL Correction value for envelope TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
V HL_UM GLOSS LL Correction value for glossy paper TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
W HL_LM GLOSS LL Correction value for glossy paper TH_LM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
X HL_US GLOSS LL Correction value for glossy paper TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
Y HL_UM E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
Z HL_US E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
AA HL_UM PRE-JOB LL Correction value for the set value of TH_UM when restoring from preheating under LL 1 - 99 55
environment
AB HL_LM E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_LM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55
AC LO_WARMUP_TIME_LL Correction value for AF-AH applying time (timer from Ready complete) under LL environment 1 - 99 50
AD HI_WU_TIME_LL Correction value for AJ-AL applying time (timer from Ready complete) under LL environment 1 - 99 50
AE HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP_LL Correction value for FM prior rotation start TH_UM in Warm-Up at alpha ?C or above under LL 1 - 99 40
environment
AF HI_WU_END_TIME_LL Correction value for Warm-Up completion time in Warm-Up at alpha ?C or above under LL 1 - 99 50
environment
AG HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_LL Correction value for Job Enable TH_UM temperature in at alpha ?C or above under LL 1 - 99 55
environment
AH HI_WARMUP_BORDER_LL Correction value for the threshold value alpha applying SIM43-1-AN - AP under LL 1 - 99 50
environment
AI LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_LL Correction value for Job Enable TH_UM temperature in at alpha ?C or below under LL 1 - 99 55
environment
AJ JOBEND_FUMON_TIME LL Correction value for the after rotation time when completing a job under LL environment 1 - 99 50
AK LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_BW LL Correction value (BW) for Job enable TH_UM temperature when Warm-Up at 1 - 99 55
alpha-C or above under LL environment
* Item WARMUP END TIME LL: 1 Count = 1s Change

Correction value for the other items: 1 count for 1qC change
* Item D, F: When B5 size, correction of "-5" is made for item D and item F.
* Item G, I: When B5 size, correction of "-5" is made for item G and item I.
Code descriptions
TH_LM Fusing thermistor main (Back surface of paper) HL_LM Heater lamp main (Heat roller for back surface of paper)
43-21
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction
under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-2) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
99)
The set value in step 2 is saved.
Setting Default value

range Group Group Group
A B C
A HL_UM READY HH Correction value for TH_UM set value in Ready standby under HH environment 1 - 99 40 45 50
B HL_LM READY HH Correction value for TH_LM set value in Ready standby under HH environment 1 - 99 40 45 50
C HL_US READY HH Correction value for TH_US set value in Ready standby under HH environment 1 - 99 40 45 50
D HL_UM PLAIN BW HH Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_UM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 40 45 50
E HL_LM PLAIN BW HH Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_LM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 40 45 50
F HL_US PLAIN BW HH Correction value for Black-White plain paper TH_US set value under HH environment 1 - 99 40 45 50
G HL_UM PLAIN CL HH Correction value for Color plain paper TH_UM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 40 45 50
H HL_LM PLAIN CL HH Correction value for Color plain paper TH_LM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 40 45 50
I HL_US PLAIN CL HH Correction value for Color plain paper TH_US set value under HH environment 1 - 99 40 45 50
J WARMUP FUMON HL_US T Correction value for fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_US set value under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
HH environment
K WARMUP FUMOFF HH Fusing motor prior rotation completion time under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50 50
L WARMUP END TIME HH Correction value for warm-up complete time under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50 50
M HL_UM HEAVY HH Correction value for heavy paper TH_UM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50 50
N HL_LM HEAVY HH Correction value for heavy paper TH_LM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50 50
O HL_US HEAVY HH Correction value for heavy paper TH_US set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50 50
P HL_UM OHP HH Correction value for OHP TH_UM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50 50
Q HL_LM OHP HH Correction value for OHP TH_LM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50 50
R HL_US OHP HH Correction value for OHP TH_US set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50 50
S HL_UM ENVELOPE HH Correction value for envelope TH_UM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50 50
T HL_LM ENVELOPE HH Correction value for envelope TH_LM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50 50
U HL_US ENVELOPE HH Correction value for envelope TH_US set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50 50
V HL_UM GLOSS HH Correction value for glossy paper TH_UM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50 50
W HL_LM GLOSS HH Correction value for glossy paper TH_LM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50 50
X HL_US GLOSS HH Correction value for glossy paper TH_US set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50 50
Y HL_UM E-STAR HH Correction value for preheating TH_UM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 40 45 50
Z HL_US E-STAR HH Correction value for preheating TH_US set value under HH environment 1 - 99 40 45 50
A HL_UM PRE-JOB HH Correction value for the set value of TH_UM when restoring from preheating under HH 1 - 99 40 45 50
A environment
A HL_LM E-STAR HH Correction value for preheating TH_LM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 40 45 50
B
A LO_WARMUP_TIME_HH Correction value for AF-AH applying time (timer from Ready complete) under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
C environment
A HI_WARMUP_TIME HH Correction value for AJ-AL applying time (timer from Ready complete) under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
D environmentHH
A HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP_HH Correction value for FM prior rotation start TH_US in Warm-Up at alpha ?C or above 1 - 99 50 50 50
E under HH environment
A HI_WU_END_TIME_HH Correction value for Warm-Up completion time in Warm-Up at alpha ?C or above 1 - 99 50 50 50
F under HH environment
A HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_H Correction value for Job Enable TH_UM temperature in Warm-Up at alpha ?C or 1 - 99 40 45 50
G H above under HH environment
A HI_WARMUP_BORDER_H Correction value for the threshold value alpha applying SIM43-1-AN - AP under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
H H environment
AI LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_H Correction value for Job Enable TH_UM temperature in Warm-Up at alpha ?C or 1 - 99 40 45 50
H below under HH environment
AJ JOBEND_FUMON_TIME Correction value for the after rotation time when completing a job under HH 1 - 99 50 50 50
HH environment
A LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP_B Correction value (BW) for Job enable TH_UM temperature when Warm-Up at alpha 1 - 99 40 45 50
K W HH ?C or above under HH environment
* Item WARMUP END TIME HH: 1 Count = 1s Change

Code descriptions

Group Destination
Group A JAPAN - - - - -
Group B U.S.A CANADA INCH - - -
Group C AB_B EUROPE U.K. AUS. AB_A CHINA
43-22
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-4) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with scroll keys. Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
99)
3) Press [OK] key. Correction value -49 -25 -5 0
The set value in step 2 is saved. Input value 1 25 45 50
Setting Default
range value
A HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_UM Black-White plain paper duplex under LL environment 1 - 99 55
B HL_LM PLAIN BW DUP LL Correction value for lower TH_LM Black-White plain paper duplex under LL environment 1 - 99 55
C HL_US PLAIN BW DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_US Black-White plain paper duplex under LL environment 1 - 99 55
D PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in Black-White plain paper duplex under LL 1 - 99 50
environment
E HL_UM PLAIN CL DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_UM Color plain paper duplex under LL environment 1 - 99 55
F HL_LM PLAIN CL DUP LL Correction value for lower TH_LM Color plain paper duplex under LL environment 1 - 99 55
G HL_US PLAIN CL DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_US Color plain paper duplex under LL environment 1 - 99 55
H PLAIN CL DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in Color plain paper duplex under LL environment 1 - 99 50
I HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_UM set value in Black-White heavy paper duplex under LL 1 - 99 55
environment
J HL_LM HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for lower TH_LM set value in Black-White heavy paper duplex under LL environment 1 - 99 55
K HL_US HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_US set value in Black-White heavy paper duplex under LL 1 - 99 55
environment
L HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in Black-White heavy paper duplex under LL 1 - 99 50
environment
M HL_UM HEAVY CL DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_UM set value in Color heavy paper duplex under LL environment 1 - 99 55
N HL_LM HEAVY CL DUP LL Correction value for lower TH_LM set value in Color heavy paper duplex under LL environment 1 - 99 55
O HL_US HEAVY CL DUP LL Correction value for upper TH_US set value in Color heavy paper duplex under LL environment 1 - 99 55
P HEAVY CL DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in Color heavy paper duplex under LL environment 1 - 99 50
* Items PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL/ PLAIN CL DUP APP CNT LL: 1 Count = 1s Change
Code descriptions
43-23
under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-4) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
99)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Correction value -49 -25 -5 0
3) Press [OK] key. Input value 1 25 45 50
Setting Default
range value
A HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP HH Correction value for TH_UM Black-White plain paper duplex mode under HH environment 1 - 99 50
B HL_LM PLAIN BW DUP HH Correction value for TH_LM Black-White plain paper duplex mode under HH environment 1 - 99 50
C HL_US PLAIN BW DUP HH Correction value for TH_US Black-White plain paper duplex mode under HH environment 1 - 99 50
D PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT HH Correction value for applying number of sheets in Black-White plain paper duplex under HH 1 - 99 50
environment
E HL_UM PLAIN CL DUP HH Correction value for TH_UM Color plain paper duplex mode under HH environment 1 - 99 50
F HL_LM PLAIN CL DUP HH Correction value for TH_LM Color plain paper duplex mode under HH environment 1 - 99 50
G HL_US PLAIN CL DUP HH Correction value for TH_US Color plain paper duplex mode under HH environment 1 - 99 50
H PLAIN CL DUP APP CNT HH Correction value for applying number of sheets in Color plain paper duplex under HH environment 1 - 99 50
I HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP HH Correction value for Black-White heavy paper duplex mode TH_UM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50
J HL_LM HEAVY BW DUP HH Correction value for Black-White heavy paper duplex mode TH_LM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50
K HL_US HEAVY BW DUP HH Correction value for Black-White heavy paper duplex mode TH_US set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50
L HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT HH Correction value for applying number of sheets in Black-White heavy paper duplex under HH 1 - 99 50
environment
M HL_UM HEAVY CL DUP HH Correction value for Color heavy paper duplex mode TH_UM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50
N HL_LM HEAVY CL DUP HH Correction value for Color heavy paper duplex mode TH_LM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50
O HL_US HEAVY CL DUP HH Correction value for Color heavy paper duplex mode TH_US set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50
P HEAVY CL DUP APP CNT HH Correction value for applying number of sheets in Color heavy paper duplex under HH environment 1 - 99 50
* Items PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT HH/ PLAIN CL DUP APP CNT HH: 1 Count = 1s Change
Code descriptions
43-24
Function (Purpose) Used to set the correction of the tempera-
ture adjustment value of SIM 43-2 and 43-
4.
Section
Correction value: -49 - +49, Input value: Actually inputted value (1 -
Operation/Procedure
99)
The set value in step 2 is saved.
Default value
Group A Group B Group C
A NN_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM Correction value for SIM43-4-A, E at 120qC or below in N/N Warm-Up 50 50 50
B NN_120_FUS_DUP_HL_LM Correction value for SIM43-4-B, F at 120qC or below in N/N Warm-Up 50 50 50
C LL_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM Correction value for SIM43-22-A, E at 120qC or below in N/N Warm-Up 50 50 50
D LL_120_FUS_DUP_HL_LM Correction value for SIM43-22-B, F at 120qC or below in N/N Warm-Up 50 50 50
E HH_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM Correction value for SIM43-23-A, E at 120qC or below in N/N Warm-Up 50 50 50
F HH_120_FUS_DUP_HL_LM Correction value for SIM43-23-B, F at 120qC or below in N/N Warm-Up 50 50 50
G NN_120_FUS_DUP_CNT Fusing duplex paper exit count under NN environment 5 5 5
H LL_120_FUS_DUP_CNT Fusing duplex paper exit count under LL environment 10 10 10
I HH_120_FUS_DUP_CNT Fusing duplex paper exit count under HH environment 5 5 5
J COOL_DOWN_HEAVY Cool down time heavy paper 5 5 5
K COOL_DOWN_OHP Cool down time OHP 10 10 10
L COOL_DOWN_ENVELOPE Cool down time envelope 15 15 15
M FUSER MOTOR Web send quantity 10 10 10
N NN_120_FUS_DUP_HL_US Correction value for SIM43-4-C, G at 120qC or below in N/N Warm-Up 50 50 50
O LL_120_FUS_DUP_HL_US Correction value for SIM43-22-C, G at 120qC or below in L/L Warm-Up 50 50 50
P HH_120_FUS_DUP_HL_US Correction value for SIM43-23-C, G at 120qC or below in H/H Warm-Up 50 50 50
Q HL_UM THIN PAPER BW Thin paper BW-TH_UM 135 135 135
R HL_LM THIN PAPER BW Thin paper BW-TH_LM 105 105 105
S HL_US THIN PAPER BW Thin paper BW-TH_US 135 135 135
T HL_UM THIN PAPER CL Thin paper COL-TH_UM 135 135 135
U HL_LM THIN PAPER CL Thin paper COL-TH_LM 105 105 105
V HL_US THIN PAPER CL Thin paper COL-TH_US 135 135 135
W HL_UM THIN PAPER READY Thin paper Ready-TH_UM 140 140 140
X HL_UM REC PAPER BW Recycled paper BW-TH_UM 150 155 160
Y HL_LM REC PAPER BW Recycled paper BW-TH_LM 110 110 110
Z HL_US REC PAPER BW Recycled paper BW-TH_US 140 155 165
AA HL_UM REC PAPER CL Recycled paper COL-TH_UM 150 155 160
AB HL_LM REC PAPER CL Recycled paper COL-TH_LM 110 110 110
AC HL_US REC PAPER CL Recycled paper COL-TH_US 140 155 165
AD HL_UM REC PAPER READY Recycled paper Ready-TH_UM 160 165 170
* Each temperature correction value: 1 count for 1qC change in temperature control
* Each paper exit count: 1 count = 1 sheet change
* Each cool down time: 1 count = 1sec change
Code descriptions

Group Destination
43-31
44
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the fusing
44-1
web cleaning.
Purpose Setting
Section Fusing
Function (Purpose) Used to set each correction operation func-
Operation/Procedure
tion in the image forming (process) section.
Cleaning the fusing web is performed.
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
2) When cleaning the fusing web is completed, "COMPLETE" is
Operation/Procedure
displayed.
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
(The selected item is highlighted.)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
The set value may be changed for a design change or an individual
arrangement. Except for the above cases, however, the set value
must not be changed. If it is changed, a trouble may be occur.
Set the items to the default values unless a change is specially
Fusing web unit required.
installation Operation Remarks
detection state Item/ Setting Default
Content NOTE
Fusing web unit not Does not operate * During this operation, the Display range value
installed fusing web cleaning feed HV Normal operation high Normal Enable
Fusing web unit Operates for the counter is counted up. density process control (Disable:
installed specified time. Enable/Disable setting 1: NO)
HT Normal operation Reverse Enable
halftone process control (Enable:
Enable/Disable setting 0: YES)
43-32 TC Transfer output Enable
correction Enable/
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Disable setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set various items related to the MD VG Membrane decrease Enable
forcible operation of web cleaning when job grid voltage correction
end. (36cpm machine) Enable/Disable setting
MD LD Membrane laser power Disable
Section Fusing
voltage correction
Operation/Procedure Enable/Disable setting
1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key. MD EV Membrane decrease Enable
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. environment grid
voltage correction
3) Press [OK] key. Enable/Disable setting
The set value in step 2) is saved. MD DL Membrane decrease Enable
discharge light quantity
correction Enable/
Disable setting
The set value may be changed for a design change or an individual MD DL EV Membrane decrease Disable
arrangement. Except for the above cases, however, the set value environment discharge
must not be changed. If it is changed, a trouble may be occur. light quantity correction
Enable/Disable setting
Setting Default TN_PIX_ Setting of Enable/ Enable
Item/Display Item
range value SUP Disable of toner supply
A JOB END Fusing web motor Enable 0-1 0 1 control for the yield
COMP ACT forcible operation Disable 1 count
CHECK condition when job end TN_FB Setting of Enable/ Enable
B JOB END Interval of the print quantity of 1 - 200 100 Disable of the toner
COMP ACT compulsory action of the fusing density correction for
INTERVAL web motor at job end the process control
C JOB END Number of forcible operations of 1-5 1 result
COMP ACT the fusing web motor when job TN_INT Setting of Enable/ Enable
CNT end Disable of toner
compulsory supply
correction for the
development traveling
distance
TN_RECV Setting of Enable/ Enable
Disable of the toner
density recovery
operation
TN_ADJ Setting of Enable/ Enable
Disable of the toner
sensor control voltage
adjustment in the
process control
Item/ Setting Default Classifi- Setting Default
Content NOTE Item/Display Content
Display range value cation range value
TN_EMP Setting of Enable/ Normal Enable PROCON G PCS_F Transfer belt 0 - 255 0
Disable of the toner (Disable: GRND substrate detection
falling distance 1: NO) level when the item
detection control Reverse B adjustment is
TN_EMP_ Setting of Enable/ (Enable: Enable completed
INT Disable of the toner 0: YES) H PCS_F Transfer belt 0 - 255 0
falling distance BELT MAX substrate input
detection control of job max. value F
interruption I PCS_F Transfer belt 1 - 255 0
TN_EMP_ Setting of Enable/ Enable BELT MIN substrate input
NEW Disable of the new min. value F
toner cartridge falling J PCS_F Transfer belt 0 - 255 0
distance detection BELT DIF substrate input
control difference F (Item
TN_PIX_ Setting of Enable/ Enable H - Item I)
TBL Disable of execution of K PCS_R Transfer belt 0 - 255 0
revision of the yield GRND substrate detection
count conversion table level when the item
for the toner supply C adjustment is
control in the halftone completed
process control L PCS_R Transfer belt 1 - 255 0
AR_AUTO Auto registration Enable BELT MAX substrate input
adjustment Enable/ max. value R
Disable setting M PCS_R Transfer belt 0 - 255 0
AR_ERROR Auto registration Enable BELT MIN substrate input
adjustment execution min. value R
error check Enable/ N PCS_R Transfer belt 0 - 256 0
Disable setting BELT DIF substrate input
DM_PHASE Drum phase fitting Enable difference R (Item
Enable/Disable setting L - Item M)
PRT_HT Halftone process Enable REGIST O REG_F Registration sensor 0 - 255 56
control printer LED ADJ light emitting
correction feedback quantity
Enable/Disable setting adjustment value F
PTC_ENV PTC environment Enable Enable: P REG_F Registration sensor 0 - 255 0
correction Enable/ Correc- DARK dark voltage F
Disable setting tion ON Q REG_F Transfer belt 0 - 255 0
GRND substrate detection
level when the item
B adjustment is
44-2 completed
Purpose Adjustment/Setup R REG_R Registration sensor 0 - 255 56
LED ADJ light emitting
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image quantity
density sensor (registration sensor). adjustment value R
Section Process S REG_R Registration sensor 0 - 255 0
DARK dark voltage R
Operation/Procedure
T REG_R Transfer belt 0 - 255 0
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment is executed auto- GRND substrate detection
matically. level when the item
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is dis- R adjustment is
played. completed
U REG_F Transfer belt 0 - 255 0
If the adjustment is not executed normally, "ERROR" is displayed.
BELT MAX substrate detection
level max. value (F
Classifi- Setting Default
Item/Display Content side)
cation range value
V REG_F Transfer belt 0 - 255 0
PROCON A PCS_F_C Color image sensor 1 - 255 500
BELT MIN substrate detection
L_KA light emitting
level min. value (F
quantity
side)
adjustment value
W REG_F Transfer belt 0 - 255 0
B PCS_F Image sensor light 1 - 255 21
BELT DIF substrate detection
LED ADJ emitting quantity
level difference
adjustment value F
(Item U - Item V)
C PCS_R Image sensor light 0 - 255 21
X REG_R Transfer belt 0 - 255 0
LED ADJ emitting quantity
BELT MAX substrate detection
adjustment value R
level max. value (R
D PCS_F_C Dark voltage of 0 - 255 0 side)
L_DARK color image sensor
Y REG_R Transfer belt 0 - 255 0
E PCS_F Dark voltage of 0 - 255 0 BELT MIN substrate detection
DARK image sensor F level min. value (R
F PCS_R Dark voltage of 0 - 255 0 side)
DARK image sensor R
Classifi- Setting Default Error name Error content
cation range value Registration REG_R GRND error
REGIST Z REG_R Transfer belt 0 - 255 0 substrate R scan The difference between the max. value and the
BELT DIF substrate detection abnormality min. value of the substrate detection level is
level difference greater than the specified value when the transfer
belt rotates 2 turn
(Item X - Item Y)
AA REG_F Toner patch 0 - 255 0
PATCH (K) detection level R
(K) in the
registration
44-4
adjustment Purpose Setting
AB REG_F Toner patch 0 - 255 0 Function (Purpose) Used to set the conditions of the high den-
PATCH (C) detection level R
sity process control operation.
(C) in the
registration Section Process
adjustment Operation/Procedure
AC REG_F Toner patch 0 - 255 0
PATCH detection level R
(M) (M) in the 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
registration 3) Press [OK] key.
adjustment
AD REG_F Toner patch 0 - 255 0
PATCH (Y) detection level R
(Y) in the Set the items to the default values unless a change is specially
registration required.
adjustment
AE REG_R Toner patch 0 - 255 0 Setting Default
PATCH (K) detection level R range value
(K) in the A PCS_CL TARGET Color image sensor 1 - 255 204
registration adjustment target value
adjustment B PCS_K TARGET Black image sensor 1 - 255 204
AF REG_R Toner patch 0 - 255 0 adjustment target value
PATCH (C) detection level R C LED_CL OUTPUT Color image sensor light 1 - 255 21
(C) in the emitting start level
registration D LED_K OUTPUT Black image sensor light 1 - 255 21
adjustment emitting start level
AG REG_R Toner patch 0 - 255 0 E PCS ADJSTMENT Color image sensor 1 - 255 4
PATCH detection level R LIMIT adjustment error
(M) (M) in the allowance level
registration F BELT GROUND Transfer belt one-turn 1 - 255 1
adjustment DIF substrate detection level
AH REG_R Toner patch 0 - 255 0 difference allowance
PATCH detection level R level
(Y) (Y) in G BIAS_CL Developing bias (for 0 - 255 60
theregistration STANDARD DIF color) reference
adjustment correction voltage
H BIAS_BK Developing bias (for 0 - 255 0
Error name Error content STANDARD DIF black) reference
F sensor adjustment PCS_F LED ADJ error correction voltage
abnormality The target is not reached by 4 times of adjust- I BIAS PATCH Toner patch making 1 - 255 60
ments. INTERVAL developing bias interval
R sensor adjustment PCS_R LED ADJ error J Y_PAT TARGET ID Process control target 1 - 255 40
abnormality The target is not reached by 4 times of density level (yellow)
adjustments. K M_PAT TARGET ID Process control target 1 - 255 45
Color sensor PCS_F_CL_KA ADJ error density level (magenta)
adjustment The target is not reached L C_PAT TARGET ID Process control target 1 - 255 45
abnormality density level (cyan)
Substrate scan PCS_F GRND error M K_PAT TARGET ID Process control target 1 - 255 45
abnormality F The difference between the max. value and the density level (black)
min. value of the substrate detection level is
N HV BK_GROUND Black image sensor 1 - 255 60
greater than the specified value when the transfer
LIMIT adjustment error
belt rotates 2 turn
allowance level
Substrate scan PCS_R GRND error
abnormality R The difference between the max. value and the
min. value of the substrate detection level is
belt rotates 2 turn
Registration sensor REG_F LED ADJ error
F adjustment The target is not reached by 4 times of adjust-
abnormality ments
Registration sensor REG_R LED ADJ error
R adjustment The target is not reached by 4 times of adjust-
abnormality ments
Registration REG_F GRND error
substrate F scan The difference between the max. value and the
abnormality min. value of the substrate detection level is
belt rotates 2 turn
44-6
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the high density process
control forcibly.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
In case of a normal completion, the result is saved.
In case of an abnormal completion, "ERROR" is displayed.
(Refer to the table below.)
In case of an ERROR, the previous correction data are saved.
Result display Content description

COMPLETE Normal complete
ERROR Abnormal end
INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption
Details of error display Content description

CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR Color image sensor adjustment abnormality
BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Black image sensor adjustment abnormality
K_HV_ERR K high density process control abnormality
C_HV_ERR C high density process control abnormality
M_HV_ERR M high density process control abnormality
Y_HV _ERR Y high density process control abnormality
TIMEOUT_ERR Time out
44-9
Purpose Operation data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the result data of the high
density process control operation.
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
Select a target display mode with [CPY/PRN], [OTHER] keys.
Default
Mode Item/Display (*: Correction value) Content Display range
value
CPY/PRN P (PROCON) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density process control mode GB: 150 - 850 GB: 630
CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** GB/DV data (KCMY) DV: 0 - 600 DV: 430
MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** (Output voltage level/base voltage level)
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
N(M) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** Medium speed print mode GB: 150 - 850 GB: 630
(NORMAL CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** GB/DV data (KCMY) DV: 0 - 600 DV: 430
(MIDDLE)) MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** (Actual output voltage level/base voltage level)
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
N(L) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** Low speed print mode GB: 150 - 850 GB: 600
(NORMAL CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** GB/DV data (KCMY) DV: 0 - 600 DV: 400
(LOW)) MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** (Actual output voltage level/base voltage level)
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
OTHER TN/TC TN HUD AREA Toner density correction humidity area 1-8 4
TN HUD DATA Toner density correction humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
TC TMP AREA Transfer correction temperature area 1-9 4
TC TMP DATA Transfer correction temperature AD value 0 - 1023 0
TC HUD AREA Transfer correction humidity area 1-9 4
TC HUD DATA Transfer correction humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
MD HUD AREA Membrane decrease correction humidity area 1-8 4
MD HUD DATA Membrane decrease correction humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
DRUM MD K STEP Drum membrane decrease correction STEP level 0-4 0
MD C STEP (KCMY)
MD M STEP
MD Y STEP
MD K DRUM COUNTER Membrane decrease drum traveling distance area 0 - 20 0
MD C DRUM COUNTER (KCMY)
MD M DRUM COUNTER
MD Y DRUM COUNTER
Default
Mode Item/Display (*: Correction value) Content Display range
value
OTHER LIFE MD K REVISE(LIFE) : L *** M *** MC grid correction voltage level (for the drum 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(LIFE) : L *** M *** membrane decrease) (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(LIFE) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LIFE) : L *** M ***
EV MD K REVISE(EV) : L *** M *** MC grid voltage correction level (for the 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(EV) : L *** M *** environment) (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(EV) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(EV) : L *** M ***
ALL MD K REVISE(ALL) : L *** M *** MC grid voltage correction level (for the drum 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(ALL) : L *** M *** membrane decrease) (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(ALL) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(ALL) : L *** M ***
LD MD K REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** Laser power correction level (for the drum 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** membrane decrease) (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
DL MD K REVISE COL (DL): L *** M *** Discharge lamp correction level (%) (for the drum 0 - 100 70
MD C REVISE COL (DL): L *** M *** membrane decrease)
MD M REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
DL EV MD K REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M *** Discharge lamp correction level (%) (for the -100 - 100 0
MD C REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M *** environment)
MD M REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M ***
CRUM DESTINATION CRUM destination (Main unit data) - -
MODEL TYPE Machine model type 0-1 0
CRUM DEST_K CRUM destination (CRUM data) - -
CRUM DEST_C
CRUM DEST_M
CRUM DEST_Y
CNT PROCON COUNT HV High density process control number of executions 0 - 99999999 0
PROCON COUNT HT Halftone process control number of executions 0 - 99999999 0
44-12 Display Default

Mode Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Operation data display PATCH n-1 High density process 0 - 255 0
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the control nth time toner
high density process control and the image patch density level 1
density sensor (registration sensor). (n=1-5)
n-2 Toner patch data nth 0 - 255 0
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop- time patch 2 (n=1-5)
ing) n-3 Toner patch data nth 0 - 255 0
Operation/Procedure time patch 3 (n=1-5)
Select a display mode with [TARGET] [PATCH] keys. n-4 Toner patch data nth 0 - 255 0
time patch 4 (n=1-5)
Display Default • BK only
Mode Item/Display Content n-5 Toner patch data nth 0 - 255 0
range value
TARGET CARB DATA Standard reflection plate 0 - 255 108 time patch 5 (n=1-5)
detection level • BK only
ADK_SL (K) Development -9.99 - 0 PATCH n-1 Toner patch data nth 0 - 255 0
characteristics gradient 9.99 time patch 1 (n=6-10)
coefficient (High density n-2 Toner patch data nth 0 - 255 0
process control time patch 2 (n=6-10)
operation) n-3 Toner patch data nth 0 - 255 0
ADK_INT(K) Development -999.9 - 0 time patch 3 (n=6-10)
characteristics intercept 999.9 n-4 Toner patch data nth 0 - 255 0
level (High density time patch 4 (n=6-10)
process control • BK only
operation 0V) n-5 Toner patch data nth 0 - 255 0
TARGET (K) High density process 0.00 - 0 time patch 5 (n=6-10)
control target density 255.00 • BK only
level (K)
TARGET High density process 0.00 - 0
(C/M/Y) control target density 255.00
level (C/M/Y)
44-14
Purpose Operation data display 44-21
Function (Purpose) Used to display the output level of the tem- Purpose Adjustment/Setup
perature and humidity sensor.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the halftone process control tar-
Section Process (OPC drum, development)/Fusing/ get.
LSU
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
The output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine
temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed. Press [EXECUTE] key.
The halftone process control target is set and the operation data
Item/Display Content Display range are displayed.
TH_UM Fusing main thermistor Temperature:
differential input level (qC) / 0 - 255qC (r1qC) Display Content
(AD value) AD value: 0-1023 COMPLETE Normal complete
TH_UM_AD1 Fusing thermistor detection Temperature: ERROR COLOR SENSOR Color image density sensor
level for compensation (qC) 0.0-255.0qC (r0.2qC) ADJUSTMENT sensitivity adjustment error
/ (AD value) AD value: 0-1023 ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black image density sensor
TH_UM_AD2 Fusing thermistor detection AD value: 0-1023 ADJUSTMENT sensitivity adjustment error
level (AD value) [YMCK] High density process control error
TH_LM Fusing thermistor A/D value Temperature: [YMCK]
(temperature qC) (Fusing 0 - 255qC (r1qC) OTHER Other errors
roller B edge) AD value: 0-1023
TH_US Fusing sub thermistor A/D Temperature:
value (temperature qC) 0 - 255qC (r1qC)
(Fusing belt) AD value: 0-1023 44-22
TEMPRATURE Process control thermistor Temperature:
detection level -40.0 - 60.0qC (r0.1qC)
Purpose Operation data display
AD value: 0-1023 Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner patch density
HUMIDITY Process control humidity Humidity: level in the halftone process control opera-
sensor detection level 5.0-90.0% (r0.1%), tion.
AD value: 0-1023
Section Process
TH1_LSU LSU thermistor detection Temperature:
level (A/D value) (qC) 5.0-60.0qC (r0.1qC) Operation/Procedure
AD value: 0-255 1) Select the display mode with [1ST STEP],[2ND STEP] key.
The toner patch density level made in the halftone process
control operation is displayed.
44-15 Item/Display Content
Purpose Setting ID_n Patch data display
(PTK: n = 1 - 24, PTC/PTM/PTY: n = 1 - 16)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the OPC drum idle rotation.
BASE1 Belt substrate data (START)
Section Process BASE5 Belt substrate data (LAST)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the scroll key.
3) Press [OK] key.
The initial value must be set unless any special change is required.
Item/ Setting Default

Content
Display range value
A TIME Idle rotation interval (time interval 0 - 255 6
between the previous OPC drum idle
rotation and the next one) setting (h)
B AREA1 Environmental area difference 0-5 2
judgment threshold value setting
(difference between the previous
OPC drum idle rotation and the
current one)
C AREA2 Environmental area conditions (AND 1 - 15 1
condition of the previous OPC drum
idle rotation and the current one)
D CYCLE Previous rotation time setting (sec) 0 - 255 0
in the process control when
recovered from power ON,
preheating/sleep mode.
The execution YES/NO of the OPC drum idle rotation is determined

by the AND condition of TIME, AREA1, and AREA 2.
To execute the OPC drum idle rotation, set item B (AREA 1) to "0,"
and item C (AREA2) to "15."
However, idle rotation is performed in a certain interval while in shut
off. This must be fully explained to the user.
44-24 Default
Setting
Purpose Operation data display range
K CMY
Function (Purpose) Used to display the correction target and B LOW FIELD Low density 0 - 255 60 60
the correction level in the halftone process UPPER LIMIT approximate
control operation. expression data upper
limit value
Section Process C MID FIELD Medium density 0 - 255 90 90
Operation/Procedure LOWER LIMIT approximate
1) Select the display category with [NEXT] key. expression data lower
limit value
2) Select a target adjustment color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
D MID FIELD Medium density 0 - 255 6 2
UPPER LIMIT approximate
Category Item/Display Content
expression data upper
Coefficient [EX-LOW] Coefficient of the limit value
approximation formula of the
E HIGHLIGHT Reference point of the 1-8 7 7
minimum density
POINT highlight correction
[LOW] Coefficient of the amount
F HIGHTLIGHT Highlight correction 0 - 128 20 20
low density
VALUE LIMIT amount limit value
[CONNECT] Coefficient of the
G MAX VALUE Maximum density value 0 - 128 20 20
approximation formula of when
LIMIT correction limit value
connecting the low density and
the medium density
[MID] Coefficient of the
44-26
medium density
[HIGH] Coefficient of the Purpose Adjustment/Setup
approximation formula of the Function (Purpose) Used to execute the halftone process con-
high density
trol compulsory.
[CONNECT POINT] Each density section
connection output ratio Section Process
Reference [SENSOR_TARGET] Halftone process control Operation/Procedure
value reference value Press [EXECUTE] key.
Correction [S_VALUE] Halftone process control
The halftone process control is performed and the operation data
value correction value
are displayed.
For printer [PRINTER_S_VALUE] Printer halftone process control
correction value
COMPLETE Normal complete
[PRINTER_BASE_ Printer halftone process control
ERROR COLOR SENSOR Color image density sensor sensitivity
DITHER_VALUE] reference dither value
ADJUSTMENT adjustment error
[PRINTER_AUTO_ Printer auto density adjustment
ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black image density sensor sensitivity
HT_VALUE] correction value
ADJUSTMENT adjustment error
Previous [BEFORE S_VALUE] Previous halftone process
[YMCK] High density process control error [YMCK]
correction control value
error
value
OTHER Other errors
44-25
44-27
Purpose Setting
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to set the calculating conditions of the
correction value for the halftone process Function (Purpose) Used to clear the correction data of the half-
tone process control.
control.
Section Process
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
2) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key on the
touch panel. The correction data of the halftone process control are cleared.
4) Press [OK] key.

required.
Default
Setting
range
K CMY
A LOW FIELD Low density 0 - 255 98 98
LOWER LIMIT approximate
expression data lower
limit value
44-28
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution
conditions.
Section Process required.
Operation/Procedure
panel.
Default
Mode Item/Display Content Setting range
value
Process control A INITIAL YES When warm-up after clearing the counter Enable 0-1 0 0
Enable/Disable NO of the OPC drum and the developer unit Disable 1
setting B SW ON When supplying the power (when Color process control 0-3 0 3
canceling power shut-off) Enable
Process control Disable 1
BK process control Enable 2
Pixel count judgment 3
C TIME After passing the specified time from Color process control 0-3 0 3
leaving READY continuously (Time can be Enable
changed by INTERVAL TIME) Process control Disable 1
Pixel count judgment 3
D HUM_LIMIT HUM judgment is made when turning ON Color process control 0-2 0 0
the power and after passing INTERVAL Enable
TIME. Process control Disable 1
E HUM The temperature and humidity inside the Color process control 0-2 0 0
machine are monitored only during a job at Enable
the interval set by the item of HUM HOUR. Process control Disable 1
When the changes in the temperature and BK process control Enable 2
the humidity are greater than the specified
level (the set value of item HUM DIF) in
comparison with the previous process
control.
F REV1 YES When the accumulated traveling distance Enable 0-1 0 0
NO of K or M OPC drum unit reaches the Inhibit 1
specified level after turning ON the power.
G REV2_BK YES When the accumulated traveling distance Enable 0-1 0 0
NO of K OPC drum unit reaches the specified Inhibit 1
level from execution of the previous
density correction.
H REV2_CL YES When the accumulated traveling distance Enable 0-1 0 0
NO of M OPC drum unit reaches the specified Inhibit 1
level from execution of the previous
density correction.
I REFRESH YES Select of YES/NO of the manual process Key operation display 0-1 0 1
MODE NO control key with key operation Key operation NO display 1
Setting of the J DAY When there is no color job from when the 0: Disable of the specified 0 - 999 0 1
execution previous color process control was days judgment
conditions of performed to when the number of days set 1 - 999: 1 - 999 days 999
the process by this item setting, perform the process passing
control control when executing the next warming
up.
K HI-COV Setting of the execution conditions of the The process control is 0-2 0 0
process control for the print ratio performed by considering
the average print ratio of
every 10 pages as the
judgment criteria.
Print ratio judgment inhibit 1
(The process control for
the target of print ratio is
not performed.)
The process control is 2
performed by considering
the average print ratio of
30 pages as the judgment
criteria in a continuous
print job of 30 or more
pages.
Default
value
Setting of the L LO-COV Setting of the execution judgment of the Enable 0-1 0 0
execution process control in continuous printing of Inhibit 1
conditions of low print ratio images
the process M TonerCA-END Setting of the process control interval Enable 0-1 0 1
control reduction when the toner cartridge Inhibit 1
remaining quantity is 25% or less (If this is
set to Enable, item M RATIO is changed.)
N AVERAGE-PAGE Setting of the number of pages of item HI- 1: 10 pages - 5: 50 pages 1-5 1 3
COV set value 2 1 step corresponds to 10 5
pages.
O LIMIT PAGE Setting of the number of connected jobs of 1: 10 pages - 10: 100 1 -10 1 10
the process control and of the limit number pages
of the process control 1 step corresponds to 10
A number of reservation jobs are pages. 10
connected. When the number of jobs
exceeds the specified number of pages
(the set value of this setting), the process
control is performed. / The process control
is performed by AND conditions of item
REV condition and the specified number of
pages (the set value of this setting).
P PIX_RATIO_BK Magnification ratio setting (%) of the BK toner count specified value 1 - 999 10
The set value of 100 corresponds to K print of A4 at the print ratio of 5%.
Q PIX_RATIO_CL Magnification ratio setting (%) of the color (CMY) toner count specified 1 - 999 10
value
The set value of 100 corresponds to K print of A4 at the print ratio of 5%.
R INTERVAL TIME Setting of the leaving time when turning ON the power (including the 1 - 255 3
sleep recovery time) (h: hour)
S HUM HOUR Interval setting of the temperature and humidity monitoring time of 1 - 24 2
"HUM" (unit: 10 minutes)
T HUM_DIF The specified value of the area difference in humidity between the level 1-9 2
at execution of the previous control and the current humidity (Applied to
item HUM)
U BK_RATIO Magnification ratio setting (%) of the specified value of the BK OPC 1 - 999 (Entry of 20 15
drum traveling distance of "REV2_BK" corresponds to
100,000mm.)
V M_RATIO Magnification ratio setting (%) of the M OPC drum traveling distance of 1 - 999 (Entry of 20 15
"REV2_CL" corresponds to
100,000mm.)
W COLOR BORDER Judgment criteria whether the BK high 0: The BK process control 0 - 999 20
density process control is individually is executed regardless of
performed or not (Setting of the ratio of the the M OPC drum traveling
M OPC drum rotation distance for the K distance.
OPC drum rotation distance (%)) 1 - 999: 1 - 999(%)
X BK ONLY Setting of the frequency of execution of the Frequency of once for 5 0-6 0 5
4-color high density process control when times
only monochrome output is continued (The Frequency of once for 1 - 5 1-5
result of this setting is applied only when times
the M OPC drum rotation distance is The 4-color high density 6
smaller than the set value of COLOR process control is always
BORDER.) performed.
Y HT_DIF HT process control execution judgment developing bias variation value 1 - 255 40
Setting of the Z RG_ON_ CL Setting of execution of the registration adjustment when executing the When the color 0 0
execution SYNC process control when turning ON the power process control is
condition of the executed.
registration ALL Executed 1
adjustment regardless of the
process control.
CL/BK When the color 2
process control
and the K process
control are
executed.
AA RG_TEMP_TIMER Time interval from registration adjustment after turning ON the power to 0 - 240 0
the next execution. (MINUTE)
AB RG_PERM_TIMER Setting of inhibit time of execution of the registration adjustment 0 - 15 1
(HOUR)
AC RG_HOUR_TIMER Setting of the interval time of execution of the registration adjustment 0 - 15 5
(Above)+(HOUR)
AD RG_BW_SYNC Setting of Enable/Disable of the Enable 0-1 0 1
registration adjustment after a Inhibit 1
monochrome job
Default
value
Setting of the AE 2TRAN_CLEAN_ Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment threshold value 1 5 - 999 200
secondary TIME1 (The total number of sheets for cleaning execution conditions) (Cleaning
transfer time: Short)
cleaning AF 2TRAN_CLEAN_ Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment threshold value 2 5 - 999 300
conditions TIME2 (The total number of sheets for cleaning execution conditions) (Cleaning
time: Medium)
AG 2TRAN_CLEAN_ Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment threshold value 3 5 - 999 500
TIME3 (The total number of sheets for cleaning execution conditions) (Cleaning
time: Long)
When REFRESH MODE setting is enabled (0), the menu of the user process control execution button is displayed on the user system setting
menu.
When the color balance or the density change is not within the allowable range, the user can perform the process control manually and forcibly.
However, toner is consumed grater than as usual. This point must be explained to the user clearly.
44-29
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the
process control during a job.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
panel.
3) Press [OK] key.

A COPY During copy job 0-2 0: No execution 2
B PRINTER During print job 1: HV only 2
C FAX During FAX print job 2: HV o HT 2
D SELF PRINT During self print 2
E CPY TO PRT TABLE Halftone process control copier - 0-1 0:CALCULA 0: Color balance calculation value (Revised every time 0
printer conversion table select TED when SIM46-74 is executed.)
1:DEFAULT 1: Default (Fixed value)
HV: High density process control

HT: Halftone process control
44-31
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the OPC drum phase. (Man-
ual adjustment)
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
For the OPC drum phase adjustment, do not use this simulation,
but use SIM50-22 (auto adjustment).
1) Select item A with scroll key.
2) Enter the value corresponding to the adjustment pattern with
10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed out.)
4) Select an adjustment pattern whose deflection is within two
scale lines on the adjustment pattern of C,M, Y colors.
5) Select item B with scroll key.
6) Enter the adjustment pattern sheet number selected in proce-
dure 4).
8) The adjusted adjustment pattern is printed.
44-37
Purpose Adjustment/Setup When the print density is varied in the continuous printing opera-
Function (Purpose) Used to set the development bias correction, this simulation is used.
tion level in the continuous printing opera-
tion.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a set target color with the touch panel.
2) Select a target item with scroll keys.
Item/Display Default value

Black CMY Black CMY Variable range
Current DV Bias voltage Low speed mode less than 300 [v] A A 0 0 0-5
Heavy paper mode 300 [v] or more, less than 450 [v] B B 0 0 (*1)
450 [v] or more C C 0 0
Middle speed mode less than 300 [v] D D 0 0
300 [v] or more, less than 450 [v] E E 0 0
450 [v] or more F F 0 0
High speed mode less than 300 [v] G - 0 -
Monochrome mode 300 [v] or more, less than 450 [v] H - 0 -
450 [v] or more I - 0 -
Time (T) from termination of Low speed mode Less than 10 [sec] & after process control JOB J G 4 4 1-12
continuous outputs to start of Heavy paper mode 10 [sec] or more, less than 60 [sec] K H 3 3
the next output operation 60 [sec] or more, less than 240 [sec] L I 1 1
240 [sec] or more M J 1 1
Middle speed mode Less than 10 [sec] & after process control JOB N K 4 4
10 [sec] or more, less than 60 [sec] O L 3 3
60 [sec] or more, less than 240 [sec] P M 1 1
240 [sec] or more Q N 1 1
High speed mode Less than 10 [sec] & after process control JOB R - 4 -
Monochrome mode 10 [sec] or more, less than 60 [sec] S - 3 -
60 [sec] or more, less than 240 [sec] T - 1 -
240 [sec] or more U - 1 -
<Use example>
(*1)
Make multi copy of 10 sheets. If the density of 10th sheet is greater than that of the first sheet, decrease the set value.
Make multi copy of 10 sheets. If the density of 10th sheet is smaller than that of the first sheet, increase the set value.
When the set value is 0 (Default), the correction level does not work.
44-43
Purpose Data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the identification informa-
tion of the developing unit.
Section Developing system
Operation/Procedure
The identification number and the identification signal level of the
developing unit are displayed.
Item/Display Content Display range NOTE

A DVCH KIND K K developing unit identification number 1-9 The model identification number of the developing unit which
B DVCH KIND C C developing unit identification number 1-9 is backed up in the EEPROM of the machine.
C DVCH KIND M M developing unit identification number 1-9
D DVCH KIND Y Y developing unit identification number 1-9
E DV_TYP_SEL_K K developing unit identification detection 0-1 0 = High (Open)
F DV_TYP_SEL_C C developing unit identification detection 0-1 1 = Low (GND)
G DV_TYP_SEL_M M developing unit identification detection 0-1
H DV_TYP_SEL_Y Y developing unit identification detection 0-1
I DVCH_AD_K K developing unit identification AD value 0 - 255 AD value of the developing unit identification voltage
J DVCH_AD_C C developing unit identification AD value 0 - 255
K DVCH_AD_M M developing unit identification AD value 0 - 255
L DVCH_AD_Y Y developing unit identification AD value 0 - 255
* The developing unit is identified by the combination of items E, F, G, H and items I, J, K, and L.
44-62
46
Purpose Setup/Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution
46-1
conditions.
Purpose Adjustment (Color copy mode)
Section Process
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy
Operation/Procedure
mode.
This simulation allows collective change in the set contents of
SIM44-4 and SIM44-28. Section
A suitable one is selected among a number of options depending Operation/Procedure
on the condition. 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
1) Select an item to be set. panel.
To change the image density in the high density area, select 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
PROCON TARGET. * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
To change the frequency of the process control operations, item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
select PROCON MODE. 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW"
Display/Item Content mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density
PROCON CL ID DOWN The densities of C, M, and Y decrease. in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the
TARGET (The C/M/Y high density process control adjustment value.
target values decrease.)
CL ID UP The densities of C, M, and Y increase.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
(The C/M/Y high density process control increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den-
target values increase.) sity is decreased.
BK ID DOWN The density of K decreases. (The high
density process control target value Setting Default
decreases.) range value
BK ID UP The density of K increases. (The high A AUTO Auto LOW 1 - 99 50
density process control target value HIGH 1 - 99 50
increases.) B TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
ALL ID DOWN The densities of C, M, Y and K decrease. HIGH 1 - 99 50
(The C/M/Y/K high density process C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
control target values decrease.) PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
ALL ID UP The densities of C, M, Y and K increase. D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
(The C/M/Y/K high density process HIGH 1 - 99 50
control target values increase.) E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
NORMAL The standard density of C, M, Y and K. HIGH 1 - 99 50
(The C/M/Y/K high density process
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
control target values are the standard
HIGH 1 - 99 50
values.)
G MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
PROCON HIGH QUALITY1 The execution frequency of the process
MODE control is high. (It is set when the color HIGH 1 - 99 50
image quality is given priority.) H LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH QUALITY2 The execution frequency of the process HIGH 1 - 99 50
control is highest. (It is set when the color I TEXT(COPY TO Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
image quality is given priority.) COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
PRINT The execution frequency of the process J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
PERFORMANCE control is low. (It is set when the job PHOTO (COPY TO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
speed is given priority.) COPY) document)
BW MODE The process control is executed in the K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
normal frequency. (It is set when there (COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
are little color jobs and many document)
monochrome jobs.) L TEXT (COLOR Text (Color tone LOW 1 - 99 50
NORMAL The process control is executed in the TONE enhancement) HIGH 1 - 99 50
normal frequency. ENHANCEMENT)
M TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
(When PROCON TARGET is selected.) PHOTO (COLOR Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
2A) Select the density level. TONE (Color tone
(When PROCON MODE is selected.) N TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
2B) Select the execution frequency of the process control. ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
4) Press [YES] key. (COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
P PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
This simulation may not function with some firmware versions. ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
In such a case, the firmware must be upgraded to the latest ver- Q MAP (COLOR Map LOW 1 - 99 50
sion. TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
R SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
Setting Default 46-4
range value
S SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50 Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode)
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image
document) send mode.
T TWO COLOR 2-color (red/ LOW 1 - 99 50
black) copy
Section
HIGH 1 - 99 50
U TWO COLOR 2-color (red/ LOW 1 - 99 50 Operation/Procedure
(COPY TO COPY) black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
(copy document) panel.
46-2 item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome copy mode) 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy
mode.
Section
Setting Default
Operation/Procedure Mode Item/Display Content
range value
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch LOW A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
panel. B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each PHOTO
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW" G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density HIGH A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
adjustment value. C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is PHOTO
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den- D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
sity is decreased. E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
Setting Default G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
range value
A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
46-5
HIGH 1 - 99 50
B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50 Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome scanner mode)
HIGH 1 - 99 50 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image
C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50 send mode.
HIGH 1 - 99 50
Section
D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/ LOW 1 - 99 50 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
Photograph HIGH 1 - 99 50 panel.
F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
HIGH 1 - 99 50 * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
HIGH 1 - 99 50
H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
I TEXT (COPY TO Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 Setting Default
PHOTO (COPY TO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50 range value
COPY) document) LOW A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50 C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
document) PHOTO
L LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50 D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
HIGH A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
PHOTO
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
46-8 46-10
Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode) Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image send mode color Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy color balance and
balance RGB. the gamma (for each color copy mode).
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] keys on the touch 1) Select an adjustment target mode with the touch panel key.
panel. 2) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the
2) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch touch panel.
panel. 3) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. panel.
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) 4) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The color balance can be adjusted separately for the low density * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
area and the high density area. item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the 5) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
target color is increased, and vice versa. When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
Default
value TEXT Text
A LOW DENSITY POINT Low density correction amount 50 TEXT/PRT PHOTO Text/Printed Photo
B HIGH DENSITY POINT High density correction amount 50 PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo
PHOTO + TEXT/PHOTO Photograph + Text/Printed Photo
MAP Map
LIGHT Light document
46-9
COPY ORG Copy document
Purpose Adjustment (RSPF mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image density. Density level
Item/Display Setting range Default value
Section (Point)
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
Operation/Procedure
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
panel. D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
This adjustment result affects the image send mode, the copy
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
mode, and the fax mode.
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
increased, and vice versa. M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
[RSPF] N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
Setting Default
Item/Display Content P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
range value
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
A COPY : LOW RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 48
B SCAN : LOW RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 48
C FAX : LOW RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 48 46-16
adjustment (Low density side) Purpose Adjustment
D COPY : HIGH RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 53
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the monochrome copy den-
adjustment (High density side)
sity and the gamma (for each monochrome
E SCAN : HIGH RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 53
copy mode).
F FAX : HIGH RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 53 Section
adjustment (high density) Operation/Procedure
panel.
Density level 46-21
(Point) Purpose Adjustment
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment (Manual
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
adjustment)
C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500 Section
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500 Operation/Procedure
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500 1) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the
G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500 touch panel.
H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500 panel.
J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500 * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500 item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500 4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500 When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500 increased, and vice versa.
Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in
the color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment
46-19 value.
Purpose Setting
Density level Default
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for the Item/Display Setting range
(Point) value
density scanning (exposure) of mono- A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
chrome auto copy mode documents. B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
Section C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
Operation/Procedure D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
Select an item to be set with touch panel.
F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
When an item is selected, it is highlighted and the setting change is G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
saved. H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
Default
Item/Display Content Set value J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
value
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE2 MODE1
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
Stop (for copy) STOP/ M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
PRESCAN N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON/OFF ON O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
Stop (for FAX) P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
Stop (for scanner) STOP/
PRESCAN
AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
setting NORMAL 46-23
SHARP Purpose Adjustment/Setup
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL/PART FULL
Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction of copy
high density section (High density tone gap
supported).
Section
MODE 1 High gamma (high contrast images)
Operation/Procedure
MODE 2 Normal gamma
STOP The image density in 3 - 7mm area at the lead edge is 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
scanned, and the output image density is determined
according to the scanned density. (The output image 0 Enable
density is even for all the surface.) 1 Inhibit
REALTIME The densities of the document width are scanned
sequentially, and the output image density is determined
according to the density in each area of document. (The
output image density may not be even for all the Setting Default
surface.) range value
PRESCAN The densities of the all surface of document are scanned A CMY 0 CMY engine highest 0-1 0
sequentially, and the output image density is determined (0: ENABLE density correction
according to the average of the scanned densities. (The 1: DISABLE) mode: Enable
output image density is even for all the surface.) 1 CMY engine highest
AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome density correction
FULL auto mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x the mode: Disable
document width. This is not related to the PRESCAN B K 0 K engine highest 0-1 1
mode. (0: ENABLE density correction
AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome 1: DISABLE) mode: Enable
PART auto mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x 1 K engine highest
100mm width. This is not related to the PRESCAN mode. density correction
mode: Disable
Setting Default 46-26
range value
C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 Purpose Adjustment
TARGET CYAN maximum density Function (Purpose) Used to reset the single color mode color
correction balance set value to the default.
Section
correction Operation/Procedure
E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
TARGET YELLOW maximum density
2) Press [YES] key.
correction
F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 The color balance value of the single color mode is reset to the
TARGET BLACK maximum density default value.
correction
46-27
* When tone gap is generated in the high density area, set items A
and B to "0". Purpose Adjustment/Setup
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma/density of copy
gap is better. images, texts, and line image edges.
* To increase the density in the high density area further, set items Section
A and B to "1". Operation/Procedure
The tone gap may occur in high density part. 1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
panel.
Do not change the values of items C, D, E, and F. If these values 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
are changed, the density in the high density area is changed.
Item/Display Setting Default
Content
46-24 (Copy mode) range value
A BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50
Purpose Adjustment
(SLOPE) gamma skew adjustment
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment B BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50
(Auto adjustment) (INTERCEPT) density adjustment
Section C COLOR TEXT Color character edge 1 - 99 50
(SLOPE) gamma skew adjustment
Operation/Procedure
D COLOR TEXT Color character edge density 1 - 99 50
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. (INTERCEPT) adjustment
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. E ED TEXT Text/Map mode gamma 1 - 99 50
(SLOPE) adjustment (Text/Map mode)
2) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table,
F ED TEXT Text/Map mode density 1 - 99 50
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode.
(INTERCEPT) adjustment (Text/Map mode)
The copy color balance automatic adjustment is performed, When the adjustment values of items A, C, and E are changed, the
then the adjustment result pattern is printed. gamma of text and line edge image density section is changed.
4) Press [OK] key. When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast of
character edge and line edge is increased. When the adjustment
The halftone correction target registration is processed.
value is decreased, the image contrast of character and line edge
is decreased.
46-25
When the adjustment values of items B, D, and F are increased,
Purpose Adjustment the image density of text and line edge section is decreased, and
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy color balance. (Sin- vice versa.
gle color copy mode)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target color with [C][M][Y] keys on the
touch panel.
panel.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the
target color is increased, and vice versa.
Default value
Item/Display Setting range
C M Y
A RED 0 - 255 0 255 200
B GREEN 0 - 255 255 0 255
C BLUE 0 - 255 255 150 0
D CYAN 0 - 255 255 0 0
E MAGENTA 0 - 255 0 255 0
F YELLOW 0 - 255 0 0 255
46-30 46-32
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the resolution in the sub Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document background
scanning direction in the copy mode. density reproducibility in the monochrome
Section auto copy mode.
1) Refer to the following table, and enter the set value corre- Operation/Procedure
sponding to the resolution mode with 10-key. 1) Select a target item of setting with scroll key on the touch
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) panel.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
range value
A SCAN Scan resolution Mode1 0-1 0 0 When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
RESOLUTION selection Mode2 1 background and the low density image is increased. When the
SW (COPY: COLOR) adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
and the low density image is decreased.
[RSPF]
Resolution in the sub scanning direction (DPI)
Scan 25-99% 100-200% 201-400% Setting Default
mode [Magnification [Magnification [Magnification range value
ratio] ratio] ratio] A COPY : OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
Mode1 OC 600 600 1200 B COPY : RSPF Copy mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
RSPF 600 600 1200 C SCAN : OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
Mode2 OC 300 600 1200 D SCAN : RSPF Scanner mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
RSPF 400 600 1200 E FAX : OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
F FAX : RSPF FAX mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
46-36
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the colors in the 2-color
copy mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
panel.
By changing the density level of each color, the color adjustment in
the 2-color copy mode can be performed.
Setting Default value Default

range C M Y value
OUTCOLOR A RED R output color 0 - 255 0 255 200 -
(Output color coefficient) B GREEN G output color 0 - 255 255 0 255 -
C BLUE B output color 0 - 255 255 150 0 -
D CYAN C output color 0 - 255 255 0 0 -
E MAGENTA M output color 0 - 255 0 255 0 -
F YELLOW Y output color 0 - 255 0 0 255 -
CHROMA A RED / BLACK Red extraction mode 0-6 - - - 3
(Chroma adjustment) (The red recognition area is adjusted.)
B KS:CHROMATIC Chromatic color extraction mode 0-6 - - - 3
(The chromatic color recognition area is adjusted.)
This is to adjust the reproduction capability of red and yellow

46-37
images when copying color documents with red and yellow images
Purpose Adjustment/Setup in the monochrome mode.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproduction capability
of monochrome mode color. Applied to the copy mode only.
Section
Setting Default
Operation/Procedure Item/Display Content
range value
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel. A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 63
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 877
4) Press [YES] key. B-Ratio Gray making setting (B)
(1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio)
* B-Ratio: The value of gray making setting (B) is obtained from Item/Display Select Default
the formula below. Content
(Copy mode) button value
1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio MANUAL COPY ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy document/ NORMAL
TEXT (-) LUT1 Text (Manual)
When [DEFAULT] key is pressed, the values are set to the initial
values (Default). NOMAL
(+) LUT1
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item A is increased,
(+) LUT2
the copy density of red images is decreased. When the adjustment
COPY ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy document/ NORMAL
value is decreased, the density is increased.
PHOTO (-) LUT1 Printed photo
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B is increased, NOMAL (Manual)
the copy density of yellow images is increased. When the adjust- (+) LUT1
ment value is decreased, the density in also decreased. (+) LUT2
LIGHT (-) LUT2 Light document NORMAL
ORIGINAL (-) LUT1 (Manual)
46-38 NOMAL
Purpose Adjustment/Setup (+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black component AUTO AUTO0 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
amount in the color copy mode. (-) LUT1 judgment 0
Section NOMAL
Operation/Procedure (+) LUT1
1) Select the AUTO MODE or the MANUAL MODE with the mode (+) LUT2
key. AUTO1 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
(-) LUT1 judgment 1
NOMAL
3) Press the black component amount select key. (+) LUT1
This adjusts black ingredient amount in the color copy mode. (+) LUT2
(except character and line image) AUTO2 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
As a result of this adjustment, the gradation of the shade part (-) LUT1 judgment 2
changes. NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
Item/Display Select Default
Content AUTO3 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
(Copy mode) button value
(-) LUT1 judgment 3
MANUAL TEXT PRT (-) LUT2 Text print NORMAL
NOMAL
(-) LUT1 (Manual)
(+) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT2
(+) LUT1
AUTO4 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT1 judgment 4
TEXT (-) LUT2 Text (Manual) NORMAL
NOMAL
(-) LUT1
(+) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT2
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT1 judgment 5
PRINTED (-) LUT2 Printed photo NORMAL
NOMAL
PHOTO (-) LUT1 (Manual)
(+) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT2
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
(-) LUT1 judgment 6
PHOTO (-) LUT2 Photograph/Text NORMAL
NOMAL
(-) LUT1 photograph
(Manual) (+) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT2
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
TEXT (-) LUT2 Text/Photograph NORMAL
PHOTO (-) LUT1 (Manual)
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
MAP (-) LUT2 Map (Manual) NORMAL
(-) LUT1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
CP ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy document/ NORMAL
TEXT PRT (-) LUT1 Text printed
NOMAL (Manual)
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
range value
A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send B EXPOSURE1 Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
images. C EXPOSURE2 Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
Section D EXPOSURE3 Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure E EXPOSURE4 Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel. F EXPOSURE5 Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
G EXECUTE AUTO Print Auto 1-6 1 1
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. MODE mode Exposure 1 (AUTO)
EXP1 2
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) EXP2 Exposure 2 3
Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large EXP3 Exposure 3 4
numeric value to decrease moire. EXP4 Exposure 4 5
EXP5 Exposure 5 6
Setting Default To check the adjustment density level of items A - F, set the docu-
range value
ment and set the setting value of item G according to items A - F,
A 200 x 100 [DPI] OFF 200 x 100 [DPI] 0-2 1
and press [EXECUTE] key.
halftone OFF
B 200 x 200 [DPI] OFF 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
halftone OFF
C 200 x 200 [DPI] ON 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1 46-42
halftone ON
D 200 x 400 [DPI] OFF 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
halftone OFF Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
E 200 x 400 [DPI] ON 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1 (Fine)
halftone ON Section
F 400 x 400 [DPI] OFF 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1
Operation/Procedure
halftone OFF
G 400 x 400 [DPI] ON 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1 1) Set the document on the document table.
halftone ON 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
H 600 x 600 [DPI] OFF 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
halftone OFF
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
I 600 x 600 [DPI] ON 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1
and the scanned document image is outputted.
halftone ON
Setting Default
46-40 range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup A AUTO Fine/Automatic 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
C EXPOSURE2 Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
(Collective adjustment of all the modes)
D EXPOSURE3 Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
Section E EXPOSURE4 Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure F EXPOSURE5 Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
1) Set the document on the document table. G AUTO H_TONE Fine/Automatic/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 1/ 1 - 99 50
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key Halftone
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 2/ 1 - 99 50
and the scanned document image is outputted. Halftone
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 3/ 1 - 99 50
Setting Default Halftone
range value K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 4/ 1 - 99 50
A EXPOSURE Used to adjust the FAX send 1 - 99 50 Halftone
LEVEL(ALL) image density. (Collective L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 5/ 1 - 99 50
adjustment of all the modes) Halftone
46-41
(Normal)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the document on the document table.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
Setting Default Setting Default
range value range value
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Fine/Auto 1- 1 1 L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50
MODE EXP1 mode Fine/ 12 2 (AUTO) Exposure 5/Halftone
Exposure 1 M EXECUTE AUTO Print Super Fine/ 1- 1 1
EXP2 Fine/ 3 MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO)
Exposure 2 EXP1 Super Fine/ 2
EXP3 Fine/ 4 Exposure 1
AUTO Fine/ 7 Exposure 4
H_TONE Automatic/ EXP5 Super Fine/ 6
halftone Exposure 5
EXP1 Fine/ 8 AUTO Super Fine/ 7
H_TONE Exposure 1/ H_TONE Auto/
Halftone Halftone
EXP2 Fine/ 9 EXP1 Super Fine/ 8
H_TONE Exposure 2/ H_TONE Exposure 1/
Halftone Halftone
Halftone Halftone
H_ONE Exposure 4/ H_TONE Exposure 3/
Halftone Halftone
Halftone Halftone
EXP5 Super Fine/ 12
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu- H_TONE Exposure 5/
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L, Halftone
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
46-43
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. 46-44
(Super Fine)
Section
Operation/Procedure (Ultra fine)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Setting Default When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
range value and the scanned document image is outputted.
A AUTO Super Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 Setting Default
Exposure 1 range value
C EXPOSURE2 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 A AUTO Ultra Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50
Exposure 2 B EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 C EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
Exposure 3 D EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 E EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
Exposure 4 F EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
F EXPOSURE5 Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 G AUTO H_TONE Ultra Fine/Auto/ 1 - 99 50
Exposure 5 Halftone
G AUTO H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 H EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Auto/Halftone H_TONE Exposure 1/Halftone
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 I EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
Exposure 1/Halftone H_TONE Exposure 2/Halftone
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 J EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 K EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Super Fine/ 1 - 99 50 L EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/ 1 - 99 50
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Ultra Fine/ 1- 1 1 M EXECUTE AUTO Print 600dpi/ 1- 1 1
MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO) MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO)
EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 2 EXP1 600dpi/ 2
Exposure 1 Exposure 1
AUTO Ultra Fine/ 7 AUTO 600dpi/ 7
H_TONE Auto/ H_TONE Auto/
Halftone Halftone
H_TONE Exposure 1/ H_TONE Exposure
Halftone 1/Halftone
Halftone 2/Halftone
Halftone 3/Halftone
Halftone 4/Halftone
Halftone 5/Halftone
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu- To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L, ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,
and press [EXECUTE] key. and press [EXECUTE] key.
46-45 46-47
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. Function (Purpose) Used to set the compression rate of copy
(600dpi). and scan images (JPEG).
Section Section
1) Set the document on the document table. 1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key 3) Press [OK] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set The set value is saved.
Operation Setting Default
Setting Default mode range value
range value FILLING A COPY LOW Low 0 0 (LOW)
A AUTO 600dpi/Auto 1 1 - 99 50 (COLOR) (C) compres-
B EXPOSURE1 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 (COPY sion (Color)
C EXPOSURE2 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 (COLOR MIDDLE Medium 1
mode)) compres-
D EXPOSURE3 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
sion (Color)
E EXPOSURE4 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
HIGH High 2
F EXPOSURE5 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
compres-
G AUTO H_TONE 600dpi/Auto/ 1 - 99 50
sion (Color)
Halftone 1
FILLING B COPY LOW Low 0 0 (LOW)
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 1/ 1 - 99 50
(GRAY) (G) compres-
Halftone
(COPY sion (Gray)
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 2/ 1 - 99 50 (Mono- MIDDLE Medium 1
Halftone chrome compres-
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 3/ 1 - 99 50 halftone sion (Gray)
Halftone mode)) HIGH High 2
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 4/ 1 - 99 50 compres-
Halftone sion (Gray)
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 5/ 1 - 99 50
Halftone
Operation Setting Default
Item/Display Content Density level Default
mode range value Item/Display Setting range
(Point) value
PUSH C SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 1
A POINT1 Point 1 1 - 999 500
SCAN (C) 1 compres- (MIDDLE
B POINT2 Point 2 1 - 999 500
(COLOR) sion mode 1 2)
(Scanner Low C POINT3 Point 3 1 - 999 500
(Color compres- D POINT4 Point 4 1 - 999 500
mode)) sion E POINT5 Point 5 1 - 999 500
MIDDLE Medium 1 F POINT6 Point 6 1 - 999 500
2 compres- G POINT7 Point 7 1 - 999 500
sion mode 2 H POINT8 Point 8 1 - 999 500
Medium I POINT9 Point 9 1 - 999 500
compres- J POINT10 Point 10 1 - 999 500
sion
K POINT11 Point 11 1 - 999 500
MIDDLE Medium 2
L POINT12 Point 12 1 - 999 500
3 compres-
M POINT13 Point 13 1 - 999 500
sion mode 3
High N POINT14 Point 14 1 - 999 500
compres- O POINT15 Point 15 1 - 999 500
sion P POINT16 Point 16 1 - 999 500
PUSH D SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 1 Q POINT17 Point 17 1 - 999 500
SCAN (G) 1 compres- (MIDDLE
(GRAY) sion mode 1 2)
(Scanner Low
(Mono- compres- 46-52
chrome sion
halftone
MIDDLE Medium 1
mode)) 2 compres- Function (Purpose) Used to set the gamma default for the copy
sion mode 2 mode heavy paper and the image process
Medium mode. (After execution of either SIM46-54
compres- or SIM46-51, the adjustment value is reset
sion
to the initial value.)
MIDDLE Medium 2
3 compres- Section
sion mode 3 Operation/Procedure
High 1) Select an item to be set to the default with the touch panel key.
compres-
sion To reset the adjustment values of all the items, select [ALL].
3) Press [YES] key.
46-51
46-54
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma for the copy
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the engine halftone auto-
mode heavy paper mode and the image
matic density adjustment (dither).
process mode.
Section
Section
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment mode with the touch panel key
[PAPER/DITHER]. The high density process control is started to make 48 patch
self print. (A4 (11" x 8.5") or A3 (11" x 17") paper in the paper
2) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the
feed tray is used.)
touch panel.
2) Place the 48 patch self print on the document table, and press
3) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key on the
[EXECUTE] key.
touch panel.
Scanning the 48 patch self print is started.
After scanning the 48 patch self print, the 17 patch self print is
5) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key.
automatically printed.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the self print image is out-
3) Press [OK] key.
putted.
After completion of the correction amount registration, the
When the image density is insufficient or a background copy is
screen shifts to the dither selection menu.
made in heavy paper copy, change this adjustment value to adjust
the image density. 4) Select an item (dither) to be adjusted.
Item/Display Content Color

HEAVYPAPER Copier/gamma for heavy paper
HEAVY Copier heavy paper gamma KCMY
BLACK EDGE Black edge
DITH1 Black edge K
COLOR EDGE Color edge
DITH2 Color edge KCMY
COLOR ED Color error diffusion
DITH3 Color error diffusion KCMY
B/W ED Monochrome error diffusion
DITH4 Monochrome error diffusion K
B/W 600 Monochrome dither 600dpi
DITH8 Monochrome dither K
The 48 patch self print is printed.
6) Place the 48 patch self print on the document table, and press Content Setting Default
[EXECUTE] key. Mode Item/Display
(copy mode) range value
Scanning the 48 patch self print is started. MONO A AUTO Auto OFF 0 0 (OFF)
After scanning the patch, the screen automatically shifts to the ON 1
dither selection menu. B TEXT Text OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON 1
7) After completion of the adjustment of all the density adjustment
C TEXT PRT Text print OFF 0 0 (OFF)
items (dither), press [OK] key.
ON 1
D PRINTED Printed Photo OFF 0 0 (OFF)
PHOTO ON 1
46-58 E TEXT PHOTO Text OFF 0 0 (OFF)
Purpose Adjustment/Setup photograph ON 1
F PHOTO Photograph OFF 0 0 (OFF)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the copy mode pseudo resolu-
ON 1
tion. (Smoothing process)
G MAP Map OFF 0 1 (ON)
Section ON 1
Operation/Procedure H LIGHT Light OFF 0 0 (OFF)
1) Select an item (mode) to be set with the button and the scroll document ON 1
key. I CPY TO CPY/ Text (copy OFF 0 1 (ON)
TEXT document) ON 1
J CPY TO CPY/ Text print OFF 0 0 (OFF)
3) Press [OK] key. TXT PRT (copy ON 1
1(ON): 9600 (equivalent) x 600 dpi document)
0 (OFF): 600 x 600 dpi K CPY TO CPY/ Printed Photo OFF 0 0 (OFF)
PHOTO (copy ON 1
The setting is reflected only the image edge area.
document)
Content Setting Default
Mode Item/Display
(copy mode) range value
COLOR A AUTO Auto OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
B TEXT Text OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON 1
C TEXT PRT Text print OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
D PRINTED Printed Photo OFF 0 0 (OFF)
PHOTO ON 1
E TEXT PHOTO Text OFF 0 0 (OFF)
photograph ON 1
F PHOTO Photograph OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON 1
G MAP Map OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON 1
H LIGHT Light OFF 0 0 (OFF)
document ON 1
I CPY TO CPY/ Text (copy OFF 0 1 (ON)
TEXT document) ON 1
J CPY TO CPY/ Text print OFF 0 0 (OFF)
TXT PRT (copy ON 1
document)
K CPY TO CPY/ Printed Photo OFF 0 0 (OFF)
PHOTO (copy ON 1
document)
46-59
Purpose Adjustment/Setup This adjustment is valid when SIM46-58 Pseudo resolution
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the copy mode pseudo setting is set to ON.
resolution image process adjustment. The thickness of images in the section processed by smooth-
Section ing is changed.
Operation/Procedure Positive: The image in the section processed by smoothing
1) Select the MAIN (main scanning direction) or the SUB (sub becomes thicker.
scanning direction) button. Negative: The image in the section processed by smoothing
2) Press the button of the adjustment value of the target copy becomes thinner.
mode.
Scanning direction Item (copy mode) Adjustment button Content Default value NOTE
MAIN COLOR COPY K (-)2 Color copy For BLACK 0 Main scanning direction smoothing
(-)1 fine adjustment
0 Negative (-) direction: The
(+)1 smoothing section becomes
thinner.
(+)2
Positive (+) direction: The
COLOR COPY C (-)2 Color copy For CYAN 0
smoothing section becomes
(-)1 thicker.
0
(+)1
(+)2
COLOR COPY M (-)2 Color copy For MAGENTA 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
COLOR COPY Y (-)2 Color copy For YELLOW 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
MONO COPY K (-)2 Monochrome copy For BLACK 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
COLOR PRINT K (-)2 Color print For BLACK 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
COLOR PRINT C (-)2 Color print For CYAN 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
COLOR PRINT M (-)2 Color print For MAGENTA 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
COLOR PRINT Y (-)2 Color print For YELLOW 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
MONO PRINT K (-)2 Monochrome print For BLACK 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
Scanning direction Item (copy mode) Adjustment button Content Default value NOTE
SUB COLOR COPY K (-)2 Color copy For BLACK 0 Sub scanning direction smoothing
(-)1 fine adjustment
0 Negative (-) direction: The
(+)1 smoothing section becomes
thinner.
(+)2
Positive (+) direction: The
COLOR COPY C (-)2 Color copy For CYAN 0
smoothing section becomes
(-)1 thicker.
0
(+)1
(+)2
COLOR COPY M (-)2 Color copy For MAGENTA 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
COLOR COPY Y (-)2 Color copy For YELLOW 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
MONO COPY K (-)2 Monochrome copy For BLACK 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
COLOR PRINT K (-)2 Color print For BLACK 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
COLOR PRINT C (-)2 Color print For CYAN 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
COLOR PRINT M (-)2 Color print For MAGENTA 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
COLOR PRINT Y (-)2 Color print For YELLOW 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
MONO PRINT K (-)2 Monochrome print For BLACK 0
(-)1
0
(+)1
(+)2
46-60
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness in the color
auto copy mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item with scroll keys on the touch panel.
2) Input numeric value corresponding to sharpness level (filter
process mode).
3) Press [OK] key.
This is used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode
and the smoothness (roughness) in the dark area.

A SCREEN FILTER LEVEL H Sharpness (filter) adjustment of dot pattern image in auto Strong emphasis 1 3 (Auto)
L copy mode Soft emphasis 2
AUTO Auto 3
B CPY CL AUTO FILTER SOFT Sharpness (filter) adjustment for the automatic copy mode SOFT 1 2 (CENTER)
LEVEL CENTER (Text, Printed Photo / Printed Photo images) CENTER 2
HIGH HIGH 3
C CPY PUSH AUTO SOFT Sharpness (filter) adjustment for the automatic push scan SOFT 1 2 (CENTER)
FILTER LEVEL CENTER mode (Text, Printed Photo / Printed Photo images) CENTER 2
HIGH HIGH 3
D COLOR COPY : CMY OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image in color copy OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON mode ON 1
E COLOR COPY : K OFF Soft filter applying setting to K image in color copy mode OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON ON 1
F SINGLE COLOR : CMY OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image in sigle color OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON copy mode ON 1
G 2 COLOR COPY : CMY OFF Setting of YES/NO of applying the soft filter to C/M/Y OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON images of the 2-color copy mode ON 1
H 2 COLOR COPY : K OFF Setting of YES/NO of applying the soft filter to K images of OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON the 2-color copy mode ON 1
I B/W COPY OFF Soft filter applying setting in monochrome copy mode OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON ON 1
J COLOR PUSH : RGB OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push scan color OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON mode ON 1
K B/W PUSH OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push scan OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON monochrome mode ON 1
L COLOR PRINT: CMY OFF Setting of ON/OFF of soft filter application to color print C, OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON M, Y images ON 1
M COLOR PRINT: K OFF Setting of ON/OFF of soft filter application to color print K OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON images ON 1
N B/W PRINT OFF Setting of ON/OFF of soft filter application to monochrome OFF 0 0 (OFF)
ON print images ON 1
range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup P SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the area separation recogni- [SCR 1 HIGH] adjustment: High
tion level. density dots
Q SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
Section [SCR 1 MIDDLE] adjustment: Medium
Operation/Procedure density dots
1) Select an adjustment mode. R SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
[SCR 1 LOW] adjustment: Low
density dots
panel.
S SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 15 8
3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. [SCR 2] adjustment: Dot 2
4) Press [OK] key. T SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 15 8
[SCR 3] adjustment: Dot 3
U SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
[LINE HALFTONE] adjustment: line
This must be set to the default unless any change is specially screen
required.
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly different from
the default value, image quality trouble may occur for some docu-
ments. 46-62
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the
COLOR AUTO [Color/Gray] Auto
ACS, the area separation, the background
TPP [Color/Gray] Manual (Text print)
image process, and the auto exposure
COPY(TPP) [Color/Gray] Copy document (Text print)
mode.
MONO AUTO [Monochrome] Auto
TPP [Monochrome] Manual (Text print) Section
COPY(TPP) [Monochrome] Copy document (Text Operation/Procedure
print)
panel.
Setting Default 2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
range value
3) Press [OK] key.
A SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
[TXT ON SCR] Text on dot
B SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
[LINE SCR] line screen This must be set to the default unless any change is specially
C SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0 required.
[SMALL SCR] Dot in a small area
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly different from
D SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
the default value, image quality trouble may occur for some docu-
[HIGH LPI] High line number
judgment select ments.
E SEGMENT: SWITCH Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
Setting Default
[TXT ON SCR IMAGE Text on image send Item/Display Content
range value
SEND] dots
A SW_ACS ACS judgment reference 0-1 1
F SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
area select
[BK TXT 1] adjustment: Black text
1 B TEXT_IMAGE Text/Image judgment 0-6 3
priority level adjustment
G SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
[CL TXT 1] adjustment: Color text C TEXT_BLANK Text/Blank judgment 0-6 4
1 priority level adjustment
H SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25 D HT_LV Dot area judgment 0-6 1
[BK TXT 2, CL TXT 2] adjustment: Black text threshold value
2, Color text 2 adjustment
I SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50 E AE_AREA_LV Color AE judgment target 0-6 3
[TXT ON SCR 1] adjustment: Text 1 on area adjustment
dots F AE_LV_CC AE background detection 0-8 4
J SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50 division result
[TXT ON SCR 2] adjustment: Text 2 on adjustment:
dots For color copy
K SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 15 8 G AE_LV_MC AE background detection 0-8 4
[TXT ON SCR AREA] adjustment: Detection division result
area of text on dots adjustment:
For monochrome copy
L SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 49 25
[HIGH LPI] adjustment: High line H AE_LV_CS AE background detection 0-8 4
number judgment division result
adjustment:
M SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
For color scan
[BK] adjustment: No
chrome judgment I AE_LV_MS AE background detection 0-8 4
division result
N SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
adjustment:
[CL] adjustment: Chrome
For monochrome scan
judgment
J AE_JUDGE Color AE background 0-4 0
O SEGMENT: ADJUST Detection level 1 - 99 50
_LV_L_U density threshold value
[TXT ON BG] adjustment: Text on
adjustment (lower limit)
background
K AE_JUDGE Color AE background 0 - 10 0 J COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
LV_L_O density threshold value PRINTED PHOTO (COPY Printed photo
adjustment (upper limit) TO COPY) (color copy)
L AE_JUDGE_ Color AE background 0 - 10 5 K COLOR PUSH : Text print 1-9 3
LV_C detection level TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
adjustment (chroma) L COLOR PUSH : TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1-9 3
M AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON) M COLOR PUSH : Printed photo 1-9 5
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch: OFF 1 PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
_CC For color copy N COLOR PUSH : Photograph 1-9 5
N AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON) PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH)
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch: OFF 1 O COLOR PUSH : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
_MC For mono- TEXT/PHOTO (color PUSH)
chrome copy P COLOR PUSH : MAP Map (color PUSH) 1-9 5
O AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON)
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1
_CS For color scan
P AE ON AE mode ON/ ON 0-1 0 0 (ON) 46-65
_ONOFF OFF OFF switch : OFF 1
_MS For mono- Purpose Adjustment/Setup
chrome copy Function (Purpose) Used to set the color correction table.
Q BLANK_JUDGE_ Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0
Section
LV_L adjustment (value)
R BLANK_JUDGE_ Blank judgment level 0 - 10 0 Operation/Procedure
LV_C adjustment (chroma) 1) Select an adjustment mode.
S MODE0_UNDER Mode 0 developing 0-6 0 2) Select an item (mode) to be set with the scroll key.
paper mode select
3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
T MODE1_UNDER Mode 1 developing 0-6 0
paper mode select 4) Press [OK] key.
U MODE5_UNDER Mode 5 developing 0-6 0 When the setting is changed, the color tone is changed. This func-
paper mode select tion is used to make copies of different color tone for each copy
V MODE6_UNDER Mode 6 developing 0-6 0 mode.
paper mode select
The initial value must be set unless any special change is required.
Setting Default
range value
46-63
COPY A [MANUAL] TEXT Text print 0-8 0
Purpose Adjustment/Setup PRT
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the copy low B [MANUAL] TEXT Text 0-8 0
density section. C [MANUAL] Printed 0-8 0
PRINTED PHOTO Photo
Section D [MANUAL] Photograph 0-8 1
Operation/Procedure PHOTO
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch E [MANUAL] TEXT Text 0-8 1
panel. PHOTO photograph
F [MANUAL] MAP Map 0-8 0
G [MANUAL] LIGHT Pencil 0-8 0
3) Press [OK] key. H [MANUAL] CPT Copy 0-8 0
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the TO CPT/TXT PRT document/
background and the low density image is increased. When the Text print
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background I [MANUAL] CPT Copy 0-8 0
and the low density image is decreased. TO CPT/TEXT document/
Text
Setting Default J [MANUAL] CPY Copy 0-8 0
range value TO CPY/PHOTO document/
A COLOR COPY : Text print 1-9 3 Printed
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color copy) Photo
B COLOR COPY : TEXT Text (color copy) 1-9 3 K AUTO0 Automatic 0-8 2
C COLOR COPY : Printed photo 1-9 5 mode
PRINTED PHOTO (color copy) judgment 0
D COLOR COPY : Photograph 1-9 5 L AUTO1 Automatic 0-8 2
PHOTOGRAPH (color copy) mode
judgment 1
E COLOR COPY : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
TEXT/PHOTO (color copy) M AUTO2 Automatic 0-8 3
mode
F COLOR COPY : MAP Map (color copy) 1-9 5
judgment 2
G COLOR COPY : LIGHT Light document 1-9 6
N AUTO3 Automatic 0-8 3
(color density)
mode
H COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
judgment 3
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Character print
O AUTO4 Automatic 0-8 2
(COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
mode
I COLOR COPY : TEXT Copy document, 1-9 5
judgment 4
(COPY TO COPY) Character
P AUTO5 Automatic 0-8 2
(color copy)
mode
judgment 5
Setting Default 6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjust-
Mode Item/Display Content ment (automatic adjustment) is performed and the adjustment
range value
COPY Q AUTO6 Automatic 0-8 2 result pattern is printed.
mode 7) Press [OK] key, and the halftone correction target is registered.
judgment 6
8) When [EXECUTE] key is displayed, press it.
PREVIEW A [MANUAL] TEXT Text print 0-4 0
(Preview PRT When "COMPLETED THIS PROCEDURE" is displayed, the adjust-
screen) B [MANUAL] TEXT Text 0-4 0 ment is completed.
C [MANUAL] Printed 0-4 0
PRINTED PHOTO Photo
D [MANUAL] Photograph 0-4 1 The adjustment result becomes effective only when the adjustment
PHOTO
procedure for both copy and print mode have completed success-
E [MANUAL] TEXT Text 0-4 1
fully. For example, when the copy color balance adjustment (auto-
PHOTO photograph
matic adjustment) is performed and the simulation is canceled, the
F [MANUAL] MAP Map 0-4 0
adjustment result is not effective.
G [MANUAL] LIGHT Pencil 0-4 0
H [MANUAL] CPT Copy 0-4 0
TO CPT/TXT PRT document/
Text print
I [MANUAL] CPT
TO CPT/TEXT
Copy
document/
0-4 0 48
Text
J [MANUAL] CPY Copy 0-4 0 48-1
TO CPY/PHOTO document/ Purpose Adjustment
Printed
Photo Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image magnifica-
K AUTO0 Automatic 0-4 2 tion ratio (in the main scanning direction
mode and the sub scanning direction).
judgment 0 Section
L AUTO1 Automatic 0-4 2
Operation/Procedure
mode
judgment 1 1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch
M AUTO2 Automatic 0-4 3 panel.
mode 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
judgment 2
3) Press [OK] key.
N AUTO3 Automatic 0-4 3
mode The set value is saved.
judgment 3 When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification
O AUTO4 Automatic 0-4 2 ratio is increased.
mode
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item A, C, or E corre-
judgment 4
sponds to a change of about 0.02% in the copy magnification ratio.
P AUTO5 Automatic 0-4 2
mode A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item B, D, or F corre-
judgment 5 sponds to a change of about 0.1% in the copy magnification ratio.
Q AUTO6 Automatic 0-4 2 [RSPF]
mode
judgment 6 Setting Default
range value
A CCD (MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment
46-74 (CCD)
B CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment (Auto (CCD)
adjustment)/Printer color balance adjust- C SPF (MAIN) RSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
ment (Auto adjustment) magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scan)
Section
D SPF (SUB) RSPF document front surface 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure magnification ratio adjustment
This simulation is used to perform SIM46-24 and SIM67-24 contin- (Sub scan)
uously. E SPFB (MAIN) RSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50
To perform both the copy color balance adjustment (Automatic magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scan)
adjustment) and the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic
F SPFB (SUB) RSPF document back surface 1 - 99 50
adjustment), use this simulation for efficient adjustment operations.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the high density process control is (Sub scan)
performed. Then, the copy color balance adjustment pattern is
printed.
2) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table,
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment
is performed and the adjustment result pattern is printed.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjust-
ment pattern is printed.
5) Place the printed adjustment pattern on the document table,
48-5 Mode Setting Default
Select range value
Purpose Adjustment COLOR* G POM Paper exit motor 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to correction the scan image magnifi- correction value
cation ratio (in the sub scanning direction). HEAVY H FUSER Fusing speed select 1 - 99 60
SETTING timing
Section Scanner section
HEAVY I RRM Registration motor 0 - 255 109
Operation/Procedure START speed increasing start
1) Select a target adjustment item with scroll key on the touch timing
panel. HEAVY J RRM Registration motor 0 - 255 210
END speed increasing end
timing
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value is saved. * Common items for color, monochrome, and heavy paper
When the image magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is ** Common items for color and monochrome
adjusted with SIM48-1, and a different magnification ratio is speci- The greater the correction value is, the higher the speed is, and
fied, and the image magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform vice versa. Change by ±1 corresponds to 0.1%.
this adjustment.
When there is an error in the image magnification ratio in reduction,
change the adjustment value in the high speed mode. When there 49
is an error in the image magnification ratio in enlargement, change
the adjustment value in the low speed mode.
49-1
Setting Default Purpose
range value Function (Purpose) Used to perform the firmware update.
A MR (HI) Scanner motor (High speed) 1 - 99 50
B MR(MID) Scanner motor (Reference speed) 1 - 99 50
Section
C MR(LO) Scanner motor (Low speed) 1 - 99 50 Operation/Procedure
D SPF(HI) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50 1) Save the firmware to the USB memory.
(High speed) 2) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. (Use USB I/F of the
E SPF(MID) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50 operation panel section.)
(Reference speed)
3) Select a target firmware file for update with the touch panel.
4) Select a target firmware.
Press [ALL] key to select all the Firmware collectively.
48-6 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Purpose Adjustment 6) Press [YES] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the rotation speed of each The selected firmware is updated. When the operation is nor-
motor. mally completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. When terminated
Section abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target mode with [COLOR] [MONO] Error display in
[HEAVY] keys on the touch panel. case of abnormality
CONFIG Configuration data CONF
ICU (MAIN) ICU Main section ICUM
panel.
ICU (BOOTM) ICU Boot section main ICUBM
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. ICU (BOOTCN) ICU Boot section CN ICUCN
4) Press [OK] key. ICU (SUB) ICU Sub section (ARM9) ICUS
The set value is saved. LANGUAGE Language support data LANG
When the adjustment value is increased, the speed is increased, program
and vice versa. A change of 1 in the adjustment value corresponds GRAPHIC Graphic data for L-LCD GRAPH
to a change of about 0.1% in the speed. SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD SLIST
PCL (BOOT) PCL Boot section PCLB
Mode Setting Default PCL (MAIN) PCL Main section PCLM
Select range value PCL (CONFIG) PCL Configuration data PCLC
COLOR A RRM Registration motor 1 - 99 51 PCL (PROFILE) PCL Color profile PCLP
MONO correction value PCU (BOOT) PCU Boot section PCUB
HEAVY PCU (MAIN) PCU Main section PCUM
COLOR B BTM Belt motor correction 1 - 99 47 DESK (BOOT) Desk unit boot section DESKB
MONO value DESK (MAIN) Desk unit main section DESKM
HEAVY FIN (BOOT) Inner finisher boot section FINB
COLOR C DVM_K Developing K motor 1 - 99 45 FIN (MAIN) Inner finisher main section FINM
MONO correction value SCU (BOOT) SCU Boot section SCUB
HEAVY SCU (MAIN) SCU Main section SCUM
COLOR** D FSM Fusing motor 1 - 99 44 FAX (BOOT) FAX1 Boot section FAXB
HEAVY correction value 41 FAX (MAIN) FAX1 Main section FAXM
ANIMATION Animation data ANIME
COLOR E DVM_CL Developing CL motor 1 - 99 45 WEB HELP WEB help WEBHP
HEAVY correction value EOSA Embedded OSA EOSA
COLOR* F PFM Paper transport motor 1 - 99 48
correction value
range value
Purpose
A Lead RRCA Document lead 0 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to update the operation manual in the edge edge reference
HDD. adjust- position (OC)
Section B ment RRCB-CS1 Regis- Standard 1 - 99 60
value tration Tray
Operation/Procedure
C RRCB-DSK motor Desk 1 - 99 60
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. D RRCB-LCC ON LCC 1 - 99 60
* When the USB is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGE E- E RRCB-MFT timing Manual 1 - 99 60
MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] key is adjust- paper
pressed, the display is shifted to the folder select menu 1. ment feed
2) Press the folder button of the operation manual data. (The dis- F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 60
play is shifted to the operation manual update menu.) G Image LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 40
loss area loss area setting
The current version and the update version are displayed. setting
H SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. value area adjustment
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted, and [YES] [NO] keys becomes I Void area DENA Lead edge void 1 - 99 40
active from gray out. adjust- area adjustment
J ment DENB Rear edge void 1 - 99 30
4) When [YES] key is pressed, the selected operation manual is
area adjustment
updated.
K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
When update is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis- REAR area adjustment
played. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed. L Off-center OFFSET_ OC document off- 1 - 99 50
adjust- OC center adjustment
ment
49-5 M Magnificat SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
ion ratio SPEED_ magnification ratio
Purpose correc- OC adjustment (CCD)
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the watermark update. tion
N Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
Section scanning correction value
Operation/Procedure O direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. print area value
P correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50
2) Select the button of the folder to perform the watermark value value
update.
Q DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
3) The current version and the update version are displayed. value
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. R DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
5) Press [YES] key. value
S DENB-LCC LCC correction 1 - 99 50
The selected watermark is updated.
value
T DENB-ADU ADU correction 1 - 99 50
value
U DENB-HV Heavy paper 1 - 99 50
50 correction value
A. (RRC-A) Timing from starting document scanning to specifying

50-1 the image lead edge reference is adjusted. (01.mm/step)
Purpose Adjustment * When the value is decreased, the timing is advanced. When
the value is increased, the timing is delayed.
Function (Purpose) Copy image position, image loss adjust-
ment B - F. (RRC-B) Timing of paper (registration roller ON) for the
image position on the transfer belt is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
Section
* When the value is decreased, the timing is delayed. When the
Operation/Procedure
value is increased, the timing is advanced.
G. (LEAD) The lead edge image loss amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
panel.
step)
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.
Set the items other than RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the
H. (SIDE) The side image loss amount is adjusted.
default.
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.
RRCA: Image lead edge reference position adjustment
(0.1mm/step)
LEAD: Lead edge image loss adjustment
I. (DEN-A) The paper lead edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
SIDE: Side image loss adjustment step)
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) * When the value is increased, the void is increased.
J. (DEN-B) The paper rear edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
step)
* When the value is increased, the void is increased.
K. (FRONT/REAR) The void amount on the right and left edges of
paper is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
50-5
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print lead edge image
position. (PRINTER MODE)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item (DEN-C) with scroll key on the
touch panel.
The set value is saved, and the adjustment check pattern is
printed.
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
in the standard adjustment value range.
Standard reference value: 4.0r2.0mm
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by
about 0.1mm.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
A DEN-C Used to adjust the print lead edge image 1 - 99 30 Adjustment value too align the print lead edge for the
position. printer. When the adjustment value of this item is
(PRINTER MODE) decreased by 1, the printer print start position in the paper
transport direction is shifted to the lead edge by 0.1mm.
B DEN-B Rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 30 Void amount generated at the paper rear edge. When the
adjustment value of item B (DEN-B) is decreased by 1, the
print area adjustment value in the sub scanning direction
for the paper transport direction is decreased by 0.1mm.
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area adjustment 1 - 99 20 Adjustment of the void amount generated on the left and
right edges of paper. When the adjustment value is
increased, the void amount is increased.
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 50 Fine adjustment value of each paper feed source for the
correction value adjustment value of DEN-B
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 50
correction value
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 50
correction value
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 50
correction value
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void area adjustment 1 - 99 50
correction value
I DENB-LCC LCC rear edge void aria adjustment 1 - 99 50
correction value
J DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void aria adjustment 1 - 99 55
correction value
K DENB-HV Heavy paper correction value 1 - 99 50
L MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 Adjustment pattern print conditions setting
M PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
N DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO No 1
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the adjustment
value is decreased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by about 0.1mm.
50-6
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and
the image loss. (RSPF mode)
Section RSPF
Operation/Procedure
panel.
[RSPF]
Setting Default
range value
document scan
position
adjustment (CCD)
document scan
position
adjustment (CCD)
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
setting
SIDE1
D Image FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20
loss (SIDE1) image loss amount
amount setting
E setting TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 40
SIDE1 (SIDE1) edge image loss
amount setting
G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
setting
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 40
amount setting
I OFSET_SPF1 SPF front surface 1 - 99 50
document off-
center adjustment
J OFSET_SPF2 SPF back surface 1 - 99 50
document off-
center adjustment
front surface
magnification ratio
(Sub scan)
L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document 1 - 99 50
back surface
magnification ratio
(Sub scan)
Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing

is delayed.
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
is increased.
Item E - H: When a shadow image appears on the rear edge,
increase the adjustment value to delete the shadow.
All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
50-10
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black print image magni-
fication ratio and the off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for
each paper feed section.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value NOTE

A BK-MAG Main scan print magnification ratio BK 60 - 140 110 Adjustment Item List
B MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment value (Manual paper feed) 1 - 99 50
C MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 1) 1 - 99 52
D MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 2) 1 - 99 52
E MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 3) 1 - 99 52
F MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 4) 1 - 99 52
G MAIN-LCC Print off center adjustment value (Large capacity tray) 1 - 99 52
H MAIN-ADU Print off center adjustment value (Duplex) 1 - 99 42 Adjustment Item List
If the adjustment items A - G are not properly adjusted, this

adjustment cannot be executed properly.
I SUB-MFT Registration motor ON timing Manual paper feed 1 - 99 60
J SUB-CS1 adjustment Standard cassette 1 - 99 60
K SUB-DSK DESK 1 - 99 60
L SUB-LCC LCC 1 - 99 60
M SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 60
N MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 Adjustment pattern print
O PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2 (CS1) conditions setting
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
P DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO No 1
Item A: When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set value is
decreased, the image magnification ratio is decreased.
Item B - H: When the adjustment value is increased, it is shifted to the front frame side. When the adjustment value is decreased, it is shifted to
the rear frame side.
All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change

range value
Purpose Adjustment
A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scan image off-center center adjustment
position adjustment. (The adjustment is B SPF (SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50
made separately for each scan mode.) center adjustment
Section C SPF (SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment
Operation/Procedure
panel.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image position is
shifted to the rear frame side. When the adjustment value is
decreased, it is shifted to the front frame side.
1step = 0.1mm
50-20
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Image registration adjustment (Main scan-
ning direction)
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
Setting Default value

range
A CYAN(FRONT) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction CYAN F side 1 - 199 100
B CYAN(REAR) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction CYAN R side 1 - 199 100
C MAGENTA(FRONT) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction MAGENTA F side 1 - 199 100
D MAGENTA(REAR) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction MAGENTA R side 1 - 199 100
E YELLOW(FRONT) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction YELLOW F side 1 - 199 100
F YELLOW(REAR) Registration adjustment value main scanning direction YELLOW R side 1 - 199 100
G CYAN(SUB) Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction CYAN (Black drum reference) 1 - 199 100
H MAGENTA(SUB) Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction MAGENTA (Black drum reference) 1 - 199 100
I YELLOW(SUB) Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction YELLOW (Black drum reference) 1 - 199 100
J OFFSET_C_F Registration adjustment value main scanning direction offset value CYAN (FRONT) 1 - 99 50
K OFFSET_C_R Registration adjustment value main scanning direction offset value CYAN (REAR) 1 - 99 50
L OFFSET_M_F Registration adjustment value main scanning direction offset value MAGENTA (FRONT) 1 - 99 50
M OFFSET_M_R Registration adjustment value main scanning direction offset value MAGENTA (REAR) 1 - 99 50
N OFFSET_Y_F Registration adjustment value main scanning direction offset value YELLOW (FRONT) 1 - 99 50
O OFFSET_Y_R Registration adjustment value main scanning direction offset value YELLOW (REAR) 1 - 99 50
P OFFSET_C_S Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction offset value CYAN 1 - 99 50
Q OFFSET_M_S Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction offset value MAGENTA 1 - 99 47
R OFFSET_Y_S Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction offset value YELLOW 1 - 99 48
S MULTICOUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
T PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
U DUPLEX YES Duplex print selection Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO No 1
50-22
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image registration. (Main
scan direction, sub scan direction) (Auto
adjustment)/OPC drum phase adjustment
(Auto adjustment)
Section
Operation/Procedure
The adjustment is automatically performed, and the adjust-
ment data are displayed.
The contents of the following list are mainly used by the technical
division, and are not necessary for the market.
Default
Item/Display Content Display NOTE
value
MAIN F C Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Position of writing by cyan laser is F side) 199.0
M Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Position of writing by magenta laser is F side) 199.0
Y Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Position of writing by yellow laser is F side) 199.0
MAIN R C Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Position of writing by cyan laser is R side) 199.0
M Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Position of writing by magenta laser is R side) 199.0
Y Image registration adjustment value (Main scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Position of writing by yellow laser is R side) 199.0
SUB C Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Cyan drum to black drum) 199.0
M Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Magenta drum to cyan drum) 199.0
Y Image registration adjustment value (Sub scanning 1.0 - 100
direction) (Yellow drum to magenta drum) 199.0
SKEW C Calculated result of print skew amount (Cyan) -99.9 - - If the value is plus, R is displayed to left side of
99.9 numerical value. If the value is minus, L is displayed
M Calculated result of print skew amount (magenta) -99.9 - - to left side of numerical value.
99.9 When the value is -4 - +4, "(OK)" is place at the back
Y Calculated result of print skew amount (yellow) -99.9 - - of the value. For the other cases, "(NG)" is displayed.
99.9 *1
PHASE Phase Angle step 1-8 2 Same item as SIM44-31.
adjustment 0q(1) o 45q(2) o 90q(3) o 135q(4) o 180q(5) o 225q(6)
value BK o 270q(7) o 315q(8)
o CL
Phase 2 Same item as SIM44-31. (50-sheet machine)
adjustment
value C
Phase 4
adjustment
value M
Phase 5
adjustment
value Y
Color/ Default
Item/Display Content Setting range (unit) NOTE
History value
MAIN F - REG_M_F Registration adjustment 1.0 - 199.0 (r0.1) CMY/- 100
(VALUE) correction amount main scanning
direction F
() REG_M_F (DIF) Registration value correction -199.0 - 199.0 (r0.1) CMY/- 0
amount from the previous one,
main scanning F
MAIN R - REG_M_R Registration adjustment 1.0 - 199.0 (r0.1) CMY/- 100
(VALUE) correction value, main scanning
direction R
() REG_M_R Registration value correction -199.0 - 199.0 (r0.1) CMY/- 0
(DIF) amount from the previous one,
main scanning R
SUB - REG_SUB Registration adjustment 1.0 - 199.0 (r0.1) CMY/- 100
(VALUE) correction value, sub scanning
direction
() REG_SUB (DIF) Registration value correction -199.0 - 199.0 (r0.1) CMY/- 0
amount from the previous one,
sub scanning
SKEW CMY SKEW_CLC SKEW adjustment rotating L99.9 - R99.9 (r0.1) KCMY/- 0 If the value is plus, L is
direction and the number of clicks displayed to left side of
(CMY) numerical value. If the value is
minus, R is displayed to left
side of numerical value.
When the value is -2.1 - +2.1,
"(OK)" is place at the back of
the value. For the other cases,
"(NG)" is displayed. *1
ALL_ SKEW adjustment rotating If the value is plus, L is
ROTATE direction and the number of clicks displayed to left side of
(K) numerical value. If the value is
minus, R is displayed to left
side of numerical value.
When the value is -1.6 - +1.6,
"(OK)" is place at the back of
the value. For the other cases,
"(NG)" is displayed. *2
PHASE PHASE_ADJ Phase adjustment value (1: Value 1 - 8 (r1) -/2 1 -
of this time, 2: Value of the
previous time)
Angle step 0q (1) o 45q (2) o 90q
(3) o 135q (4) o 180q (5) o 225q
(6) o 270q (7) o 315q (8)
*1: The color image skew adjustment is performed according to this display value.
When "R" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the skew adjustment screw (LSU) clockwise by the value.
When "L" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the skew adjustment screw (LSU) counterclockwise by the value.
*2: The color image skew adjustment is performed according to this display value.
When "R" is displayed at the head of the value, turn the skew adjustment screw (LSU) clockwise by the number of the value.
When "L" is displayed at the head of the value, turn the skew adjustment screw (LSU) counterclockwise by the number of the value.
At that time, the values under the decimal point are rounded.
Error displays in case of abnormal end

Error code Error display Error content Description
Forcible end error - SUSPENDED Door open end Door open during operation
- SUSPENDED CA end CA button pressed during operation
- - OFF end Unconfirmed operation during operation (Power OFF)
Basic error 1 TONNER EMPTY Toner Empty BK or ALL Color toner EMPTY detection
2 BEFOR BEHAVIOR Other condition Other condition
4 SENSOR CALIBLATION F Calibration error F The target is not reached by 3 times of retry of F or R
5 SENSOR CALIBLATION R Calibration error R
6 SENSOR CALIBLATION FR Calibration error FR
7 TIME OVER Time error No data are obtained for 90sec from data acquisition
8 PROCESS CONTROL Process control error Process control error detection
Sub scanning 10 - 47 SUB XXX XXXX XXX
adjustment error
Main scanning 50 - 88 MAIN XXX XXXX XXX
adjustment error
Others 99 OTHER 99 Other errors Other errors
50-24
Purpose (This simulation is normally not used in the
market.)
Function (Purpose) Used to display the detail data of SIM 44-2,
50-20, 21 and 22.
Section
Operation/Procedure
This simulation is mainly used by the technical division, and is not

necessary for the market.
50-27
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the image loss adjustment
of scanned images in the FAX or image
send mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment mode with [FAX] or [SCANNER]
key.
panel.
[RSPF]
FAX send A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
B amount setting OC FRONT_REAR (OC) OC side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
C TRAIL_EDGE (OC) OC rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
amount setting amount setting
E SPF SIDE1 FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss amount 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
setting
F TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
amount setting
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
H SPF SIDE2 FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss amount 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
setting
I TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
amount setting
When image send A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
mode (Except for B amount setting OC FRONT_REAR(OC) OC side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
FAX and copy) C TRAIL_EDGE(OC) OC rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
E SPF SIDE1 FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss amount 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
setting
F TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
amount setting
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
H SPF SIDE2 FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss amount 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
setting
I TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
amount setting
A-I: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is increased.
1step = 0.1mm
50-28 Item/Display Content Section
Purpose Adjustment BK-MAG MFT BK main scanning Main scanning Engine
ADJ CS1 magnification ratio direction image
Function (Purpose) Used to automatically adjust the image magnification ratio
CS2
loss, void area, image off-center, and image adjustment
ADU
magnification ratio.
CS3
Section CS4
Operation/Procedure LCC
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with
SIM50-28. RESULT Adjustment result display
* ADJ16 Print image position, image magnification ratio, void area, DATA Adjustment operation data display
off-center adjustments (Manual adjustments)
* ADJ 17 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Manual
adjustment)
* ADJ 18 Scan image off-center adjustment (Manual adjustment)
51
* ADJ 19 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image
loss (Manual adjustments)
51-1
1) Select an adjustment item with the menu button.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed. Purpose Adjustment/Setup
3) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the
secondary transport voltage.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned.
5) Press [OK] key. Section
Operation/Procedure
Item/Display Content Section 1) Select an adjustment target item with scroll key on the touch
OC ADJ MFT Document lead Image loss off- Scanner panel.
CS1 edge center sub scanning
direction image
CS2
ADU Document off- magnification ratio 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
center adjustment When the adjustment value is decreased, the transfer ON/OFF tim-
CS3
Sub scanning (Document table ing for the paper is advanced. When the adjustment value is
CS4
magnification ratio mode)
LCC increased, the timing is delayed.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the timing is changed
Item/Display Content Section by about 10ms. The setting range is -490 - +490ms.
SPF ALL SIDE1 MFT Document Image loss Scanner
Default
ADJ (Front lead edge off-center Item/Display Content
value
(RSPF) surface) sub
Document scanning A TC2 ON TIMING Secondary transfer voltage ON 50
SIDE2 CS1
off-center direction timing setting
(Back CS2
surface) Sub image B TC2 OFF TIMING Secondary transfer voltage OFF 60
ADU
scanning magnifica- timing setting
CS3
magnification ratio
CS4
tion ratio adjustment
LCC Document (RSPF
lead edge mode) 51-2
Document
off-center
Sub Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflec-
scanning tion amount) on paper by the main unit and
magnifica- the RSPF registration roller. (This adjust-
tion ratio ment is performed when there is a consid-
erable variation in the print image position
Item/Display Content Section on the paper or when paper jams frequently
SETUP/ ALL LEAD MFT Print off Print lead Engine occur.)
PRINT CS1 center edge
Section
ADJ CS2 Print lead adjustment,
edge image off- Operation/Procedure
OFFSET ADU
center 1) (When RSPF model)
CS3
(each paper
CS4 Select a target adjustment mode with [SIDE1] or [SIDE2] or
feed tray,
LCC [ENGINE] keys.
duplex
mode) 2) Select a target item to be adjusted with scroll keys.
adjustment 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
[RSPF]
Mode Display/Ite Content Setting range Default value
SIDE1 A NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH RSPF front surface document deflection - 1 - 99 50
amount adjustment value (Normal/Plain paper/
HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW RSPF front surface document deflection - 1 - 99 50
amount adjustment value (Normal/Plain paper/
LOW)
C NORMAL_THIN _HIGH RSPF front surface document deflection - 1 - 99 50
amount adjustment value (Normal/Thin paper/
HIGH)
D NORMAL_THIN _LOW RSPF front surface document deflection - 1 - 99 50
amount adjustment value (Normal/Thin paper/
LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH RSPF front surface document deflection - 1 - 99 50
amount adjustment value (Random/Plain
paper/HIGH)
F RANDOM_PLAIN _LOW RSPF front surface document deflection - 1 - 99 50
amount adjustment value (Random/Plain
paper/LOW)
G RANDOM_THIN_HIGH RSPF front surface document deflection - 1 - 99 50
amount adjustment value (Random/Thin
paper/HIGH)
H RANDOM_THIN_LOW RSPF front surface document deflection - 1 - 99 50
amount adjustment value (Random/Thin
paper/LOW)
SIDE2 A NORMAL_PLAIN_ RSPF back surface document deflection - 1 - 99 50
HIGH_1 amount adjustment value 1 (Normal/Plain
paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_ RSPF back surface document deflection - 1 - 99 50
LOW_1 amount adjustment value 1 (Normal/Plain
paper/LOW)
ENGINE A TRAY1(S) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 30
adjustment value or less
(Plain paper/Small size)
B TRAY1(L) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 30
adjustment value or above
(Plain paper/Large size)
C TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 10
(S) adjustment value or less
(Heavy paper/Small size)
D TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 10
(L) adjustment value or above
(Heavy paper/Large size)
E TRAY2(S) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 30
adjustment value or less
(Plain paper/Small size)
F TRAY2(L) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 30
adjustment value or above
(Plain paper/Large size)
G TRAY2 HEAVY PAPER Main unit cassette 2 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 10
(S) adjustment value or less
(Heavy paper/Small size)
H TRAY2 HEAVY PAPER Main unit cassette 2 (Upper stage)/deflection LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 10
(L) adjustment value or above
(Heavy paper/Large size)
I MANUAL PLAIN PAPER Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 30
(S) (Plain paper/Small size) or less
J MANUAL PLAIN PAPER Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 30
(L) (Plain paper/Large size) or above
K MANUAL HEAVY PAPER Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 10
(S) (Heavy paper/Small size) or less
L MANUAL HEAVY PAPER Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 10
(L) (Heavy paper/Large size) or above
M MANUAL OHP Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value - 1 - 99 10
(OHP)
N MANUAL ENV Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value - 1 - 99 10
(Envelope)
O ADU PLAIN PAPER (S) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 30
(Plain paper/Small size) or less
P ADU PLAIN PAPER (L) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 30
(Plain paper/Large size) or above
Q ADU HEAVY PAPER (S) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 10
(Heavy paper/Small size) or less
R ADU HEAVY PAPER (L) ADU/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 10
(Heavy paper/Large size) or above
Mode Display/Ite Content Setting range Default value
ENGINE S DESK (S) DESK/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 30
(Plain paper/Small size) or less
T DESK (L) DESK/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 30
(Plain paper/Large size) or above
U DESK HEAVY PAPER DESK/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 10
(S) (Heavy paper/Small size) or less
V DESK HEAVY PAPER DESK/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) 1 - 99 10
(L) (Heavy paper/Large size) or above
W A4LCC A4LCC/deflection adjustment value - 1 - 99 30
Note on “Large size” and “Small size”

Small size: The paper length in the transport direction is shorter than the LT size (216mm).
Large size: The paper length in the transport direction is longer than the LT size (216mm).
Adjustment value
When the adjustment value is increased, the warp amount is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the warp amount is
decreased.
(When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the stop timing is changed by 0.1mm.)
53-7
53
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the RSPF document size
53-6
width sensor.
Purpose Adjustment
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the detection level of the
Operation/Procedure
RSPF document width.
Section panel.
Operation/Procedure 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
1) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width. 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
[RSPF]
The maximum width detection level is recognized.
Setting Default
3) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the A4R width. Item/Display
range value
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. A AD_MAX Max. width position 0 - 1023 84
The A4R width detection level is recognized. B AD_P1 A4R width position 0 - 1023 509
5) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the A5R width. C AD_P2 A5R width position 0 - 1023 808
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. D AD_MIN Min. width position 0 - 1023 961

7) Open the RSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width.
8) Press [EXECUTE] key. 53-8
The minimum width detection level is recognized. Purpose Adjustment
When the above operation is nor performed normally, "ERROR" is Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document lead edge ref-
displayed and. When the above operation is completed normally, erence and the RSPF mode document
"COMPLETE" is displayed. scan position.
1 TRAYVOLMAX Tray size volume maximum value Section
2 TRAYVOLA4R Tray volume A4R size adjustment value Operation/Procedure
3 TRAYVOLA5R Tray volume A5R size adjustment value Select an adjustment item with [AUTO] [MANUAL] key.
4 TRAYVOLMIN Tray size volume minimum value <AUTO: Document lead edge reference (RRCA) adjustment>(Auto
adjustment)
1) Set a sheet of black paper of A4 or 11"x 8.5" on the document
table.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment is performed and the
adjustment value is saved.)
Setting Default
range value
MEASUREMENT Document lead edge 0-255 -
DISTANCE measurement distance (0.1mm unit)
RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50
reference position
<MANUAL: RSPF mode document scan position adjustment>

Setting Default
range value
A ADJUST RSPF mode document scan 1 - 99 5
VALUE position adjustment (Scanner
stop position adjustment)
• When the adjustment value is increased, the scanner stop posi-

tion in the RSPF mode is shifted to the right.
• When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the position is
shifted by 0.1mm.
53-9
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to set dirt detection for RSPF scan-
ning position.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an items to be set with scroll key.
Setting Default
range value
A DIRT_ALARM_SET OFF RSPF dirt alarm setting OFF 0 to 1 0 1
ON ON 1 (OFF)
B SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_SET_START OFF RSPF front surface optimum scan position detection OFF 0 to 1 0 1
ON setting (When starting) ON 1 (ON)
C SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_SET_JOB OFF RSPF front surface optimum scan position detection OFF 0 to 1 0 1
ON setting (After a job) ON 1 (ON)
D SIDEA_SCAN_POSITION_LV WEAK RSPF front surface optimum scan position detection Low 0 to 2 0 1
MIDDLE level setting Medium 1 (MIDDLE)
STRONG High 2
E OC_DIRT_LV WEAK OC dirt level setting Low 0 to 2 0 1
MIDDLE Medium 1 (MIDDLE)
STRONG High 2
F SIDEA_DIRT_ALARM_LV WEAK RSPF front surface dirt alarm level setting Low 0 to 2 0 1
MIDDLE Medium 1 (MIDDLE)
STRONG High 2
G SIDEA_DIRT_SHADING_SET OFF RSPF front surface streak delete shading setting OFF 0 to 1 0 1
ON ON 1 (ON)
55
53-10
Purpose Adjustment/Setup 55-1
Function (Purpose) RSPF dirt detection execution. Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
Section required.)
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the engine
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. control operations. (SOFT SW)
Section
Item Content Operation/Procedure
SPF SIDEA RSPF front surface dirt detection position (main scan
position 1 to 8)
"-": No dirt, A"*": Dirt
55-2
OC OC surface dirt detection position (main scan position
1 to 8) Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
"-": No dirt, "*": Dirt required.)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the scan-
ner control operation. (SOFT SW)
Section
Operation/Procedure
55-3
56
Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
required.)
56-1
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the control-
ler operation. (SOFT SW) Purpose Backup
Section Function (Purpose) Used to transport data between HDD - MFP
PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the
Operation/Procedure
PWB.)
Section
1) Select a target content of data transfer.
Purpose Adjustment/Setting
2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the special stamp text. (Taiwan
only) Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1) is executed.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
Section
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set (digit, color, type) with the scroll key. EEPROM o HDD Transfer from EEPROM to HDD
2) Enter the value corresponding to the setting item with 10-key. HDD o EEPROM Transfer from HDD to EEPROM
3) Press [OK] key.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content 56-2
range value
A 1ST DIGIT First digit (left edge) 1 - 90 1 Purpose Data backup
B 2ND DIGIT Second digit Function (Purpose) Used to backup the data in the EEPROM.
C 3RD DIGIT Third digit 32 [blank: SD Card, and HDD (including user authen-
20H]
tication data and address data) to the USB
D 4TH DIGIT Fourth digit 65 - 90
memory. (Corresponding to the device
[Alphabet:
41H("A) -
cloning and the storage backup.)
5AH("Z")] Section
E 5TH DIGIT Fifth digit 48 - 57 Operation/Procedure
[Numeral:
30H("0") -
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
39H("9")] 2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
F 6TH DIGIT Sixth digit (right <IMPORT>
edge) From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM, SD Card HDD
G COLOR K Color specification 0 0
<EXPORT>
C input 1
From EEPROM, SD Card, HDD To USB MEMORY
M 2
Y 3
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
R 4 Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed
G 5 When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
B 6 displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
H TYPE PATTERN Print Edging 0 1 (Machine with the DSK installed)
1 com- type
posing
PATTERN OR 1
2 method process 2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
type <IMPORT>
PATTERN No- 2 From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, SD Card HDD
3 delete-
<EXPORT>
compo-
sition type
From EEPROM, SD Card, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE
3) Enter the password with 10-key.
Input value 4) Press [SET] key.
Print Blank A B C E F G 5) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Input value 32 65 66 67 69 70 71 Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
Print H I J K L M N
Input value 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
<Data list outside the backup targets>
Print O P Q R T U V (EEPROM/SD Card)
Input value 79 80 81 82 84 85 86
PWB Type Content NOTE
Print W X Y Z 0 1 2 Controller Machine serial No.
Input value 87 88 89 90 48 49 50 Product key information
Various counter Copy counter/FAX
send counter etc.
Print 3 5 6 7 8 9
Trouble history
Input value 51 53 54 55 56 57
PWB Type Content NOTE 56-5
PCU Machine serial No.
Various counter Maintenance counter
Machine adjustment execute Function (Purpose) Used to import the SIM22-6 data to a USB
history memory in the TEXT format.
Trouble history Section
SCU Various counter Maintenance counter
Operation/Procedure
Trouble history
(HDD) 2) Select a kind of data to be imported.
Classifi- 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Content NOTE
cation Procedure 2) The selected data are imported.
Japanese User dictionary When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
FEP
Job end list Job end list display data
(The image send series include
the preserved job list.)
Log Job log Read from WEB is 56-6
enable. Purpose Operation data check
New N/A • Print history information
• JAM history information Function (Purpose) Used to import the SIM23-2 data to a USB
• Trouble history information memory in the TEXT format.
• Same position continuous jam Section
count value
• Charging information
Operation/Procedure
• Life information 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
Operation E-manual 2) Select a kind of data to be imported.
manual
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
56-3 56-7
Purpose Data backup Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the document filing data to Function (Purpose) Used to import the syslog data to a USB
the USB memory. memory.
Section Section
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel. 2) Select SYSLOG EXPORT to be imported.
<IMPORT> 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, SD Card, HDD
<EXPORT>
From EEPROM, SD Card, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. 60
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is 60-1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the memory operations
(read/write) of the MFP PWB.
56-4
Section
Purpose Data backup
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the JOB log data to the
USB memory.
Start the test.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Result display Description
OK Success
2) Press [JOB LOG EXPORT] key. NG Fail
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. NONE DIMM trouble
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed. INVALID Execution disable
61
61-1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the LSU polygon motor rota-
tion and laser detection.
Section LSU
Operation/Procedure
When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed.
In case of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed.
Display Content
LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG Polygon mirror rotation abnormality
LSU TESTRESULT NG: K Laser abnormality (K)
LSU TESTRESULT NG: CL Laser light emitting abnormality (C,M,Y)
61-3
Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target mode for adjustment with [COPY], [PR600/
FAX] on the touch panel.
panel.
When the laser power and the DUTY adjustment value are
increased, the print density is increased and the line width of
line images are increased.
Default value
Setting Destination
Mode Item/Display Content 26cpm 31cpm
range linkage
machine machine
COPY A LASER POWER MIDDLE (K1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/K1) 0 - 255 110 148
B LASER POWER MIDDLE (K2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/K2) 0 - 255 110 148
C LASER POWER MIDDLE (C1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/C1) 0 - 255 110 148
D LASER POWER MIDDLE (C2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/C2) 0 - 255 110 148
E LASER POWER MIDDLE (M1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/M1) 0 - 255 110 148
F LASER POWER MIDDLE (M2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/M2) 0 - 255 110 148
G LASER POWER MIDDLE (Y1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/Y1) 0 - 255 110 148
H LASER POWER MIDDLE (Y2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/Y2) 0 - 255 110 148
I LASER POWER LOW (K1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/K1) 0 - 255 141 141
J LASER POWER LOW (K2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/K2) 0 - 255 141 141
K LASER POWER LOW (C1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/C1) 0 - 255 141 141
L LASER POWER LOW (C2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/C2) 0 - 255 141 141
M LASER POWER LOW (M1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/M1) 0 - 255 141 141
N LASER POWER LOW (M2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/M2) 0 - 255 141 141
O LASER POWER LOW (Y1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/Y1) 0 - 255 141 141
P LASER POWER LOW (Y2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/Y2) 0 - 255 141 141
Q LASER POWER MIDDLE (BW1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/BW1) 0 - 255 110 148
R LASER POWER MIDDLE (BW2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/BW2) 0 - 255 110 148
S LASER POWER LOW (BW1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/BW1) 0 - 255 141 141
T LASER POWER LOW (BW2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/BW2) 0 - 255 141 141
U LASER DUTY MIDDLE (K) Laser DUTY select middle speed (K) 0 - 255 0 0 
V LASER DUTY MIDDLE (C) Laser DUTY select middle speed (C) 0 - 255 0 0 
W LASER DUTY MIDDLE (M) Laser DUTY select middle speed (M) 0 - 255 0 0 
X LASER DUTY MIDDLE (Y) Laser DUTY select middle speed (Y) 0 - 255 0 0 
Y LASER DUTY LOW (K) Laser DUTY select low speed (K) 0 - 255 0 0 
Z LASER DUTY LOW (C) Laser DUTY select low speed (C) 0 - 255 0 0 
AA LASER DUTY LOW (M) Laser DUTY select low speed (M) 0 - 255 0 0 
AB LASER DUTY LOW (Y) Laser DUTY select low speed (Y) 0 - 255 0 0 
AC LASER DUTY MIDDLE(BW) Laser DUTY select middle speed (BW) 0 - 255 0 0 
AD LASER DUTY LOW (BW) Laser DUTY select low speed (BW) 0 - 255 0 0 
PR600/FAX A LASER POWER MIDDLE (K1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/K1) 0 - 255 110 148
B LASER POWER MIDDLE (K2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/K2) 0 - 255 110 148
C LASER POWER MIDDLE (C1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/C1) 0 - 255 110 148
Default value
Setting Destination
Mode Item/Display Content 26cpm 31cpm
range linkage
machine machine
PR600/FAX D LASER POWER MIDDLE (C2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/C2) 0 - 255 110 148 ✕
E LASER POWER MIDDLE (M1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/M1) 0 - 255 110 148 ✕
F LASER POWER MIDDLE (M2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/M2) 0 - 255 110 148 ✕
G LASER POWER MIDDLE (Y1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/Y1) 0 - 255 110 148 ✕
H LASER POWER MIDDLE (Y2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/Y2) 0 - 255 110 148 ✕
I LASER POWER LOW (K1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/K1) 0 - 255 141 141 ✕
J LASER POWER LOW (K2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/K2) 0 - 255 141 141 ✕
K LASER POWER LOW (C1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/C1) 0 - 255 141 141 ✕
L LASER POWER LOW (C2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/C2) 0 - 255 141 141 ✕
M LASER POWER LOW (M1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/M1) 0 - 255 141 141 ✕
N LASER POWER LOW (M2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/M2) 0 - 255 141 141 ✕
O LASER POWER LOW (Y1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/Y1) 0 - 255 141 141 ✕
P LASER POWER LOW (Y2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/Y2) 0 - 255 141 141 ✕
Q LASER POWER MIDDLE (BW1) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/BW1) 0 - 255 110 148 ✕
R LASER POWER MIDDLE (BW2) Used to set the laser power (Middle speed/BW2) 0 - 255 110 148 ✕
S LASER POWER LOW (BW1) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/BW1) 0 - 255 141 141 ✕
T LASER POWER LOW (BW2) Used to set the laser power (Low speed/BW2) 0 - 255 141 141 ✕
U LASER DUTY MIDDLE (K) Laser DUTY select middle speed (K) 0 - 255 0 0 
V LASER DUTY MIDDLE (C) Laser DUTY select middle speed (C) 0 - 255 0 0 
W LASER DUTY MIDDLE (M) Laser DUTY select middle speed (M) 0 - 255 0 0 
X LASER DUTY MIDDLE (Y) Laser DUTY select middle speed (Y) 0 - 255 0 0 
Y LASER DUTY LOW (K) Laser DUTY select low speed (K) 0 - 255 0 0 
Z LASER DUTY LOW (C) Laser DUTY select low speed (C) 0 - 255 0 0 
AA LASER DUTY LOW (M) Laser DUTY select low speed (M) 0 - 255 0 0 
AB LASER DUTY LOW (Y) Laser DUTY select low speed (Y) 0 - 255 0 0 
AC LASER DUTY MIDDLE (BW) Laser DUTY select middle speed (BW) 0 - 255 0 0 
AD LASER DUTY LOW (BW) Laser DUTY select low speed (BW) 0 - 255 0 0 
AE LASER DUTY MIDDLE (K 1BIT) Laser DUTY select middle speed (K) 0 - 255 0 0 
AF LASER DUTY MIDDLE (C 1BIT) Laser DUTY select middle speed (C) 0 - 255 0 0 
AG LASER DUTY MIDDLE (M 1BIT) Laser DUTY select middle speed (M) 0 - 255 0 0 
AH LASER DUTY MIDDLE (Y 1BIT) Laser DUTY select middle speed (Y) 0 - 255 0 0 
AI LASER DUTY LOW (K 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed (K) 0 - 255 0 0 
AJ LASER DUTY LOW (C 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed (C) 0 - 255 0 0 
AK LASER DUTY LOW (M 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed (M) 0 - 255 0 0 
AL LASER DUTY LOW (Y 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed (Y) 0 - 255 0 0 
AM LASER DUTY MIDDLE (BW 1BIT) Laser DUTY select middle speed (BW) 0 - 255 0 0 
AN LASER DUTY LOW (BW 1BIT) Laser DUTY select low speed (BW) 0 - 255 0 0 
61-4
62
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to print the print image skew adjust-
62-1
ment pattern. (LSU unit)
Purpose Data clear
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk/SD Card.
Operation/Procedure
(HDD: Excluding the Operation manual and
1) Select a target item with scroll key on the touch panel. the watermark data) (SD Card: User data)
2) Enter the print conditions setting value with 10-key.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The print image skew adjustment pattern is printed.
Default 2) Press [YES] key.
value Used to execute the HDD/SD Card format.
A MULTICOUNT Print quantity (1-999) 1 When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
B PAPER MFT Tray 1 Manual paper feed 2 normal display.
CS1 selection 2 Paper feed tray 1 (Paper
CS2 3 Paper feed tray 2 feed tray
CS3 4 Paper feed tray 3 1)
CS4 5 Paper feed tray 4 62-2
LCC 6 LCC Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
(partial).
Section
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
* When the HDD formatting (except for the system area) is not
62-3
completed normally, "HDD FORMAT (EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA)
Purpose Operation test/check NG" is displayed.
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
(all areas).
Section 62-10
Operation/Procedure Purpose Data clear
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Function (Purpose) Used to clear the job completion list data.
2) Press [YES] key. Section
Read/write operations are performed. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
62-6
Used to delete the job log data.
Purpose Operation test/check When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the self diagnostics of the normal display.
hard disk.
Section
Operation/Procedure 62-11
1) Select the self diag area. Purpose Data clear
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing data.
The self diag operation is performed. Section
Operation/Procedure
E7-03 error occurs. If there may be a trouble in the HDD, use this
2) Press [YES] key.
simulation to cheek the HDD.
Used to delete the document filing data.
SHORT S.T Partial area diag When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
EXTENDED S.T All area diag normal display.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the

normal display.
62-12
Normal completion o "OK (RESULT:0)" is displayed.
Abnormal end o "NG (RESULT: Other than 0)" is displayed. Purpose Setting
* If the simulation cannot be executed or terminated abnormally for Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format
some reason, "ERROR" is displayed on the corresponding sec- in a hard disk trouble.
tion. Section
Operation/Procedure
62-7
2) Press [OK] key.
Purpose Operation test/check The set value is saved.
Function (Purpose) Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics When it is set to Enable, if a read error of HDD occurs in the system
error log. data storage area (FAX/device cloning data, etc.), only the system
Section data storage area is cleared.
Operation/Procedure
A 0 Enable
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1 Disable (Default)
ERROR LOG SECTOR of the SMART function is executed, and
the result is printed.
normal display. 62-13
Purpose Data clear
62-8 Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (Operation
Purpose Data clear Manual, watermark data only)
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk/SD Card. Section
(HDD: Excluding the Operation Manual, the Operation/Procedure
watermark data, and the system area) (SD 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Card: User data)
2) Press [YES] key.
Section
The operation manual data are deleted.
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. normal display.
2) Press [YES] key.
Used to execute the hard disk format.
normal display.
62-14 Display item Description Remarks
ERROR Error code (0, 1 - 14) 0: No error
Purpose Data clear CODE 1: Loop number over
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing manage- 2: The target value is
ment data. under the speci-
Section HDD fied value
Operation/Procedure 3: The gain set value is
negative.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 4: END is not asserted.
2) Press [YES] key. (Gain adjustment)
The document filing management data are cleared. 5: Reserve
At the same time, the job log data are also cleared. 6: Underflow
7: Black shading error
This simulation is executed in the following trouble cases.
8: Other error
* The document filing function does not work normally. 9: END is not asserted.
* The job log is not recorded normally. (White shading)
10: END is not asserted.
(Black shading)
11: END is not asserted.
(Light quantity
This simulation may not function with some firmware versions. correction)
In such a case, the firmware must be upgraded to the latest ver- 12: END is not asserted.
sion. 13: Register check error
(White booting/Before
gain)
14: Register check error
(Before light quantity
63 correction)
RSPF BACK First scan RSPF back
WHITE surface white reference
63-1 LEVEL 1ST level
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check RSPF BACK Second scan RSPF back
WHITE surface white reference
Function (Purpose) Used to display the shading correction
LEVEL 2ND level
result.
Section Scanner
Operation/Procedure
63-2
1) Select a target color to display with [R] [G] [B] on the touch
panel. Purpose Adjustment
[RSPF] Function (Purpose) Used to perform shading.

Section
Display item Description Remarks
ANALOG Analog gain adjustment Operation/Procedure
GAIN ODD value (odd number) 1) (When RSPF model)
ANALOG Analog gain adjustment Press [EXECUTE] key.
GAIN EVEN value (even number)
Used to perform shading.
DIGITAL Digital gain adjustment
GAIN ODD value (odd number) When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
DIGITAL Digital gain adjustment normal display.
GAIN EVEN value (even number)
SMP AVE Reference plate
ODD sampling average value
63-3
(ODD)
SMP AVE Reference plate Purpose Adjustment
EVEN sampling average value Function (Purpose) Used to perform scanner (CCD) color bal-
(EVEN) ance and gamma auto adjustment.
TARGET Target value
BLACK Black output level
Section Scanner
LEVEL Operation/Procedure
1) Place the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1)
on the reference position of the left rear frame side of the doc-
ument table.
The scanner (CCD) color balance automatic adjustment is per-
formed.
normal display.
After completion of the operation, press [RESULT] key, and the
adjustment data are displayed. At that time, the target color of data
display can be selected with [R] [G] [B] key.

63-4
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check This simulation is executed only when the copy color balance is
Function (Purpose) Used to display the SIT chart patch density. manually adjusted.
Section
B Point B target value
Operation/Procedure C Point C target value
1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to D Point D target value
the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu- E Point E target value
ment table. F Point F target value
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. G Point G target value
The patch of the SIT chart is scanned. H Point H target value
I Point I target value
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to
J Point J target value
the normal display.
K Point K target value
3) Select a data display mode. L Point L target value
M Point M target value
THROUGH GAMMA SIT chart scan data
N Point N target value
COPY GAMMA Copy mode gamma process data of the SIT chart
O Point O target value
scan data
BASE Background sampling value
SCANNER GAMMA Image send mode gamma process data of the SIT
chart scan data
SIT CHECK SIT chart scan data/Check result
Select an target display color with [R] [G] [B] keys. 63-8
63-5 Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the service target
Purpose Adjustment/Setup of the copy mode auto color balance adjust-
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color ment.
balance and gamma default setting. Section
Operation/Procedure 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key 2) Press [YES] key.
2) The scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma are set to the The service target of the copy mode automatic color balance
default. adjustment is set to the default.
The service color balance target and the color balance target
63-6 for the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check balance as the factory color balance target.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the scan level and the den-
sity level of the copy color balance adjust-
ment patch. 63-11
Section Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to set the target color balance of the
1) Set the color balance adjustment pattern sheet printed with copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
SIM46-21 on the document table. Section
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Operation/Procedure
The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned. 1) Select the target color balance with the touch panel.
Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key.
Default
value
63-7 Target DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment DEF 1
Purpose Adjustment/Setup color target in the automatic color balance
balance operation is slightly shifted to Magenta.
Function (Purpose) Used to register the service target of the When this target is selected, the color
copy mode auto color balance adjustment. balance is converted into natural gray
Section color balance by the color table in an
actual copy mode and print is made.
Operation/Procedure
DEF2 The engine color balance adjustment
1) Press [SETUP] key on the touch panel. target in the automatic color balance
2) Set the color balance adjustment pattern sheet printed with operation is slightly shifted to natural gray
SIM46-21 on the document table. color balance. When this target is
selected, the color balance is slightly
shifted to Cyan by the color table in an
The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned. actual copy mode and print is made.
4) Press [OK] key. DEF3 The engine color balance adjustment
The service target of the copy mode automatic color balance target in the automatic color balance
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When
adjustment is registered according to the patch image of the
this target is selected, the color balance is
scanned adjustment pattern sheet. converted into the color balance with
The registered color balance and the density are displayed. enhanced Cyan by the color table in an
Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key. actual copy mode and print is made.

64
64-1
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Color mode)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys.
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
Select a target print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.
The test print (self print) is performed.

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1 - 58 (Printable only 1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19, 21, 1
(1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19, 21, 22, 29) (* For details, refer to the description below.) 22, 29)
B DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A: 2,11) Setting of print dot number (M parameter) 1-255 1
(Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern 2, 11: 2-255 except above: 1-255)
C DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A: 2,11) Setting of blank dot number (N parameter) 0-255 254
(Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern2, 11: 2-255 except above: 0-255)
D DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9) Used to specify the print gradation. 1-255 255
(Pattern 9: 255 Fixed except above:1-255)
E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
F EXPOSURE THROUGH Exposure mode No process (through) 1-8 1 8
(2 - 8 IF A: 17 - 19) CHAR/PIC specification Text/Printed Photo (Pattern 17-19: 2-8 2 (STANDARD
CHAR/PRPIC Text/ Photograph except above:1-8) 3 DITHER)
CHAR Text 4
PRINT PIC Printed Photo 5
PRINT PAPER Photograph 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD DITHER Dither without correction 8
G PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2
CS1 Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1
NO selection No 1 (NO)
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 1-6 1 1
HEAVY Heavy paper 2 (PLAIN)
OHP OHP 3
ENVELOPE Envelope 4
HEAVY2 Heavy paper 2 5
GLOSSY Glossy paper 6
Print pattern of Item A

Pattern generating
Pattern No. Content NOTE
section
1 Grid pattern LSU-ASIC • When the print width is 100 or more and all colors are selected, print is made in the
three colors (CMY).
• Print is started at 4mm from the paper lead edge.
• Writing regardless of pound. The first one is fixed to LD1.
2 Dot print -
9 Each color 10% area (A4/ • Each interval is 41.86mm (989dot).
A4R) density print • If m is not in the range of 1 - 13%, it is rounded.
• K print is started at 17mm from the paper lead edge.
10 8-color belt print
11 4-color dot print (sub scan) • For every 1/4 of the sub scanning direction paper size, print is made for each color.
• When N=0, print of all the background is made in 4 colors.
17 All background (halftone) Halftone • When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
18 256 gradations pattern (IMG-ASIC rear • When all colors are selected, print is made in CMY.
(Other dither) process) • 16 gradations are printed in the main scanning direction, and feedback is made, and
the next 16 gradations are printed. (16 x 16 patch print)
• Print is made from 255 gradations, and 0-254 gradations are printed.
19 256 gradations pattern • Print is made from 255 gradations, and 0-254 gradations are printed.
(For text dither)

Pattern generating
section
21 4-point dot print (main LSU-ASIC • For every 1/4 of the main scanning direction paper size, print is made for each color.
scan) • When N=0, print of all the background is made in 4 colors.
22 Slant line LSU-ASIC
64-2
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
Section
Operation/Procedure

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1 - 58 1
(1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19, 21, 22, 29) (* For details, refer to the description below.) (Printable only 1, 2, 9 - 11, 17 - 19, 21, 22,
29)
B DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A: 2,11) Setting of print dot number (M parameter) 1-255 1
(Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern 2, 11: 2-255 except above: 1-255)
C DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A: 2,11) Setting of blank dot number 0-255 254
(N parameter) (Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern2, 11: 2-255 except above: 0-255)
D DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9) Used to specify the print gradation. 1-255 255
(Pattern 9: 255 Fixed except above:1-255)
E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
F EXPOSURE THROUGH Exposure mode No process (through) 1-8 1 8
(2 - 8 IF A: 17 - 19) CHAR/PIC specification Text/Printed Photo (Pattern 17-19: 2-8 2 (STANDARD
CHAR/PRPIC Text/ Photograph except above: 1-8) 3 DITHER)
CHAR Text 4
PRINT PIC Printed Photo 5
PRINT PAPER Photograph 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD DITHER Dither without correction 8
G PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2
CS1 Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1
NO selection No 1 (NO)
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 1-6 1 1
OHP OHP 3
ENVELOPE Envelope 4

Pattern generating
section
1 Grid pattern LSU-ASIC • When the print width is 100 or more and all colors are selected, print is made in the
three colors (CMY).
• Writing regardless of pound. The first one is fixed to LD1.
2 Dot print –
9 Each color 10% area (A4/ • Each interval is 41.86mm (989dot).
A4R) density print • If m is not in the range of 1 - 13%, it is rounded.
• K print is started at 17mm from the paper lead edge.
10 8-color belt print
11 4-color dot print (sub scan) • For every 1/4 of the sub scanning direction paper size, print is made for each color.
• When N=0, print of all the background is made in 4 colors.

Pattern generating
section
17 All background (halftone) Halftone (IMG-ASIC –
18 256 gradations pattern rear process) –
(Other dither)
19 256 gradations pattern –
(For text dither)
21 4-point dot print (main LSU-ASIC • For every 1/4 of the main scanning direction paper size, print is made for each color.
scan) • When N=0, print of all the background is made in 4 colors.
22 Slant line LSU-ASIC
64-4
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print)
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) The test print (self print) is performed.

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1-6 6
(* For details, refer to the description below.)
B DENSITY Used to specify the print gradation. 1 - 255 128
C MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray selection Manual paper feed 1 3
CS1 Tray 1 2 (CS2)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E HALFTONE LOW Halftone Low line number 0 0
HIGH High line number 1 (LOW)
F QUALITY STANDARD Image quality setting Standard 0 1
HIGHQUALITY High quality 1 (HIGHQUALITY)
FINE Fine 2
(26cpm/36cpm/31cpm(A)
machine)
G DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither Straight 0 1
CALIB correction Calibration 1 (CALIB)
H PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0 0
HEAVY Heavy paper 1

Pattern No. Content
1 256 gradations pattern (COLOR)
2 256 gradations pattern (B/W)
3 256 gradations pattern (COLOR) (Y-M-C-K continuous)
4 Halftone pattern (COLOR)
5 Halftone pattern (B/W)
6 Background dot print

64-5
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
Section
Operation/Procedure

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1-5 3
B DENSITY Print gradation specification 1 - 255 255
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1 2
CS1 selection Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E HALFTONE LOW(IMAGE) Halftone For Photo 0 3
HIGH(TEXT) For text 1 (AUTO)
GLOSSY For glossy paper 2
AUTO Auto (for photo/text) 3
F QUALITY STANDARD Image quality setting Standard (600dpi, 1bit) 0 1
HIGHQUALITY High quality (600dpi, 4bit) 1 (HIGHQUALITY)
FINE Fine (1200dpi, 1bit) 2
machine)
G DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither 0: Straight 0 1
CALIB correction 1: Calibration 1
I INTENT PERCEPTUAL Rendering indent Perceptual 0 0
COLORIMETRIC Color metric 1 (PERCEPTUAL)
SATURATION Saturation 2
J OUTPUT PROFILE SHARP Output profile Standard 0 0
STANDARD Photo image 1 (SHARP)
GRAPHICS Graphics 2
K RGB SOURCE SRGB RGB source profile SRGB 0 0
PROFILE GAMMA1.6 Gamma 1.6 1 (SRGB)
GAMMA1.8 Gamma 1.8 2
TONER SAVE For TONER SAVE 6
L GRAY COMPENSATION K Gray print method Print method K 0 0
KCMY KCMY 1 (K)
M PURE BLACK PRINT ON Black monochrome set. 0 0
OFF print not set. 1 (ON)
N TONER SAVE MODE OFF Monochrome toner not set. 0 0
ON save set. 1 (OFF)

Pattern No. Content
1 COLOR
2 B/W
3 Continuous COLOR,B/W
4 Service chart (COLOR)
5 Service chart (B/W)

64-6
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select a print color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key.

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1-2 1
B DENSITY Print gradation specification 1 - 255 255
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1 2
CS1 selection Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E HALFTONE LOW(IMAGE) Halftone For Photo 0 3
HIGH(TEXT) For text 1 (AUTO)
GLOSSY For glossy paper 2
AUTO Auto (for photo/text) 3
F QUALITY STANDARD Image quality setting Standard (600dpi, 1bit) 0 1
HIGHQUALITY High quality (600dpi, 4bit) 1 (HIGHQUALITY)
FINE Fine (1200dpi, 1bit) 2
machine)
G DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither 0: Straight 0 1
CALIB correction 1: Calibration 1 (CALIB)
I INTENT PERCEPTUAL Rendering indent Perceptual 0 0
COLORIMETRIC Color metric 1 (PERCEPTUAL)
SATURATION Saturation 2
J OUTPUT PROFILE SHARP Output profile Standard 0 0
STANDARD Photo image 1 (SHARP)
GRAPHICS Graphics 2
K RGB SOURCE SRGB RGB source profile SRGB 0 0
PROFILE GAMMA1.6 Gamma 1.6 1 (SRGB)
L GRAY COMPENSATION K Gray print method Print method K only 0 0
KCMY KCMY 1 (K)
M PURE BLACK PRINT ON Black monochrome set. 0 0
OFF print not set. 1 (ON)
N TONER SAVE MODE OFF Monochrome toner not set. 0 0
ON save set. 1 (OFF)
O CMY SIMULATION OFF CMYK simulation OFF 0 0
SWOP SWOP 1 (OFF)
EURO EURO 2
JAPAN COLOR JAPAN COLOR 3

Pattern No. Content
1 COLOR
2 B/W

64-7 65-2
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Operation check/test
Function (Purpose) Used to print the adjustment pattern of the Function (Purpose) Used to display the touch panel (LCD dis-
test print. (Self print). (The adjustment pat- play section) detection coordinates.
tern of SIM46-21 is printed.) Section
Operation/Procedure Touch the touch panel.
1) Set the print conditions. The coordinates X (horizontal direction) and Y (vertical direction) of
Select an item to be print condition with scroll keys. the touched position is displayed in real time.

;<
The adjustment pattern of SIM46-21 is printed.

Setting Default
Item/Display Content Writing
range value
A COPIES Number of print 1 - 999 1 No

B PROC YES 0 The halftone 0-1 1 Yes
ADJ process control
correction
value is

reflected.
NO 1 The halftone

process control
correction
value is not
reflected.
65-5
Purpose Operation check/test
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation panel key
65 input.
Section
Purpose Adjustment Press the keys sequentially according to the guidance displayed on
the screen.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD dis-
If the key entry is effective, the guidance for pressing the next key
play section) detection coordinates.
is displayed. When all the key entries are completed, "COMPLETE"
Section Operation panel section is displayed.
Operation/Procedure <Check target key>
Touch the center of the cross mark at the four corners of the
screen. 7 Inch LCD model
When the adjustment is completed normally, the screen shifts to 1
the simulation sub number entry menu. 2
3
In case of an error, the screen returns to the adjustment menu.
4
5
6
7
8
9
AUDIT CLEAR
0
PROGRAM
CLEAR
STOP
CLEAR ALL/RESET
START (COLOR)
START (MONO)

<Country code list>
66 JAPAN 00000000
U.S.A. 10110101
AUSTRALIA 00001001
66-1
U.K. 10110100
Purpose Setting FRANCE 00111101
Function (Purpose) Used to display the FAX-related soft SW (2 GERMANY 00000100
- 150) on the LCD to allow changing the SWEDEN 10100101
soft SW while checking with the LCD. NEWZEALAND 01111110
CHINA 00100110
Section FAX
SINGAPORE 10011100
Operation/Procedure TW 11111110
1) Enter the [SW NO] with 10-key. MIDDLEANDNEAREAST 11111101
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value of [SW NO] is SLOVAKIA 11111100
cleared. OTHER3 11111011
2) Press [DATA] button. FINLAND 00111100
NORWAY 10000010
The soft SW data entered in procedure 1) is displayed.
DENMARK 00110001
* When [SW NO] button is pressed, the display returns to the NETHERLANDS 01111011
initial screen. ITALY 01011001
3) Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with SWITZERLAND 10100110
10-key. AUSTRIA 00001010
* [1] o [0] INDONESIA 01010100
[0] o [1] THAILAND 10101001
MALAYSIA 01101100
4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
INDIA 01010011
setting is saved.
PHILIPPINES 10001001
After saving the setting, [EXECUTE] button returns to the nor- HONGKONG 01010000
mal display. RUSSIA 10111000
SOUTHAFRICA 10011111
SPAIN 10100000
66-2 PORTUGUESE 10001011
LUXEMBURG 01101001
Purpose Setting
BELGIUM 00001111
Function (Purpose) Used to enter a country code and set the CZECH 00101110
default value for the country code. HUNGARY 01010001
Section FAX GREECE 01000110
Operation/Procedure POLAND 10001010
BRAZIL 00010110
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-02, the following
screen is displayed.
* When [DEST CODE] button is pressed, the display is shifted
to the country code list screen. 66-3
* The currently set country code is displayed in the column of
Purpose Operation test/Check
"PRESENT:".
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the EEPROM
2) Enter the country code (8 digits) with 10-key([0]/[1]). The
and the SDRAM on the MODEM controller
entered country code is displayed in the column of "NEW:" and
and display the result.
[SET] key becomes active.
* When [C] key is pressed, the column of “NEW:” is cleared. Section FAX
3) When [SET] button is pressed after entering the country code, Operation/Procedure
[EXECUTE] button becomes active. The country code is dis- 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-03, the following
played in the column of "PRESENT:", and the column of screen is displayed.
"NEW:" is cleared. * Select the page of memory check item with the scroll key.
4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and 2) When the memory check item button is selected, the display is
[YES] and [NO] buttons become active. The country name is shifted to the memory check screen.
displayed on the tile line. 3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
5) When [YES] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the soft SW memory check of the selected item is started.
corresponding to the country code is initialized. 4) After completion of memory check, [EXECUTE] button returns
6) After completion of initialization of the soft SW, [EXECUTE], to the normal display and the result of memory check is dis-
[YES], and [NO] buttons become inactive. played.
Operation/Procedure (Shifting to the country page) Memory check status
* When [DEST CODE] button is pressed on the initial screen, the
NO CHECK No check
display is shifted to the country code list screen.
CHECKING During checking
Use scroll keys to select the country select page. OK Check complete OK
NG A## Check complete NG Error occurring address or data
line is displayed for each item.

Check item
66-6
Check memory item Remark
Purpose Data output/Check
1 All Memory Device Check (once) All the items are checked
once. Function (Purpose) Used to print the confidential registration
2 MFP SRAM (once) Check only once check table (BOX NO., BOX name, pass-
3 MFP SRAM (repeat) Repeat check code. (If there is no confidential registra-
4 MFP FLASH + OP.FLASH (once) Check only once tion, no print is made.)
5 MFP FLASH + OP.FLASH (repeat) Repeat check Section FAX
6 MODEM EEPROM <1> (once) Check only once in LINE1 Operation/Procedure
7 MODEM EEPROM <1> (repeat) Repeat check in LINE1
8 MODEM SDRAM <1> (once) Check only once in LINE1
confidential checkable is printed.
9 MODEM SDRAM<1>(repeat) Repeat check in LINE1
* If there is no confidential registration, no print is made even
The number in < > indicates the line. though [EXECUTE] key is pressed.
2) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.
66-4
Purpose Operation test/Check 66-7
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signals to the Purpose Data output/Check
line and the main unit speaker. (Send level: Function (Purpose) Used to output all image data saved in the
max.) image memory. (Confidential data are also
Section FAX outputted.)
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-04, the screen on the Operation/Procedure
right is displayed. (Default, left upper selected.) 1) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and all
* Use scroll keys to switch the send mode select page. image data saved in the image memory are outputted.
2) When a button of a signal to be sent is selected, it is high- 2) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
lighted and the previously set button is shifted to the normal normal display.
display.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig- 66-8
nals are sent. Purpose Operation test/Check
4) To end signal send: Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected sound mes-
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig- sages to the line and the speaker. (Send
nal send is interrupted. level: Max.)
<Signal send table> Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
NOSIGNAL 33.6 V34 31.2 V34 28.8 V34
26.4 V34 24.0 V34 21.6 V34 19.2 V34
16.8 V34 14.4 V34 12.0 V34 9.6 V34
7.2 V34 4.8 V34 2.4 V34 14.4 V33 2) When the sound message button to be sent is selected, it is
12.0 V33 14.4 V17 12.0 V17 9.6 V17 highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal
7.2 V17 9.6 V29 7.2 V29 4.8 V27t display.
2.4 V27t 0.3 FLG CED 2100 CNG 1100 <Sound message table>
0.3 V21 ANSam RINGER No RBT
NONE (Mute) PAUSE (Pause MESSAGE1 MESSAGE2
melody) (Message 1) (Message 2)
DP MAKE DP BRK NO MSG MESSAGE3 MESSAGE4 MESSAGE5 MESSAGE6
(Message 3) (Message 4) (Massage 5) (Message 6)
66-5 ALARM (Alarm) RINGER EXT.TEL.RING
(Ringing sound ER (External
(Speaker)) telephone call)
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal to the line
and the main unit speaker. (Send level: Soft
SW setting) (For the kinds of send signals,
refer to SIM66-04.)
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
* Use scroll keys to switch the send mode select page.
2) When a button of a signal to be sent is selected, it is high-
lighted and the previously set button is shifted to the normal
display.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
nals are sent.
4) To end signal send:
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and
signal send is interrupted.

66-9 66-12
Purpose Operation test/Check Purpose Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected sound message Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal at 300bps
to the line and the speaker. (Send level: to the line and the speaker. (Send level:
Soft SW setting) Soft SW setting)
* For details of sound messages, refer to * For the kings of send signals at 300bps,
the sound message table of SIM66-08. refer to SIM66-11, 300bps send signal
Section FAX table.
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-09, the following Operation/Procedure
screen is displayed. 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-12, the following
2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is screen is displayed.
highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal 2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is
display. highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and a display.
sound message is sent. 3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and a
4) To end signal send: sound message is sent.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig- 4) To end signal send:
nal send is interrupted. When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig-
nal send is interrupted.
66-10
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX and image send Purpose Setting
image data. (The confidential data are also Function (Purpose) Used to register dial numbers for SIM66-
cleared.) 14/15/16, Dial test. (Up to 20 digits can be
Section FAX registered.)
1) Press [EXECUTE] button. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] button. 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-13, the following
3) After completion of clearing, press [CA] key to reboot the
machine. * The number saved in the memory is displayed in the column
of [PRESENT:]. (If there is no data, [-------] is displayed.)
2) Enter a number with 10-key.
66-11 The entered number is displayed in the column of [NEW:].
Purpose Operation test/Check After entering 20 digits, 10-key is disabled (no response). Only
[C] key is enabled. (10-key [0] to [9], [*], [#], [C] key (back by
Function (Purpose) Used to send the selected signal at 300bps
one digit))
to the line and the speaker. (Send level:
Max.) 3) When [SET] key is pressed after completion of entry, the
entered number is displayed (registered) in the column of
Section FAX [PRESENT:]. The column of [NEW:] becomes blank.
Operation/Procedure
screen is displayed. 66-14
2) When a button of a sound message to be sent is selected, it is Purpose Adjustment
highlighted and the previously set button returns to the normal
display. Function (Purpose) Used to execute the dial pulse (10PPS)
send test and to adjust the make time.
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and a
sound message is sent. Section FAX
4) To end signal send: Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and sig- 1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-14, the following
nal send is interrupted. screen is displayed.
<300bps send signal table>
dial pulse is sent from the line in the set make time.
NO SIGNAL 11111 11110 00000
3) To end the dial test, press [EXECUTE] button again. The but-
010101 00001
ton returns to the normal display and the test is terminated.

66-15 66-21
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Check
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the dial pulse (20PPS) Function (Purpose) Used to print the selected items (system
send test and to adjust the make time. error, protocol monitor).
Section FAX Section FAX
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-15, the following 1) When an item button to be printed is selected, it is highlighted
screen is displayed. and the previously set button returns to the normal display.
2) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the 2) Press [EXECUTE] button.
dial pulse is sent from the line in the set make time. [EXECUTE] button is highlighted and printing is started.
* The dial pulse in this example is up to 20 digits registered 3) After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
with SIM66-13. normal display.
3) To end the dial test, press [EXECUTE] button again. The but-
<FAX information print content table>
ton returns to the normal display and the test is terminated.
PROTOCOL LINE 1 SYSTEM ERROR LINE 1
66-16
Purpose Adjustment 66-22
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the DTFM signal send test Purpose Setting
and to adjust the send level. Function (Purpose) Used to set the handset sound volume.
Section FAX (This simulation can be executed even
though the handset setting is set to NO.
Operation/Procedure
When, however, the handset is not
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-16, the following installed, the sound volume cannot be
screen is displayed. checked.) (Japan model only)
Section FAX
dial pulse signal is sent from the line by the setting of high/low
group of the signal send level. Operation/Procedure
3) To terminate the dial test, press [EXECUTE] button. The button 1) When the machine enters the simulation, the number of the set
sound volume is displayed. (In this example, MIDDLE is set as
returns to the normal display and the test is terminated.
the default sound volume.)
66-17 2) Use 10-key to set the handset sound volume. (0: MIN 1:MID-
DLE 2:MAX)
3) Press [EXECUTE] button to deliver the selected on-hold tone.
Function (Purpose) Used to send the DTMF signal to the line
* If, however, the handset is not installed, the sound volume
and the speaker. (Send level: Max.)
cannot be checked. Execution is possible.
Section FAX 4) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and deliv-
Operation/Procedure ery of the on-hold tone is stopped.
2) When a button of a send signal is selected, it is highlighted and Purpose Data clear
the previously set button returns to the normal display.
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAST save data.
Section FAX
nals are sent.
Operation/Procedure
4) To stop signal sending:
1) Press [EXECUTE] button.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it returns to the normal
display and signal sending is interrupted. 2) Press [YES] button.
The FAST save data are cleared.
66-18 3) After completion of memory clear, [EXECUTE] button returns
Purpose Operation test/Check to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
Function (Purpose) Used to send the DTMF signal to the line
and the speaker. (Send level: Soft SW set-
ting)
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
2) When a button of a send signal is selected, it is highlighted and
the previously set button returns to the normal display.
nals are sent.
4) To stop signal sending:
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it returns to the normal
display and signal sending is interrupted.

66-29 66-32
Purpose Clear Purpose Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the telephone book data Function (Purpose) Used to check the fixed data received from
(the one-touch registration table, the FTP/ the line and to display the result.
Desktop expansion table, the group expan- Section FAX
sion table, the program registration table,
Operation/Procedure
the interface memory box table, the meta
data, InboundRouting, and the Documen- 1) Press [EXECUTE] button to check the fixed data received from
tAdmin table). the line. At that time, [EXECUTE] button is highlighted.
Section FAX * Fixed data check procedure

Operation/Procedure • The data received from the line is checked of the following
fixed data status for minutes, then if they are in accord with
“OK” is displayed on LCD, if not “NG” is displayed.
2) Press [YES] button.
• The judgment is made in 2 minutes.
The telephone book data area cleared.
Receive speed: 300BPS
3) After completion of memory clear, [EXECUTE] button returns
Receive data: 00H
to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
Judgment data: 100byte
2) After completion of check, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display. The result is displayed as "OK" or "NG."
66-30
Function (Purpose) Used to display the TEL/LIU status change, 66-33
The display is highlighted by status change.
Section FAX
Function (Purpose) Used to execute detection of various sig-
Operation/Procedure nals with the line connected and to display
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-30, the following the detection result. When a signal is
screen is displayed. detected, the display is highlighted.
2) HS1, HS2, RHS, and EXHS are highlighted when the signal is Section FAX
detected, and displayed normally when the signal is not
Operation/Procedure
detected.
<TEL/LIU status change item description> screen is displayed.
HS1 Polarity inversion signal 2) The signal to be checked can be selected from the two
HS2 Polarity inversion signal options: "FNET" and "BT/CNG/CED/DTMF."
RHS Handset hook SW 3) When a signal is detected, "FNET" and "BUSY TONE CNG
EXHS External telephone hook SW CED DTMF" are highlighted. When a signal is not detected,
they are normally displayed.
<Signal used for signal detection check>
66-31 (When "FNET" is selected)
Purpose Setting FNET
Function (Purpose) Used to set ON/OFF the port for output to
(When "BT/CNG/CED/DTMF" is selected)
TEL/LIU.
BUSY TONE CNG CED DTMF
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure
2) Change the port setting. Purpose Operation test/Check
When a port is set to ON, the port display is highlighted. Function (Purpose) Used to execute the send test and display
3) When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the changed setting is the time required for sending image data in
reflected to the port which outputs to TEL/LIU. the test. Used to execute send test and dis-
4) To terminate the process, press [EXECUTE] button again. play. (Unit: ms)
[EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display. Section FAX
<Port which outputs to TEL/LIU> Operation/Procedure
CION MR EC S. 1) FAX send is performed.
The send time in procedure 1) is displayed.

66-36 66-43
Purpose Operation test/Check Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to check send and receive data from Function (Purpose) Used to write the adjustment value into the
the MODEM controller to the MFP control- power control installed in the FAX BOX.
ler or the data line or the command line Section FAX
individually.
Operation/Procedure
Section FAX
Operation/Procedure screen is displayed.
1) When the machine enters Simulation 66-36, the following * Use scroll keys to select the select item of the power control
screen is displayed. adjustment value.
2) Operation check 2) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and writing
Select an item to be checked on the screen. to the power control is executed. When writing is normally
<MFP controller I/F check item table> completed, "OK" is displayed. When it is failed, "NG" is dis-
played.
MFP m MDMC (DATA once) MFP o MDMC (DATA once)
3) After completion of writing, [EXECUTE] key returns to the nor-
Data line Once Data line Once
mal display.
MFP m MDMC (DATA repeat) MFP o MDMC (DATA repeat)
Data line Repeat Data line Repeat <Set range and default value of each set value>
MFP m MDMC (CMD once) MFP o MDMC (CMD once)
Item Set range Default value
Command line Once Command line Once
A CI_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 6
MFP m MDMC (CMD repeat) MFP o MDMC (CMD repeat)
B CI_CYCLE_MIN 1 to 254 10
Command line Repeat Command line Repeat
C CI_CYCLE_MAX 2 to 255 142
D CI_COUNT 2 to 15 3
E RES_3.3V_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 15
66-39 F EXHS_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 225 240
G RHS_LEVEL_JUDGE 2 to 15 2
Purpose Setting H SON_TIMEOUT 1 to 127 20
Function (Purpose) Used to check and change the destination
setting saved in EEPROM of the FAX BOX.
Section FAX
66-61
Operation/Procedure
1) When the machine enters the simulation, the currently set des- Purpose Setting
tination button is highlighted. (In the default state, JAPAN is set Function (Purpose) Used to display the FAX-related soft SW
as the destination.) (151 - 250) on the LCD to allow changing
2) Select a destination button to set the destination. (In this the soft SW while checking with the LCD.
example, USA/CANADA is selected.) The selected button is Section FAX
highlighted and the previously selected button returns to the Operation/Procedure
normal display.
1) Enter the [SW NO] with 10-key.
* When the destination button is changed, the new destination
2) Press [DATA] button.
setting is saved to EEPROM of the FAX BOX.
The soft SW data entered in procedure 1) is displayed.
<Destination setting table>
3) Enter the number corresponding to the bit to be changed with
JAPAN U.S.A/CANADA EUROPE AUSTRALIA 10-key.
CHINA ASIA&OTHERS * [1] o [0]
[0] o [1]
66-42 setting is saved.
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to rewrite the program to power con-
66-62
trol installed in the FAX BOX.
Purpose Backup
Section FAX
Function (Purpose) Used to import the FAX receive data into a
Operation/Procedure
USB memory in PDF file type.
1) Press [EXECUTE] button.[EXECUTE] button is highlighted
and YES] and [NO] buttons become active. Section FAX
2) Press [YES] button. Operation/Procedure
The power control program is rewritten. 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
3) When rewriting of the power control program is normally com- 2) Select data to be imported.
pleted, "OK" is displayed and [EXECUTE] button returns to the 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
normal display, and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out. Execute import of data selected in procedure 2).
When the operation is completed normally, [COMPLETE] is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, [ERROR] is displayed.
Error display Content

ERROR: NO USB MEMORY DEVICE No USB memory installed
ERROR: NO IMAGE DATA No image data
ERROR Other errors

67 A POINT1 1 - 999 500
B POINT2 1 - 999 500
67-17 C POINT3 1 - 999 500
Purpose Reset D POINT4 1 - 999 500
E POINT5 1 - 999 500
Function (Purpose) Printer reset
F POINT6 1 - 999 500
Section Printer G POINT7 1 - 999 500
Operation/Procedure H POINT8 1 - 999 500
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. I POINT9 1 - 999 500
J POINT10 1 - 999 500
2) Press [YES] key.
K POINT11 1 - 999 500
The set data related to the printer are initialized. (Including the
L POINT12 1 - 999 500
NIC setting.)
M POINT13 1 - 999 500
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the N POINT14 1 - 999 500
normal display. O POINT15 1 - 999 500
P POINT16 1 - 999 500
Q POINT17 1 - 999 500
67-24
Function (Purpose) Printer color balance adjustment (Auto 67-26
adjustment)
Section Printer
Function (Purpose) Used to set the target color balance of the
Operation/Procedure printer mode auto color balance adjust-
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. ment.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. Section Printer
2) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table, Operation/Procedure
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode. 1) Select the target color balance with the touch panel.
The printer color balance auto adjustment is performed, and Default
the adjustment result is printed. value
Target DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment DEF 1
4) Press [OK] key.
value target in the automatic color balance
The halftone correction target registration is processed. table operation is slightly shifted to Magenta.
select When this target is selected, the color
balance is converted into natural gray
color balance by the color table in an
67-25 actual printer mode and print is made.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup DEF2 The engine color balance adjustment
target in the automatic color balance
Function (Purpose) Printer color balance adjustment (Manual
operation is slightly shifted to natural gray
adjustment)
color balance. When this target is
Section Printer selected, the color balance is slightly
Operation/Procedure shifted to Cyan by the color table in an
actual copy mode and print is made.
1) Select an adjustment target color with [K][C][M][Y] keys on the
DEF3 The engine color balance adjustment
touch panel. target in the automatic color balance
2) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key on the operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. When
touch panel. this target is selected, the color balance is
converted into the color balance with
enhanced Cyan by the color table in an
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each actual copy mode and print is made.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in
the color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment
value.

67-27 67-33
Function (Purpose) Used to set the service target of the printer Function (Purpose) Used to change the gamma of the printer
mode auto color balance adjustment. screen.
Section Printer Section Printer
1) Press [SETUP] key on the touch panel. 1) Select a target change color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] key on the
2) Place the printed color balance adjustment pattern sheet touch panel.
printed in SIM 67-25 on the document table. 2) Select a target screen with [SCREEN] key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. 3) Select a target adjustment density level with scroll key.
The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned. 4) Enter the set value with 10-key.
4) Press [OK] key. 5) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
The service target of the printer mode auto color balance When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in
adjustment is set according to the scanned adjustment pattern the color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment
sheet patch images. value.
The registered color balance and the density are displayed.
Setting Default
Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key. Item/Display Content
range value
A POINT1 Point 1 0 - 255 128
B POINT2 Point 2 0 - 255 128
This simulation is executed only when the printer color balance is C POINT3 Point 3 0 - 255 128
manually adjusted. D POINT4 Point 4 0 - 255 128
E POINT5 Point 5 0 - 255 128
B Point B target value F POINT6 Point 6 0 - 255 128
C Point C target value G POINT7 Point 7 0 - 255 128
D Point D target value H POINT8 Point 8 0 - 255 128
E Point E target value I POINT9 Point 9 0 - 255 128
F Point F target value J POINT10 Point 10 0 - 255 128
G Point G target value K POINT11 Point 11 0 - 255 128
H Point H target value L POINT12 Point 12 0 - 255 128
I Point I target value M POINT13 Point 13 0 - 255 128
J Point J target value N POINT14 Point 14 0 - 255 128
K Point K target value O POINT15 Point 15 0 - 255 128
L Point L target value P POINT16 Point 16 0 - 255 128
M Point M target value Q POINT17 Point 17 0 - 255 128
N Point N target value
O Point O target value PCL/PS printer
BASE Background sampling value Display Content
SCREEN1 600dpi 1bit Photo
67-28 SCREEN2 600dpi 1 bit Graphics
Purpose Adjustment/Setup SCREEN3 600dpi 4 bit Photo
SCREEN4 600dpi 4 bit Graphics
Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the service target SCREEN7 B/W 600dpi 1 bit
of the printer mode auto color balance SCREEN8 B/W 600dpi 4 bit
adjustment. SCREEN10 Gloss 600dpi 4bit
Section Printer HEAVY PAPER Printer paper kind manual gamma correction
Operation/Procedure (Heavy paper)

2) Press [YES] key.
The service target of the printer mode auto color balance
adjustment is set to the default.
The service color balance target and the color balance target
for the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color
balance as the factory color balance target.
67-31
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the printer calibration value.
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
The printer calibration data (Halftone correction data) are
cleared.
(The printer color balance correction is canceled.)

67-34 67-36
Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction in the Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the low den-
printer high density section. (Support for sity section.
the high density section tone gap) Section Printer
Section Printer Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the low density images
0 Enable
are strongly reduced. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
1 Disable
low density are images are weakly reproduced.
2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) When tone gap is generated in the low density section (highlight
section), changing this adjustment value may improve the trouble.
Setting Default
range value Setting Default
A CMY 0 CMY engine highest 0-1 0 Item/Display Content
range value
(0: ENABLE density correction A A PATCH INPUT A patch input value 0 - 13 1
1: DISABLE) mode: Enable
1 CMY engine highest
density correction
mode: Disable 67-41
B K 0 K engine highest 0-1 1
(0: ENABLE density correction Purpose Adjustment/Setup
1: DISABLE) mode: Enable Function (Purpose) Used to set the threshold for judging the
1 K engine highest selected color printing or the black color
density correction printing in the black and white mode.
mode: Disable
C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
Section Printer
TARGET CYAN maximum density Operation/Procedure
correction 1) Select a set value with the scroll key.
correction 3) Press [OK] key.
E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET YELLOW maximum density Setting Default
correction range value
F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500 A C1 Mode1 : Threshold of Saturation 0 - 255 5
TARGET BLACK maximum density B V1 Mode1 : Threshold of Brightness 0 - 255 0
correction C C2 Mode2 : Threshold of Saturation 0 - 255 5
D V2 Mode2 : Threshold of Brightness 0 - 255 0
• When tone gap is generated in the high density section, set items
A and B to "0."
The density in the high density section is decreased, but tone
gap is reduced. 67-42
• To increase the density in the high density section further, set Purpose Adjustment
items A and B to "1.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gradation by increasing /
The tone gap may occur in high density part.
decreasing the selected color componet
amount or the black color component
amount in the black and white mode.
Do not change the values of items C, D, E, and F. If these values Section Printer
are changed, the density in the high density area is changed.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select Mode1 or Mode2.
2) Select an item to be set.
Mode Default
value
Black F1 Black : Light F2
(Achromatic F2 Black : Normal
MODE color) F3 Black : Dark
1
COLOR G1 Selected color : Light G2
(Selected G2 Selected color : Normal
color) G3 Selected color : Dark
Black F1 Black : Light F2
(Achromatic F2 Black : Normal
MODE color) F3 Black : Dark
2
COLOR G1 Selected color : Light G2
(Selected G2 Selected color : Normal
color) G3 Selected color : Dark

range value
Purpose Adjustment C TRAPPING: CMY 0-5 3 The greater
Function (Purpose) 2 Color mode balance adjustment CMY (PCL & (PCL, Direct the set value
DIRECTPRINT) Print) is, the
Section Printer stronger the
D TRAPPING: K K 0-5 3
Operation/Procedure (PCL & (PCL, Direct trapping is.
1) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key. DIRECTPRINT) Print) (0: OFF, (Low)
E TRAPPING: CMY (PS) 0-5 3 1<2<3<4<
2) Enter the set value with 10-keys. 5)
CMY (PS)
3) Press [OK] key. F TRAPPING: K K (PS) 0-5 0 (The target is
(PS) vector images.
There is no
Setting Default value G TRAPPING: CMY (XPS) 0-5 0
effect for the
Item/Display Content Color range C M Y CMY (XPS)
raster
H TRAPPING: K K (XPS) 0-5 0
images.)
A RED R output CMY 0 - 255 0 235 224 (XPS)
However, the
color sharpness
B GREEN G output CMY 0 - 255 180 0 241 also varies.
color
C BLUE B output CMY 0 - 255 235 159 0 67-52
color Purpose Adjustment/Setup
D CYAN C output CMY 0 - 255 182 0 25
Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the gamma of the
color
printer screen.
E MAGENTA M output CMY 0 - 255 0 271 0
color Section Printer
F YELLOW Y output CMY 0 - 255 0 0 234 Operation/Procedure
color 1) Select a target default setting mode with the touch panel.
Press [ALL] key to select all the modes.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key.
67-45 When the printer screen gamma was changed by SIM 67-33,
Purpose Adjustment/Setup SIM67-54, it is reset to the default.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the printer image filter and PCL/PS printer
trapping. Item/Display Content
Section Printer Screen HEAVYPAPER Heavy paper screen
Operation/Procedure Printer heavy paper automatic density
correction amount
1) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key. 600DPI_1BIT SCREEN1 (600dpi 1bit Photo)
2) Enter the set value. SCREEN2 (600dpi 1bit Graphics)
3) Press [OK] key. B/W SCREEN7 (600dpi 1bit Graphics)
SCREEN8 (600dpi 1bit Graphics)
Setting Default SCREEN9 (600dpi 1bit Graphics)
range value Printer B/W toner save automatic density
A SHARPNESS: Color print 0-4 2 The greater correction amount
COLOR PRINT the set value GLOSSPAPER SCREEN10 (Glossy paper screen)
B SHARPNESS: Monochrome 0-4 2 is, the
B/W PRINT print stronger the
filer
enhancement
is. The smaller
the set value
is, the
stronger the
filter
smoothness
is.
(0: Soft High,
1: Soft Low, 2:
Center, 3:
Sharp Low, 4:
Sharp High)

67-54
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Printer color balance adjustment
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
This simulation is used to adjust the color balance, the density, and
the gradation in the monochrome mode, the heavy paper mode,
the 1200dpi mode, and the 600dpi 1bit mode.
This simulation is used to improve image quality in these modes
and images.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically
selected.)
The color balance adjustment is automatically performed.
The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor-
mality.
4) Press [OK] key.
The list of the adjustment items (for each dither) is displayed.
5) Select an adjustment item (for each dither).
Select item
Content
(Mode)
Heavy Paper Adjustment item to improve the color balance in the
heavy paper mode
B/W Adjustment item to improve the density and gradation in
the monochrome mode
Glossy Adjustment item to improve the color balance in glossy
paper mode
1200dpi 1bit Adjustment item to improve the color balance in 1200dpi
mode
6) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically

selected.)
The color balance adjustment is automatically performed, and
the color balance check patch image is printed out.
9) When [OK] key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered
and the adjustment mode is terminated. When [EXECUTE]
key is pressed, the adjustment result is registered and the
screen is shifted to the other item (Mode/Image) select menu.
To execute the adjustment of the other item (Mode/Image),
After completion of all the adjustments of the items (Mode/
Image), press [OK] key, and the adjustment results are regis-
tered.
10) Make a print, and check the print image quality.
Use SIM67-52 to reset the adjustment values to the default values.

MX-3115N
[7] TROUBLESHOOTING D. Self diag operation

6HUYLFH0DQXDO
The machine always monitors its own state.
When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and
1. Error code and troubleshooting displays the trouble message.
A. General A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consum- nearly expired or is expired.
able part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or
detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user may not be stopped.
and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble, The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by
this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the the LCD and lamp.
machine to minimize the damage. Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trou-
B. Function and purpose ble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simula-
tion.
1) Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a
Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically
trouble.)
cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning mes-
2) The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is sages must be cleared by a simulation.
stopped on detection of a trouble.)
3) By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be
quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair, Monitors the machine
conditions.
improving the repair efficiency.)
4) Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows
to arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This Detects/analyzes
avoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a con- the content.
sumable part.)
C. Self diag message kinds

Warning
࠙࣬
The self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below. Trouble/Warning
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
Class 1 User Warning of troubles which can be recovered by the

user. (Paper jam, consumable part life expiration, Trouble
Πρήσ
etc.)
Service Warning of troubles which can be recovered only by
൲ै೪গ
The machine is stopped.
a serviceman. (Motor trouble, maintenance, etc.)
Others -
Class 2 Warning Warning to the user, not a machine trouble
(Preliminary warning of life expiration of a ඤယͬນা
The content is displayed.
consumable part, etc.)
Trouble Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is
stopped.
Others - Warning No
࠙࣬ A consumable OP
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
Trouble/Warning part has reached
its lifetime
Trouble
Πρήσ ZFT
YES
Replace or supply
Troubleshoot
ະၻࡔ֦ͬ಺औ the cause. ક࿍ΩȜΜ࢐۟¦༞‫ݯ‬
the consumable part.
ਘၑ
Repair
Cancel the self-diagnostic

ΘͼͺΈȪΞΑΠ΋ζϋΡȫ
message with the
൝ͤ͢ͅুࡨ૷౯ιΛΓȜΐ
diagnostic (test
ٜੰcommands).
Reset
໘‫ܦ‬
Standby
ఞ‫ેܥ‬ఠ state
MX-3115N TROUBLESHOOTING 7 – 1
E. Breakdown sequence
(1) Error code and operatable mode
Operatable mode
Judg- Copy scan FAST
Scan-
Trouble content ment Trouble code (including Scan Scan List FAX FAX Notifi-
To Print
block interrup- (Push) (Pull) print Send print cation to
HDD
tion) host
FAX board • FAX board MFP F6 (00, 01, 04,       – – –
trouble breakdown 21, 30, 97, 98)
HDD trouble • SD card E7 (07) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
breakdown
• HDD breakdown E7 (03) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
• HDD-ASIC E7 (04) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
breakdown
Scanner • SCU A0 (02) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕  
communication communication E7 (80)
trouble error
Engine • PCU A0 (01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
communication communication E7 (90)
trouble error
Printer port • Printer port F9 (91, 92)  ✕ ✕  ✕ U   
system trouble system trouble
Backup battery • Backup battery U1 (01) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
voltage fall voltage fall
trouble
Operation • Controller fan L4 (30) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
disable trouble 1 trouble
Operation • External serial I/F U7 (50, 51) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
disable trouble 2 communication
error (RIC)
• Memory error U2 (00, 05, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ U15
(included not 10, 11, 24, 40,
installed the 41, 42)
expansion RAM)
• Connection A0 (10, 11, 15, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble (Model 16, 20)
data discrepancy) E7 (60, 61,
(MFPC detection) 65, 89)
• Serial number U2 (30) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
data error
• HDD registration U2 (50) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
data check sum
error
Operation • Memory check E7 (95, 96) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
disable trouble 3 error when
booting
• Image memory E7 (01, 49, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
trouble, decode 91, 92, 93, 94)
error
Operation • Personal counter PC (00) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
disable trouble 4 connection
trouble
Power controller • Power controller L8 (20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
trouble error
Special function • Watermark data U2 (60)         
trouble error P1 (00, 01,
02)
Operatable mode
Scan-
To Print
block interrup- (Push) (Pull) print Send print cation to
HDD
tion) host
Laser trouble • LSU breakdown PCU E7 (20, 28, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
29) *10
L6 (10)
Engine trouble 1 • Connection A0 (21) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
trouble (Model E7 (50, 55)
data discrepancy) F1 (50)
(PCU detection)
Engine trouble 2 • PCU troubles C1 (10, 14) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
(motor, fusing, C4 (00) *10
etc.) F2 (22, 40, 64,
70, 74, 91)
H2 (00, 01,
02, 03)
H3 (00, 01,
02)
H4 (00, 01,
02, 30)
H5 (01)
H7 (10, 11)
L4 (02, 03, 04,
05, 06, 11, 12,
16, 31, 32, 35,
43, 50, 51)
L8 (01, 02)
U2 (90, 91)
Process system • LSU/Process E7 (21, 22, ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ 
trouble system 23) *19 *19 *19 *19 *19 *19 *19 *10
breakdown F2 (23, 24, 25, *19
41, 42, 43, 65,
66, 67, 71, 72,
73, 75, 76, 77,
92, 93, 94)
Paper feed tray 1 • Paper feed tray 1 F3 (12) U3    U3 U3  U3 
trouble breakdown *10
Paper feed tray 2 • Paper feed tray 2 F3 (22) U3    U3 U3  U3 
Paper feed tray 3 • Paper feed tray 3 U6 (01) U3    U3 U3  U3 
Paper feed tray 4 • Paper feed tray 4 U6 (02) U3    U3 U3  U3 
Paper feed tray • Paper feed tray U6 (00, 10, U11    U11 U11  U11 
other troubles other breakdown 50, 52) *10
Staple trouble • Staple breakdown F1 (08, 10) U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 
*10
Finisher trouble • After-process F1 (00, 03, 15, U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 U4 
breakdown 19, 20, 33, 34, *10
37)
Other troubles • Other troubles EE (EC, EL,         
EU)
Process control • Process control F2 (39, 49, 50,         
trouble breakdown (PCU 51, 58, 78) *12
detection)
Operation • Connection SCU A0 (22) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
disable trouble trouble (Model
data discrepancy)
(SCU detection)
SCU CPT ASIC • SCU CPT ASIC UC (02) U9 U9 U9 U9   U9  
trouble error
SCU ASIC • SCU ASIC error UC (20) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕  
trouble (SCU (SCU detection)
detection)
Scanner trouble • SCU EEPROM U2 (80, 81) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕  
1 error
Scanner trouble • Scanner section L1 (00) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕  
2 breakdown L3 (00)
(mirror motor,
lens, copy lamp)
CCD trouble • CCD breakdown E7 (10, 11, 14) ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕   ✕  
(shading, etc.)
Error where only history data are saved
Operatable mode
Scan-
To Print
block interrup- (Push) (Pull) print Send print cation
HDD
tion) to host
Error history PCU F2 (45)         
: Operation enabled ✕: Operation disabled

U1: The operation is enabled in a line other than the trouble line.
U3: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled with a tray other than the trouble tray.
U4: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the trouble paper exit section. * However, it is valid
only when the escape tray setting has been made.
U9: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the black and white mode.
*10: Since communication is enabled, reception can be transferred.
U11: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in other than the DESK and the LCC.
*12: A trouble message is displayed. (Example: Ready to copy. F2 trouble)
U15: FAST notification function (When in U2-22, trouble notification cannot be made. If there is no abnormality in the FAX software or the
FAST data in U2-23, trouble notification can be made.)
*19: When the color mode is set to disable in the "Color mode disable setting" of the system setting, the operation is enabled in the black and
white mode.
(2) Trouble detection sequence and trouble cancel sequence when turning on the power
MFP event Each block

manager
(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, U6, F3 trouble check When the power is turned on,
Trouble check is preformed in each block, check is made in each block.
and the result is sent to the MFP. Communication of trouble status
[Trouble code] [Trouble status]
H3, H4, H5 Saved in the PCU
U1 Saved in the MFP
U2 Saved in each block
U6-09 Saved in the PCU
F3-12, 22 Saved in the PCU
(Trouble cancel sequence)

When executing SIM 13, 14, 15, 16 sim task
SIM13: U1 trouble cancel

SIM14: H3, H4, H5
(Color mode inhibition) cancel
SIM15: U6 trouble cancel,
F3-12, F3-22 trouble cancel Trouble cancel
SIM16: U2 trouble cancel Trouble cancel command
(The trouble memory is
initialized.)
Trouble cancel status
is communicated.
The process has priority when the power is turned ON with the MFP.
When booting, two or more troubles in the list below may be detected. In this case, the trouble code of higher priority is displayed.
Process sequence Error code Content
U2 60 Watermark check error
50 HDD user authentication data check sum error
30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency
24 User authentication counter check sum error
First 10 User authentication index check sum error
(Low priority) A0 15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program firmware
20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP)
n
U2 11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check sum error
00 MFP EEPROM read/write error
p
E7 48 Scanner expansion PWB ASIC memory error
Last 42 Image data trouble (Scanner expansion PWB (ACRE) ASIC)
(High priority) 96 MFPC PWB DRAM memory check error (MFPC PWB)
95 SoC DRAM memory check error (PRINTER section)
U1 01 Battery trouble
E7 60 Combination error between PWB and firmware (MFPC PWB detection)
A0 04 Scanner expansion PWB (ACU) ROM error
F. Error code list
Trouble
code Trouble
Trouble content Mechanism Option Electricity FAX Supply
Main Sub detection
code code
A0 01 PCU PWB ROM error MFP 
02 SCU PWB ROM error MFP 
10 Color profile error MFP 
11 Firmware version inconsistency (MFP - PCU) MFP 
15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program firmware MFP 
16 Data error of the energy-saving NIC controller firmware in the SD card MFP 
20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP) MFP 
21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (PCU) PCU 
22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (SCU) SCU 
C1 10 Main charger trouble (Monochrome) PCU 
14 Main charger trouble (Color) PCU 
C4 00 PTC trouble (TC high voltage trouble) PCU 
E7 01 MFP image data error MFP 
03 HDD trouble MFP 
04 HDD-ASIC error MFP 
07 SD card error MFP 
10 Shading error (Black correction) SCU 
11 Shading error (White correction) SCU 
14 CCD-ASIC error SCU 
20 LSU laser detection error (K) PCU 
21 LSU laser detection error (C) PCU 
22 LSU laser detection error (M) PCU 
23 LSU laser detection error (Y) PCU 
28 LSU - PCU connection error PCU 
29 LSU ASIC frequency error PCU 
49 Water Mark data error MFP 
50 Combination error between PWB and firmware (PCU PWB detection) PCU 
55 PCU PWB information sum error PCU 
60 Combination error between PWB and firmware (MFPC PWB detection) MFP 
61 Combination error between the MFPC PWB and the PCU PWB MFP 
(MFPC PWB detection)
65 MFP EEPROM sum check error MFP 
80 MFP - SCU PWB communication error MFP 
89 Communication error between MFPC PWB CPU and energy-saving NIC MFP 
controller
90 MFP - PCU PWB communication error MFP 
91 FAX reception image data error MFP 
92 Copy image data error MFP 
93 Copy, image send, FAX, filing, print image data process error MFP 
94 Image file data process error (when importing file data) MFP 
95 SoC DRAM memory check error MFP 
96 MFPC PWB memory check error MFP 
EE EC Automatic toner density adjustment error PCU 
EL Automatic toner density adjustment error (Over toner) PCU 
EU Automatic toner density adjustment error (Under toner) PCU 
F1 00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication error PCU 
03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting operation trouble PCU 
08 Stapler shift trouble PCU 
10 Staple operation trouble PCU 
15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation trouble PCU 
19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F PCU 
20 Finisher alignment operation trouble R PCU 
21 Finisher fan trouble PCU 
33 Punch unit shift operation trouble PCU 
34 Punch operation trouble PCU 
37 Finisher data backup RAM error PCU 
50 Main unit - Finisher combination error PCU 
Trouble
code Trouble
Main Sub detection
code code
F2 22 Discharge lamp trouble (K) PCU 
23 Discharge lamp trouble (C) PCU 
24 Discharge lamp trouble (M) PCU 
25 Discharge lamp trouble (Y) PCU 
39 Process thermistor trouble PCU 
40 Toner density sensor trouble (K) PCU 
41 Toner density sensor trouble (C) PCU 
42 Toner density sensor trouble (M) PCU 
43 Toner density sensor trouble (Y) PCU 
45 Color image density sensor trouble PCU 
49 LSU thermistor trouble PCU 
50 K drum phase sensor trouble PCU 
51 CL drum phase sensor trouble PCU 
58 Temperature/humidity sensor trouble (HUD_M/TH_M) PCU 
64 Toner supply operation trouble (K) PCU 
65 Toner supply operation trouble (C) PCU 
66 Toner supply operation trouble (M) PCU 
67 Toner supply operation trouble (Y) PCU 
70 Improper toner cartridge detection (K) PCU 
71 Improper toner cartridge detection (C) PCU 
72 Improper toner cartridge detection (M) PCU 
73 Improper toner cartridge detection (Y) PCU 
74 Toner cartridge CRUM error (K) PCU 
75 Toner cartridge CRUM error (C) PCU 
76 Toner cartridge CRUM error (M) PCU 
77 Toner cartridge CRUM error (Y) PCU 
78 Registration image density sensor trouble PCU 
(Transfer belt substrate reflection rate abnormality)
91 High density process control high voltage error (K) PCU 
92 High density process control high voltage error (C) PCU 
93 High density process control high voltage error (M) PCU 
94 High density process control high voltage error (Y) PCU 
F3 12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble PCU 
22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble PCU 
F6 00 MFPC PWB - FAX communication trouble MFP 
01 FAX control PWB EEPROM read/write error FAX 
04 FAX MODEM operation trouble FAX 
21 Improper combination of TEL/LIU PWB and FAX soft switch MFP 
30 FAX 1-chip microprocessor access error (FAX detection) MFP 
97 Incompatibility between FAX control PWB and the main machine MFP 
98 Incompatibility between the FAX control PWB destination and the main MFP 
machine destination
F9 91 Communication error between MFP and the printer section when booting MFP
H2 00 Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM_AD2) PCU 
01 Thermistor open trouble (TH_LM) PCU 
02 Thermistor open trouble (TH_US) PCU 
03 Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM_AD1) PCU 
H3 00 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM) PCU 
01 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_LM) PCU 
02 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU 
H4 00 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_UM_AD2) PCU 
01 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_LM) PCU 
02 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU 
H5 01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach jam PCU 
H7 10 Recovery error from low fuser temp. (TH_UM_AD2) PCU 
11 Recovery error from low fuser temp. (TH_LM) PCU 
L1 00 Scanner feed trouble SCU 
L3 00 Scanner return trouble SCU 
L4 02 Paper feed motor trouble PCU 
03 Fusing motor trouble PCU 
04 Developing motor trouble (BLACK) PCU 
05 Developing motor trouble (COLOR) PCU 
06 Transfer unit lift trouble PCU 
11 Shift motor trouble PCU 
12 Secondary transfer separation trouble PCU 
16 Fusing pressure release trouble PCU 
Trouble
code Trouble
Main Sub detection
code code
L4 30 MFP fan motor trouble MPF 
31 Paper exit cooling fan trouble PCU 
32 Power source cooling fan trouble PCU 
35 Fusing cooling fan trouble PCU 
43 Paper exit cooling fan 2 trouble PCU 
50 Process fan trouble PCU 
51 Process fan 2 trouble PCU 
L6 10 Polygon motor trouble PCU 
L8 01 Full wave signal detection error PCU 
02 Full wave signal error PCU 
20 Communication error of MFPC PWB/LSU mother board MFP 
P1 00 PCI communication error MFP 
01 PCI fan error MFP 
02 Plasma generating device error MFP 
PC - Personal counter not detected MFP 
U1 01 Battery trouble MFP 
U2 00 MFP EEPROM read/write error MFP 
05 HDD/MFPC PWB SRAM contents inconsistency MFP 
05 Erroneous detection of account management data / HDD internal MFP 
authentication DB table error
10 MFPC PWB SRAM user authentication index check sum error MFP 
11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check sum error MFP 
24 MFPC PWB SRAM memory user authentication counter check sum error MFP 
30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency MFP 
40 SD card system storage data area error MFP 
41 HDD system storage data area error MFP 
42 Machine adjustment data (system storage data area) error MFP 
50 HDD user authentication data check sum error MFP 
60 Watermark check error MFP 
80 SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error SCU 
81 SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error SCU 
90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error PCU 
91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error PCU 
U6 00 PCU PWB - Paper feed desk (paper feed tray 3, 4) communication trouble PCU 
01 Desk paper feed tray 1 lift trouble PCU 
02 Desk paper feed tray 2 lift trouble PCU 
10 Desk paper feed unit paper transport motor trouble PCU 
50 Desk - Main unit combination trouble PCU 
52 PCU PWB - Paper feed desk (paper feed tray 2) communication trouble PCU 
U7 50 MFPC PWB - Vendor machine communication error MFP 
51 Vendor machine error MFP 
UC 02 CPT - ASIC error SCU 
20 DOCC ASIC error SCU 
G. Details of error codes and countermeasures
A0-01 PCU PWB ROM error A0-16 Data error of the energy-saving NIC
controller firmware in the SD card
Trouble content
Detail MFP Trouble content Data error of the energy-saving NIC controller
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by firmware in the SD card.
interruption of the power during the version-up Detail MFP
operation, etc.
Cause SD card trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
MFPC PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up
Check & Remedy Reinstall the firmware.
procedure again.
Replace the SD card.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
A0-02 SCU PWB ROM error A0-20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
version (MFP)
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Trouble content
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by
interruption of the power during the version-up Detail MFP
operation, etc. Cause Inconsistency between the MFP firmware version and
SCU PWB trouble. the EEPROM data version.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the firmware version-up Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
procedure again.
Replace the SCU PWB.
A0-21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
version (PCU)
A0-10 Color profile error
Trouble content
Trouble content Color profile error Detail PCU
Detail MFP Cause Inconsistency between the PCU firmware version and
Cause The content of the color profile is abnormal. the EEPROM data version.
Combination error between the MFPC PWB firmware Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
and the color profile
Check & Remedy Upgrade the firmware collectively.
Replace the MFPC PWB. A0-22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
version (SCU)
A0-11 Firmware version inconsistency
(MFP - PCU) Trouble content
Detail SCU
Cause Inconsistency between the SCU firmware version and
Trouble content
the EEPROM data version.
Detail MFP
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
Cause Firmware combination error between the MFP and
the PCU.
Check & Remedy Install the firmware in the all-firmware version-up C1-10 Main charger trouble (Monochrome)
mode.
Trouble content
A0-15 Incompatible DSK BOOT and program Detail PCU
Cause The main charger unit (BK) is not installed properly.
firmware There is an abnormality in the main charger unit (BK).
The developer unit (KCMY) is not installed properly.
Trouble content There is an abnormality in the developer unit
Detail MFP (KCMY).
Cause Installation of the normal firmware was performed Disconnection of the high voltage MC PWB
with a security kit enable. connector.
Check & Remedy Stop installation of the normal firmware. Breakage of the high voltage harness.
High voltage MC PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the output of the main charger with SIM8-2.
Check the output of the developing bias with SIM8-1.
Check disconnection of the main charger./Replace.
Check disconnection of the developer unit./Replace.
Check disconnection of the high voltage MC PWB
connector./Replace.
Replace the high voltage MC PWB.
C1-14 Main charger trouble (Color) E7-04 HDD-ASIC error
Trouble content Trouble content

Detail PCU Detail MFP
Cause The main charger unit (CMY) is not installed properly. Cause HDD-ASIC trouble. (MFPC PWB trouble.)
There is an abnormality in the main charger unit An error occurs in the HDD-ASIC self test when
(CMY). booting.
Disconnection of the high voltage MC PWB Check & Remedy Check or replace the MFPC PWB.
connector.
Breakage of the high voltage harness.
High voltage MC PWB trouble. E7-07 SD card error
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the output of the main charger with SIM8-2.
Check disconnection of the main charger./Replace. Trouble content
Check disconnection of the high voltage MC PWB Detail MFP
connector./Replace. Cause SD card trouble or contact error
Replace the high voltage MC PWB MFPC PWB trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Replace the SD card.
Check the SD card socket.
C4-00 PTC trouble (TC high voltage trouble)
Trouble content
E7-10 Shading error (Black correction)
Detail PCU
Cause The PTC unit is not installed properly./Trouble. Trouble content
The primary transfer unit is not installed properly./ Detail SCU
Trouble. Cause Abnormality in the CCD black scan level when the
The secondary transfer unit is not installed properly./ scanner lamp is turned OFF.
Trouble. Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
High voltage TC PWB trouble. CCD unit abnormality.
PCU PWB trouble. SCU PWB abnormality.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit.
Check & Remedy Replace the PTC unit. Check the CCD unit.
Replace the primary transfer unit. Check the SCU PWB.
Replace the secondary transfer unit.
Check disconnection of the high voltage TC PWB
connector./Replace. E7-11 Shading error (White correction)
Replace the high voltage TC PWB.
Trouble content
Detail SCU
E7-01 MFP image data error Cause Abnormality in the CCD white reference plate scan
level when the scanner lamp is turned ON.
Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
Trouble content Dirt on the mirror, lens, and the reference white plate.
Detail MFP Scanner lamp lighting trouble.
Cause Image data transfer error in the MFPC PWB. Scanner lamp drive PWB trouble
MFPC PWB trouble. CCD unit abnormality.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness SCU PWB abnormality.
of the MFPC PWB. Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit.
Check or replace the MFPC PWB. Check connection of the harness to the scanner lamp
unit.
Check or replace the scanner lamp.
E7-03 HDD trouble Check or replace the scanner lamp drive PWB.
Clean or replace the mirror, the lens, and the
reference white board.
Trouble content Check or replace the CCD unit.
Detail MFP Check or replace the SCU PWB.
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble in the MFPC
PWB and HDD.
HDD (error file management area) data abnormality E7-14 CCD-ASIC error
(FAT breakage).
MFPC PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness Trouble content
of the MFPC PWB and HDD. Detail SCU
Use SIM62-2, 3 to check read/write operations of the Cause SCU PWB trouble.
HDD. Improper Installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
Replace the HDD. CCD unit abnormality.
Check or replace the MFPC PWB. SCU PWB abnormality.
Check & Remedy Check the SCU PWB.
Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit.
Check or replace the CCD unit.
Check or replace the SCU PWB.
E7-20 LSU laser detection error (K) E7-28 LSU - PCU connection error

Detail PCU Detail PCU
Cause Laser optical axis misalignment Cause Communication error between the CPU in the PCU
Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode PWB and the LSU control ASIC.
trouble. Improper connection of the communication connector
LSU harness, connector trouble between the PCU PWB and the LSU control PWB
LSU trouble (interface PWB).
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU. Harness trouble between the PCU PWB and the LSU
Check or replace the LSU control PWB. control PWB (interface PWB)
Check connection of the LSU harness. PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the LSU. LSU control PWB trouble.
LSU trouble.
LSU mother PWB trouble.
E7-21 LSU laser detection error (C) Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness
between the PCU PWB and the LSU control PWB
(interface PWB).
Trouble content Replace the LSU mother PWB.
Detail PCU Replace the PCU PWB.
Cause Laser optical axis misalignment Replace the LSU.
Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode Replace the LSU control PWB.
trouble.
LSU harness, connector trouble
LSU trouble E7-29 LSU ASIC frequency error
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Check or replace the LSU control PWB.
Check connection of the LSU harness. Trouble content
Replace the LSU. Detail PCU
Cause Oscillation abnormality of the external oscillator and
the internal oscillating circuit used in the LSU ASIC.
E7-22 LSU laser detection error (M) LSU ASIC abnormality on the LSU ASIC PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the LSU control PWB.
Trouble content
Detail PCU E7-49 Water Mark data error
Cause Laser optical axis misalignment
Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
trouble. Trouble content
LSU harness, connector trouble Detail MFP
LSU trouble Cause Watermark data trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU. HDD trouble.
Check or replace the LSU control PWB. Check & Remedy Use SIM49-5 to upload the watermark data.
Check connection of the LSU harness. Replace the HDD.
Replace the LSU.
E7-50 Combination error between PWB and

E7-23 LSU laser detection error (Y) firmware (PCU PWB detection)
Trouble content
Trouble content
Cause Laser optical axis misalignment Cause A PWB/firmware/LSU which is not compatible with
Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode the machine specifications is detected.
trouble. PCU PWB trouble
LSU harness, connector trouble LSU trouble
LSU trouble
Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Check or replace the LSU.
Check or replace the LSU control PWB.
Check or replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the LSU harness.
Replace the LSU.
E7-55 PCU PWB information sum error
Trouble content PCU EEPROM PWB information sum error

Detail PCU
Cause PCU EEPROM sum check error.
PCU EEPROM trouble.
PCU EEPROM contact trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the PCU EEPROM.
E7-60 Combination error between PWB and E7-90 MFP - PCU PWB communication error
firmware (MFPC PWB detection)
Trouble content
Trouble content Detail MFP
Detail MFP Cause PCU PWB - MFPC PWB connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Cause A PWB/firmware which is not compatible with the
MFPC PWB trouble.
machine specifications is detected in the MFPC
PWB. Check & Remedy Check connection of the PCU PWB and the MFPC
MFPC PWB trouble. PWB.
Check the ground.
Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
Check or replace the MFPC PWB.
E7-61 Combination error between the MFPC

E7-91 FAX reception image data error
PWB and the PCU PWB (MFPC PWB
detection) Trouble content An error of FAX reception image data process occurs.
Detail MFP
Trouble content Cause Image data process abnormality
Detail MFP HDD trouble
Cause Combination error between the MFPC PWB and the SD card trouble or contact error
PCU PWB. Image compression data corruption
MFPC PWB trouble. MFPC PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble. FAX control PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFPC PWB and Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of
the PCU PWB. the memory.
Replace the MFPC PWB. Replace the HDD.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace or check installation of the SD card.
Replace the FAX control PWB.
E7-65 MFP EEPROM sum check error
E7-92 Copy image data error
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Trouble content An error of copy image data process occurs.
Cause MFPC PWB EEPROM trouble.
(In Non ERDH)
MFPC PWB EEPROM contact trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the MFPC PWB. Detail MFP
Replace the MFPC PWB EEPROM. Cause Image data process abnormality
HDD trouble
Image compression data corruption
MFPC PWB trouble
E7-80 MFP - SCU PWB communication error DRAM memory trouble or contact error
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of
Trouble content the memory.
Detail MFP Replace the HDD.
Cause SCU PWB - MFPC PWB connection trouble. Replace the MFPC PWB.
SCU PWB trouble.
MFPC PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the SCU PWB and the MFPC E7-93 Copy, image send, FAX, filing, print
PWB. image data process error
Check the ground.
Replace the MFPC PWB. Trouble content An image data process error occurs in the following
operation mode:
• Copy (in ERDH)
E7-89 Communication error between MFPC • Copy composing system function (Water mark)
• When in image send
PWB CPU and energy-saving NIC • When filing documents
controller • When displaying the preview
• When printing with the GDI/PCL printer
• Copy composing system function (Water mark)
Trouble content No response can be obtained from the energy-saving
Detail MFP
NIC controller.
Cause Image data process abnormality
Detail MFP
HDD trouble
Cause MFPC PWB trouble. Image compression data corruption
Check & Remedy Replace the MFPC PWB. MFPC PWB trouble
DIMM memory trouble or contact error
the memory.
Replace the HDD.
Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory.
E7-94 Image file data process error (when EE-EU Automatic toner density adjustment
importing file data) error (Under toner)
Trouble content File image process error (backup restore error) when Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density
importing filing data adjustment is 178 or above or the control voltage is
Detail MFP 51 or less.
Cause Image data process abnormality Detail PCU
HDD trouble Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
Image compression data corruption Developing unit trouble.
MFPC PWB trouble PCU PWB trouble.
DIMM memory trouble or contact error Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-01 to check the read/write operations of Replace the developing unit.
the memory. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the HDD.
Replace or check installation of the DIMM memory. F1-00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication
error
E7-95 SoC DRAM memory check error
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Trouble content Soc DRAM memory access trouble
Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
Detail MFP
between the finisher and the PCU PWB.
Cause Memory data curruption occure
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Memory device trouble or contact error
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness between the
the memory.
Replace MFP PWB finisher and the PCU PWB.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
E7-96 MFPC PWB memory check error
F1-03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting
Trouble content MFPC PWB memory access trouble
Detail MFP
operation trouble
Cause Memory data curruption occure
Memory device trouble or contact error Trouble content
Check & Remedy Use SIM60-1 to check the read/write operations of Detail PCU
the memory. Cause Finisher paper exit roller lift motor trouble
Replace MFP PWB Harness and connector connection trouble
Home position sensor trouble
Finisher control PWB trouble
EE-EC Automatic toner density adjustment Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
error roller lift motor.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
position sensor.
Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density Replace the paper exit roller lift motor.
adjustment is outside of 128 r10. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Detail PCU Replace the home position sensor.
Cause Toner density sensor trouble. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Developing unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor. F1-08 Stapler shift trouble
Replace the developing unit.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
EE-EL Automatic toner density adjustment Cause Stapler shift motor trouble.
error (Over toner) Home position sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the stapler shift
Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density motor.
adjustment is 76 or less or the control voltage is 208 Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
or above. position sensor.
Detail PCU Replace the stapler shift motor.
Cause Toner density sensor trouble. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Developing unit trouble. Replace the home position sensor.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
F1-10 Staple operation trouble F1-21 Finisher fan trouble

Cause Staple motor trouble. Cause Motor lock, motor harness short-circuit/open, finisher
Finisher control PWB trouble. control PWB trouble, connection harness/connector
Home position sensor trouble. trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple Fan motor lock, short-circuit, open circuit.
motor. Finisher fan trouble.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home Finisher control PWB trouble.
position sensor. Connector/harness trouble
Replace the staple motor. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the fan.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Check the finisher fan, and replace if necessary.
Replace the home position sensor. Check the finisher control PWB, and replace if
Replace the finisher control PWB. necessary.
Check the connector/harness, and replace if
necessary.
F1-15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation
trouble
F1-33 Punch unit shift operation trouble
Trouble content Lift motor trouble.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Detail PCU
Cause Paper exit tray lift motor trouble.
Cause Punch shift motor trouble.
Home position sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
Harness and connector connection trouble.
tray lift motor.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch
position sensor. shifting.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
Replace the paper exit tray lift motor. position sensor.
Replace the home position sensor. Replace the punch shift motor.
Replace the home position sensor.
Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
F1-19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F
Trouble content F1-34 Punch operation trouble

Detail PCU
Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock.
Trouble content
Motor speed abnormality.
Detail PCU
Over-current to the motor.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Cause Punch motor trouble.
Home position sensor trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
Harness and connector connection trouble.
alignment motor F.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home
position sensor.
position sensor.
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch.
Replace the punch motor.
Replace the paper alignment motor F.
Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
F1-20 Finisher alignment operation trouble
R F1-37 Finisher data backup RAM error

Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock. Cause Finisher control PWB trouble.
Motor speed abnormality. Malfunction due to noises
Over-current to the motor. Check & Remedy Replace the finisher control PWB.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Readjust the finisher. (Use SIM3-10, Finisher control
Home position sensor trouble. PWB DIP SW adjustment.)
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
alignment motor R.
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the home F1-50 Main unit - Finisher combination error
position sensor.
Replace the paper alignment motor R. Trouble content
Replace the home position sensor. Detail PCU
Cause The finisher which is not supported by the main unit
model is installed.
Check & Remedy Install a proper finisher.
F2-22 Discharge lamp trouble (K) F2-40 Toner density sensor trouble (K)
Trouble content The lamp is kept open for 1 sec from turning on the Trouble content
discharge lamp. Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality.
Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB (K) Sensor connector and harness connection trouble.
and the PCU PWB. Developing unit trouble.
Discharge lamp PWB (K) trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Check & Remedy Replace the discharge lamp PWB (K). Check connection of the sensor connector and the
Check the harness and the connector. harness.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the developing unit.
F2-23 Discharge lamp trouble (C)

F2-41 Toner density sensor trouble (C)
Trouble content The lamp is kept open for 1 sec from turning on the
discharge lamp. Trouble content
Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB (C) Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality.
and the PCU PWB. Sensor connector and harness connection trouble.
Discharge lamp PWB (C) trouble. Developing unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the discharge lamp PWB (C). Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Check the harness and the connector. Check connection of the sensor connector and the
Replace the PCU PWB. harness.
F2-24 Discharge lamp trouble (M)
F2-42 Toner density sensor trouble (M)
discharge lamp.
Detail PCU Trouble content
Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB Detail PCU
(M) and the PCU PWB. Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality.
Discharge lamp PWB (M) trouble. Sensor connector and harness connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Developing unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the discharge lamp PWB (M). PCU PWB trouble.
Check the harness and the connector. Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check connection of the sensor connector and the
harness.
F2-25 Discharge lamp trouble (Y) Replace the PCU PWB.
discharge lamp.
F2-43 Toner density sensor trouble (Y)
Detail PCU
Cause Contact trouble between the discharge lamp PWB (Y) Trouble content
and the PCU PWB. Detail PCU
Discharge lamp PWB (Y) trouble. Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality.
PCU PWB trouble. Sensor connector and harness connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the discharge lamp PWB (Y). Developing unit trouble.
Check the harness and the connector. PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Check connection of the sensor connector and the
harness.
F2-39 Process thermistor trouble Replace the developing unit.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Process thermistor trouble.
Process thermistor harness connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the process thermistor.
Check connection of the process thermistor harness
and the connector.
F2-45 Color image density sensor trouble F2-58 Temperature/humidity sensor trouble
(HUD_M/TH_M)
Trouble content
Cause Color image density sensor sensitivity adjustment Detail PCU
trouble.
Cause Temperature/humidity sensor trouble.
Color image density sensor trouble.
Process humidity sensor harness and connector
Sensor harness and connector connection trouble.
connection trouble
Image density sensor dirt.
PCU PWB trouble.
Calibration plate dirt.
Check & Remedy Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
Transfer unit lift operation trouble
Check connection of the temperature/humidity sensor
PCU PWB trouble.
harness and the connector.
Check & Remedy Replace the color image density sensor.
Check connection of the sensor harness and the
connector.
Clean the image density sensor.
Replace the calibration plate.
F2-64 Toner supply operation trouble (K)
Repair the transfer unit lift mechanism.
Replace the PCU PWB. Trouble content
Use SIM44-2 to perform the sensitivity adjustment of Detail PCU
the process control sensor. Cause Toner motor trouble.
Toner density sensor trouble.
Connector/harness trouble.
F2-49 LSU thermistor trouble PCU PWB trouble.
Toner cartridge trouble.
Trouble content Developing unit trouble.
Toner transport pipe section trouble
Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor.
Cause The LSU temperature is outside of -28qC - 78qC.
Replace the toner density sensor.
LSU thermistor trouble.
Connector and harness check.
LSU thermistor harness and connector connection
trouble
Replace the toner cartridge.
PCU PWB trouble.
LSU control PWB trouble.
Check the toner transport pipe section.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the LSU control PWB.
Replace the LSU.
F2-65 Toner supply operation trouble (C)
F2-50 K drum phase sensor trouble Trouble content

Detail PCU
Trouble content Cause Toner motor trouble.
Detail PCU
Cause Drum phase sensor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Drum phase sensor harness and connector
connection trouble
Developing unit trouble.
Drum drive section trouble. Toner transport pipe section trouble
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_K".
Replace the drum phase sensor.
Check connection of the drum phase sensor harness
and the connector.
Repair the drum drive section.
F2-51 CL drum phase sensor trouble F2-66 Toner supply operation trouble (M)
Trouble content
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Detail PCU
Cause Drum phase sensor trouble.
Cause Toner motor trouble.
Drum phase sensor harness and connector
connection trouble
Drum drive section trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of "DHPD_CL". Developing unit trouble.
Replace the drum phase sensor. Toner transport pipe section trouble
Check connection of the drum phase sensor harness
and the connector.
Repair the drum drive section.
F2-67 Toner supply operation trouble (Y) F2-74 Toner cartridge CRUM error (K)

Cause Toner motor trouble. Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
Toner density sensor trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Connector/harness trouble. Connector and harness trouble between PCU PWB
PCU PWB trouble. and toner cartridge
Toner cartridge trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Developing unit trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Toner transport pipe section trouble Check the connector and the harness between the
Check & Remedy Replace the toner motor. PCU PWB and the toner cartridge.
Replace the PCU PWB. F2-75 Toner cartridge CRUM error (C)
Check the toner transport pipe section. Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
F2-70 Improper toner cartridge detection (K) PCU PWB trouble.
Connector and harness trouble between PCU PWB
and toner cartridge
Trouble content Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Detail PCU Replace the PCU PWB.
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main Check the connector and the harness between the
unit detects a toner cartridge of a different PCU PWB and the toner cartridge.
specification.)
PCU PWB trouble. F2-76 Toner cartridge CRUM error (M)
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
F2-71 Improper toner cartridge detection (C) Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Connector and harness trouble between PCU PWB
Trouble content and toner cartridge
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main Replace the PCU PWB.
unit detects a toner cartridge of a different Check the connector and the harness between the
specification.) PCU PWB and the toner cartridge.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge. F2-77 Toner cartridge CRUM error (Y)
Trouble content
F2-72 Improper toner cartridge detection (M) Detail PCU
Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Trouble content Connector and harness trouble between PCU PWB
Detail PCU and toner cartridge
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
unit detects a toner cartridge of a different Replace the PCU PWB.
specification.) Check the connector and the harness between the
Toner cartridge trouble. PCU PWB and the toner cartridge.
PCU PWB trouble.
F2-73 Improper toner cartridge detection (Y)
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main
unit detects a toner cartridge of a different
specification.)
PCU PWB trouble.
F2-78 Registration image density F3-12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble
sensor trouble (Transfer belt
substrate reflection rate abnormality) Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause LUD1 is not turned ON within the specified time.
Trouble content
CLUD1 sensor trouble.
Detail PCU Paper feed tray 1 lift unit trouble.
Cause Image density (registration) sensor trouble (Sensor PCU PWB trouble.
sensitivity adjustment trouble). Sensor harness and connector connection trouble
PCU PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector
Image density (resist) sensor connector and harness of LUD1.
connection trouble Replace the lift-up unit.
Image density (registration) sensor dirt. Replace the PCU PWB.
Transfer belt dirt, scratch.
Check & Remedy Replace the image density (registration) sensor.
Replace the PCU PWB. F3-22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble
Check connection of the connector and the harness
of the image density (resist) sensor.
Clean the image density (registration) sensor. Trouble content LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time.
Clean or replace the transfer belt. Detail PCU
Use SIM44-2 to perform the sensibility adjustment of Cause LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time.
the process control sensor. CLUD2 sensor trouble.
Paper feed tray 2 lift unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
F2-91 High density process control high Sensor harness and connector connection trouble
voltage error (K) Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of LUD2.
Replace the lift-up unit.
Trouble content For the production process (Not occur in the market.)
Detail PCU
Cause — F6-00 MFPC PWB - FAX communication
Check & Remedy — trouble
F2-92 High density process control high Trouble content MFP - FAX communication establishment error /
Framing / Parity / Protocol error
voltage error (C) Section MFP
Case 1 Cause FAX control PWB trouble.
Trouble content For the production process (Not occur in the market.) Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
Detail PCU and
Cause — Remedy
Check & Remedy — Case 2 Cause FAX control PWB - MFPC PWB connector and
harness trouble
Check Check the connector and the harness between the
F2-93 High density process control high and FAX control PWB and the MFPC PWB.
Remedy
voltage error (M)
Case 3 Cause FAX control PWB - Mother board connector and
harness trouble
Trouble content For the production process (Not occur in the market.) Check Check the connector and the harness between the
Detail PCU and FAX control PWB and the mother board.
Cause — Remedy
Check & Remedy — Case 4 Cause FAX control PWB ROM trouble / ROM pin breakage
Check Check the ROM of the FAX control PWB.
and
F2-94 High density process control high Remedy
voltage error (Y)
F6-01 FAX control PWB EEPROM read/write
Trouble content For the production process (Not occur in the market.)
error
Detail PCU
Cause —
Check & Remedy — Trouble content FAX control PWB EEPROM access error (Read and
write)
Section FAX
Case 1 Cause FAX control PWB EEPROM trouble
Check Check that no trouble occurs after replacement of
and EEPROM. Execute the memory check of SIM66-3 to
Remedy insure that EEPROM can be accessed.
Case 2 Cause FAX control PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
Check Replace the FAX control PWB.
and
Remedy
F6-04 FAX MODEM operation trouble F6-98 Incompatibility between the FAX
control PWB destination and the main
Trouble content FAX control PWB MODEM chip operation trouble machine destination
Section FAX
Case 1 Cause FAX MODEM chip operation trouble.
Trouble content Incompatibility between the FAX control PWB
destination and the main machine destination
and
Section MFP
remedy
Case 1 Cause Incompatibility between the destination information
Case 2 Cause The FAX MODEM chip cannot be accessed.
written into the FAX control PWB EEPROM and that
in the main machine (set with SIM26-6)
and
Check 1) Check the destination of the FAX control PWB.
Remedy
and 2) Check the destination of the machine. (SIM26-6)
Remedy
F6-21 Improper combination of TEL/LIU

PWB and FAX soft switch F9-91 Communication error between MFP
and the printer section when booting
Trouble content Incompatibility between the TEL/LIU PWB and the
FAX control PWB information (soft switch)
Trouble content Booting of the printer section cannot be recognized
Section MFP
when booting.
Case 1 Cause The destination of the TEL/LIU PWB installed is
Detail MFP
improper.
Cause MFPC (section) PWB trouble.
Check Check the destination of the TEL/LIU PWB.
Printer (section) PWB trouble.
and
Printer flash ROM trouble.
Remedy
MFPC (section) PWB - printer (section) PWB
Case 2 Cause TEL/LIU PWB trouble. connection trouble.
Check Replace the TEL/LIU PWB. Check & Remedy Replace the MFPC (section) PWB.
and Replace the printer (section) PWB.
Remedy Replace the printer flash ROM.
Check connection between the MFPC (section) PWB
and the printer (section) PWB.
F6-30 FAX 1-chip microprocessor access
error (FAX detection)
H2-00 Thermistor open trouble
Trouble content FAX 1-chip microprocessor access error (Read and (TH_UM_AD2)
write)
Section MFP Trouble content
Case 1 Cause Program writing trouble to the 1-chip microprocessor, Detail PCU
or no program data written. Cause Thermistor trouble
Check Use SIM66-42 to rewrite the 1-chip microprocessor PCU PWB trouble
and program. Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
Remedy Fusing section connector connection trouble
Case 2 Cause FAX 1-chip microprocessor circuit trouble. Fusing unit not installed
Check Replace the FAX control PWB. Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
and Replace the thermistor.
Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the
harness.
F6-97 Incompatibility between FAX control Check the connector in the fusing section.
PWB and the main machine
H2-01 Thermistor open trouble (TH_LM)
Trouble content Incompatibility between FAX control PWB and the
main machine
Trouble content
Section MFP
Detail PCU
Case 1 Cause The FAX control PWB installed is improper.
FAX control PWB trouble. Cause Thermistor trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Check Install a proper FAX control PWB.
Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
and Replace the FAX control PWB.
Fusing section connector connection trouble
Remedy
Fusing unit not installed
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Replace the thermistor.
harness.
Check the connector in the fusing section.
H2-02 Thermistor open trouble (TH_US) Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp.
Trouble content Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Detail PCU Replace the thermistor.
Cause Thermistor trouble
PCU PWB trouble
harness.
Replace the HL control PWB.
H3-02 Fusing section high temperature
Replace the PCU PWB. trouble (TH_US)
harness.
Trouble content
Check the connector in the fusing section.
Detail PCU
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
Thermistor trouble
H2-03 Thermistor open trouble PCU PWB trouble
(TH_UM_AD1) Thermistor connector and harness connection trouble
HL control PWB trouble
Trouble content Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
Detail PCU
heater lamp.
Cause Thermistor trouble
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. Replace the HL control PWB.
harness.
H4-00 Fusing section low temperature
Check the connector in the fusing section. trouble (TH_UM_AD2)
Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
H3-00 Fusing section high temperature level within the specified time from turning ON the
trouble (TH_UM) power relay.
Detail PCU
Cause Thermistor trouble.
Trouble content
Heater lamp trouble.
Detail PCU
PCU PWB trouble.
Thermostat trouble.
Thermistor trouble
Connector, harness connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
HL control PWB trouble.
Power unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp. heater lamp.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Replace the thermistor.
Replace the thermistor. Replace the heater lamp.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the thermistor connector and the Replace the thermostat.
harness. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the HL control PWB. Replace the HL control PWB.
Replace the power unit.
H3-01 Fusing section high temperature

trouble (TH_LM)
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Thermistor trouble
PCU PWB trouble
H4-01 Fusing section low temperature H7-10 Recovery error from low fuser temp.
trouble (TH_LM) (TH_UM_AD2)
Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
level within the specified time from turning ON the level within the specified time from stopping a job due
power relay. to fall in the fusing temperature.
Cause Thermistor trouble. Cause Thermistor trouble.
Heater lamp trouble. Heater lamp trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Thermostat trouble. Thermostat trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble.
HL control PWB trouble. HL control PWB trouble.
Power unit trouble. Power unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. Replace the heater lamp.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Replace the PCU PWB.
heater lamp. Replace the thermostat.
Replace the thermistor. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the heater lamp. Replace the HL control PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the power unit.
Replace the thermostat. Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
Check connection of the connector and the harness. heater lamp.
Replace the HL control PWB.
H7-11 Recovery error from low fuser temp.
(TH_LM)
H4-02 Fusing section low temperature
trouble (TH_US) Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
level within the specified time from stopping a job due
Trouble content The fusing temperature does not reach the specified to fall in the fusing temperature.
level within the specified time from turning ON the Detail PCU
power relay. Cause Thermistor trouble.
Detail PCU Heater lamp trouble.
Cause Thermistor trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Heater lamp trouble. Thermostat trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble.
Thermostat trouble. HL control PWB trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Power unit trouble.
HL control PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
Power unit trouble. Replace the heater lamp.
Check & Remedy Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Use SIM44-14 to check the state of the thermistor. Replace the thermostat.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Check connection of the connector and the harness.
heater lamp. Replace the HL control PWB.
Replace the thermistor. Replace the power unit.
Replace the heater lamp. Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
Replace the PCU PWB. heater lamp.
Replace the thermostat.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the HL control PWB. L1-00 Scanner feed trouble
Trouble content Scanner feed is not completed within the specified

time.
H5-01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach
Detail SCU
jam Cause Scanner unit trouble.
SCU PWB trouble.
Trouble content Scanner control PWB trouble.
Detail PCU Harness and connector connection trouble.
Scanner home position sensor trouble.
Cause A fusing jam is not canceled completely. (A jam paper
Scanner motor trouble.
remains.)
POD1 sensor trouble Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation.
Fusing unit installation trouble Replace the scanner unit.
POD1 sensor connector and harness connection Replace the SCU PWB.
trouble Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
PCU PWB trouble Replace the scanner home position sensor.
Fusing unit, drive section trouble Replace the scanner motor.
Check & Remedy Replace the POD1 sensor.
Check installation of the fusing unit.
Replace the fusing unit.
Check or repair the fusing drive section.
Check connection of the POD1 sensor connector and
the harness.
L3-00 Scanner return trouble L4-05 Developing motor trouble (COLOR)
Trouble content Scanner return is not completed within the specified Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of
time. the developing motor.
Detail SCU Detail PCU
Cause Scanner unit trouble Cause Developing motor trouble
SCU PWB trouble Developing motor harness and connector connection
Scanner control PWB trouble trouble
Harness and connector connection trouble PCU PWB trouble
Scanner home position sensor trouble Developing unit trouble
Scanner motor trouble Check & Remedy Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the
Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation. developing motor.
Replace the scanner unit. Replace the developing motor.
Replace the SCU PWB. Check connection of the developing motor harness
Check connection of the connectors and the harness. and the connection.
Replace the scanner home position sensor. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the scanner motor. Replace the developing motor.
L4-02 Paper feed motor trouble

L4-06 Transfer unit lift trouble
Trouble content A lock signal is not detected within the specified time
in ON operation of the paper feed motor after Trouble content A change in the primary transfer position sensor
warming-up or canceling a jam. cannot be detected within the specified time in lifting
Detail PCU operation of the primary transfer unit.
Cause Paper feed motor trouble Detail PCU
Paper feed motor harness and connector connection Cause Transfer unit position sensor trouble
trouble Dirt on the transfer unit position sensor.
PCU PWB trouble PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the paper feed Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
motor. Transfer unit lift mechanism trouble
Replace the paper feed motor. Primary transfer belt unit is not installed.
Check connection of the paper feed motor harness Check & Remedy Use SIM6-3 to check the separating operation of the
and the connector. transfer unit.
Replace the PCU PWB. Install the primary transfer belt unit.
Replace the transfer unit position sensor.
Clean the transfer unit position sensor.
L4-03 Fusing motor trouble Replace the PCU PWB.
Repair the transfer unit lift mechanism.
Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of
the fusing motor.
Detail PCU L4-11 Shift motor trouble
Cause Fusing motor trouble
Fusing motor harness and connector connection
trouble Trouble content No change in the shifter home position sensor signal
PCU PWB trouble is detected in the operation of the shifter initializing.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the fusing Detail PCU
motor. Cause Shift motor trouble.
Replace the Fusing motor. PCU PWB trouble.
Check connection of the fusing motor harness and Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
the connection. Shifter home position sensor trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the shift operation.
Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of the shifter
home position sensor.
L4-04 Developing motor trouble (BLACK) Replace the shift motor.
Trouble content The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of Replace the shifter home position sensor.
the developing motor.
Detail PCU
Cause Developing motor trouble
Developing motor harness and connector connection
trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Developing unit trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the
developing motor.
Replace the developing motor.
Check connection of the developing motor harness
and the connection.
Replace the developing motor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
L4-12 Secondary transfer separation trouble Replace the power cooling fan.
Trouble content A change in the separation sensor status cannot be Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
detected within the specified time in separation
operation of the secondary transfer.
Detail PCU L4-35 Fusing cooling fan trouble
Cause Secondary transfer separation mechanism trouble.
Secondary transfer separation clutch trouble. Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected.
Secondary transfer separation sensor trouble. Detail PCU
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Cause Fusing cooling fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check or repair the secondary transfer separation Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
mechanism.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
Replace the secondary transfer separation clutch.
Replace the fusing cooling fan.
Replace the secondary transfer separation sensor.
L4-16 Fusing pressure release trouble L4-43 Paper exit cooling fan 2 trouble
Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected.

Trouble content A change in the fusing pressure release sensor signal
Detail PCU
cannot be detected within the specified time after
outputting the fusing pressure release motor. Cause Paper exit cooling fan trouble. (Machine R side)
PCU PWB trouble.
Detail PCU
Cause Fusing pressure release sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the fan.
Fusing pressure release motor trouble.
Pressure release drive gear and pressure release idle
Check the connector and the harness.
gear trouble.
Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the fusing pressure release sensor.
Replace the fusing pressure release motor.
L4-50 Process fan trouble
Replace the pressure release drive gear and the
pressure release idle gear. Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected.
Replace the PCU PWB. Detail PCU
Cause Process fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
L4-30 MPF FAN Motor trouble Check & Remedy Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the
power.
Trouble content Fan operation signal is not detected. Replace the process fan.
Detail MPF Replace the PCU PWB.
Cause Fan motor trouble
MFP PWB trouble harness and connector connection
trouble
PCU PWB trouble L4-51 Process fan 2 trouble
Check & Remedy Use Sim6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor
Replace the fan motor
Replace the MFP PWB Trouble content The fan operation signal is not detected.
Check connection of the connector and the harness Detail PCU
Replace the PCU PWB Cause Fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
L4-31 Paper exit cooling fan trouble Check & Remedy Replace the fan.
Check the connector and the harness.
Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the
Detail PCU
power.
Cause Paper exit cooling fan trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
L6-10 Polygon motor trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Use SIM6-2 to check the rotating operation of the fan.
Replace the paper exit cooling fan. Trouble content The polygon motor does not reach the specified RPM
Replace the PCU PWB. within the specified time after starting rotation of the
polygon motor.
Detail PCU
L4-32 Power source cooling fan trouble Cause Polygon motor trouble.
LSU mother PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the polygon
Detail PCU
motor.
Cause Power cooling fan trouble. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
PCU PWB trouble. Replace the LSU.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Replace the LSU mother PWB.
L8-01 Full wave signal detection error P1-01 PCI fan error
Trouble content The full wave signal is not detected. Trouble content
Cause PCU PWB trouble. Cause The PCI fan operation signal is not detected.
Power unit trouble. PCI fan trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. PCI control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and harness
Replace the power unit. between the PCI fan and the PCI control PWB.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Check the PCI control PWB, and replace if
necessary.
Check the PCI fan, and replace if necessary.
L8-02 Full wave signal error
Trouble content The full wave signal is not detected.

P1-02 Plasma generating device error
Detail PCU
Cause An abnormality in the full wave signal frequency is Trouble content
detected Detail MFP
(The frequency is detected as 65Hz or above, or Cause Connection failure of connectors and harness
45Hz or less) PCU PWB trouble. between the plasma generating device and the PCI
Power unit trouble
control PWB.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
Power frequency wave form abnormality Plasma generating device trouble.
PCI control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB
Replace the power unit Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and harness
Check connection of the connector and the harness between the plasma generating device and the PCI
Check the power wave form control PWB.
Replace the plasma generating device.
Check the PCI control PWB, and replace if
L8-20 Communication error of MFPC PWB/ necessary.
LSU mother board
PC-- Personal counter not detected
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Trouble content
Cause LSU mother board PWB - MFPC PWB connection
Detail MFP
trouble.
Cause The personal counter is not installed.
MFPC PWB trouble.
The personal counter is not detected.
LSU mother board trouble.
SCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection between the LSU mother board
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
PWB and the MFPC PWB.
Check the ground of the main unit.
Replace the LSU mother board.
U1-01 Battery trouble
P1-00 PCI communication error Trouble content RTC backup battery voltage fall
Detail MFP
Trouble content Case 1 Cause 1) Battery life
Detail MFP 2) Battery circuit abnormality
Cause Communication error between the MFPC PWB and Check Check to confirm that the battery voltage is about
the PCI. and 2.5V or above.
Connection failure of connectors and harness Remedy Replace the battery.
between the MFPC PWB and the PCI.
MFPC PWB trouble.
PCI control PWB trouble. U2-00 MFP EEPROM read/write error
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and connectors
between the MFPC PWB and the PCI. Trouble content
Check the MFPC PWB, and replace if necessary.
Detail MFP
(Refer to the necessary procedures after replacement
Cause MFPC PWB EEPROM trouble
of the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and
EEPROM socket contact trouble
perform the procedures.)
MFPC PWB trouble
Check the PCI control PWB, and replace if
Strong external noises.
necessary.
Check & Remedy Replace the MFPC PWB EEPROM.
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and
perform the works.)
Check the power environment.
U2-05 HDD/MFPC PWB SRAM contents U2-30 MFPC PWB and PCU PWB
inconsistency manufacturing No. data inconsistency
Trouble content The HDD or the MFPC PWB installed is improper. Trouble content Inconsistency between the manufacturing No. saved
(Erroneous detection of account management data) in the PCU PWB and that in the MFPC PWB.
Detail MFP Detail MFP
Cause The HDD was replaced. Cause When replacing the PCU PWB or the MFPC PWB,
The MFPC PWB was replaced. the EEPROM which was mounted on the PWB before
HDD trouble replacement is not mounted on the new PWB.
MFPC PWB trouble MFPC PWB trouble
Check & Remedy (Refer to the pages on the necessary works after PCU PWB trouble
replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB in the Service Check & Remedy Check that the EEPROM is properly set.
Manual, and perform the works.) Check to confirm that the EEPROM which was
Use SIM16 to cancel the error. mounted on the PWB before replacement is mounted
on the new PWB.
U2-10 MFPC PWB SRAM user authentication (Refer to the pages on the necessary works after
index check sum error perform the works.)
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause SRAM user index information (user authentication U2-40 SD card system storage data area
basic data) check sum error. error
MFPC PWB SRAM trouble.
MFPC PWB trouble.
Strong external noises. Trouble content
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error. Detail MFP
(Index information data in the HDD are transferred to Cause A file error occurs in the SD card system storage data
the SRAM.) partition.
Replace the MFPC PWB. SD card trouble
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after MFPC PWB trouble
replacing the MFPC PWB in the Service Manual, and Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power, and the backup data in the
perform the works.) HDD are written into the SD card and the machine is
automatically booted.
U2-11 MFPC PWB EEPROM counter check Check the SD card, and replace if necessary.
sum error
U2-41 HDD system storage data area error
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Trouble content
Cause MFPC PWB EEPROM trouble
Detail MFP
EEPROM socket contact trouble
Cause A file error occurs in the HDD system saved data
MFPC PWB trouble
area, disabling backup of the saved file of the
machine adjustment values in the SD card.
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error. (The previous writing
HDD trouble
data (about the latest 8 sheets) are written into the
MFPC PWB trouble
EEPROM.)
Check & Remedy Check the HDD, and replace if necessary.
When replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB, refer
to the chapter of "Necessary works and procedures
perform the works.)
of HDD and MFPC PWB replacement."
U2-24 MFPC PWB SRAM memory user

authentication counter check sum
error
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause MFPC PWB SRAM trouble
MFPC PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error. (The check sum error
detection data are calculated again to reset the
proper check sum data.)
perform the works.)
U2-42 Machine adjustment data (system U2-80 SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
storage data area) error
Trouble content
Trouble content Detail SCU
Detail MFP Cause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble
SCU PWB trouble
Cause The saved file of the machine adjustment values in
SCU PWB EEPROM socket connection trouble
the SD card and the HDD cannot be found or is
broken. Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.
Both of the SD card set data and the HDD system Replace the SCU PWB.
saved data area are broken. Check connection of the SCU PWB EEPROM socket.
HDD trouble Check the SIM adjustment value of the following
MFPC PWB trouble items, and adjust again if they are improper.
SD card trouble • Scanner-related adjustments
• Touch panel-related adjustments
Check & Remedy Check the HDD, and replace if necessary.
Check the SD card, and replace if necessary.
When replacing the HDD, the MFPC PWB, and the
SD card, refer to the chapter of "Necessary works U2-81 SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error
and procedures of HDD, MFPC PWB, and SD card
replacement." Trouble content
Use SIM to adjust the machine again and set the
Detail SCU
adjustment values.
Cause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
Installation of non-initialized EEPROM.
SCU PWB trouble.
U2-50 HDD*1 user authentication data check EEPROM socket contact trouble.
sum error Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
Trouble content
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. (The check sum
Detail MFP error detection data are calculated again to reset the
Cause HDD trouble*1 proper check sum data.)
MFPC PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Check the data related to the check sum error U2-90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
(address book, image send system registration data
(senders record, meta data)) and register again.
Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble. Trouble content
Replace the HDD*1. Detail PCU
Replace the MFPC PWB. Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after PCU PWB trouble
replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB in the Service EEPROM socket contact trouble
Manual, and perform the works.)*1 Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM.
Check the SIM adjustment values of the engine, and
*1: SD card when no HDD is installed. adjust again if they are improper.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
U2-60 Watermark check error Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
U2-91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error
Cause Watermark data trouble
HDD trouble Trouble content
MFPC PWB trouble Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble. Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble
Use SIM49-5 to install the watermark data. PCU PWB trouble
Replace the HDD. EEPROM socket contact trouble
Replace the MFPC PWB. Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM.
(Refer to the pages on the necessary works after Replace the PCU PWB.
replacing the HDD and the MFPC PWB in the Service Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
Manual, and perform the works.) Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble. (The check sum
error detection data are calculated again to reset the
proper check sum data.)
U6-00 PCU PWB - Paper feed desk (paper U6-52 PCU PWB - Paper feed desk (paper
feed tray 3, 4) communication trouble feed tray 2) communication trouble
Trouble content Trouble content Paper feed tray 2 (desk unit) is not recognized.
Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Cause Connection failure between the machine and paper
Paper feed desk control PWB trouble feed tray 2 (desk unit)
PCU PWB trouble PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness. Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the paper feed desk control PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
U7-50 MFPC PWB - Vendor machine

U6-01 Desk paper feed tray 1 lift trouble communication error
Trouble content D1ULD does not turn ON within the specified time
Trouble content Communication error between the MFP and the serial
when lift-up operation.
vendor.
Cause D1ULD sensor trouble. Cause Improper setting of the vendor machine specifications
Desk control PWB trouble. (SIM26-3).
Lift unit trouble. Vendor machine trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. MFPC PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the D1ULD sensor. Strong external noises.
Replace the desk control PWB.
Check & Remedy Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power.
Replace the lift unit.
Check the connector and the harness in the
communication line.
Change the specifications of the vendor machine
(SIM26-3).
U6-02 Desk paper feed tray 2 lift trouble
Trouble content D2ULD does not turn ON within the specified time U7-51 Vendor machine error
when lift-up operation.
Cause D2ULD sensor trouble Detail MFP (Notification of a trouble from the serial vendor)
Desk control PWB trouble
Cause Serial vendor machine trouble.
Lift unit trouble Connector, harness connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Err.XX is displayed on the operation panel of the
PCU PWB trouble
vendor. (XX is the detail code.)
Check & Remedy Replace the D2ULD sensor. Repair the vendor machine referring to the detail code.
Check the connector and the harness in the
Replace the lift unit.
communication line.
UC-02 CPT - ASIC error
U6-10 Desk paper feed unit paper transport
Trouble content
motor trouble
Detail SCU
Cause SCU PWB trouble. (CPT-ASIC trouble.)
Trouble content Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB.
Detail PCU
Cause Desk paper feed motor trouble (motor lock, motor rpm
abnormality, over-current to the motor). UC-20 DOCC ASIC error
Desk control PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the desk Trouble content
transport motor. Detail SCU
Replace the desk control PWB. Cause SCU PWB trouble. (DOCC-ASIC trouble.)
Replace the desk paper feed motor. Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB.
U6-50 Desk - Main unit combination trouble
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Improper combination between the main unit and the
desk.
Desk control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Install a desk which is proper for the main unit mode.
(1) Descriptions on E7-91 - 94 errors
Two-digit numbers with double parentheses are added to E7-91 - 94 error codes recorded in SIM22-6 indicate the detailed contents of the
errors.
The number in each digit has its own meaning.
(Example) E7-91(**)
The upper digit of the added code indicates the job kind at the occurrence of the error.
Error The upper digit of Image Job kind at the occurrence

code the added code type of the error
E7-91 0* Other *1
1* JPEG • FAX (Internet FAX) *1
2* JBIG reception print (Other than *1
3* Mxx1ch long size images)
4* Mxx4ch
5* Other *1
6* JPEG • FAX (Internet FAX) *1
7* JBIG reception print *1
8* Mxx1ch (Long size images)
9* Mxx4ch
A* - F* Not Used *1
E7-92 0* Other *1
1* JPEG
2* JBIG • OC copy (in Non ERDH) *1
3* Mxx1ch *1
4* Mxx4ch
5* - F* Not Used *1
E7-93 0* Other *1
• Copy print (in ERDH)
1* JPEG
• Copy composing system
2* JBIG
function (Custom Stamp,
3* Mxx1ch Water mark) *1
4* Mxx4ch
5* Other *1
6* JPEG • Image send
7* JBIG • Document filing
8* Mxx1ch • Preview display
9* Mxx4ch
A* Other *1
B* JPEG • GDI/PCL printer print
• Copy composing system
C* JBIG
function (Custom Stamp,
D* Mxx1ch Water mark) *1
E* Mxx4ch
F* Not Used *1
E7-94 0* Other *1
1* JPEG
• Backup restore
2* JBIG *1
(Filing data import)
3* Mxx1ch *1
4* Mxx4ch *1
5* - F* Not Used *1
*1: Added code without generating
The lower digit of the added code indicates the kind and the content of the abnormality or the result of the automatic memory check executed
when the abnormality is detected.
Lower digit of the added code o Kind/Content of the error

*1 *9 *A *B *C *D *E *F
Memory Huffman Restart Improper Head decoding Head decoding Other
verify — code marker marker error detection error detection abnormal
NG error error error (ASIC detection) (CPU detection) termination
The upper digit of the 1*, 6*, B* JPEG —     — 
added code 2*, 7*, C* JBIG — — —   — 
p 3*, 8*, D* Mxx1ch — — — — — — 
Error detection circuit 4*, 9*, E* Mxx4ch — — — — — — 
: Added code indicating that the memory and its peripheral must be focused for check in case of an error.
: Added code indicating that doubtful sections are in a wider range such as the memory, PWB's, HDD, etc.
—: Added code without generating
(2) Countermeasures in case of E7-91 - 94 (3) Countermeasures against the case where nothing
In case of E7-9x (11), E7-9x (21), E7-9x (31), E7-9x (41) is displayed when the machine is booted
[Trouble content]
Cause In case of E7-91 - 94, the DIMM memory (DRAM) is
If nothing is displayed when the machine is booted, the error code
automatically read/written to perform a simplified
check. If an abnormality is detected in that case, the cannot be checked and the cause is hard to identify.
added code becomes (*1). One of the causes may be an abnormality in the boot program of
Therefore, there is a strong possibility that an the SD card. To check that, the following method is used.
abnormality lies around the memory.
Check and remedy • Check the installing state of the DIMM memory
[Check method]
and the MFPC PWB to insure that there is no
abnormality. (Disconnect and connect the DIMM Check to confirm that the LED (red) under the CPU heat sink on the
memory and the MFPC PWB to check to insure MFPC PWB shown in the figure below is lighted when the power is
that there is no error occurring again.) supplied.
• Use SIM60-01 (Memory read/write check) to If the LED is lighted, it is judged as an abnormality of the SD card.
check to insure that no error occurs.
• Replace the DIMM memory.
• Replace the MFPC PWB.
3$ #ARD
Since the automatic memory check executed when E7-91 - 94

occurs is a simplified check, it cannot detect an abnormality with
absolute certainty. (EAT SINK #05
If the added code is (*1), there may be a memory abnormality.

Even if it is not (*1), however, it cannot be said that there is no
abnormality around the memory.
Other added codes
Cause Mostly because the data inputted to the ASIC for 2ED ,%$
decoding are broken for some reasons.
There is an abnormality in the process of read/write [Countermeasures]
of the process data in the memory or the hard disk.
1) Replace the SD card with a new one. (Be sure to use a service
A great noise unexpectedly generated may be the
part.)
cause.
For the cases of FAX or Internet FAX reception data, 2) Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
when broken data are saved, printing is performed 3) Use SIIM66-62 to backup the FAX reception data from the
every time when the machine is booted, generating HDD to a USB memory device. (If there is no FAX reception
an error repeatedly. (E7-91)
data, this procedure is not required.) (The FAX reception data
(To clear the received data, execute SIM66-10.)
are backed up in the PDF format. Supply the date to the user.)
Check and remedy • Check the DIMM memory, the MFPC PWB, and
the HDD to insure that there is no abnormality. 4) Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX and image send memory.
• When the job at occurrence of an error is FAX (Ensure consistency between the HDD data and the image
(E7-91), check the installing state of the FAX related memory.)
control PWB and the SC CARD PWB.
• Perform SIM60-01 (Memory read/write check) to
insure that there is no NG.
• Perform SIM62-02 and SIM62-03 (HDD read/
write check) to insure that there is no NG. (It is not
required, however, when the job at occurrence of
an error is FAX.)
• Check the installing state of the DIMM memory
and the MFPC PWB to insure that there is no
abnormality. (Disconnect and connect the DIMM
memory and the MFPC PWB to check to insure
that there is no error occurring again.)
• Replace the HDD.
• Replace the FAX control PWB.
• Replace the DIMM memory.
• Replace the MFPC PWB.
• Replace the SD card.
When there is an abnormality around the HDD, E7-03 may occur.

If error E7-91 - 94 as well as E7-03 occurs, there is a high possibil-
ity that the error can be removed by replacing the HDD and the
MFPC PWB.
(4) Relation between the MFPC PWB LED status and
errors
When the machine cannot be booted, check the LED status of the
MFPC PWB to presume the error content and its cause.
<Process content and LED display>
LED status Cause for halt during
Process operation content
(Lighting) operation
 CPU initial setting Reus ASIC trouble
 Memory adjustment Memory and its
peripheral circuit trouble
  Memory check Memory and its
peripheral circuit trouble
 – –
  Program memory development Memory-related trouble
  Interruption-related initialization Reus ASIC trouble
  PCIe initialization PCIe and its peripheral
circuit trouble (SoC, etc.)
 Basic device initialization Reus ASIC trouble
 SD card initialization Reus ASIC trouble
SATA initialization SD card trouble
HDD trouble
 OS initialization (1) Reus ASIC trouble
  Timer enabling Reus ASIC trouble
 Serial driver enabling Reus ASIC trouble
I2C driver enabling
 LCD initialization Reus ASIC trouble
 Image process IP initialization Reus ASIC trouble
 OS initialization (2) Reus ASIC trouble
Main process Reus ASIC trouble
* : LED ON / : LED OFF
<When an error occurs>

LED status
Error content Cause
(Flashing)
 Nonsupport memory Memory trouble
  Nonsupport memory (access Memory trouble
speed)
 Nonsupport memory controller Memory trouble
  DDR-PHY setting error Reus ASIC trouble
  Interruption handler process Reus ASIC trouble
error
 Memory check error Memory trouble
Memory combination error Memory trouble
* In case of an error, the LED's flash as shown in the above table.

* : LED ON / : LED OFF
   
LED No D25/D24/D23/D22
3 / 2 / 1 / 0
2. JAM and troubleshooting
A. JAM code list
JAM detection method JAM

Basic JAM margin
detection
JAM code JAM content distance (A) distance (B)
JAM detection start trigger JAM judgment condition distance
[mm] [mm]
(A+B) [mm]
TRAY1 Main cassette paper feed JAM CPUC1 ON CPFD1 ON 103.4 65.0 168.4
(CPFD1 not-reached JAM)
CPFD1_N2 CPFD1 not-reached JAM CPFD2 ON CPFD1 ON 99.1 65.0 164.1
(Main cassette 2 feed paper)
(Desk upper stage feed paper)
(Desk lower stage feed paper)
TRAY2 CPFD2 not-reached JAM CPUC2 ON CPFD2 ON 103.4 65.0 168.4
CPFD2_N3 CPFD2 not-reached JAM Reception of the paper feed CPFD2 ON 35.5 65.0 100.5
(Desk upper stage feed paper) start command from DESK
(At position 45mm from the
final roller of the DESK.)
CPFD2_N4 CPFD2 not-reached JAM Reception of the paper feed CPFD2 ON 35.5 65.0 100.5
(Desk lower stage feed paper) start command from DESK
(At position 45mm from the
final roller of the DESK.)
MFT Manual feed tray paper feed MPFS ON PPD1 ON 83.2 65.0 148.2
JAM
(PPD1 not-reached)
PPD1_N1 PPD1 not-reached JAM CPFD1 ON PPD1 ON 151.9 65.0 216.9
(Cassette 1 feed paper)
PPD1_NA PPD1 not-reached JAM APPD2 ON PPD1 ON 135.7 65.0 200.7
(ADU refeed paper)
PPD1_NL PPD1 not-reached JAM Reception of the paper feed PPD1 ON 141.7 65.0 206.7
(LCC feed paper) start command from LCC
(Extension amount 19mm
position)
(Main cassette feed paper)
PPD2_NM PPD2 not-reached JAM PPD1 ON PPD2 ON 70.4 65.0 135.4
(Manual feed tray feed paper)
PPD2_NA PPD2 not-reached JAM PPD1 ON PPD2 ON 70.4 65.0 135.4
(ADU refeed paper)
PPD2_NL PPD2 not-reached JAM PPD1 ON PPD2 ON 71.9 65.0 136.9
(LCC feed paper)
POD1_N POD1 not-reached JAM RRM ON POD1 ON 242.4 50.0 292.4
POD2_N POD2 not-reached JAM POD1 ON POD2 ON 92.2 65.0 157.2
POD3_N POD3 not-reached JAM Reversing start POD3 ON 53.7 65.0 118.7
APPD1_N APPD1 not-reached JAM Reversing start APPD1 ON 39.3 65.0 104.3
APPD2_N APPD2 not-reached JAM APPD1 ON APPD2 ON 226.3 65.0 291.3
CPFD1_S1 CPFD1 remaining JAM CPUC1 OFF CPFD1 OFF 144.4 65.0 209.4
(Main cassette paper)
CPFD1_S2 CPFD1 remaining JAM CPFD2 OFF CPFD1 OFF 96.8 65.0 161.8
CPFD2_S2 CPFD2 remaining JAM CPUC2 OFF CPFD2 OFF 144.4 65.0 209.4
CPFD2_S3 CPFD2 remaining JAM Reception of the paper feed CPFD2 OFF 89.2 65.0 154.2
(Desk upper stage feed paper) end command from DESK
(The final roller position of
DSEK)
Basic JAM margin
detection
[mm] [mm]
(A+B) [mm]
CPFD2_S4 CPFD2 remaining JAM Reception of the paper feed CPFD2 OFF 89.2 65.0 154.2
(Desk lower stage feed paper) end command from DESK
(The final roller position of
DSEK)
PPD1_S1 PPD1 remaining JAM CPFD1 OFF PPD1 OFF 149.9 65.0 214.9
(Main cassette paper)
PPD1_SM PPD1 remaining JAM PPD1 ON PPD1 OFF Sub scan 65.0 Sub scan
(Manual feed tray feed paper) size size
–9 –9 + 65
PPD1_SA PPD1 remaining JAM APPD2 OFF PPD1 OFF 131.1 65.0 196.1
(ADU refeed paper)
PPD1_SL PPD1 remaining JAM Reception of the paper feed PPD1 OFF 179.1 65.0 244.1
(LCC refeed paper) end command from LCC
(LPFD OFF)
PPD2_S1 PPD2 remaining JAM PPD1 OFF PPD2 OFF 62.9 65.0 127.9
(Main cassette feed paper)
PPD2_SM PPD2 remaining JAM PPD1 OFF PPD2 OFF 61.4 65.0 126.4
(Manual feed tray feed paper)
PPD2_SA PPD2 remaining JAM PPD1 OFF PPD2 OFF 61.4 65.0 126.4
(ADU refeed paper)
PPD2_SL PPD2 remaining JAM PPD1 OFF PPD2 OFF 62.9 65.0 127.9
(LCC feed paper)
POD1_S POD1 remaining JAM PPD2 OFF POD1 OFF 297.6 65.0 362.6
POD2_S POD2 remaining JAM POD1 OFF POD2 OFF 90.2 65.0 155.2
(When left paper exit)
POD2 remaining JAM Reversing start POD2 OFF after starting Sub scan 65.0 Sub scan
(When ADU reversing) reversing size size
–60.6 –60.6 + 65
POD3_S POD3 remaining JAM POD2 OFF after starting POD3 OFF 68.9 65.0 133.9
reversing
APPD1_S APPD1 remaining JAM POD2 OFF after starting APPD1 OFF 111.0 65.0 176.0
reversing
APPD2_S APPD2 remaining JAM APPD1 OFF APPD2 OFF 228.8 65.0 293.8
PPD2_PRI PPD2 JAM Transmission of the Reception time-out of the — — —
(Image preparation wait time- IMAGE_PREPARE command END_IMAGE_PREPARE
out) to ICU command from ICU (50 sec)
CPFD2_ CPFD2 JAM Transmission of the Reception time-out of the — — —
DESK (Desk communication preliminary paper feed request preliminary paper feed start
abnormality detection) command to DESK command from DESK (30 sec)
Reception of the preliminary Reception time-out of the — — —
paper feed start command preliminary paper feed end
from DESK command from DESK (30 sec)
Transmission of the paper Reception time-out of the — — —
feed request command to paper feed start command
DESK from DESK (30 sec)
Reception of the paper feed Reception time-out of the — — —
start command from DESK paper feed end command
from DESK (30 sec)
PPD1_LCC PPD1 JAM Transmission of the Reception time-out of the — — —
(LCC communication preliminary paper feed request preliminary paper feed start
abnormality detection) command to LCC command from LCC (30 sec)
Reception of the preliminary Reception time-out of the — — —
paper feed start command preliminary paper feed end
from LCC command from LCC (30 sec)
Transmission of the paper Reception time-out of the — — —
feed request command to paper feed start command
LCC from LCC (30 sec)
Reception of the paper feed Reception time-out of the — — —
start command from LCC paper feed end command
from LCC (30 sec)
Basic JAM margin
detection
[mm] [mm]
(A+B) [mm]
PPD2_FIN PPD2 JAM Transmission of the paper Reception time-out of the — — —
(Finisher communication attribute data command to paper interval data command
abnormality detection) FINISHER from FINISHER (30 sec)
(1) RSPF
JAM detection method JAM margin JAM detection

Basic distance
JAM code JAM content distance (B) distance (A+B)
JAM detection start trigger JAM judgment condition (A) [mm]
[mm] [mm]
SPPD1_N SPPD1 not-reached Paper feed start SPPD1 ON 51.5 450.0 501.5
JAM (When the document width is
more than B5 size.)
SPPD2_N SPPD2 not-reached Paper feed start SPPD2 ON 90.2 450.0 540.2
JAM (When the document width is
less than B5 size.)
SPPD1 ON SPPD2 ON 38.7 50.0 88.7
(When the document width is
more than B5 size.)
SPPD3_N SPPD3 not-reached Restart at the temporal stop SPPD3 ON 23.7 50.0 73.7
JAM position
SPPD4_N SPPD4 not-reached SPPD3 ON SPPD4 ON 149.1 50.0 199.1
JAM
SPPD2_NR SPPD2 reverse not- Reversing start SPPD2 ON 85.5 50.0 135.5
reached JAM
SPPD1_S SPPD1 remaining SPPD1 ON SPPD1 OFF Normal mode: 50.0 Normal mode:
JAM (When the document width is 431.8mm 481.8mm
more than B5 size.) Long size mode: Long size mode:
1000mm/ 1050mm/
800mm (18cpm/ 850mm (18cpm/
20cpm/23cpm 20cpm/23cpm
model 600dpi model 600dpi
mode) mode)
SPPD2_S SPPD2 remaining SPPD2 ON SPPD2 OFF Normal mode: 50.0 Normal mode:
JAM (When the document width is 431.8mm 481.8mm
less than B5 size.) Long size mode: Long size mode:
1000mm/ 1050mm/
800mm (18cpm/ 850mm (18cpm/
20cpm/23cpm 20cpm/23cpm
model 600dpi model 600dpi
mode) mode)
SPPD1 OFF SPPD2 OFF 37.8 50.0 87.8
(When the document width is
more than B5 size.)
SPPD3_S SPPD3 remaining SPPD2 OFF SPPD3 OFF 68.8 50.0 118.8
JAM
SPPD4_S SPPD4 remaining SPPD3 OFF SPPD4 OFF 153.3 50.0 203.3
JAM
SPPD2_SR SPPD2 reverse SPPD4 OFF SPPD2 OFF 100.9 50.0 150.9
remaining JAM
SPSD_SCN Exposure start Arrival at temporal stop Exposure start command from — — —
notification timer end position ICU to SCU no reception time-
out (120 sec)
P_SHORT Short size JAM SPPD3 ON When the document length is — — —
less than 120.0mm.
SDFS_S Paper JAM Start of the light quantity When canceling of the light — — —
correction between papers quantity correction between
papers does not make it in
time.
ICU_REQ ICU factor stop JAM — Stop by a job stop request — — —
commend from ICU to SCU
STOP_JAM Emergency stop JAM — Trouble mode transition — — —
request from ICU to SCU
Emergency stop by a
command
(2) Desk
JAM detection method

JAM code JAM content
JAM detection start trigger JAM judgment condition
TRAY3 Casette 3 (Desk 1) paper feed JAM D1PFC ON (Paper feed start) D1PPD does not turn ON within the specified time.
DPFD1_N4 DPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper) D2PPD ON D1PPD does not turn ON within the specified time.
JAM detection method
JAM code JAM content
JAM detection start trigger JAM judgment condition
DPFD1_S3 DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper) D1PPD ON D1PPD does not turn OFF within the specified time.
DPFD1_S4 DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper) D2PPD OFF D1PPD does not turn OFF within the specified time.
DPFD2_S4 DPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper) D2PPD ON D2PPD does not turn OFF within the specified time.
TRAY4 Casette 4 (Desk 2) paper feed JAM D2PFC ON (Paper feed start) D2PPD does not turn ON within the specified time.
(3) Inner finisher
JAM detection method JAM margin JAM detection

Basic distance
JAM code JAM content JAM detection start distance (B) distance (A+B)
JAM judgment condition (A) [mm]
trigger [mm] [mm]
FPPD1_N Finisher inlet port Machine paper exit FPPD1 does not turn ON within the 134.602 [mm] 400 [mm] 534.602 [mm]
not-reached JAM command reception specified time.
FPPD1_S Finisher inlet port FPPD1 ON FPPD1 does not turn OFF within 464.803 [mm] 50 [mm] 514.803 [mm]
remaining JAM the specified time.
(When Long-size paper
support OFF)
Finisher inlet port FPPD1 ON FPPD1 does not turn OFF within 1207.803 [mm] 50 [mm] 1257.803 [mm]
remaining JAM the specified time.
(When Long-size paper
support ON)
FPDD_S Bundle exit remaining Driving the bundle exit FSTPD does not turn OFF within 133.1 [mm] 13.66 [mm] 146.76 [mm]
JAM roller is started. the specified time.
FIN_TIME Finisher paper early FPPD1 ON by the FPPD1 of the next paper turns ON Specified paper 30 [mm] (Paper interval
reaching JAM prior paper detection at the timing earlier than the interval time time) - (Paper
specified paper interval. transport time
of 30 [mm])
[msec]
FSTPD_S Finisher paper exit Driving the paper exit FSTPD does not turn OFF within 96.76 [mm] 50 [mm] 146.76 [mm]
remaining JAM roller in the straight the specified time.
mode is started.
FSTPLJ Staple JAM FSHPS OFF after FSHPS does not turn ON within the 350 [msec] 250 [msec] 600 [msec]
FSM ON specified time.
3. Image send communication report code
A. Outline and code system descriptions B. Details
After completion of communication, the communication report (1) Communication report main code
table, the communication management table, and the protocol are
described on the communication report column. Report Final receive signal
Final receive signal (Receive side)
The communication report code is composed as follows: code (Send side)
0 Abnormal signal Abnormal signal
Communication report: XX (XXXX)
1 NSF, DIS (SID), (SUB), NSS, DCS
The upper 2 digits of the communication report code:
2 CFR (PWD), (SEP), NSC, DTC
Communication report code of 00 – 99 (Refer to communication
3 FTT EOP
report main code.)
4 MCF EOM
The lower 4 digits of the communication report code: 5 PIP, PIN MPS
Used by the serviceman. 6 RTN, RTP PRI-Q
The upper 2 digits: Communication report sub code 1 (Refer to 7 No signal, DCN DCN
communication report sub code 1.) 8 PPR PPS-EOP
The lower 2 digits: Communication report sub code 2 (Refer to 9 PPS-EOM
communication report sub code 2.) 10 PPS-MPS, PPS-NULL
11 RNR RR
12 CTR CTC
13 ERR EOR-Q
The communication report sub code 1 and sub code 2 are in hexa-
14 PPS-PRI-Q
decimal notation. (The others are in decimal notation.)
16 Abnormal signal Abnormal signal
17 NSF, DIS SID, SUB, NSS, DCS
18 CFR PWD, SEP, NSC, DTC
The communication report sub code 1 is not used in the these mod- 19 FTT PPS-EOP
els. 20 MCF PPS-EOM
21 PIP, PIN PPS-MPS, PPS-NULL
22 RTN, RTP PRI-Q
23 No signal, DCN DCN
24 PPR
25 RNR RR
26 CTR CTC
27 ERR EOR-Q
28 PPS-PRI-Q
29 V.8 Phase-1 V.8 Phase-1
For report codes 16 – 31, V.34 MODE COMMUNICATION.
Report code
Display in the column of
(Communication Content of communication interruption
result
result)
0 – 31 Refer to “previous table”. Depends on the point of communication interruption. For 16 or later, V.34 mode communication.
33 BUSY The calling side cannot establish connection with the remote party.
34 CANCEL A communication interruption command is made during sending/receiving. The interruption key is pressed for
interruption of input. <Send/Receive/Polling/Bulletin board>
35 NG35 XXXX Power is failed during sending/receiving. <Send/Receive/Polling/Bulletin board>
36 (No record paper)
37 (Record paper jam)
38 MEM. FULL Memory over during reception. <Receive/Polling>
Print is not made during reception in acting reception inhibit. <Receive/Polling>
39 (Number of paper
unmatched)
40 (Relay not received)
41 LENGTH OVER The send data length of one page exceeds the limit (2m) in sending. <Send/Bulletin board>
42 LENGTH OVER The receive data length of one page exceeds the limit. <Receive/Polling>
43 (Communication) (OK) Speaking before data transmission
44 ORIGINAL ERROR A document jam occurs in direct sending. <Send>
45 (Picture quality error)
46 NO RESPONSE The FAX signal from the remote party is not detected within T1 time. <Send/Polling>
(When in recall, however, the recall setting in case of a communication error is valid.)
47 TX DECODE ERROR A decode error occurs in the FAX board. <Send/Bulletin board>
48 OK Normal end of communication
OK REPLY RECEIVE OK in Internet FAX send with reception confirmation.
49 NO RX POLL The called side does not have polling function in polling reception. <Polling>
The called side has no data to send. <Polling>
50 RX POLL FAIL In polling reception, DCN is received for DTC. <Polling>
In polling sending, there is no send data. <Bulletin board>
Report code
result
result)
51 PASS # NG In poling sending, the allow number is not matched. <Bulletin board>
In polling sending, the system number is not matched. <Bulletin board>
52 (No confidential function in In confidential sending, the remote party does not have confidential function. <Send>
remote party) (Including other company's machines)
1) The NSF signal has not "Confidential function" bit.
2) The NSF is not a Sharp machine.
53 (Confidential not received) 1) In confidential sending, DCN is received for NSS. <Send>
54 (Confidential BOX NO NG) 1) In confidential reception, a confidential box number which is not registered is specified.
55 (No relay function in In relay command sending, the remote machine has no relay function. <Send>
remote party) (Including other company's machine)
1) The NSF signal has not "Confidential function" bit.
2) The NSF is not a Sharp machine.
56 NO REL RX 1) In relay command sending, DCN is received for NSS. <Send>
2) In relay command reception, a remote station number which is not registered is specified. <Receive>
3) In F code relay broadcasting, an F code relay command is received.<Receive>
57 (Relay ID unmatched) 1) In relay command reception, the relay ID does not match. <Receive>
58 REJECTED In reception, data are sent from a remote machine of receive inhibit number. <Receive>
(Not rejected in the bulletin board send or the F code bulletin board send.)
59 RX NO F-CODE POLL In F code polling (calling), the remote machine has no DIS bit 47 (polling function). <Polling>
In F code polling (calling), the called side has no send data. (DIS bit 9 is 0.)<Polling>
60 NO F-CODE POLL In F code polling (calling), DCN is received for SEP. <Polling>
In bulletin board, there is no send data for SEP. <Bulletin board>
61 RX POLL # NG In bulletin board, the sub address (bulletin board number (SEP)) is not matched. <Bulletin board>
62 F POLL PASS # NG In bulleting board, the pass code (PWD) is not matched. <Bulletin board>
63 NO F FUNC In F code sending, the remote machine has no DIS bit 49 (sub address function). <Send>
(Check that the remote machine conforms to F code.)
64 NO F-CODE In F code sending : <Send>
1) DCN is received for SUB. --- Check the box number.
2) DCN is received for SID. --- Check the box number and pass code.
In F code receiving : <Receive>

"F code relay broadcasting" or "F code confidential reception" is "Inhibited with soft SW."
67 F PASS # NG In F code receiving, the pass code (SID) is not matched. <Receive>
68 BOX NO. NG In F code reception, a box number which is not registered is specified. (SUB is not matched.) <Receive>
69 MEMORY OVER Memory over in quick online sending <Send>
70 (JOB MEMORY OVER) In PC-FAX reservation, the number of remote parties is exceeded. <Send>
71 NG71 XXXX *1 In PC-FAX reservation, data sent from PC includes some errors. <Send>
72 (NG72 XXXX) *1 In department management setting on the machine side:
• In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, a department number which is not registered on the
machine side is specified. <Send>
• In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the department number is not specified. <Send>
73 NG73 XXXX *1 In reservation from PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the use quantity limit is exceeded. <Send>
74 NG74 XXXX *1 When reserving specified filing in document filing in PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX;
• The pass-code for the folder is set on the machine side and the pass-code from PC-XXX does not match
with it. <Send>
• The pass-code for the folder is set on the machine side and no pass-code is specified by PC-XXX. <Send>
75 NG75 XXXX *1 • Reservation cannot be made due to machine busy. (Reservation of PC-FAX cannot be accepted.)
• When "PC-FAX or PC-internet FAX send inhibit" is set on the machine side.
76 NG76 XXXX *1 Reserved with receive confirmation request in PC-Internet FAX, but the Internet FAX sender is not registered
on the machine side. <Send>
77 NG77 XXXX *1 In reserving specified filing in PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX, the machine has no filing function.
78 NG78 XXXX *1 The filing function is inhibited on the machine side when filing specification is reserved by PC-FAX or PC-
Internet FAX.
79 NG79 XXXX *1 An authentication error occurs when PC-FAX or PC-Internet FAX is reserved.
80 NG80 XXXX *1 NIC connect failure (network abnormality)
• Check for disconnection of cables.
• A network trouble (CE-XX) occurs.
• The port is set to DISABLE.
• Authentication of the POP server is failed when POP before SMTP is enabled.
• When an error other than the communication result code 93 or 94 in D-SMTP send (including error
response of 5XX)
81 NG REPORT In Internet FAX send, reply of receive confirmation of the remote machine is not normal. (Including PC-Internet
FAX).
• Error of the disposition-modifier.
• The disposition modifier is not in an error, and the disposition type is other than displayed, dispatched, or
processed.
82 NO REPORT In Internet FAX send, time-out occurs in waiting for receive confirmation from the remote machine. (Including
PC-Internet FAX).
• In a case where send confirmation wait time-out time is other than 0, when send confirmation reply from an
Internet FAX destination is not received.
• Recalls of the set number of recalls are performed, but send confirmation reply from an internet FAX
destination is not received.
83 NG LIMIT In E-mail/FTP, Internet FAX send, the send data size exceeds the upper limit of send data.
Report code
result
result)
84 REJECTED In e-mail receive, a sender is registered in receive reject address/domain. <Receive>
85 NG85 XXXX *1 In e-mail receive, an error occurs in communication with POP3 server.
• Header acquisition error.
• Time-out during mail receive
86 RECEIVED In e-mail receive, an unsupported attached file is received.
Only the TIFF-F type is supported for attached files.
• The TIFF-F type of the attached file cannot be recognized.
• There is no attached file.
87 NG87 XXXX *1 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory.
• Memory over
88 NG88 XXXX *1 In SMTP e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory.
• Cannot be stored in memory.
• The number of items of acting receive data is the maximum, and an additional data cannot be stored.
89 NG89 XXXX *1 In SMTP e-mail receive, an error occurs in communication with the mail server.
• Time-out occurs during e-mail receive.
90 NG90 XXXX *1 After reservation by re-operation of document filing, conversion for image send cannot be made.
91 NG91 XXXX *1 *2 Data cannot be written to the memory device when Scan To USB is executed.
• The memory device is disconnected during writing to the memory device.
• An error occurs due to a memory device trouble.
92 NG92 XXXX *1 *2 The USB device memory overflows during writing data into the memory device when "Scan to USB" is
executed.
93 NG93 XXXX *1 When error in D-SMTP send (with recall)
• An error response of 4XX occurs during communication with the SMTP server.
• Time out occurs after establishment of connection with the SMTP server.
94 NG94 XXXX *1 When busy in D-SMTP send
Time out occurs during establishment of connection with the SMTP server.
95 NG95 XXXX *1 When the path is too long in execution of Scan To USB.
96 NG96 XXXX *1 When the normal process is not executed in the secure mail sending.
98 NG98 XXXX *1 The copy inhibit pattern is detected when scanning a document.
99 NG99 XXXX *1 A document which is inhibited to be copied such as a banknote is scanned.
*1: For a job status result in "Display in the column of result," "NG XXXX" is displayed. " " is the code number.
For a communication result, "Communication error (XXXX)" is displayed.
*2: The error code of Scan To USB is specified only in the job log.
• When the communication result is OK, the communication sub code 1 and the communication sub code 2 are "0000."
• Errors in ( ) are not used.
(2) Communication report sub code 1
The communication report sub code 1 (upper 2 digits) are always
indicated as "00."
(3) Communication report sub code 2
Report code 2 Content of communication interruption Send/Receive

00 When the conditions after 01 do not apply. Send/Receive
01 Send length over Send
02 EOL time up Receive
03 Carrier detection time up Receive
04 Time up of the communication start command from the machine side Receive
05 Time up in phase C (8 min) Send
06 Memory image decode error Receive
07 Memory image decode error Send
08 Time up between frames in phase C (Report code is 0 or 16.) Send/Receive
09 Not used —
10 Not used —
11 Polarity reversion detection Receive
12 Invalid command reception Receive
13 Time up (1-minute timer/6-second time) Receive
14 PUT error Receive
15 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Primary to Control. Receive
16 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Control to Primary. Receive
17 Command receive time-up from MFP controller Receive
18 Not used —
19 Not used —
20 Polarity reversion detection Send
21 Invalid command reception Send
22 Fallback retry number over Send
23 Command retry number resend over Send
24 Time up (T5 timer) Send
25 Time up (T5 timer) in V.34 mode Send
26 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Primary to Control. Send
Report code 2 Content of communication interruption Send/Receive
27 In V.34 mode, time up is generated when shifting from Control to Primary. Send
28 When sending the FSK signal, no response of send completion is sent back from the MODEM chip within a certain time. Send
(V.34, other than V.34)
29 Not used —
30 A communication error is generated between MFP controller and Modem controller. (Report code is 0 or 16.) —
31 DC current not detected (busy) Send
32 Dial tone not detected (busy) Send
33 Busy tone detection (busy) Send
34 T0 time up (Remote machine not responding) Send
35 T1 time up (Remote machine not responding) Send
36 In dialing, polarity reversion detection (Remote machine not responding) Send
37 Calling is not made (busy)<Collision detected (including CNG detection)> Send
38 Not used —
60 In resend of document filed data, an error occurs in decoding or coding. Resend
61 In resend of document filed data, setting to inhibit resolution conversion is made. (The resolution after resend is set to be Resend
Enlarged.)
62 In resend of document filed data, rotation setting is made for data which cannot be rotated. Resend
63 In resend of document filed data, data cannot be stored in HD after conversion of resolution for resend. Resend
64 In resending data of document file, during conversion for resending, the number of IMS management pages exceeds the Resend
upper limit (999). (IT occurs in OSA Scan to FTP also, resulting in memory over.) OSAScanToFTP
70 E-mail header acquisition error E-mail receive
71 Time out occurs during e-mail receive. E-mail receive
72 Receive reject occurs during e-mail receive. E-mail receive
73 Network communication cannot be made due to port disable. Network send
74 An authentication of the POP server is failed when POP before SMTP is enabled. Network send
75 In the setting of SSL communication, when SSL communication is tried but the server side does not support SSL. Network send
76 There is no image in network communication (transfer). Network send
80 There is no attached file in received e-mail. E-mail receive
81 The attached file of received e-mail is not of TIFF type which is supported. E-mail receive
82 The TIFF type of the attached file in received e-mail cannot be recognized. E-mail receive
ID error
Endian error
Version error
Tag data error
Tag parameter error
Header size error
Data error
90 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
Memory over.
Cannot be stored in memory.
91 In e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
The file size is too great to be stored in memory.
92 In SMTP e-mail receive, an attached file cannot be stored in memory. E-mail receive
Cannot be stored in memory.
When the sub code 2 is "08" or "30" and the communication report is "OK," the report code is "00" or "16."
4. Dial tone
When shipping from the factory, the dial tone detection when sending is set to Enable (changed from OFF to ON). When installing this machine,
be sure to check and confirm that the dial tone is properly detected and the auto dial sending is enabled.
Check to confirm that the continuous buzzer sound is heard when the on-hook key is pressed. (Press the on-hook key again to cancel the
buzzer sound.)
If facsimile communication cannot be executed normally through the IP telephone line, try the general telephone line.
MX-3115N
[8] FIRMWARE UPDATE 6HUYLFH0DQXDO
1. Outline
A. Cases where update is required C. Update procedures and kinds of firmware
ROM update is required in the following cases: There are following methods of update of the firmware.
1) When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance. 1) Update method using SIM 49-1
2) When installing a new spare part ROM for repair to the 2) Update method using FTP
machine. 3) Update method using the Web page
3) When installing a new spare parts PWB unit (with ROM) for 4) Update method using the CN update function (There are three
repair to the machine. methods.)
4) When there is a trouble in the ROM program and it must be Normally, one of 1) - 3) is used to update the firmware.
repaired. When any one of 1) - 3) is interrupted by an error such as
B. Notes for update power-off during updating, etc., and when retries of these
methods are failed, the method 4) is employed.
(1) Relationship between each ROM and update Firmware types
Before execution of ROM update, check combinations with ROM’s
The firmware type can be displayed by SIM22-5.
installed in the other PWB’s including options. Some combinations
of each ROM’s versions may cause malfunctions of the machine. Use SIM22-5 to check the firmware type.
2. Update procedure
A. Update method using SIM 49-1
For the update, connect the media or USB memory to the USB port that exists in the main body, and select the firmware data in the media or
USB memory by simulation screen in the main unit.
Media
Firmware.sfu Adapter
USB Host
Firmware.sfu +
Firmware.sfu USB memory
Firmware.sfu The machine detects the media

and executes the program automatically.
*1:
• Store the firmware data (xxx .sfu) to the media or USB memory beforehand.
• The media used for the update must have an enouch capacity for storing the firmware data.
• The USB memory equipped with the security (secure) function cannot be used.
MX-3115N FIRMWARE UPDATE 8 – 1

Execution of the firmware by SIM49-01 5) Press [EXECUTE] key. “ARE YOU SURE? [YES] [NO]”
1) Insert the media or USB memory which stores the firmware becomes clear. Press [YES] key to start the update of selected
into the main unit. (Be sure to use the USB I/F on the operation firemware.
panel.)
2) Enter the SIM49-01.
Press the key of the file to be updated. The screen transfers to
the update screen.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(>XVEEG@
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
),/( ',5!)2/'(5
The progress is displayed on right side of "FIRMWARE

UPDATE" title by 20 steps.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
* The number of key changes according to the number of the 6 (
sfu file in the media or USB memory inserted. 5(0$,16)25 0,187(6

&$87,21'212732:(52))7+(0)3),50:$5(83'$7(,1352*5(66
* If the media or USB memory was not inserted when entry to
the SIM49-01 screen, "INSERT A USB MEMORY DEVICE
CONTAINING MFP FIRMWARE [OK]" is displayed on the
screen. Insert the media or USB memory and push the [OK]
key to open the file. If the media have not been inserted and
[OK] key is pushed, the next screen does not appear and the
screen waits the entry. Conversely, if the media or USB
memory is pulled out on the file list screen, the error is
detected by the [FILE] key pressing, and the first screen
appears. At this time, only the progress gauge is displayed on the
screen, and the version and the firmware selection key are not
3) Current version number and the version number to be updated
displayed.
will be shown for each firmware respectively.
6) If the update is normal completion, following screen is dis-
played.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
&203/(7(3/($6(728&+>2.@72),1,6+
4) Press [ALL] key. 2.
All the firmware programs are selected.

Press [OK] key. (The machine is rebooted.)
Go to SIM22-05 and confirm the firmware has upgraded suc-
cessfully.
7) If the update is not normal completion, following screen is dis-
played.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
(55253/($6(728&+>2.@72),1,6+
,&803&806&8%
* Normally select all the firmwares and execute updating.

* In this case, firmwares which do not exist on the machine
side are ignored.
To update a certain firmware only, select the firmware with 2.
the firmware display key.

* If firmware's key is not selected, [EXECUTE] key is gray out
and cannot be pressed.

B. Firmware update using FTP
FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension ".sfu") from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identi-
fier and the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.
Machine 1 Machine 3
10.36.112.83 10.36.112.84
Firmware.sfu
Machine 2 Machine 4
FTP Client
10.36.101.52 10.36.101.53
C. Firmware update using the Web page 4) When the firmware update is finished, "Firmware Update com-
pleted. Please reboot the MFP." appears. Pressing the
An Web browser (service technician’s Web page) is used to update
[Reboot] key, the machine will restart to complete the update.
the firmware.
The browser will shift to the following screen.
1) Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A
special firmware upgrade page appears.
2) Click the "Update of Firmware" key in the Web page. Click the
[Browse] key and select the firmware for the update.
MX-XXXX
"Close the browser and open again to display latest informa-

tion." will be displayed.
5) Check the firmware version of machine again.
3) After selecting the file, click the [Submit] key to send the firm-
ware to the machine. Update processing begins. While pro-
cessing takes place, "Firmware Update, now processing..."
appears.

D. Firmware update using the CN update function d. Keys used in the CN update mode
(There are three methods.) The following two keys are used for operations in the CN update
mode. Be careful that the functions of the keys differ those in the
(1) Outline normal mode.
The update method using the DIP SW of the MFP PWB is called
the CN update.
;50= ;"!#+=
a. Function
There are the following three functions in the CN update mode. 02).4
2%!$9
• Firmware update function $!4!
)-!'% 3%.$
,).%
$!4!
This function is used to update the firmware by transferring data ,/'/54
from the PC which is connected to the MFP PWB, the SCU

PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX PWB, and various options by
means of a USB memory or USB cable. ;-%.5=
;$/7.= ;/+=
This is basically the same as SIM49-01, but differs in the follow-
ing points:
Key name Functions in the CN update mode
When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a sec-
[OK] key Executes the selected function or item.
tion other than the boot program for some reasons during firm- [MENU] key Selects a menu.
ware update operation of other method than the CN update, this
[BACK] key Selects a menu.
method can be used to update the firmware. (Serves as a cancel key in the execution check screen.)
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the SD [UP] key Selects an item.
card and CompactFlash must be replaced with a new one having [DOWN] key Selects an item.
the normal boot program.
If the boot animation is not displayed, there is an abnormality in (2) Operating procedures
the boot program. a. Firmware update function
If the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is not This function is used to revise the firmware by using the USB mem-
displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormality in ory for the MFP PWB, the SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX
the main program. PWB, and each option.
• Firmware version check function It is basically same as SIM 49-01, but differs in the following points.
(The method to check the firmware version by using SIM22-5 is • The update target ROM is automatically selected.
easier than this method. Therefore, it is not described in this • When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a sec-
manual.) tion other than the boot program for some reasons during firm-
b. Purpose ware update operation of other method than the CN update.
This function is used in the following cases: If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, this method
• When an error occurs during firmware update operation other cannot be used. On that case, the SD card and CompactFlash
than the CN update. must be replaced with a new one having the normal boot program.
• When the power is shut down or an error occurs in a section When the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is
other than the boot program for some reasons during firmware not displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormality in
update operation of other method than the CN update, this the main program (SD card or CompactFlash).
method can be used to update the firmware. a-1. Necessary items
If an error occurs in the boot program, this method cannot be used. 1) Insert the SD card and CompactFlash to the MFP PWB of the
In such a case, the SD card and CompactFlash must be replaced machine.
with a new one having the normal boot program. 2) USB memory with the firmware file (SFU) saved in it.
c. DIP-SW used in the CN update mode NOTE: Save the firmware file in the main directory or in a one-level
To enter the CN update mode, turn ON the UPDATE DIP-SW on lower directory.
the MFP PWB and boot the machine.
a-2. Procedures
When terminating the CN update mode, reset UPDATE DIP-SW to
1) Turn OFF the power, and remove the cabinet and the MFP
OFF (normal mode).
PWB cover.
2) Turn ON the DIP SW of the MFP PWB UP DATE.
3) Install the USB memory into the USB port.
USB memory installing position
53" PORT
4) Turn ON the power.

5) Check to confirm that the machine starts booting. (It takes 11) Check the update result.
more than ten seconds to display the menu.) Use [UP] key and [DOWN] key to display the results of all the
Display when booting is completed firmware programs.
Display of the firmware update result
Update Program Init Firm Update IcuM Firm Update IcuM Firm Update IcuM
Please wait Result : OK Result : Not Update Result : NG
• OK: Update is completed successfully.

• NG: Update is failed.
Version Check • Not Update: Update is not executed.
Conf : 00050000 12) Turn OFF the power.
13) Turn OFF the DIP SW of the MFP PWB UP DATE. (Set the
DIP-SW to the normal mode.)
6) Select the firmware update mode.
14) Turn ON the power, and check to confirm that the machine
Select the update mode with [MENU] key and [BACK] key. boots up normally.
Display of the firmware update mode Check to confirm that the boot animation is displayed.
Check to confirm that "Copying is enabled" is displayed on the
Firm Update copier basic menu.
15) Check to confirm the version of each firmware with SIM22-5.
From USB Memory
16) Attach the MFP PWB cover and the cabinet.
7) Press [OK] key.

The firmware file saved in the USB memory is retrieved, and
the file selection menu is displayed.
Display of file selection
Firm Update
> F 0100P000.sfu
8) Select the firmware file (SFU).

Select the target firmware file (SFU) with [UP] key and
[DOWN] key.
When [OK] key is pressed with a directory name (the head: ">
D") displayed, the menu goes to the one-stage lower directory.
When [BACK] key is pressed in the lower-stage directory, the
menu returns to the original upper directory.
9) Press [OK] key.
The selected firmware file (SFU) is read. It takes about one
minute.
Display of file reading
Firm Update
Reading Data
10) After completion of reading, the firmware update process is

continued.
Display of the firmware update process
Firm Update IcuM

Writing Data
* The abbreviated name of the firmware which is under

update process is indicated on the right upper corner of the
display.
* During the update process, the display may flash instanta-
neously. It is a normal operation.

MX-3115N
[9] MAINTENANCE 6HUYLFH0DQXDO
1. Works necessary when executing the maintenance

A. Counter check
Before execution of the maintenance, execute SIM22 to check the
counter values of the following counters to confirm consuming
states of each section.
1) Each consumable part counter
2) Each unit counter
3) Trouble counter, JAM counter
B. Counter reset
When a part or consumable part is replaced with new one in the
maintenance, execute SIM24 to reset the following counters.
1) Maintenance counter
2) Each consumable part counter
3) Each unit counter
4) Trouble counter, JAM counter
C. Firmware version check and upgrading

Execute SIM22-5 to check the firmware version, and upgrade it as
needed. (SIM49-1)
D. Confirmation, adjustment
After completion of part replacement and cleaning, etc, execute the following procedures.
Items necessary to execute
Item SIM to be used

ADJ 5 Print engine image distortion adjustment / ADJ5A Print engine image distortion adjustment (Manual adjustment) / 50-22
OPC drum phase adjustment / OPC drum phase adjustment (Automatic adjustment) /
Color registration adjustment Color registration adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
(Print engine section)
ADJ10/SET1 Image quality adjustment Copy image quality adjustment
Printer image quality adjustment
ADJ10B Printer, copy color balance, density adjustments 46-74
(Automatic adjustments) (Basic adjustments)
Items to execute as needed
Item SIM to be used

ADJ 2 High voltage adjustment ADJ2A Main charger grid voltage adjustments 8-2
ADJ2B Developing bias voltage adjustments 8-1
ADJ2C Transfer current/voltage adjustment 8-6
ADJ 3 Image density sensor adjustment ADJ3A Image density sensor adjustment 44-2
ADJ4 Image lead edge position, image loss, void ADJ4A Print image main scanning direction automatic magnification 50-28
area, image off-center, image magnification ratio adjustment (Print engine)
ratio adjustments (Automatic adjustments) ADJ4B Print image off-center automatic adjustment (Print engine) 50-28
(Each paper feed tray)
ADJ4C Copy mode image lead edge position, image loss, void area, 50-28
image off-center, sub scanning direction image magnification
ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner) (Document table mode)
ADJ4D Copy mode image lead edge position, image loss, void area, 50-28
image off-center, sub scanning direction image magnification
ratio automatic adjustment (Scanner) (RSPF mode)
ADJ10/SET1 Image quality adjustment ADJ10A Scanner calibration (CCD calibration) 63-3 (63-5)
MX-3115N MAINTENANCE 9 – 1
2. Display of maintenance execution timing
The message of maintenance execution timing is displayed when each counter reaches the set value. The relations between the messages
and the counters are shown below.
A. Maintenance counter
Display condition Print JOB
Display content SIM26-38-A Enable/
Counter name Counter value
set value Disable
Maintenance required. Code: TA 0 (Print continue) Maintenance counter (Total) When the SIM21-1 set value is reached. Enable
1 (Print stop) When 90% of the SIM21-1 set value is reached.
Maintenance required. Code: TA 1 (Print stop) When the SIM21-1 set value is reached. Disable
Maintenance required. Code: CA 0 (Print continue) Maintenance counter (Color) When the SIM21-1 set value is reached. Enable
Maintenance required. Code: CA 1 (Print stop) When the SIM21-1 set value is reached. Disable
Maintenance required. Code: AA 0 (Print continue) Both of total and color When the SIM21-1 set value is reached. Enable
Maintenance required. Code: AA 1 (Print stop) When the SIM21-1 set value is reached. Disable
* After execution of maintenance, be sure to execute SIM24-4 to clear the maintenance counter (Total) and the maintenance counter (Color).
B. Primary transfer unit

set value Disable
Maintenance required.: TK1 0 (Print continue) Primary transfer unit print counter When 200K is reached. Enable
1 (Print stop)
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the primary transfer unit print counter, the accumulated number of rotations
counter, and the use day counter.
C. Secondary transfer unit

set value Disable
Maintenance required.: TK2 0 (Print continue) Secondary transfer unit print counter When 300K is reached. Enable
1 (Print stop)
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the secondary transfer print counter, the accumulated number of rotations
counter, and the use day counter.
D. Fusing unit
Display content SIM26-38-A SIM26-38-B Enable/
set value set value Disable
Maintenance required.: FK1 0 (Print continue) – Fusing belt print counter When 200K is reached. Enable
1 (Print stop) –
Maintenance required.: FK2 0 (Print continue) – Pressure roller print counter When 200K is reached. Enable
1 (Print stop) –
Maintenance required.: FK3 – 0 (Print continue) Fusing web print counter When 200K is reached. Enable
– 1 (Print stop)
Maintenance required.: FK3 (Pop-up) – 0 (Print continue) Fusing web print counter When Web end detection is ON. Enable
– 1 (Print stop) Disable
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the fusing roller counter, the fusing belt counter, the fusing web print counter,
the accumulated rotation number counter, and the use day counter.
E. OPC drum
Display condition
Print JOB
Display content SIM26-38-A
Counter name Counter value Enable/Disable
set value
Maintenance required.: DK 0 (Print continue) OPC drum print counter (K) When 840K rotation is Enable
1 (Print stop) or reached
OPC drum accumulated rotation number counter (K) 26cpm machine :
When 140K is reached.
31cpm machine :
When 155K is reached
Maintenance required.: D (C/M/Y) 0 (Print continue) OPC drum print counter (C/M/Y) When 840K rotation is
OPC drum accumulated rotation number counter 26/31cpm machine :
(C/M/Y) When 140K is reached.
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the OPC drum print counter, the accumulated number of rotations counter, and
the use day counter.
F. Developer
Display condition
Print JOB
set value
Maintenance required.: DK 0 (Print continue) OPC drum print counter (K) When 840K rotation is Enable
OPC drum accumulated rotation number counter (K) 26cpm machine :
When 140K is reached.
31cpm machine :
When 155K is reached
Maintenance required.: D (C/M/Y) 0 (Print continue) OPC drum print counter (C/M/Y) When 840K rotation is
OPC drum accumulated rotation number counter 26/31cpm machine :
(C/M/Y) When 140K is reached.
* After execution of the maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the developer print counter, the accumulated number of rotations counter, and
the use day counter.
G. Waste toner box

Display content
Check the waste toner box. After detection of near end, pixel count 836K Near end: Enable
(equivalent to color 2K, monochrome 8K print) End: Disable
* When the waste toner box is replaced with an empty one, the message disappears.
H. Toner
Display condition
Print JOB
set value
(K/C/M/Y) Prepare a toner No relation Toner motor rotation time Specified time of rotations Enable
(Near near end)
(K/C/M/Y) Toner supply is low No relation Toner supply amount is decreasing. ATC sensor output variation Enable
(Near end)
Replace the toner cartridge. (K) 0 (Print continue) The pixel count from near end Specified pixel count (Disable for a JOB which
(End) 1 (Print stop) reaches the specified value. requires K toner)
Replace the toner cartridge. 0 (Print continue) The pixel count from near end Specified pixel count Enable for monochrome,
(C/M/Y) (End) 1 (Print stop) reaches the specified value. Disable for color
3. Maintenance list
Main unit
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean S: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate
Section/
Parts work When 840 K 840 K 840 K
Unit work Section name Unit name Part name Remark
sequence calling rotation rotation rotation
sequence
1 Developing Developing unit 1 Developer ✕ S S S Replace as needed.
section (monochrome) 2 DV seal ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
3 DV side seals ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
F/R
4 Toner filter ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
5 Bias pin ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
6 Connector ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Developing unit 1 Developer ✕ S S S
(color) 2 DV seal ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
F/R
5 Bias pin ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
2 OPC drum OPC drum unit 1 Drum ✕ S S S 840K rotation or
section (monochrome) 2 MC unit ✕ S S S
26cpm machine
3 Cleaning blade ✕ S S S maximum printable
number 140K
4 Toner reception ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
blade 31cpm machine
5 Side seals ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ maximum printable
F/R number 155K
6 Charger ✕ S S S
cleaner
OPC drum unit 1 Drum ✕ S S S 840K rotation or
(color) maximum printable num-
2 MC unit ✕ S S S
ber 140K
3 Cleaning blade ✕ S S S
blade
5 Side seals ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
F/R
6 Charger ✕ S S S
cleaner
Section/
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
sequence calling K K K K K K K K
sequence
1 RSPF RSPF unit 1 Document   –    –   Replace at 100K of the
section pickup roller SPF paper feed counter
or 1 year of use.
2 Paper feed   –    –   When replacing the paper
roller feed roller, apply grease
3 Separation   –    –   to the paper feed shaft.
roller GP-501MR
4 Torque ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace at 400K of the
limiter SPF SPF paper feed counter
or 2 years of use.
5 Take-up ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
torque
limiter
6 Discharge ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
brush
7 Registration   –    –  
roller
8 Transport   –    –  
roller 2
9 Transport   –    –  
roller 3
10 Paper exit   –    –  
roller
11 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
12 Scan plate   –    –  
13 Gears ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
14 Belts ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
15 OC mat   –    –  
Section/
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
sequence
2 Scanner Scanner unit 1 Drive belt ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
section 2 Drive wire ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
3 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
4 Rails ✩ ✩ – ✩ ✩ ✩ – ✩ ✩
5 Mirror   –    –  
6 Reflector   –    –  
7 Scanner   –    –  
lamp
8 Lens   –    –  
9 CCD   –    –  
10 Table glass   –    –  
11 SPF glass   –    –  
3 Transfer Primary 1 Separation ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
section transfer unit pawl
2 Primary ✕ S – S S S – S S When replacing, apply
transfer belt KYNAR powder.
3 Secondary ✕  –    –  
drive
transmission
gear
4 Primary ✕  –    –  
transfer belt
drive roller
5 Primary –  –    –  
transfer belt
follower
roller
6 Primary ✕  –    –  
transfer belt
tension
roller
7 Registration ✕  –    –  
backup
roller
8 Y auxiliary ✕  –    –  
roller
9 PTC backup ✕  –    –  
roller
10 Primary ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
transfer
roller
11 Transfer ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
cleaner
seals F/R
12 Primary ✕ S – S S S – S S
transfer belt
cleaner
blade
13 Primary ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
transfer
toner
reception
blade
14 Primary ✕  –    –  
transfer
operation
mode
detector
Section/
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
sequence
3 Transfer Secondary 1 Secondary ✕ –  –  –  – 
section transfer unit transfer belt
follower
roller
2 Secondary ✕ – S – S – S – S Never use alcohol or
transfer belt solvents for cleaning.
Replace at every 360K.
3 Secondary ✕ –  –  –  – 
transfer belt
drive roller
4 Secondary ✕ –  –  –  – 
transfer
backup
roller
5 Secondary ✕ –  –  –  – 
transfer belt
tension
roller
6 Secondary ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ Replace as needed.
transfer
roller
7 Secondary ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕
transfer
drive gear
8 Separation ✕ – ✩ – ✩ – ✩ – ✩ When replacing, apply
cam HANARL FL-955R to the
shaft section.
9 Secondary ✕ – ✩ – ✩ – ✩ – ✩
transfer
frame
4 Other Other 1 PTC unit ✕ S – S S S – S S Replace. Reciprocate the
PTC cleaning rod back
and forth 3 times.
2 Image ✕  –    –   Remove dirt from the light
density emitting/receiving
sections (transparent
sensor/
plastic sections) of the
Registration sensor and the standard
sensor/ reflection plate (gray
Standard plastic section) with dry
reflection waste cloth. *1
plate
5 LSU section LSU 1 Dust-proof   –    –   Use the LSU cleaning rod.
glass
Other 2 Cleaning ✕ Attached to the waste
base toner box. (2 pcs.) /
Replace when the waste
toner box is replaced, or
at 100K, or 2 years of use.
6 Manual Manual paper 1 Paper feed ✕  –    –   Replace at 100K of the
paper feed feed unit roller manual paper feed
counter or 1 year of use.
section 2 Separation ✕  –    –  
roller
3 Torque ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
limiter
4 Transport ✕  –    –  
roller 9
5 Transport ✕  –    –  
roller 10
6 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
– Paper   –    –   Clean with alcohol.
guides
7 Tray paper Tray paper 1 Paper ✕  –    –   Replace at 100K of the
feed section feed unit pickup roller tray paper feed counter or
1 year of use.
2 Paper feed ✕  –    –  
roller
3 Separation ✕  –    –  
roller
4 Transport ✕  –    –  
roller 4
5 Transport ✕  –    –  
roller 2
6 Torque ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
limiter
7 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
guides
Section/
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
sequence
8 Paper PS unit 1 Registration ✕  –    –  
registration roller (idle)
section 2 Registration ✕  –    –  
(paper roller (drive)
transport 3 Transport ✕  –    –  
section)/ roller 5
Paper exit 4 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
section/ADU
Right door unit 5 Transport ✕  –    –  
section
roller 7
6 Transport ✕  –    –  
roller 8
7 Paper exit ✕  –    –  
roller 3
8 Paper exit ✕  –    –  
roller 2
9 Discharge ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
brush
10 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
Fusing rear 11 Transport ✕  –    –  
unit roller 6
Paper exit unit 12 Paper exit ✕  –    –  
roller 1
13 Discharge ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
brush
14 Sensors – ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
Other 15 Paper dust   –    –  
removing
unit
guides
9 Drive Main drive unit 1 Gears ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Apply to the specified
section Belt drive unit (grease) position when checking.
FLOIL G-313S
2 Shafts ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
(grease)
3 Shaft earth ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Apply to the specified
sections position when checking.
FLOIL GE-676
(conduction
grease)
4 Belts ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
5 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
Transport 6 Belts ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
drive unit 7 Connection ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Apply to the specified
arm position when checking.
HANARL
Fusing drive 8 Shafts ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ FL-955R
unit (grease)
Paper exit 9 Shafts ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
drive unit (grease)
10 Belts ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
Section/
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
sequence
10 Fusing Fusing unit 1 Lower ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
section separation
pawl
2 Lower ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
separation
pawl spring
3 Separation ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
plate
4 Web guide ✕ S – S S S – S S
shaft
5 Web ✕ S – S S S – S S
pressure
roller
bearing
6 Web ✕ S – S S S – S S
pressure
roller
7 Web roller ✕ S – S S S – S S
8 Lower ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
thermistor
9 Pressure ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
roller gear
10 Pressure ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
roller
bearing
11 Pressure ✕ S – S S S – S S Apply grease to the shaft
roller section when replacing.
(JEF552) / After
completion of
replacement, clean the
new pressure roller
surface with alcohol. /
Integrated with the fusing
roller as a maintenance
kit.
12 Sub ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
thermistor
13 Fusing roller ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
bearing
14 Heat- ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed. /
insulating When replacing, apply
grease to the inner ring
bush
section and the outer ring
section. (JEF552)
15 Heating ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
roller
bearing
16 Fuser belt ✕ S – S S S – S S Integrated with the fusing
guide collar belt as a maintenance kit.
11 Fusing Fusing unit 17 Fusing roller ✕ S – S S S – S S Apply grease to the shaft
section section when replacing.
(JEF552) / Integrated with
the pressure roller as a
maintenance kit.
18 Heating ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
roller
19 Fusing belt ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Integrated with the fuser
belt guide collar as a
maintenance kit. / When
replacing, clean the fusing
belt surface with alcohol.
20 Main ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
thermistor
21 Paper   –    –  
guides
22 Gears ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
23 Pressure ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
spring
24 Washer – ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
Section/
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
sequence
12 Other 1 Ozone filter – – S – S – S – S
2 Toner User replacement for every toner empty.
cartridge BK
3 Toner
cartridge C
4 Toner
cartridge M
5 Toner
cartridge Y
6 Waste toner Replaced by the user when full is detected. Replacement reference:
box 50K
* 1: Note for cleaning the image density sensor, the registration sensor, and the standard reflection plate
When in maintenance or in case of a service call, refer to "Criteria for necessity of cleaning" below to judge the necessity of cleaning the image
density sensor, the registration sensor, and the standard reflection plate. If it is judged that cleaning is necessary, then execute cleaning.
Criteria for necessity of cleaning

• The SIM44-2 PCS_CL LED ADJ value is increased by aging and dirt of the image density sensor and the standard reflection plate.
Greasing
Greasing is not always required for every maintenance. In the fol-
lowing cases, check and grease.
• When there are some noises.
• When a lot of jams occur frequently. (Check the jam history.)
For the part code of grease to be used, refer to "[15] TOOL LIST."
Cleaning of sensors and detectors in the paper feed/transport

system
Cleaning of sensors and detectors in the paper feed/transport sys-
tem is not always required for every maintenance. In the following
cases, check and clean.
• When a trouble or a jam occurs due to a sensor or a detector.
(Check the jam history.)
Torque limiter check and replacement

Torque limiter check and replacement is not always required for
every maintenance. In the following cases, check and replace.
Alcohol for cleaning

Be sure to use ethanol for cleaning.
Cleaning of the primary transfer mode detector (CL/BK)

• When replacing the OPC drum, remove the primary transfer unit
and the developing unit, and clean them.
• Blow air to the light emitting section and light receiving section to
remove the attached toner.
• Blow air also when the sensor is wiped and cleaned with waste
cloth.
Option
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean S: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate
Option Unit work Parts work When At the

Unit name Part name Remark
name sequence sequence calling machine cycle
Stand/ 1 Tray 2 paper feed unit 1 Paper pickup roller ✕  Replace at 100K of each tray paper
500 sheet 2 Paper feed roller ✕  feed counter or 1 year of use.
paper drawer 3 Separation roller ✕ 
4 Transport roller 1 ✕ 
5 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ Replace at 100K of each tray paper
feed counter.
6 Sensors ✕ ✕
– Paper guides   Clean with alcohol.
2 1CS drive unit 7 Gears (grease) ✕ ✕ Apply to the specified position when
checking.
HANARL FL-955R
8 Shafts (grease) ✕ ✕ Apply to the specified position when
checking.
FLOIL G-313S
2x500 sheet 2 Paper feed roller ✕  feed counter or 1 year of use.
feed counter.
6 Sensors ✕ ✕
2 Tray 3 paper feed unit 7 Paper pickup roller ✕  Replace at 100K of each tray paper
8 Paper feed roller ✕  feed counter or 1 year of use.
9 Separation roller ✕ 
10 Vertical transport roller 1 ✕ 
feed counter.
13 Sensors ✕ ✕
checking.
HANARL FL-955R
checking.
FLOIL G-313S
checking.
HANARL FL-955R
checking.
FLOIL G-313S
Option Unit work Parts work When At the
name sequence sequence calling machine cycle
3x500 sheet 2 Paper feed roller ✕  feed counter or 1 year of use.
feed counter.
6 Sensors ✕ ✕
feed counter.
13 Sensors ✕ ✕
feed counter.
20 Sensors ✕ ✕
checking.
HANARL FL-955R
checking.
FLOIL G-313S
checking.
HANARL FL-955R
checking.
FLOIL G-313S
6 3CS drive unit 25 Shafts (grease) ✕ ✕ Apply to the specified position when
checking.
FLOIL G-313S
Option Parts work When At the

Part name Remark
name sequence calling machine cycle
Finisher 1 Staple cartridge ✕ ✕ Replacement is made by the user at every 5,000 pcs.
2 Staple unit ✕ ✕ Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 200K
staple.
3 Paddle ✕ 
4 Inlet port paper transport roller ✕ 
5 Inlet port paper transport roller B ✕ 
6 Discharge brush ✕ ✕
7 Paper exit roller B ✕ 
8 Paper exit roller ✕ 
9 Bundle exit paper transport roller ✕ 
10 Bundle exit paper exit transport roller B ✕ 
11 Scraping roller ✕  Replacement reference: Replace at every 1000K of the
finisher paper exit count value.
12 Sensors ✕ ✕
– Paper guides ✕  Clean with alcohol.
Punch unit 1 Punch unit ✕ ✕ Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 1000K.
2 Sensors ✕ ✕
Greasing
Greasing is not always required for every maintenance. In the following cases, check and grease.
For the part code of grease to be used, refer to "[15] TOOL LIST."
Cleaning of sensors and detectors in the paper feed/transport system
Cleaning of sensors and detectors in the paper feed/transport system is not always required for every maintenance. In the following cases,
check and clean.
• When a trouble or a jam occurs due to a sensor or a detector. (Check the jam history.)
Torque limiter check and replacement

Torque limiter check and replacement is not always required for every maintenance. In the following cases, check and replace.
Alcohol for cleaning

Be sure to use ethanol for cleaning.
A. RSPF section
g Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) Ũ : Clean
Ţ : Replace ţ : Adjust ŭ : Lubricate
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
RSPF unit 1 Document pickup roller   –    –   Replace at 100K of the SPF
2 Paper feed roller   –    –   paper feed counter or 1 year
of use.
3 Separation roller   –    –   When replacing the paper
feed roller, apply grease to the
paper feed shaft.
GP-501MR
4 Torque limiter SPF ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace at 400K of the SPF
5 Take-up torque limiter ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ paper feed counter or 2 years
of use.
6 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
7 Registration roller   –    –  
8 Transport roller 2   –    –  
9 Transport roller 3   –    –  
10 Paper exit roller   –    –  
11 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
12 Scan plate   –    –  
13 Gears ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
14 Belts ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
15 OC mat   –    –  
4
2
5
14
11
7
11
8
12
10
6
15
B. Scanner section
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
Scanner 1 Drive belt ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
unit 2 Drive wire ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
3 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
4 Rails ✩ ✩ – ✩ ✩ ✩ – ✩ ✩
5 Mirror   –    –  
6 Reflector   –    –  
7 Scanner lamp   –    –  
8 Lens   –    –  
9 CCD   –    –  
10 Table glass   –    –  
11 SPF glass   –    –  
11 4
3
10
4 2
9
2
5
7
C. Developing section
Parts work
Unit name Part name When calling 840 K rotation 840 K rotation 840 K rotation Remark
sequence
Developing unit 1 Developer ✕ S S S Replace as needed.
(monochrome) 2 DV seal ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
F/R
5 Bias pin ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Developing unit (color) 1 Developer ✕ S S S
2 DV seal ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
F/R
5 Bias pin ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕

D. OPC drum section
Parts work
Unit name Part name When calling 840 K rotation 840 K rotation 840 K rotation Remark
sequence
OPC drum unit 1 Drum ✕ S S S 840K rotation or
(monochrome) 2 MC unit ✕ S S S
26cpm machine
3 Cleaning blade ✕ S S S maximum printable
number 140K
blade 31cpm machine
5 Side seals ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ maximum printable
F/R number 155K
6 Charger ✕ S S S
cleaner
OPC drum unit (color) 1 Drum ✕ S S S 840K rotation or
maximum printable num-
2 MC unit ✕ S S S
ber 140K
3 Cleaning blade ✕ S S S
blade
5 Side seals ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
F/R
6 Charger ✕ S S S
cleaner
6
1
E. Transfer section
(1) Primary transfer unit
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
Primary 1 Separation pawl ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
transfer unit 2 Primary transfer belt ✕ S – S S S – S S When replacing,
apply KYNAR
powder.
3 Secondary drive transmission gear ✕  –    –  
4 Primary transfer belt drive roller ✕  –    –  
5 Primary transfer belt follower roller ✕  –    –  
6 Primary transfer belt tension roller ✕  –    –  
7 Registration backup roller ✕  –    –  
8 Y auxiliary roller ✕  –    –  
9 PTC backup roller ✕  –    –  
10 Primary transfer roller ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
11 Transfer cleaner seals F/R ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
12 Primary transfer belt cleaner blade ✕ S – S S S – S S
13 Primary transfer toner reception ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
blade
14 Primary transfer operation mode ✕  –    –  
detector
11
13
14
6
11 10
5
2
12 14
8
1
7 4
(2) Secondary transfer unit
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
Secondary 1 Secondary transfer belt follower ✕ –  –  –  – 
transfer unit roller
2 Secondary transfer belt ✕ – S – S – S – S Never use alcohol or
solvents for cleaning.
3 Secondary transfer belt drive ✕ –  –  –  – 
roller
4 Secondary transfer backup roller ✕ –  –  –  – 
5 Secondary transfer belt tension ✕ –  –  –  – 
roller
6 Secondary transfer roller ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ Replace as needed.
7 Secondary transfer drive gear ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕
8 Separation cam ✕ – ✩ – ✩ – ✩ – ✩ When replacing, apply
9 Secondary transfer frame ✕ – ✩ – ✩ – ✩ – ✩ HANARL FL-955R to the
shaft section.
7
2
9
4
1
8
9
(3) Other
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
Other 1 PTC unit ✕ S – S S S – S S
2 Image density sensor/ ✕  –    –   Remove dirt from the light emitting/
Registration sensor/ receiving sections (transparent plastic
sections) of the sensor and the
Standard reflection
standard reflection plate (gray plastic
plate section) with dry waste cloth. *1
* 1: Note for cleaning the image density sensor, the registration sensor, and the standard reflection plate
When in maintenance or in case of a service call, refer to "Criteria for necessity of cleaning" below to judge the necessity of cleaning the image
density sensor, the registration sensor, and the standard reflection plate. If it is judged that cleaning is necessary, then execute cleaning.
Criteria for necessity of cleaning
• The SIM44-2 PCS_CL LED ADJ value or PCS_R_LED ADJ value is increased by aging or dirt of the image density sensor. When the image
density is decreased, perform Sim44-2. Then, after that, perform Sim46-74 ‘Copy color balance adjustment’.

F. LSU section
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
LSU 1 Dust-proof glass   –    –   Use the LSU cleaning rod.
Other 2 Cleaning base ✕ Replace every time the waste toner box is replaced. Attached to the waste toner box. (2
pcs.) / Replace when the waste toner
box is replaced, or at 100K, or 2
years of use.
G. Manual paper feed section
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
Manual paper 1 Paper feed roller ✕  –    –   Replace at 100K of the manual
feed unit 2 Separation roller ✕  –    –   paper feed counter or 1 year of
use.
3 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
4 Transport roller 9 ✕  –    –  
6 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
– Paper guides   –    –   Clean with alcohol.
1˴˴˴˴˴
H. Tray paper feed section
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
Tray paper 1 Paper pickup roller ✕  –    –   Replace at 100K of the tray paper
feed unit 2 Paper feed roller ✕  –    –   feed counter or 1 year of use.
3 Separation roller ✕  –    –  
6 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
7 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
7
6
I. Paper registration section (paper transport section)/Paper exit section/ADU section
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
PS unit 1 Registration roller (idle) ✕  –    –  
2 Registration roller (drive) ✕  –    –  
4 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
Right door unit 5 Transport roller 7 ✕  –    –  
7 Paper exit roller 3 ✕  –    –  
8 Paper exit roller 2 ✕  –    –  
9 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
10 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
Fusing rear unit 11 Transport roller 6 ✕  –    –  
Paper exit unit 12 Paper exit roller 1 ✕  –    –  
13 Discharge brush ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
14 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
Other 15 Paper dust removing unit   –    –  
13
10
7
12 14
9
5
11
6
2
15
10
J. Drive section
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
Main drive unit 1 Gears (grease) ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Apply to the specified position
Belt drive unit 2 Shafts (grease) ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ when checking.
FLOIL G-313S
3 Shaft earth sections ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Apply to the specified position
(conduction grease) when checking.
FLOIL GE-676
4 Belts ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
5 Sensors ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
Transport drive unit 6 Belts ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
7 Connection arm ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Apply to the specified position
Fusing drive unit 8 Shafts (grease) ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ when checking.
HANARL FL-955R
Paper exit drive unit 9 Shafts (grease) ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
10 Belts ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
9
10 1
1 3
1
3
7
4
K. Fusing section
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
Fusing unit 1 Lower separation pawl ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
2 Lower separation pawl spring ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
3 Separation plate ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
4 Web guide shaft ✕ S – S S S – S S
5 Web pressure roller bearing ✕ S – S S S – S S
6 Web pressure roller ✕ S – S S S – S S
7 Web roller ✕ S – S S S – S S
8 Lower thermistor ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
9 Pressure roller gear ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
10 Pressure roller bearing ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
11 Pressure roller ✕ S – S S S – S S Apply grease to the shaft
section when replacing.
(JEF552) /
After completion of
replacement, clean the new
pressure roller surface with
alcohol. / Integrated with the
fusing roller as a maintenance
kit.
12 Sub thermistor ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
13 Fusing roller bearing ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
14 Heat-insulating bush ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed. / When
replacing, apply grease to the
inner ring section and the outer
ring section. (JEF552)
15 Heating roller bearing ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
16 Fuser belt guide collar ✕ S – S S S – S S Integrated with the fusing belt
as a maintenance kit.
17 Fusing roller ✕ S – S S S – S S Apply grease to the shaft
section when replacing.
(JEF552) / Integrated with the
pressure roller as a
maintenance kit.
18 Heating roller ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
19 Fusing belt ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Integrated with the fuser belt
guide collar as a maintenance
kit. / When replacing, clean the
fusing belt surface with alcohol.
20 Main thermistor ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
21 Paper guides   –    –  
22 Gears ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ Replace as needed.
23 Pressure spring ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
24 Washer ✕ – ✕ – – – ✕ – –
16 24
17 15
18
14
20
13
19
4
9
3
16
10 5
12
8
24
14 4
15 11
7
13 10
6
22
5
21
23
23
21
L. Other
Parts work When 200 300 400 600 800 900 1000 1200
1 Ozone filter – – S – S – S – S
2 Toner cartridge BK User replacement for every toner empty.
3 Toner cartridge C
4 Toner cartridge M
5 Toner cartridge Y
6 Waste toner box Replaced by the user when full is detected. Replacement reference: 50K

M. Option
(1) Stand/500 sheet paper drawer
Unit work Parts work When At the

sequence sequence calling machine cycle
1 Tray 2 paper feed 1 Paper pickup roller ✕  Replace at 100K of each tray paper feed counter or 1
unit 2 Paper feed roller ✕  year of use.
5 Torque limiter ✕ ✕ Replace at 100K of each tray paper feed counter.
6 Sensors ✕ ✕
2 1CS drive unit 7 Gears (grease) ✕ ✕ Apply to the specified position when checking.
HANARL FL-955R
8 Shafts (grease) ✕ ✕ Apply to the specified position when checking.
FLOIL G-313S
4 8
7
6
6 8
1
5
2
6
(2) Stand/2x500 sheet paper drawer

1 Tray 2 paper feed unit 1 Paper pickup roller ✕  Replace at 100K of each tray paper feed counter or
2 Paper feed roller ✕  1 year of use.
6 Sensors ✕ ✕
2 Tray 3 paper feed unit 7 Paper pickup roller ✕  Replace at 100K of each tray paper feed counter or
8 Paper feed roller ✕  1 year of use.
13 Sensors ✕ ✕
HANARL FL-955R
FLOIL G-313S
HANARL FL-955R
FLOIL G-313S
15
4 15
14
6
6 15
1
5
2
6
10 16
13 17
12
16
7
8 13 17
11
(3) Stand/3x500 sheet paper drawer

1 Tray 2 paper feed unit 1 Paper pickup roller ✕  Replace at 100K of each tray paper feed counter
2 Paper feed roller ✕  or 1 year of use.
6 Sensors ✕ ✕
13 Sensors ✕ ✕
20 Sensors ✕ ✕
HANARL FL-955R
FLOIL G-313S
HANARL FL-955R
FLOIL G-313S
6 3CS drive unit 25 Shafts (grease) ✕ ✕ Apply to the specified position when checking.
FLOIL G-313S
22
4 22
21
6
6 22
1
5
2
6
10 23
13 24
12
23
7
8 13 24
11
9
17 25
20
19
14
15 20
18
16
(4) Finisher
Parts work When At the

Part name Remark
sequence calling machine cycle
1 Staple cartridge ✕ ✕ Replacement is made by the user at every 5,000 pcs.
2 Staple unit ✕ ✕ Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 200K staple.
3 Paddle ✕ 
4 Inlet port paper transport roller ✕ 
5 Inlet port paper transport roller B ✕ 
6 Discharge brush ✕ ✕
7 Paper exit roller B ✕ 
8 Paper exit roller ✕ 
9 Bundle exit paper transport roller ✕ 
10 Bundle exit paper exit transport roller B ✕ 
11 Scraping roller ✕  Replacement reference: Replace at every 1000K of the finisher paper exit count
value.
12 Sensors ✕ ✕
12
12
12
11
12
7
10 5
7
2
8
1
(5) Punch unit

Part name Remark
1 Punch unit ✕ ✕ Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 1000K.
2 Sensors ✕ ✕
(6) Paper pass unit

Part name Remark
1 Inlet port roller  
2 Inlet port rear roller  
3 Paper exit front roller  
4 Paper exit roller  
5 Sensors ✕ ✕
3 5
4 2
(7) Punch unit

Part name Remark
1 Punch unit ✕ ✕ Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 1000K.
2 Sensors ✕ ✕
MX-3115N
[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 6HUYLFH0DQXDO
1. Disassembly of Units (1) Front cabinet upper

1) Remove the front cabinet upper.
A. External view
No. Name
1 Front cabinet upper
2 Rear upper cabinet
3 Rear cabinet
4 Left cabinet
5 Shield plate
6 Paper exit cover
7 Left cabinet upper
8 Paper exit tray

9 Upper cabinet left
10 Upper cabinet right
11 ROM cover
12 Ozone filter cover
(2) Rear upper cabinet

1) Remove the rear upper cabinet.

(3) Rear cabinet

1) Remove the rear cabinet.

MX-3115N DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 10 – 1

(4) Rear cabinet, Shield plate 4) Remove the paper exit tray.
1) Remove the left cabinet.
2 1

1
(6) Left cabinet lower
1) Remove the left cabinet lower.
2) Remove the shield plate.
2 1
1
2
1
2
1
1
(7) Upper cabinet left, Upper cabinet right

1) Remove the rear cabinet upper.
(5) Paper exit cover, Left cabinet upper, Paper exit tray 2) Remove the RSPF unit.
1) Remove the front cabinet upper. 3) Remove the table glass and the SPF glass.
2) Remove the paper exit cover. 4) Remove the paper exit cover.
5) Remove the upper cabinet left.
1 2
3) Remove the left cabinet upper.
6) Remove the upper cabinet right.
2
1

(8) ROM cover B. Operation panel section
No. Name
2) Open the right door, and remove the ROM cover. 1 Operation panel unit (263cpm/31cpm) machine)

(9) Ozone filter cover

1) Remove the ozone filter cover.
(1) Operation panel unit

1) Remove the front cabinet upper.
2) Remove the operation panel lower cover.

3) Remove the operation panel unit.


C. RSPF section 3) Remove the RSPF unit from the machine.
No. Name
1 RSPF unit
2 RSPF paper feed tray unit
3 RSPF transport unit
(2) RSPF paper feed tray unit

1) Turn over the left upper corner of the OC mat.
1
2) Remove the front cabinet.
(1) RSPF unit

1) Remove the two screws and remove the rear cabinet. 1
2) Loosen the screw fixing the earth cable and remove the earth
cable. Then, disconnect the connector.

1
1
1
1 1
2
1 1
4) Disconnect the connector from the RSPF driver PWB. Remove

the holder, and remove the RSPF paper feed tray unit.
2 3 1
4
1
(3) RSPF transport unit

1) Remove the paper feed tray unit.
2) Remove the earth wire. Disconnect the connector from the
RSPF driver PWB.
1
3
3) Remove the RSPF transport unit.

D. Scanner section E. Waste toner collection section
No. Name No. Name
1 Scanner unit 1 Waste toner box
(1) Scanner unit

1) Remove the RSPF unit. (1) Waste toner box
2) Remove the operation panel unit. 1) Open the front cabinet. Slide the lock to release it, and remove
3) Remove the table glass and the SPF glass. the waste toner box.
4) Remove the upper cabinet left, and the upper cabinet right.
5) Remove the scanner unit.
1
2

F. Developing section G. OPC drum section
No. Name No. Name
1 Developing unit 1 OPC drum unit
(1) Developing unit

1) Remove the waste toner box. (1) OPC drum unit
2) Turn the lock to release, and open the drum positioning cover. 1) Remove the waste toner box.
2) Remove the developing unit.
3) While pressing the lever, pull out the OPC drum to remove.
1
When pulling out and pushing in the OPC drum unit, put your
hand beneath the unit and slide it horizontally along the guide
on the right side.
At the time, be careful not to touch the OPC drum surface.
3) While pressing the lever, pull out the developing unit to

remove.
When pulling out and pushing in the developing unit, put your
hand beneath the unit and slide it horizontally along the guide.
At the time, be careful not to touch the developing roller sur-
face.

H. Transfer section 3) Open the right door. Turn the lock to release, and pull out the
primary transfer unit to remove.
No. Name
1 Primary transfer unit
2 Primary transfer cleaner unit
When removing the primary transfer unit, be sure to open the
3 Secondary transfer unit
right door in advance.
4 PTC unit
Be careful not to put foreign materials on the primary transfer

belt.


1) Remove the waste toner box.
2) Turn the lock to release, and open the drum positioning cover.
(2) Primary transfer cleaner unit

1 1) Remove the primary transfer unit.
2) Rotate the primary transfer cleaner unit 45 degrees downward
to remove.
2
2
1
1
Before opening the drum positioning cover, check to confirm

that the transfer cam knob is at the free position.

(3) Secondary transfer unit I. LSU section
1) Rotate the secondary transfer unit a half turn upward to
remove. Disconnect the connector from the right door unit. No. Name
1 LSU
Be careful not to put foreign materials on the secondary trans-

fer belt.
When installing the secondary transfer unit, check to confirm

that the frame projections are securely in the pressure springs
on the front and the rear side.
(1) LSU
1) Remove the left cabinet, and the shield plate.
2) Remove the MFP control PWB unit.
Since the MFP control PWB and the LSU mother PWB are
connected together (board to board), use care when removing
and attaching them.
(4) PTC unit

2) Remove the PTC unit.

3) Remove the LSU mother PWB unit, and the HDD unit.
1 3
2 1
4

4) Remove the waste toner box. J. Manual paper feed section
5) Lift the LSU mother PWB unit, and remove the LSU.
No. Name
1 Manual paper feed tray
2 Manual paper feed unit
Do not touch the LSU PWB and the upper cover glass section.
Put the LSU on a flat surface. (Do not turn it over.)

1
(1) Manual paper feed tray

1) Open the right door, and remove the cover.
1
2) Remove the cover.

3) Remove the cover. 6) Slide the tray and remove the arm.
1
1
1
1
1
7) Remove the cover, and remove the manual paper feed tray.
2
1

3
(2) Manual paper feed unit

1) Remove the manual paper feed tray.
2) Remove the manual paper feed unit.

5) Remove the shaft.
2
1
2
1
1
2

K. Tray paper feed section 3) Remove the paper guide.
No. Name
1 Paper feed tray
2 Tray paper feed unit
3
2 1
4) Remove the tray paper feed unit.

(1) Paper feed tray 2

1) Pull out the paper feed tray, and lift and remove it.
(2) Tray paper feed unit

1) Remove the paper feed tray.
2) Remove the right door lower.

L. Paper transport/Paper exit/ADU section (3) Right door unit
1) Open the right door. Remove the gear, and remove the right
No. Name
door.
1 Paper dust removing unit
2 PS unit
3 Right door unit
4 Fusing rear unit
5 Paper exit unit

3
1 2
(1) Paper dust removing unit 3 3
2) Remove the paper dust cleaner unit. (4) Fusing rear unit
1) Remove the fusing unit.
2) Remove the fusing rear unit.
(2) PS unit
1) Remove the waste toner box. (5) Paper exit unit
2) Remove the paper dust cleaner unit. 1) Remove the front cabinet upper.
3) Remove the paper feed tray. 2) Remove the paper exit tray.
4) Remove the tray paper feed unit. 3) Remove the paper exit unit.
5) Remove the PS unit.
1
3


M. Drive section
When connecting the paper exit unit connector, rotate the harness No. Name
one turn clockwise as shown in the figure below so that the harness 1 Main drive unit
faces toward the arrow A, and connect the connector. 2 Transport drive unit
3 Fusing drive unit
This procedure is necessary for preventing the paper exit sensor
4 Paper exit drive unit
from disconnecting by contact with the harness.
Rotate the harness 4

one turn, then connect 1
to the connector. 3
NG OK (1) Main drive unit

2) Remove the developing unit.
3) Remove the OPC drum unit.
4) Remove the primary transfer unit.
6) Remove the main drive unit.
3 3 3
3 1
2
3
3
When the drive section is disassembled, apply screw lock to

the following sections:

Front side (2) Transport drive unit
Apply screw lock (0.1g: about two rice grains) between the 1) Remove the rear cabinet.
bearing and the drive frame. (4 positions) 2) Open the right door.
4) Remove the duct.
Be careful not to apply screw lock between the bearing and
each DV drive shaft.
DV drive shaft
Bearing
Apply screw lock
to this position.
5) Remove the transport drive unit.
Rear side
4
Apply screw lock (0.04g: about one rice grain). (6 positions)
3 3
Be careful not to apply screw lock to the head of the screw.
Apply screw lock Apply screw lock 1

to this position. to this position. 3
When the drive section is disassembled, apply screw lock to

the following sections:
Front side
Apply screw lock (0.1g: about two rice grains) between the
bearing and the transport drive frame. (4 positions)
Be careful not to apply screw lock between the bearing and the
drive shaft.
Apply screw Apply screw

lock to this lock to this
position. position.
Drive Bearing
shaft

Rear side (4) Paper exit drive unit
Apply screw lock (0.1g: about two rice grains) between the 1) Remove the rear cabinet upper.
bearing and the transport drive frame. (2 positions) 2) Remove the rear cabinet.
3) Remove the ROM cover.
4) Remove the FAX unit.
Be careful not to apply screw lock between the bearing and the
5) Remove the paper exit drive unit.
drive shaft.
2 1
Drive
Apply screw
shaft
lock to this
position.
Bearing
(3) Fusing drive unit

4) Remove the FAX unit.
5) Remove the fusing drive unit.
2
1
4

N. Fusing section O. Toner supply section
No. Name No. Name
1 Fusing unit 1 Toner cartridge
(1) Toner cartridge

(1) Fusing unit
1) Open the front cabinet, and remove the toner cartridge.
1) Open the right door. Release lock, and remove the fusing unit.
Do not install a toner cartridge of a different color. Be sure to

install a toner cartridge of the same color.
3 When installing, do not insert with great force.

2 When inserting, put your hand on it to the end until it locks
securely.
1
When the machine is moved with the developing unit removed,

be sure to remove the toner cartridge. (If not, toner may clog.)
When carrying the fusing unit, be sure to hold the both levers
on the F and R sides of the fusing unit. If only one lever is held
to carry the unit, it may be broken.

P. PWB section (2) DC POWER PWB
No. Name
1 SCU PWB
2 LD PWB 3) Remove the DC POWER PWB.
3 DC POWER PWB
4 High voltage PWB (TC PWB)
5 HL control PWB
6 PCU PWB
1 2 1 1
7 High voltage PWB (MC/DV PWB)
8 AC POWER PWB
9 MFP control PWB
10 LSU mother PWB
11 Driver PWB
12 Right door PWB
1 1
1
1 1

(3) High voltage PWB (TC PWB)



3) Remove the left cabinet upper.

4) Remove the DC POWER PWB unit.

2
(1) SCU PWB 1
2) Remove the SCU PWB.
2

1

5) Remove the high voltage PWB (TC PWB).

(4) HL control PWB 3) Remove the left cabinet lower.
1) Remove the rear cabinet upper. 4) Remove the PCU PWB mounting plate.
4) Remove the DC POWER PWB unit.
1
2
1
2
1
1 2
5) Remove the high voltage PWB (MC/DV PWB).
2 1
A
5) Remove the HL control PWB.
1 1
Section A
1
Install so that the left edge of the MC PWB is fitted with the rib
of ozone duct cover B.
1
MC PWB
(5) PCU PWB, High voltage PWB (MC/DV PWB)

2) Remove the PCU PWB.
2
1
1 1
Rib of ozone duct cover B
1
1

(7) MFP control PWB
Section B 2) Remove the MFP control PWB unit.
Be careful not to bring the back surface of the PWB into con-
tact with the left guide which is one of the three guides in the
lower side of the machine frame.
connected together (board to board), use enough care when
Guides in the lower side of the removing and attaching them.
machine frame
Back surface of the MC PWB
(6) AC POWER PWB

2) Remove the left cabinet lower.
3) Remove the MFP control PWB.
3) Remove the AC connector plate.

1
2 1
4) Remove the AC POWER PWB.
1 2

(8) LSU mother PWB Q. Filter section
No. Name
2) Remove the MFP control PWB unit.
1 Ozone filter
connected together (board to board), use enough care when
removing and attaching them.
1

(1) Ozone filter

3) Remove the LSU mother PWB.
1 2) Remove the ozone filter.
1
1
1

2. Disassembly and assembly of each c. LVDS PWB, LCD, Touch panel
unit 1) Disconnect the connectors and remove the LVDS PWB.
A. Operation panel section

(1) Operation panel unit
No. Name
1 USB I/F PWB
2 KEY PWB

3 LVDS PWB
4 LCD
5 Touch panel

2) Remove the LCD holder.
a. USB I/F PWB

1) Remove the USB I/F PWB.

1
2
1
3) Remove the holder, and remove the LCD.
Use enough care not to put finger prints on the LCD surface.
b. KEY PWB
1) Remove the Mylar, the earth sheet, and remove the KEY
PWB.
When installing, be careful of the overlapping sequence of the

Mylar and the earth sheet.


4) Remove the touch panel. B. RSPF section
(1) RSPF unit
Use enough care not to put finger prints on the touch panel No. Name
surface. 1 Document pickup roller
When removing the touch panel, you have to remove the 2 Paper feed roller
adhesive sheet on it. After you remove the touch panel, clean 3 Separation roller
the adhesive of the adhesive sheet on the LCD holder. When 4 Torque limiter SPF
removing the touch panel, order the adhesive sheet because it 5 Take-up torque limiter
cannot be used again. 6 Discharge brush
7 Registration roller
8 OC mat

5
7 2
4
1
3
8
a. Document pickup roller, Paper feed roller

1) Open the paper feed unit, and remove the cover.
2) Remove the holder, and remove the document pickup roller,

and the paper feed roller.

b. Separation roller, Torque limiter SPF d. Discharge brush
1) Open the paper feed unit, and remove the cover. 1) Open the document tray, and remove the discharge brush.
When replacing the discharge brush, attach a new brush to the

reference.
2) Remove the holder, and remove the separation roller.

Character edge reference
1mm 1mm
1 Square
hole
reference
0 - 0.5mm
2
e. Registration roller
1) Open the paper feed unit, and clean the registration roller.
3) Remove the torque limiter SPF.
c. Take-up torque limiter

1) Remove the one-way coupling, the belt, and the pulley.
f. OC mat
Remove the E-ring. Pull out the shaft, and remove the bearing,
the holder, and the take-up torque limiter. 1) Open the RSPF unit, and clean the OC mat.
6
7
8 5
1 2 3 4

(2) RSPF transport unit C. Scanner section
No. Name (1) Scanner unit
1 Transport roller 2
No. Name
1 Drive belt
3 Paper exit roller
2 Drive wire
4 Scan plate
3 Rails
4 Mirror
5 Reflector
6 Scanner lamp
7 Lens
8 CCD
9 Table glass
3 10 SPF glass
1
11 LED PWB
4
12 LED driver PWB
2
10 3
a. Transport roller 2, Transport roller 3, Paper exit roller 1

7
1) Clean the transport roller 2, the transport roller 3, and the
8
paper exit roller
2
5
4 6
4
11
12
a. Drive belt, Drive wire

1) Remove the table glass.
2) Check the tension of the drive belt and the drive wire. Check to
confirm that the drive wire in the winding pulley is wound with-
out clearance.
b. Scan plate
1) Clean the scan plate.

3) Clean the reflector, the scanner lamp, and the No. 2 mirror.
Wind the drive wire in the sequence of 1 to 7 as shown in the

figure below and fix it.
When winding the drive wire around the pulley, shift the mirror
unit to the vicinity of the home position, and wind 7 turns as
shown in the figure, and fix the 8th turn with a screw. Then
wind two turns furthermore around the pulley.
7
6
4 2
5
1
d. Lens, CCD
7 1 7 8 9 10 1) Remove the table glass.
6
2) Remove the dark box, and the cover.
4
1
5 10 9 8 7 1
2 1
2
1
3
3
b. Rails
2) Grease each rail.
Be careful not to allow grease to come in contact with drive

wires.
If grease contacts drive wires, clean wires thoroughly.
3) Clean the lens, and the CCD.
c. Mirror, Reflector, Scanner lamp

2) Clean the No. 2 mirror, and the No. 3 mirror. e. Table glass, SPF glass
1) Remove the glass holder. and the table glass. Remove the
table glass, and the SPF glass.
5
4
3
1 2

2) Clean the both surfaces of the table glass, and the SPF glass. 4) Remove the lamp guide. Disconnect the connector from the
LED driver PWB.
1
2
f. LED PWB, LED driver PWB

2) Shift the lamp unit to the notch section of the scanner base
5) Remove the scanner lamp, and the LED PWB. Disconnect the
plate.
connector from the LED PWB.
1 2
3) Turn over the sheet.
6) Remove the harness holder, and remove the flat cable from
When attaching the sheet to the original position, insert the L-
the LED driver PWB. Remove the LED driver PWB.
shape sections into the inside of the metal plate and attach the
center portion to the metal plate with double-stick tape.
1
2
4
3

D. Developing section 2) While rotating the gear, dispose of developer.
(1) Developing unit
No. Name
1 Developer
2 DV seal
3 DV side seals F/R
4 Toner filter

Thoroughly clean developer unit so that no developer remains
in the unit. Be careful not to scratch the MG roller.
MG roller
a. Developer
1) Open the cover, and remove the developing unit.
Shutter section
3) Loading developer to the developing units.

Be sure to shake the bag of developer thoroughly before pour-

ing into the developing unit.
When pouring the developer into the unit, use care to not get
developer in to the drive section.
There are two types of the developing unit; (1) the DV cover is
fixed with the DV cover fixing screw, and (2) the DV cover is
fixed with a hook only.
For the type where the DV cover is fixed only a hook, do not
use a screw for fixing.
Otherwise, the DV roller may be damaged.
For the type where the DV cover is fixed with the fixing screw,
there is a groove in the fixing screw hole section as shown in
the figure below.
In some production lots, a sheet is attached instead of this.
4) Install the cover.

5) Shake the developing unit several times horizontally and • There is too much developer.
strongly. (The stirring screw cannot be seen.)
6) Open the toner shutter of the developing unit and check to

confirm that there is proper amount of developer. If not, per-
form procedure 5) again.
Be sure to keep the developing unit level while supplying the
developer.
7) Insert the developing unit so as not to give a strong shock to
the main unit.
Slide the developing unit horizontally into the machine, in the

direction of the arrow, until developing unit locks into. place.
Do not push the unit diagonally, as contact with the drum may
occur causing damage.
When removing or installing the developing unit, put your hand

from below the unit and slide it in parallel along the guide.
At that time, be careful not to touch the roller surface.
• Check that there is proper amount of developer.

(The stirring screw can be partly seen.)
• There is no developer in the shutter position.
When performing the above operation, there is no need to

uninstall or install the OPC drum unit. If it must be uninstalled
or installed for any reason, follow the procedures below. When
uninstalling or installing the OPC drum unit, put your hand from
below the unit and slide it in parallel along the guide on the
right side.
At that time, be careful not to touch the OPC drum surface.
8) Set the ADJ 1C toner density control reference value.

b. DV seal d. Toner filter
1) Remove the DV seal. 1) Remove the toner filter.
Remove the cover with a screwdriver (-) from the rear side. At When attaching the toner filter, be sure filter is completely
that time, be careful not to break the boss on the front side. seated.
When attaching the DV seal to the cover, use care and do not
wrinkle the seal.

c. DV side seals F/R

1) Remove the DV side seals F/R.
When replacing the toner DV side seals F/R, attach a new one
to the reference.
Before attaching a new seal, be sure to remove foreign materi-

als or remained adhesive completely from the attachment sur-
face.
!TTACHMENT REFERENCE
!TTACHMENT REFERENCE
!TTACHMENT REFERENCE !TTACHMENT REFERENCE

E. OPC drum section 2) Insert a small screwdriver or a hex wrench into the hole in the
shaft cover on the opposite side of the OPC drum drive gear,
(1) OPC drum unit
and push it in the arrow direction to pull out the drum shaft.
No. Name
1 Drum
2 MC unit
3 Cleaning blade
4 Toner reception blade
5 Side seals F/R
5
2
In order to improve the image quality, the backlash between
the OPC drum shaft and the OPC drum is minimized in this
machine. To pull out the OPC drum shaft, therefore, follow the
a. Drum above procedure.
1) Rotate the OPC drum drive gear in the arrow direction (clock-
wise) to release the drum shaft lock.
Note that conduction grease is applied to the shaft on the OPC
drum drive gear side. Be careful not to attach conduction
grease to the OPC drum surface.
When locking or releasing the lock of the drum shaft, check the
direction of rotating the drum drive gear indicated on the drum 3) Remove the drum.
holder on the rear frame side.
When assembling the drum shaft, set the projection with an

opening for the drum drive gear to the position shown in the
figure, and push the drum shaft inside. Then, rotate the drum
drive gear in the arrow direction (counterclockwise) to lock it.
Check to confirm that the projection of the drum drive gear is
securely in the drum holder.

b. MC unit
1) Remove the cover, and slide the MC unit to the rear side to
Note for servicing the OPC drums remove.
1. Prevent contamination
Note
• Be careful not to leave fingerprints or oily dirt on the OPC drum When replacing the MC unit, do not touch the MC grid surface.
surface. (Keep the unit away from oils and dust.)
• When replacing the OPC drum, cover the OPC drum with the
protection sheet and hold the protection sheet. When attaching the cover, check to confirm that the seat
If it is required to hold the OPC drum directly, use enough care attached to the cover is not in contact with the MC grid.
not to touch the cleaning blade area, 5mm inside from both
edges of the OPC drum. (If a fingerprint or oily dirt is attached to
the cleaning blade area of the OPC drum, the cleaning blade Check to confirm that the MC grid of the MC unit is not in con-
may flip.) tact with the lens and that it is not deformed.
Countermeasures
If a fingerprint is attached to the OPC drum surface erroneously,
perform the following countermeasures.
1) Use dry cloth to clean and remove the dirt.
2) Apply stearic acid powder to prevent blade flip.
Check method
1
Check to confirm that the OPC drum is free from fingerprints or oily
dirt and that the cleaning blade is completely cleaned by the follow-
ing method.
• Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11" x
2
8.5") paper, and check the printed paper for any abnormality in
the image.
2. Prior exposure prevention
Note
• Avoid servicing in a place where there is strong light.
• Do not expose the unit to light for a long time.
• Cover the OPC drum with light-blocking material. (When using
paper, use about 10 sheets of paper to block light.)
Countermeasures c. Cleaning blade
If the OPC drum is erroneously exposed to light too much (prior 1) Remove the lens. Remove the cleaning blade.
exposure), perform the following countermeasures.
1) Print half tone images on the whole surface of A4 (11" x 8.5")
paper, and check to confirm that there is no irregular density When toner is attached to the lens, wipe with dry cloth or cloth
area in the previously exposed section. immersed in alcohol.
2) If the OPC drum is subject to stress by being exposed to
strong light, it may be recovered by leaving it in a dark and cool
place. Do not touch the tip of the cleaning blade.
If it may not be recovered, replace it with a new one.
1 2
2
3
2

d. Toner reception blade
1) Remove the toner reception blade.
When the OPC drum is removed, perform the following procedures.
1) After removing the OPC drum, apply stearic acid powder
When replacing the toner reception blade, attach a new one to (UKOG-0312FCZZ) to the whole surface of the OPC drum.
the reference.
Bump reference
0 - +0.5mm
Bump reference
0 - +0.5mm
2) After attaching the OPC drum to the OPC drum frame, use the
black protect sheet or copy paper, and manually rotate the
OPC drum two turns in the forward direction to remove stearic
acid powder applied to the OPC drum surface.
e. Side seals F/R

1) Remove the side seals F/R.
When replacing the side seals F/R, attach the cleaning blade
in advance, then attach a new seal to the reference.
Thoroughly clean the frame surface of any old glue residue

before attaching the new seals.
• Do not touch the OPC drum surface except for the both ends
(5mm) of the OPC drum.
• Any section of the OPC drum may be touched from above
the black protect sheet, but do not touch too strongly.
Bump reference
0 - +0.2mm
Blade edge reference Blade edge reference

(2) MC cleaning rod F. Transfer section
No. Name
1 Charger cleaner
No. Name
1 Separation pawl
1 2 Primary transfer belt
3 Secondary transfer drive transmission gear
4 Primary transfer belt drive roller
5 Primary transfer belt follower roller
6 Primary transfer belt tension roller
7 Registration backup roller
8 Y auxiliary roller
9 PTC backup roller
10 Primary transfer roller
6
5
2
a. Charger cleaner 3
1) Open the front cabinet, and remove the MC cleaning rod. 8
10 1
7
10 4
9
a. Separation pawl, Primary transfer belt

1) Remove the paper guide.
After removing the paper guide, place it so that the separation

pawl faces upward in order to protect the separation pawl tip
from damages.
In addition, when attaching the paper guide, be careful not to
2) Remove the charger cleaner at the lead edge of the MC clean- damage the transfer belt by the separation pawl.
ing rod, and attach a new charger cleaner.
1
1
1
2

2) Remove the separation pawl from the paper guide. c. Primary transfer belt drive roller, Primary transfer belt
follower roller
1) Clean the primary transfer belt drive roller, and the primary
transfer belt follower roller.
3) Remove the primary transfer unit.

4) Fold the primary transfer unit, and remove the primary transfer
belt.
d. Primary transfer belt tension roller, Registration backup
roller
The length of the mounting screw on the front side differs from 1) Clean the primary transfer belt tension roller, registration
that on the rear side. The screw on the rear side is longer than backup roller.
that on the front side.
e. Y auxiliary roller, PTC backup roller

1) Clean the Y auxiliary roller, and the PTC backup roller.
b. Secondary transfer drive transmission gear

1) Clean the secondary transfer driver transmission gear.

f. Primary transfer roller (2) Primary transfer cleaner unit
1) With the front section of the primary transfer unit slightly lifted,
rotate the transfer lock cam knob counterclockwise so that it is No. Name
at the angle shown in the figure. 1 Transfer cleaner seal F/R
2 Primary transfer belt cleaner blade
With the above procedure, the primary transfer roller may be
3 Primary transfer toner reception blade
removed.
Be sure to slightly lift the front section of the primary transfer 1

unit when rotating the transfer lock cam knob. If not, a stress is
applied to the standard reflection plate lever, causing a trouble.
2
3
a. Transfer cleaner seal F/R

1) Remove the transfer cleaner seal F/R.
When replacing the transfer cleaner seals R/F, attach a new

seal to the reference.
Thoroughly clean the frame surface of any old glue residue
before attaching the new seals.
2) Release the lock of the bearing, and remove the bearing and
the primary transfer roller.
1
1
1
2
2
2
Blade edge reference 0 - 0.3mm
Frame edge reference 0 - 0.3mm
3) With the front section of the primary transfer unit slightly lifted,
return the transfer lock cam knob to the neutral angle. b. Primary transfer belt cleaner blade
1) Remove the primary transfer belt cleaner blade.

c. Primary transfer toner reception blade (3) Secondary transfer unit
1) Remove the primary transfer toner reception blade.
No. Name
1 Secondary transfer belt follower roller
2 Secondary transfer belt
When replacing the primary transfer toner reception blade, 3 Secondary transfer belt drive roller
attach a new one to the reference. 4 Secondary transfer backup roller
Thoroughly clean the frame surface of any old glue residue 5 Secondary transfer belt tension roller
before attaching the new seals. 6 Secondary transfer roller
7 Secondary transfer drive gear
2
Frame edge reference
0 - 0.3mm
Frame edge reference 0 - 0.3mm 3
6
4
1
5
a. Secondary transfer belt follower roller, Secondary transfer

belt
1) Remove the spring, and separate the secondary transfer belt
unit and the secondary transfer base unit.
After replacement of the primary transfer belt, perform the following
procedures.
2
1) With the primary transfer cleaner unit removed, apply starting
powder (UKOG-0123FCZZ) to the whole surface of the pri-
mary transfer belt.
Before assembling the secondary transfer belt unit and the

secondary transfer base unit, apply grease (HANAL FL-955R)
2) Attach the primary transfer cleaner unit. to the cam and the frame of the secondary transfer base unit.
3) Manually rotate the transfer belt drive gear to remove starting * Use care not to apply grease to the secondary transfer belt.
powder from the primary transfer belt clearly.

2) Remove the holder, and remove the secondary transfer belt c. Secondary transfer roller
follower roller. Clean the secondary transfer belt follower roller. 1) Remove the bearing, and remove the secondary transfer roller.
3 2
1
1
d. Secondary transfer drive gear

3) Remove the secondary transfer belt.
1) Remove the E-ring and the bearing. Slide the secondary trans-
fer belt drive roller, and remove the parallel pin and the sec-
ondary transfer drive gear.
b. Secondary transfer belt drive roller, Secondary transfer

backup roller, Secondary transfer belt tension roller
1) Clean the secondary transfer belt drive roller, the secondary
3
transfer backup roller, and the secondary transfer belt tension
roller. 2 5
4
1

(4) PTC unit 2) Remove the electrode plate, and remove the spring. Remove
the electrode plate and the spring from the PTC wire.
No. Name
1 PTC cleaner
2 PTC wire
Do not touch the wire section of the PTC wire with bare hands.
3 PTC cleaner holder
6
1
2
3 5
4
a. PTC cleaner, PTC wire, PTC cleaner holder

3
1) Remove the PTC cleaner.
2
1
Check to confirm that the PTC wire is located at the center
between the PTC cleaner holder and the PTC cleaner.
3) Remove the holder, and remove the PTC cleaner holder.

G. LSU section (2) LSU cleaning rod
(1) LSU No. Name
1 Cleaning base
No. Name
1 Dust-proof glass
1
a. Cleaning base
2) Remove the LSU cleaning rod from the front cabinet.
a. Dust-proof glass
2) Remove the LSU cleaning rod from the front cabinet.
3) Remove the cleaning base from the waste toner box, and
attach it to the LSU cleaning rod.
3) Insert the LSU cleaning rod with the felt side downward, and
move it back and forth several times to clean the LSU dust-
proof glass.

H. Manual paper feed section 3) Remove the separation roller, and the torque limiter.
(1) Manual paper feed unit
No. Name
1 Paper feed roller
2 Separation roller
3 Torque limiter
5 Transport roller 10 (36cpm machine)
1

4
b. Transport roller 9
1) Clean the transport roller 9.
5
3
2
a. Paper feed roller, Separation roller, Torque limiter

c. Transport roller 10
1) Remove the paper guide, and clean the transport roller 10.
2) Slide the stopper and the collar, and remove the paper feed
roller.
2
1
2 1
3
2

I. Tray paper feed section 4) Remove the separation roller.
(1) Tray paper feed unit
No. Name
1 Paper pickup roller
2 Paper feed roller
3 Separation roller
6 Torque limiter
b. Transport roller 4
4 1) Clean the transport roller 4.
1
2
5
a. Paper pickup roller, Paper feed roller, Separation roller

1) Remove the paper feed tray.
c. Transport roller 2
1) Remove the E-ring and the bearing, and remove the paper
feed lower PG unit.
2 2
2 2
3) Remove the paper pickup roller, and the paper feed roller.
2
1

2) Clean the transport roller 2. J. Paper transport/Paper exit/ADU section
(1) PS unit
No. Name
1 Registration roller (Idle)
2 Registration roller (Drive)
1
2 3
d. Torque limiter
1) Remove the E-ring and the bearing, and remove the paper
feed lower PG unit.
2 2
2 2
a. Registration roller (Idle), Registration roller (Drive),
Transport roller 5
1) Clean the registration roller (Idle), the registration roller (Drive),
and the transport roller 5.
2
1
2) Remove the spring, and remove the reinforcement plate.

Remove the spring, and the separation pressure release plate.
2
3
1
3) Remove the separation roller. Remove the E-ring, and the

shaft, and remove the torque limiter.

(2) Right door unit c. Paper exit roller 2
1) Open the right door unit, and remove the cover.
No. Name
3 Paper exit roller 3
4 Paper exit roller 2
3
4
1
1
a. Transport roller 7, Transport roller 8

1) Open the ADU open/close door, and clean the transport roller
7, and the transport roller 8.
3) Remove the cover, and clean the paper exit roller 2.
b. Paper exit roller 3

1
1) Open the right door unit, and clean the paper exit roller 3.
2

(3) Fusing rear unit (4) Paper exit unit
No. Name No. Name

1 Transport roller 6 1 Paper exit roller 1
2 Discharge brush
1 1
2
a. Transport roller 6
1) Clean the transport roller 6.
a. Paper exit roller 1
1) Clean the paper exit roller 1.
b. Discharge brush
1) Remove the holder.

2) Remove the earth plate. Remove the discharge brush. K. Fusing section
(1) Fusing unit
When replacing the discharge brush, attach a new brush to the No. Name
reference. 1 Lower separation pawl
2 Lower separation pawl spring
3 Separation plate
Thoroughly clean the frame surface of any old glue residue 4 Web guide shaft
before attaching the new seals. 5 Web pressure roller bearing
6 Web pressure roller
7 Web roller
8 Lower thermistor
9 Pressure roller gear
1 10 Pressure roller gear bearing
1
11 Pressure roller
12 Sub thermistor
2 13 Fusing roller bearing
14 Insulation bush
15 Heating roller bearing
16 Meandering suppress collar
17 Fusing roller
Bump reference 18 Heating roller
19 Fusing belt
Folding reference
20 Washer
16
20
15
14
13
18 9
17 10
19
8
12
16
14
15
20 1
13
10
11
5
1 6
2
3
7
4
5
4
2

a. Lower separation pawl, Lower separation pawl spring 3) Remove the fusing cover.
1) Open the fusing rear lower PG unit, and remove the fusing
cover.
When removing the fusing cover, lift the pawl section with a
screwdriver (-) and remove.
1
1
1
2
4) Remove the lower separation pawl and the lower separation

3
pawl spring from the paper guide.
1
When assembling, check to confirm that the hook of the lower

1 separation pawl spring is engaged.
2) Remove the fusing rear lower PG unit. 1

2
1
When removing, be careful not to lose the spring. 2
1
When attaching, check to confirm that the spring hook is
engaged. 2
1
2
b. Separation plate

c. Web guide shaft, Web pressure roller bearing, Web
pressure roller, Web roller
After installing the separation plate and the paper guide, manu- 1) Disconnect the connector and remove the harness. Remove
ally move the separation plate to check the operation. the web unit.
2) Remove the spring, and slide it to the front side, and remove
the separation plate.
Be careful not to damage or scratch the separation plate sur-

face.
2) Remove the holder.

1
1
When assembling, place the actuator tip on the outside of the
web sheet.
3) Remove the holder, from the separation plate.

2
1
1
2
3 3) Remove the web guide shaft.

1
2

4) Remove the web roller (on the winding side). 7) Remove the web roller (on the feeding side).
5) Remove the spring and the web pressure roller bearing, and
remove the web pressure roller.
After assembling the web unit, rotate the drive gear until the
2 1 end position of the start mark on the web sheet comes to the
pressure roller.
End position of the start mark

2
1
Pressure roller
3
6) Remove the web guide shaft.

d. Lower thermistor 2) Disconnect the connector of the heater lamp. Remove the
1) Remove the paper guide. holder, and remove the heater lamp.
2
2 1
1
1
3
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the mounting plate.
Remove the lower thermistor from the mounting plate.
3) Remove the C-ring, the pressure roller gear, and the pressure
4 3 roller gear bearing.
1
2
3
2
1
e. Pressure roller gear, Pressure roller gear bearing, Pressure 3

roller 1
1) Remove the drive plate, and remove the gear.
3
2
1
1

4) Remove the pressure roller. g. Fusing roller bearing, heat-insulating bush, heating roller
bearing, meandering suppress collar, fusing roller, heating
roller, fusing belt
When attaching the pressure roller, attach it with the protection 1) Remove the paper guide. Disconnect the connector.
sheet on it. After completion of assembly, remove the protec-
tion sheet.
1
When replacing the pressure roller, apply grease (JFE552). In

addition, wipe the pressure roller surface with alcohol. 2
1
For removal of the pressure roller, remove the lower thermistor
then remove the roller.
2) Remove the spring. Remove the holder, and remove the

heater lamp.
f. Sub thermistor
1) Disconnect the connector, and remove the sub thermistor.
3 3
2 2
1 1
2
3) Remove the E-ring, the gear, the fusing roller bearing, and the
1
support plate.
6 5
5
1
6 4
4 3
2 1
5
5

4) Remove the fulcrum plate, and remove the fusing belt unit.
When replacing the fusing roller, apply grease (JFE552) to the

shaft section.
1 2
5) Remove the C-ring, the insulation bush, the washers and the
heating roller bearing.
When replacing the insulation bush, apply grease (JFE552) to

the inner race and the outer race.
When attaching the fusing pressure spring, perform the following

procedures.
1) Slide the fusing belt unit to the front side, then to the rear side.

1
6) Remove the heating roller from the frame. Remove the washer
and the meandering suppress collar from the heating roller.
2
Remove the heating roller and the fusing roller from the fusing
belt.
When attaching the fusing belt, attach it with the protection 2) Attach the pressure spring, and connect the fusing heater lamp
sheet on it. After attaching the fusing roller bearing, remove the connector.
protection sheet. 3) Shine a light through the clearance between the rear side of
the fusing unit and the frame to confirm that there is a clear-
ance between the fusing belt and the belt guide collar.
After attaching the fusing belt, wipe the belt surface with alco- If there is a clearance between the fusing belt and the belt
hol. guide collar, black color on the surface of the fusing roller (F1)
can be seen. It serves as a criterion of the judgment for pres-
ence of a clearance.
Belt guide collar

Fusing belt
3
1
2
3 5
2
4 Clearance

When processing the fusing unit harness, note the following.
If the harness is improperly processed, short-circuit may occur.
Harness A should be passed over the earth terminal.
Earth
terminal
Harness A
Earth
terminal
Harness A
For connection of the power switch connector, follow the proce-

dures below.
Be sure to identify the colors and connecting directions of the con-
nector and the wire.
Check that the connector and the Attach the power

wire are connected as shown with switch so that the
the engraved mark on the frame. engraved mark
"ON" is on the
upper side.
Indicates the wire color.

Indicates the connector color.
B: Black
W: White
R: Red

MX-3115N
[11] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING

6HUYLFH0DQXDO
1. HDD/SD card memory map

A. HDD partition
HDD size = 320GB (Actual size 289GB)

2XWHU
䚷>,@*%
WUDFN

䚷>,@*%

>6@
>,@*% >,@*% >/@*% >6@*%
*
>6@*% >6@*%
>6@*%
>6@*%
>6@*% >6@*%

>6@*%
,QQHU
WUDFN >6@*% >/@*%
>*%@
B. HDD data contents

No. File system Stored data NOTE
I-1 Image data Image data (ERDH/Temporary storage) 1000 documents, 3000 images
I-2 Image data Image data (Document filing) 3000 documents, 20000 images
I-3 Image data Not available
I-4 Image data FAX/Internet Fax receive images (for backup) (SD Card I101 area data backup)
L-1 Not available System storage data (Address book, image send system registration data
(sender'sinformation, meta data, etc.), FSS collection data)
S-1 Universal Download font
User profile
User macro
Database system file
System log
System setting data (Backup)
S-2 Universal Document filing (Database)
Job log (database)
Job completion list
S-3 Universal Not available Not used
S-4 Universal Not available Not used
S-5 Universal Spool area for printer
S-6 Universal Application work area (User file used in USB direct print)
S-7 Universal eOSA application file
S-8 Universal User file saved in the SMB server
S-9 Universal Data backup when installing DSK (User data (Address book, account information))
S-10 Universal e-manual
Watermark
L-2 Universal Not available Not used
MX-3115N VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 11 – 1

C. SD card partition
SD card size = 4GB (Actual size 3.6GB)
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 [MB]
0 [L-101] 500MB [S-101] 500MB
1 [S-102] 500MB [S-105] [S-103] 924MB

100MB
[I-101] 1GB
2
[GB]
D. SD card data contents

No. File system Stored data NOTE
L-101 Not available ICU firmware (Boot/Main)
Boot animation
Boot (CN Update mode)
ARM9 firmware
lang.sfu (language data)
graph.sfu (Animation data)
S-101 Universal font
web help
spdl
Option FontROM
S-102 Universal Same as above (Mirror)
S-105 Universal Setting value data file (System setting/SIM setting data (Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
S-103 Universal Key operator setting storage data
FAX reception data (For power shut off and paper empty)
FEP leaning data (Japanese/Chinese)
Firmware update data (differential between new and old) (For FSS)
Account management information/User authentication data
I-101 Image data FAX/Internet Fax receive images

2. Necessary steps when replacing the PWB, HDD and the SD Card
A. MFP substrate replacement procedure (work flow)
Registered user information will not be recovered if the MFP PWB is affected by U2-05 trouble. (*1)
1) Attach the flash ROM, the memory, the EEPROM, the SD card etc. of the MFP PWB on the service parts MFP PWB and install it to the
main unit.
Ground your body with grounding band during the work.

2) When U2 trouble occurs, use SIM16 to cancel it.
3) Set as follows after restarting the main unit.
At this timing, F6-21 may occur. Whether it may occur or not, go to execute procedure 1.
(1) Set the appropriate country code by Sim66-02 (clear the software switches related to FAX).
Make sure to execute even if the fax option is not installed on the machine.
B. Procedures necessary for HDD replacement

Note for HDD replacement
• Data of the following list are saved in the HDD of the complex machine. If the HDD operates normally and data backup is possible before
replacement, perform data backup and then replace the HDD.
• If the HDD does not operate normally, data cannot be backed up.
• The HDD replacement procedures with a broken HDD differs from that with a normal HDD.
Contents of this chapter
• HDD storage data and backup
• Replacement procedures when HDD storage data can be backed up
• Replacement procedures when HDD storage data cannot be backed up due to breakdown of HDD
• Reinstall and update procedures of Operation Manual data saved in HDD
• Reinstall and update procedures of watermark data.

(1) HDD storage data and backup
Some HDD storage data can be backed up, and some other data cannot. Some HDD storage data can be reinstalled, and some other storage
data cannot.
If the HDD operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the HDD referring to the
HDD storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the HDD.
a. HDD storage data list
Enable/
Before installation After installation Enable/
Disable of Data reinstall Reinstall
No. Data kind (When shipping (After use by Backup means Disable of
data procedures operator
from the factory) users) data reinstall
backup
1 e-Manual Available Available Disable *1 Enable Sim49-3 Service
2 Address book Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
Device cloning / Device cloning /
Storage backup Storage backup
3 Image send series Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
registration data (Sender’s Device cloning / Device cloning /
information, meta data, etc.) Storage backup Storage backup
4 User authentication Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 Enable Sim56-2 Service
Account management
5 Japanese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
(Learning)
6 Chinese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
(Learning)
7 JOB LOG Not available Available Enable Perform with Disable —
WEB PAGE.
8 JOB completion list Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
9 New N/A (FSS) information Not available Available Disable Not available Disable —
10 User font (Added) Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with Service
WEB PAGE. or User
11 User macro Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with
WEB PAGE.
12 Document filing Not available Available Enable Perform with Enable Perform with
WEB PAGE. WEB PAGE.
13 Some of system setting Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
data Device cloning / Device cloning /
Storage backup Storage backup
14 Watermark Available Available Disable *2 Enable Sim49-5 Service
15 User color profile Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with Service
WEB PAGE.
16 Mirroring information (When Not available Available Disable Not available Enable The mirroring Service
the mirroring kit is installed, (After installation information is
the mirroring information is of the mirroring erased by
written.) kit) forcible build or
RIB BUSTER.
17 Individual setting Not available Available Disable Disable Service
information for direct WEB
browsing
18 Cookie file for OSA Not available Available Disable Disable Service
application
19 eOSA application file Not available Installation of Disable Enable Reinstallation of Service
application application
20 User file saved in the SMB Not available Available Disable Disable Service
server (NAS)
*1: The e-Manual cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-3 and USB memory.
*2: Watermark data cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-5 and USB memory.

(2) Replacement procedures when HDD data can be (3) Replacement procedures when the HDD storage
backed up data cannot be backed up due to breakdown
a. Work contents and procedures a. Display when HDD breakdown
When a trouble occurs in the HDD, the error code display of E7-03
When a new HDD
is popped up.
(blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
Procedures used, or when a HDD which (used in the same In this case, the main power must be turned OFF and the HDD
is normal but a program model) is used * must be replaced.
error occurs in it is used.
b. Work contents and procedures
Step 1 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement.
(Servicing) When a new HDD
Use SIM56-2 or the device cloning, or the storage backup (blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
function to backup the data. (Back up the data to the USB Procedures used, or when a HDD which (used in the same
memory.) is normal but a program model) is used *
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4 error occurs in it is used.
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
Step 1 Install a HDD to the machine, Install a HDD to the
authentication data))
and boot the complex machine. machine, and boot the
Step 2 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement. (User o Formatting is automatically complex machine.
or servicing) performed.
Back up the data to PC with Web page.
Step 2 The trouble code, U2-05,
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 7, 10, 14
is displayed. o Cancel
(Document filing data, JOB LOG data))
with SIM16.
Step 3 When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use
Step 3 Since a blank HDD is Use Sim62-1 to format
SIM66-62 to backup the image data from the SD card to
automatically formatted, there the HDD.
the USB memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file
is no need to perform
type, and cannot be restored to the machine. The backup
formatting procedure with SIM.
data are given to the user.)
Step 4 When there are some FAX or Internet Fax data, use
Step 4 Replace the HDD.
SIM66-62 to backup the image data from the SD card to
Step 5 Boot the complex machine. Boot the complex the USB memory. (The backup image data are of PDF file
o Formatting is automatically machine. type, and cannot be restored to the machine. The backup
performed. data are given to the user.)
Step 6 The trouble code, U2-05, Step 5 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The
is displayed. o Cancel memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between
with SIM16. the HDD data and the image related memory and to
Step 7 Since a blank HDD is Use SIM62-1 to format prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not
automatically formatted, there the HDD. only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet
is no need to perform Fax models.)
formatting procedure with SIM. Step 6 Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD.
Step 8 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The Step 7 The trouble code, U2-60, is displayed. o Use SIM49-5 to
memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between install the watermark data to the HDD. o After booting the
the HDD data and the image related memory and to machine, use SIM16 to cancel the "U2-60" trouble.
prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not
only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet With the above procedures, the HDD is reset to the state of factory
Fax models.) shipping.
Step 9 Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD.
Step 10 The trouble code, U2-60, is displayed. o Use SIM49-5 to
install the watermark data to the HDD. o After booting the
machine, use SIM16 to cancel the "U2-60" trouble.
Step 11 Import the data backed up in Step 1.
Use SIM56-2, or the device cloning, or the storage backup
to import.
(Import enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
authentication data))
Step 12 Import the data backed up with the Web page function in
Step 2.
Import enable data: Document filing data, User font, Use
macro
(The JOB LOG data can be backed up but cannot be
imported.)

(4) Reinstall and update procedures of the HDD (5) Watermark data reinstall and update procedures
storage Operation Manual data 1) Obtain the watermark data.
1) Obtain the Operation Manual data. Download the watermark data from the utility menu on the web
Download the Operation Manual data from the utility menu on site (Tech-DS home page).
the web site (Tech-DS home page). Copy the downloaded files to the USB device without changing
Copy the downloaded files to the USB device without changing the file hierarchy.
the file hierarchy.
26cpm/31cpm machine
To upload to the complex machine, files of "**_pdf_fax.idx" and When data are uploaded from the USB memory to the HDD, if
"**_pdf.idx" and "version.txt" as well as the Operation Manual there are some data in the HDD, the files in the memory are
data (**.pdf) are required. When the downloaded files are cop- compared with the files in the HDD and only the files which
ied without changing the file hierarchy, these files also are cop- satisfy the following conditions are written into the HDD.
ied. • The file size is different.
• The time stamp is different.
• The file exists only in the USB memory.
When data are uploaded from the USB memory to the HDD, if 2) Enter the SIM49-5 mode.
there are some data in the HDD, the files in the memory are
compared with the files in the HDD and only the files which
satisfy the following conditions are written into the HDD. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
:$7(50$5.83'$7(>XVEEG@
x The file size is different. ',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
x The time stamp is different. ),/( ',5!)2/'(5
',5!:0
x The file exists only in the USB memory.
The data backed up with SIM56-2 must not be installed to

another machine. If installed, the adjustment data will be over-
written and a trouble may be generated.

ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21 12
7(67 &/26( 3) Insert the USB memory into the machine.
(0$18$/83'$7(>XVEEG@
',5!)2/'(5 ),/( • When the USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A STOR-
),/( ',5!)2/'(5
ANGEE-MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK]
',5!0$18$/
button is pressed, the screen shifts to the folder select menu
1.
4) Select the folder of the watermark data. (The screen shifts to
the watermark data install menu.)
The current version and the update version are displayed.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons

are changed from gray-out to active display.
6) When [YES] button is pressed, the selected watermark data
3) Insert the USB memory into the machine.
are installed.
• When the USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A STOR-
When install is completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case
ANGEE-MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK]
of an abnormality, "ERROR" is displayed.
button is pressed, the screen shifts to the folder select menu
1.
4) Select the folder of the Operation Manual data. (The screen
shifts to the Operation Manual data install menu.)
The current version and the update version are displayed.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
are changed from gray-out to active display.
6) When [YES] button is pressed, the selected Operation Manual
is installed.
When install is completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case
of an abnormality, "ERROR" is displayed.

C. Procedures necessary for SD card replacement
(1) SD card data and backup
Some SD card storage data can be backed up, and some other cannot. Some SD card storage data can be reinstalled, and some other cannot.
If the SD card operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the SD card referring
to the storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the SD card.
The SD card includes the following data.
SD card backup
Partition Enable/Disable Enable/Disable Data reinstall

Stored data Backup means
number of data backup of data reinstall procedures
L-101 ICU firmware data ICU firmware (Boot/Main) Disable Enable SIM49-1
lang.sfu (BOOT cannot be
graph.sfu installed again.)
Boot animation
Boot (CN)
ARM9 firmware
S-101 ICU firmware fixed data font Disable Enable SIM49-1
(Pre-install) web help Disable Enable SIM49-1
spdl Disable Enable SIM49-1
Option FontROM Disable Enble SIM49-1
S-102 ICU firmware fixed data Same as above Disable Enable SIM49-1
(Mirror)
S-105 System data Setting value data file (System Disable SIM56-2 Enable SIM56-2
setting/SIM setting data (Image
quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
S-103 User data System setting data Enable sim56-02 Enable SIM56-2
Key operator custom setting data Enable System setting - Enable System setting -
(Data changed from the default) data backup - data backup -
device cloning device cloning
FAX reception data (For power shut Disable Disable
off and paper empty)
FEP learning data (Japanese/ Disable Disable
Chinese)
Firmware update data (differential Disable Disable
between new and old) (For FSS)
Account management information/ Enable sim56-02 Enable SIM56-2
User authentication data
Home screen customize data Enable System setting - Enable System setting -
data backup - data backup -
device cloning device cloning
I-101 FAX reception data FAX/Internet Fax reception image Enable SIM66-62 Disable
data
1) Use SIM56-02 to backup the SD card data to the USB mem-

ory.
2) When the operation panel home screen has been customized, When replacing the SD card, be sure to use only the specified SD
backup the SD card data by using the device cloning function. card supplied as a service part.
3) When there are some FAX/Internet Fax data received, use The firmware required for booting must be included in the SD
SIM66-62 to backup the image data to the USB memory in the card used in this machine. The commercially available SD
PDF file type, and give the PDF file to the user. (The data can- cards have no such data.
not be restored to the machine.)
4) Replace the SD card with a new one.
5) Upgrade the firmware to the latest version. When U2-40 error occurs, if the error cannot be canceled by
6) Use SIM66-10 to clear the image send memory. (This is in SIM16, or when E7-07 error occurs, there may be some trouble in
order to obtain consistency between the HDD data and the the SD card.
image related memory.)
7) Use SIM56-02 to restore the data backed up in procedure 1).
8) Restore the data backed up in procedure 2) by using the The data backed up with SIM56-2 must not be installed to another
device cloning function. machine. If installed, the adjustment data will be overwritten and a
trouble may be generated.

3. HDD/SD card SIM format operation
The relations between SIM62/66 and formatted (deleted) data are as follows:
*1: Physical format ("0" is written to the all area.)
*2: Logical format (Only the management area is initialized.)
*3: Nothing is done.
SIM66-10 FAX image memory clear SIM62-8 Hard disk format (Excluding the system area)
HDD HDD
Partition Partition
Partition Partition
number number
I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *3 I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *1
I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *3 I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *1
I-4 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *2 I-4 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *1
L-1 System storage data *3 L-1 System storage data *3
L-2 Mirroring information (When the mirroring kit is *3 L-2 Mirroring information (When the mirroring kit is *3
installed, the mirroring information is written.) installed, the mirroring information is written.)
S-1 User data 1 *3 S-1 User data 1 *1
S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *3 S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *3
S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *3 S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *1
S-3 Redial information of the address book *3 S-3 User setting information for direct WEB browsing / *1
S-5 Printer spooler *3 Cookie file for OSA application
S-6 Application work *3 S-5 Printer spooler *1
S-9 DSK data save *3 S-6 Application work *1
S-7 eOSA application file *1
SD Card S-8 User file saved in the SMB server (NAS) *1
S-9 DSK data save *1
Partition
Partition
number SD Card
I-101 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *2
I-102 FAX/Internet Fax reception data (Backup) *2 Partition
Partition
L-101 ICU firmware *3 number
S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3 I-101 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *1
S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3 L-101 ICU firmware *3
S-103 User data 2 *3 S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3
S-105 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data *3 S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3
(Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW) S-103 User data 2 *1
S-105 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data *3
SIM62-1 Hard disk format (Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
HDD
SIM62-10 Job complete list (Job log data) delete
Partition
Partition
HDD
number
I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *1 Partition
Partition
I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *1 number
I-4 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *1 I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *3
L-1 System storage data *1 I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *3
L-2 Mirroring information (When the mirroring kit is *3 I-4 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *3
installed, the mirroring information is written.) L-1 System storage data *3
S-1 User data 1 *1 L-2 Mirroring information (When the mirroring kit is *3
S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *3 installed, the mirroring information is written.)
S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *1 S-1 User data 1 *3
S-3 User setting information for direct WEB browsing / *1 S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *3
Cookie file for OSA application S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *2
S-5 Printer spooler *1 S-5 Printer spooler *3
S-6 Application work *1 S-6 Application work *2
S-7 eOSA application file *1 S-9 DSK data save *3
S-8 User file saved in the SMB server (NAS) *1
S-9 DSK data save *1 SD Card
SD Card Partition
Partition
number
Partition I-101 FAX/Internet Fax reception data *3
Partition
number I-102 FAX/Internet Fax reception data (Backup) *3
L-101 ICU firmware *3 L-101 ICU firmware *3
S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3 S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3
S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3 S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3
S-105 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data *3 S-103 User data 2 *3
(Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW) S-105 System data (System setting/ SIM setting data *3
S-103 User data 2 *1 (Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)

SIM62-11 Document filing data delete
HDD
Partition
Partition
number
I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *2
I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *2
L-1 System storage data *3
L-2 Mirroring information (When the mirroring kit is *3
installed, the mirroring information is written.)
S-1 User data 1 *3
S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *3
S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *3
S-5 Printer spooler *2
S-6 Application work *3
SD Card
Partition
Partition
number
L-101 ICU firmware *3
S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3
S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3
S-103 User data 2 *3
(Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)
SIM62-13 Hard disk format (Manual area only)

HDD
Partition
Partition
number
I-1 ERDH work + Temporary storage *3
I-2 Document filing data (Standard + User) *3
L-1 System storage data *3
L-2 Mirroring information (When the mirroring kit is *3
installed, the mirroring information is written.)
S-1 User data 1 *3
S-10 Pre-install data (e-manual/ Watermark) *2
S-2 Application #1 (Job log data) *3
S-5 Printer spooler *3
S-6 Application work *3
SD Card
Partition
Partition
number
L-101 ICU firmware *3
S-101 ICU firmware fixed data (Pre-install) *3
S-102 ICU firmware fixed data (Mirror) *3
S-103 User data 2 *3
(Image quality adjustment)/FAX Soft SW)

MX-3115N
[12] SERVICE WEB PAGE 6HUYLFH0DQXDO
1. General
The following functions are available on the Hidden Web Page exclusively used for the serviceman.
Menu/Item Function and content

Password Setting Used to set the password to enter the Hidden Web Page exclusively used for the serviceman.
Output of Test Page Used to print out the test page (system setting contents).
Font/Form Download Used to download Font/Form.
Font/Form of PCL and PostScript, macro, and other resources are downloaded to the HDD and controlled.
(PS, PCL5 only)
Device Cloning Used to import/export the system setting information in XML format. By importing the export file to the other device, the
setting values and setting contents of the device can be copied to another device. This function is useful to set the same
setting to two or more machines efficiently.
Filing Data Backup Used to import/export the document filing data in the unit of folder.
User Control Used to shift to the user mode. After log in, the screen is shifted to the setting screen of user management.
User Control 2 Used to set the Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group by authority of the serviceman.
(Select among preset items.)
Job Log Save Job Log Used to save the Job Log.
View Job Log Used to display the Job Log.
Update of Firmware Used to update the firmware version.
Syslog*1 Administration Settings Used to set the Log Type. (Set to the default.)
Storage/Send Settings Keep all the items selected.
Save/ Delete Syslog Used to save or delete the log data.
View Syslog Used to display the log data.
*1: This may be useful for troubleshooting when a trouble occurs. When submission of the log data file is requested in order to troubleshoot,
use the log file save mode to export the log data file to the client PC.
2. Details and operation procedures

A. Procedures to enter the Hidden Web page B. Password Setting
exclusively used for the serviceman
1) Boot a browser program.
2) Enter the specified
URL (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/service_login.html) and enter the
servicing page menu. MX-XXXX
Default password: "service"
MX-XXXX
* The password can be optionally changed in the following proce-

dures.
1) Enter a new password.
2) Enter the new password again to make confirmation.
3) Click "Submit" (registration) button.
The password can be optionally changed in the Password Setting

menu.
If the password is changed and forgotten, use SIM24-31 to reset
the password to the default.
MX-3115N SERVICE WEB PAGE 12 – 1

C. Output of Test Page E. Device Cloning
MX-XXXX MX-XXXX
1) Click "Print" button of an item or report to be printed.

When there is a list of items for selection, select one of the
items in the pull-down menu list, and click "Print" button.
The list is printed out. (1) Export
D. Font/Form Download 1) Select an item to be backed up.
2) Click "Execute" button.
Specify the save position of the file, and save the file.
(File name: *****.bin)
When the password is set, the set password must be entered
MX-XXXX
when importing.
(2) Import
1) Import from a file: Click "Refer" button to select the back-up
file. (File name: *****.bin)
2) Click "Execute" button to execute import.
If the password is set when exporting, the password must be
entered.
3) Reboot the machine.
F. Filing Data Backup
(1) Download of Font, Form, and Macro

1) Select "Resource Type" from the pull-down menu list. MX-XXXX
(Example: PCL/PostScript Font/Form or Macro)

2) Click "Refer" button to select a target file.
3) Click "Download" button.
4) Click "Submit" (registration) button.
The file is downloaded to the HDD.
The list of the downloaded files and the use percentage of the
HDD are displayed.
(2) Delete of downloaded font
(Procedures to delete a file separately)
1) Select a file to be deleted from the list of the downloaded files,
and click "Delete" button.
2) Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press (1) Export
Yes key. 1) Select the folder to be backed up.
3) Click "Submit" (registration) button. The list display conditions can be specified by changing the
The file in the HDD is deleted. index and the number of display items on the pull-down menu.
(3) Procedures to delete all the files at a time
Specify the save position of the file, and save the file. (File
1) Click "Initialize" button. name: *****.bin)
2) Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press 3) Click "Update" button.
OK key.
3) Click "Submit" (registration) button. (2) Import
1) Click "Refer" button to select a target file. (File name: *****.bin)
By the Write-Protect Setting function, the downloaded files can be The target file is imported.
set to write protect. 3) Click "Update" button.

G. User Control 1 (2) View Job Log
MX-XXXX MX-XXXX
1) Enter the password to log in.

Default Password: admin
The screen is shifted to the setting menu of user management.
H. User Control 2
MX-XXXX
1) Select a Jog Log item to be displayed. (In the default setting,

all the items are selected. Remove check marks of the items
which are not to be displayed.)
2) Click "Show" (display) button.
The Jog Log is displayed.
1) Select the Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation
Group. (The Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation
Group must be set in advance.) J. Update of Firmware
(Example of use)
The use sets the conditions for servicing work by using the
Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group functions
in advance, and the serviceman selects the set conditions in MX-XXXX
this mode for servicing work.
I. Job Log
(1) Save Job Log
MX-XXXX
1) Click "Refer" button to select a firmware file.

2) After selecting a firmware file, click "Execute" button.
The firmware data are sent to the machine, and update of the
firmware is processed.
During the process, the message of "Firmware Update, now pro-
cessing..." is displayed.
1) Click "Save" button, and specify the save position of the Job
Log to save it.

K. Syslog (2) Storage/Send Settings
There are following functions in the Syslog mode. Keep all the items selected.
This function is provided to acquire the detailed Syslog to trouble-
shoot when a trouble occurs.
When submission of the log data file is requested for troubleshoot-
ing, use the log file save mode to export the log data file to the cli- MX-XXXX
ent PC.
Syslog Administration Settings Log Type Setting (Set to the default.)

Storage/Send Settings Set all the items selected.
Save/ Delete Syslog Log data save, delete
View Syslog Log data display
MX-XXXX
(3) Save/ Delete Syslog
MX-XXXX
(1) Administration Settings/ Log Type Setting

Set to the default.
MX-XXXX
When saving the Syslog, click "Save" button and specify the save
position and save it.
When deleting, click "Delete" button.
Check to confirm that the confirmation message is displayed, and
press OK key.
(4) View Syslog
MX-XXXX
1) Select a Syslog item to be displayed.

2) Click "Show" button.
The Syslog is displayed.

L. Output Profile Settings M. Machine ID Setting
㪤㪯㪄㫏㫏㫏㫏㪝㪥
MX-XXXX
MX-XXXX
1) Enter the machine ID.

Max. 30 digits of numeral figures and characters can be
entered.
2) Press the registration button.
㪦㫌㫋㫇㫌㫋㩷㪛㩷㪧㫉㫆㪽㫀㫃㪼㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾
The machine ID can be set with SIM26-7 as well as this function.
N. Administration Settings (Menu display setting)

This setting is to select whether to display all the menus of Web
Page on the machine display or to display only the restricted sys-
tem setting menu of the default.
㪪㫇㫆㫋㪺㫆㫃㫆㫉㩷㪫㪸㪹㫃㪼㩷㪪㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾
Setting must be executed according to the user request.
1) Press the setting execution button corresponding to the dis-
play mode.
MX-XXXX
(1) Download procedures of custom output profile

1) Click "Refer" button to select the output profile.
2) Click "Add" button to add the output profile.
3) Click "Add" button to add the output profile.
The added profile is displayed on the list. For the output A pro-
file and the output B profile, the newly added profile becomes
valid.
When no profile is added, the default output profile in the firm-
ware of the machine set when shipping from the factory is
valid.
Output A profile / Output B profile / Output D profile: Selectively
used.
Output C profile: PS mode, for CMYK simulation (Custom)
Spot Color Table: For PS mode
(2) Procedures to delete the custom output profile and
return to the default output profile
1) Clock "Delete" button of the output profile to be deleted.
2) Click "Update" button.
The custom output profile is deleted and the default output pro-
file in the firmware of the machine becomes valid.

O. FSS (Field Support System) Setting
1) Set the following items.
• Use Proxy Server: Yes/No
• Setting of Scheduled Polling: Allow/Inhibit
• Interval of Scheduled Polling: 1 - 60 min
• Setting of Manual Polling: Allow/Inhibit
• Status Notification: On/Off
2) Click the Submit (Registration) button.
MX-XXXX

5
4
3
2
1
No.
OCSW
PWRSW
MX-3115N
#.
&( 3 3(
'.$
Signal name
6!
6
2
2
2
2
KEY PWB
2
LVDS PWB
2
2
USB I/F PWB

2
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
'
#. "
#. &83 3 3( "
"" 0($33 #. #. (23 '.$ "
3#!.$!4! "" 0($33 &83 3 36 N,#$ $)30 "
3#!.$!4! 3#!.$!4! '.$ ,#$3%,?( "
'.$ 3#!.$!4! N,#$ $)30 ,#$3%,?( "
3#!.$!4! '.$ ,#$3%,?( '.$ "
3#!.$!4! 3#!.$!4! ,#$3%,?( ,#$?!?0 "
'.$ '.$ '.$ ,#$?!?- #+
Name
3#!.$!4! 3#!.$!4! ,#$?!?0 '.$ %.!6
3#!.$!4! '.$ ,#$?!?- ,#$?#,+?0 (SYNC
'.$ 3#!.$!4! '.$ ,#$?#,+?- 6SYNC
3#!.#,+/54 .# 6 ,#$?#,+?0 '.$ -/$
Name
3#!.#,+/54 3#!.$!4! ,#$?#,+?- ,#$?!?0 234"
'.$ '.$ '.$ ,#$?!?- 34"9"
3#!.$!4! 3#!.#,+/54 ,#$?!?0 '.$ 3(,2
3#!.$!4! '.$ ,#$?!?- ,#$?!?0 6
'.$ 3#!.#,+/54 '.$ ,#$?!?- 50$.
Operation panel power switch

0.,?3%, .# 3#!.$!4! ,#$?!?0 '.$ '.$
0.,?3%, .# 3#!.$!4! ,#$?!?- ,#$?!?0 '.$
1. Operation panel section
'.$ ,#$?!?- 6!

'.$ ,#$?!?0 '.$ 6COM?IN6COM
,#$?$!4! #. ,#$?!?- ##&4 $)4(
Paper size detection trigger sensor

,#$?$!4! 0($2 63 '.$ 8,?8?3$! .#

'.$ ,#$?!?0 ##&4 9(?9?3#, .#
,#$?$!4! ,#$?!?- 8,?8?3$! 9,?9?).4 6
Document size detection PWB (Light emitting)

,#$?$!4! '.$ 9(?9?3#, 8(?8?#3 6
Document size detection PWB (Light receiving)

'.$ '.$ 9,?9?).4 '.$ 6
,#$?$!4! ,#$?!?0 8(?8?#3 6 6
,#$?$!4! ,#$?!?- '.$ 6 6
'.$ ,#$?!?0 6 6 6
,#$?#,+ ,#$?!?- 6 6 6

,#$?#,+ '.$ 6 '.$ 6
'.$ '.$ 6 '.$ 6
,#$?$!4! ,#$?#,+?0 '.$ 6 6
,#$?$!4! ,#$?#,+?- '.$ 6 .#
0.,?3%, ,#$?!?0 6 6 6'(
0.,?3%, ,#$?!?- 6 6 6
,#$3%,?( 6 '.$ 6',
"(32 63 .

'.$ 6 '.$ '.$
6,%$
6,%$
,#$3%,?( '.$ '.$ .#
A. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
'.$ '.$
#.
6#/.4 '.$

3#?4%-0
8,8
'.$
9(9
07237
,35 -/4(%2 07"

"(3-2 63
8(8
9,9
[13] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
#. #.
"" 0($33 3" 0( 3- 4"
07"

.07237 6,%$
'.$ #. .#
,6$3
USB Interface
'.$ 0($2 63 6,%$
N,#$?$)30 N,#$?$)30
N2%3?3#. N2%3?3#.
48$?3#. 48$?3#.
28$?3#. 28$?3#.
30?#,/3%?( .# .# 30?#,/3%?(
30%$ ( 30%$ ( "0 0( + 3
+%9).?.( .# .# +%9).?.( '.$
N75?+%9 .# '.$ 0$
N).&/?,%$ 6
3#. #.4 07"

N0/7?,%$ 0$3%,
N75?,%$ 0$3%,
'.$ '.$ 0$3%,
6?07- 607-

#.
N0/&?3#. N0/&?3#. "" 0($33
N243?3#. N243?3#. 6/
N#43?3#. N#43?3#. 6/
6 6 N(-?+%9 .#
0#5?2%1

":2
3#?!#+ N(-?,%$ .#
Outputs the key operation signal.

'.$ '.$ .#
#.
'.$ .#
"-" :%33 4"4
.# .#
'.$
6 .#
+%9).
'.$
6?%84
0$
":2
6
3%',%$"02
0$3%,
N75?+%9
0$3%,
3%',%$#02
0$3%,
3%'$
'.$
0/7?,%$
&N(-?,%$ .#
Outputs the document size detection signal.

75?,%$
3%'6
MX-3115N OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 13 – 1

&$
&
N07237
6HUYLFH0DQXDO
&
/#37
&'
6!
6
Drives the LED for the document size detection.

3%'
Turns ON/OFF the power on the secondary side.

&'
3%'
'.$
&
6
+%9).
Generates the document size detection trigger signal.

Function/Operation
Function/Operation
#.
"" 0( + 3
6# 6
'.$ /#37
/#37 '.$
6 6(0,'.,
3):%?,%$
3):%?,%$ 6
3):%?,%$
3):%?,%$
'.$
"50 4: 3,& 3.
#:(2 6 3 #:(2 6 3
N07237
'.$ 32! 4 #.
'.$ .# "" 0!3+
N75?+%9 6/
N).&/?,%$ N).&/?,%$
0/7?,%$ .#
75?,%$
Converts the display data signal to the LCD display signal. / Controls the touch panel.
#. (23 #. (23
&( 3 36
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
&83 3 36
MIM
No.
'.$ '.$
'.$
MHPS
'.$
CL_ON
'.$ '.$
'.$ '.$
'.$ '.$
'.$ '.$
#. '.$ '.$
"" 0($33 '.$ '.$
Lens
Signal name
'.$ '.$ '.$
'.$ '.$ '.$
6 #. !&%?3$ #. !&%?3$/
Reflector
230&
6/
1st mirror
!&%?3$4 !&%?3$4
3rd mirror
2nd mirror
SCU PWB
CCD PWB
6 !&%?3#,+ !&%?3#,+
6" !&%?#3 !&%?#3
.# 6 N2%3?##$!$ N2%3?##$!$
6 '.$ '.$
6 !6 !6
.# 6 !6 !6
$2)6%2 07"
#. ! '.$ !6 !6
"" 0($33 '.$ !6 !6
Scan motor
'.$ !6 !6
'.$ !6 !6
Scanner lamp
300$ '.$ '.$
300$ !6 !6
Scanner lamp drive PWB

60$ #. !6 !6
2. Scanner section
60$ "" 0($33 !6 !6

6 300$ '.$ '.$
6 300$ !6 !6
Name
30&-! 30&-! !6 !6
30&-! 30&-! '.$ '.$
30&-" 30&-" #. 4! . #. 4! .
30&-" 30&-" #. 4! 0 #. 4! 0
Name
30&-/ 30&-/ '.$ '.$
305-! 30-! #. 4" . #. 4" .
305-! 30-! #. 4" 0 #. 4" 0
305-" 30-" '.$ '.$
Scanner home position sensor

305-" 30-" #. 4# . #. 4# .
305-/ 30-/ #. 4# 0 #. 4# 0
3023 3023 '.$ '.$
34-03 34-03 #. 4#,+ . #. 4#,+ .
322# 322# #. 4#,+ 0 #. 4#,+ 0
30&# 3223 '.$ '.$
3073 3073 #. 4$ . #. 4$ .
3%,! 3%,!? #. 4$ 0 #. 4$ 0
3%," 3%,"? '.$ '.$
3%,# 3%,#? #. 4% . #. 4% .
33%,/ 33%,/ #. 4% 0 #. 4% 0
.# 300$ 3#.#.4 3% 3#.#.4 3%
.# .# 30&-/ 3#.#.4 3% 3#.#.4 3%
300$ 300$ '.$ '.$
300$ .# .# #.
60$ 60$ "" 0( + 3 %(2
'.$ 30%$ -(03 -(03
'.$ .# 3/#$ '.$

$ '.$
#. ) 60$ 6
"" 0( + 3
6"
6
3/#$ .#

30%$
#,?/.

Drives the scanner lamp

-(03
Detects the scanner home position.
Leads a document image to the lens.

3#. #.4 07"

Controls the scanner and the operation section.

Drives the scanner unit. (scan, return operations)

#.
"" 0( + 3 "" 0( 3- 4"
-)-?! -)-?!
Function/Operation
Function/Operation
-)-?" -)-?"
-)-?! -)-?!
Reduces a document image (light) and project it to the CCD.

-)-?" -)-?"
"" 0( + 3
)$26
Converges the scanner lamp lights and radiates onto the document.
)$26
)$26
)$26
)$26
Radiates light onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image.
)$26
6
Scans document images and performs A/D conversion of the scanning signal.
#. #.
#0"& !0"
60$ 60$ "" 0( + 3
60$ 60$ )$26
,!-0 ,!-0 )$26
'.$ '.$ )$26
'.$ '.$ )$26
)$26
-)-
)$26
,%$ $26 07"
6
B. Operational descriptions
(1) General
This section performs the following operations.
1) Light is radiated onto the document by the scanner lamp and
B
G
the reflected image is scanned by the 3-line (RGB) CCD ele-
R
ments to be converted into analog image signals.
2) The analog image signals are converted into 10-bit digital sig-
nals by the A/D converter.
3) The digital image signals are sent to the scanner control PWB
for image processing.
(2) Detailed descriptions
a. Optical section drive
The optical section is driven as follows: The drive power is transmit- R
ted from the scanner motor (MIM) through the belt to the drive pul- G
ley/wire, and the copy lamp unit and the mirror base which are
B
attached to the wire are driven.
The scanner motor (MIM) is controlled with the signals sent from Image data of one line
the scanner control PWB.
b. Scanner lamp drive
The scanner lamp is driven by the scanner lamp drive voltage
which is generated by the scanner lamp drive PWB with the control R G B
signals sent from the scanner control PWB. Red component Green component Blue component
image data image data image data
c. Image scan and color separation
Light is radiated onto the document by the scanner lamp and the
d. Image signal A/D conversion
reflected image is scanned by the 3-line (RGB) CCD elements to
be converted into analog image signals. 1) Each image signal (analog) of R, G, and B is converted into a
The color components are extracted into R, G, and B by the three 10bit digital signal by the A/D converter in the CCD PWB.
kinds of CCD elements (R, G, and B). Each color pixel has 10bit information.
The red CCD extracts the red component of an image, the green 2) Each 10bit digital image signal of R, G, and B is outputted from
CCD extracts the green component, and the blue CCD extracts the the CCD PWB and sent to the SCU PWB, where it is con-
blue component. This operation is called color separation. verted into an 8bit signal and sent to the MFP PWB.
The CCD element is apparently seen as one unit, but it includes the
three kinds of elements (R, G, and B). ##$ 07"
The CCD element scans the document in the main scanning direc- !NALOG )#
tion. Scanning in the sub scanning direction is made by shifting the ##$
!&% !$# ,6$3
scanner unit with the scanner motor. ,INES 2
The document images are optically reduced by the lens and '
"
reflected to the CCD.
The scanning direction is 600dpi. "UFFER
4IMING
'ENERATOR
e. Zooming operation
Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing
the scanning speed in the sub scanning direction.
Zooming in the main scanning direction is not made optically, but
performed by the image process technology (software).

SRA-01T-3.2
SMR-06V-N SMP-06V-NC
SMR-06V-N
1 F-GND 1 179228-3
2 MPED 2 1 MPED
3 D-GND 3 2 D-GND
4 5VN+R 4 3 5VN+R
5 24V3 5
6 /MPFS 6
B14B-PHDSS SMP-02V-NC SMR-02V-N
5VNin 13 1 24V3 1
D-GND 8 2 /MPFS 2
5VN+R3 7
5VN+R2 5 F.G
D-GND 4 SRA-01T-3.2
5VN+R1 3
D-GND 2
4
5VNin 1
R-DOOR PWB
3
DF11-4DS-2C
+DF11-4DP-SP1(05)
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
CN10
B26B-PHDSS
1
2
3
4
MPED 1
QR/P4-32P-C(01)
/MPFS 3 QR/P4-32S-C(01) S4B-PH-K-S
3. Manual paper feed section
24V3 17 1 MPED 1 1 3.3VN

D-GND 21 2 24V3 2 2 HUD_M
SMR-08V-N SMP-08V-NC 3 D-GND
5
5VNPD+R 25 3 /MPFS 3
1 D-GND 1 4 TH_M
3.3V 2 17 3.3V 17 2 3.3V 2
HUD_M 4 18 HUD_M 18 3 HUD_M 3 B3B-PH-K-S
TH_M 6 19 TH_M 19 4 TH_M 4 1 D-GND
MPWS 8 20 MPWS 20 5 MPWS 5 2 MPWS
2
/MPLD 10 21 /MPLD 21 6 5VN+R 6 3 5VN+R
5VN+R 24 (NC) 22 (NC) 22 (NC) 7 /MPLD 7
5VN+R 26 (NC) 30 5VN 30 8 5VN+R 8
31 5VNPD 31
A. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram
32 D-GND 32
3
2
1
1
PCU PWB
5VN+R
D-GND
MPLD1
CN-2
B6B-PH-K-S
1 D-GND
2 INT24V1L
3 INT24V1
4 DSW_R<24V>
CN-11 5 DSW_F<24V>
B34B-PHDSS 6 /INT_CNT
INT24V1L 1
MPED
P-GND 3
/POM_CW_CCW_/A 5
/POM_ENABLE_B 7
/POM_CLK_A 9
/POM_MODE_/B 11
/POM_CNT 13
D-GND 15
MPWS
MPFS
/ADUM_MODE 23
/ADUM_ENABLE 25
/RRM_CNT 27
D-GND 29
Driver PWB
/RRM_CLK 31
/RRM_ENABLE 33
INT24V1 2
P-GND 4
HUD_M/TH_M
5VN 6 CN-1

D-GND 8 B24B-PHDSS-B
DSW_R<24V> 10 (NC) 24 SLEEP_DRV
DSW_F<24V> 12 23 D-GND
/INT_CNT 14 22 D-GND
D-GND 16 21 D-GND
20 /RRM_CNT
19 /RRM_CLK CN-6
MPLD
18 /ADUM_CLK B08B-PH-K-S
/ADUM_CNT 24 17 /RRM_ENABLE PFM_OUT_/A 5
/ADUM_CLK 26 16 /POM_CLK_A PFM_OUT_A 6 B6B-PH-K-S
/PFM_CNT 28 15 /RRM_MODE PFM_OUT_B 7 2 PFM_OUT_/A
/PFM_MODE 30 14 /PFM_CLK PFM_OUT_/B 8 3 PFM_OUT_/B
/PFM_CLK 32 13 /PFM_CNT 4 PFM_OUT_A
/PFM_ENABLE 34 12 /ADUM_MODE 5 PFM_OUT_B
11 /PFM_ENABLE
10 /ADUM_ENABLE
9 /PFM_MODE
5VN
8 /ADUM_CNT
CN-12
7 /POM_CNT
/CPFM_D
6 /POM_MODE_/B INT24V1L 5
/CPFM_LD
/CPFM_CLK
/CPFM_CNT
5 /POM_CW_CCW_/A INT24V1L 6 (NC)
PFM
B28B-PHDSS
4 /POM_ENABLE_B GND 7
3 5VN
2 D-GND
1 D-GND
28
26
24
22
20
B7B-PASK-1
1 INT24V1L
DRV PWB CN3 2 P-GND
CPFM
3 /CPFM_CNT
4 /CPFM_CLK
5 /CPFM_D
6 5V
7 CPFM_LD
48M108F070
CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section.
HUD_M/TH_M Temperature/humidity sensor Detects the temperature and the humidity. (For the process control)
MPED Paper empty sensor (Manual paper feed tray) Detects presence of paper. (Manual paper feed tray)
MPFS Paper feed solenoid (Manual paper feed) Controls the paper feed roller. (Manual paper feed)
MPLD Paper length detector (Manual paper feed tray) Detects the paper length. (Manual paper feed tray)
MPWS Paper width detector (Manual paper feed tray) Detects the paper width. (Manual paper feed tray)
PFM Transport motor Drives the transport rollers 5 and 9.

1 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
2 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent double-feeding.
3 Transport roller 9 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the
transport roller to paper.
5 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports paper from manual paper feed section to the transport roller 9.
(1) Paper feed operation
The pickup roller moves up and down to press the paper surface, separating the paper on the top of the paper bundle and sending it to the
paper feed roller section.
The paper feed roller feeds paper to the transport section to prevent against double feed with the separation roller. The manual paper feed
clutch controls ON/OFF of the pickup roller and the paper feed roller. Paper is sent to the registration roller by the manual transport roller.
(2) Paper size detection
The paper size is detected by the combination of the following detectors on the manual paper feed tray.
Paper size detection table
Paper width detector (MPWS)
Series Paper size Paper length detector (MPLD)
Detection width (mm)
A3W ON 301 - 310.4
A3 ON 291 - 301
11" x 17" ON 273.4 - 285.4
B4 ON 251 - 263
8.5" x 14" ON 209.9 - 221.9
8.5" x 13" ON 209.9 - 221.9
AB series A4 – 291 - 305
8.5" x 11" – 273.4 - 285.4
B5 – 251 - 263
A4R – 204 - 216
B5R – 176 - 188
A5R – 142.5 - 154
Postcard – 96 - 106
12" x 18" ON 301 - 310.4
A3 ON 291 - 301
11" x 17" ON 273.4 - 285.4
B4 ON 251 - 263
8.5" x 14" ON 209.9 - 221.9
8.5" x 13" ON 209.9 - 221.9
INCH series
A4 – 291 - 305
8.5" x 11" – 273.4 - 285.4
B5 – 251 - 263
8.5" x 11"R – 209.9 - 221.9
7.25" x 10.5"R – 178.1 - 190.1
5.5" x 8.5"R – 133.7 - 145.7

4. Tray paper feed section
CPFM
PFC_HPFC
CPUC1
CLUD1 CPFC1
CPED1
3 DSW_C1
5 CPFD1
CLUM1
4 8
7 2
1
6
CSS11
CSPD1
SMR-02V-N
SMR-02V-N
SMR-02V-N
48M108F070
1
2
1
2
1
2
/CPFM_CNT
/CPFM_CLK
B7B-PASK-1
CPFM_LD
/CPFM_D
1 /CPUC1
1 /CPFC1
1 /HPFC
2 24V3
2 24V3
2 24V3
SMP-02V-NC
SMP-02V-NC
SMP-02V-NC
5V
3
4
5
6
7
17
19
21
18
20
22
B34B-PHDSS
CN-11
/PFC_/HPFC
/CPUC1
/CPFC1
24V3
24V3
24V3
CN-12
B28B-PHDSS
/CPFM_CNT 20
/CPFM_CLK 22
/CPFM_D 24
DF11-8DS-2C DF11-8DS-2C 5VN 26
+DF11-8DP-SP1(05) +DF11-8DP-SP1(05) /CPFM_LD 28
SRA-21T-4 SRA-01T-3.2
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
03XR-6H-P
D-GND 3
1 2 3 4 5 8 1 2 3 4 7 8
/CLUD1 2
5VNPD 1 BU15P-TZ-P-H
(NC) 2
1 FG
CPUS1
15
14
PCU PWB
(NC) 3 24V 13
03XR-6H-P
D-GND 3 4 D-GND 12
/CPED1 2 5 /CLUD1 11
5VNPD 1 6 5VNPD 10
7 D-GND 9
8 /CPED1 8 CN-9(1/2)
9 5VNPD 7 B34B-PHDSS
03XR-6H-P
D-GND 3 10 D-GND 6 17 /CPUS1
/CPFD1 2 11 /CPFD1 5 19 24V3
5VNPD 1 12 5VNPD 4 21 D-GND
13 D-GND 3 23 /CLUD1
14 /DSW_C1 2 25 /CPED1
15 5VN 1 27 /CPFD1
03XR-6H-P
D-GND 3 15CZ-6H 29 5VNPD
/DSW_C1 2 31 /DSW_C1
5VN 1 33 5VN
B2B-PH-K-S
PHR-2
P-GND 1 18 P-GND
CLUM1# 2 20 CLUM1#
22 D-GND
B4B-PH-K-S 24 /CSS11
PHR-4
/CSS11 1
D-GND 2
(NC) 3 30
(NC) 4 32 /CSPD1
179228-3
5VNPD 1
/CSPD1 2
D-GND 3

CLUD1 Paper feed tray upper limit sensor Detects the upper limit of the paper lift up. (Paper feed tray 1)
(Paper feed tray 1)
CLUM1 Paper tray lift motor (Paper feed tray 1) Lifts the lift plate of the paper feed tray. (Paper feed tray 1)
CPED1 Paper empty sensor (Paper feed tray 1) Detects paper empty. (Paper feed tray 1)
CPFC1 Tray vertical transport clutch 1 Controls the transport roller of the paper feed tray 1 section.
CPFD1 Paper transport detector (Paper feed tray 1) Detects paper pass in the paper transport section of the paper feed tray 1.
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) Controls ON/OFF of the paper feed roller in the paper feed tray 1 section. (Paper feed tray 1)
CSPD1 Paper remaining quantity sensor Detects the paper remaining quantity. (Paper feed tray 1)
(Paper feed tray 1)
CSS11 Paper feed tray size detector Detects the paper size.
(Paper feed tray 1) Detects closing of the paper feed tray. (Paper feed tray 1)
DSW_C1 Transport cover open/close detector Detects open/close of the transport section cover. (Paper feed tray 1)
(Paper feed tray 1)
PFC_HPFC Transport roller clutch Controls the transport roller 4.

2 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed desk tray to the transport roller 4.
3 Paper pickup roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
4 Separation roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent double-feeding.
5 Paper feed roller (No. 1 paper feed tray ) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
7 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports paper fed from the paper feed tray 1 to the transport roller 3.
8 Transport roller 3 Transports paper from the transport roller 2 to the transport roller 4.
(1) Paper feed front operation
• Set paper and insert the paper feed tray, and the pickup roller falls to turn ON the paper feed tray sensor.
• The lift-up motor drives the rotating plate to move it up.
• The paper upper limit sensor turns ON, and the rotation plate stops at the specified position.
(2) Paper feed operation
• When copy/print operation is started, the motor and the clutch are turned ON to rotate the pickup roller in the paper pickup timing, feeding
paper.
• At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to transport paper to the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates to prevent
against double feed of paper.
(3) Paper remaining detection
The notifying levels of paper remaining quantity are 4 steps in total; 3 steps of paper remaining quantity and 1 step of paper empty. The result
is displayed.

(4) Paper remaining quantity detection method
• The paper remaining quantity is judged from the number of rotations of the remaining quantity sensor from starting the lift-up operation of the
paper feed tray to turning ON the upper limit sensor.
(Figure showing state transition of the remaining paper detection sensor during tray elevation and
changes in status according to the number of remaining sheets)
The no-paper detection sensor detects CPED

the state of no remaining paper. (paper sensor)
Turn plate
Remaining Paper
During no-paper detection Detection Actuator
CSPD
1/3 Field (remaining paper detection)
Sensor logic: Low
Remaining paper 1/3 position
2/3 Field
Sensor logic: Hi
3/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low

5. Paper registration section (Paper transport section)
RRM
PFM
3 PPD2
PPD1
03XR-6H-P
2
1
CN-2
B6B-PH-K-S
1 D-GND
VHPGP1A73A+-18
VHPGP2A200L-18
DF11-8DS-2C
PCU PWB CN-11
2 INT24V1L
3 INT24V1
+DF11-8DP-SP1(05) B34B-PHDSS 4 DSW_R<24V>
INT24V1L 1 5 DSW_F<24V>
P-GND 3 6 /INT_CNT
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
/POM_CW_CCW_/A 5
1 RRM_OUT_/B
2 RRM_OUT_/A
2 PFM_OUT_/A
3 PFM_OUT_/B
3 RRM_OUT_B
4 RRM_OUT_A
/POM_ENABLE_B 7
4 PFM_OUT_A
5 PFM_OUT_B
DF11-8DS-2C /POM_CLK_A 9
B4B-PH-K-S
B6B-PH-K-S
D-GND
5VNPD
/PPD1
+DF11-8DP-SP1(05) /POM_MODE_/B 11
5VNPD
D-GND
/PPD2
5
6
CN-9(1/2)
1
/POM_CNT 13
B34B-PHDSS D-GND 15
D-GND
D-GND
29 5VNPD
/ADUM_MODE 23 Driver PWB
1
2
3
1
2
14 /PPD1
3
/ADUM_ENABLE 25
16 /PPD2
03XR-6H-P
/RRM_CNT 27
6
7
D-GND 29
/RRM_CLK 31 CN-6
/RRM_ENABLE 33 B08B-PH-K-S
RRM_OUT_/A 1
SRA-01T-3.2
INT24V1 2
07CZ-6Y
RRM_OUT_A 2
P-GND 4
CN-1 RRM_OUT_B 3
5VN 6
B24B-PHDSS-B RRM_OUT_/B 4
D-GND 8
PFM_OUT_/A 5
DSW_R<24V> 10 (NC) 24 SLEEP_DRV
BU07P-TZ-S
PFM_OUT_A 6
2
7
6
5
4
3
DSW_F<24V> 12 23 D-GND
PFM_OUT_B 7
/INT_CNT 14 22 D-GND
5VNPD
5VNPD
D-GND
D-GND
F-GND
/PPD2
/PPD1
PFM_OUT_/B 8
D-GND 16 21 D-GND
20 /RRM_CNT
07CZ-6H
19 /RRM_CLK
18 /ADUM_CLK
/ADUM_CNT 24 17 /RRM_ENABLE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
/ADUM_CLK 26 16 /POM_CLK_A
BU09P-TZ-S
/PFM_CNT 28
2 D-GND 8 /PFM_MODE 30 14 /PFM_CLK
3 D-GND 7 /PFM_CLK 32 13 /PFM_CNT
4 /PPD1 6 /PFM_ENABLE 34 12 /ADUM_MODE
5 5VNPD 5 11 /PFM_ENABLE
6 D-GND 4 10 /ADUM_ENABLE
7 /PPD2 3 9 /PFM_MODE
8 5VNPD 2 8 /ADUM_CNT
9 F-GND 1 7 /POM_CNT
09CZ-6H 6 /POM_MODE_/B
5 /POM_CW_CCW_/A
4 /POM_ENABLE_B
SRA-01T-3.2 3 5VN
2 D-GND
1 D-GND

PPD1 Paper transport detector 1 Detects paper pass in front of the transport roller 5.
PPD2 Paper transport detector 2 Detects paper pass in the transport roller 5 in front of the registration roller.
RRM Registration motor Drives the registration roller. (Controls the timing of the transfer image for the paper.)

1 Transport roller 5 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to paper.
2 Transport roller 5 (Drive) Transports paper to the registration roller. / Paper is warped between the registration roller and this roller to
correct the paper skew and the relation between images and paper.
3 Registration roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. / Controls the transport timing of paper and adjusts relative relations
between the image and paper.
4 Registration roller (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the registration roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to paper.
Paper is fed from each paper feed section and transported to the registration roller by the transport rollers. ON/OFF control of each transport
roller is made by the paper transport clutch. The registration roller controls the relative positions of transported paper and the transfer image.
The registration roller is driven by the transport motor. The relative positions of paper and the transfer image are determined by the ON timing
of the transport motor.

CN-12
FUM
B28B-PHDSS
24V3 (with Fuse) 6 SMP-06V-NC SMR-06V-N
ADUM
OSM_/B 7 1 OSM_/B 1
OSM_/A 8 2 OSM_/A 2
OSM_B 9 3 OSM_B 3
OSM_A 10 4 OSM_A 4
5 24V3 5
Signal name
POFM_V 11
SMP-04V-NC SMR-04V-N
/POFM_CNT 13
1 POFM_V 1
P-GND 15
2 /POFM_CNT 2
POFM_LD 17
3 P-GND 3
4 POFM_LD 4
POFM_V2 12
4
/POFM_CNT2 14 SMP-04V-NC SMR-04V-N
P-GND 16 1 POFM_V2 1
POFM2_LD 18 2 /POFM_CNT2 2
3 P-GND 3 BU09P-TZ-S
4 POFM2_LD 4
7
CZHR-09V-S CZHR-09V-S
ADU motor
1 /POD3 9 1 5VN+R5
2 D-GND 8 2 D-GND
Fusing motor
3 5VN+R5 7 3 /POD3
8
B10B-PHDSS 179228-3 VHPSG2481++-1
D-GND 10
POFM
5VN+R4 9
Name
10
D-GND 8
5VN+R5 7
PWB
D-GND 6
6. Paper exit section
2
D-GND 5
D-GND 4
6
5VNPD+R3 3
R-DOOR
D-GND 2
5VNPD+R4 1
CN10
5
B26B-PHDSS
1
9
/TFD3 13
/PRTPD 15 QR/P4-32S-C(01) QR/P4-32P-C(01)
13 /TFD3 13
14 /PRTPD 14 BU09P-TZ-S
POFM2
TFD2
5VO 23 15 5VO 15 CZHR-09V-S CZHR-09V-S

06CZ-6H 179228-3
(NC) 22 (NC) 22 (NC) 4 /TFD3 6 1 /TFD3
23 ADUM/A 23 5 D-GND 5 2 D-GND
24 ADUMA 24 6 5VNPD+R4 4 3 5VNPD+R4
25 ADUMB 25 7 /PRTPD 3 VHPSG2481++-1
26 ADUM/B 26 8 D-GND 2
/POD3 16 29 /POD3 29 9 5VO 1
POD1
B6B-PH-K-S
1 (NC)
2 ADUM_L_OUT_/A
POD2
3 ADUM_L_OUT_/B
PRTPD
SHPOS
4 ADUM_L_OUT_A
5 ADUM_L_OUT_B 179228-3
6 (NC) 1 /PRTPD
2 D-GND
POD3
SMP-04V-NC SMR-04V-N 3 5VO
OSM
VHPSG2481++-1
Drives the fusing section.

1 ADUM/A 1
2 ADUMA 2
TFD3
B7B-PASK-1 3 ADUMB 3
10 1 INT24V1L 4 ADUM/B 4
ADUM
CN-13 DRV PWB CN5 9 2 P-GND
B24B-PHDSS
(NC) 3 (NC)
/FUM_CK 15 4 /FUM_CK
/FUM_D 17 5 /FUM_D
POM
/FUM_LD 19 (NC) (NC) 6 5VN

5VN 21 7 FUM_LD
Reserve 23 (NC) CN-2
48M108F060(NIDEC)
B6B-PH-K-S
1 D-GND
2 INT24V1L
CN-11 3 INT24V1
B34B-PHDSS 4 DSW_R<24V>
INT24V1L 1 5 DSW_F<24V>
P-GND 3 6 /INT_CNT
FUM
/POM_CW_CCW_/A 5
/POM_ENABLE_B 7
Driver PWB
/POM_CLK_A 9 CN-5
/POM_MODE_/B 11 B11B-PH-K-S
/POM_CNT 13 ADUM_OUT_/B 8
D-GND 15 ADUM_OUT_B 7
ADUM_OUT_A 6
/ADUM_MODE 23 ADUM_OUT_/A 5 B6B-PH-K-S
/ADUM_ENABLE 25 POM_OUT_/B 4 1 (NC)
/RRM_CNT 27 POM_OUT_B 3 2 POM_OUT_/A
CN-13 D-GND 29 POM_OUT_A 2 3 POM_OUT_/B

B24B-PHDSS /RRM_CLK 31 POM_OUT_/A 1 4 POM_OUT_A
2 5VNPD /RRM_ENABLE 33 5 POM_OUT_B
4 /POD1 6 (NC)
6 D-GND INT24V1 2
Function/Operation
8 5VNPD P-GND 4
10 /POD2 5VN 6
12 D-GND D-GND 8 CN-1
Drives the ADU and the transport roller in the right paper exit section.
14 5VN DSW_R<24V> 10 B24B-PHDSS-B
16 /TFD2 DSW_F<24V> 12 23 D-GND
18 D-GND /INT_CNT 14 22 D-GND VHPLG248NL1-1
20 5VNPD D-GND 16 21 D-GND
20 /RRM_CNT 3 D-GND 3 3 D-GND
22 /SHPOS
19 /RRM_CLK 2 /POD1 2 2 /POD1
24 D-GND
1 5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD
/PFC_/HPFC 22 18 /ADUM_CLK
/ADUM_CNT 24 17 /RRM_ENABLE SMP-03V-NC SMR-03V-N 179228-3
/ADUM_CLK 26 16 /POM_CLK_A
/PFM_CNT 28
/PFM_MODE 30 14 /PFM_CLK SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-4
/PFM_CLK 32 13 /PFM_CNT VHPLG248NL1-1
B7B-PASK-1
/PFM_ENABLE 34 12 /ADUM_MODE
11 /PFM_ENABLE 3 D-GND
10 /ADUM_ENABLE 2 /SHPOS
9 /PFM_MODE 1 5VNPD
8 /ADUM_CNT 179228-3
7 /POM_CNT
6 /POM_MODE_/B
VHPLG248NL1-1
5 /POM_CW_CCW_/A
4 /POM_ENABLE_B 3 D-GND
10 F-GND 10
3 5VN 2 TFD2
9 D-GND 9
2 D-GND 1 5VN
8 /SHPOS 8 179228-3
1 D-GND 7 5VNPD 7
6 D-GND 6
5 TFD2 5
4 5VN 4 VHPLG248NL1-1
3 D-GND 3 3 D-GND
2 /POD2 2 2 /POD2
1 5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD
179228-3
DF1B-10DES-2.5RC DF1B-10DEP-2.5RC
OSM Offset motor Offsets (shifts) paper.
POD1 Paper exit detector 1 Detects paper transport from the fusing section.
POD2 Paper exit detector 2 Detects paper transport to the face-down paper exit tray.
POD3 Paper exit detector 3 Detects paper transport to the right paper exit tray.
POM Paper exit motor Drives the roller in the paper exit section.
PRTPD Paper exit tray paper detector Detects paper empty in the paper exit tray (Right paper exit tray).
SHPOS Shifter home positions sensor Detects the shifter home position.
TFD2 Paper exit tray full detector Detects paper full in the face-down paper exit tray.
(Face-down tray)
TFD3 Paper exit tray full detector Detects paper full in the right paper exit tray.

1 Transport roller 6 (Drive) Transports paper transported from the fusing section to the paper exit section and the switchback section.
paper.
paper.
4 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper to the left paper exit section.
paper.
7 Paper exit gate Selects the paper path: to transport paper to the back surface print transport section or to the right tray.
8 Switchback gate Switchbacks paper to transport it to the back surface print section.
paper.
• The paper transported from the fusing section is sent from transport roller 6 (which is driven by the ADU motor) to paper exit roller 1, and
then discharged to the inner tray.
• When the paper is discharged to the right tray: The paper is transported to paper exit roller 1, and the paper exit motor is reversed. Then the
paper is passed over the right paper exit gate through paper exit roller 2 to the right tray.

CN10
B26B-PHDSS
MPED 1
/MPFS 3
/2TUD 5
/2TURC 7
/2TCCRU 9
APPD2 11
/TFD3 13
/PRTPD 15
24V3 17
24V3 19
D-GND 21
5VO 23
5VNPD+R 25
7. ADU section
QR/P4-32S-C(01) QR/P4-32P-C(01)
3.3V 2
HUD_M 4 1 MPED 1
TH_M 6 2 24V3 2
MPWS 8 3 /MPFS 3
/MPLD 10 4 /2TUD 4
DSW-ADU 12 5 /2TURC 5
6 24V3 6
5
APPD1 14
/POD3 16 7 /2TCCRU 7
/ADUGS# 18 8 APPD2 8
7
(NC) 9 (NC) 9 (NC)
6
24V3 20
(NC) 10 (NC) 10 (NC)
7
D-GND 22 (NC)
5VN+R 24 11 /ADUGS# 11
3
12 24V3 12
1
5VN+R 26 (NC)
13 /TFD3 13
4
14 /PRTPD 14 SRA-21T-3
179228-3
8
15 5VO 15
2
SRA-21T-3 16 F-GND 16 1 APPD2
17 3.3V 17 2 D-GND
18 HUD_M 18 3 5VNPD+R
19 TH_M 19
179228-3
20 MPWS 20
21 /MPLD 21 1 DSW-ADU
(NC) 22 (NC) 22 (NC) 2 D-GND
23 ADUM/A 23 3 5VNPD+R3
24 ADUMA 24 179228-3
25 ADUMB 25 1 APPD1
26 ADUM/B 26 2 D-GND
PCU PWB
27 DSW-ADU 27 3 5VN+R4
28 APPD1 28
29 /POD3 29
30 5VN 30
31 5VNPD 31
APPD2
APPD1
32 D-GND 32
POD3
DSW_ADU
CN-11
B34B-PHDSS
INT24V1L 1
6 (NC)
1 (NC)
P-GND 3
/POM_CW_CCW_/A 5
SMP-04V-NC
B6B-PH-K-S
/POM_ENABLE_B 7
3 ADUMB
2 ADUMA
/POM_CLK_A 9
4 ADUM/B
1 ADUM/A
ADUM
/POM_MODE_/B 11
5 ADUM_L_OUT_B
4 ADUM_L_OUT_A
3 ADUM_L_OUT_/B
2 ADUM_L_OUT_/A
/POM_CNT 13 CN-2
4
3
2
1
VHPSG2481++-1
D-GND 15 B6B-PH-K-S
1 D-GND
/POD3
D-GND
2 INT24V1L
SMR-04V-N
5VN+R5
3 INT24V1
/ADUM_MODE 23 4 DSW_R<24V>
3
2
1
/ADUM_ENABLE 25 5 DSW_F<24V>
/RRM_CNT 27 6 /INT_CNT
D-GND 29 CN-5
179228-3
/RRM_CLK 31 B11B-PH-K-S
(NC)
PFM
/RRM_ENABLE 33 ADUM_OUT_/B 8
3
4
6
11
12
13
14
ADUM_OUT_B 7
INT24V1 2 ADUM_OUT_A 6
P-GND 4 ADUM_OUT_/A 5
5VN 6

1 5VNin
CN-1
D-GND
D-GND
8 D-GND
10 D-GND
2 D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND 8 BU09P-TZ-S
7 5VN+R5
9 5VN+R4
B10B-PHDSS
5VNPDin
DSW_R<24V> 10 B24B-PHDSS-B
5VNPD+R3
5VNPD+R1
B14B-PHDSS
DSW_F<24V> 12 23 D-GND CZHR-09V-S CZHR-09V-S

/INT_CNT 14 22 D-GND 1 /POD3 9
D-GND 16 21 D-GND 2 D-GND 8
20 /RRM_CNT 3 5VN+R5 7
PWB
/ADUM_CNT 24 19 /RRM_CLK
/ADUM_CLK 26 18 /ADUM_CLK
/PFM_CNT 28 17 /RRM_ENABLE
R-DOOR
/PFM_MODE 30 16 /POM_CLK_A
/PFM_CLK 32
/PFM_ENABLE 34 14 /PFM_CLK
13 /PFM_CNT
12 /ADUM_MODE
11 /PFM_ENABLE
10 /ADUM_ENABLE
Driver PWB
9 /PFM_MODE
8 /ADUM_CNT
7 /POM_CNT
6 /POM_MODE_/B
5 /POM_CW_CCW_/A
4 /POM_ENABLE_B
3 5VN
2 D-GND
1 D-GND
CN-6
B08B-PH-K-S
PFM_OUT_/A 5
PFM_OUT_A 6 B6B-PH-K-S
PFM_OUT_B 7 2 PFM_OUT_/A
PFM_OUT_/B 8 3 PFM_OUT_/B
4 PFM_OUT_A
5 PFM_OUT_B
ADUM ADU motor Drives the transport roller in the ADU right paper exit section.
APPD1 ADU paper transport detector 1 Detects paper entry and paper pass in the ADU.
APPD2 ADU paper transport detector 2 Detects paper pass in the ADU transport roller 8.
DSW_ADU ADU paper guide open/close detector Detects open/close of the ADU paper guide.
POD3 Paper exit detector 3 Detects paper transport to the right paper exit tray.

1 Transport roller 7 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller
to paper.
2 Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transports paper transported from the switchback section to the transport roller 8.
to paper.
to paper.
8 Paper exit roller 3 (Idle) Apply a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the paper exit roller
to paper.
• The paper transported from the fusing section is sent from transport roller 6 (which is driven by the ADU motor) to paper exit roller 1.
At that time, the paper passed under the gate.
• When POD1 detects the paper lead edge, the paper exit drive motor reverses.
• By reversion of the paper exit motor, the paper is sent to the ADU section. At that time, the paper passes over the ADU guide which fell by its
own weight.
• Transport rollers 7 and 8 are driven the ADU motor, and transport roller 9 by the transport motor. The paper is transported to the duplex
paper feed position.
• The paper is once stopped at the duplex paper feed position, and transported again to the inside of the machine.

8. LSU section
13
14
12
LSU MOTHER PWB PCU PWB
CN-11 CN-2
12
B20B-CZWHK-B-1 B20B-CZWHK-B-1
10CZ-6H 10CZ-6H
D-GND
TxD_PCU
B-10
B-9
B-1 D-GND
B-2 TxD_PCU
16 5
RxD_PCU
PRTPD_out
B-8
B-7
B-3 RxD_PCU
B-4 PRTPD_out
12
TRANS_RST B-6 B-5 TRANS_RST
TRANS_DAT B-5 B-6 TRANS_DAT
JOBEND_INT B-4 B-7 JOBEND_INT 5 12
Vref2
5VO
B-3
B-2
B-8 Vref2
B-9 5VO
16
D-GND B-1 B-10 D-GND
10CZ-6Y 10CZ-6Y
D-GND
nRES_PCU
A-1
A-2
A-10
A-9
D-GND
/RES_PCU 5
nRTS_PCU A-3 A-8 /RTS_PCU
nCTS_PCU A-4 A-7 /CTS_PCU
/POF A-5 A-6 /POF
16 5
LSU_RST
SCK
A-6
A-7
A-5
A-4
LSU_RST
SCK 9
RSV_DAT A-8 A-3 RSV_DAT
TH1_LSU A-9 A-2 TH1_LSU
D-GND A-10 A-1 D-GND
10 PGM 9 BD
TH1_LSU 3 11
4
15
2 7
2
6 6
7 10
LSU UN (600dpi)
LD PWB 8
CN-500
TX24-60R-6ST-H1E
WP_KC 1
CN-2
TX25-60P-6ST-H1E WP_KC 1
8
SDA_KC 31 #MS_SET_C_on 2 SDA_KC 31 #MS_SET_C_on 2
SCL_KC 32 DT_C1+ 3 SCL_KC 32 DT_C1+ 3
LDCHK_2 33 DT_C1- 4 LDCHK_2 33 DT_C1- 4
n_LDERR_Y 34 DT_C2+ 5 n_LDERR_Y 34 DT_C2+ 5 CN-4 CN1
n_LDERR_C 35 DT_C2- 6 n_LDERR_C 35 DT_C2- 6 S5B-PH-K-S B04B-PH-K-S
PHR-5
VREF_C 36 DT_K1+ 7 VREF_C 36 DT_K1+ 7 TH 1 3 TH
nENB_YMC 37 DT_K1- 8 nENB_YMC 37 DT_K1- 8 D-GND 2 4 D-GND
n_LDERR_K 38 DT_K2+ 9 n_LDERR_K 38 DT_K2+ 9 BD 3
VREF_Y 39 DT_K2- 10 VREF_Y 39 DT_K2- 10 D-GND 4
nSH_C 40 D-GND 11 nSH_C 40 D-GND 11 5VD 5
nSH_Y
VREF_K
41
42
D-GND
(NC)
12
13
B to B nSH_Y
VREF_K
41
42
D-GND
(NC)
12
13
SH_K 43 (NC) 14 SH_K 43 (NC) 14 CN1
nENB_K 44 (NC) 15 nENB_K 44 (NC) 15 S5B-PH-K-S
nSH_M 45 (NC) 16 nSH_M 45 (NC) 16 3 BD
(NC) 46 (NC) 17 (NC) 46 (NC) 17 2 D-GND
(NC) 47 (NC) 18 (NC) 47 (NC) 18 1 5VD
(NC) 48 (NC) 19 (NC) 48 (NC) 19
VREF_M 49 (NC) 20 VREF_M 49 (NC) 20
(NC) 50 TH 21 (NC) 50 TH 21
nLDERR_M 51 D-GND 22 nLDERR_M 51 D-GND 22 CN-3
nBD 52 D-GND 23 nBD 52 D-GND 23 S6B-PH-K-S 292172-5(AMP)
D-GND 53 5V_D 24 D-GND 53 5V_D 24 +24V 2 5 +24V
D-GND 54 D-GND 25 D-GND 54 D-GND 25 P-GND 3 4 P-GND
5V_LD 55 D-GND 26 5V_LD 55 D-GND 26 nPOLY_START 4 3 nPOLY_START
P-GND 56 (NC) 27 P-GND 56 (NC) 27 nPOLY_LOCK 5 2 nPOLY_LOCK
P-GND 57 nPOLY_CK 28 P-GND 57 nPOLY_CK 28 nPOLY_CK 6 1 nPOLY_CK
+24V 58 nPOLY_LOCK 29 +24V 58 nPOLY_LOCK 29
+24V 59 nPOLY_START 30 +24V 59 nPOLY_START 30
+3.3V 60 +3.3V 60

BD Laser beam detector Detects (monitors) the laser bean scan timing.
PGM Polygon motor Scans laser beams.
TH1_LSU LSU temperature sensor Detects the temperature in the LSU. (For correction of the LSU distortion)

1 LD PWB Drives the laser diode and controls the power.
2 Colimeter lens Forms laser beams.
3 f T lens 1 Equalizes the laser beam dot intervals in the main scanning direction. (Corrects the laser dot
4 f T lens 2 intervals on the OPC drum.)
5 f T lens 3
6 1st mirror Reflects laser beams to the OPC drum.
7 2nd mirror Reflects laser beams to the OPC drum.
8 3rd mirror Reflects laser beams to the OPC drum.
9 4th mirror Reflects laser beams to the OPC drum.
10 Cylindrical lens Leads laser beams to the polygon mirror.
11 Conversion lens for BD Converges laser beams and leads to the BD (Bean Detector).
12 Filter glass Prevents dust, toner, and foreign materials from entering the LSU.
13 LSU shutter Closes the exposure opening port in conjunction with opening of the waste toner box, preventing
dust, toner, and foreign materials from attaching.
14 Shutter ring cam Shutter closes the exposure opening port in conjunction with opening of the waste toner box.
15 BD mirror Leads laser beams to the BD (Beam Detector).
16 Skew adjustment screw (C, M, Y, K) Adjusts the radiating angle of laser beams for the OPC drum. By turning this adjustment screw,
image skew can be adjusted.
(1) General Main scanning direction
Image data sent from the LSU Mother PWB are converted into
REAR
laser beams and radiated onto the OPC drum surface. The LSU
unit is composed of : (1) the optical elements from the laser to the Scanning
polygon mirror, (2) the primary system including the mirror which direction
secures the optical path, (3) the optical elements including the poly-
gon mirror, and (4) the scanning system including the mirror which
secure the optical path.
(2) Composition
Primary system
BK
C
M
Y
FRONT
Writing position on paper
Paper exit
direction REAR
Scanning
direction
Scanning system
FRONT

(3) Outline of LSU specifications
Process speed 140mm/sec

Resolution 600dpi
Laser beam Single
Polygon motor rotation speed 33070.9rpm
Laser power 0.220mW
Bearing type Oil bearing
Number of mirrors 6
Laser beam diameter 50 - 85 x 50 - 80Pm
Effective scan length 310mm
Laser wave length 790 r10nm

9. Process section
A. General
The process section is composed of the following major devices.
Laser beams generated by the LSU are converted into visible toner images via the OPC drum, the developing unit, and the transfer unit, and
transferred on paper.
The process operations are performed in the following sequence:
Charging - Exposure - Developing - Primary transfer - Secondary transfer
Secondary
Primary transfer (4) transfer (6)
Before-transfer
charging (5)
Discharge (7)
OPC drum
Developing(3)
Charging (1)
Exposure (2)
In addition, the process control system is employed to maintain stable print image qualities.
B. Major units and functions

Toner cartridge (Y) Toner cartridge (C)
Toner cartridge (M) Toner cartridge (BK)
Inmate density sensor
Primary transfer unit
Secondary
transfer unit
Before-transfer
charging unit (PTC)
OPC drum unit (Y) OPC drum unit (M) OPC drum unit (C) OPC drum unit (BK)
Developing unit (Y) Developing unit (C)

Developing unit (M) Developing unit (BK)
Name Content
OPC drum unit Generates electrostatic latent images with the main charger and the image laser beams.
Toner cartridge Supplies toner to the developing unit with the toner motor.
Developing unit Converts electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum into visible toner images.
Primary transfer unit Transfers toner images on the OPC drum to the primary transfer belt.
Secondary transfer unit Transfers toner images from the primary transfer belt to paper.
Waste toner collection section Collects waste toner generated in the OPC drum section and the transfer section.
Image density sensor (Registration sensor) Detects the toner patch density on the primary transfer belt during operation of the process control
system. Detects the color shift amount.
MC/DV PWB Generates the main charger voltage and the DV bias voltage.
TC PWB Generates the transfer voltage.
Before-transfer charging unit (PTC) Charges toner so as to be easily transferred on paper.

C. Process section equivalent circuit diagram
Primary transfer output
C. C. C. C. C. C. C. C.
C. V. C. C.
MC-Grid output MC-Grid output

(Y) MC-Grid Developing MC-Grid output Secondary
(M) output output (BK) transfer output
(C) (BK) PTC output
Developing output
(C, M, Y)

D. Process control
(1) General
The process control system is provided to maintain stable print image qualities under changes in the environmental conditions and in charac-
teristics of supply parts.
The major operation of the process control is to detect a change in the print density with the image density sensor and change the DV bias, the
MC grid voltage and the dither pattern according to the detection result, maintaining the stable color balance and the print density.
(2) Block diagram
The process control system is composed as shown in the block diagram below.
,35 TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
-#$6 07" ,ASER POWER
-# GRID VOLTAGE ,35
$6 BIAS VOLTAGE
4ONER
MOTOR
/0# DRUM
-# UNIT ROTATIONPHASE $6 MOTOR
-# GRID
4ONER CARTRIDGE VOLTAGE 3ECONDARY
TRANSFER UNIT
0RIMARY
4ONER SUPPLY /0# DRUM 4# 07"
$6 BIAS TRANSFER UNIT
QUANTITY VOLTAGE
4RANSFER CURRENT
3TANDARD
REFLECTION PLATE
$6 UNIT )NMATE DENSITY

SENSOR IMAGE
REGISTRATION SENSOR
/0# DRUM
4ONER DENSITY ROTATION SENSOR
$,
SENSOR
)MAGE DENSITY LEVEL
,IGHT QUANTITY CONTROL

,%$ CURRENT
0#5 07" CONTROL
4ONER CARTRIDGE
/0# DRUM COUNTER
COUNTER
(IGH DENSITY PROCESS

#ALCULATION UNIT CONTROL DATA ,35 DISTORTION
$6 BIAS VOLTAGE CORRECTION TABLE 4EMPERATURE
-# GRID VOLTAGE HUMIDITY SENSOR
0IXEL COUNTER DATA

,35 0APER TYPE
TEMPERATURE 0APER SIZE
-&0 07"
(ALF TONE PROCESS CONTROL $UPLEX MODE
)MAGE DATA
DATA $ITHER CORRECTION
3#5 07" ,35 MOTHER 07"
(4 DITHER ,54 6IDEO DATA
0IXEL COUNTER

(3) Process control items and contents
The table below shows the correction item, the change item, the purpose/effect, and the operation timing for each process control item.
Item Operation timing/

Correction item Change item Purpose/Effect
No. Operation condition
1 Color image Color image • Relation The color image density sensor LED 44-1
density sensor density sensor LED between the current adjustment target level is set in
calibration (Image current adjustment calibration sheet order to detect the absolute density.
registration sensor target level setting (jig) and the
F) standard
reflection plate
• Color image
density sensor
LED current
adjustment
target level
2 Color image Color image Color image A change in the sensitivity due to dirt on SIM44-2 / Before high density process
density sensor density sensor density sensor LED the sensor or a change in the control operation
sensitivity (Image registration current adjustment temperature is corrected to enable
adjustment (Image sensor F) LED value always correct detection of the image
registration sensor current adjustment patch density.
F)
Monochrome Monochrome Monochrome A change in the sensitivity due to dirt on SIM44-2 / Before high density process
image density image density image density the sensor or a change in the control operation
sensor sensitivity sensor (Image sensor amp gain temperature is corrected to enable
adjustment (Image registration sensor and sensor LED always correct detection of the image
registration sensor R) LED current current adjustment patch density.
R) adjustment value
3 High density Developing bias Developing bias A change in the density due to a change SIM44-6 (Compulsory execution)
process control voltage correction voltage in characteristics of the image generating
section and overlap copy are prevented When warming up after resetting the
to maintain the density in the high density OPC drum counter, the developing
image section at the proper level. counter, and the transfer counter (SIM25-
2/24-4/24-5/24-7).
When warming up after resetting the

OPC drum counter, the developing
counter, and the transfer counter (SIM25-
2/24-4/24-5/24-7).
When warming up after replacement of
the toner cartridge.
For the other operation timing, conform to

the setting of SIM44-28.
Main charger grid Main charger grid The developing bias voltage correction After the developing bias voltage
voltage correction voltage 3 (change) is corrected to maintain the changes by the high density process
relation between the developing bias control.
voltage and the main charger grid voltage
difference to a constant one. (Prevention
of overlap copy and developer drop)
4 Half-tone process Half-tone process Dither pattern The color balance (gamma) adjusted by 1) SIM44-26 (Compulsory execution)
control control (Copy (LUT) the serviceman color balance adjustment 2) After the high density process
mode) is maintained. control (However, depending on the
conditions)
For the other operation timing, conform to

the setting of SIM44-28.
Half-tone process Dither pattern The result of the half-tone correction After the copy mode half-tone density
control (Printer (LUT) executed in the copy mode is applied to image correction
mode) the printer mode.

5 Toner density Correction for the Toner supply By changing the toner motor rotation When the temperature and the humidity
correction / Toner environmental quantity (Toner level, the toner supply is corrected to change
density control toner supply supply time) maintain the toner density at a proper
quantity (Toner level.
density correction)
(Temperature and
humidity change)
Toner supply Toner supply When the developing bias voltage is After the developing bias voltage is
quantity correction quantity (Toner changed by the high density process changed to the higher level than the
for the result of the supply time) control, if the toner density is judged to specified level by the high density
high density be low, the toner supply quantity is process control.
process control corrected to maintain the proper density
for print.
Correction of the Toner motor The toner supply quantity to the When the toner motor counter changes
toner supply rotation number developing unit for the certain number of
quantity for the Toner supply rotations of the toner motor differs
toner cartridge quantity (Toner depending on the remaining toner
counter supply time) quantity in the toner cartridge. Therefore,
the toner motor RPM is changed
according to the remaining toner quantity
(toner motor counter) to maintain the
proper toner supply operation.
Correction of the Toner supply The toner supply quantity is maintained During output operation (for every page)
toner supply quantity (Toner properly for the area (pixel count) of
quantity for the supply time (duty)) output images (for the actual toner
output image consumption quantity), keeping the toner
density (number of density at the proper level.
pixels)

(4) Operational descriptions
a. Image density sensor sensitivity adjustment operation
,35 TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
-# GRID VOLTAGE ,35
$6 BIAS VOLTAGE
4ONER
MOTOR
/0# DRUM
-# GRID
TRANSFER UNIT
0RIMARY 4# 07"
4ONER SUPPLY /0# DRUM
QUANTITY VOLTAGE
4RANSFER CURRENT
3TANDARD
REFLECTION PLATE
!
"
SENSOR IMAGE
REGISTRATION SENSOR
/0# DRUM
$,
SENSOR
)MAGE DENSITY LEVEL

,%$ CURRENT
CONTROL
0#5 07"
4ONER CARTRIDGE
/0# DRUM COUNTER
COUNTER

0IXEL COUNTER DATA

,35 0APER TYPE
-&0 07"
)MAGE DATA
3#5 07" ,35 MOTHER 07"
0IXEL COUNTER

Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F) sen- Black image density sensor (image registration R) sensitivity
sitivity adjustment operation adjustment operation
When the machine enters the adjustment operation, the primary When the machine enters the adjustment operation, the primary
transfer unit enters the free mode. In conjunction with this opera- transfer unit enters the print mode to perform the sensor sensitivity
tions, the standard reflection plate is rotated and shifted to the front adjustment by using the surface reflection of the primary transfer
of the sensor by the lever mechanism. belt.
The sensor sensitivity adjustment is executed by using the stan- The adjustment operation means the operation which seeks for the
dard reflection plate. LED current to obtain the specified output level pf the sensor.
The adjustment operation means the operation which seeks for the
LED current to obtain the specified output level pf the sensor.
b. High density process control operation (Toner patch generation and density correction operations)
1) When the machine enters the high density process control mode, the secondary transfer unit enters the free state.
2) While changing the DV bias voltage step by step, a number of toner patches in different densities are generated on the F side and the R
side of the primary transfer belt.
F side: The color toner patch is generated.
R side: The black toner patch is generated.
3) Each toner patch density is detected by the image density sensor, and the DV bias correction voltage is calculated in the PCU PWB so
that the proper density is obtained from the relation between the DV bias voltage at the time when each toner patch is made and the toner
patch density.

Operation flow
,35 TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
-# GRID VOLTAGE ,35
$6 BIAS VOLTAGE
"
4ONER
MOTOR
/0# DRUM
!
-# GRID
4ONER CARTRIDGE VOLTAGE " 3ECONDARY
TRANSFER UNIT
0RIMARY
QUANTITY
VOLTAGE
4RANSFER CURRENT
3TANDARD
REFLECTION PLATE
!
SENSOR IMAGE
REGISTRATION SENSOR
/0# DRUM
$,
SENSOR
)MAGE DENSITY LEVEL


,%$ CURRENT
CONTROL
0#5 07"
4ONER CARTRIDGE
/0# DRUM COUNTER
COUNTER


0IXEL COUNTER DATA
,35 0APER TYPE
-&0 07"
)MAGE DATA
3#5 07" ,35 MOTHER 07"
0IXEL COUNTER
(1) Toner patch electrostatic latent images are formed on the OPC drum.
(2) The toner patch electrostatic latent images are developed and transferred on the primary transfer belt.
(3) Each toner patch density is detected by the toner density sensor.
(4) The DV bias correction value is calculated.
(5) The DV bias correction value is applied to the actual operation mode.
(6) The calculated DV bias voltage is applied to the actual operation mode.

c. Half-tone process control operation (Toner patch generation and half-tone correction operation)
1) When the machine enters the half-tone process control mode, the secondary transfer unit enters the free state.
2) While changing the dither pattern step by step by the MFP PWB, a number of toner patches in different densities are generated on the F
side and the R side of the primary transfer belt.
F side: The color toner patch is generated.
R side: The black toner patch is generated.
3) Each toner patch density is detected by the image density sensor, and each toner patch density are compared with the reference gamma
to calculate the correction amount.
4) The dither pattern in the actual operation mode is generated in the MFP PWB with the reference gamma and the correction amount.

Operation flow
,35 TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
-# GRID VOLTAGE ,35
$6 BIAS VOLTAGE

4ONER
MOTOR
/0# DRUM
-# GRID
TRANSFER UNIT
0RIMARY
QUANTITY VOLTAGE
4RANSFER CURRENT
3TANDARD
REFLECTION PLATE

SENSOR IMAGE
REGISTRATION SENSOR
/0# DRUM
$,
SENSOR
)MAGE DENSITY LEVEL

,%$ CURRENT
0#5 07" CONTROL
4ONER CARTRIDGE
/0# DRUM COUNTER
COUNTER


0IXEL COUNTER DATA
,35 0APER TYPE
-&0 07" $UPLEX MODE
(ALF TONE PROCESS CONTROL
)MAGE DATA
3#5 07" ,35 MOTHER 07"
0IXEL COUNTER
(1) Toner patch electrostatic latent images are formed on the OPC drum.
(2) The toner patch electrostatic latent images are developed and transferred on the primary transfer belt.
(3) Each toner patch density is detected by the toner density sensor.
(4) By comparing with the reference gamma, the correction value is calculated.
(5) The dither data in the actual operation mode are formed in the MFP PWB according to the correction value, and applied to the actual
operation mode.

d. Toner density correction / Toner density control
Different from the conventional models, this machine does not control the toner density in the developing unit according to the toner density
detected by the toner density sensor.
The toner supply operation from the toner cartridge to the developing unit is controlled according to the following data so that the optimum
developing is performed.
• The print pixel number for every page is counted and the toner consumption is calculated by the LSU mother PWB.
• The toner density is checked to be proper or not according to the result of the high density process control.
• The remaining toner quantity is presumed with the toner cartridge counter, and the toner supply quantity to the developing unit for the num-
ber of rotations of the toner motor is corrected. (This is because the toner supply quantity to the developing unit for the number of rotation of
the toner motor differs depending on the remaining toner quantity in the toner cartridge.)
• Correction for the temperature and the humidity
The toner density sensor in this machine performs the following functions.
• Judges whether toner is supplied from the toner cartridge to the developing unit or not during rotation of the toner motor.
• Judges whether the toner density is abnormal or not.
,35 TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
-# GRID VOLTAGE ,35
$6 BIAS VOLTAGE
4ONER
MOTOR
/0# DRUM

-# GRID
TRANSFER UNIT
0RIMARY
QUANTITY VOLTAGE
4RANSFER CURRENT
3TANDARD
REFLECTION PLATE

SENSOR IMAGE
REGISTRATION SENSOR
/0# DRUM
$,
SENSOR
)MAGE DENSITY LEVEL
! ,IGHT QUANTITY CONTROL

,%$ CURRENT
0#5 07" CONTROL
4ONER CARTRIDGE
/0# DRUM COUNTER
COUNTER
#
#ALCULATION UNIT CONTROL DATA ,35 DISTORTION "
0IXEL COUNTER DATA

,35 0APER TYPE
$ TEMPERATURE 0APER SIZE
-&0 07"
)MAGE DATA
3#5 07" ,35 MOTHER 07"
0IXEL COUNTER
(1) The basic information of the toner density control is acquired. (2) The necessary toner supply quantity (toner motor rotation
• Temperature and humidity number) is calculated according to the basic information of the
toner density control. (PCU PWB)
• Print pixel number for every page
(3) The toner motor is rotated for the time corresponding to the
• High density process control data
calculated toner motor rotation number.
• Toner cartridge counter
(4) Toner is supplied from the toner cartridge to the developing
• Toner density sensor data
unit.

(5) Setting of process control execution conditions (When PROCON TARGET is selected.)
a. General 2A) Select the density level.
The SIM44-62 function facilitates changing the process control
execution conditions. ǂǂǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
352&217$5*(7 6,0 &2//(&7,9(,1387
The SIM44-62 function also allows collective change of the set con- &/,''2:1 &/,'83
tents of SIM44-4 and SIM44-28 easily. %.,''2:1 %.,'83
$//,''2:1 $//,'83
This is used to assure stable image qualities by executing proper
1250$/
operations of the process control according to the machine use sta-
tus.
b. SIM44-62 function and use
1) Changes the image density in the high density area.
2) Changes the execution frequency of the process control.
c. Setting method $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
1) Enter the SIM44-62 mode, and select the set item.
To change the image density in the high density area, select
PROCON TARGET. (Relation between the selected density level and the output image
density)
To change the frequency of the process control operations,
select PROCON MODE. CL ID DOWN The densities of C, M, and Y decrease. (The C/M/Y high
density process control target values decrease.)
CL ID UP The densities of C, M, and Y increase. (The C/M/Y high
ǂǂǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
352&216(77,1*&2//(&7,9(,1387
density process control target values increase.)
352&217$5*(7 352&2102'( BK ID DOWN The density of K decreases. (The high density process
control target value decreases.)
BK ID UP The density of K increases. (The high density process
control target value increases.)
ALL ID DOWN The densities of C, M, Y and K decrease. (The C/M/Y/K
high density process control target values decrease.)
ALL ID UP The densities of C, M, Y and K increase. (The C/M/Y/K
high density process control target values increase.)
NORMAL The standard density of C, M, Y and K. (The C/M/Y/K
high density process control target values are the
standard values.)
(Relation between the selected density level and the SIM44-4 set values)
SIM44-62 PROCON TARGET (Selected density level)

Low Normal High
ALL ID Normal
Item (SIM44-4) CL ID Down BK ID Down CL ID Up BK ID Up ALL ID Up
Down (Default)
A PCS_CL TARGET 98 98 98 98 98 98 98 SIM44-4 set value
B PCS_K TARGET 208 208 208 208 208 208 208
C LED_CL OUTPUT 21 21 21 21 21 21 21
D LED_K OUTPUT 21 21 21 21 21 21 21
E PCS ADJSTMENT LIMIT 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
F BELT GROUND DIF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
G BIAS_CL STANDARD DIF 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
H BIAS_BK STANDARD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
DIF
I BIAS PATCH INTERVAL 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
J Y_PAT TARGET ID 101 111 101 111 126 111 126
K M_PAT TARGET ID 125 135 125 135 150 135 150
L C_PAT TARGET ID 118 128 118 128 143 128 143
M K_PAT TARGET ID 45 40 40 45 45 55 55
N HV BK_GROUND LIMIT 60 60 60 60 60 60 60
3A) Press [EXECUTE] key.

4A) Press [YES] key.
The SIM44-4 set value varies according to the selected density level.
5A) Execute SIM46-74 to adjust the copy and printer color balance.

(When PROCON MODE is selected.) HighQuality1:
2B) Select the execution frequency level of the process control. The execution frequency of the process control is high.
It is set when the color image quality is given priority.

ǂǂǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Every time the power is turned ON, the process control is
352&2102'( 6,0 &2//(&7,9(,1387 executed.
+,*+48$/,7< +,*+48$/,7<
35,173(5)250$1&( %:02'( For a user of about 100 sheets/day with priority on the color
1250$/
image quality.
Normal (Default):
The process control is executed in the normal frequency.
BW Mode:
The process control is executed in the normal frequency.
It is set when there are little color jobs and many monochrome
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
jobs.
The black process control is executed.
The color process control is occasionally executed according to
(Setting level and application)
the color toner consumption.
HighQuality2:
The color toner consumption is suppressed.
The execution frequency of the process control is highest.
Print Performance:
It is set when the color image quality is given priority.
The execution frequency of the process control is low.
Every time the power is turned ON, the process control is
It is set when the job speed is given priority.
executed.
The process control is executed in about 50% of the normal
The execution frequency of the process control is about 3 times
frequency during jobs.
greater than the normal setting.
For jobs of 100 or less, the process control is executed after
For a user who's main jobs are color jobs of more than 100
completion of the jobs.
sheets/day with priority on the color image quality.
(Relation between the selected mode and the SIM44-28 set values)
SIM44-62 and PROCON MODE (process control execution frequency level)

Highest High Normal Low
Item (SIM44-28) HighQuality2 HighQuality1 Normal (Default) BW Mode Print Performance
A INITIAL 0 0 0 0 0 SIM44-28 set value
B SW ON 0 0 3 3 3
C TIME 0 0 3 3 3
D HUM_LIMIT 0 0 0 2 0
E HUM 0 0 0 2 0
F REV1 0 0 0 1 1
G REV2_BK 0 0 0 0 0
H REV2_CL 0 0 0 0 0
I REFRESH MODE 1 1 1 1 1
J DAY 1 1 1 0 1
K HI-COV 0 0 0 0 1
L LO-COV 0 0 0 0 1
M TonerCA-END 1 1 1 1 1
O AVERAGE-PAGE 3 3 3 3 3
P LIMIT PAGE 5 5 10 10 10
Q PIX_RATIO_BK 10 10 10 10 10
R PIX_RATIO_CL 10 10 10 50 10
S INTERVAL TIME 3 3 3 3 3
T HUM HOUR 2 2 2 2 2
U HUM_DIF 2 2 2 2 4
V BK_RATIO 5 10 15 30 30
W M_RATIO 5 10 15 30 30
X COLOR BORDER 20 20 20 100 20
Y BK ONLY 5 5 5 6 5
Z HT_DIF 1 20 40 40 40
AA RG_ON_SYNC 0 0 0 0 0
AB RG_TEMP_TIMER 0 0 0 0 0
AC RG_PERM_TIMER 0 1 1 1 1
AC RG_HOUR_TIMER 3 5 5 11 11
AD RG_BW_SYNC 1 1 1 1 1
Items out of application: 2TRAN_CLEAN_TIME1/2TRAN_CLEAN_TIME2/2TRAN_CLEAN_TIME3

3B) Press [EXECUTE] key.
4B) Press [YES] key.
The SIM44-28 set value varies according to the selected execution frequency level of the process control.
This simulation may not function with some firmware versions. In such a case, the firmware must be upgraded to the latest version

E. Other correction items and contents
The table below shows the correction item, the change item, the purpose/effect, and the operation timing for the other correction items.

1 OPC drum Main charger Main charger The surface dark potential fall due to the OPC drum OPC layer When executing the high
deterioration grid voltage grid voltage 1 membrane decrease and electric and optical stress is corrected to density process control.
correction correction maintain the proper density for print and prevent overlap copy.
Main charger The surface dark potential fall due to the temperature and the humidity
grid voltage 2 is corrected to maintain the proper density for print and prevent
overlap copy.
Discharge Discharge lamp A change (an increase in the surface dark potential) in a change in the
lamp light light quantity OPC drum sensitivity (a change in the discharge efficiency) due to the
quantity (ON DUTY 1) OPC drum OPC layer membrane decrease and electrical and optical
correction stress is corrected to maintain the proper density for print.
Discharge lamp A change in the OPC drum sensitivity (a change in the discharge
light quantity efficiency) (a change in the surface dark potential) due to the
(ON DUTY 2) temperature and the humidity is corrected to maintain the proper
density for print.
Laser power Laser power 1 A fall in the OPC drum photo sensitivity due to the OPC drum OPC
correction layer membrane decrease and electrical and optical stress is
corrected to maintain the proper density for print.
,35 TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
-#$6 07" ,ASER POWER "
-# GRID VOLTAGE ,35
$6 BIAS VOLTAGE
"
4ONER !
MOTOR
/0# DRUM
-# GRID
TRANSFER UNIT
0RIMARY
QUANTITY VOLTAGE
4RANSFER CURRENT
3TANDARD
" REFLECTION PLATE
#
SENSOR IMAGE
REGISTRATION SENSOR
/0# DRUM
$,
SENSOR
)MAGE DENSITY LEVEL
,IGHT QUANTITY CONTROL #

,%$ CURRENT
0#5 07" CONTROL
"
4ONER CARTRIDGE
/0# DRUM COUNTER
COUNTER

#ALCULATION UNIT CONTROL DATA ,35 DISTORTION !
! $6 BIAS VOLTAGE CORRECTION TABLE 4EMPERATURE
"
0IXEL COUNTER DATA
,35 0APER TYPE
-&0 07"
)MAGE DATA
3#5 07" ,35 MOTHER 07"
" 0IXEL COUNTER

2 Transfer capability Correction of the Primary transfer current 1 A change in the transfer characteristics A change in the environmental
correction (Primary transfer current for (transfer efficiency) due to a change in area (temperature and humidity)
transfer) the environment (A the temperature and the humidity is / Before the high density process
change in the corrected by changing the transfer control operation (AND
temperature and the current. condition)
humidity)
Correction of the Primary transfer current 2 A change in the transfer characteristics After the OPC drum surface
transfer current for (transfer efficiency / memory) according potential is changed by the high
the high density to the surface potential of the OPC drum density process control
process control (MC is corrected by changing the transfer
grid voltage) current value.
,35 TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
-# GRID VOLTAGE ,35
$6 BIAS VOLTAGE
4ONER
MOTOR
/0# DRUM
-# GRID
TRANSFER UNIT
0RIMARY

QUANTITY VOLTAGE
4RANSFER CURRENT
3TANDARD
REFLECTION PLATE

SENSOR IMAGE
REGISTRATION SENSOR
/0# DRUM
$,
SENSOR
)MAGE DENSITY LEVEL

,%$ CURRENT
0#5 07" CONTROL
4ONER CARTRIDGE
/0# DRUM COUNTER
COUNTER
"
0IXEL COUNTER DATA

,35 0APER TYPE
-&0 07"
)MAGE DATA
3#5 07" ,35 MOTHER 07"
0IXEL COUNTER

3 Transfer capability Correction of the Secondary transfer current A change in the transfer characteristics Environmental area
correction transfer current for 1 for a change in the paper state due to a (temperature and humidity)
(Secondary the environment (A change in the temperature and the change
transfer) change in the humidity is corrected by changing the
temperature and the transfer current.
humidity)
Transfer current Secondary transfer current A change in the transfer efficiency for a When printing the back surface
correction for back 2 change in the paper state is corrected to
surface print maintain the proper density for print.
Correction of the Secondary transfer current A difference in the flow of the transfer For every change in the paper
transfer current for 3 current due to the paper kind and size is kind or size
the paper kind corrected.
(thickness and
material) for transfer
and the size
,35 TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
-# GRID VOLTAGE ,35
$6 BIAS VOLTAGE
4ONER
MOTOR
/0# DRUM
-# GRID
TRANSFER UNIT
0RIMARY

QUANTITY VOLTAGE
4RANSFER CURRENT
3TANDARD
REFLECTION PLATE

SENSOR IMAGE
REGISTRATION SENSOR
/0# DRUM
$,
SENSOR
)MAGE DENSITY LEVEL

,%$ CURRENT
0#5 07" CONTROL
4ONER CARTRIDGE
/0# DRUM COUNTER
COUNTER

"
0IXEL COUNTER DATA

,35 0APER TYPE
-&0 07"
)MAGE DATA
3#5 07" ,35 MOTHER 07"
0IXEL COUNTER

ItemNo. Correction item Change item Purpose/Effect Operation timing/Operation condition
4 Automatic image LSU exposure timing An image registration generated by a variation After execution of SIM50-22 / User image
registration adjustment in the LSU unit, a position shift and rotations of registration adjustment / After high density
the transfer belt is automatically adjusted. process control operation
,35 TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
-# GRID VOLTAGE
,35
$6 BIAS VOLTAGE

4ONER
MOTOR
/0# DRUM
-# GRID
TRANSFER UNIT
0RIMARY
QUANTITY VOLTAGE
4RANSFER CURRENT
3TANDARD
REFLECTION PLATE

SENSOR IMAGE
REGISTRATION SENSOR
/0# DRUM
$,
SENSOR
)MAGE DENSITY LEVEL


,%$ CURRENT
0#5 07" CONTROL

4ONER CARTRIDGE
/0# DRUM COUNTER
COUNTER

0IXEL COUNTER DATA

,35 0APER TYPE
-&0 07"
)MAGE DATA
3#5 07" ,35 MOTHER 07"
0IXEL COUNTER

ItemNo. Correction item Change item Purpose/Effect Operation timing/Operation condition
5 LSU heat distortion LSU exposure timing An image registration and distortion generated by Laser ON timing
correction the optical axis shift due to the LSU heat distortion
are automatically corrected.
,35 TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
-# GRID VOLTAGE ,35
$6 BIAS VOLTAGE

4ONER
MOTOR
/0# DRUM
-# GRID
TRANSFER UNIT
0RIMARY
QUANTITY VOLTAGE
4RANSFER CURRENT
3TANDARD
REFLECTION PLATE

SENSOR IMAGE
REGISTRATION SENSOR
/0# DRUM
$,
SENSOR
)MAGE DENSITY LEVEL

,%$ CURRENT
0#5 07" CONTROL
4ONER CARTRIDGE
/0# DRUM COUNTER
COUNTER

0IXEL COUNTER DATA

,35 0APER TYPE
-&0 07"
)MAGE DATA
3#5 07" ,35 MOTHER 07"
0IXEL COUNTER

179228-3
1 DHPD_K
2 D-GND
3 5VNPD(with R)
VHPGP1S73P+-18
179228-3
1 DHPD_CL
2 D-GND
3 5VNPD(with R)
VHPGP1S73P+-18 DHPD_K
DHPD_CL
11
13
15
12
14
16
1
3
5
2
4
6
B7B-PASK-1
DL_BK
/DVM_CL_CK
/DVM_CL_LD
1 INT24V1L
/DVM_K_CK
B28B-PHDSS
/DVM_CL_D
/DVM_K_LD
/DVM_K_D
DHPD_CL
2 P-GND
5VNPD+R
5VNPD+R
CN-16(1/2)
DHPD_K
(NC) 3 (NC)
MC-K
D-GND
D-GND
4 /DVM_K_CK
5 /DVM_K_D
DVM_K
(NC) 6 (NC)
7 /DVM_K_LD
48M108F060
1 P-GND 1
2 INT24V1L 2 B7B-PASK-1
DL_M
DRV PWB CN3 3 INT24V1L 3 1 INT24V1L
MC
4 P-GND 4 2 P-GND
(NC) 3 (NC)
4 /DVM_CL_CK
2
5 /DVM_CL_D
DVM_CL
DL_C
(NC) 6 (NC)

7 /DVM_CL_LD
48M108F060
CN-14
B10B-PHDSS 51065-0300
2
D-GND 1 1 D-GND
MC-CL
MC
DL_Y# 3 (NC) 2 (NC)
D-GND 5 3 DL_Y#
3
DL_Y
DL_M# 7
FM_V 9 (NC) 51065-0300
D-GND 2 1 D-GND
DL_C# 4 (NC) 2 (NC)
D-GND 6 3 DL_M#
DL_BK# 8
FM_LD 10 (NC)
1
51065-0300
1 D-GND
(NC) 2 (NC)
3 DL_C#
2
51065-0300
3
1 D-GND
(NC) 2 (NC)
MC
3 DL_BK#
CN-9 (2/2)
1
B34B-PHDSS
1
GB
INT24V1 3
P-GND
PCU PWB
5
/HV_DATA#
7
/HV_CLK#
9
/HV_LD#
2
(1) Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
11
HV_REM#
3
13
MC_CL_ERR
MC
15
MC_BK_ERR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PS-187
GB
PS-250
MC_BK_ERR
MC_CL_ERR
B09B-PASK-1
MC-K MC-K
/HV_DATA#
HV_REM#
/HV_CLK#
/HV_LD#
INT24V1
4
P-GND
CN-1
PS-187
3
PS-250
MC PWB
MC-CMY MC-CMY
Wire jumper
Wire jumper
Wire jumper
Wire jumper
GB-M
GB-C
GB-K
GB-Y
GB
F. OPC drum section
GB
DHPD_CL OPC drum rotation sensor (CL) Detects rotation and the phase of the OPC drum (CL).
DHPD_K OPC drum rotation sensor (BK) Detects rotation and the phase of the OPC drum (BK).
DL_BK Discharge lamp (K) Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum (K).
DL_C Discharge lamp (C) Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum (C).
DL_M Discharge lamp (M) Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum (M).
DL_Y Discharge lamp (Y) Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum (Y).
DVM_CL Developing motor (CL) Drives the developing/OPC drum section (CL).
DVM_K Developing motor (K) Drives the developing/black OPC drum (BK)/transfer section.
GB (Y, M, C, K) Grid (Y, M, C, K) The OPC drum surface potential is controlled.
GB (K, M, C, Y) Main charger grid voltage (K, M, C, Y) The OPC drum surface charging voltage is controlled.
MC (Y, M, C, K) Main charger (Y, M, C, K) The OPC drum surface is negatively charged.
MC-CL Main charger applying voltage (CL) The main charger is charged to generate negative electric charges.
MC-K Main charger applying voltage (K)

1 OPC drum unit (Y, M, C, K) Latent electrostatic images are formed.
2 Cleaning blade (Y, M, C, K) Remaining toner on the OPC drum surface is cleaned.
3 Waste toner transport screw Waste toner in the OPC drum unit is transported to the waste toner collection section.

The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger, 2) Laser beams are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the
then laser image beams are radiated to the OPC drum surface by laser (writing) unit to form electrostatic latent images.
the laser (writing) unit to form electrostatic latent images.
Aluminum
1) The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main OPC drum layer
charger.
CGL
CTL
Aluminum
layer
CGL OPC drum
CTL
Laser beams
OPC drum
When laser beams are radiated onto the CGL of the OPC
drum, positive and negative charges are generated.
Screen grid High voltage unit Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the nega-
tive charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand,
negative charges are attracted to positive charges in the alumi-
num layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are bal-
Main corona unit anced out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reduc-
ing positive and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum
surface voltage.
The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The
OPC drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the volt- Electric charges remain at a position where laser beam are not
age applied to the screen grid. radiated.
As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on the OPC
drum surface.

3) After transfer operation, remaining toner is removed by the 4) The whole surface of the OPC drum is discharged.
cleaning blade.
Toner removed from the OPC drum surface is transported to Aluminum Aluminum
the waste toner section by the waste toner transport screw. layer layer
CGL CGL
CTL CTL
Lens
By radiating the discharge lamp light to the discharge lens,

light is radiated through the lens to the OPC drum surface.
When the discharge lamp light is radiated to the OPC drum
CGL, positive and negative charges are generated.
Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the nega-
tive charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand,
negative charges are attracted to positive charges in the alumi-
num layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive and negative charges are balanced out on
the OPC drum surface and in the aluminum layer, reducing
OPC drum rotation control positive and negative charged to decrease the surface voltage
of the OPC drum.
The OPC drum (K) is driven by the DV motor (DVM_K), and
the rotation speed is monitored by the OPC drum rotation sen-
sor (DHPD_K).
The color OPC drums (C, M, and Y) are driven by the DV
motor (DVM_CL), and the rotation speed is monitored by the
OPC drum rotation sensor (DHPD_CL).
Based on the signals monitored by the two sensors, the rota-
tion speeds of K OPC drum and the color OPC drums and the
rotation phase are controlled.

G. Toner supply section
#.
"" 0( + 3 "" 0($33
4.-?9?! 4.-?9?!
4.-?9?" 4.-?9?"
6 6 WITH &USE
6 6 WITH &USE
4.-?9 4.-?9?8!
4.-?9?8"

4.-?9?8"
4.-?9?8!
4.-?-?!
"" 0( + 3
4.-?-?"
4.-?-?!
6 WITH &USE
4.-?-?"
6 WITH &USE
6
4.-?-?8"
6
#25- 9 4.-?- 4.-?-?8!
4.-?-?8"

4.-?-?8!
#.
"" 0($33
4.-?#?!
"" 0( + 3 4.-?#?"
4.-?#?! 4.-?#?8!
4.-?# 4.-?#?"
6

4.-?#?8"
6 WITH &USE
6 6 WITH &USE
#25- - 4.-?#?8!
4.-?#?8"

6 WITH &USE
6 WITH &USE
4.-?+?!
"" 0( + 3
4.-?+?"
#25- # 4.-?+?!
4.-?+?"

4.-?+?8!
4.-?+?8"
6
6
4.-?+?8!
4.-?+?8"
0#5 07"
4.-?+
#25- + 43(2 6 +

$ '.$ #.
6. "" 0($33
#2-?+?#+ $ '.$
#2-?+?$4 6.
#2-?+?#+
43(2 6 + #2-?+?$4
$ '.$ $ '.$
6. 6.
#2-?-?#+ #2-?-?#+
#2-?-?$4 #2-?-?$4
43(2 6 +
$ '.$ $ '.$
6.
#2-?#?#+

6.
#2-?#?#+
#2-?#?$4 #2-?#?$4
43(2 6 +

$ '.$
6.
$ '.$
6.

#2-?9?#+
#2-?9?$4
#2-?9?#+
#2-?9?$4


CRUM CRUM (Y, M, C, K) Saves various data of the toner cartridge.
TNM_C Toner motor (C) Supplies toner from the toner cartridge (C) to the developing unit.
TNM_K Toner motor (K) Supplies toner from the toner cartridge (K) to the developing unit.
TNM_M Toner motor (M) Supplies toner from the toner cartridge (M) to the developing unit.
TNM_Y Toner motor (Y) Supplies toner from the toner cartridge (Y) to the developing unit.

1 Toner transport screw Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
2 Toner stirring plate Moves the toner stirring plate and toner to the toner transport screw to assist the toner transport operation.

Based on the print pixel count and the process control information, Yes/No of toner supply is judged.
When it is judged that the toner density is decreasing, the toner motor is rotated to supply toner in the toner cartridge through the toner trans-
port screw and the toner duct to the developing unit.

3-0 6 .# 3-2 6 .
452#?
6
#.
"" 0($33
452#?
6
$6-?+?#+ "" 0!3+
$6-?+?$ ).46,
$6-?+?,$ 0 '.$
$6-?#,?#+ $6-?+?#+
$6-?#,?$ $6-?+?$
$6-?#,?,$
$6-?+?,$
-&
3-2 6 . 3-0 6 .#

0 '.$
).46,
$26 07" #. ).46,
0 '.$
H. Developing section

"" 0!3+
).46,
0 '.$
$6-?#,?#+
$6-?#,?$

$6-?#,?,$
-&

4#3?9

"3
4#3?-

3/2 2&# -'$,& 3. 2&#0 3/ 2* -
#32 0+. 2&#90 : 3 0(2
43'?- 43'?-
0#5 07"
6.!4#?6 6.!4#?6
"3
4#3?- 4#3?-
$ '.$ $ '.$
#.
"" #:7(+ #: 9
4#3?#
43'?- !
"3
6.!4#?6 !
4#3?- !
$ '.$ !
3/2 2&# -'$,& 3. 2&#0 3/ 2* -
#32 0+. 2&#90 : 3

0(2
43'?9 ! 43'?9 43'?9
6.!4#?6 ! 6.!4#?6 6.!4#?6
4#3?+
4#3?9 ! 4#3?9 4#3?9
"3
$ '.$ ! $ '.$ $ '.$
3/2 2&# -'$,& 3. 2&#0 3/ 2* -

#: ( #32 0+. 2&#90 : 3

0(2
43'?# " 43'?# 43'?#
6.!4#?6 " 6.!4#?6 6.!4#?6

4#3?# " 4#3?# 4#3?#

$ '.$ " $ '.$ $ '.$
43'?+ "
6.!4#?6 " 3/2 2&# -'$,& 3. 2&#0 3/ 2* -
4#3?+ " #32 0+. 2&#90 : 3
$ '.$ " 0(2
43'?+ 43'?+
6.!4#?6 6.!4#?6
4#3?+ 4#3?+
$6-?#,
$ '.$ $ '.$
-# 07"
#. 7IRE JUMPER
"" 0!3+ "3 +
-#?"+?%22
-#?#,?%22 7IRE JUMPER
(6?2%- "3 #
(6?,$
452#?
(6?#,+
(6?$!4! 7IRE JUMPER
0 '.$ "3 -
).46
7IRE JUMPER
#.
$6-?+
"" 0($33 "3 9

-#?"+?%22
-#?#,?%22
(6?2%-
(6?,$
(6?#,+
(6?$!4!
0 '.$
).46
1TURC_1 Primary transfer separation clutch 1 Controls separation of the primary transfer unit.
BS (K, M, C, Y) Developing bias voltage (K, M, C, Y) Voltage to form toner images on the OPC drum. Controls the developing density.
DVM_CL Developing motor (CL) Drives the developing/OPC drum section (CL).
TCS_C Toner sensor (C) Detects toner supply from the toner cartridge. Detects the toner density (C).
TCS_K Toner sensor (K) Detects toner supply from the toner cartridge. Detects the toner density (K).
TCS_M Toner sensor (M) Detects toner supply from the toner cartridge. Detects the toner density (M).
TCS_Y Toner sensor (Y) Detects toner supply from the toner cartridge. Detects the toner density (Y).

1 Developing roller Attaches toner to electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum and forms toner images.
2 Stirring roller Stirs developer and toner to negatively charge toner.
3 Doctor Maintains the quantities of toner and developer on the DV roller at a constant levels.
4 Toner filter (K, M, C, Y) Prevents toner splash.

Toner is attached to electrostatic latent images formed on the OPC
drum surface by laser image beams to form toner images.
Toner and carrier in the developing unit are agitated and trans-
ported by the mixing roller.
By stirring, toner and carrier are negatively charged by mechanical
friction.
The developing bias voltage (AC component and negative DC
component) is applied to the developing roller.
Negatively charged toner is attracted to the exposed section on the
OPC drum where the negative potential falls due to the developing
bias.
If the OPC drum is not exposed, the negative potential is higher
than the developing bias voltage, and toner is not attracted.
The toner sensor detects the toner supply state from the toner car-
tridge.
In this machine, the toner density is detected by the toner sensor,
but the toner supply operation is not controlled only by the toner
density detection result. The toner density control is performed
according to the process control data.

a. Transfer section
7
I. Transfer section
4
14
4
2
1
4
8
Wire jumper
1TC-Y
4
Wire jumper
1TC-M
TC PWB
8
Wire jumper
1TC-C
13
Wire jumper DF11-6DS-2C
1TC-K CN-1 +DF11-6DP-SP1(05)
5
CN-19 (2/3)
B08B-PASK-1 B34B-PHDSS
3
PTC_ERR 2 14 PTC_ERR
HV_REM# 3 12 HV_REM#
D-GND
/TC_LD# 4 10 /TC_LD#
/TC_CLK# 5 8 /TC_CLK#
4
/TC_DATA# 6 6 /TC_DATA#
PCU PWB
PS-187 PS-250 P-GND 7 4 P-GND

2-TC 2-TC INT24V1 8 2 INT24V1
PS-187 PS-250
9
1TC-Y
PTC PTC CN10
B32B-PHDSS
10
/2TUD 5
/2TURC 7
16
1TC-M
24V3 19
12
D-GND 21
5VO TRAYD 23 QR/P4-32S-C(01) QR/P4-32P-C(01)
5VNPD+R 25 5 /2TUD 5
179228-3 5VNPD+R 27 6 5VNPD+R 6
/1TUD_CL 1 CN-18
7 /2TURC 7
1TUD_CL
D-GND 2 B22B-PHDSS
8 24V3 8
1 /1TUD_CL
1TC-C
5VNPD(with R) 3
VHPSG2481++-1 3 D-GND
5 5VNPD+R
2 /1TUD_K
4 D-GND
179228-3 6 5VNPD+R
/1TUD_K 1
SMP-08V-NC
SMP-08V-NC
D-GND 2 7 D-GND
1TC-K
15
9
5 24V3
5VNPD(with R) 3 5VN
1 /2TUD
2 D-GND
VHPSG2481++-1 11 CRM_K_CK#
4 /2TURC
13 CRM_K_DT#
17
15 D-GND
5
4
3 5VNPD+R 3
2
1
17 5VN
19 CRM_M_CK#
PTC
21 CRM_M_DT#
SMR-08V-N
2TC

8 D-GND
10 5VN
12 CRM_C_CK#
1TURC_2
14 CRM_C_DT#
2 +24V3 2 16 D-GND
1TUD_K
1 /1TURC_2 1 18 5VN
20 CRM_Y_CK#
22 CRM_Y_DT#
2TUD
11
24V3
24V3
2 +24V3 2
CN-16(1/2)
/1TURC_2
/1TURC_1
/1TURC_1
/DVM_K_D
1 1
/DVM_K_LD
B28B-PHDSS
/DVM_K_CK
179228-3
1TURC_1
2
1
3
2
1
48M108F060
/DVM_K_LD 7
2TURC
8
9
7
10
15
13
11
SMP-02V-NC
/DVM_K_D
24V3
5
/2TUD
D-GND
/DVM_K_CK 4
/2TURC
5VNPD+R
DVM_K
B7B-PASK-1
2
1
SMR-02V-N
VHPSG2481++-1
1TC (CMY) Primary transfer voltage (CMY) Flows the transfer current to the primary transfer belt, and transfers toner images from the OPC drum to
the transfer belt.
1TC (K) Primary transfer voltage (K) Flows the transfer current to the primary transfer belt, and transfers toner images from the OPC drum to
the transfer belt.
1TUD_CL Transfer mode detector (CL) Detects separation of the transfer belt and the transfer mode. (Detection is made by combination of
1TUD_CL/1TUD_K signals.)
1TUD_K Transfer mode detector (BK) Detects separation of the transfer belt and the transfer mode. (Detection is made by combination of
1TUD_CL/1TUD_K signals.)
2TC Secondary transfer belt voltage Flows the transfer current to the secondary transfer belt, and transfers toner images from the primary
transfer belt to paper.
2TUD Secondary transfer position detector Detects the position (separation) of the secondary transfer unit.
2TURC Secondary transfer separation clutch Controls separation of the secondary transfer unit.
PTC PTC voltage High voltage for PTC

1 High voltage PWB (TC PWB) Generates the transfer voltage.
2 Cleaning blade Cleans residual toner on the primary transfer belt.
3 Primary transfer belt Transfers toner images of the OPC drum onto the transfer belt.
4 Primary transfer roller (K, C, M, Y) Applies a high positive voltage to the primary transfer belt.
5 Primary transfer belt drive roller Drives the transfer belt. A negative voltage is applied when in the transfer operation, and an alternate
high voltage (positive and negative) is applied when cleaning.
6 Primary transfer belt follower roller Transfer belt follower drive
7 Primary transfer belt tension roller Applies a tension to the transfer belt.
8 PTC opposed roller Flows the PTC current to the GND.
9 Secondary transfer belt Transfers toner images on the primary transfer belt to paper.
10 Secondary transfer roller Connects the secondary transfer belt to the GND, and flows the transfer current.
11 Secondary transfer belt drive roller Drives the transfer belt.
12 Secondary transfer belt follower roller Transfer belt follower drive
13 PTC unit Reduces positive charges on the primary transfer belt, and improves the transfer efficiency.
14 Primary transfer waste toner transport screw Transports waste toner in the primary transfer cleaning unit to the waste toner collection section.
15 PTC cleaner Clean the PTC wire.
16 Separation pawl Separates paper after transfer.
17 Discharge brush Discharges the secondary transfer belt surface after transfer to neutralize it.

b. Process registration sensor section
CN-17 (1/2)
14CZ-6H
BU-14P-TZ-S
14CZ-6H
REGS_R
B18B-CZWHK-B-1 05XR-6H-P
09CZ-6Y
5VNPD A-9 6 5VNPD 9 1 5VNPD
D-GND A-8 7 D-GND 8 2 D-GND
REGS_R_LED# A-7 8 REGS_R_LED# 7 3 REGS_R_LED#
REGS_R A-6 9 REGS_R 6 4 REGS_R
5VNPD A-5 10 5VNPD 5 05XR-6H-P
D-GND A-4 11 D-GND 4 1 5VNPD
REGS_F_LED# A-3 12 REGS_F_LED# 3 2 D-GND
REGS_F A-2 13 REGS_F 2 3 REGS_F_LED#
PCS_F A-1 14 PCS_F 1 4 REGS_F
5 PCS_F
PCU PWB
REGS_F/IMGDS

REGS_F/IMGDS Registration sensor F (Inmate density sensor) Detects color shift. (F side) / Detects the toner patch density.
REGS_R Registration sensor R (Inmate density sensor) Detects color shift. (R side) / Detects the toner patch density.

1 Standard reflection plate Used as the standard reflection plate for the sensitivity adjustment of the registration sensor F (image density sensor).
When the sensor sensitivity adjustment is performed, the primary transfer unit lifts up and the plate is shifted to the
opposed position of the sensor mechanically in conjunction with.

(2) Operational descriptions Secondary transfer cleaning
a. Transfer A high positive voltage is applied to the primary transfer belt to
attach unnecessary toner to the primary transfer belt, and it is
a-1. Transfer, cleaning operation cleaned by the primary transfer belt cleaning.
Transfer operation
Primary transfer
output
C. V. C. C.
C. C. C. V. C. C.
Secondary transfer output

Secondary
transfer output
Primary transfer belt mode select

There are three kinds of modes of the transfer belt: the free posi-
tion, the color print mode, and the monochrome print mode.
PTC output
Mode select is made with the developing motor, the mode select
A high positive voltage is applied to the primary transfer roller to
clutches 1TURC1 and 1TURC2.
transfer toner images from the OPC drum to the primary transfer
belt. When the roller separation clutch is turned ON, the transfer cam
rotates, and the primary transfer link in conjunction with the cam is
Negative electronic charges are generated by the PTC unit, supply-
shifted in the arrow direction, separating the transfer roller.
ing negative charges to toner.
The color transfer rollers (C, M, and Y) and the black transfer roller
This operation improves the transfer efficiency in the secondary
(K) perform an independent separation operation, and the mode
transfer.
state is detected by the combination of the transfer mode detector
Then a high negative voltage is applied to the primary transfer drive 1TUD_CL and 1TUD_K signals.
roller, to transfer toner images from the primary transfer belt to
To select the rotating direction of the mode select cam, two mode
paper.
select clutches 1TURC1 and 1TURC2 are used.
Primary transfer cleaning operation
The two mode select clutches are used to select the mode in the
The primary transfer belt is cleaned mechanically by the cleaning shortest time.
blade.
Transfer mode detector
Mode
1TUD_CL 1TUD_K
Monochrome print mode ON ON
Color print mode OFF ON
Free position ON OFF
1TUD_CL 1TUD_K
Monochrome print mode
1TUD_CL 1TUD_K
Color print mode
Remaining toner removed from the primary transfer belt is trans- 1TUD_CL 1TUD_K
ported to the waste toner collection section by the waste toner
transport screw.
Free position

b. Image density detection and registration detection
operation
The image density detection and the image registration detection
are performed the sensors which are provided separately on the
front frame side and the rear frame side.
b-1. Functions and operations of the color image density
sensor and the image registration sensor F (REGS F)
provided on the front frame side
When the process control is performed with one sensor, the color
toner patch density is detected. When the image registration
adjustment is performed, the image registration shift on the front
frame side is detected.
A shutter plate is provided on the sensor. Before execution of the
process control and the automatic registration adjustment, the
standard reflection plate is closed and the sensor sensitivity adjust-
ment is performed by using the standard reflection plate.
b-2. Functions and operations of the black image density

sensor and the image registration sensor R (REGS R)
provided on the rear frame side
When the process control is performed with one sensor, the black
toner patch density is detected. When the image registration
adjustment is performed, the image registration shift on the rear
frame side is detected.
The sensor sensitivity adjustment is performed by using the stan-
dard reflection plate before execution of the process control and
the automatic registration adjustment.

J. Waste toner collection section
#0&-
#0&-?#.4
#0&-?#,+
#0&-?,$
#0&-?$
-&
"" 0!3+
0&#?(0&#
6

3-2 6 .

(0&#
6
3-0 6 .#
137 "13::
4.&$
$ '.$
4.&$

0#5 07"

82 ( 0
0&#?(0&#
"" 0($33
#0&-?#.4
"" 0($33
#0&-?#,+
#0&-?,$
#0&-?$
#.
#.
6
"50 4: 3 "" 0($33

#.
6.
4.&$ 4.&$
$ '.$ $ '.$
#: (

PFC_HPFC Transport roller clutch Controls the transport roller 4. /Drives the waste toner transport section.
TNFD Waste toner full detector Detects full of waste toner.

1 Waste toner transport screw Transports waste toner to the waste toner box.
2 Waste toner box Collects waste toner.

a. Waste toner full detection operation
Waste toner generated in the OPC drum and the primary transfer
cleaning section is transported to the waste toner box by the waste
toner transport screw which is driven by the paper feed motor.
The toner collection box section is provided with the waste toner full
detection mechanism. When the waste toner quantity in the toner
collection box becomes full, the rotation load of the waste toner
transport screw increases and the waste toner transport screw
drive coupler is stranded to turn ON the waste toner full detector
(TNFD).
When the waste toner full detector is turned ON continuously for 1
sec, it is judged as near end, and the message is display to indicate
that the replacement of the toner collection box is approaching.
TNFD
TNFD (OFF) TNFD (ON)

FUM
Non-contact SMR-03V-B SMP-03V-BC
FUFM
1 TH_UM_IN 1
VHPLG248NL1-1 2 TH_UM_CS_IN 2
3 3 D-GND 3
D-GND
2 HLPCD
1 5VN
179228-3 Contact SMR-02V-B SMP-02V-BC
Signal name
1 TH_US_IN 1 CN-17 (2/2)
2 D-GND 2 19LP-RWZV-K4GG-P6(LF)(SN) 19R-RWZV-K2GG-R6(LF)(SN) 14CZ-6H B28B-CZWHK-B-1
A-1 TH_UM_IN A-10 B-6 TH_UM_IN
A-2 TH_UM_CS_IN A-9 B-7 TH_UM_CS_IN
HLPCD
1 N-HL(LM) 1 A-3 D-GND A-8 B-8 D-GND
A-4 TH_US_IN A-7 B-9 TH_US_IN
SLR-01VF(WH) SLP-01V(WH)
A-5 D-GND A-6 B-10 D-GND
Contact SMR-02V-B SMP-02V-BC A-6 TH_LM_IN A-5
PCU PWB
B-11 TH_LM_IN
2
1 TH_LM_IN 1 A-7 D-GND A-4 B-12 D-GND
2 D-GND 2 (NC) A-8 – A-3 (NC) B-13 TH_UM2_IN
HL_UM/US
(NC) A-9 TH_UM2_IN A-2 B-14 D-GND
1 L-HL(UM) 1 (NC) A-10 D-GND A-1
2 L-HL(US) 2 RCZR-10V-PS 10CZ-6H
PRM
Fusing motor
TH_US_IN
VLP-02V(WH) VLR-02V(WH)
10. Fusing section
2 N-HL(US) 2
B6B-PH-K-S 1 N-HL(UM) 1 1 L-HL(UM) 1
Fusing cooling fan

1 /PRM_/B YLP-02V(WH) YLR-02VF(WH) 2 L-HL(US) 2
2 /PRM_/A
TH_UM_IN
3 N-HL(US) 3
CN-12 3 24V3
Name
4 N-HL(UM) 4
B28B-PHDSS 4 24V3
5 N-HL(LM) 5
/PRM_/B 1 5 /PRM_B
6 F-GND 6
/PRM_/A 2 6 /PRM_A
P R
/PRM_B 3
CN-13
/PRM_A 4
HL_LM
3
D-GND
24V3 (with Fuse) 5

HLout_US
HLout_LM
HLout_UM
B24B-PHDSS
TS UM
FUFM_V 19
/FUFM CNT(Reserve) 21 (NC)
7
9
11
13
WH
8
P-GND 23
FUFM_LD 25
24V3 (with Fuse) 27
D1.25-M3(Ni) SRA-51T-4
1
2
3
4
CN-4
WEBEND
CN-2
8
B02P-VL
GND
B4B-PASK-1
1 Live_HL(main)
2 Live_HL(Sub)
HLout_US
HLout_UM
HLout_UM
YLP-02V(WH)
TS US
2 L-HL(US)
1 L-HL(UM)
VHPLG248NL1-1
1
CN-3
1
2
B3P5-VH-B
D-GND
5VNPD
1 Neutral_Main
WEBEND
PCU PWB
YLR-02VF(WH)
3 Neutral_Sub
TS LM
3
2
1
8
5 Neutral_Low
179228-3
9
Drives the fusing section.

CN-17 (2/2)
B28B-CZWHK-B-1
19LP-RWZV-K4GG-P6(LF)(SN)
8
5VN B-1 B-9 5VN B-1
/WEBEND B-2 B-8 /WEBEND B-2
HL PWB
D-GND B-3 B-7 D-GND B-3

WEBS(WEBM_1) B-4 B-6 WEBS(WEBM_1) B-4
24V3(WEBM_2) B-5 B-5 24V3(WEBM_2) B-5
(NC) B-4 24V3(FUCRU_V) B-6 (NC)
(NC) B-3 /FUCRU B-7 (NC)
(NC) B-2 – B-8 (NC)
6
5
(NC) B-1 – B-9 (NC)
TH_LM_IN
7
CN-13
09CZ-6H
B24B-PHDSS
1 5VN
3 HLPCD
5 D-GND
15 /FUM_CK
4
17 /FUM_D
1
19 /FUM_LD
Cools the fusing section and the paper exit section.

21 5VN
19R-RWZV-K2GG-R6(LF)(SN)

L-HL(US) 1
SLR-01VF(WH) SLP-01V(WH)
Function/Operation
SMR-03 V-N SMP-03V-NC
1 FUFM_V 1
WEBS
2 FUFM_LD 2
3 P-GND 3
SMP-02V-NC SMR-02V-N
1 24V3 1
2 WEBS 2
48M108F060(NIDEC)
FUFM
7
7 FUM_LD
6 5VN
5 /FUM_D
4 /FUM_CK
B7B-PASK-1
FUM
HL_LM Heater lamp (HL_LM) Heats the fusing roller (B).
HL_UM/US Heater lamp (HL_UM/US) Heats the fusing roller (F1), and fusing belt.
HLPCD Fusing pressure detector Detects the fusing pressure state.
PRM Fusing pressure control motor Controls ON/OFF of the fusing roller pressure.
TH_LM_IN Fusing temperature sensor Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller (B).
TH_UM_IN Fusing temperature sensor (Main) Detects the surface temperature at the center of the fusing belt.
TH_US_IN Fusing temperature sensor (Sub) Detects the suffered temperature at the edge section of the fusing belt.
TS LM Thermostat LM Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_LM) circuit when the fusing section is overheated.
TS UM Thermostat UM Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_UM) circuit when the fusing section is overheated. (Center section)
TS US Thermostat US Shuts down the heater lamp (HL_US) circuit when the fusing section is overheated. (Edge section)
WEBEND Web end detector Detects web end of the fusing unit.

1 Fusing roller (F1) Heats the fusing belt.
2 Fusing roller (F2) The cushion layer of the roller forms a wide nip between the fusing belt and fusing roller (B).
3 Fusing roller (B) Heats the back surface of paper to fuse toner on the paper.
4 Fusing web roller Cleans the fusing roller (B) and the fusing belt.
5 HL control PWB Drives the heater lamp.
6 Discharge brush Discharges static electricity generated in the fusing section to the ground.
7 Separation plate Separates the whole surface of paper. (non-contact)
8 Separation pawl Separates fusing roller (B) when it is attached.
9 Fusing belt Heats the front surface of paper to fuse toner on the paper.
B. Outline of operations D. Fusing operation

This machine employs the fusing system by the belt. Color toner (Y, M, C, and K) on paper is heated and pressed by the
The features of the belt-type fusing system are as follows: fusing belt, fusing roller (F2), and fusing roller (B) to be fused on
paper.
1) Short warm-up time
Toner in the four layers on the paper is fused by heating from up
2) Low power consumption
and down and both sides.
3) Wide nip providing high fusing capability
The fusing belt, fusing roller (F2) which is provided with the cushion
C. Heater lamp driving layer, and fusing roller (B) realize the following operations.
The surface temperature of the heat roller and the fusing belt 1) The nip amount is increased and the heat capacity to paper is
detected by the fusing temperature sensor is sent to the PCU. If the increased.
temperature is lower than the specified temperature, the heater 2) By pressing with the flexible roller, toner of many layers can be
lamp lighting signal is sent from the PCU to the heater lamp drive fused without being deformed.
circuit in the HL PWB. 3) An even pressure is applied to rough surface of toner (due to
When the power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned ON, the multi-layer composition).
the AC power is supplied to the heater lamp to light the lamp and
heat the fusing belt. Fusing roller (F2)
A thermostat is provided as a safety device against an abnormally Fusing belt Fusing roller (B)
high temperature in the heat roller and the fusing belt.
When the thermostat is opened, the AC power supply to the heater
lamp is cut off.
The heater lamp is arranged to fusing roller (F1) and fusing roller
(B).
In heater lamp (HL_UM/US), two lamps are integrated into one.
Heater lamp operations
Heater lamp Operation

Heater lamp Heats fusing roller (F1) and the fusing belt.
(HL_UM)
Heater lamp Heats fusing roller (F1) and the fusing belt.
(HL_US) Turns ON continuously when in warming up.
Heater lamp Heats fusing roller (B). Does not turn ON while heater
(HL_LM) lamp (HL_UM) and heater lamp (HL_US) light up. Fusing roller
(F2) Fusing roller
(B)
Fusing belt

E. Automatic pressure release system
Normally the upper and lower heat rollers are pressed. When, how-
ever, the following conditions are satisfied, the pressure is When turning OFF the main power switch of the machine, be sure
released. to turn OFF the power switch of the operation panel and check to
• When the machine shifts to the preheat mode. confirm that the LCD display goes off before turning OFF the main
power switch.
• When the machine shifts to the auto power shut off mode.
If the main power switch is turned OFF with the LCD lighted, the
• When the power switch of the operation panel is turned OFF.
power is cut off before completion of the pressure release opera-
• When the machine is left for 90 sec under the ready state. tion. If this state is kept for a long time, the fusing roller may be
• When in the envelope mode. deformed.
• When a jam occurs.
F. Fusing section cleaning
(1) Pressure release operation In this machine, the fusing roller (B) is cleaned by the web.
The fusing pressure control motor (PRM) rotates to turn ON the The cleaning unit is composed of the web feed roller, the winding
fusing pressure detector (HLPCD) (H level). When the specified roller, and the backup roller which presses the web onto the fusing
time passes after turning ON the fusing pressure detector (HLPCD) roller (B) with the proper pressure.
(H level) by rotation of the fusing pressure control roller (PRM), the
Residual toner on the fusing roller (B) is cleaned by the web which
pressure release motor stops to complete the pressure release
contains silicon oil.
operation.
Winding side
HLPCD
Web sheet
Backup roller
Feed side
Fusing roller (B)
G. Web life end detection

The web life near end is detected by the web print counter. When
the life reaches 120K prints, the following message is displayed to
notify that the replacement timing is approaching.
(Maintenance required.: FK3)
The web life end is detected by the web end detector. When the life
end is detected, a job is forcibly interrupted even the job is being
(2) Pressure release operation performed.
When the end user makes some operations or when the machine After replacing the web with a new one, reset the web life counter
receives the Job signal, the fusing pressure control motor (PRM) and the web send counter to clear the life end state.
rotates reversely to drive the pressure release lever to the pressing
state.
When the specified time passes from turning OFF the fusing pres-
sure detector (HLPCD), the pressure release motor stops to com-
plete the pressing operation.
HLPCD

11. RSPF section
(1) Paper feed section
MOTOR DRIVER PWB

CN G PHR-6R PHR-6
SPUMA/ 1 6 SPUMA/
+24VPD_SPUM 2 5 +24VPD _SPUM
SPUMA 3 4 SPUMA
SPUMB 4 3 SPUMB
SPUMB/ 6 1 SPUMB/
B6B-PH-K-R
SPM
(SPUM)
CN B PHR-12 179228-3
2
SPED 1 1 SPED
GND2 2 2 GND2
+5V SPED 3 3 +5V SPED
+5VPD 4 GP1S73P2
SPPD1 5
GND2 6 179228-3(BLACK)
B12B-PH-K-S 1 +5VPD
2 SPPD1 1
3 GND2
SPPD1 SPED
GP1A73
SPWS
SPLS1
SPLS2
179228-3 GP1S73P2
CN H PHR-10
+5V_SPLS1 1 3 +5VPD SPLS1
SPLS1 2 1 SPLS1
GND2 3 2 GND2
GND2 4
SPLS2 5
+5V_SPLS2 6
AVCC 7 179228-3 GP1S73P2
SPWS 8 2 GND2
GND2 9 1 SPLS2
N.C. 10 3 +5VPD SPLS2
B10B-PH-K-S
SMP-03V-NC / SMR-03V-N
1 AVCC 1 BL AVCC
2 SPWS 2 BR SPWS
3 GND2 3 GY GND2

SPED Document sensor Detects document empty in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPLS1 Paper size detector 1 Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPLS2 Paper size detector 2 Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPM (SPUM) RSPF paper feed motor Feeds a document.
SPPD1 Document transport sensor 1 Detects paper feed and the document size in random paper feed.
SPWS Document size detector Detects the document width.

1 Document pickup roller (RSPF) Feeds a document to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller (RSPF) Feeds a document to the transport section. Makes a warp on paper between the registration roller and
this roller to correct the start position of document skew and document image scan.
3 Separation roller (RSPF) Separates a document to prevent double-feeding.

SOCD
5
2
CN C SMP-02V-BC / SMR-02V-B HS-2.4-020
PHR-8
+24VPD SRRC 1 1 +24VPD SRRC 1
SRRC/ 2 2 SRRC/ 2
+5VPD 3
SPPD3 4
4
GND2 5
SOCD 6 GP1A73
GND2 7 SMP-06V-NC / SMR-06V-N 179228-3(BLACK)
+5V SOCD 8 1 +5VPD 1 1 +5VPD
7
B8B-PH-K-S 2 SPPD3 2 2 SPPD3
3 GND2 3 3 GND2
4 SOCD 4
1
(2) Transport/paper exit section
5 GND2 5
6 +5V SOCD 6
GP1S73P2
10
179228-3
1 SOCD
2 GND2
3 +5V SOCD
6
SPPD2
8 9
MOTOR DRIVER PWB

SPPD3
SRRC
CN D PHDR-10VS-2
SCOV
+5VPD 2
SPPD4 4
SPFM
GND2 6
GND2 7 179228-3(BLACK) GP1A73
STMPU 8 1 +5VPD
STMPS
STMPS/ 9 2 SPPD4
+24VPD STMPS 10 3 GND2
B10B-PHDSS-B
179228-4 179228-4 (OPTION)

1 GND2 4
2 STMPU 3
3 STMPS/ 2
SPPD4

4 +24VPD STMPS 1
292254-4
CN E PHR-5
+24VPD SPRS 3
SPRS/ 4
B5B-PH-K-S
SPRS
SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N TDS-10A

1 +24VPD SPRS 1
2 SPRS/ 2
CN F PHR-6 PHR-6R
SPFMA/ 1 6 SPFMA/
+24VPD_SPFM 2 5 +24VPD_SPFM
SPFMA 3 4 SPFMA
SPFMB 4 3 SPFMB
+24VPD_SPFM 5 2 +24VPD_SPFM
SPFMB/ 6 1 SPFMB/
B6B-PH-K-S
CN B PHR-12 179228-3(BLACK) GP1A73
1 +5VPD
8 2 SPPD5
9 3 GND2
10
+24V SCOV SW 12
B12B-PH-K-S Cover switch
PS-187/SPS-01T-187
2 +24VPD SCOV
1 SCOV SW
SCOV RSPF cover open/close detector Detects open/close of the RSPF cover.
SOCD RSPF open/close sensor Detects open/close of the RSPF unit.
SPFM RSPF transport motor Transports a document.
SPPD2 Document transport sensor 2 Detects paper pass.
SPPD3 Document transport sensor 3 Detects paper pass.
SPPD4 Document transport sensor 4 Detects paper exit and switchback.
SPRS Paper exit roller pressure control solenoid Controls ON/OFF of the transport power of the paper exit roller. (Releases the paper exit roller
(RSPF) pressure when reversing paper.)
SRRC Registration roller clutch (RSPF) Controls the registration roller. (Controls the timing of document transport.)
STMPS Stamp solenoid Drives the finish stamp.

1 Transport auxiliary roller (RSPF) Reduces friction between a document and the paper guide to transport the document smoothly to the
2 Registration roller (Drive) (RSPF) Transports a document to the transport roller 2. / Controls the transport timing of the document and adjusts the
document scanning timing.
3 Registration roller (Idle) (RSPF) Apply a pressure to a document and the registration roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to
the document.
4 Transport roller 3 (Idle) (RSPF) Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to
the document.
5 Transport roller 3 (Drive) (RSPF) Transports a document transported from the document scanning section to the paper exit roller.
6 Transport roller 2 (Idle) (RSPF) Apply a pressure to a document and the transport roller to provide the transport power of the transport roller to
the document.
7 Transport roller 2 (Drive) (RSPF) Transports a document transported from the registration roller to the document scanning section.
8 Paper exit roller (Idle) (RSPF) Apply a pressure to a document and the paper exit roller to provide the transport power of the paper exit roller to
the document.
9 Paper exit roller (Drive) (RSPF) Discharges a document. Switchbacks the document and transports it to the registration roller when scanning the
back surface.
10 Document reverse gate Reverses a document when scanning images on the back surface.
11 RSPF driver PWB Drives the motor, the solenoid, and the clutch in the RSPF section.
(1) Document size detection RSPF unit
Size detection on the document tray
The document width is detected with the RSPF document width
sensor (SPWS), and the document length is detected with the
RSPF document length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document
size is judged from the document width and the document length SPWS
according to the table below. When documents of different sizes
are mixed and set on the document tray, the largest document size SPLS1
is detected.
SPLS2
Document length sensor
Document size
SPLS1 SPLS2
AB series A5 OFF OFF
B5 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
B5R ON OFF (2) Document scanning
A4R ON OFF
The document scanning mode is available in 400dpi and 600dpi.
8.5" x 13" ON ON
B4 ON ON
Resolution Document transport speed
A3 ON ON
400dpi 259mm/sec
11" x 17" ON ON
600dpi 173mm/sec
8.5" x 14" ON ON
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON
8.5" x 13.5" ON ON
Inch series 8.5" x 5.5" OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5"R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
8.5" x 14" ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
8.5" x 13.4" ON ON

(3) RSPF paper feed and transport operations 5) Paper feed start (2nd sheet)
a. Paper feed operation
The paper feed motor is turned ON and the power of the paper feed
motor is transmitted to the pickup roller and the paper feed roller.
The pickup roller descends to pickup the top document and feed it
to the paper feed roller.
The paper feed roller feeds a document to the transport section.
At that time, the document is separated by the separation roller to
prevent double-feeding. 6) Scanning complete (1st sheet)/Registration operation (2nd
b. Single face scanning sheet)
The lead edge of the fed document is aligned (registration) by the (When a certain time passes after turning ON the registration
registration roller, and passed through transport roller 1 to the doc- clutch, the paper feed motor is turned OFF.)
ument scanning section, where images are scanned.
Then the document is passed through transport roller 2 to the
paper exit roller.
The rollers (the registration roller, transport rollers 1 and 2, the
paper exit roller) in the transport section are driven by the transport
motor.
The paper exit roller (drive pulley) is separated by the paper exit
roller pressure control solenoid.
7) Scanning start (2nd sheet)
When the read edge of the document passes the scanning section,
the both rollers are brought into close contact to supply the power
for paper exit.
1) Document set (Document empty sensor ON)
8) Paper exit complete (1st sheet)
2) Paper feed start (1st sheet)

The pick-up roller descends. (The paper feed motor is booted.)
(The transport motor is booted simultaneously.)
9) Scanning complete (2nd sheet)
3) Registration operation (1st sheet)

(Registration clutch ON)
(When a certain time passes after turning ON the registration
clutch, the paper feed motor is turned OFF.)
10) Paper exit complete (2nd sheet)
4) Scanning start (1st sheet)

11) Pick-up roller lifting up
(After completion of a job, the paper feed motor is rotated
reversely at a low speed for a certain time to lift the pickup
roller.)

c. Duplex scanning 6) After stopping the operation, reversing is started.
Images on the document surface are scanned, and detection of the
rear edge of the document by sensor SPPD3 triggers the following.
That is, when the rear edge of the document passes the reverse
gate, the transport motor is reversed.
Due to the above operation, the paper exit roller is reversed to
switchback the document, returning it to the registration roller sec-
tion and aligning (registration) the document.
7) After reversing, registration operation is executed.
Then the transport motor is rotated normally to transport the docu-
ment to the scanning section, scanning images on the back sur-
face.
To reset the page order of the documents, the following operations
are made which are triggered by the detection of the rear edge of
the document. That is, when the rear edge of the document passes
the reverse gate, the transport motor is reversed.
Due to the above operation, the paper exit roller is reversed to 8) After turning ON the PS clutch, the reverse follower roller pres-
switchback the document, returning it to the registration roller sec- sure is released.
tion and aligning (registration) the document.
Then the transport motor is rotated normally to transport the docu-
ment to the paper exit section and discharge it.
When a duplex document is scanned, the document lead edge sec-
tion and the rear edge section intersect. At that timing, the paper
exit roller pressure release solenoid is turned ON to make a gap
between the paper exit roller (drive) and the paper exit roller (idle).
During the time from when the document rear edge passes the 9) Scanning start (First sheet, back surface)
scanning section to when it is switch backed and send to the regis-
tration roller section, the paper exit roller pressure release solenoid
is turned OFF to keep the paper exit roller (drive) and the paper exit
roller (idle) in contact.
10) After completion of scanning, the reverse follower roller is

pressed.

Pick-up roller descending
11) After stopping the operation, reversing is started.
3) Registration operation (1st sheet, front surface)
12) After reversing, registration operation is executed.

4) Scanning start (1st sheet, front surface)
13) After turning ON the PS clutch, the reverse follower roller pres-
sure is released.
5) After completion of scanning, the reverse follower roller is
pressed. (Solenoid ON)

14) Scanning start (Second sheet) 5) Scanning complete (1st sheet)
15) After passing the scanning section, the reverse follower roller 6) Stop at the stamp position/Stamp operation (1st sheet)
is pressed. (Stamp solenoid ON)
7) Paper exit start (1st sheet)/Preliminary paper feed start (2nd

16) After discharge (First sheet), the reverse follower roller pres- sheet)
sure is released.
8) Paper exit complete (1st sheet)
d. Stamp operation
9) Stop at the stamp position/Stamp operation (2nd sheet)

(Stamp solenoid ON)

Pick-up roller descending (The paper feed motor is booted.)
(The transport motor is booted simultaneously.)
10) Paper exit start (2nd sheet)
3) Registration operation (1st sheet)

(Registration clutch ON)
(When a certain time passes after turning ON the registration
11) Paper exit complete (2nd sheet)
clutch, the paper feed motor is turned OFF.)
12) Pick-up roller lifting up

4) Scanning start (1st sheet)
(After completion of a job, the paper feed motor is rotated
reversely at a low speed for a certain time to lift the pickup
roller.)

12. Fan and filter
The machine is provided with the following fan to discharge air from the process section and cool the fusing section and the power unit.

FUFM Fusing cooling fan Prevents heat generated in the fusing section from lowing into the toner cartridge and the paper exit section.
PROFM Process fan motor 1 Blows air to the main charger and the PTC unit to promote discharging of ozone generated.
PROFM2 Process fan motor 2 Discharges ozone generated in the main charger and the PTC unit, and cools the developing unit.
PSFM Power cooling fan motor Cools the power unit.
The flow of air is as shown in the figure below.
02/&- 03&-

0/&-

0/&-
&5&-
02/&-
The machine is provided with the following filter to remove ozone generated in the process section.
Filter process fan motor 1 produces an air flow to generate a difference in the air pressure between inside outside of the developing unit, pre-
venting toner from splashing from the open port of the developing unit.
The toner filter prevents toner from leaking from the slit caused by this difference in air pressure.

1 Toner filter Prevents toner splash.
2 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.

13. Operations and specifications of counters
A. Counters and count conditions
Counter
Job log
Condition Print image Total counter User counter Pixel count Invalid paper
Valid paper counter
counter
Normal discharge paper Valid image Counted Counted Counted as a Counted Not counted
corresponding job.
Simplex surface white paper in White paper Not counted Not counted Not counted Not counted Not counted
the duplex job
White paper of cover paper, White paper Select with the Select with the Not counted Select with the Not counted
insert paper setting of SIM26-52. setting of SIM26-52. setting of SIM26-52.
Size illegal Transfer Valid image for Counted Counted Counted as a Counted Not counted
completed some paper corresponding job.
sizes
Transfer not White paper Not counted Not counted Not counted Not counted Counted
completed
Document jam involvement in White paper Not counted Not counted Not counted Not counted Counted
the RSPF pulling mode
Anti copy Paper for Invalid image Counted Counted Counted as a Counted Not counted
transfer OFF corresponding job.
Following paper White paper Not counted Not counted Not counted Not counted Counted
White paper at CA cancel White paper Not counted Not counted Not counted Not counted Counted
Remaining paper at a paper Not discharged Not counted Not counted Counted as the Not counted Not counted
jam other.
Amount of print cancel for - - - Counted as the - -
paper feed slip or paper empty other.
B. Maintenance system counters (Print counter)

Count-up number
Simplex surface
Duplex surface print
print
Display Reset Paper feed tray - Paper feed tray - ADU paper feed -
Counter name Count-up timing
SIM SIM Paper exit ADU paper entry Paper exit
completed completed completed
Small Large Small Large Small Large
size size size size size size
Maintenance counter (Total) All paper exit operations SIM22-13 SIM24-4 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Maintenance counter (Color) Color paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Fusing belt print counter All paper exit operations SIM22-13 SIM24-4 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Fusing roller print counter All paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Pressure roller print counter All paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Separation pawl print counter All paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Separation plate print counter All paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Fusing web print counter All paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Primary transfer unit print All paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
counter completed
Transfer blade print counter All paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
PTC print counter All paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Secondary transfer unit print All paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
counter completed
PS paper dust cleaner print All paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
counter completed
Developer cartridge print All paper exit operations SIM22-13 SIM24-5 1 2(1)*3 1 2(1)*3 1 2(1)*3
counter (K) completed SIM25-2
Developer cartridge print Color paper exit operations 1 2(1)*3 1 2(1)*3 1 2(1)*3
counter (C) completed
counter (M) completed
counter (Y) completed

Count-up number
Simplex surface
print
Drum cartridge print counter (K) All paper exit operations SIM22-13 SIM24-4 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Drum cartridge print counter (C) Color paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Drum cartridge print counter (M) Color paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Drum cartridge print counter (Y) Color paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Main charger print counter (K) All paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Main charger print counter (C) Color paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Main charger print counter (M) Color paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Main charger print counter (Y) Color paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Drum blade print counter (K) All paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Drum blade print counter (C) Color paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Drum blade print counter (M) Color paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Drum blade print counter (Y) Color paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Ozone filter print counter All paper exit operations 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1 1 2(1)*1
completed
Toner cartridge print counter (K) All paper exit operations SIM22-13 – 1 2(1)*4 1 2(1)*4 1 2(1)*4
completed
Toner cartridge print counter (C) Color paper exit operations 1 2(1)*4 1 2(1)*4 1 2(1)*4
completed
Toner cartridge print counter (M) Color paper exit operations 1 2(1)*4 1 2(1)*4 1 2(1)*4
completed
Toner cartridge print counter (Y) Color paper exit operations 1 2(1)*4 1 2(1)*4 1 2(1)*4
completed
*1: The number in ( ) is the count-up number when the large-size count-up setting is changed to the single count-up with SIM26-5 (Mainte-
nance count (B/W, COL)).
*3: The number in ( ) is the count-up number when the large-size count-up setting is changed to the single count-up with SIM26-5 (Developer
count (B/W, COL)).
*4: The number in ( ) is the count-up number when the large-size count-up setting is changed to the single count-up with SIM26-5 (Total count
(B/W, COL)).

C. Maintenance system counters (Number of rotations)
Count-up number
Simplex surface
print
Fusing belt accumulated While the fusing motor is SIM22-13 SIM24-4 RPM (Unit: 1)
rotation time driven. * Calculated from the traveling distance.
Fusing roller accumulated While the fusing motor is
rotation time driven.
Pressure roller accumulated While the fusing motor is
Separation pawl accumulated While the fusing motor is
Separation plate accumulated While the fusing motor is
Primary transfer unit While the primary transfer unit
accumulated rotation time is driven.
Transfer blade accumulated While the drum (K) is driven.
rotation time
PTC accumulated rotation time While the drum (K) is driven.
Secondary transfer unit While the secondary transfer
accumulated rotation time unit is driven
Developer cartridge While the drum (K) is driven. SIM22-13 SIM24-5
accumulated rotation time (K) SIM25-2
Developer cartridge While the drum (C) is driven.
accumulated rotation time (C)
Developer cartridge While the drum (M) is driven.
accumulated rotation time (M)
Developer cartridge While the drum (Y) is driven.
accumulated rotation time (Y)
Drum cartridge accumulated While the drum (K) is driven. SIM22-13 SIM24-4
rotation time (K)
Drum cartridge accumulated While the drum (C) is driven.
rotation time (C)
Drum cartridge accumulated While the drum (M) is driven.
rotation time (M)
Drum cartridge accumulated While the drum (Y) is driven.
rotation time (Y)
Main charger accumulated While the drum (K) is driven.
rotation time (K)
Main charger accumulated While the drum (C) is driven.
rotation time (C)
Main charger accumulated While the drum (M) is driven.
rotation time (M)
Main charger accumulated While the drum (Y) is driven.
rotation time (Y)
Drum blade accumulated While the drum (K) is driven.
rotation time (K)
Drum blade accumulated While the drum (C) is driven.
rotation time (C)
Drum blade accumulated While the drum (M) is driven.
rotation time (M)
Drum blade accumulated While the drum (Y) is driven.
rotation time (Y)
Toner motor accumulated While the toner motor (K) is SIM22-13 – RPM (Unit: 1)
rotation time (K) driven. * Calculated from the rotating time.
Toner motor accumulated While the toner motor (C) is
rotation time (C) driven.
Toner motor accumulated While the toner motor (M) is
rotation time (M) driven.
Toner motor accumulated While the toner motor (Y) is
rotation time (Y) driven.

D. Maintenance system counters (Number of use days)
Count-up number
Simplex surface
print
Count-up Display Reset Paper feed tray - Paper feed tray - ADU paper feed -
Counter name
timing SIM SIM Paper exit ADU paper entry Paper exit
Number of day that used maintenance counter Date change SIM22-13 SIM24-4 1 (Unit: day)
(Total)
Number of day that used maintenance counter
(Color)
Number of day that used fusing belt Date change SIM22-13 SIM24-4
(Excluding the 18cpm/20cpm machine)
Number of day that used fusing roller
Number of day that used pressure roller
Number of day that used separation pawl
Number of day that used separation plate
Number of day that used fusing web
Number of day that used primary transfer unit
Number of day that used transfer blade
Number of day that used PTC
Number of day that used secondary transfer unit
Number of day that used PS paper dust cleaner
Number of day that used developer cartridge (K) Date change SIM22-13 SIM24-5
Number of day that used developer cartridge (C) SIM25-2
Number of day that used developer cartridge (M)
Number of day that used developer cartridge (Y)
Number of day that used drum cartridge (K) Date change SIM22-13 SIM24-4
Number of day that used drum cartridge (C)
Number of day that used drum cartridge (M)
Number of day that used drum cartridge (Y)
Number of day that used main charger (K)
Number of day that used main charger (C)
Number of day that used main charger (M)
Number of day that used main charger (Y)
Number of day that used drum blade (K)
Number of day that used drum blade (C)
Number of day that used drum blade (M)
Number of day that used drum blade (Y)
Number of day that used ozone filter
Number of day that used toner cartridge (K) Date change SIM22-13 –
Number of day that used toner cartridge (C)
Number of day that used toner cartridge (M)
Number of day that used toner cartridge (Y)

E. Maintenance system counters (Other)
Count-up number
Simplex surface
print
Staple counter When requesting for staple SIM22-8 SIM24-3 Number of staples
Punch counter When requesting for punch 1
Manual paper feed counter (Total) When manual paper feed is SIM22-9 SIM24-2 1
started
Manual paper feed counter (Heavy When manual paper feed of
paper) heavy paper is started
(without distinction between
heavy paper 1 and 2)
Manual paper feed counter (OHP) When manual paper feed of
OHP sheet is started
Manual paper feed counter When manual paper feed of
(Envelope) envelopes is started
Tray 1 counter When tray 1 paper feed is
started
started (request)
started (request)
started (request)
LCC counter When LCC paper feed is
started (request)
ADU counter When ADU paper feed is SIM22-9 SIM24-2 1
started
Fusing web cleaning feed counter When the fusing web SIM22-13 SIM24-4 Number of pulses
(36cpm machine only) cleaning roller is rotated
Toner use number counter (K) When toner near end is SIM22-14 SIM24-35 1
Toner use number counter (C) detected (*2)
Toner use number counter (M)
Toner use number counter (Y)
Toner near end number counter (K) When toner near near end
Toner near end number counter (C) is detection
Toner near end number counter (M)
Toner near end number counter (Y)
F. RSPF/Scanner counter
Counter name Display SIM Reset SIM Count-up timing NOTE
RSPF counter SIM22-8 SIM24-3 When SPF document discharge is completed. Number of discharge of document from the
The front surface in duplex scan is counted SPF
when the reverse operation is stopped.
Scan counter SIM22-8 SIM24-3 When the scanner carriage feed is completed. Number of times of scan
Finish stamp counter SIM22-8 SIM24-3 When the stamp is ON. Number of use of the finish stamp
Cover open/close counter SIM22-8 SIM24-3 When the document cover close is detected. Number of open/close of the cover
Home detection counter SIM22-8 SIM24-3 When the home sensor ON is detected. Number of detection of the home position
Scanner lamp lighting time SIM22-8 SIM24-3 When the scanner lamp is lighted. Scanner lamp lighting time
counter

MX-3115N
5 6 3 ) 8 1 ,7
237,21
' ( 5 ,9 ( 5 < 8 1 ,7 670 36 633' 62 & '
32 ' 6+32 6
6356 6 3 /6 633' 6& 2 9

7 & 3 : %
32 ' 2 60
7 1 0 B. 7 1 0 B& 7 1 0 B0 7 1 0 B< 3 5 2 )0
6 3 )0 6 3 /6 633' 6 3 ('
7)' 3 2 ) 0 B + /3 & '
6380 63: 6 633' 655&
)8 0 3 2 ) 0 B 350
7 2 1 ( 5 B. 8 1 ,7 7 2 1 ( 5 B& 8 1 ,7 7 2 1 ( 5 B0 8 1 ,7 7 2 1 ( 5 B< 8 1 ,7
3 6 )0 5 6 3 ) 3 : %
1. Block diagram
)8 )0 & 5 8 0 B. & 5 8 0 B& & 5 8 0 B0 & 5 8 0 B<

A. System block diagram
6 & $ 1 1 ( 5 8 1 ,7 237,21
32 0 $ 8 ' ,7 2 5
) 8 6 ( 5 8 1 ,7 31 &
5 ( * ,6 7 6 ( 1 6 2 5 0 $ ,1 ' 5 ,9 ( 8 1 ,7
$'80
8 1 ,7
: (% 6 : (% (1 ' 2 & 6:
5 ( * 6 B) /(' / ( ' ' 5 ,9 ( 5
7 8 ' B& /
3 & 6 B) 3: % 3: %
' 9 0 B. ' + 3 ' B. 7 8 5 & B ' 9 0 B& / ' + 3 ' B& / 7 8 5 & B
2 5 6 B/ ( ' 237,21
7 + B8 0
&&'
5 ( * 6 B5 7 8 ' B. 6& 8 : + B6 & 1
+ / B8 0 3: %
3: % 2 5 6 3 '
7 + B8 6
0 ,0
550 + / B8 6 2 3 ( 5 $ 7 ,2 1 8 1 ,7
7 + B8 0
0 +36 72 8 & +
[14] ELECTRICAL SECTION
+ / B/0 3 5 2 )0 3 $ 1 (/
3 )0
7 + B/0 /9 ' 6
+ 3 )& 3: %
' / B. ' / B& ' / B0 ' / B<
/& '
' 6 : B) 3& 8 2 3 ( 3 : %
' 5,9 ( 5 3 : % ' 9 B. 8 1 ,7 ' 9 B& 8 1 ,7 ' 9 B0 8 1 ,7 ' 9 B< 8 1 ,7
3: %

8 6 % & 1 3 : %
' 6 : B5 7 & 6 B. 7 & 6 B& 7 & 6 B0 7 & 6 B<
+/ 8 6 % & 2 1 9 3 : % . (< % 2 5 '

3: %
' 9 7 < 3 B. ' 9 7 < 3 B& ' 9 7 < 3 B0 ' 9 7 < 3 B<
3 6 8 1 ,7
237,21
)$ ;
33'
/ 6 8 0 2 7 + ( 5 3 : %
+''
33'
0 )3 &
237,21
7 1 )' 3: %
7 5,3 / ( & $ 6 6 ( 7 7 ( ' ( 6 .
&66
5 ,* + 7 ' 2 2 5 8 1 ,7 QG& $ 6 6 ( 7 7 (
3 $ 3 ( 5 ) ( ( ' 8 1 ,7 & 66
5 ' ,) 3 $ 3 ( 5 ) ( ( ' 8 1 ,7 / 6 8 8 1 ,7
& 63' & 3 )'
3: % /6 8 B7 +
& 3 )' 0 & 3 : %
237,21 & 63'
& 3 )0 & /8 ' % ' 3 : %
7 )' ' 6 : B$ ' 8 & /8 ' /'
& 3 )& 3: %
3* 0
& 3 )& & 3 ('
3573' 32 ' & 3 ('
MX-3115N ELECTRICAL SECTION 14 – 1

$'8*6
&38&
237,21
& 38& ' 6 : B&
' 6 : B&
& /8 0
0 3 (' 237,21
& /8 0
6HUYLFH0DQXDO
7 & & 2 ,1 9 ( 1 ' ( 5
0 3 )6 7 8 '
$33'
237,21 3& , ),1,6 + ( 5
$33' 7 8 5 & : + B' ( 6 . ' (6.
:+ ,1 1 ( 5
3& , ) ,1 ,6 + ( 5
'& 36
'& 36
0 3 /'
0 6: 5 ($ & 72 5
0 3: 6
0 $ 1 8 $ / 9
3 $ 3 ( 5 ) ( ( '
7+ +8 ' 8 1 ,7 237,21
: + 3 : %
$ & : + 3 : %
25
237,21 $ & 3 : %
: + 6 :
$ & : + 3 : %
$ & ,1
& /2 & . / RDGFRQWURO2 XWSXW
' & 0 RWRU& RQWURO 3 & 6 6 7 8 5 & B7 8 5 & Bࠉ' 9 & 5 8 B. & 0 < 0 3 ) 6
,& ' 9 0 RWRU% . ' 9 0 B. ) 8 & 5 8 7 8 5 & 7 1 & 5 8 B. & 0 < 5 5 & 3 ) & $ ' 8 &
,& / RDG& RQWURO2 XWSXW / RDGFRQWURO2 XWSXW
,& % XV ((3 5 2 0 ' 9 0 RWRU& / ' 9 0 B& /
B. PCU PWB
5 ( 6 ( 7 ,& & RLQYHQGRU & 3 ) & & 3 ) & & 3 8 &
NELW ) XVHU0 RWRU ) 8 0 ) $ 1 0 RWRU& RQWURO
2 SWLRQDO & 3 8 & + 3 ) &
3 RZ HU6 XSSO\) $ 1 3 6 ) 0 B9
) XVHU) $ 1 ) 8 ) 0 B9
0 RWRU& RQWURO
3 HSHU2 XWSXW) $ 1 3 2 ) 0 B9
$ GGUHVV% XV>@ & / 8 0 & / 8 0
,& 3 URFHVV) $ 1 3 5 2 ) 0 B9
; RU; & 3 ) 0 B'
' $ 7 $ % XV>@ ) / $ 6 + 5 2 0
; WDO 0 ELW 0 RWRU& RQWURO
0 + ] ) $ 1 0 RWRU& RQWURO
' 9 0 RWRU. ' 9 0 B. B'
3 URFHVV) $ 1 3 5 2 ) 0 B9
' 9 0 RWRU& / ' 9 0 B& / B'
) XVHU0 RWRU ) 8 0 B'
,&
65$0 6 HQVRU,QSXW
:ULWH3URWHFW
0 ELW 7 1 ) ' & 6 6 6 ( 7 ' 6 : B& ' 6 : B&
& 3 ( ' & 3 ( ' ' 6 : B) ) 8 7 < 3 B 6 HQVRU,QSXW
7 8 ' B. 7 8 ' B& / + / 3 & '
0 RWRU/ RFN' HWHFW ' 6 : B5 ' 9 7 < 3 6 ( / B< 0 & .
,& & 3 ) 0 B/ ' 3 6 ) 0 B/ ' 3 5 2 ) 0 B/ '
' & 3 RZ HU & 3 /'
6 XSSO\ ): 0 RWRU/ RFN' HWHFW
& /2 & .
' 9 0 B& / B/ ' ' 9 0 B. B/ ' ) 8 ) 0 B/ '
) 8 0 B/ ' 3 2 ) 0 B/ ' 3 2 ) 0 B/ ' ࠉ3 5 2 ) 0 B/ '
,& % XV
+ 9 HUURUGHWHFW
, 0 & B% . B( 5 5 0 & B& / B( 5 5 3 7 & B( 5 5
,2 $ 6,&
7 R6 & 1 FQW
7 R0 ) 3 & 8$57
+9 ) $ 1 0 RWRU& RQWURO
Z LUHGVHULDO 0 & 7 & XQLW 3 URFHVV) $ 1 3 5 2 ) 0
3 URFHVV) $ 1 3 5 2 ) 0
3: 0 3 DSHU2 XWSXW) $ 1 3 2 ) 0
,&
3 0 & $ 6,& 3 DSHU2 XWSXW) $ 1 3 2 ) 0
,& % XV & 580 ) XVHU) $ 1 ) 8 ) 0
7 R/ 6 8 0 RWKHU 8$57 ,& & 5 8 0 B. & 0 <
& 38
+ 6 ' UXP / DP S
' / B. & 0 <
) XVHUXQLW + / FRQWURO
+ / B8 0 / 0 8 6
7 R/ '
2 SWLRQDO 6 HQVRU,QSXW
' + 3 ' B& / . 3 3 ' & / 8 ' & / 8 ' ࠉ& 3 ) ' & 3 ) '
6 + 2 3 6 3 2 ' 3 2 ' 3 2 ' 7 ) ' 7 ) ' 3 3 '
& 6 6 & 6 6 7 8 ' $ 3 3 ' $ 3 3 ' 0 3 / '
& RLQYHQGRU 2 SWLRQDO ' 6 : B$ ' 8 3 5 7 3 ' 0 3 ( ' & 6 3 ' & 6 3 '
),1,6 + ( 5 8$57 6 HQVRU,QSXW
0LFURZLUH
6 HQVRU,QSXW & 9 B& / & 2 3 < & 9 B& 2 3 < ) XVHU7 KHUP LVWRURSHQGHWHFW

: (% (1 ' / RDGFRQWURO2 XWSXW 7 + 2 3 ( 1 B8 0 / 0 8 6
0 RWRU/ RFN' HWHFW & 9 B6 7 $ 3 / ( & 9 B& 2 / 2 5 & 9 B' 8 3 / ( ;
,& + ' ' ) 0 B/ ' % 7 0 B/ ' ' UXP / DP SRSHQGHWHFW
,2 $ 6,&
' (6 . 8$57 ' / 2 3 ( 1 B< 0 & .
>$ 5,( 6 2 1 / < @
6 \QFURQRXV0 RWRU
: ( % 0 RWRU : ( % 0
/ RDGFRQWURO2 XWSXW 6 WHSSLQJ0 RWRUFRQWURO
$ QDORJ,QSXW $ ' 8 * 6 : ( % 6 3 DSHURXW0 RWRU 3 2 0
,& 7 HP S+ XP VHQVRU 7 + B0 + 8 ' B0 ) $ 1 0 RWRU& RQWURO 6 KLIWHU0 RWRU 2 6 0
$ QDORJ / 6 8 7 KHUP LVWRU 7 + B/ 6 8 + ' ' ) $ 1 + ' ' ) 0 3 UHVVXUH5 HOHDVH0 RWRU 3 5 0
0 8; ' 9 GHWHFWRU ' 9 7 < 3 B& 0 < . 0 RWRU& RQWURO 7 RQHU0 RWRU 7 1 0 B. & 0 <
0 XOWLE\SDVVWUD\Z LGWKVHQVRU 0 3 : ' % HOW0 RWRU % 7 0 B' ,& $ ' 8 0 RWRU $ ' 8 0
' $ & RQYHUWHU 5 HVLVW0 RWRU 5 5 0
7 6 * B. & 0 < 5 ( 6 B5 B/ ( ' ) 5 3 DSHU) HHG0 RWRU 3 ) 0
' & 0 RWRU& RQWURO

,& ,& ,& 6 HQVRU,QSXW & DVVHWWH3 DSHU) HHG0 RWRU & 3 ) 0
0 8; & 6 6 & 6 6
$ QDORJ,QSXW + & [ & 5 8 LQLWLDOGHWHFW / RDGFRQWURO2 XWSXW
) XVHU7 KHP LVWRU 7 + B8 0 8 6 / 0 ) 8 & 5 8 BLQ7 & & 5 8 BLQ : + B& 1 7
7 RQHU& RQWVHQVRU 7 & 6 B. & 0 < ' 9 & 5 8 B. BLQ& 0 <
3 URFHVV& RQW& / VHQVRU 3 & 6 B) ' 5 & 5 8 B. BLQ& 0 <
/ RDGFRQWURO2 XWSXW 3 URFHVV& RQW% . 5 HVLVWVHQVRU 5 ( * 6 B) 5 7 1 & 5 8 B. BLQ& 0 < ' 5 6 ( 7
+ / B3 5
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻴㼛㼟㼠
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻷㼑㼥㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐㻵㻯㻌㻯㻭㻾㻰㻌㻾㼑㼍㼐㼑㼞㻸㻯㻰㻌㻼㼍㼚㼑㼘㻌
㻴㻰㻰㻌㻞㻚㻡㻓㼀㼅㻼㻱㻙㻭㻌㻯㻺
㻔㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚㻕㻔㻻㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚㻕
㻟㻞㻜㻳㻮㻔㻲㼞㼛㼚㼠㻕㻸㼂㻰㻿㻿㻯㼁㻌㻼㼃㻮
C. MFP control PWB
㻹㻲㻼㻯㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻿㻭㼀㻭
㻯㻺
㻿㼘㼕㼐㼑㻿㻰㻴㻯
㻿㼃㻠㻳㻮
㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻸㻯㻰㻕
㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻿㼏㼍㼚㻕
㻿㻰㻼㻯㻵㼑
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻞㻚㻜㻌㻴㼛㼟㼠㻿㼛㼏㼗㼑㼠㻰㻰㻾㻟㻌㻻㼚㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐㼁㻿㻮㻌㻴㼁㻮
㻯㼘㼛㼏㼗㻌
㻠㻤㻜㻹㼎㼜㼟㻞㻳㻮
㻳㼑㼚㼑㼞㼍㼠㼛㼞
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻞㻚㻜㻌㻴㼛㼟㼠㻠㼜㼛㼞㼠
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻴㼛㼟㼠㻠㻤㻜㻹㼎㼜㼟
㼀㼅㻼㻱㻙㻭㻌㻯㻺㻰㻰㻾㻟㻙㻤㻜㻜
㻔㻾㼑㼍㼞㻕
㻢㻹㻮㻛㻿㼑㼏
㻰㻰㻾㻞㻛㻟
㻿㻼㻵㻛㻿㻰㻿㻭㼀㻭㻌㻵㻲
㻿㻰㻴㻯㻌㻯㼘㼍㼟㼟㻢
㻵㻲
㻯㻺㻌㼁㼜㼐㼍㼠㼑
㻳㻼㻵㻻㼁㻿㻮㻞㻚㻜㻌㻵㻲
㻴㼛㼟㼠㼁㻿㻮㻌㻞㻚㻜㻌㻴㼛㼟㼠
㻠㻤㻜㻹㼎㼜㼟
㻝㻳㼎㼜㼟㻿㼛㻯䜈
㻸㻭㻺㻌㻶㻭㻯㻷㻲㻼㻰㻸㻵㻺㻷
㻾㻶㻠㻡㻺㼛㼚㻙㼕㼚㼠㼑㼞㼞㼡㼜㼠㼕㼛㼚㻌㼍㼞㼑㼍㻸㻯㻰㻯㻌㻵㻲㼀㼞㼍㼚㼟㼙㼕㼠㼠㼑㼞㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻸㻯㻰㻕
㻔㻻㻺㻌㼣㼔㼑㼚㻌㻸㻭㻺㻌㼟㼠㼍㼚㼐㼎㼥㻕㻟㻟㻚㻞㻢㻹㻴㼦
㻲㻼㻰㻸㻵㻺㻷
㻳㻹㻵㻵㻿㻯㻺㻌㻵㻲
㻱㼠㼔㼑㼞㻼㻴㼅㻱㼠㼔㼑㼞㻹㻭㻯㻾㼑㼏㼑㼕㼢㼑㼞㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻿㼏㼍㼚㻕
㻝㻜㻛㻝㻜㻜㻛㻝㻳㻝㻜㻛㻝㻜㻜㻛㻝㻳㻟㻥㻚㻟㻞㻞㻹㻴㼦
㻲㻼㻰㻸㻵㻺㻷㻲㻼㻰㻸㻵㻺㻷
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㼁㻿㻮㻞㻚㻜㻌㻵㻲㼀㼞㼍㼚㼟㼙㼕㼠㼠㼑㼞㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻸㻿㼁㻕㻾㼑㼏㼑㼕㼢㼑㼞
㼀㼅㻼㻱㻙㻮㻌㻯㻺㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑㻾㼑㼡㼟㻸㻿㼁㻌㻵㻲㻟㻞㻹㻴㼦
㻸㻿㼁
㼁㻿㻮㻌㻞㻚㻜㻌㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑
㻠㻤㻜㻹㼎㼜㼟㻸㼂㻰㻿
㻾㼑㼏㼑㼕㼢㼑㼞㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻔㻸㻿㼁㻌㻯㻸㻷㻒㻿㼅㻺㻯㻕
㻭㻿㻵㻯
㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕㼁㻭㻾㼀
㻭㻿㻵㻯㻟㻞㻹㻴㼦
㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㻵㻺㼀
㻵㻺㼀㻔㻝㻛㻠㼏㼔㻕
㻔㼚㻲㻭㼄㻝㻞㼋㻼㻵㻯㼋㻵㻺㼀㻕㻼㻻㻲
㻵㻺㼀
㻔㻝㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕㻵㻞㻯㻔㻝㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕
㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㼘㼑㼞㻵㻞㻯㻌㻥㻡㻷㻴㼦
㻵㻺㼀㻔㼃㼍㼘㼑㼁㼜㻕
㻵㻺㼀
㻔㻞㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕㻵㻞㻯㻔㻞㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕
㻾㼀㻯㻼㻵㻯㻼㻯㼁㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㼘㼑㼞㻵㻞㻯㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㻵㻺㼀㻔㻿㼘㼑㼑㼜㻕
㻵㻺㼀㻟㻢㻜㻷㻴㼦㼚㻲㻭㼄㻝㻞㼋㻼㻵㻯㼋㻵㻺㼀
㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐㻌㼠㼛㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐㻌㻯㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼛㼞㻹㼕㼏㼛㼚㻚
㻔㻟㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕㻵㻞㻯㻔㻟㻛㻟㼏㼔㻕㻱㻱㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㼘㼑㼞㻵㻞㻯㻞㻡㻢㼗㼎
㻟㻢㻜㻷㻴㼦㻲㻭㼄㻔㻝㼟㼠㻕
㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻞㼏㼔㻕
㻱㼠㼔㼑㼞㻹㻭㻯㼁㻭㻾㼀㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㻵㻲㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㻵㻲㻸㼛㼏㼍㼘㻌㻮㼡㼟
㻯㻼㻸㻰
㻝㻜㻛㻝㻜㻜㻛㻝㻳㻔㻝㻝㼏㼔㻕㻔㻠㼘㼍㼚㼑㻕㻔㻝㼘㼍㼚㼑㻕㻵㻲㻸㼛㼏㼍㼘㻌㻮㼡㼟

㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㻰㻿㼁㻮㻌㻯㻺
㻔㻾㻵㻯㻌㻒㻌㻼㻯㻵㻕
㼁㻭㻾㼀
㻾㻿㻞㻟㻞㻯
㻸㼑㼢㼑㼘
㻯㼛㼚㼢㼑㼞㼠㼑㼞㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㼤㻠㻌㼓㼑㼚㻝㻲㻸㻭㻿㻴㻌㻰㻵㻹㻹㻲㻸㻭㻿㻴㻌㻰㻵㻹㻹
㻞㻚㻡㻳㼎㼜㼟㻿㻻㻯㻷㻱㼀㻔㻰㻿㻷㻌㼛㼜㼠㻚㻕
㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘㻌㻯㻺㻝
㻔㼂㼑㼚㼐㼑㼞㻕㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕
㼁㻭㻾㼀
㼁㻭㻾㼀
㻿㼑㼞㼕㼍㼘㻌㻯㻺㻞
㻔㻰㼑㼎㼡㼓㻕㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕㻯㻺㻌㼁㼜㼐㼍㼠㼑
㻼㻯㻵㼑㻌㻵㻲
㻳㻼㻵㻻
㻔㻠㼘㼍㼚㼑㻕
㻲㻭㼄㻔㻞㼚㼐㻕㻌㻸㻿㼁㻌㻹㼛㼠㼔㼑㼞㻌㻼㼃㻮
㻯㻺㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻞㼏㼔㻕㻵㻞㻯㻔㻝㻛㻞㼏㼔㻕㻸㼛㼏㼍㼘㻌㻮㼡㼟㻸㼛㼓㼕㼏㻌㻵㻯㻲㻸㻭㻿㻴㻌㻰㻵㻹㻹㻲㻸㻭㻿㻴㻌㻰㻵㻹㻹
㻵㻞㻯㻌㻥㻡㻷㻴㼦㻯㼛㼚㼠㼞㼛㼘㼘㼑㼞㻵㻲㻔㻭㼐㼐㼞㼑㼟㼟㻌㻲㼑㼠㼏㼔㻌㻒㻌㻿㼑㼜㼍㼞㼍㼠㼑㻕㻿㻻㻯㻷㻱㼀㻔㻼㼞㼛㼓㼞㼍㼙㻕
㻿㻻㻯㻸㼛㼏㼍㼘㻌㻮㼡㼟
㻼㻝㻜㻝㻟
㼁㻭㻾㼀㻰㼑㼎㼡㼓㻌㻯㻺
㻔㻝㻛㻞㼏㼔㻕㼁㻭㻾㼀㻔㻝㼏㼔㻕㻔㼁㻭㻾㼀㻕
㻰㻰㻾㻟㻌㻿㻻㻙㻰㻵㻹㻹㻰㻰㻾㻟㻌㻿㻻㻙㻰㻵㻹㻹
㻻㼜㼠㻚㻌㻞㻳㻮㻿㻻㻯㻷㻱㼀㻰㻰㻾㻟㻙㻢㻢㻣㻰㻰㻾㻞㻛㻟
㻰㻰㻾㻟㻌㻻㼚㻌㻮㼛㼍㼞㼐㻵㻲㻱㼠㼔㼑㼞㻹㻭㻯㻰㼑㼎㼡㼓㻌㻯㻺
㻝㻳㻮㻝㻜㻛㻝㻜㻜㻾㻳㻹㻵㻵㻔㻱㼠㼔㼑㼞㻕
D. Scanner control PWB
㻟㻚㻟䠲
㻝㻚㻤䠲
&&'䠢
0DLQXQLWVLGH 㼀㼞
㻝㻜䠲㼀㼞
㼀㼞㻭㻲㻱㻛㼀㻳
㻟㼘㼕㼚㼑㻌㼏㼛㼘㼛㼞㻌㻯㻯㻰㼀㼞㻯㻼㼁㻯㻸㻷
㼀㼞㻿㻯㻺㼏㼚㼠㼘㼕㼚㼑㻌㼎㼡㼒
㻔㻤㻹㼤㻝㻢㼎㼕㼠㻕
㼀㼞㻭㻲㻱㼋㻯㻿㻝㻥㻚㻢㻢㻝㻹㻴㼦㻯㻸㻷㻝㻢
㻰㻾㻵㼂㻱㻾㼘㼕㼚㼑㻌㼎㼡㼒
㻔㻤㻹㼤㻝㻢㼎㼕㼠㻕
㻝㻢
䠿䡈䡇
㻾㼤㻌㻲㻼㻰㻌㻸㼕㼚㼗
㻾㻳㻮㻟㻡㼎㼕㼠
㻟㻞㼎㼕㼠㻌㼎㼡㼟㻸㻿㼁㻙㼙㼛㼠㼔㼑㼞
㻝㻜䠲㻛㻡䠲㻛㻟䠲
㻿㻯㻺㻸㼂㻰㻿㻌㻵㻯
㻭㻿㻵㻯㼀㼤
㻟㻚㻟䠲㻞㻤㼎㼕㼠
6HULDOV\VWHPV 㻝㻚㻡䠲㻾㻳㻮
㻯㻿㻟
㻾㻿㻼㻲㻌㼁㻺㻵㻼㻰㻛㻵㻰㻻㻯㻯
㻝㻞䊻㻝㻜䠲㻯㼀㻾㻸㼋㻭㻝㻜㼂
㻝㻞䊻㻡䠲㻯㼀㻾㻸㼋㻭㻡㼂
㻡䊻㻟㻚㻟䠲㻯㼀㻾㻸㼋㻭㻟㻚㻟㼂㻯㻿㻠
㻡㼂㻻㻝㻚㻞䠲
㻯㻼㼁㻯㻸㻷
㻹㼕㼞㼞㼛㼞㻟㻚㻟䠲
㻹㻻㼀㻻㻾㻞㻠㼂㻚㻹㼛㼠㼛㼞㻹㻻㼀㻻㻾
㻰㻾㻵㼂㻱㻾㻰㻾㻵㼂㻱㻾
㻞㻠㼂
㻡㼂㻺㻸㻱㻰㻲㻙㻾㻻㻹
2WKHU,&V 㻸㻱㻰㻱㻞㻼㻾㻻㻹
㻔㻻㻺㼎㼛㼍㼞㼐㻕
㻰㼞㼕㼢㼑㼞㻞㻠㼂
㻡㼂㻺㻯㻿㻜㼛㼞㻯㻿㻢
㻹㻴㻼㼟㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞
㻿㼑㼚㼟㼛㼞㼟㻌㼛㼠㼔㼑㼞㻌㼠㼔㼍㼚㻌㻿㻼㻱㻰㻘㻌㻿㻻㻯㻰㻡㼂㻺
㻡㼂㻼㼃㻹
㻻㻯㻿㼃
㻡㼂㻺㻯㻿㻞㻯㻿㻜
㻲㻙㻾㻻㻹
7R/68PRWKHU 㻿㻾㻭㻹
㻔㻰㻵㻹㻹㻕
㻯㻼㼁
㻡㼂㻻㻾㻿㻼㻲㻌㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞㻴㻤㻿㻛㻞㻟㻣㻟
㻡㼂㻼㼃㻹 XDUWHWF
㻿㻼㻱㻰
㻯㻿㻡
7R/68PRWKHU
㻴㻯㻝㻡㻝
㻿㻱㻸㼋㻭㻛㻮㻛㻯
6HQVRUV
㻡㼂㻺
㻹㼀㻼㻌㻵㻯
/9'63:% 㻻㻾㻿䚷㻸㻱㻰
㻞㻠㼂
7RXFKSDQHO 㼍㼚㼍㼘㼛㼓㻯㻼㻸㻰
䞉/&'NLQGGHWHFWLRQ
㻼㻺㻸㼋㻿㻱㻸㻜
㻭㼡㼐㼕㼠㼛㼞㻔㼀㻮㻰㻕
㻯㻯㻲㼀㼋㻯㻼㼁㻼㻺㻸㼋㻿㻱㻸㻜
㻛㻯㻯㻲㼀
䠨䠟䠠㼚㻸㻯㻰㼋㻰㻵㻿㻼
㻳㻱㻞㻌㻦㻌㻣㼕㼚㼏㼔㻔㻌㻻㻺㻛㻻㻲㻲㻌㻕
㻭㻾㻞㻌㻦㻌㻝㻜㻚㻝㼕㼏㼚䠮䡔
5*% 㻞㻤㼎㼕㼠
㻰㻯㻰㻯㻡㼂㻺
㻟㻚㻟㼂㻟㻚㻟㼂㻡㼂
㻞㻠㼂㻸㻯㻰㻌㻼㼛㼣㼑㼞
'RFXPHQWVL]H
/(' 㻸㻱㻰㻞㻠㼂 OLJKWUHFHSWLRQ 㻡㼂㻺
%DFNOLJKW 㻰㻾㻵㼂㻱㻾
㻛㻷㻱㼅㻵㻺
㻷㻱㼅㻌㻯㻻㻺 7R/68PRWKHU
㻡㼂㻼㼃㻹㻡㼂㻼㼃㻹
㻟㻚㻟㼂
㻡㼂㻻
㻺㻵㻺㻲㻻㼋㻸㻱㻰
1XPHULFDONH\SDGRURWKUHV 㻺㻼㼃㻾㻿㼃
㻼㻻㼃㼋㻸㻱㻰
㼃㼁㼋㻸㻱㻰㻡㼂㻻
㻺㼃㼁㼋㻷㻱㼅
㻡㼂㻻
%X]]HU 㻛㻮㼆㻾㻞㻠㼂㻞㻠㼂 3RZHU
VXSSO\
/('PDWUL[ /('GULYH
FLUFXLW 㻝㻞㼂㻝㻞㼂
㻝㻞㼂
,1)2B/(' )$;UHFHSWLRQ/('
㻟㻚㻟㼂
:8B.(< 5HWXUQNH\ 㻟㻚㻟㼂
:8B/(' 5HVHWNH\/('
32:B/(' 0DLQSRZHU/('
㻡㼂㻺
:8B.(< 5HVHWNH\ 㻡㼂
㻿㻯㼋㻭㻯㻷 3&8
㻼㻯㼁㼋㻾㻱㻽
86%&13:%

70LCD UN 70LVDS HG2 PWB SCN_CNT_PWB
FH28-60S-0.5SH(05) FX16S-41S-0.5SH
CN4 CN1 CN
FPC 60Pin R[7:0] FPD Linc Differential signal TCLK 41Pin FFC 41Pin
G[7:0] VP386 Differential signal TX_OUT0
B[7:0] IC1 Differential signal TX_OUT1
Differential signal TX_OUT2
CK Differential signal TX_OUT3
Hsync
Vsync
ENAB
3.3V_LVDS
MOD3
E. Operation unit
RSTB
STBYB /CCFT
SHLR
UPDN RB10
DITH DISP_out nLCD_DIS
Vcom R
V1 - V10 Gamma circuit 10VA R1240N001B-TR-FE
IC5
10VA 24V
10VA R1283K002C-TR PST8427UR
3.3V IC2 IC6
-7VGL 3.3V RSTB 3.3V
TPC8124 PST8427UR
QB3 IC4
15VGH VGL_EN 3.3V
RP131S331D-E2-F PST8427UR
ICB1 ICB3
S3B-PH-SM MAX16822 LVDS_EN 3.3V
Junction connector CN2 ICB2
LED_A 24V 3.3V_LVDS
PST8427UR
LED_K ICB5 RP131S331D-E2-F
CCFT 3.3V_LVDS ICB4
Wire harness 3.3V +5V
52271-0469 CCFT DISP_out
CN3-2
Touch panel /YL(Y1) /YL(Y1)
XH(X1) XH(X1)
/XL(X2) /XL(X2)
YH(Y2) YH(Y2)
KEY PWB
CN1 CN CN CN
BPR LED Wire harness
etc
Home key IC
etc
Buzzer
LSU MOTHER PWB

Power SW
Junction connector CN CN
Wire harness
Power LED

Power-saving
SW
Power-saving
LED
BM16B-ZESS-TBT
USB connector PWB

CN3 CN
Wire harness
nINFO_LE
BM03B-PASS-TFT
Japan only Wire harness
CN1 CN CN CN
SHIELD1
Wire harness
GND
D1+
D1-
VBUS1
BM05B-PASS-TFT
OPTION
PALR-06V /PAP-06V-S Junction connector CN CN
Wire harness
Keyboard
USB
Wire harness
F. LSU-mother PWB
6&1B'$7$

6&1B&/.
7;'B6&15;'B6&1&76B6&1576B6&15(6B6&1
8$57
/&'B'$7$
/&'B&/.
/&'B',63
/&'B6(/
7;'B3,&5;'B3,& /9'6
5(4B3,&5(4B3,&B,17&/5B3,&
32)B6&1 2&
8$57 6&1
:8B)$; FQW
0)3 2&
2& 32)B0)3
62&' 563)B23(1
5HVHW
5HVHW,QSXW 5HVHW,&
563)
3,&93321
63('
$1<B.(< .(<B,1
3,&
3:5B.(<
7;'B3&8 3,&)
5;'B3&8
&76B3&8
576B3&8 :8B.(<
86%&RQWUROOHU 5(6B3&8
86%3RUW 8$57 32:B/(' 2&
.H\ERDUG)URQW 26&
6\VWHP&. 23(
5HDURWKHU :8B/(' 2&
)$;B,1)2 2&
32) '&&17 2&
'&36
'&&17 2&
7KHUPLVWRU2XWSXW 7KHUPLVWHU
$03
,'>@ 7+
5HVHW,QSXW 5HVHW,& 5HVHW
0RWRU&RQWURO 3*0B&.
3&8 3*0B67$57
-2%(1'B,17 3RO\JRQ 3*0B%5$.(
2&
3&8,) 0RWRU 3RO\JRQ
3*0B/2&.
&RQWURO 0RWRU
5HJLVWHU
6&. HWF
569B'$7
75$16B567
)$1
&RQWURO
6\QFKURQRXV6HULDO
FRPPXQLFDWLRQ 6&/
6'$
75$16B'$7 :3 ,&%86
&20B),)2
&/.B&B(1
/68B$6,& &/.B0B(1
5DFRRQ &/.B$B(1
26& 66
6<6&/.
6HULDO,)
6\VWHP&. '$B&/.
/'&RQWURO
'$B'7 9UHI .&0<
6HULDO '$B/' 6HULDO
'$,) '$
(&/. (&/. Q6+ .&0<

/'
/9'6 'ULYHU
+6<1& +6<1& /'B(1% .&0<

2&
96<1&B.
96<1& /'&RQWURO /'9
+RUL]RQWDO6FDQ $3& /'(55 .&0<
9HUWLFDO6FDQ (1%
9,'(2,)&. (&/. 7LPLQJ&RQWURO %'
%'
+6<1& +6<1&
5HHFFLLYYHHUU
/'B&+.
1.. 5
'7B.
'//,,1
&KDQQHO$.
0)3 '7B0
))33'
&KDQQHO%0
'7B&
&KDQQHO&&
'7B<
&KDQQHO'<
9,'(2,)B$&7
26&&/.B& 26& &/.B&B(1

&.&
26&&/.B0 26& &/.B0B(1

&.0
26&&/.B$ 26& &/.B$B(1

&.$

LIU EX PWB Voltage FAX MAIN PWB
TEL/LIU Regulator
Silicon DAA Connector 3.3V 1.8V MDM3.3V
NJU7772F
Si3056 CHIP SET 18
AFE_CLK
AFE_RES- STATUS LED_0
(1) MX-FX11
PROGRAM
ASPCLK FLASH ROM
ABITCLK 16bit
MJ1 ARXD
16Mb
G. FAX section
Si3019 Si3056 ATX D VHIM29LV16

(LINE)
B-1Q
SPK(analog) MODEM STATUS LED_1
16bit (Not mount)
MMD5020
WORK
Crystal MEMORY
Resonator
24.576MHz SDRAM
16bit RESET- RESET IC 3.3V
BSPCLK
64Mbit
BD45285G
BBITCLK A3
BRXD 64S40ETP-
BTXD
G6
+5VA +5V
+5VA
Filter
+5VA FAX IMAGE MFP IF

Speaker
MEMORY Connector
BZ 16bit MDM3.3V +3.3V
(Not mount) Filter
Volume
Power Change EN_SPKON- FLASH ROM With secure
Speaker Amplifier EN_BZON- 16Mbit
Connector 16bit locking
S02B- BU4066 VOLA device
PA SK
LM4819 NJM3414 VOLB +24V
VOLC
VOLD +5V BM30B-
SHLDS
SPMUTE- +3.3V
RGDT-
(CI detection) +5V2
HDMUTE-
RHS- MON_24V- +24V +24V
SI3_RES- Detection
CI2- RES_FAX-
FAX_RXD(D)+
FAX_RXD(D)-
CI
CI- FAX_TXD(D)+
Detection FAX_TXD(D)-
Polarity FAX_CTS(D)-
HS1-
inversion
FAX ASIC FAX_RTS(D)-
Detection HS2-
(Not mount) FAX_RXD(CS)+
MB87F4930 FAX_RXD(CS)-
CION FAX_TXD(CS)+
FAX_TXD(CS)-
150VON FAX_CTS(CS)-
S relay

+5V2 FAX_RTS(CS)-
FLV PP
MJ2
(TEL) MSGMUTE
OFF fock 16bit Version ID voltage

detection level
ECON
EXHS- CNCT_FAX-
JTAG JTAG
MRON
Connector
14pin
SON1 (Not mount)
CPU
CID-
Download Log SH7706 Voltage
UART 1.9V Regulator 3.3V
Connector
+24V (Not mount) R1173S001B
PIC +12 PICPGM_EN
+12V +24
CI Fi ter microcomputer Spred
UART Crystal
CI Fi ter PIC16F690 Spectrum Resonator
+5V2
CY25811SXCT 14.7456MHz
SON2
WUP_FAX-
voltage TELID
Operation in 1W/7W level
energy-save mode voltage TELID2
level
0#5 3#.#NT ,35 -/4(%2 -&0#
2X$ 05 05 5!24"?48$
2"?48$?3#.
3CHMIT )NV / #
05 5!24"?28$
#05 4X$
2"?28$?3#.
0$ /# 3CHMIT )NV
(3 !;= 05 05 5!24"?243?.
#0,$ 2"?243?3#.
/#
$;= 3CHMIT )NV
%0-4#. 05 5!24"?#43?.
2"?#43?3#.
0$ 05 3CHMIT )NV
4 X$ 05 5!24"?28$
N0#5?2X$ 2"?28$?0#5
0$ /# 3CHMIT )NV
2X$ 05 05 5!24"?48$
N0#5?4X$ 2"?48$?0#5
3CHMIT )NV / #
)/PORT 05 5!24"?#43?.
N0#5?$32 2"?#43?0#5
0$ /# 3CHMIT )NV
05 05 5!24"?243?.
)/PORT
2"?243?0#5
H. SERIAL COMMUNICATION
N0#5?$42
3CHMIT )NV /#
05 2X$
4X$
42!.3?$!4
0$ 3CHMIT )NV 3CHMIT )NV
2X$ 05 4X$

236?$!4 ,35!3)#
3CHMIT )NV 3CHMIT )NV 0$ 2ACOON
05 3#+
3#+
3#+?,35
0$ 3CHMIT )NV 3CHMIT )NV
#05 -0&# 2%53 !3)#
4X$ 05 2X$
(3 4X$?&). ,35!3)#
0$ /# 3CHMIT )NV 2ACOON !RIES ONLY
2X$ 05 05 4X$ 05 05 5!24#?48$
2X$?&). #05 2#?48$?0)#
/#
/# 3CHMIT )NV
05
-&7'0 /#
)/ 05
$42?&). 5!24#?28$
0$ &).)3(%2 2#?28$?0)#
/# 3CHMIT )NV 0 )# 0$ /# 3CHMIT )NV
05 05 )/ 0)#& 05
$32?&). /PTIONAL 0/24#
/# 2#?#,2?0)#
/# 0$
3CHMIT )NV /#
05
05 05 0/24#
4 X$ 2X$ 2#?2%1?0)#
4X$?$3+ 0$ /# 3CHMIT )NV 0$
0$ /# /#
05 05 05
2X$ 4X$ 05
2X$?$3+ 5!24"?48$
/# $%3+ 2"?48$?&!8$
/# #05
05 05
5!24"?28$
) / (3 2"?28$?&!8$
$42?$3+ /PTIONAL 05
0$
,6$3 5!24"?48$
0$ /# /# 2"?48$?&!8#3
05 05 05
)/ 5!24?28$
$32?$3+ 2"?28$?&!8#3
/# 0$
/#
05
5!24"?243
05 05 2"?243?&!8$
4 X$ 2X$
4X$?,## / # 05 3CHMIT )NV
5!24"?#43
0$ /# /# 2"?#43?&!8$
05 05 05
2X$ 4 X$ 05
2X$?,## 5!24"?243
/# 2"?243?&!8#3
/# #05 ,## /# 05 3CHMIT )NV
05 05 (3 5!24"?#43
)/
$42?,## /PTIONAL 2"?#43?&!8#3

0$ /# /# 05
05 05 05 5!24"?48$
)/ 2"?48$?&!8$
$32?,## 05
5!24"?28$
/# /#
2"?28$?&!8$
,6$3 05
5!24"?48$
2"?48$?&!8#3
05
5!24?28$
/PTIONAL 2"?28$?&!8#3
05
5!24"?243
$;=
&!8 2"?243?&!8$
05 /# 3CHMIT )NV
#0,$ 3AMEASST &!8 5!24"?#43
!;=
2"?#43?&!8$
3CHMIT )NV 3CHMIT )NV 05
%0-4#. 5!24"?243
2"?243?&!8#3
05 /# 3CHMIT )NV
5!24"?#43
2"?#43?&!8#3
05
2"?'0)?#43?0#) 0/24"
05
2"?'0/?243?0#) 0/24"
/PTIONAL 05
0-#!3)# 2"?48$?0#) 5!24"?48$
0#)35" 2"?28$?0#) 5!24?28$
50$'. 05
2"?$42?0#) 0/24"
05
2"?$32?0#) 0/24"
05
2"??#43?2)# 5!24?#43?.
05
2"??243?2)# 5!24?243?.
/PTIONAL 23# 05
23# 2"?48$?2)# 5!24"?48$
#OIN6ENDOR0#) 2"?28$?2)# 5!24?28$
$RIVER 0/24"
2"?$42?2)#
$RIVER 05
2"?$32?2)# 0/24"
'&32:(56833/< )
3&,'&32:(56833/< 237,21 5HDFWRU
9RO W DJH
)$+9 &RQYHU VL RQ
9R
%' ' 9/

)
a
a
a
a
7$9

9RO W DJH
&RQYHU VL RQ )
9 3&, 1) 59 7$+9
1)
A. AC power line diagram
9RO W DJH
) &RQYHU VL RQ
2. Power line diagram
9
, 179
9
)$+9 9
9'(6.
9
(1) AC power line diagram (230V)
91
$& 3: % 9
. )
0$,132:(56: 7$+9
$&,1 )
) 3$77(51*$3
/
3$77(51*$3
7$+9
,179
$
$ 95
59 ):
3$77(51*$3 *HQHU DW L QJ
&L U FXL W
)
)
1
+/B35
7$+9 3$77(51*$3
:+
3:% 237,21
+/3:%
) /
/ /
/
)
7$+9 7$+9
1&
:+B&17
12
9
5<
7' 7' 7'

7 * 7 * 7 *
7 665 7 665 7 665

+/287B80 +/287B86 +/287B/0
*1' *1' *1'
:+6:
GUDZHU
)86, 1* 81, 7
+/B86 +/B/0
/&& '(6. '(6. 0DLQ8QLW 6&1
+HDWHU +HDWHU +HDWHU +HDWHU +HDWHU 7+(50267$7 7+(50267$7
237,21 76B86 76B/0
: : : : :
/&& 237,21 '(6. 237,21 6&181,7 7+(50267$7

+/B80 76B80
:$50+($7(56(7 237,21
6&1FQW 3:% 81
9 %=5
9
3$1(/ 81 $5,(6
'6:5
92
)80
92B'XW\
'5,9(53:% 81 3:6: 3:%
%=5
9
'90B%.
91 92 0)# CONTROL ,35 MOTHER

75?+%9 2ESET KEY
'90B&/ 91 07237 3OFT 37 0)# CONTROL ,35 MOTHER
'6:) 9 0)# CONTROL ,35 MOTHER

6?0$ SERIES 75?,%$ 2ESET KEY ,%$
$9
SENSOR
&3)0 &75/B$9 0/7?,%$ -AIN POWER ,%$ 0)# CONTROL ,35 MOTHER
/'2
$9 92
'6:B) +06: 3:%
0)# CONTROL ,35 MOTHER 91
%70 9
$& /PEN#LOSE
$9
92B'XW\
3&8
32)B6&1 3,&
'6:B5 $ULHV⋜2QO\ +6 '&'& 9 '&'& 91
6?0$ SERIES /9'6 3:%
563)'593:% 81 /'2
9 SENSOR 91 9
'&'& ,3'9 9
,179/ &&'3:% 81
)(7 $OCUMENT WIDTH SENSOR /'2
2USH '&'& $9 9
9 &75/B$9 $9 9
PREVENTION &%4
$9 9B/&'
&75/B$9 '&'& $9
B. DC power line diagram
)(7
&%4 FOR RUSH ,179
PREVENTION
/./&& 9 9 /(' /&' LQFK
7U 6 CLUTCH
9
.(<%2$5'
92 92B'XW\
/(''59 /('
0,0
,17B&17 3:%81 3:%81
).&/?,%$&!8 RECEPTION ,%$ 0)# CONTROL ,35 MOTHER
92 92B'XW\ 92 )521786%
/68027+(5 3:% 81
7U 91 59B+8% 86%
+8% 9+'
)(7 )(7 ,&&$5' 5($'(5
9 '&'&
0)33:% 81
'5,9(5
+''
3,&
0/&?-&0# 0)# CONTROL
8$57 2%1?0)# 0)# CONTROL
62&
2%1?0)#?).4 0)# CONTROL
&!8?750 ,35 -OTHER 0)# CONTROL
$# 0/7%2 07" 5. 3$1(/ 81 *(0,1, 3/86 $5,(6 /2786
)$;81
$50 1(7:25.86%
0)323( 3:%
%=5
550 360RWRU
92 92 9
3)0 36)URQW0RWRU
$'80 $'80RWRU
3,&
0/- 0APER EXIT MOTOR

92 75?+%9 2ESET KEY 0)# CONTROL ,35 MOTHER
9/ 9/ 92

07237 3OFT 37 0)# CONTROL ,35 MOTHER
9/ 75?,%$ 2ESET KEY ,%$ 0)# CONTROL ,35 MOTHER

.(<&21
9 9 9
-3 0/7?,%$ -AIN POWER ,%$ 0)# CONTROL ,35 MOTHER
9 9
91
,179/
,179
'&'&
'&'& $1<.(<
/68$6,& 9
9
,179/ '&'& '&'& 6+
/9'6 3:%
/'2
9 9 91 9
*$UUD\
9 /('
9 '5,9(5
/'3:% 81
3*0
9 9
,179 9B/' /&' LQFK

/('
/'
)(7
,179 9B/'
9 9
91
/68)0 .(<%2$5'
3&83:% 81 $ULHV⋜2QO\
).&/?,%$&!8 RECEPTION ,%$ 0)# CONTROL ,35 MOTHER
9 92 )521786%
$
91B3' 91B3'
)(7 6.?0$ SERIES
SENSOR
3&8਑౪ +6
,&&$5' 5($'(5
9 91 91 91
$ 6. SERIES
SENSOR
9 9 9
$ ,17B&17
&2,1
).46 &OR /./&& OF RELAY 91
9(1'25
9 9
237,21
$
,179
7&3:%
,179
0&3:%
,179/ ,179

9B'6.
352)0
9B'6. ,179/
$
6 CLUTCH
92 9
32)0
9
9/
)8)0
91 5SED IN THE SPEED CONTROL &!. ETC 9
352)0
9 9 9
350
91 9 9
+6 30&$6,& &3/'
91
710B%N
9B'6. 91 9
&7 &ROM $#$# 07" 237,21 237,21

710B&
9 0/&?0#5 4O ,35 -OTHER 0)# 9
/&& '(6. ),1,6+(5 710B0

9
'&)0
'&&17 '&&17
710B<
9
9 9 91 9
2))B&17 5<B&17
,35 -OTHER ,35 -OTHER
0)# CONTROL 0)# CONTROL
&1
%%&65. /) 61
'*1'
'*1'
9B)
9B) &1 &1 &1
Q&1&7B)$; 7;5/7+ 7;3/7+( &1
%%&=:+.% %%&=:+.%
)$;'B7;'B1 /&'B'$7$ /&'B'$7$ &=+ &=+
'*1' % % '*1'
)$;'B7;'B3 31/B86%B'1 /&'B'$7$ /&'B'$7$ 31/B86%B'1 7['B3&8 % % 7['B3&8
9B RII 31/B86%B'3 /&'B'$7$ /&'B'$7$ 31/B86%B'3 5['B3&8 %
Q5(6B)$; 86%B9%86 /&'B'$7$ /&'B'$7$ 86%B9%86 % 5['B3&8
)$;&6B7;'B3 07B86%B571B3
/&'B'$7$ /&'B'$7$ 07B86%B571B3 3573'BRXW % % 3573'BRXW
75$16B567 % % 75$16B567
)$; 3:% )$;&6B7;'B1 07B86%B571B1
/&'B'$7$ /&'B'$7$ 07B86%B571B1
A. MFPC, LSU
75$16B'$7 % % 75$16B'$7

'*1' 3,&93321 /&'B&/. /&'B&/. 3,&93321 -2%(1'B,17 %
)$;'B5;'B1 5;'B6&1 /&'B&/. /&'B&/. 5;'B6&1 % -2%(1'B,17
)$;'B5;'B3 Q&76B6&1 /&'B'$7$ /&'B'$7$ Q&76B6&1 9UHI % % 9UHI
92 % % 92
Q)$;B:83 7;'B6&1 /&'B'$7$ /&'B'$7$ 7;'B6&1 '*1' % % '*1'
)$;&6B5;'B3 Q576B6&1 Q/&'B',63 Q/&'B',63 Q576B6&1
)$;&6B5;'B1 Q5(6B6&1 /&'B5()&/.,1 /&'B5()&/.,1 Q5(6B6&1 &=< &=<
9B RII Q5(6B3&8 6&$1'$7$ 6&$1'$7$ Q5(6B3&8 '*1' $ $ '*1'
Q5(6B3&8 $ $ 5(6B3&8
'*1' 5;'B3&8 6&$1'$7$ 6&$1'$7$ 5;'B3&8 Q576B3&8 $ $ 576B3&8
Q)$;'B576 Q&76B3&8 6&$1&/.287 6&$1&/.287 Q&76B3&8 Q&76B3&8 $ &76B3&8
'*1' 7;'B3&8 6&$1&/.287 6&$1&/.287 7;'B3&8 $
Q)$;'B&76 Q576B3&8 6&$1'$7$ 6&$1'$7$ Q576B3&8 3 2) $ $ 32 )
/68B567 $ $ /68B567
)/933 Q32)B0)3& 6&$1'$7$ 6&$1'$7$ Q32)B0)3& 6&. $ $ 6&.
Q)$;&6B576 Q5(4B3,& 6&$1'$7$ 6&$1'$7$ Q5(4B3,& 569B'$7 569B'$7
9B$ Q&/5B3,& 6&$1'$7$ 6&$1'$7$ Q&/5B3,& $ $ 3 &8 3 :%
Q)$;&6B&76 7;'B3,& 6&$1'$7$ 6&$1'$7$ 7;'B3,& 7+B/68 $ $ 7+B/68
'*1' $ $ '*1'
9 5;'B3,& 6&$1'$7$ 6&$1'$7$ 5;'B3,&
3. Actual wiring chart
9B) 3:0
&+B1 &+B1 3:0
9B) Q&1&7B)$1 &+B3 &+B3 Q&1&7B)$1
'*1' Q5(6B3,& &+B1 &+B1 Q5(6B3,&
3*1' 86%B)5B',6 &+B3 &+B3 86%B)5B',6
3:0
&+B1 &+B1 3:0
Q5(4B3,&B,17
&+B3 &+B3 Q5(4B3,&B,17
7;'B)$;B' &/.B1 &/.B1 7;'B)$;B'
&1 5;'B)$;B' &/.B3 % WR % &/.B3 5;'B)$;B'
%0%*+67%7 /) 61 Q576B)$;B' &+B1 &+B1 Q576B)$;B'
59B(&2 Q&76B)$;B' &+B3 &+B3 Q&76B)$;B'
'65B3&, 7;'B)$;B&6 &+B1 &+B1 7;'B)$;B&6
5;'B3&, 5;'B)$;B&6 &+B3 &+B3 5;'B)$;B&6
&76B3&, Q576B)$;B&6 (&/.B/68B1 (&/.B/68B1 Q576B)$;B&6
576B3&, 0)3& 3:% Q&76B)$;B&6 (&/.B/68B3 (&/.B/68B3 Q&76B)$;B&6
7;'B3&, Q5(6B)$; +6<1&B/68B3 +6<1&B/68B3 Q5(6B)$;
'75B3&, Q&1&7B)$; +6<1&B/68B1 +6<1&B/68B1 Q&1&7B)$;
*0' Q:8B)$; 96<1&B.B1 96<1&B.B1 Q:8B)$;
59B(&2 96<1&B.B3 96<1&B.B3 59B(&2
173B,17
96<1&B&B3 96<1&B&B3 173B,17
91
96<1&B&B1 96<1&B&B1 91
&1 91
96<1&B0B1 96<1&B0B1 91
8$5.- 91
96<1&B0B3 96<1&B0B3 91
9%86 1&
96<1&B<B3 96<1&B<B3 &76B/&'VXE
86% ' 9
96<1&B<B1 96<1&B<B1 9
' :2/$1B21 73B6&/ 73B6&/ :2/$1B21
+267 '*1' /&'6(/ 73B6'$ 73B6'$ /&'6(/
/&'6(/ 9/ 9/ /&'6(/
&1 '*1'
9/ 9/ '*1'
8%5.* '*1'
9/ 9/ '*1'
'*1'
9/ 9/ '*1'
9%86 '*1'
9/ 9/ '*1'
86% ' '*1'
9/ 9/ '*1'
'
'(9,&( '*1' '*1'
9/ 9/ '*1'
'*1'
9/ 9/ '*1'
'*1'
9/ 9/ '*1'
&1 '*1' 9/
9/ '*1'
0-)5 '*1'
7;'B/&'VXE 7;'B/&'VXE '*1'
1&
5;'B/&'VXE 5;'B/&'VXE 1&
753 9 9 /68 81 GSL
753
753
/$1 753
753 /68 027+(5 3:% &1 &1
753 7;567+( 7;367+(
753 :3B.& :3B.&
753 6'$B.& 06B6(7B&BRQ 6'$B.& 06B6(7B&BRQ
&1 6&/B.& '7B& 6&/B.& '7B& &1
%0%B65667%
1& /'&+.B '7B& /'&+.B '7B& %%3+.6
&1 1& QB/'(55B< '7B& QB/'(55B< '7B& &1 1& 1&
'%5) 1& 1& QB/'(55B& '7B& QB/'(55B& '7B& 6%3+.6
1& 1& 1& 1&
1& 95()B& '7B. 95()B& '7B. 7+ 3+5 7+ /68 7+ 3:%
1& 3*&
&B5;' IRU 3,& 3*' Q(1%B<0& '7B. Q(1%B<0& '7B. '*1' '*1'
&B7;' 1& QB/'(55B. '7B. QB/'(55B. '7B. %'
&B'75 1& '*1' 95()B< '7B. 95()B< '7B. '*1'
56& '*1' 1& 92 Q6+B& '*1' Q6+B& '*1' 9'
&1 1& 933
&B'65 Q6+B< '*1' Q6+B< '*1'
&B576 6$73%% 95()B. 1& 95()B. 1&

&B&76 '*1' 6+B. 1& 6+B. 1& &1
1& 6$7$B7;3 Q(1%B. 1&
% WR % Q(1%B. 1 & 6%3+.6
1& 7+
6$7$B7;1 Q6+B0 1& Q6+B0 1&
'*1' 1& 1& 1& 1 &
/' 3:% 1& '*1'
&1 %' %' 3:%
;B%0%*+67%7 /) 61 6$7$B5;1 1& 1& 1& 1&
6$7$B5;3 &1 1& 1& 1& 1& '*1'
9&& 1& %%3+607% 9'
300 '*1' *1' 95()B0 1& 95()B0 1&
UHVHUYH 1& 1& 7+ 1& 7+
*1' 1& 5;'/&'VXE Q/'(55B0 '*1' Q/'(55B0 '*1'
IRU 'HEXJ 1& 7;'B/&'VXE &1
Q%' '*1' Q%' '*1'
1& 59B(&2 6%3+.6
'*1' 9B' '*1' 9B' 1& 1& $03
'*1' '*1' '*1' '*1' 9 9
9B/' '*1' 9B/' '*1' 3*1' 3*1'
3*1' 1& 3*1' 1&
6$7$ 3LQ GXULQJ 3 Q32/<B67$57 Q32/<B67$57 32/<*21
'*1' &1 3*1' Q32/<B&. 3*1' Q32/<B&. Q32/<B/2&. Q32/<B/2&. 02725
6$7$B5;3 %%3$6. 9 Q32/<B/2&. 9 Q32/<B/2&. Q32/<B&. Q32/<B&.
9 Q32/<B67$57 9 Q32/<B67$57
6$7$B5;1 1& 9 9 9
'*1' 1& 3:0
6$7$B7;1 UHVHUYH 1& 3*1'
6$7$B7;3 1& &1&7
'*1' 1& 9
+' '
6$7$ 3LQ GXULQJ 3 &1
9 %39+
9 9
9 9+'
'*1' '*1' &1
'*1' '*1' 1& %%3$6.
'*1' 9 1&
9+'
9+' Q)$15'< 1& UHVHUYH
3*1' 1&
9+'
'*1'
'*1'
'*1'
9 1&
9 1&
9 1&
LQFK 23(5$7,21 81
/ &' 81
&1
)+66+ )3 &
*1'
9$
9
/68 027+(5 3:% 6&1 &17 3:% 5
5
5
&1 5
%%3+'66 &1 &1 +56 &1 5
6&$1'$7$ %%3+'66 );0669 /9'6 ))&*3 );666+ 5
6&$1'$7$ 6&$1'$7$ *1' *1' 5
*1' 6&$1'$7$ Q/&' ',63 Q/&' ',63 5
6&$1'$7$ *1' /&'6(/B+ /&'6(/B+ *
6&$1'$7$ 6&$1'$7$ /&'6(/B+ /&'6(/B+ *
*1' *1' *1' *1' *
6&$1'$7$ 6&$1'$7$ /&'B$B3 /&'B$B3 *
6&$1'$7$ *1' /&'B$B0 /&'B$B0 *
*1 ' 6&$1'$7$ *1' *1' *
6&$1&/.287 1& 9 /&'B&/.B3 /&'B&/.B3 *
6&$1&/.287 6&$1'$7$ /&'B&/.B0 /&'B&/.B0 *
*1 ' *1' *1' *1' %
6&$1'$7$ 6&$1&/.287 /&'B$B3 /&'B$B3 %
6&$1'$7$ *1' /&'B$B0 /&'B$B0 %
*1' 6&$1&/.287 *1' *1' %
31/B6(/ 1& 6&$1'$7$ /&'B$B3 /&'B$B3 %
31/B6(/ 1& 6&$1'$7$ /&'B$B0 /&'B$B0 %
*1' *1' %
*1' /&'B$B3 /&'B$B3 % /&' PRGXOH
/&'B'$7$ &1 /&'B$B0 /&'B$B0 &.
B. Scanner, operation panel
/&'B'$7$ %%3+'66 *1' *1' (1$9

*1' /&'B$B3 &&)7 &&)7 +V\QF
/&'B'$7$ /&'B$B0 ;/B;B6'$ ;/B;B6'$ 9V\QF
/&'B'$7$ *1' <+B<B6&/ <+B<B6&/ 02'
*1' *1' </B<B,17 </B<B,17 567%
/&'B'$7$ /&'B$B3 ;+B;B&6 ;+B;B&6 /9'6 3: % 67%<%
/&'B'$7$ /&'B$B0 *1' *1' 6+/5
*1' /&'B$B3 9 9 9
/&'B&/. /&'B$B0 9 9 83'1
/&'B&/. *1' 9 9 *1'
*1 ' *1' 9 9 *1'
/&'B'$7$ /&'B&/.B3 *1' *1' 9$
/&'B'$7$ /&'B&/.B0 *1' *1' 9FRPBLQ 9FRP
31/B6(/ /&'B$B3 9 9 ',7+
Q6&8B5(6B5(4 /&'B$B0 9 9 1&
/&'6(/B+ 9 9 1&
*1' 9 9 9
Q6&8B5(6B5(4 *1' *1' 9
*1' *1' 9
9&217 *1' *1' 9
6&B7(03 *1' *1' 9
*1' *1' 9
9
9
9
&1 9
%%3+'66 1&
13:56: 9*+
*1' &1 9
*1' 1& %%3+'66 9*/
Q/&'B',63 Q/&'B',63 *1'
Q5(6B6&1 Q5(6B6&1 %33+.6 1&
7;'B6&1 7;'B6&1 *1'
5;'B6&1 5;'B6&1 3' &1
63B&/26(B+ 1& 1& 63B&/26(B+ 9 )3 &
63('+ 63('+ 3'6(/ 2563' ;/ ;
.(<,1B1+ 1& 1& .(<,1B1+ 3'6(/ <+ < 728&+ %$& .
Q:8B.(< 1& *1' 3'6(/ ;+ ;
Q,1)2B/(' </ < 3$1(/ /,*+7
Q32:B/('
Q:8B/('
*1' *1' &1 &1 %+60596 %+6596 1
%%3+'66 6%3+607%
9B3:0 93:0 92 9/(' 9/('
Q32)B6&1 Q32)B6&1 92 1&
Q576B6&1 Q576B6&1
Q&76B6&1 Q&76B6&1 Q+0B.(< 1& 9/(' 9/('
%=5
9 9 Q+0B/(' 1&
3&8B5(4 *1' 1&
6&B$&. &1
*1' *1' 1& %0%=(667%7
1& 1& *1'
9 1& .(<,1
*1'
9B(;7
3' %=5
9 6(*/('%35
3'6(/ Q:8B.(<
3'6(/
6(*/('&35
3'6(/ 6(*'
6059% 6039%& *1' 32:B/('
3&8B5(4 ) Q+0B/(' 1& :8B/('

3&8 &1 6&B$&. 6(* 9
)'
*1' ) Q3:56:
) )*
9$ 9
6(*
)*
6(* *1'
)
9
.(<,1
.(< 3:%
*HPLQL3OXV
)*1' )*1'
%837=6 /) 61
&=+596 &=+596 65$7 65$7
Q3:56:
*1'
1& *1' 1&
Q:8B.(<
Q,1)2B/('
32:B/('
:8B/(' 1RWXVHG
3$396
92
Q,1)2B/('
1& 1&
&1 &1 &1
%%3+'66 )+669 &&' ))&*3 )+669
*1' *1' *1'
563) *1' *1' *1'
9 *1' *1'
'5,9(5 3:% 92 *1' *1'
9 *1' *1'
9% *1' *1'
1& 9 *1' *1'
9 *1' *1'
9 *1' *1'
1& 9 *1' *1'
&1$ *1' &1B$)(B6'2 &1B$)(B6'2
C. Scanner, RSPF
%%3+'66 *1' $)(B6'72 $)(B6'72

*1' $)(B6&/. $)(B6&/.
*1' $)(B&6 $)(B&6
633' Q5(6B&&'$' Q5(6B&&'$'
633' *1' *1'
93' &1 $9 $9
93' %%3+'66 $9 $9
9 633' $9 $9
9 633' $9 $9
63)0$ 63)0$ $9 $9
63)0$ 63)0$ $9 $9 &&' 3:%
63)0% 63)0% *1' *1'
63)0% 63)0% $9 $9
63)02 63)02 $9 $9
6380$ 630$ $9 $9
6380$ 630$ *1' *1'
6380% 630% $9 $9
6380% 630% $9 $9
63802 6302 *1' *1'
6356 6356 &1B7$B1 &1B7$B1
67036 67036 &1B7$B3 &1B7$B3
655& 655& *1' *1'
63)& 6556 &1B7%B1 &1B7%B1
63:6 63:6 &1B7%B3 &1B7%B3
6(/$ 6(/$B *1' *1'
6(/% 6(/%B 6&1 &17 3:% &1B7&B1 &1B7&B1
6(/& 6(/&B &1B7&B3 &1B7&B3
66(/2 66(/2 *1' *1'
㸫 1& 633' &1B7&/.B1 &1B7&/.B1
㸫 1& 1& 63)02 &1B7&/.B3 &1B7&/.B3
633' 633' *1' *1'
633' 1& 1& &1B7'B1 &1B7'B1
93' 93' &1B7'B3 &1B7'B3
*1' 63(' *1' *1'
*1' 1& 62&' &1B7(B1 &1B7(B1
&1B7(B3 &1B7(B3
6&1&17B6( 6&1&17B6(
6&1&17B6( 6&1&17B6(
&1, *1' *1'
%%3+.6
9%
9
62&' 1&
63('
&1
&1 %%3+.6
%%3+.6 (+5
0+36 0+36
1& Q$B31& *1' '*1'
1& Q$B&23< 93' 9
0+ 36
1& Q$B&$
1& Q$B5($'< 9+3/*/$
$8',725 25 1& Q$B$8'
237,21 1& 9 &1
1& *1' %%3+.6
1& 9 %%3+607%
0,0B$ 0,0B$
1& FRO 0,0B% 0,0B%
1& Q$B7& 0,0B$ 0,0B$ 0 ,0
1& 9 0,0B%
Q31&D 0,0B%
31&KDUQHVV *1' 50276)&3=

/(' '59 3:%
/(' 3:%
%%3+.6 %%3+.6
&1 &1 ,'59 ,'59
&3%) $3% ,'59 ,'59
93' 93' ,'59 ,'59
93' 93' ,'59 ,'59
/$03 /$03 ,'59 ,'59
*1' *1' ,'59 ,'59
*1' *1' 9 9
&1
%%3+.6
9& 9
*1' 2&6: 2 & 6:
2&6: *1'
9 9+3/*1/
6,=(B/('
6,=(B/(' 9
6,=(B/('
6,=(B/(' 256 /(' 3:%
*1'
65$7
&63DSHUIHHG81 ')'''6''&' ' ' ' ')'6&
')'363 ')99'93963999 9
65$7 * * * * * * * * 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' ' '
60591 60391&
3*1'
;5+3 ,179/
'*1' '59 3:% &1 ,179/
&/8' &/8' 3*1'
913' %837=3+
9+3*3$$ )*
1& &386 1& &1
1& 9 1& %%3+'66
;5+3
'*1' '*1' '+3'B.
&3(' &3(' &/8' '*1' 0DLQ'ULYH81
913' 913' 913'5
9+3*3$$ '*1' 785&B '+3'B.
&3(' &1 9 '*1' '+3'B.
;5+3 913' %%3+'66 '90B.B&. 913' 5௜
'*1' '*1' 1& &386 '90B.B' 9+3*363
&3)' &3)' &3)' 1& 9 '90B.B/'
913' 913' '*1' 60391& 60591
9+3*3$$ '*1' &/8' '+3'B&/ 785&B
'6:B& &3(' '*1' 9 785&
91 &3)' 913'5
'*1' ;5+3 &=+ 913' 785&B
'6:& '6:B& '6:B& 9
91 91 '90B&/B&. %%3$6.
9+3*3$$ 352)0B9 '90B&/B' ,179/
352)0B&17 '90B&/B/' 3*1'
71)' ;5+3 3*1' 1& 1&
352)0B/' '90B.B&.
7 1) ' '*1' 71)' '90B.B'
'90B.
46:%46== '*1' 1& 1&
%837=6 33' 3&8 3:% '90B.B/'
71)' 33'
%837=6 3*1' 0)
&=< '*1'
'*1' ;5+3 '*1' '*1' &/80
33' 33' 33' 33' '*1'
913' 913' 913' &66 '+3'B&/
9+3*3$$ '*1' '*1' 1& &66 '*1' '+3'B&/
33' 33' 1& &66 913' 5௜
;5+3
'*1' 913' 913' 1& &66 9+3*363
33' 33' )*1' )*1' &63'
913' &=+ &=+ 1& 1& 60391& 60591
9+3*3$/ 785&B
9 785&
65$7 65$7
D. CSS1, Paper feed, Transport, Main drive, RESI
36 8 1 %%3$6.
,179/
3*1'
1& 1&
%%3+.6 3+5 '90B&/B&. '90B&/
3*1' '90B&/B'
&/80 &/80 1& 1&
㺪㺼㺵㺚㺱㺎㺞 '90B&/B/'
0)
%%3+.6 3+5
&66
'*1'
&66 1&
1& 5(6, 81
&1 %837=6
%%&=:+.% &=< &=+ &=+
913' $ 1& 1& 1&
913' '*1' $ 1& 1& 1&
&63' &63' 5(*6B&B/(' $ 1& 1& 1&
'*1' 5(*6B& $ 1& 1& 1&
9+3/*1/ 3&6B& $ 1& 1& 1&

913' $ 913'
;5+3 913'
'*1' $ '*1' '*1' 5(6,
5(*6B5B/(' $ 5(*6B5B/(' 5(*6B5B/(' 6(1625
5(*6B5 $ 5(*6B5 5(*6B5
913' $ 913' 1& 1& 5
60391& 60591 '*1' $ '*1'
352)0B9 5(*6B)B/(' $ 5(*6B)B/(' 9+3<$+$
352)0B&17 5(*6B) $ 5(*6B)
352)0 3*1' 3&6B) $ 3&6B) ;5+3
913'
352)0B/' '*1' 5(6,
5(*6B)B/(' 6(1625
5(*6B)
3&6B) )
&1
%%3+.6 9+3<$+$
9 1&
9 1&
3&66 1&
)8&58 1&
0XOWLSDSHUIHHG81
60391& 60591
9
$'8*6 $'8*6
6ROHQRLG

03('
'*1'
65$7 915
03 ('
9+36*
3&8 3:% 60591 60391&
)*1'
03('
'*1'
91 5 60391& 60591
9 9
&1 03)6 03)6 03)6
%%3+'66 㺝㺸㺧㺐㺢㺼
03 ('
03)6
78'
785& 0DQXDOIHHGWUD\81
7&&58 ')'''6''&
$33' ')'363
7)' * * * *
3573' 1 1 1 1
9 ' ' ' '
9
'*1'
92
E. Right door, Manual paper feed
913'5 6%3+.6
3+5 91
+8'B0
9 '*1' 7++8'
7+B0
+8'B0 5'7&+)&3=
7+B0 60591 60391&
03:6 '*1'
03/' 91 %%3+.6
3+5
'6:$'8 +8'B0 '*1'
$33' 7+B0 03:6 03:6
32' 03:6 915
$'8*6 915 &3:%)46(
9 03/'
'*1' 1& 915
915 03/'
'*1'
915 1& 03/'
915
9+36*
6HFRQGDU\WUDQVIHU81
4536& 4533&
03('
9 60591 60391&
03)6
78' 78'
78' '*1' '*1' 78'
785& 913'5 913'5
9 785& 9+36*
7&&58 9
$33' '*1' 1& 60391& 60591
1& 1& 1& 7&&58 1& 785&
1& 1& 1& )*1' 9 785&
$'8*6
9
7)'
3573'
92
65$7 )*1' 65$7 65$7
9 )*
+8'B0
7+B0 65$7
03:6
03/' $33'
1& 1& 1& '*1' $33'
$'80 $ 913'5
$'80 $ 9+36*
$'80 %
$'80 %
%%3+.6
'6:$'8 1&
$33'
32' $'80B/B287B$
$'80B/B287B%

91
$'80B/B287B$ $'80
913' $'80B/B287B%
'*1'
1&
'6:$'8
'*1' '6:$'8
913'5
60591 60391& 9+36*
$'80 $
$'80 $ $33'
'5,9( 3:% $'80 % '*1'
$'80 % 5'225 3:% 915
$33'
%%3+'66 9+36*
'*1'
913'LQ
'*1'
%837=6 32'
913'5
'*1' &=+596 &=+596 '*1' 32'
913'5 915
32' 9+36*
'*1' '*1'
915 915
'*1' 7)' 7)'
915 '*1' '*1' 7)'
'*1' 913'5 913'5
915 3573' 1& 9+36*
'*1' '*1' 1&
91LQ 92 1&
%%3+'66
'*1'
915
'*1'
915
'*1' 1&
'*1' 5LJKWIHHGWUD\(;81
'*1'
913'5
'*1'
913'5
%%3+.6
&1 &1 350B%
%%3+'66 %%3+'66 350B$
91 91 350B% 9
+/3&' +/3&' +/3&' 350B$ 9 35 0
'*1' '*1' 350B% 350B%
9+3/*1/ '*1' 350B$ 350B$
+/287B0$,1 9 㺩㺋㺎㺛㺼᭷
+/3:% +/287B68% 9 㺩㺋㺎㺛㺼᭷
+/287B/2: 260B%
%%3$6. )80B&. 260B$
F. Paper exit, Frame fusing, DRV PWB
,179/ )80B' 260B% 60391& 60591

3*1' '59 3:% &1 )80B/' 260B$ 260B%
1& 1& 91 260B$
)8 0 )80B&. 1& 5HVHUYH 32)0B9 260B%
)80B' 913' 32)0B&17 260B$ 2 60
91 1& 1& 32' 3*1' 9
)80B/' '*1' 32)0B/' 1& 9 1&
913' )8)0B9 50276)&3=
0) 32' )8)0 &17 ணഛ 1&
'*1' 3*1'
91 )8)0B/'
7)' 9 㺩㺋㺎㺛㺼᭷ 60391& 60591
'*1' 32)0B9
913' 32)0B9 32)0B&17
6+326 32)0B&17 3*1' 32)0
'*1' 3&8 3:% 3*1' 32)0B/'
32)0B/' 1)$13)&3
&3)0B&17
&3)0B&/.
&3)0B' 60591 60391&
)XVLQJUHDU3*81 91 )8)0B9
&3)0B/' )8)0B/' )8 ) 0
3*1'
60591 60391&
913' 913'
32' 32'
32' '*1' '*1' 60391& 60591
32)0B9
9+3/*1/
32)0B&17
3*1' 32)0
32)0B/'
3DSHUH[LW81 1)$13)&3
')%'(35& ')%'(65&

913' 913'
32' 32' 32'
'*1' '*1'
9+3/*1/ 91 %%3$6.

7)' ,179/
'*1'
'59 3:% &1 3*1'
91 913' &3)0B&17
7)' 7)' 6+326 &3)0B&/. &3)0
'*1' '*1' &3)0B'
9+3/*1/ )*1' 9
&3)0B/'

913'
6+326 6+326
'*1' 65$7
9+3/*1/ 65$7
'ULYHU3:%
&1
%%3+.6 )80
78'B&/ '*1'
78'B&/ '*1' ,179/
913' 5௜ ,179
9+36* '6:B59! 60591 60391&
G. CRUM, Motor
&1 &1 '6:B)9! $'80 $

78'B. %%3+'66 %%3+'66 ,17B&17 $'80 $ 5LJKW'RRU
78'B. '*1' 78'B&/ ,179/ &1 $'80 %
913' 5௜ '*1' 3*1' %%3+.6 $'80 %
9+36* 913'5 320B&:B&&:B$
78'B. 320B(1$%/(B% *1' 1&
,179/
'*1' 320B&/.B$ '*1'
913'5 320B02'(B% $'80B287B%
76+59. 320B&17
'*1' '*1' '*1' $'80B287B%
$'80B287B$
91 91 &3)& $'80B287B$
&50. &50B.B&. &50B.B&. 9 320B287B%
&50B.B'7 &50B.B'7 9
'*1' $'80B02'( 320B287B% %%3+.6
320B287B$ 1&
76+59. 91 $'80B(1$%/( 320B287B$ 320B287B$
'*1' &50B0B&. 550B&17 320B287B%
91 &50B0B'7 '*1'
&500 &50B0B&. 550B&/. 320B287B$ 320
&50B0B'7 '*1' 550B(1$%/( &1 320B287B%
%%3+.6 1&
91 550B287B$
76+59. &50B&B&. ,179
'*1' &50B&B'7 3*1' 550B287B$
91 '*1' 91 &1 550B287B%
550B287B%
& 50& &50B&B&. 91 '*1' %%3+'66% 3)0B287B$
&50B&B'7 &50B<B&. '6:B59! 1& 6/((3B'59 %%3+.6
&50B<B'7 '6:B)9! '*1' 3)0B287B$ 550B287B%
76+59. ,17B&17 '*1' 3)0B287B% 550B287B$
3)0B287B%
'*1' '*1' '*1' 550B287B% 550
91 &38& 550B&17 550B287B$
&50< &50B<B&. 9 550B&/.
&50B<B'7 3&8 3:% 3)&B+3)& $'80B&/.
$'80B&17 550B(1$%/(
$'80B&/. 320B&/.B$
3)0B&17 550B02'(
3)0B02'( 3)0B&/. %%3+.6
&1 1&
%%3+'66 3)0B&/. 3)0B&17 3)0B287B$
710B&B$ 3)0B(1$%/( $'80B02'( 3)0B287B%
3)0B(1$%/(
%%3+.6 710B&B% $'80B(1$%/( 3)0B287B$ 3)0
710B&B$ 710B&B;$ 3)0B287B%
710B&B% 710B&B;% 3)0B02'( 1&
9 9 㺩㺋㺎㺛㺼௜ $'80B&17
320B&17
710B& 9 9 㺩㺋㺎㺛㺼௜ 320B02'(B%
710B&B;$ 9 㺩㺋㺎㺛㺼௜
710B&B;% 9 㺩㺋㺎㺛㺼௜ 320B&:B&&:B$
710B.B$ 320B(1$%/(B% 60591 60391&
91 &1 '*1'
710B.B% '*1' %%3+'66% ,179/
710B.B;$ '90.'90&/
710B.B;% '*1' *1' ,179/
%%3+.6 *1' '*1'
710B.B$ ,179/
710B.B% ,179/
9 ,179/
710B. 9 60391& 60591 ,179/ &3)0
710B.B;$ &3)& *1'
710B.B;% 9 &3)& *1'
*1' 1&
&1 *1' 1& %70
%%3+'66 60391& 60591
,179 &38&
%%3+.6 $&'& 3:% 3*1' 9 &38&
710B<B$ 710B<B$
710B<B% 710B<B%
9 9 㺩㺋㺎㺛㺼௜ 6039%& 6059%
7 10 B < 9 9 㺩㺋㺎㺛㺼௜ +3)&
9 +3)&
710B<B;$ 710B<B;%
710B<B;% 710B<B;$
710B0B$
%%3+.6 710B0B%

710B0B$ 9 㺩㺋㺎㺛㺼௜
710B0B% 9 㺩㺋㺎㺛㺼௜
9 710B0B;%
710B0 9 710B0B;$
710B0B;$ 352)0B&17
710B0B;% 3*1'
352)0B9
60391& 60591
352)0B9 *1'
352)0B&17 6&B$&.
3 52 ) 0 3*1' 3&8B5(4
352)0B/' 352)0B/'
1)$13)&3= ):
+/35
36)0B9
6039%& 6059% $&'& 3:% 36)0B/'
*1' 3*1'
6&1 3:% &1 6&B$&. ,179
3&8B5(4
'9 81 0$*(17$
6255)&0*' /) 61 5)&3625-0
&653. 1 5)&<3=6
1& '9&58B0 1&
'9B7<36(/B0 1&
'*1'
'97<3B0 3+5
76*B0 76*B0
91 $7&B9 91 $7&B9
7&6B0 7&6B0 7&6B0
'*1' '*1'
1& 9 '9&58B9 1&
&1
%%&=:+. &=<
'9&58B0 $ 1&
'9B7<36(/B0 $
'*1' $
'97<3B0 $
76*B0 $
91 $7&B9 $
7&6B0 $ '9 81 <(//2:
'*1' $ 6255)&0*' /) 61 5)&3625-0
9 '9&58B9 $ 1& &653. 1 5)&<3=6
'9&58B< $ 1& 1& '9&58B< 1&
'9B7<36(/B<$ '9B7<36(/B< 1&
'*1' $ '*1'
'97<3B< $ '97<3B< 3+5
76*B< $ 76*B< 76*B<
91 $7&B9 $ 91 $7&B9 91 $7&B9
7&6B< $ 7&6B< 7&6B< 7&6B<
'*1' $ '*1' '*1'
9 '9&58B9 $ 1& 1& 9 '9&58B9 1&
H. Process, DV, High voltage
65$7
:LUHMXPSHU
6SULQJ 7&. )*
:LUHMXPSHU 7& 3:%
6SULQJ 7&&
:LUHMXPSHU
&1
6SULQJ 7&0
%%3$6. &1 '9 81 &<$1
:LUHMXPSHU 1& )*1' 1& %%3+'66
7& 8 1 6255)&0*' /) 61 5)&3625-0
6SULQJ 7&< 37&B(55 37&B(55 &=+
+9B5(0 +9B5(0 &653. 1 5)&<3=6
'9&58B& % 1& 1& '9&58B& 1&
7&B/' 7&B/' '9B7<36(/B& % '9B7<36(/B& 1&
7&B&/. 7&B&/. '*1' % '*1'
:LUHMXPSHU 7&B'$7$ 7&B'$7$ '97<3B& % '97<3B& 3+5
6SULQJ 9&$6( 3*1' 3*1'
,179 ,179 76*B& % 76*B& 76*B&
91 $7&B9 % 91 $7&B9 91 $7&B9
7&6B& % 7&6B& 7&6B& 7&6B&
36 36
7& :+ 7& '*1' % '*1' '*1'
9 '9&58B9 % 1& 1& 9 '9&58B9 1&
36 36 '9&58B. % 1&
37& 5' 37& '9B7<36(/B.%
'*1' %
'97<3B. %
76*B. %
91 $7&B9 %
7&6B. %
'*1' %
9 '9&58B9 % 1&
' 9 81 %/$&.
6255)&0*' /) 61 5)&3625-0
&653. 1 5)&<3=6
3&8 3:% 1& '9&58B. 1&
'9B7<36(/B. 1&
36 5' 36 '*1'
0&. 0&.
'97<3B. 3+5
0& 3:% 76*B. 76*B.
91 $7&B9 91 $7&B9
7&6B. 7&6B. 7&6B.
36 5' 36 '*1' '*1'
0&&0< 0&&0< 1& 9 '9&58B9 1&
&1
%%3$6. &1
)*1' 1& %%3+'66
0&B%.B(55 0&B%.B(55
:LUHMXPSHU 0&B&/B(55 0&B&/B(55
+9B5(0 +9B5(0
6SULQJ *%.
:LUHMXPSHU +9B/' +9B/'
6SULQJ %6. +9B&/. +9B&/.
:LUHMXPSHU +9B'$7$ +9B'$7$
3*1' 3*1'
6SULQJ *%& &1
,179 ,179 %%3+'66
:LUHMXPSHU
6SULQJ %6& '*1' '*1'

'9 81 :LUHMXPSHU '/B< 1& 1& '/B<
6SULQJ *%0 '*1' '/B<
:LUHMXPSHU '/B0
6SULQJ %60 )0B9 1&
:LUHMXPSHU '*1' '*1'
6SULQJ *%< '/B& 1& 1& '/B0
:LUHMXPSHU '*1' '/B0
6SULQJ %6< '/B%.
)0B/' 1&

'*1'
1& 1& '/B&
'/B&

'*1'
1& 1& '/B%.
'/B%.
(/319 (/519) 369
9 D 9
3*1' E '6:5 '6:5
9
3*1'
&1
%39+%
9
9
9 &1
I. Power supply
9 %39+
9 '6:5 369
9B'6. '6:5 D '6:5
1& '59 3:% '6:) E '6:) '6:)
9 3*1'
9
3*1'
&1
%39+%
3*1'
3*1'
3*1'
3*1'
3*1'
3*1'
3*1'
&1
%39+ /) 61
9 9
9
*1'
9 6&1 &17 3:%
9
*1'
&1
%39+%
9
9
9
'*1'
'*1'
&1
%39+%
,179
'*1'
'*1'
'*1'
91
91
91
91 1& &1
91 1& %39+ /) 61
$&'& 3:% 9
'*1'
91
'*1'
9
&1
%39+%
9
9
9
'*1' /68 027+(5
3:%
&1
&1 %39+ /) 61
%39+% 9
'*1' 3*1'
'*1' '*1'
92 92
9/ 9/
9/ 9/
'&&17 Q5<
'&&17 Q2))
&1
%%3$6. /) 61
㹬5<B&17 &17
Q2))B&17 &17
*1'
,179

&1
%%3$6.
,179/
3*1' 1&
+/ 35 &1
): %39+
9B'6.
'6.*1'
9 ),1
'*1'
9
'*1'
91
9
'*1'
9
3&8 3:%
&1 &1
%%3$6. %%3+'66
,179 ,179
3*1' 3*1'
1& 1& ):
+/35
36)0B9
36)0B/'
3*1'
,179/
60591 60391&
36)0B9
36)0 3*1'
36)0B/'
‫ڧ‬
&1
%39+%
1HXWUDO3&,BRXW
1& 3&, 237,21
/LYH3&,BRXW
1RQFRQWDFW 6059% 6039%&
7+B80B&6B,1
7+B80 7+B80B,1
'*1'
&RQWDFW 6059% 6039%&

7+B86B,1
7+B86 '*1' /35:=9.**3 /) 61
&1
55:=9.**5 /) 61 &=+ %%&=:+.%
&RQWDFW 6059% 6039%& $ 7+B80B,1 $ % 7+B80B,1
J. AC, Fusing
7+B/0B,1 $ 7+B80B&6B,1 $ % 7+B80B&6B,1

$ '*1' $ % '*1'
7+B/0 '*1' $ 7+B86B,1 $ % 7+B86B,1
$ '*1' $ % '*1'
$ 7+B/0B,1 $ % 7+B/0B,1
1& $ 㸫 $ 1& % '*1'
$ '*1' $ 1& % 7+B80B,1
1& $ 7+B80B,1 $ 1& 1& % '*1'
1& $ '*1' $ 1& % 91 3&8 3:%
5&=5936 &=+ % :(%(1'
% '*1'
913' % 9 1 % % :(%6 :(%0B
:(%(1' :(%(1' % :(%(1' % % 9 :(%0B &1
'*1' % '*1' % %%3+'66
9+3/*1/ % :(%6 :(%0B % +/RXWB/0
% 9 :(%0B % +/RXWB86
6059% 6039%& 1& % 9 )8&58B9 % 1& +/RXWB80
9 1& % )8&58 % 1& '*1'
:(%6 :(%6 1& % 㸫 % 1&
1& % 㸫 % 1&
5&=5936 &=+
'0 1L '0 1L /+/ 80
:+ :+ /+/ 86
1+/ 86
1+/ 80
'0 1L '0 1L 1+/ /0
%. %. /+/ 80 %. )*1'
:+ /+/ 86 3 5
:+
'0 1L '0 1L 9/39 :+ 9/59 :+
:+ :+ &1 &1
%39/ %%3$6.
/LYHB+/ PDLQ *1'
/LYHB+/ 6XE +/RXWB80
'0 1L 65$7 +/RXWB86
+/RXWB/0
5' :+
:+ /+/ 86 +/B86 :+ &1
1+/ 86 %39+%
%. /+/ 80 5' :+ 1+/ 80 :+ +/ 3:%
+/B80 1HXWUDOB0DLQ
</39 :+ </59) :+ </39 :+ </59) :+ 1& 㸫
1HXWUDOB6XE
56LGH )6LGH 1& 㸫
1HXWUDOB/RZ
:+ /+/ 86 5' :+ 1+/ /0 :+

6/59) :+ 6/39 :+
+/B/0 6/59) :+ 6/39 :+
&1
%39/
1HXWUDO+/BLQ
1& 1&
/LYH+/BLQ
(;2QO\
&1
&1 %39/
(/59 (/39 %39+%( /LYH+/BRXW
/LYH5 LQ /LYH5 LQ 1& 1&
5($&725 /LYH5 RXW 1& 1HXWUDO+/BRXW
/LYH5 RXW
$&'& 3:%
237,21 &1
%39/5 9/39 9/59 36 :+ 06:
3&8 3:% /LYHBLQ /LYH /LYH
&1 1& 1HXWUDO 36 :+
1HXWUDOB:+

%%3$6. 1HXWUDOBLQ 1HXWUDO
67$*('(6. 237,21 )*1' 9
/LYHB:+
65$7 1&
(/59 :+B&17
(;:+ 3:% 23 (;&1 &1

%%3$6. %39/ 36 5'
:+B&17 1HXWUDBRXW 1HXWUDO
9 1& 36 5'
/LYHBRXW /LYH
&1
(;&1 %39+5 :+6: &1
36 %39/ (;
%39+ /LYHB:+ /LYHB:+ /LYHBLQ
1HXWUDB:+ 1HXWUDB:+ 1HXWUDOB:+ 1& 36
:+&6 /LYHB:+ /LYHB:+ 1& /LYHB:+6: /LYHB:+6:
$& 3:% 1&
/LYHB:+ 1HXWUDOBLQ
(/39 (/59 (/39 (/59
65$7
&1 (;
%39/
/LYHBLQ /LYHBLQ
1& )*1'
(;&1 &1 &1 1HXWUDOBLQ 1HXWUDOBLQ
%39+ %39+%. %39+%.
1HXWUDB:+ 1HXWUDOB:+ 1HXWUDOB:+ 1HXWUDOB:+
:+6&1 /LYHB:+ 1& 1& 1& ,1/(7
(/39 (/59 /LYHB:+ /LYHB:+ /LYHB:+
65$7
6&1
237,21
/68 027+(5 3:%
&1 &1 %837=6 /) 61
%%&65. %0%*+67%7 /) 61 &=+596
3*1' ,& &DUG 6+,(/' 6+,(/'
'*1' *1' *1'
91 ' ' ,& &DUG
91 ' '
Q&1& 7B)$ ; 9%86 9%86
)$;B7;'B'B1 )URQW 6+,(/' 1&
)$;B7;'B'B3 *1'
9/ '
Q5(6B)$; ' 23(5$7,21 81
)$;B7;'B&6B3 9%86
)$;B7;'B&6B1
'*1' %%3$6. 86%$
)$;B5;'B'B1 3$396
)$;B5;'B'B3 6+,(/' 6+(//
*1' *1'
Q:8B )$;
)$;B5;'B&6B3 ' ' 86%
)$; 3:% )$;B5;'B&6B1 ' '
9/ 9%86 9%86
'*1' 86%㺘㺦㺖㺞3:%
Q)$; B576 B'
'*1'
Q&76 B)$; B'
91
Q576B)$;B&6 65$7
9 2 37, 2 1
Q&76B)$;B&6
K. USB, Option (Desk, Finisher)
9
91 3$/59 3$396 3$396 3$/59
91 &1 *<
'*1' %0%*+67%7 /) 61 )*1' )*1' )*1'
86% .H\ERDUG 6+,(/' 6+,(/' 6+,(/' *< 6+,(/'
3*1' *<
*1' *1' *1' *1'
' %5 .H\ERDUG3:%
' ' /% '
' ' ' '
9%86 9%86 9%86 %/ 9%86
67$*('(6. 237,21
&1
%%3$6.
9B'6.
'6.*1'
91
'*1'
'*1'
7['B'6. 67$*('(6. 237,21
5['B'6.
'75B'6.
3& 8 3: % '65B'6.
5(6B'6.
75&B'6.
&1 1& 8$57B'6.
%%31'=6
9
'*1' &1
&9B&23< %%31'=6
&38&
& 9B&2 817 9
& 9B67 $57
&386

&9B&$
&9B&/&2 3< 9
'*1'
&9B&2/2 5 &/8'
& 2,1 9 (1 '(5 &9B67$3 /(
&9B&2/2 5 &3('
&9B'83/ (; &3)'
913'
91 '6:B& 67$*('(6. 237,21
& 9B6, =(
& 9B6, =( 91
& 9B6, =( &666(7
&3)&
& 9B6, =( 9
'*1'
,11(5 ),1,6+(5 237,21 &/80
'*1'
&66
&66
&66
&66
&63'
&1 7['B/&&
(/39 (/59 %%3$6. 5['B/&&
7;'B),1 7['B),1 '75B/&&
5;'B),1 5['B),1 '65B/&&
'75B),1 '75B),1 )*1'
'65B),1 '65B),1 5(6B/&&
5(6B),1 5(6B),1 91
1& 1& 1& 75&B),1 '*1'
),1,6+(5 91 91 9B'6.
'*1' '*1' '6.*1'
1& 1& 9B),1 75&B/&&
)*1' 3*1' 1&
9
3*1'
65$7
MOTOR DRIVER PWB
CN G PHR-6R PHR-6 SPUM
SPUMA/ 1 6 SPUMA/
SPUMA 3 4 SPUMA
SPUMB 4 3 SPUMB
L. RSPF
SCN-CNT PWB SPUMB/ 6 1 SPUMB/

B6B-PH-K-R
CN15 PHR-12 PHDR-34VS-1 CN A CN F PHR-6 PHR-6R SPFM

GND 1 34 GND2 SPFMA/ 1 6 SPFMA/
GND 2 33 GND2 +24VPD_SPFM 2 5 +24VPD_SPFM
3.3V 3 (NC) 8 +3.3V SPFMA 3 4 SPFMA
3.3V 4 7 +5V SPFMB 4 3 SPFMB
5V 5 6 +24VPD +24VPD_SPFM 5 2 +24VPD_SPFM
12V 6 (NC) 5 +24VPD SPFMB/ 6 1 SPFMB/
5VB 7 2 GND2 B6B-PH-K-S
24VPD 8 1 GND2
5VO 9 3 SPPD1
24VPD 10 4 SPPD2 179228-3
GND 11 9 SPFMA CN B PHR-12 SPED
GND 12 10 SPFMA/ SPED 1 1 SPED
B12B-PHD-SS 11 SPFMB GND2 2 2 GND2 GP1S73P2
12 SPFMB/ +5V SPED 3 3 +5V SPED
13 SPFMO1 +5VPD 4
14 SPRMA SPPD1 5
15 SPRMA/ GND2 6 179228-3(BLACK)
16 SPRMB +5VPD 7 SPPD1
17 SPRMB/ SPPD5 8 1 +5VPD
18 SPRMO1 GND2 9 2 SPPD1 GP1A73
19 SPRS +24VPD SCOV 10 3 GND2
CN14 PHDR-28VS-1 20 STMPS GND2 11
SPPD1 1 21 SRRC +24V SCOV SW 12
SPPD2 2 22 SPFC B12B-PH-K-S 179228-3(BLACK)
SPFMA 3 23 SPWS SPPD2
SPFMA/ 4 24 SELA 1 +5VPD
SPFMB 5 25 SELB 2 SPPD5 GP1A73
SPFMB/ 6 26 SELC 3 GND2
SPFMO1 7 27 SSELO
SPMA 8 28 -
SPMA/ 9 29 -
SPMB 10 30 SPPD3 PS-187/SPS-01T-187
SPMB/ 11 31 SPPD4 SCOV
SPMO1 12 32 +5VPD 2 +24VPD SCOV Cover switch
SPRS 13 B34-PHDSS-B 1 SCOV SW
STMPS 14
SRRC 15
SPFC 16
SPWS 17 SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
SELA_ 18
SELB_ 19
SELC_ 20 CN E PHR-5
SSELO 21 (+24VPD SPFC) 1 SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
SPPD4 22 (SPFC/) 2
SPFMO2 23 (NC) +24VPD SPRS 3
SPPD3 24 SPRS/ 4
SPPD5 25 (NC) CN I N.C. 5
+5VPD 26 4 SPED/ B5B-PH-K-S SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N
SPED 27 3 N.C(SOCD/) 1 +24VPD SPRS 1 TDS-10A
SOCD 28 2 +5VO 2 SPRS/ 2 SPRS
B28-PHDSS-B 1 +5VB
PHR-4 B4B-PH-K-S
CN C PHR-8 SMP-02V-BC / SMR-02V-B

+24VPD SRRC 1 1 +24VPD SRRC 1 HS-2.4-020
SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3 SRRC/ 2 2 SRRC/ 2 SRRC
+5VPD 3
SPPD3 4
GND2 5
SOCD 6 179228-3(BLACK)
GND2 7 SMP-06V-NC / SMR-06V-N SPPD3
+5V SOCD 8 1 +5VPD 1 1 +5VPD
B8B-PH-K-S 2 SPPD3 2 2 SPPD3 GP1A73
3 GND2 3 3 GND2
4 SOCD 4
5 GND2 5
6 +5V SOCD 6 179228-3
SOCD

1 SOCD
2 GND2 GP1S73P2
SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4 3 +5V SOCD
CN D PHDR-10VS-2
(+5VPD) 1
+5VPD 2 SRA-21T-4
N.C. 3
SPPD4 4
(GND2) 5 SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
GND2 6 179228-3(BLACK)
GND2 7 SPPD4
STMPU 8 1 +5VPD
STMPS/ 9 2 SPPD4 GP1A73
+24VPD STMPS 10 3 GND2
B10B-PHDSS-B
179228-4 179228-4
1 GND2 4 (OPTION)
2 STMPU 3 SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
3 STMPS/ 2
4 +24VPD STMPS 1
STMPS
292254-4
179228-3
CN H PHR-10 SPLS
+5V_SPLS1 1 3 +5VPD SPLS1
SPLS1 2 1 SPLS1 GP1S73P2
GND2 3 2 GND2
GND2 4
SPLS2 5
+5V_SPLS2 6 179228-3
AVCC 7 SPLS2
SPWS 8 2 GND2
GND2 9 1 SPLS2 GP1S73P2
N.C. 10 3 +5VPD SPLS2
B10B-PH-K-S
SMP-03V-NC / SMR-03V-N SPWS

1 AVCC 1 BL AVCC
2 SPWS 2 BR SPWS
3 GND2 3 GY GND2
CN2 CN18
1 SP- CN1 1 GND
SPEAKER
2 SP+ DGND 30 2 GND
M. FAX (Option)
S02B-PASK-2(LF)(SN) +3.3V 29 3 +3.3V_F

+3.3V 28 4 +3.3V_F
(BOARD TO CNCT_FAX- 26 5 nCNCT_FAX
BOARD) FAX_RXD(D)- 27 6 FAXD_TXD_N
MJ1 CN1 CN3 FAX_RXD(D)+ 25 7 FAXD_TXD_P
1 TEL1 +24V 1 1 +24V +5V 24 8 +5V_(off)
TO LINE
2 L1 AG 2 2 PGND RES_FAX- 22 9 nRES_FAX
3 L2 +24V 3 3 +24V FAX_RXD(CS)+ 23 10 FAXCS_TXD_P
4 TEL2 AG 4 4 PGND FAX_RXD(CS)- 21 11 FAXCS_TXD_N
MJ-64J-RD315(LF) 150VON 5 5 150VON DGND 20 12 GND
CION 6 6 CION FAX_TXD(D)- 19 13 FAXD_RXD_N
MFPC
MSGMUTE 7 7 MSGMUTE FAX_TXD(D)+ 17 14 FAXD_RXD_P PWB
HS1- 8 8 HS1- FAX_WUP- 18 15 nFAX_WUP
MJ2 HS2- 9 9 HS2- FAX_TXD(CS)+ 15 16 FAXCS_RXD_P
1 TEL1 CI- 10 10 CI- FAX_TXD(CS)- 13 17 FAXCS_RXD_N
TO EX TEL
2 TEL2 EXHS- 11 11 EXHS- +5V 16 18 +5V_(off)
MJ-62J-RD315(LF) SON1 12 12 SON1 DGND 14 19 GND
SON2 13 13 SON2 FAX_CTS(D)- 11 20 nFAXD_RTS
ECON 14 14 ECON DGND 12 21 GND
MRON 15 15 MRON FAX_RTS(D)- 9 22 nFAXD_CTS
TELID 16 16 TELID FLVPP 10 23 FLVPP
CI2- 17 17 CI2- FAX_CTS(CS)- 7 24 nFAXCS_RTS
NC 18 18 NC +5VS 8 25 +5V_A
TELID2 19 19 TELID2 FAX_RTS(CS)- 5 26 nFAXCS_CTS
NC 20 20 NC +24V 6 27 +24V
DG 21 21 MDMGND +3.3V 4 28 +3.3V_F
+3.3V 22 22 MDM3.3V +3.3V 3 29 +3.3V_F
DG 23 23 MDMGND DGND 2 30 GND
+5VS 24 24 +5VS PG 1 31 GND
DG 25 25 MDMGND BM30B-SHLDS-G-TFT(LF)(SN) B31B-CSRK(LF)(SN)
SI3_RES- 26 26 SI3_RES-

SPK 27 27 SPK
MDM_ATXD 28 28 ATXD
MDM_ARXD 29 29 ARXD
MDM_ABITCLK 30 30 ABITCLK
MDM_ASPCLK- 31 31 ASPCLK
TEL LIU PWB RGDT- 32 32 RGDT-
FAX MAIN PWB
MDM_CLK 33 33 AFE_CLK
AFERES- 34 34 AFE_RES-
BBITCLK 35 35 BBITCLK
BSPCLK 36 36 BSPCLK
BRXD 37 37 BTXD
BTXD 38 38 BRXD
HDMUTE- 39 39 HDMUTE-
RHS- 40 40 RHS-
TX25-40P-12ST-H1E TX24-40R-10ST-H1E
4. Signal list
Connector level Connector Pin PWB

Signal name Name [Type] Function/Operation NOTE
L H No. No. name
1TUD_CL Transfer belt separation CL Detects the transfer belt – – CN18 1 PCU
detection separation CL.
1TUD_K Transfer belt separation BK Detects the transfer belt – – CN18 2 PCU
detection separation BK.
1TURC_1 Primary transfer separation Controls the primary transfer Separation – CN16 7 PCU
clutch separation mode. select
[Electromagnetic clutch]
1TURC_2 Primary transfer separation Controls the primary transfer Separation – CN16 8 PCU
clutch [Electromagnetic clutch] separation mode. select
2TCCRU Secondary transfer unit initial Detects the initial state of the – – CN10 9 PCU
detection secondary transfer unit.
2TUD Secondary transfer position Detects the position of the Separate Contact CN10 5 PCU
detection secondary transfer.
2TURC Secondary transfer separation Controls the secondary Separation – CN10 7 PCU
clutch [Electromagnetic clutch] transfer separation mode. select
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Controls the ADU gate ON OFF CN10 18 PCU
solenoid.
ADUM ADU motor – – CN11 23, 25, PCU
26
ADUM_CNT ADU motor current select ADU motor lower current Current Current CN11 24 PCU
select Large Small
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Detects paper pass in the ADU Pass – CN10 14 PCU
[Transmission type] upper stream section.
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 ADU midstream paper pass Pass – CN10 11 PCU
[Transmission type] detection
CCFT LCD backlight LCD backlight ON OFF CN4 21 SCNcnt
[CCFT cool cathode ray tube]
CL_ON Scanner lamp Radiates light onto a ON OFF CN8 3 SCNcnt
document for the CCD to scan
the document image.
CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection Detects the tray 1 upper limit. – Upper limit CN9 23 PCU
(Lift HP detection)
[Transmission type]
CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit detection Detects the tray 2 upper limit. – Upper limit CN8 11 PCU
(Lift HP detection)
[Transmission type]
CLUM1 Paper tray lift-up motor Drives the paper tray lift plate. Stop Drive CN9 20 PCU
(Paper feed tray 1)
[DC brush motor]
CLUM2 Paper tray lift-up motor Drives the paper tray lift plate. Stop Drive CN8 8 PCU
(Paper feed tray 2)
[DC brush motor]
CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detection Detects paper empty in the YES NO CN9 25 PCU
[Transmission type] tray 1.
CPED2 Tray 2 paper empty detection Detects paper empty in the YES NO CN8 13 PCU
[Transmission type] tray 2.
CPFC1 Tray vertical transport clutch 1 Controls ON/OFF of the paper ON OFF CN11 17 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch] transport roller in the paper
feed tray section.
CPFC2 Tray vertical transport clutch 2 Controls ON/OFF of the paper ON OFF CN8 2 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch] transport roller in the paper
feed tray section.
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection Detects paper pass in the tray Pass – CN9 27 PCU
(Paper entry detection) 1.
[Transmission type]
CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection Detects paper pass in the tray Pass – CN8 15 PCU
(Paper entry detection) 2.
[Transmission type]
CPFM_D Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section. Drive Stop CN12 24 PCU
[Brushless motor]
CPFM_LD Paper feed motor lock Detects the paper feed motor – Lock CN12 28 PCU
detection lock. detection
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed Controls ON/OFF of the roller ON OFF CN11 18 PCU
tray 1) [Electromagnetic clutch] in the paper feed tray section.
CPUC2 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed Controls ON/OFF of the roller ON OFF CN8 1 PCU
tray 2) [Electromagnetic clutch] in the paper feed tray section.
CPUS1 Paper feed pickup solenoid Controls the paper pickup ON OFF CN9 17 PCU
(Paper feed tray 2) [Solenoid] solenoid.
CPUS2 Paper feed pickup solenoid Controls the paper pickup ON OFF CN8 5 PCU
(Paper feed tray 2) [Solenoid] solenoid.

L H No. No. name
CSPD1 Tray 1 remaining paper Detects the remaining paper Remaining – CN9 32 PCU Detects
quantity detection quantity in the tray 1. quantity during lifting
up.
CSPD2 Tray 2 remaining paper Detects the remaining paper Remaining – CN8 20 PCU Detects
quantity detection quantity in the tray 2. quantity during lifting
up.
CSS11 Tray 1 detection Detects the tray 1. YES NO CN9 24 PCU
CSS21 Tray 2 detection Detects the tray 2. YES NO CN8 12 PCU
CSS2SET Cassette 2 unit detection Detects the cassette 2 unit. YES NO CN8 22 PCU
DHPD_CL CL phase detection Detects the CL phase. Reference – CN16 2 PCU
DHPD_K BK phase detection Detects the BK phase. Reference – CN16 1 PCU
DL_BK Discharge lamp BK [LED] Discharges electric charges on OFF ON CN14 8 PCU
the OPC drum.
DL_C Discharge lamp C [LED] Discharges electric charges on OFF ON CN14 4 PCU
the OPC drum.
DL_M Discharge lamp M [LED] Discharges electric charges on OFF ON CN14 7 PCU
the OPC drum.
DL_Y Discharge lamp Y [LED] Discharges electric charges on OFF ON CN14 3 PCU
the OPC drum.
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close Detects ADU cover open/ Open Close CN10 12 PCU
detection [Transmission type] close.
DSW_C1 Tray 1 transport cover open/ Detects tray 1 transport cover Open Close CN9 31 PCU
close detection open/close.
DSW_C2 Tray 2 transport cover open/ Detects tray 2 transport cover Open Close CN8 19 PCU
close detection open/close.
DSW_F Front door open/close switch Detects open/close of the front Open Close CN11 12 PCU
[Micro switch] door, and fusing, motor, LSU
laser power line.
DSW_R Right door open/close switch Detects open/close of the right Open Close CN11 10 PCU
[Micro switch] door unit, and fusing, motor,
LSU laser power line.
DVM_CL_D Development drive motor (CL) Drives the development Drive Stop CN16 14 PCU
[Brushless motor] section, the color OPC drum,
and the transfer section.
DVM_CL_LD Development drive motor (CL) Detects the development drive – Lock CN16 16 PCU
lock detection motor (CL) lock. detection
DVM_K_D Development drive motor (K) Drives the development Drive Stop CN16 13 PCU
[Brushless motor] section, the black OPC drum,
and the transfer section.
DVM_K_LD Development drive motor (K) Detects the development drive – Lock CN16 15 PCU
lock detection motor (K) lock. detection
FUFM_LD Fusing fan motor lock Detects the fusing fan motor – Lock CN12 25 PCU
FUFM_V Fusing fan motor Cools the motor related to the OFF ON CN12 19 PCU
fusing and the paper exit
sections.
FUM_D Fusing drive motor Drives the fusing unit. Drive Stop CN13 17 PCU
[Brushless motor]
FUM_LD Fusing drive motor lock Detects the fusing drive motor – Lock CN13 19 PCU
HL_LM_out Lower heater lamp Turns ON/OFF the lower OFF ON CN13 13 PCU
heater lamp.
HL_PR Heater lamp power relay Heater lamp power line ON/ OFF ON CN19 26 PCU
OFF (Open) (Close)
HL_UM_out Heater lamp main Turns ON/OFF the heater OFF ON CN13 9 PCU
lamp main.
HL_US_out Heater lamp sub Turns ON/OFF the heater OFF ON CN13 11 PCU
lamp sub.
HLPCD Fusing pressure detection Detects a change in the fusing Pressure Pressure CN13 3 PCU
sensor [Transmission sensor] pressure. release applying
HPOS Shifter home position sensor Detects the shifter home – Home CN13 22 PCU
(SHPOS) position. position
HUD_M Humidity detection Detects the humidity. – – CN10 4 PCU Analog
detection
INT_CNT Interlock control ON/OFF control of ON OFF CN11 14 PCU
INT24V1,V2
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the scanner home – Home CN10 1 SCNcnt
[Transmission type] position.
MIM_* Scanner motor Scanner (reading) section – – CN7 1, 2, 3, SCNcnt
[Stepping motor] 4
MPED Manual feed paper empty Detects paper empty in the YES NO CN10 1 PCU
detection [Transmission type] manual paper feed tray.

L H No. No. name
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid (Manual Paper pickup solenoid Pickup – CN10 3 PCU
paper feed) (Manual paper feed)
[Electromagnetic solenoid] [Electromagnetic solenoid]
MPLD Manual feed paper length Detects the paper length in the – Detection CN10 10 PCU
detector manual paper feed tray.
MPWS Manual feed tray paper width Detects the paper width in the – – CN10 8 PCU
sensor manual feed tray.
OCSW Light emitting unit open/close Detects the light emitting unit Close Open CN17 3 SCNcnt
detector open/close.
OSM Shifter motor [Stepping motor] Offsets the paper. – – CN12 7, 8, 9, PCU Drives with
10 the 4-phase
signal.
PFC_HPFC PS front clutch Controls the PS front clutch. ON OFF CN11 22 PCU
PFM Transport motor – – CN11 30, 32, PCU
34
PFM_CNT Transport motor current select Selects the transport motor Current Current CN11 28 PCU
current. Large Small
POD1 Fusing rear detection Detects the paper exit from Pass – CN13 4 PCU
[Transmission type] fusing.
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the discharged paper. Pass – CN13 10 PCU
[Transmission type]
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Detects paper exit to the right Pass – CN10 16 PCU
tray.
POFM_CNT Paper exit cooling fan motor Controls the speed of the – – CN12 13, 14 PCU Pulse (Duty)
speed control paper exit cooling fan motor. drive
POFM_LD1 POFM lock detection Detects the POFM lock. – Lock CN12 17 PCU
detection
POFM_LD2 POFM lock detection Detects the POFM lock. – Lock CN12 18 PCU
detection
POFM_V Paper exit cooling fan motor Cools the fusing unit. Stop Drive CN12 11,12 PCU
POM Paper exit drive motor Drives the paper exit roller. – – CN11 5, 7, 9, PCU
11
POM_CNT Paper exit drive motor current Selects the paper exit drive Current Current CN11 13 PCU
select motor current. Large Small
PPD1 Registration front detection Detects paper in front of the Pass – CN9 14 PCU
[Transmission type] registration roller.
PPD2 Registration detection Detects paper at the rear of Pass – CN9 16 PCU
the registration roller.
PRM Fusing pressure release motor Changes the fusing voltage. – – CN12 1, 2, 3, PCU Drives with
[Stepping motor] 4 the 4-phase
signal.
PROFM1_CNT Process fan motor 2 speed Controls the speed of the – – CN19 29 PCU
control process fan motor.
PROFM1_LD Process fan motor 2 lock Process fan motor lock – Lock CN19 22 PCU
detection detection detection
PROFM1_V Process fan motor 2 Cools the process. OFF ON CN19 33 PCU
PROFM2_CNT Process fan motor 2 speed Controls the speed of the – – CN9 4 PCU Pulse (Duty)
control process fan motor 2. drive
PROFM2_LD Process fan motor 2 lock Detects process fan motor 2 – Lock CN9 8 PCU
PROFM2_V Process fan motor 2 Cools the process. OFF ON CN9 2 PCU
PRTPD Right paper exit tray paper Detects paper empty in the NO YES CN10 15 PCU
empty detection right paper exit tray.
PSFM_LD Power cooling fan motor lock Detects the power cooling fan – Lock CN19 30 PCU
detection motor lock. detection
PSFM_V Power cooling fan motor Cools the power unit. Stop Drive CN19 28 PCU
REGS_F Registration sensor (Front) Registration shift detection – – CN17 A-2 PCU Analog
[Reflection type] detection
REGS_F_LED Registration sensor LED Registration sensor LED light – – CN17 A-3 PCU Analog
(Front) [LED] emitting output
REGS_R Registration sensor (Rear) Registration shift detection – – CN17 A-6 PCU Analog
[Reflection type] detection
REGS_R_LED Registration sensor LED Registration sensor LED light – – CN17 A-7 PCU Analog
(Rear) [LED] emitting output
RRM Registration motor – – CN11 31, 33 PCU
RRM_CNT Registration motor current Selects the registration motor Current Current CN11 27 PCU
select current. Large Small
SOCD SPF open/close sensor Detects open/close of the SPF. Close – CN14 28 SCNcnt
SPED Document empty sensor Detects document empty. Detection – CN14 27 SCNcnt
SPFM* SPF transport motor Drives the SPF transport – – CN14 3, 4, 5, SCNcnt
motor. 6, 7
SPM* SPF paper feed motor Drives the SPF paper feed – – CN14 8, 9, SCNcnt
motor. 10, 11,
12

L H No. No. name
SPPD1 SPF transport sensor 1 Detects paper pass. Detection – CN14 1 SCNcnt
SPRS Pressure release solenoid Controls the pressure release OFF ON CN14 13 SCNcnt
solenoid.
SPWS Document width sensor Detects document width. – – CN14 17 SCNcnt
SRRC PS clutch Controls the PS clutch. OFF ON CN14 15 SCNcnt
STMPS Stamp solenoid Controls the stamp solenoid. – Stamp CN14 14 SCNcnt
TCS_C Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (C) – – CN15 B-7 PCU Analog
[Magnetic sensor] detection
TCS_K Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (K) – – CN15 B-16 PCU Analog
TCS_M Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (M) – – CN15 A-7 PCU Analog
TCS_Y Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (Y) – – CN15 A-16 PCU Analog
TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects the face-down paper Full – CN13 16 PCU
[Transmission type] exit tray full.
TFD3 Right tray paper exit full Detects paper exit full in the Full – CN10 13 PCU
detection right tray.
TH_LM_IN Lower thermistor Detects the temperature. – – CN17 B-11 PCU Analog
detection
TH_M Temperature detection Detects the temperature. – – CN10 6 PCU Analog
detection
TH_UM_CS_ Main thermistor Detects the temperature. – – CN17 B-7 PCU Analog
IN detection
TH_UM_IN Main thermistor Detects the temperature. – – CN17 B-6 PCU Analog
detection
TH_US_IN Sub thermistor Detects the temperature. – – CN17 B-9 PCU Analog
detection
TH1_LSU LSU unit thermistor Detects the temperature. – – CN2 A-2 PCU Analog
detection
TNFD Waste toner full detection Detects waste toner full. Empty Full CN9 10 PCU
switch [Mechanical switch]
TNM_C Toner motor C [Stepping Transports toner from the – – CN16 17, 18, PCU Drives with
motor] toner cartridge to the 19, 20 the 4-phase
developing unit. signal.
TNM_K Toner motor K [Stepping motor] Transports toner from the – – CN16 25, 26, PCU Drives with
toner cartridge to the 27, 28 the 4-phase
TNM_M Toner motor M Transports toner from the – – CN19 17, 19, PCU Drives with
[Stepping motor] toner cartridge to the 25, 27 the 4-phase
TNM_Y Toner motor Y [Stepping motor] Transports toner from the – – CN19 5, 7, PCU Drives with
toner cartridge to the 13, 15 the 4-phase
WEBEND Web end detection Detects the fusing web end. – End CN17 B-2 PCU
WEBS Web drive solenoid Drives the web. ON OFF CN17 B-4 PCU

MX-3115N
[15] TOOL LIST 6HUYLFH0DQXDO
Name Part code Note

Color copy test chart UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11
SIT chart UKOG-0280FCZZ/UKOG-0280FCZ1
Gray test chart UKOG-0162FCZZ
Kynar powder UKOG-0123FCZZ For transfer belt
Grease (HANARL FL-955R) UKOG-0299FCZZ
Conduction grease (FLOIL GE-676) UKOG-0012QSZZ Other shaft
Grease (FLOIL G-313S) UKOG-0307FCZZ
Grease (JFE552) UKOG-0235FCZZ
Stearic acid powder UKOG-0312FCZZ OPC drum
Grease (FLOIL GP-501MR) UKOG-0013QSZZ RSPF paper feed roller shaft
Grease (MOLYKOTE X5-6020) UKOG-0158FCZZ
Grease (MOLYKOTE BR-2 Plus) UKOG-0097FCZZ
MX-3115N TOOL LIST 15 – 1

LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWB’s of this model employs lead-free solder. The “LF” marks indicated on the PWB’s and the Service Manual mean “Lead-Free” solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
Example:
<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>
Solder composition Solder composition Solder composition code

code (Refer to the Sn-Ag-Cu a
Lead-Free table at the right.)
Sn-Ag-Bi
b
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
Sn-Zn-Bi z
5mm
a Sn-In-Ag-Bi
Sn-Cu-Ni
Sn-Ag-Sb
i
n
s
Bi-Sn-Ag-P p
Bi-Sn-Ag
(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting-point of lead-free solder thread is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the
exclusive-use soldering iron is recommended.
(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK

Since the melting-point of lead-freeCOPYRIGHT © XXXX
solder is about 220°C, which BYSHARP
is about CORPORATION
40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering
capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land
separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature ALLofRIGHTS
components. RESERVED.
Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when
completion of soldering is confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron
tip after completion of soldering work. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of the publisher.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
(Danish) ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English) Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.
(Finnish) VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French) ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish) VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German) Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA)
“BATTERY DISPOSAL”
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.
“TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGÉES”

CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MÉMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANÈSE)
QUI DOIT ÊTRE TRAITÉE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MÉTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
#/092)'(4 © "9 3(!20 #/20/2!4)/.
!LL RIGHTS RESERVED
0RODUCED IN *APAN FOR ELECTRONIC $ISTRIBUTION
.O PART OF THIS PUBLICATION MAY BE REPRODUCED
STORED IN A RETRIEVAL SYSTEM OR TRANSMITTED
IN ANY FORM OR BY ANY MEANS
ELECTRONIC MECHANICAL PHOTOCOPYING RECORDING OR OTHERWISE
WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THE PUBLISHER
4RADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
v -ICROSOFT¤ 7INDOWS¤ 7INDOWS¤ 7INDOWS¤ -E 7INDOWS .4¤
7INDOWS¤ 7INDOWS¤ 80 7INDOWS¤ 6ISTA 7INDOWS¤
7INDOWS¤ 3ERVER 7INDOWS¤ 3ERVER AND )NTERNET %XPLORER¤
ARE REGISTERED TRADEMARKS OR TRADEMARKS OF -ICROSOFT #ORPORATION IN THE 53!
AND OTHER COUNTRIES
v 0OST3CRIPT IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF !DOBE 3YSTEMS )NCORPORATED
v -ACINTOSH -AC /3 !PPLE4ALK %THER4ALK ,ASER 7RITER AND 3AFARI ARE REGISTERED
TRADEMARKS OR TRADEMARKS OF !PPLE #OMPUTER )NC
v )"- 0#!4 AND 0OWER 0# ARE TRADEMARKS OF )NTERNATIONAL "USINESS -ACHINES
#ORPORATION
v !CROBAT¤ 2EADER #OPYRIGHT¤ !DOBE 3YSTEMS )NCORPORATED !LL RIGHTS
RESERVED !DOBE THE !DOBE LOGO !CROBAT AND THE !CROBAT LOGO ARE TRADEMARKS OF
!DOBE 3YSTEMS )NCORPORATED
v 0#, IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF THE (EWLETT 0ACKARD #OMPANY
v 3HARPDESK IS A TRADEMARK OF 3HARP #ORPORATION
v !LL OTHER TRADEMARKS AND COPYRIGHTS ARE THE PROPERTY OF THEIR RESPECTIVE OWNERS
SHARP CORPORATION
Business Solutions CS Promotion Center II
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2012 September Produced in Japan for electronic Distribution

Sharp MX-2615N-3115N SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sharp MX-2615N-3115N SM

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sharp MX-2615N-3115N SM

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TopPage

DIGITAL FULL COLOR

NOTE FOR SERVICING

This document has been published to be used

NOTE FOR SERVICING [8] FIRMWARE UPDATE

1. Symbols used for notes and Symbol Meaning

NOTE Indicates a note.

REFER Indicates a reference

2. Symbols used in the work

Adjustment Indicates an adjustment.

NO Be careful to keep away

Cleaning Indicates clean with a

NO DISASSEMLE Do not disassemble.

Cleaning Indicates that cleaning is Screw lock Indicates that a screw is

Oil Indicates that oil is Unlock

Apply powder. Indicates that setting Turn OFF the

Check Indicates that a check

Remove a clamp. 4. Symbols used for additional

NOTE FOR SERVICING •6HUYLFH0DQXDO

2. Warning for servicing

MX-3115N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

• Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

• Place of much dust

• Place near a wall

• Unstable or irregular surface

MX-3115N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

7. Screw tightening torque

Especially for the screw fixing positions where there is an electrode

MX-3115N NOTE FOR SERVICING - iii

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE 6HUYLFH0DQXDO

0;'( 0;'( 0;'(

0;3. 0;38; 0;3) 0;); $568 0;):;

0;)58 0;86; 0;86; 0;86 0;86 0;86$

0;$0; 0;$0; 0;$0; 0;81$ 0;81$ 0;81$

0;81$ 0;81+$ 0;.%1 0;(% $569

MX-3115N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1

STD: Standard equipment

MX-3115N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 2

Void area Lead edge: 4mm or less

Tray Tray 1 Manual paper feed tray

c. Size of paper which can be fed

(8) Paper exit section

Exit location Center Right side (option)

b. Size of paper which can be discharged

Main unit center tray Right exit

(10) Controller board *1: Result may change depending on conditions.

(11) Memory/Hard disk

SD For Image process For Printing *1

*1: Memory capacity for printer controller

Memory area Boot/Program area

(2) PDL emulation/Font

PDL (Command) Installed font Option font

Standard 1 line * LDAP: Lightweight Directory Access protocol

Maximum rated power 100 V 200 V

[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS 6HUYLFH0DQXDO

1. Supply system table

Drum OPC drum x1 840K MX-36NR-SA 10 Drum unit

2. Maintenance parts list

MX-3115N CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 1

0;'( 0;'( 0;'(

0;3. 0;38; 0;3) 0;); $568 0;):;

0;)58 0;86; 0;86; 0;86 0;86 0;86$

0;$0; 0;$0; 0;$0; 0;81$ 0;81$ 0;81$

0;81$ 0;81+$ 0;.%1 0;(% $569

(0/3 3(0/3 !00$

$7'(9($'-B0B. If [EE-EU], [EE-EL], or [EE-EC] is displayed, setting of the ref-

$7'(9($'-B0B. 7) Shake the toner cartridge horizontally several times.